sanatana goswami hari bhakti vilasa full

Sri Hari-bhakti-vilasa

First Vilasa

Text 1

atha maìgaläcaraëam

caitanyadevaà bhagavantaà äçraye çré-vaiñëavänäà pramude 'ïjasä likhanävaçyakaà karma vicärya sädhubhiù särdhaà samähåtya samasta-çästrataù

atha—now; maìgaläcaraëam—invoking auspiciousness; caitanyadevam—Lord Caitanyadeva; bhagavantam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; äçraye—I take shelter; çré-vaiñëavänäm—of the devotees; pramude—for the pleasure; aïjasä—properly; likhan—writiìg; ävaçyakam—compulsory; karma—work; vicärya—consideriìg; sädhubhiù—the devotees; särdham—with; samähåtya—collectiìg; samasta—from all; çästrataù—the çcriptures.

Invoking Auspiciousness

As, reflecting on what activities must be performed, and with the help of the devotees collecting many quotes from all the scriptures, I write this book for the devotees' pleasure, I take shelter of Lord Caitanyadeva

Commentary by Çréla Sanätana Gosvämé

brahmädi-çakti-pradaà éçvaraà taà dätuà sva-bhaktià kåpayävatérëamcaitanyadevaà çaraëaà präpadye yasya prasädät sva-vaçe 'rtha-siddhiù

I take shelter of Lord Caitanyadeva, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who empowers Brahmä and the demigods, who descended to this world to give His own devotional service, and whose mercy allows His devotees to conquer Him and bring Him under their control.

likhyate bhagavad-bhakti- viläsasya yathä-matiöékä dig-darçiné näma tad-ekäàçärtha-bodhiné

This commentary, which bears the name Dig-darçiné öékä (A Commentary That Shows the Direction), and which explains a small portion of the Hari-bhakti-viläsa, has been written as far as I am able.

As I begin the difficult task of writing this book, in order to attain a good result I first take shelter of my parama-guru, my worshipable Deity, Lord Caitanya. The name Caitanya means the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is the form of pure knowledge (cit), who is worshiped by all the universes, and who among all Deities has the most perfect transcendental knowledge. Or, another meaning of the name Caitanya is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who stays in everyone's heart (citta). Or, another meaning of the name Caitanya is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who gives life (cetanä) to all living entities. I take shelter of Him, Lord Caitanya, the master of my life. Why do I write this book? I write to describe the activities that should be performed by the saintly devotees of Lord Viñëu. Why else do I write? I write to please them. Someone may ask: How can a fallen person like you be successful in such a task? I reply: I shall be successful because I

take shelter of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who has all powers and opulences, who has a great host of virtues, beginning with His great mercy, and who Çrémad-Bhägavatam 1.3.28 reveals is Lord Kåñëa. In this way three parts of this verse are explained. By taking shelter of Lord Caitanya Mahäprabhu I will be successful in this task. That is the meaning here. Furthermore, it is by His power, by His order, and by His glory that I am engaged in this task. I do not write by my own wish. I do not write to glorify myself. In my opinion the perfect name of the Supreme Personality of Godhead is Çré Caitanya Mahäprabhu. By taking shelter of His mercy this book is not at all difficult to write. Indeed, everything is done very easily. That is the meaning. Here someone may object: All these things have already been described in the Vedas, Småti, Puräëas, Agamas, and other scriptures. Why should you write something more? To this I reply: I will gather quotes from all the scriptures and put each quote in its appropriate place. That is how I will write this book.

Text 2

bhakter viläsäàç cinute prabodhä- nandasya çiñyo bhagavat-priyasyagopäla-bhaööo raghunätha-däsaà santoñayan rüpa-sanätanau ca

bhakteù—of devotional service; viläsän—the pastimes; cinute—gathers; prabodhänandasya—of Prabodhänanda Sarasvaté; çiñyaù—the disciple; bhagavat—to the Lord; priyasya—dear; gopäla-bhaööaù—Gopäla Bhaööa Gosvämé; raghunätha-däsam—Raghunätha däsa Gosvämé; santoñayan—pleasing; rüpa—Rüpa Gosvämé; sanätanau—Sanätana Gosvämé; ca—and.

Çréla Gopäla Bhaööa Gosvämé, who pleased Çréla Rüpa Gosvämé, Çréla Sanätana Gosvämé, and Çréla Raghunätha däsa Gosvämé, and who was a disciple of Lord Caitanya's dear devotee, Çréla Prabodhänanda Sarasvaté, first collected these pastimes of devotional service.


The pastimes of devotional service are this book, Çré Hari-bhakti-viläsa.

Text 3

mathurä-nätha-pädäbja- prema-bhakti-viläsataùjätaà bhakti-viläsäkhyaà tad-bhaktäù çélayantv imam

mathurä—of Mathurä; nätha—of the master; pädäbja—for the lotus feet; prema—love; bhakti—and devotion; viläsataù—from the pastimes; jätam—born; bhakti-viläsäkhyam—named Bhakti-viläsa; tad-bhaktäù—His devotees; çélayantv—may study; imam—this.

May the devotees of the Lord carefully study this Hari-bhakti-viläsa, which has come from a person who enjoys splendid pastimes of love and devotion for the lotus feet of Mathurä's master.


The compound word mathurä-nätha-pädäbja-prema-bhakti-viläsataù may mean either "the book Hari-bhakti-viläsa has come from the playful happiness of Çréla Gopäla Bhaööa Gosvämé, who is filled with love and devotion for Mathurä's master," or "the book Hari-bhakti-viläsa has come from Çréla Gopäla Bhaööa Gosvämé, who who enjoys splendid pastimes of love and devotion for the lotus feet of Mathurä's master." The devotees here are like bumblebees at the lotus feet of Mathurä's master. If the alternate reading "çobhayantu" is accepted, then the text reads, "the devotees of the Lord are glorious because they are faultless and because they always hear and chant the glories of the Lord." If the reading alaìkurvantu is accepted, then the text reads, “the devotees of the Lord are decorated with all virtues, beginning with humbleness."

Text 4

jéyäsur ätyantika-bhakti-niñöhaù çré-vaiñëavä mäthura-maëòale 'trakäçéçvaraù kåñëa-vane cakastu çré-kåñëa-däsaç ca sa-lokanäthaù

jéyäsuù—all glories; ätyantika-bhakti-niñöhaù—to they who have great faith and devotion; çré-vaiñëavä—the devotees of Lord Viñëu; mäthura—of Mathurä; maëòale—in the circle; atra—here; käçéçvaraù—Käçéçvara; kåñëa-vane—in Lord Kåñëa's forest; cakastu—manifest; çré-kåñëa-däsaù—Kåñëa däsa; ca—and; sa-lokanäthaù—with Lokanätha.

All glories to the great devotees here in Lord Kåñëa's forest within Mäthura-maëòala! May Käçéçvara, Kåñëadäsa, and Lokanätha appear before me.


Tasting the nectar of devotional service to the lotus feet of Mathurä's master, the the devotees happily live in the land of Mathurä. In Çré Gopäla-täpani‘ Upaniñad, Våndävana is called “the forest of Lord Kåñëa". In that forest the devotees happily enjoy pastimes of hearing and chanting Lord Kåñëa's glories. The word sa-lokanäthaù (with Lokanätha) indicates the close friendship between Kåñëadäsa Kaviräja and Lokanätha Gosvämé. It was in the company of the devotees mentioned here that this book was written.

Text 5

tatra lekhya-pratijïä

ädau sa-käraëaà lekhyaà çré-gurväçrayaëaà tataùguruù çiñyaù parékñädir bhagavän manavo 'sya ca manträdikäré siddhy-ädi- çodhanaà mantra-saàskriyä

tatra—there; lekhya-pratijïä—description of what will bewritten; ädau—in the begtinning; sa-käraëam—with reasons; lekhyam—to be written; çré-guru—of the spiritual master; äçrayaëam—shelter; tataù—then; guruù—the guru; çiñyaù—the disciple; parékñädiù—examination; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; manavaù—mantras; asya—of Him; ca—and; mantra—for the mantras; adikäré—qualified person; siddhy-ädi—beginning with perfection; çodhanam—purification; mantra—of mantras; saàskriyä—rite of purification.

Table of Contents

In this book will be discussed: (First Viläsa) 1. Taking shelter of a bona-fide spiritual master, 2. the qualities of a bona-fide spiritual master, 3. the qualities of a bona-fide disciple, 4. tests presented to the spiritual master and disciple, 5. the qualities of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. 6. the mantras glorifying the Supreme Personality of Godhead. 7. the qualities of a person eligible to chant these mantras, 8. the rites of purification, beginning with Siddhi, 9. the purification of mantras, . . .


Here will be described the spiritual master and his qualities. Then will be described the mantras of the Supreme Personality of Godhead and the glories of these mantras.

Text 6

dékñä nityaà brahma-käle

çubhotthänaà pavitratä

dékñä—initiation; nityam—regularly; brahma-käle—at brahma-muhürta; çubha—auspicious; utthänam—rising; pavitratä—purity.

. . . (Second Viläsa) 10. initiation, 11. rising every day at brahma-muhürta, 12. cleanliness, . . .

Text 7 prätaù småtyädi kåñëasya vädyädyaiç ca prabodhanamnirmälyottaraëädy-ädau maìgalärätrikaà tataù

prätaù—at sunrise; småty—remembering; ädi—beginning with; kåñëasya—of Lord Kåñëa; vädya-ädyaiù—activities beginning with playing music; ca—and; prabodhanam—awakening; nirmälya—the garlands worn by the Lord; uttaraëa—wearing; ädy—beginning with; ädau—in the beginning; maìgalärätrikam—maìgala-ärati; tataù—then.

. . . (Third Viläsa) 13. remembering Lord Kåñëa and performing other devotional activities early in the morning, 14. awakening the Deity with music and other devotional activities, 15. wearing garlands worn by the Deity and accepting other remnants from the Deity, 16. maìala-ärati, . . .

Text 8

maiträdi-kåtyaà çaucäca- manaà dantasya dhävanamsnänaà tantrika-sandhyädi deva-sadmädi-saàskriyä

maitra—passing urine; ädi—beginning with; kåtyam—to be done; çauca—cleaning; äcamanam—ringing the mount; dantasya—of the teeth; dhävanam—cleaning; snänam—bathing; tantrika-sandhyä-ädi—offering tantrika-sandhyä; deva-sadmädi-saàskriyä—cleaning the temple.

. . . 17. the proper way to pass urine and stool, 18. cleaning the body. 19. rinsing the mouth, 20. cleaning the teeth, 21. bathing, 22. performing tantrika-sandhyä (chanting the Gäyatré mantra), (Fourth Viläsa) 23. cleaning the temple of the Lord, . . .

Text 9

tulasy-ädy-ähåtir geha- snänam uñëodakädikamvastraà péöhaà cordhva-puëòraà çré-gopi-candanädikam

tulasy-ädy-ähåtiù—offerings to Tulasé; geha—of the house; snänam—cleaning; uñëodakädikam—with warm water; vastram—clothing; péöham—seat; ca—and; ürdhva-puëòram—tilaka; çré-gopi-candanädikam—beginning with gopé-candana.

. . 24. offering gifts to Tulasé, 25. cleaning one's house, 26. bathing with warm water, 27. garments, 28. sitting place, 29. tilaka, 30. gopé-candana, . . .

Text 10

cakrädi-mudrä mälä ca gåha-sandhyärcanaà guroùmähätmyaà cätha kåñëasya dvära-veñmäntarärcanam

cakra—with cakra; ädi—beginning; mudrä—mudras; mälä—garlands; ca—and; gåha-sandhyä—offering sandhyä at home; arcanam—worship; guroù—of the spiritual master; mähätmyam—the glories; ca—and; atha—then; kåñëasya—of Lord Kåñëa; dvära-veñma—the door of the houee; antara—within; arcanam—worship.

. . . 31. the cakra-mudrä and other mudräs, 32. garlands, 33. performing sandhyä at home, 34. worshiping the spiritual master, 35. the glories of the spiritual master, 36. worshiping Lord Kåñëa, 37. the glories of Lord Kåñëa, (Fifth Viläsa) 38. worshiping when one enters the door of the house, . . .

Text 11

püjärthäsanam arghyädi- sthäpanaà vighna-väraëamçré-gurv-ädi-natir bhüta- çuddhiù präëa-viçodhanam

püjä—worship; artha—for the purpose; äsanam—a seat; arghyädi—beginning with arghya; sthäpanam—placing; vighna-väraëam—protection from obstacles; çré-guru—with the spiritual master; ädi—beginning; natiù—offering obeisances; bhüta-çuddhiù—bhüta-çuddhi; präëa-viçodhanam—purifying the life breath.

. . . 39. sitting down to worship the Lord, 40. arghya and other offerings, 41. removing obstacles, 42. bowing down before the spiritual master and other superiors, 43. bhüta-çuddhi, 44. purifying the life-breath, . . .

Text 12

nyäsa-mudrä-païcakaà ca kåñëa-dhyänäntarärcanepüjä padäni çré-mürti- çälagräma-çiläs tathä

nyäsa—nyasas; mudrä—mudräs; païcakam—five; ca—and; kåñëa-dhyäna—meditation on Lord Kåñëa; antara—in the heart; arcane—in worship; püjä—worship; padäni—places; çré-mürti—the Deity of the Lord; çälagräma-çiläù—the Çälagräma stone; tathä—so.

. . . 45. the nyäsas, 46. the five kinds of mudräs, 47. meditating on Lord Kåñëa, 48. worshiping Lord Kåñëa in one's heart, 49. the Deity of the Lord, 50. the Çälagräma stone, . . .

Text 13

dvärakodbhava-cakräëi çuddhayaù péöha-püjanamävähanädi tan-mudrä äsanädi-samarpaëam

dvärakä—in Dvärakä; udbhava—manifested; cakräëi—cakra stones; çuddhayaù—cleaning; péöha—sitting place; püjanam—worship; ävähanädi—activities beginning with inviting the Lord to appear; tan-mudrä—the mudras for that purpose; äsanädi-samarpaëam—offering a throne and other things.

. . . 51. the cakra stones manifested at Dvärakä, (Sixth Viläsa) 52. cleaning the Deity, 53. worshiping the Lord's abode, 54. worship of the Deity, 55. inviting the Lord to appear, 56. the mudräs for that purpose, 57. offering the Deity a throne and other gifts, . . .

Text 14

snäpanaà saìkha-ghaëöädi- vädyaà näma-sahasrakampuräëa-päöho vasanaà

upavétaà vibhüñaëam

snäpanam—bathing saìkha—conchshells; ghaëöä—and bells; ädi—beginning with; vädyam—music; näma-sahasrakam—chanting a thousand names; puräëa-päöhaù—reciting the Puräëas; vasanam—garments; upavétam—sacred thread; vibhüñaëam—ornaments.

. . . 58. bathing the Deity, 51. conchshells, bells, and musical instruments at the time of bathing the Deity, 52. chanting a thousand names of the Lord, 53. reciting the Puräëas, 54. offering garments, 55. offering a sacred thread, 56. offering ornaments, . . .

Text 15

gandhaù çré-tulasé-käañöha- candanaà kusumäni capaträëi tulasé cäìgo- paìgävaraëa-püjanam

gandhaù—perfume; çré-tulasé-käañöha—made of tulasé wood; candanam—sandal paste; kusumäni—flowers; ca—and; paträëi—leaves; tulasé—Tulasé; ca—and; aìga-upäìga—of the limbs of the Lord; ävaraëa—of the guards protecting the Lord's abode; püjanam—the worship.

. . . 57. offering scents, 58. offering tulasé-candana, (Seventh Viläsa) 59. offering flowers, 60. offering leaves, 61. Tulasé, 62. worshiping the limbs of the Lord's transcendental form, 63. worshiping the guards protecting the Lord's abode, . . .

Text 16

dhüpo dépaç ca naivedyaà pänaà homo bali-kriyäavagaëòüñädy-äsya-väso divya-gandhädikaà punaù

dhüpaù—incense; dépaç—lamp; ca—and; naivedyam—food; pänam—drink; homaù—homa; bali-kriyä—offerings; avagaëòüña—rinsing the mouth; ädy—beginning with; äsya—of the mouth; väsaù—scent; divya-gandhädikam—beginning with celestial scents; punaù—again.

. . . (Eighth Viläsa) 64. offering incense, 65. offering a lamp, 66. offering food, 67. offering drink, 68. offering homa, 69. offering the Lord's remnants to the devotees, 70. rinsing the mouth, 71. making the mouth fragrant, 72. again offering celestial fragrances, . . .

Text 17

räjopacärä gétädi mahä-néräjanaà tathäçaìkhädi-vädanaà sämbu- çaìkha-néräjanaà stutiù

räja—for a king; upacärä—things; gétä—with singing; ädi—beginning; mahä-néräjanam—great ärati; tathä—so; çaìkhädi-vädanam—sound conchshells and other things; sa-ambu—with water; çaìkha—conchshell; néräjanam—ärati; stutiù—prayers.

. . . 73. offering regal gifts, 74. singing and other things, 75. offering mahä-néräjana, 76. sounding a conchshell and other musical instruments, 77. offering çaìkha-néräjana, 78. offering prayers, . . .

Text 18

natiù pradakñiëä karmädy- arpaëaà japa-yäcane

agaù-kñamäpaëaà nänä- gäàsi nirmälya-dhäraëam

natiù—bowing down; pradakñiëä—circumambulating; karma—work; ädi—beginning with; arpaëam—offering; japa—chanting japa; yäcane—prayers; agaù—sins; kñamäpaëam—forgiveness; nänä—various; agäàsi—sins; nirmälya-dhäraëam—wearing garlands from the Lord.

. . . 79. bowing down, 80. circumambulating, 81. offering one's work and other things to the Lord, 82. chanting japa, 83. offering prayers, 84. begging forgiveness for offenses, 85. various offenses, 86. wearing garlands offered to the Lord, . . .

Text 19

çaìkhämbu-térthaà tulasé- püjä tan-måttikädi cadhätré snäna-niñedhasya kälo våtter uparjanam

çaìkha—fromthe conchshell; ambu—water; tértham—water frok the Lord's lotus feet; tulasé—of Tulasé; püjä—worship; tan-måttika-ädi—activities beginning with respectfully touching her earth; ca—and; dhätré-amalaké; snäna-niñedhasya kälaù—the time when bathing is forbidden; våtter uparjanam—means of livelihood.

. . . (Ninth Viläsa) 87. conchshell water, 88. water that has washed the Lord's feet, 89. worship of Tulasé, 90. the ground where Tulasé grows, 91. the ämalaké tree, 92. times when bathing is forbidden, 93. proper ways to earn one's livelihood, . . .

Text 20

madhyähne vaiçvadevädi çräddhaà cänarpyam ucyatevinärcäm açane doñäs tathänarpita-bhojane

madhyähne—at midday; vaiçvadeva-ädi—beginning with the Vaiçvadevas; çräddham—çräddha; ca—and; anarpyam—what should not be offered; ucyate—is said; vinä—without; arcäm—worship; açane—in eating; doñäù—faults; tathä—so; anarpita—without offered; bhojane—in eating.

. . . 94. midday duties, 95. the vaiçvadevas, 96. çräddha, 97. what should not be offered, 98. the offense of eating without having first worshiped the Lord, 99. the sin of eating food not first offered to the Lord, . . .

Text 21

naivedya-bhakñaëaà santaù sat-saìgo 'sad-asaìgatiùasad-gatir vaiñëavopa- häsa-nindädi-duñkalam

naivedya-bhakñaëam—eating food offered to the Lord; santaù—the devotees of the Lord; sat-saìgaù—association with the devotees of the Lord; asad-asaìgatiù—avoiding the association of non-devotees; asad-gatiù—the result of associating with non-devotees; vaiñëava—of the devotees; upahäsa—mocking; nindä—offenses; ädi—beginning with; duñkalam—the inauspicious result.

. . . 100. eating food offered to the Lord, (Tenth Viläsa) 101. the devotees of the Lord, 102. associating with the devotees of the Lord, 103. avoiding the association of non-devotees, 104. the result of associating with non-devotees, 105. the inauspicious result obtained by mocking or offending the devotees of the Lord, . . .

Text 22

satäà bhaktir viñëu-çästraà çrémad-bhägavataà tathälélä-kathä ca bhagavad- dharmaù säyaà nija-kriyäù

satäm—of the devotees; bhaktiù—devotion; viñëu-çästram—the Vaiñëava scriptures; çrémad-bhägavatam—Çrémad-Bhägavatam; tathä—so; lélä-kathä—the narrations of the Lord's pastimes; ca—and; bhagavad-dharmaù—the religion of the Lord; säyam—evening; nija-kriyäù—own duties.

. . . 106. giving respect to the devotees, 107. the Vaiñëava scriptures, 108. Çrémad-Bhägavatam, 109. narrations of the Lord's pastimes, 110. the religion of devotional service to the Lord, (Eleventh Viläsa) 111. evening duties, . . .

Text 23

karma-päta-paréhäras tri-kälärcä viçeñataùnaktaà kåtyäny atho püjä- phala-siddhy-ädi darçanam

karma-päta—materialistic activities; paréhäraù—renunciation; tri-kälärcä—worship at three times of the day; viçeñataù—specifically; naktam—at night; kåtyäny—duties; athaù—then; püjä—of worship; phala—of the result; siddhy—the perfection; ädi—beginning with; darçanam—seeing the Deity.

. . . 112. renunciation of materialism, 113. worship at three times of the day, 114. duties at night, 115. the final result obtained by worship, 116. seeing the Deity of the Lord, . . .

Text 24

viñëv-artha-dänaà vividho- pacärä nyüna-püraëamçayanaà mahimärcäyäù çréman-nämnas tathädbhutaù

viñëu-artha-dänam—giving gifts to the Lord; vividha—various; upacärä—kinds of worship; nyüna-püraëam—fulfilling a need; çayanam—sleep; mahimä—the glory; arcäyäù—of worship; çréman-nämnaù—of the holy name; tathä—so; adbhutaù—wonder.

. . . 117. giving gifts to the Lord, 118. various kinds of worship, 119. fulfilling needs, 120. sleep, 121. the wonderful glory of worshiping the Lord, 122. the wonderful glory of the Lord's holy name, . . .

Text 25

nämäparädhä bhaktiç ca premäthäçrayaëädayaùpakñeñv ekädaçé säìgä çré-dvädaçy-añöakaà mahat

nämäparädhä—offenses to the holy name; bhaktiç—devotional service; ca—and; prema—lobe; atha—then; äçrayaëädayaù—beginning with surrender; pakñeñv—in the paksas; ekädaçé—ekädaçé; sa—with; aìgä—parts; çré-dvädaçé—dvädaçé; añöakam—eight things; mahat—great.

. . . 123. offenses to the holy name, 124. devotional service, 125. devotional love, 126. activities beginning with surrendering to the Lord, (Twelfth and Thirteenth Viläsas) 127. duties in relation to the pakñas, 128. ekädaçé, 129. eight mahä-dvädaçés, . . .

Text 26

kåtyäni märgaçérñädi- mäseñu dvädaçeñv apipuraçcaraëa-kåtyäni mantraà siddhasya lakñaëam

kåtyäni—duties; märgaçérñädi—beginning with Margasirsa; mäseñu—in the months; dvädaçeñv—twelve; api—also; puraçcaraëa-kåtyäni—puraçcaraëa; mantram—mantra; siddhasya—of one who has attained perfection; lakñaëam—the charateristics.

. . . (Fourteenth, Fifteenth, and Sixteenth Viläsas) 130. duties in the twelve months beginning with Märgaçérña, (Seventeenth Viläsa) 131. puraçcaraëa, 132. characteristics of the siddha-mantra, . . .

Text 27

mürty-ävirbhävanaà mürti- pratiñöhä kåñëa-mandiramjérëoddhåtiù çré-tulasé- viväho 'nanya-karma ca

mürty-ävirbhävanam—appearance of the Deity; mürti-pratiñöhä—establishment of the Deity; kåñëa-mandiram—the temple of Lord Kåñëa; jérëa—old temples; uddhåtiù—repair; çré-tulasé—of Çré Tulasé; vivähaù—the marriage; ananya—of the pure devotees; karma—activities; ca—and.

. . . (Eighteenth Viläsa) 133. manifestation of the Deity of the Lord, (Nineteenth Viläsa) 134. installing the Deity of the Lord, (Twentieth Viläsa) 135. the temple of Lord Kåñëa, 136. repairing old temples, 137. the marriage of Çré Tulasé, and 138. the activities of the pure devotees.

Text 28

tatra gurüpasatti-käraëam

kåpayä kåñëadevasya tad-bhakta-jana-saìgataùbhakter mähätmyam äkarëya täm icchan sad-guruà bhajet

tatra—there; guru—of the spiritual master; upasatti—approach; käraëam—the cause; kåpayä—by the mercy; kåñëadevasya—of Lord Kåñëadeva; tad-bhakta-jana-saìgataù—by the association of His devotees; bhakteù—of devotional service; mähätmyam—the glory; äkarëya—hearing; täm—that; icchan—desiring; sad-gurum—a bona-fide spiritual master; bhajet—should worship.

The Reason Why One Should Take Shelter of a Genuine Spiritual Master

By the mercy of Lord Kåñëadeva hearing, in the company of the devotees, the glories of pure devotional service, and yearning to attain that service, one should take shelter of a bona-fide spiritual master.


It is by the mercy of Lord Kåñëadeva that one attains the association of the devotees. Devotional service is more glorious than liberation. The word bhajet here means “one should take shelter".

Text 29

atränubhüyate nityaà duùkha-çreëé paratra caduùsahä çruyate çästrät titérñed api täà sudhéù

atra—here; anubhüyate—is experienced; nityam—always; duùkha-çreëé—a series of sufferings; paratra—in the next life; ca—and; duùsahä—unbearable; çruyate—is heard; çästrät—from scripture; titérñet—shoudl desire to cross beyond; api—and; täm—that; sudhéù—an intelligent person.

In this lifetime one experiences a succession of sufferings, and in the next life one is likely to experience another unbearable series of sufferings. Hearing this truth from the scriptures, an intelligent person will yearn to leave the world of birth and death.


Here someone may ask: How can ordinary people, who are attached to material sense-happiness, desire to attain devotional service? To this I reply: Desiring to escape the ocean of material sufferings, one will desire to attain devotional service, and thus one will take shelter of a bona-fide spiritual master. This action will be taken by an intelligent person. A person who cannot understand that material life means continued material sufferings is not intelligent. He is like an animal. It may be that such a person is like a hunter or other great sinner, and that is why he has lost his intelligence.

Text 30

tathä coktam ekädaça-skandhe bhagavatä çré-dattena

labdhvä su-durlabham idaà bahu-sambhavänte mänuñyam artha-dam anityam apéha dhéraùtürëaà yatena na pated anu-måtyu yävan niùçreyasäya viñayaù khalu sarvataù syät

tathä—so; ca—and; uktam—spokenm; ekädaça-skandhe—in the Eleventh Canto; bhagavatä—by the Supreme Personality of Godhead; çré-dattena—Çré Dattätreya; labdhvä—attaining; su-durlabham—very rare; idam—this; bahu-sambhavänte—after many births; mänuñyam—human; artha-dam—giving benefits; anityam—temporary; api—although; iha—here; dhéraù—intelligent; türëam—quickly; yateta—should strive; na—not; patet—should fall; anu-måtyu—the series of deaths; yävat—as long as; niùçreyasäya—for the best; viñayaù—the material sense objects; khalu—indeed; sarvataù—in all respects; syät—is.

This fact is affirmed by the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Çré Dattätreya in the following words (Çrémad-Bhägavatam 11.9.29):

"After many, many births and deaths one achieves the rare human form of life, which, although temporary, affords one the opportunity to attain the highest perfection. Thus, a sober human being should immediately endeavor for the ultimate perfection in life and not fall down into the cycle of repeated birth and death. After all, sense gratification is available even in the most abominable species of life, whereas Kåñëa consciousness is only possible for a human being."*

Text 31

svayaà çré-bhagavatä ca

nå-deham ädyaà su-labhaà su-surlabhaà plavaà su-kalpaà guru-karëadhärammayänukülena nabhasvateritaà pumän bhaväbdhià na taret sa ätma-hä

svayam—personally; çré-bhagavatä—by teh Supreme Personality of Godhead; ca—and; nå-deham—the human body; ädyam—auspicious; su-labham—effortlessly attained; su-surlabham—very difficult to attain; plavam—boat; su-kalpam—well made; guru-karëadhäram—the captain being the spiritual master; mayä—by Me; anukülena—favirable; nabhasvatä—by winds; éritam—impelled; pumän—a person; bhaväbdhim—the ocean of repeated birth and death; na—not; taret—crosses; sa—he; ätma-hä—killer of the soul.

The Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself declares (Çrémad-Bhägavatam 11.20.17):

"The human body, which can award all benefit in life, is automatically obtained by the laws of nature, although it is a

very rare achievement. This human body can be compared to a perfectly constructed boat having the spiritual master as the captain and the instructions of the Supreme Personality of Godhead as favorable winds impelling it on its course. Considering all these advantages, a human being who does not utilize his human life to cross the ocean of material existence must be considered the killer of his own soul."*


This verse is spoken by Lord Kåñëa, who is the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, as is described in Çrémad-Bhägavatam 1.3.28. The word ädyam here means “the root of all auspicious results." The human life is attained after many pious deeds. Without many millions of struggles it is not possible to attain a human birth. Still, it seems to come of its own accord.

Text 32

atha çré-gurüpasattiù

tatraiva çré-prabuddha-yogeçvaroktau

tasmäd guruà präpadyeta jijïäsuù çreya uttamamçäbde pare ca niñëätaà brahmaëy upasamäçrayam

atha—now; çré-gurüpasattiù—taking shelter of the spiritual master; tatra—there; eva—indeed; çré-prabuddha-yogeçvara-uktau—in the statement of Çré Prabhuddha, the master of yoga; tasmät—therefore; gurum—of a spiritual master; präpadyeta—one should take shelter; jijïäsuù—desirign to know; çreya—good; uttamam—highest; çäbde—in scriptures; pare—supreme; ca—and; niñëätam—expert; brahmaëy—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; upasamäçrayam—taking shelter.

One Should Take Shelter of a Bona-fide Spiritual Master

Çré Prabhuddha, the great master of yoga, explained (Çrémad-Bhägavatam 11.3.21):

"Therefore any person who seriously desires real happiness must seek a bona-fide spiritual master and take shelter of him by initiation. The qualification of the bona-fide guru is that he has realized the conclusions of the scriptures by deliberation and is able to convince others of these conclusions. Such great personalities, who have taken shelter of the Supreme Godhead, leaving aside all material considerations, should be understood to be bond-fide spiritual masters."*

Text 33

svayaà çré-bhagavad-uktau

mad-abhijïaà guruà çäntaà upäséta mad-ätmakam

svayam—personally; çré-bhagavad-uktau—in the statement of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; mad-abhijïam—who knows me; gurum—spiritual master; çäntam—peaceful; upäséta—should take shelter; mad-ätmakam—dedicated his heart to Me.

The Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself affirms (Çrémad-Bhägavatam 11.10.5):

"One should take shelter of a bona-fide spiritual master, who is peaceful, who knows the truth about Me, and whose heart and mind are fixed on Me."

Text 34

krama-dépikäyäà ca

vipraà prädhvasta-käma-prabhåti-ripu-ghaöaà nirmaläìgaà gariñöhaà bhaktià kåñëäìghri-paìkeruha-yugala-rajo-räginém udvahantamvettäraà veda-çästrägama-vimala-pathäà sammataà satsu däntaà vidyäà yaù samvivitsuù pravaëa-tanu-manä deçikaà saàsrayeta

krama-dépikäyäm—in the Krama-dépikä; ca—and; vipram—brähmaëa; prädhvasta—destroyed; käma—with lust; prabhåti—beginning; ripu—enemies; ghaöam—engaged; nirmaläìgam—pure; gariñöham—exalted; bhaktim—devotion; kåñëäìghri-paìkeruha-yugala—of Lord Kåñëa's lotus feet; rajaù—the dust; räginém—love; udvahantam—bearing; vettäram—the knower; veda-çästrägama-vimala-pathäm—of the pure path of the Vedas and Agamas; sammatam—concluded; satsu—among the devotees; däntam—self-controlled; vidyäm—knowledge; yaù—who; samvivitsuù—knows; pravaëa-tanu-manä—humble; deçikam—guru; saàsrayeta—should take shelter.

Çré Krama-dépikä explains:

"One should take shelter of a bona-fide spiritual master, who is a qualified brähmaëa, who has conquered lust and all other enemies, who is pure, exalted, devoted to the dust of Lord Kåñëa's lotus feet, fully aware of the pure path of the Vedas and Agamas, convinced of the conclusions reached by the great devotees, self-controlled, eager to learn about the Supreme Lord, and humble at heart."

Text 35

çrutäv api

tad-vijïänärthaà sad-gurum eväbhigacchet samit-päëiù çrotriyaà brahma-niñöham

äcäryavän puruño veda

çrutau—in the Çruti; api—also; tad-vijïänärtham—to attain knowledge; sad-gurum—to a bona-fide spiritual master; eva—indeed; abhigacchet—one must approach; samit-päëiù—with firewood in his hand; çrotriyam—learned in the Vedas; brahma-niñöham—devoted to the Supreme Personality of Godhead; äcäryavän—who has a spiritual master; puruñaù—a person; veda—knows.

In the Muëòaka Upaniñad (1.2.12) it is said:

"To learn the transcendental subject matter one must approach a spiritual master. In doing so one should carry fuel to burn in sacrifice. The symptom of such a spiritual master is that he is expert in understanding the Vedic conclusion and therefore he constantly engages in the service of the Supreme Personality of Godhead."*

In the Chändogya Upaniñad (6.14.2) it is said:

"One who approaches a bona-fide spiritual master can understand everything about spiritual realization."*

Text 36

atha gurüpasatti-nityatä

çré-bhägavate daçama-skandhe çruti-stutau

vijihåñéka-väyubhir adänta-manas-turagaà ya iha yatanti yantu-mati-lolam upäya-khidaùvyasana-çatänvitaù samavahäya guroç caraëaà vaëija iväja santya-kåta-karëadhära jaladhau

atha—now; guru—of a spiritual master; upasatti—taking shelter; nityatä—eternality; çré-bhägavate—in Çrémad-Bhägavatam; daçama-skandhe—Canto Ten; çruti-stutau—in the Prayers of the Personified Vedas; vijita—conquered; håñéka—senses; väyubhiù—and air; adänta—not controlled; manaù—of the mind; turagam—the horse; ya—who; iha—here; yatanti—struggle; yantum—to control; ati-lolam—very eager; upäya-khidaù—stuggling in many ways; vyasana—troubles; çata—hundreds; anvitaù—with; samavahäya—abandoning; guroç—of the spiritual master; caraëam—the feet; vaëija—merchants; iva—like; aja—O unbron one; santy—are; a—not; kåta—accepted; karëadhära—captain of the boat;

jaladhau—in the ocean.

One Should Always Remain in the Shelter of the Spiritual Master

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (10.87.33) the Personified Vedas affirm:

"O unborn Supreme Personality of Godhead, they who leave the shelter of their spiritual master's lotus feet and, holding back the senses and breath, struggle to control the wild horse of the mind, meet with a hundred calamities. They are like merchants trying to sail on the ocean in a boat without a captain."

Text 37

çrutau ca

naiña tarkeëa matir apaneyä proktänyenaiva su-jïänäya preñöha

çrutau—in the Çruti; ca—and; na—not; eña—thus; tarkeëa—by logic; matiù—concept; apaneyä—to be removed; proktä—said; anyena—by another; eva—indeed; su-jïänäya—for good knowledge; preñöha—O dearest one.

In the Kaöha Upaniñad (1.2.9) it is said:

"O dear one, spiritual truth cannot be understood by material logic. It is understood only hearing the explanations of the spiritual master."

Text 38

atha viçeñataù çré-guror lakñaëäni

mantra-muktävalyäm

avadätänvaya-çuddhaù svocitäcära-tat-paraùäçramé krodha-rahito veda-vit sarva-çästra-vit

atha—now; viçeñataù—specifically; çré-guroù—of the spiritual master; lakñaëäni—the qualities; mantra-muktävalyäm—in the Mantra-mukävalé; avadätä—saintly; anvaya—family; çuddhaù—pure; sva—own; ucita—proper; äcära—activities; tat-paraù—devoted; äçramé—following varnasrama; krodha—anger; rahitaù—without; veda-vit—knowing the Vedas; sarva-çästra-vit—knowing all the scriptures.

The Qualities of a Genuine Spiritual Master

In Çré Mantra-muktävalé it is said:

"A genuine spiritual master is saintly, born in a pure family, diligent in performing his prescribed duties, a follower of varëäçrama, devoid of anger, learned in the Vedas and scriptures, . . .


Çrémad-Bhägavatam 11.3.21 (quoted in text 32) also describes the qualities of a genuine spiritual master.

Text 39

çraddhävän anasüyaç ca priya-väk priya-darçanaù

çuciù su-veñas taruëaù sarva-bhüta-hite rataù

çraddhävän—faithful; anasüyaç—non-envious; ca—and; priya-väk—speaks sweetly; priya-darçanaù—is pleasing to the eye; çuciù—pure; su-veñaù—has a pleasing appearance; taruëaù—young; sarva-bhüta-hite—in the welfare of all living beings; rataù—engaged.

. . . faithful, free of envy, a pleasing speaker, pleasing to the eye, pure, well-dressed, young, a person who works for the welfare of all living beings, . . .

Text 40

dhémän anuddhata-matiù pürëo 'hantä vimarçakaùsad-guëo 'rcäsu kåta-dhéù kåtajïaù çiñya-vatsalaù

dhémän—intelligent; anuddhata-matiù—humble at heart; pürëaù—perfect; ahantä—non-viloent; vimarçakaù—thoughtful; sad-guëaù—virtuous; arcäsu—in the worship of the Lord; kåta-dhéù—enploying his intelligence; kåtajïaù—grateful; çiñya-vatsalaù—affectionate to his disciples.

. . . intelligent, humble at heart, perfect, non-violent, thoughtful, virtuous, intent on worshiping the Lord, grateful, affectionate to his disciples, . . .

Text 41

nigrahänugrahe çakto homa-mantra-paräyaëaùuhäpoha-prakära-jïaù çuddhätmä yaù kåpälayaù ity-ädi-lakñaëair yukto guruù syäd garima-nidhiù

nigraha—punishment; anugrahe—and mercy; çaktaù—able; homa-mantra-paräyaëaù—devoted to homa and mantras; uhäpoha-prakära-jïaù—examining all sides of an issue; çuddhätmä—pure at heart; yaù—who; kåpälayaù—merciful; ity-ädi-lakñaëaiù—qualities beginning with these; yuktaù—endowed; guruù—a spiritual master; syät—is; garima-nidhiù—a treasury of saintly qualities.

. . . capable of both punishment and mercy, devoted to mantras and yajïas, examining all sides of an issue, pure at heart, and merciful. A genuine spiritual master has these and many other virtues. He is a treasure-house of virtues."

Text 42

agastya-saàhitäyäà ca

devatopäsakaù çänto visayeñv api nispåhaùadhyätma-vid brahma-vädé veda-çästrärtha-kovidaù

agastya-saàhitäyäm—in the Agastya-saàhitä; ca—and; devatopäsakaù—worshiping the Supreme Personality of Godhead; çäntaù—peaceful; visayeñv—in the obejcts of the material senses; api—also; nispåhaù—without desire; adhyätma-vit—learned in spiritual truth; brahma-vädé—a prpounder of spiritual truth; veda-çästrärtha-kovidaù—learned in the Vedas and scriptures.

In the Agastysa-saàhitä it is said:

"A genuine spiritual master is a worshiper of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, peaceful, free of material desires, aware of the spiritual truth, a teacher of the spiritual truth, learned in the Vedas and scriptures, . . .

Text 43

uddhartuà caiva saàhartuà samartho brähmaëottamaùtattva-jïo yantra-manträëäà marma-bhettä rahasya-vit

uddhartuàto deliver; ca—and; eva—indeed; saàhartum—to quell; samarthaù—able; brähmaëottamaù—the best of brähmaëas; tattva—the truth; jïaù—knowing; yantra-manträëäm—of yantras and rituals; marma-bhettä—cutting doubts; rahasya-vit—knowing the secrets of spiritual truth.

. . . able to deliver others, able to surmount obstacles, the best of brähmaëas, expert in yantras and mantras, one who goes to the heart of the matter, aware of the secrets of spiritual philosophy, . . .

Text 44

puraçcaraëa-kåd dhoma- mantra-siddhaù prayoga-vittapasvé satya-vädé ca gåhastho gurur ucyate

puraçcaraëa-kåt—a performer of puraçcaraëa; homa-mantra-siddhaù—expert at chanting mantras in yajnas; prayoga-vit—aware of what is needed; tapasvé—austere; satya-vädé—truthful; ca—and; gåhasthaù—a householder; guruù—spiritual master; ucyate—is said.

. . . a performer of purçcaraëa, expert at chanting mantras in yajïas, aware of what is needed, austere, and truthful. These are the qualities of a householder spiritual-master."

Text 45

viñëu-småtau

paricaryä-yäso-läbha- lipsuù çiñyäd guru na hikåpä-sindhuù su-sampürëaù sarva-sattvopakärakaù

viñëu-småtau—in the Viñëu-småti; paricaryä—worship; yäsaù—fame; läbha—attainment; lipsuù—desirign; çiñyät—from his disciple; guru—a spiritual master; na—not; hi—indeed; kåpä-sindhuù—an ocean of mercy; su-sampürëaù—very perfect; sarva-sattvopakärakaù—doing good to everyone.

In the Viñëu-småti it is said:

"A person who is greedy to get worship, praise, and money from his disciple is not a true spiritual master. A true spiritual master is an ocean of mercy, perfect, a person who does good to everyone, . . .

Text 46

nispåhaù sarvataù siddhaù sarva-vidyä-viçäradaùsarva-saàçaya-saïcchettä- nalaso gurur ähåtaù

nispåhaù—desireless; sarvataù—in all ways; siddhaù—perfect; sarva-vidyä-viçäradaù—expert in all knowledge; sarva-saàçaya-saïcchettä—able to cut apart all doubts; analasaù—not lazy; guruù—spiritual master; ähåtaù—said.

. . . free of all material desires, completely perfect, learned in all knowledge, able to cut apart all doubts, and not lazy."

Texts 47 and 48

çré-närada-païcarätre çré-bhagavan-närada-samväde

brähmaëaù sarva-käla-jïaù kuryät sarveñv anugrahamtad-abhäväd dvija-çreñöha çäntätmä bhagavan-mayaù

bhavitätmä ca sarva-jïaù çästra-jïaù sat-kriyä-paraùsiddhi-traya-samäyukta äcäryatve 'bhiñecitaù

çré-närada-païcarätre—in Çré Närada-pancaratra; çré-bhagavan-närada-samväde—in a conversation of the Supreme Personality of Godhead and Çré Närada; brähmaëaù—a brähmaëa; sarva-käla-jïaù—aware of appropriate situations; kuryät—should do; sarveñv—in all; anugraham—mercy; tad-abhävät—in the basence of such a person; dvija-çreñöha—O best of brähmaëas; çäntätmä—peaceful at heart; bhagavan-mayaù—and devoted to the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhavitätmä—pure in heart; ca—and; sarva-jïaù—all-knowing; çästra-jïaù—learned in the scriptures; sat-kriyä-paraù—devoted to pious deeds; siddhi-traya-samäyukta—endowed with three perfections; äcäryatve—as a spiritual master; abhiñecitaù—may be anointed.

In Çré Närada-païcarätra the Supreme Personality of Godhead explains to Çré Närada:

"O best of brähmaëas, a spiritual master should be an exalted brähmaëa who knows everything at all times and who is merciful to everyone. In the absence of such a highly qualified person a spiritual master may be a kñatriya who is peaceful at heart, devoted to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, pure in heart, all-knowing, learned in the scriptures, devoted to pious deeds, and endowed with three perfections.

Texts 49 and 50

kñatra-viö-çüdra-jäténäà kñatriyo 'nugrahe kñamaùkñatriyasyäpi ca guror abhäväd idåço yadi

vaiçyaù syät tena käryaç ca dvaye nityam anugrahaùsajätéyena çüdreëa tädåçena mahä-mate anugrahäbhiñekau ca käryau çüdrasya sarvadä

kñatra-viö-çüdra-jäténäm—of those who are born as ksatriyas, vaisyas, and sudras; kñatriyaù—ksatriya; anugrahe—in mercy; kñamaù—is competent; kñatriyasya—of a ksatriya; api—also; ca—and; guroù—guru; abhävät—in the absence; idåçaù—like this; yadi—if; vaiçyaù—vaisya; syät—is; tena—by him; käryaç—should be done; ca—and; dvaye—in both; nityam—always; anugrahaù—merciful; sajätéyena—like him; çüdreëa—by a sudra; tädåçena—like that; mahä-mate—O noble-hearted one; anugrahäbhiñekau—merciful; ca—and; käryau—should be done; çüdrasya—of a sudra; sarvadä—always.

"Such a kñatriya spiritual master should be merciful to the kñatriyas, vaiçyas, and çüdras. In the absence of such a kñatriya spiritual master one should accept a vaiçya spiritual master who is always merciful to the vaiçyas and çüdras. In the absence of such a vaiçya spiritual master a çüdra may accept a çüdra as a spiritual master."

Text 51

kià ca

varëottame 'tha ca gurau sati yä viçrute 'pi casva-deçato 'tha vänyatra nedaà käryaà çubhärthinä

kià ca—furthermore; varëottame—in the best of varnas; atha—then; ca—and; gurau—a spiritual master; sati—is; yä—who; viçrute—heard; api—and; ca—and; sva-deçataù—from one's own country; atha—then; vä—or; anyatra—in another; na—not; idam—this; käryam—to be done; çubhärthinä—by one who desires auspiciousness.

Furthermore:

If a famous brähmaëa spiritual-master is present in one's own district, a person who desires auspiciousness will not travel somewhere else to accept initiation from someone other than him.

Text 52

vidyamäne tu yaù kuryät yatra tatra viparyayamtasyehämutra näçaù syät tasmäc chästroktam äcaret kñatra-viö-çüdra-jätéyaù prätilomyaà na dékñayet

vidyamäne—beings so; tu—indeed; yaù—one who; kuryät—may do; yatra—where; tatra—there; viparyayam—the opposite; tasya—of him; iha—here; amutra—and in the next life; näçaù—destruction; syät—is; tasmät—from that; çästroktam—spoken by the scriptures; äcaret—should do; kñatra—ksatriya; viö—vaisya; çüdra—sudra; jätéyaù—birth; prätilomyam—inverted order; na—not; dékñayet—should give initiation.

A person who accepts a spiritual master from a lower caste meets destruction in this life and the next. Therefore one should follow this instruction of the scriptures. A kñatriya, vaiçya, or çüdra should not give initiation to a person of a higher caste.

Text 53

pädme ca

mahä-bhägavata-çreñöho brähmaëo vai gurur nåëämsarveñäm eva lokänäà asau püjyo yathä hariù

pädme—in the Padma Puräëa; ca—and; mahä-bhägavata-çreñöhaù—the best of great devotees; brähmaëaù—a brähmaëa; vai—indeed; guruù—spiritual master; nåëäm—of men; sarveñäm—all; eva—and; lokänäm—people; asau—he; püjyaù—to be worshiped; yathä—as; hariù—Lord Kåñëa.

In the Padma Puräëa it is said:

"A brähmaëa who is a great devotee of the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the spiritual master of all human beings. Everyone should worship him as if he were Lord Kåñëa Himself.

Text 54

mahä-kula-prasüto 'pi sarva-yajïeñu dékñitaùsahasra-çäkhädhyäyé ca na guruù syäd avaiñëavaù

mahä-kula-prasütaù—born in a noble family; api—also; sarva-yajïeñu—in all yajnas; dékñitaù—initiated; sahasra-

çäkhädhyäyé—learned in a thousand branches of the Vedas; ca—and; na—not; guruù—a spiritual master; syät—is; avaiñëavaù—not a devotee of the Lord.

"However, a person born in an aristocratic family, initiated in all yajïas, and learned in a thousand branches of the Vedas, but not a devotee of Lord Viñëu, cannot be a genuine spiritual master.


In the Païcarätra it is said:

avaiñëavopadiñöena mantreëa nirayaà vrajetpunaç ca vidhinä samyag grähayed vaiñëaväd guroù

"By chanting a mantra given by a spiritual master who is not a devotee of Lord Viñëu, one goes to hell. Such a disciple should be initiated again, this time by a spiritual master who is a devotee of Lord Viñëu."

Text 55

gåhéta-viñëu-dékñäko viñëu-püjä-paro naraùvaiñëavo 'bhihito 'bhijïair itaro smäd avaiñëavaù

gåhéta-viñëu-dékñäkaù—accepted initiation in the worship of Lord Viñëu; viñëu-püjä-paraù—devoted to the worship of Lord Viñëu; naraù—a person; vaiñëavaù—a devotee of Lord Viñëu; abhihitaù—is called; abhijïaiù—by the wise; itaraù—other; smät—than him; avaiñëavaù—not a devotee.

"A person who has accepted initiation in the worship of Lord Viñëu and who is devoted to the worship of Lord Viñëu is called a devotee of Lord Viñëu by the wise. One who is not like him is not a devotee of Lord Viñëu."

Text 56

atha aguru-lakñaëaà

tattva-sägare

bahv-äçé dérgha-sütré ca viñayädiñu lolupaùhetu-väda-rato duñöo 'väg-vädé guëa-nindakaù

atha—now; a—not; guru—a spiritual master; lakñaëam—the qualities; tattva-sägare—in the Tattva-sägara; bahv-äçé—one who eats voraciously; dérgha-sütré—dresses in opulent clothing; ca—and; viñayädiñu—in the objects of material sense gratification; lolupaù—is greedy; hetu-väda-rataù—attracted to arguing with others and a follower of the atheistic philosophies; duñöaù—wicked; aväg-vädé—not an eloquent speaker; guëa-nindakaù—filled with vices.

The Characteristics of A Person Who Is Not A Genuine Spiritual Master

In the Tattva-sägara it is said:

"A person who eats voraciously, wears opulent clothing, is greedy after sense pleasures, loves to argue, is a follower of the atheist philosophers, is wicked, speaks what should not be spoken, has many vices, . . . .


The phrase "speaks what should not be spoken" means that such a person preaches that one should perform sinful deeds.

Text 57

aromä bahu-romä ca ninditäçrama-sevakaùkäla-danto 'sitauñöhaç ca durgandhi-çväsa-vähakaù

aromä—without hair; bahu-romä—with abundant hair; ca—and; ninditäçrama-sevakaù—a servant of wicked men; käla-dantaù—with black teeth; asitauñöhaù—black lips; ca—and; durgandhi-çväsa-vähakaù—withj bad breath and heavy breathing.

. . . has either a big beard or no beard, is a servant of wicked men, has black teeth, black lips, and bad breath, breathes heavily, . . .

Text 58

duñöa-lakñaëa-sampanno yadyapi svayam éçvaraùbahu-pratigrahäsakta äcäryaù çré-kñayävahaù

duñöa-lakñaëa-sampannaù—filled with faults; yadyapi—although; svayam—personally; éçvaraù—able; bahu—many; pratigraha—donations; äsaktaù—attached; äcäryaù—a spiritual master; çré—of good fortune; kñaya—the destruction; ävahaù—bringing.

. . . has a host of faults, and, although financially well situated is greedy for more and bigger donations, is the kind of spiritual master that destroys the good fortune of his disciples."

Text 59

atha çiñya-lakñaëäni

mantra-muktävalyäà

çiñyaù çuddhänvayaù çrémän vinétaù priya-darçanaùsatya-väk puëya-carito 'dabhra-dhér dambha-varjitaù

atha—now; çiñya—of a true disciple; lakñaëäni—the qualities; mantra-muktävalyäm—in the Mantra-Muktävalé; çiñyaù—a disciple; çuddhänvayaù—faithful; çrémän—glorious; vinétaù—humble; priya-darçanaù—pleasing to the eyes; satya-väk—truthful; puëya-caritaù—pious; adabhra-dhéù—intelligent; dambha-varjitaù—honest and without hypocrisy.

The Qualities of a Genuine Disciple

In the Mantra-Muktävalé it is said:

"A genuine disciple is faithful, glorious, humble, pleasing to the eye, truthful, pious, intelligent, honest, not a hypocrite, . . .

Text 60

käma-krodha-parityägé

bhaktaç ca guru-pädayoùdevatä-praëavaù käya- mano-vägbhir divä-niçam

käma-krodha-parityägé—free of lust and anger; bhaktaç—devoted; ca—and; guru-pädayoù—to the spiritual master's feet; devatä-praëavaù—devoted to the Supreme Personality of Godhead; käya—with body; manaù—mind; vägbhiù—and words; divä-niçam—day and night.

. . . free of lust and anger, devoted to his spiritual master's feet, with body, mind, and words devoted to the Supreme Personality of Godhead day and night, . . .

Text 61

nirujo nirjitäçeña- pätakaù çraddhayänvitaùdvija-deva-pitånäà ca nityam arcä-paräyaëaù

nirujaù—healthy; nirjitäçeña-pätakaù—sinless; çraddhayänvitaù—faithful; dvija-deva-pitånäm—of the devas; brähmaëa, and pitäs; ca—and; nityam—always; arcä-paräyaëaù—devoted to the worship.

. . . healthy, sinless, faithful, always devoted to the worship of the devas, brähmaëas, and pitäs, . . .

Text 62

yuvä viniyatäçeña- karaëaù karuëälayaùity-ädi-lakñaëair yuktaù çiñyo dékñädhikäravän

yuvä—young; viniyatäçeña-karaëaù—sense-controlled; karuëälayaù—kind; ity-ädi-lakñaëaiù—with qualities that begin with these; yuktaù—endowed; çiñyaù—disciple; dékñä—for initiation; adhikäravän—qualified.

. . . young, in full control of his senses, and kind. A person who has these and other virtues is qualified for initiation.

Text 63

ekädaça-skandhe ca

amäny amatsaro dakño nirmamo dåòha-sauhådaùasatvaro 'rtha-jijïäsur anasüyur amogha-väk

ekädaça-skandhe—in the Eleventh Canto; ca—and; amäny—without pride; amatsaraù—without envy; dakñaù—expert; nirmamaù—without false possessiveness; dåòha—firm; sauhådaù—friendship; asatvaraù—unagitated; artha-jijïäsuù—eager to learn the truth; anasüyuù—not hostile; amogha-väk—who does not speak uselessly.

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (11.10.6) it is said:

"A genuine disciple is prideless, non-envious, diligent, free of false-possessiveness, a sincere friend of his spiritual master, eager to learn the truth, not hostile to others, and averse to useless conversation."

Text 64

athopekñyaù

agastya-saàhitäyäm

alasä malinaù kliñöä dämbhikäù kåpaëäs tathädaridrä rogiëo ruñöa rägiëo bhoga-lälasäù

atha—now; upekñyaù—who should be rejected; agastya-saàhitäyäm—in the Agastya-samhita; alasä—lazy; malinaù—contaminated; kliñöä—agitated; dämbhikäù—proud; kåpaëäù—miserly; tathä—so; daridrä—wretched; rogiëaù—diseased; ruñöa—angry; rägiëaù—passionate; bhoga-lälasäù—greedy for sense pleasures.

Who Should Be Rejected

In the Agastya-saàhitä it is said:

"They who are lazy, unclean, agitated, proud, miserly, wretched, diseased, angry, passionate, greedy for sense pleasures, . . .


The word "agitated" here means "agitated for no good reason".

Text 65

asüya-matsara-grastäù çaöhäù paruña-vädinaùanyäyoparjita-dhanäù para-dära-ratäç ca ye

asüya-matsara-grastäù—gripped by envy and hostility; çaöhäù—cheaters; paruña-vädinaù—speaking harshly; anyäya—without reason; upärjita—earned; dhanäù—ealth; para-dära-ratäç—adulterers; ca—and; ye—who.

. . . in the grip of envy and hostility, cheaters, filled with harsh words, greedy to accumulate wealth for no good reason, adulterers, . . .

Text 66

viduñäà vairiëaç caiva ajïäù paëòita-mäninaùbhrañöa-vratäç ca ye käñöha- våttayaù piçunäù khaläù

viduñäm—of the learned; vairiëaç—enemies; ca—and; eva—indeed; ajïäù—fools; paëòita-mäninaù—thinking themselves wise; bhrañöa-vratäù—broken vows; ca—and; ye—who; kañöha—wicked; våttayaù—means of livelihood; piçunäù—cruel and insulting; khaläù—wicked.

by foul means, harsh, insulting, wicked, . . .

Text 67

bahv-äçinaù krüra-ceñöä durätmänaç ca ninditäùity evam ädayo 'py anye päpiñöhäù puruñädhamäù

bahv-äçinaù—eating voraciously; krüra-ceñöä—cruel; durätmänaç—wicked at heart; ca—and; ninditäù—degratded; ity

—thus; evam—in this way; ädayaù—beginning with api—also; anye—others; päpiñöhäù—sinners; puruñädhamäù—the lowest of men.

. . . voracious eaters, cruel, wicked at heart, degraded, and sinful, the lowest of men who have these and a host of other faults, . . .

Text 68

akåtyebhyo 'niväryäç ca guru-çikñäsahiñëavaùevam-bhütaù parityajyäù çiñyatve nopakalpitäù

akåtyebhyaù—from what should not be done; aniväryäù—not turning away; ca—and; guru-çikñä—the teaching of the spiritual master; asahiñëavaù—unable to tolerate; evam-bhütaù—thus; parityajyäù—should be rejected; çiñyatve—as disciples; na—not; upakalpitäù—fit.

. . . who do not turn away from what should not be done, and who cannot bear to follow the spiritual master's teachings should be rejected. They are not fit to be disciples.

Texts 69 and 70

yady ete hy upakalperan devatä-kroça-bhäjanäùbhavantéha daridräs te putra-dära-vivarjitäù

närakäç caiva dehänte tiryaïcaù prabhavanti te

yady—if; ete—they; hy—indeed; upakalperan—accept; devatä-kroça-bhäjanäù—the object of the anger of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhavanti—become; iha—here; daridräù—poor; te—they; putra-dära-vivarjitäù—without wife or children; närakäù—residents of hell; ca—and; eva—indeed; deha—of the body; ante—at the end; tiryaïcaù—animals; prabhavanti—are born; te—they.

"Spiritual masters that accept disciples like these become the objects of the Supreme Personality of Godhead's anger. In this life they become poverty-stricken and are abandoned by wife and children and at death they go to hell. Finally they are born as animals."

Text 71

hayaçérña-païcarätre

jaiminiù sugataç caiva nästiko nagna eva cakapilaç cäkñapädaç ca ñaò ete hetu-vädinaù

hayaçérña-païcarätre—in the Hayaçérña-païcarätra; jaiminiù—jaimini; sugataç—Sugata; ca—and; eva—indeed; nästikaù—Nastika; nagna—Nagna; eva—indeed; ca—and; kapilaç—pseudo-Kapila; ca—and; akñapädaù—Akñapädas; ca—and; ñaò—six; ete—these; hetu-vädinaù—philosophers.

In the Hayaçérña-païcarätra it is said:

"The six atheist philosophers are Jaimini, Sugata, Nästika, Nagna, pseudo-Kapila, and Akñapäda.

Text 72

etan-matänusäreëa vartante ye narädhämäùte hetu-vädinaù proktäs tebhyas tantraà na däpayed iti

etat—of them; mata—the philosophies; anusäreëa—by following; vartante—become; ye—who; narädhämäù—the lowest of men; te—they; hetu-vädinaù—philsophers; proktäù—said; tebhyaù—to them; tantram—the rules of worship; na—not; däpayet—should be given; iti—thus.

They who follow their ideas become the lowest of men. Although these followers may be called philosophers in this world, one should not give initiation to them.

Text 73

tayoù parékñä cänyonyaà ekäbdaà saha-väsataùvyavahära-svabhävänu- bhävenaiväbhijäyate

tayoù—of the two; parékñä—examination; ca—and; anyonyam—mutual; ekäbdam—for one year; saha-väsataù—living together; vyavahära—actions; svabhäva—character; anubhävena—by seeing; eva—indeed; abhijäyate—is born.

The prospective spiritual master and disciple should live together for one year and, carefully examining each other's activities and character, test each other to see if they are qualified.

Text 74

atha parékñaëam

mantra-muktävalyäà

tayor vatsara-väsena jïätänyonya-svabhävayoùgurutä çiñyatä ceti nänyathaiveti niçcayaù

atha—now; parékñaëam—the test; mantra-muktävalyäm—in Mantra-muktävalé; tayoù—of the two of them; vatsara—for one year; väsena—by residence; jïäta—known; anyonya—of each other; svabhävayoù—teh natures; gurutä—the status of a spiritual master; çiñyatä—the status of a disciple; ca—and; iti—thus; na—not; anyathä—otherwise; eva—indeed; iti—thus; niçcayaù—determination.

The Test

In the Mantra-Muktävalé it is said:

"The prospective spiritual master and disciple should live together for one year. In this way they will come to understand each other's nature. Then it will be known whether the spiritual master is a genuine spiritual master and the disciple a genuine disciple. There is no other way to know this."

Text 75

çrutiç ca

näsamvatsara-väsine deyät

çrutiù—the Çruti-çästra; ca—and; na—not; a—without; samvatsara—for a year; väsine—living togther; deyät—should be given.

The Çruti-çästra explains:

"The spiritual master should not give initiation without first living for a year with his disciple."

Text 76

sära-saìgrahe 'pi

sad-guruù sväçritaà çiñyaà varñam ekaà parékñayet

sära-saìgrahe—in the Sära-saìgraha; api—also; sad-guruù—a genuine spiritual master; sväçritam—taking shelter; çiñyam—disciple; varñam—year; ekam—one; parékñayet—should examine.

In the Sära-saìgraha it is said:

"For one year the spiritual master should examine his prospective disciple."

Text 77

räjïi cämätyajä doñäù patné-päpaà sva-bhartaritathä çiñyärjitaà päpaà guruù präpnoti niçcitam

räjïi—on the king; ca—and; amätyajä—from the ministers; doñäù—faults; patné-päpam—the sins of the wife; sva-bhartari—on her husband; tathä—so; çiñya—by the disciple; arjitam—earned; päpam—sin; guruù—the spiritual master; präpnoti—attains; niçcitam—indeed.

"The faults of a counselor fall on his king, and a the sins of a wife fall on her husband. In the same way a spiritual master attains the sins of his disciple. That is certain."

Text 78

krama-dépikäyäà tu

santoñayed akuöilärdrataräntarätmä taà svair dhanaiù sva-vapuñäpy anuküla-väëyäabda-trayaà kamalanäbha-dhiyäti-dhéras tuñöe vivakñatu guräv atha mantra-dékñäm

krama-dépikäyäm—in the Krama-dépikä; tu—indeed; santoñayet—should satisfy; akuöila—not crooked; ardratara—melting with affection; antarätmä—within his heart; tam—him; svaiù—with his own; dhanaiù—wealth; sva-vapuñä—with body; api—and; anuküla-väëyä—with favorable words; abda-trayam—for three years; kamalanäbha—of the lotus-navel Puräëa; dhiyä—with thoughts; ati-dhéraù—very sober; tuñöe—satisfied; vivakñatu—should ask; gurau—teh spiritual master; atha—then; mantra—in the mantra; dékñäm—initiation.

In the Krama-dépikä it is said:

"His heart melting with sincere love and his thoughts fixed on the Supreme Personality of Godhead whose navel is like a lotus flower, the prospective disciple should, with his wealth, body, and pleasing words serve his spiritual master for three years. Then, when the spiritual master is satisfied, the disciple may ask for initiation in chanting the sacred mantras."

Text 79

atha viçeñataù çré-guru-sevä-vidhiù

kaurme çré-vyäsa-gétäyäm

uda-kumbhaà kuçän puñpaà samidho 'syäharet sadämärjanaà lepanaà nityaà aìgänäà väsasäà caret

atha—then; viçeñataù—specifically; çré-guru-sevä—of service to the spiritual master; vidhiù—the rules; kaurme—in the Kürma Puräëa; çré-vyäsa-gétäyäm—in the Çré Vyäsa-gétä; uda—of water; kumbham—a pot; kuçän—kuça grass; puñpam—flower; samidhaù—fuel; asya—of him; äharet—should fetch; sadä—regularly; märjanam—cleaning and massaging; lepanam—anointing; nityam—always; aìgänäm—of the limbs; väsasäm—of the garments; äcaret—should do.

Service to the Spiritual Master

In the Kürma Puräëa, Çré Vyäsa-gétä, it is said:

"The disciple should regularly fetch water, kuça grass, flowers, and fuel. He should regularly wash the spiritual master's clothing, anoint him with sandal paste, and massage his limbs.

Text 80

näsya nirmälya-çayanaà pädukopanahäv apiäkramed äsanaà chäyäà äsandéà vä kadäcana

na—not; asya—of him; nirmälya-remnant; çayanam—bed; päduka—wooden sandal; upanahau—leather sandal; api—also; äkramet—should step; äsanam—seat; chäyäm—shadow; äsandém—dish; vä—or; kadäcana—ever.

"Never should the disciple sleep on the spiritual master's bed, wear his shoes, sit on his seat, cross his shadow, or eat from his plate.

Text 81

sändhayed danta-käñöhädén kåtyaà cäsmai nivedayet

sändhayet—should prepare; danta-käñöhädén—toothbrush-twig and other articles; kåtyam—to be done; ca—and; asmai—to him; nivedayet—should ask.

"The disciple should prepare his spiritual master's toothbrush-twig and other things like that, and he should ask what service he should perform.

Text 82

anäpåcchya na gantavyaà bhavet priya-hite rataùna pädau särayed asya sannidhäne kadäcana

anäpåcchya—without asking; na—not; gantavyam—to be gone; bhavet—may be; priya-hite—to please; rataù—engaged; na—not; pädau—feet; särayet—should place; asya—of him; sannidhäne—near; kadäcana—ever.

"The disciple should not leave without first asking permission. She should always try to please his spiritual master. He should never place his feet near his spiritual master.

Text 83

jåmbha-häsyädikaà caiva kaëöha-prävaraëaà tathävarjayet sannidhau nityaà athäsphoöanam eva ca

jåmbha—yawning; häsya—laughing; ädikam—beginning with; ca—and; eva—indeed; kaëöha-prävaraëam—filling the throat with loud sounds; tathä—then; varjayet—shen avoid; sannidhau—near; nityam—always; atha—then; äsphoöanam—snapping the fingers; eva—indeed; ca—and.

"In the company of the spiritual master the disciple should never yawn, laugh, snap his fingers, or do other impolite activities.

Text 84

kià ca

çreyas tu guruvad-våttir nityam eva samäcaretguru-putreñu däreñu guroç caiva sva-bandhuñu

kià ca—furthmore; çreyaù—welfare; tu—indeed; guruvad-våttiù—activities like to the spiritual master; nityam—alwasy; eva—indeed; samäcaret—should perform; guru—of the spiritual master; putreñu—the children; däreñu—wife; guroù—of the spiritual master; ca—adn; eva—indeed; sva-bandhuñu—relatives.

It is further said:

"To the spiritual master's children, wife, and relatives the disciple should offer the same kind of respectful treatment he offers to the spiritual master himself.

Text 85

utsädanaà vai gäträëäà snäpanocchiñöa-bhojanena kuryäd guru-putrasya pädayoù çaucam eva ca

utsädanam—massaging; vai—indeed; gäträëäm—of the limbs; snäpana-bathing; ucchiñöa—remnants; bhojane—eating; na—not; kuryät—should do; guru-putrasya—of the spiritual master's child; pädayoù—of the feet; çaucam—washing; eva—indeed; ca—and.

"However, the disciple should not wash the feet of his spiritual master's son. Nor should he massage his limbs, eat the remnants of his meals, or arrange for his bath.

Text 86

guruvat paripüjyaç ca sa-varëä guru-yoñitaùasavarëäs tu sampüjyäù pratyutthänäbhivädanaiù

guruvat—like the spiritual master; paripüjyaç—worshipable; ca—and; sa-varëä—of the same varna; guru-yoñitaù—the wife of the spiritual master; asavarëäù—not of the same varna; tu—indeed; sampüjyäù—worshipable; pratyutthäna—rising; abhivädanaiù—with salutations.

"If the spiritual master's wife is of the same varëa as he, then she should be honored as he is. If she is of a different

varëa she should be honored by rising from one's seat and speaking salutations.

Text 87

abhyaïjanaà snäpanaà ca gatrotsädanam eva caguru-patnyä na käryäëi keçänäà ca prasädhanam

abhyaïjanam—anointing; snäpanam—bathing; ca—and; gatrotsädanam—massaging the limbs; eva—indeed; ca—and; guru—of thespiritual master; patnyä—by the wife; na—not; käryäëi—to be done; keçänäm—of the hair; ca—and; prasädhanam—arranging.

"The spiritual master's wife should not anoint with sandal paste, bathe, or massage her husband's disciples. Nor should she comb their hair."

Text 88

devy-ägame çré-çivoktau

guru-çayyäsanaà yänaà päduke päda-péöhakamsnänodakaà tathä chäyäà laìghayen na kadäcana

devy-ägame—in the Devy-ägama; çré-çivoktau—in the statement of Lord Çiva; guru—of the spiritual master; çayyä—the bed; äsanam—the seat; yänam—the vehicle; päduke—the shoes; päda-péöhakam—teh footstool; snänodakam—the bath-water; tathä—so; chäyäm—teh shadow; laìghayen—may overstep; na—not; kadäcana—ever.

In the Devy-ägama, Lord Çiva explains:

"Never should the disciple sleep in the spiritual master's bed, sit on his seat, use his vehicle, wear his shoes, use his footstool, bathe in his bath-water, or step on his shadow.

Text 89

guror agre påthak-püjäà advaitaà ca parityajetdékñäà vyäkhyäà prabhutvaà ca guror agre vivarjayet

guroù—od the spiritual master; agre—in the presence; påthak-püjäm—specific worship; advaitam—not different; ca—and; parityajet—should abandon; dékñäm—initiation; vyäkhyäm—explanation; prabhutvam—mastery; ca—and; guroù—of the spiritual master; agre—in the presence; vivarjayet—should abandon.

"One should not allow oneself to be worshiped in the presence of his spiritual master, nor should one claim that one is as good as his spiritual master. In the presence of one's spiritual master one should not give initiation, give explanations, or assume the role of a master or a powerful person."

Text 90

çré-näradoktau

yatra yatra guruà paçyet tatra tatra kåtäïjaliùpraëamed daëòavad bhümau chinna-müla iva drumaù

çré-närada—of Çré Närada; uktau—in the statement; yatra yatra—wherever; gurum—the spiritual master; paçyet—one sees; tatra tatra—there; kåtäïjaliù—with folded hands; praëamet—should bow down; daëòavat—like a stick; bhümau—to the ground; chinna—cut; mülaù—at the root; iva—like; drumaù—a tree.

Çré Närada Muni explains:

"Wherever one sees his spiritual master, one should offer obeisances to him with folded hands. One should fall like a stick to the ground. One should fall like a tree cut at its root.

Text 91

guror väkyäsanaà yänaà pädukopanahau tathävastraà chäyäà tathä çiñyo laìghayen na kadäcana

guroù—of the spiritual master; väkya—the words; äsanam—seat; yänam—vehicle; pädukopanahau—shoes; tathä—so; vastram—clothing; chäyäm—shadow; tathä—so; çiñyaù—the disciple; laìghayen—should step over; na—not; kadäcana—ever.

"Never should the disciple disobey his spiritual master's words, sit on his seat, use his vehicle, wear his shoes or clothing, or step on his shadow."

Text 92

çré-manu-småtau

nodähared guror näma parokñam api kevalamna caiväsyänukurvéta gati-bhäñaëa-ceñöitam

çré-manu-småtau—in Çré Manu-småti; na—not; udäharet—should speak; guroù—of the spiritual master; näma—the name; parokñam—not present; api—even; kevalam—sacred; na—not; ca—and; eva—indeed; asya—of him; anukurvéta—should imitate; gati—walking; bhäñaëa—talking; ceñöitam—actions.

In Çré Manu-småti it is said:

"One should not speak the sacred name of his spiritual master, even if the spiritual master is not present. Neither should one imitate the style of his spiritual master's walking, talking, or way of doing things.

Text 93

guror gurau sannihite guruvad våttim äcaretna cävisåñöo guruëä svän gurün abhivädayet

guroù—of the spiritual master; gurau—when the spiritual master; sannihite—is present; guruvat—like the spiritual master; våttim—actions; äcaret—should do; na—not; ca—and; avisåñöaù—without being sent; guruëä—by the spiritual master; svän—to one's own; gurün—elder relatives; abhivädayet—should offer respectful obeisances.

"One should not imitate the way one's spiritual master acted in the presence of his spiritual master. Neither should one offer obeisances to his elder relatives without his spiritual master's permission."

Text 94

çré-närada-païcarätre

yathä tathä yatra tatra na gåhëéyäc ca kevalamabhaktyä na guror näma gåhëéyäc ca yatätmavän

çré-närada-païcarätre—in Çré Närada-païcarätra; yathä—as; tathä—so; yatra—where; tatra—there; na—not; gåhëéyät—should speak; ca—and; kevalam—alone; abhaktyä—without devotion; na—not; guroù—of the spiritual master; näma—the name; gåhëéyät—should speak; ca—and; yata-controlled; ätmavän—whose self.

In Çré Närada-païcarätra it is said:

"One should never, under any circumstances, speak the sacred name of his spiritual master. A self-controlled disciple will never speak the name of his spiritual master without respect and devotion.

Text 95

praëavaù çrés tato näma viñëu-çabdäd anantarampäda-çabda-sametaà ca nata-mürdhäïjali-yutaù

praëavaù—Oà; çréù—Çré; tataù—then; näma—the name; viñëu-çabdät—from the word Viñëu; anantaram—after; päda—päda; çabda—the word; sametam—with; ca—and; nata—bowed; mürdha—head; aïjali-yutaù—with folded hands.

"When speaking his spiritual master's name one should fold one's hands, bow one's head, and preface his spiritual master's name with the words Oà Çré Viñëupäda."

Text 96

kià ca

na tam äjïäpayen mohät tasyäjïäà na ca laìghayetnänivedya guroù kiïcid bhoktavyaà vä guros tathä

kià ca—furthermore; na—not; tam—him; äjïäpayet—should give orders; mohät—out of illusion; tasya—of him; äjïäm—the order; na—not; ca—and; laìghayet—should disobey; na—not; anivedya—without asking permission; guroù—of the spiritual master; kiïcit—something; bhoktavyam—to be eaten; vä—or; guroù—of the spiritual master; tathä—so.

It is further said:

"One should not become bewildered and give orders to his spiritual master. One should not disobey the order of his spiritual master. One should not eat anything without first taking permission from his spiritual master."

Text 97

anyatra ca

äyäntam agrato gacched gacchantaà tam anuvrajetäsane çayane väpi na tiñöhed agrato guroù

anyatra—in another scripture; ca—and; äyäntam—coming; agrataù—in the presence; gacchet—should go; gacchantam—going; tam—him; anuvrajet—should follow; äsane—on the seat; çayane—on the bed; vä—or; api—also; na

—not; tiñöhet—should stay; agrataù—in the presence; guroù—of the spiritual master.

In another scripture it is said:

"When the spiritual master approaches, the disciple should go to meet him. When the spiritual master departs, the disciple should follow him. The disciple should not lie on his bed or sit on an äsana in the presence of his spiritual master.

Text 98

yat kiïcid anna-pänädi priyaà dravyaà manoramamsamarpya gurave paçcät svayaà bhuïjéta praty-aham

yat—what; kiïcit—something; anna—food; päna—drink; ädi—beginning with; priyam—favorite; dravyam—thing; manoramam—pleasing to the heart; samarpya—offering; gurave—to the spiritual master; paçcät—after; svayam—personally; bhuïjéta—should eat; praty-aham—every day.

"Whatever food and drink the spiritual master likes, whatever pleases his heart, the disciple should offer to his spiritual master. When the spiritual master is finished eating, the disciple may eat the remnants of his meal. He should do this every day."

Text 99

çré-viñëu-småtau

na guror apriyaà kuryät täòitaù péòito 'pi vänävamänyeta tad-väkyaà näpriyaà hi samäcaret

çré-viñëu-småtau—in the Çré Viñëu-småti; na—not; guroù—of the spiritual master; apriyam—not liked; kuryät—should do; täòitaù—hit; péòitaù—troubled; api—and; vä—or; na—not; avamänyeta—should disrespect; tad-väkyam—his words; na—not; apriyam—what is not liked; hi—indeed; samäcaret—should do.

In the Çré Viñëu-småti it is said:

"Even if the spiritual master hits him or gives him trouble, the disciple should not act to displease him. The disciple should never disrespect his spiritual master's words. The disciple should never act to displease his spiritual master.

Text 100

äcäryasya priyaà kuryät präëair api dhanair apikarmaëä manasä väcä sa yäti paramaà gatim

äcäryasya—of the spiritual master; priyam—pleasure; kuryät—should do; präëaiù—with life; api—and; dhanaiù—with wealth; api—and; karmaëä—with deeds; manasä—with mind; väcä—with words; sa—he; yäti—goes; paramam—to the supreme; gatim—destination.

"A disciple who with his life, wealth, actions, mind, and words pleases his spiritual master goes to the supreme destination."

Text 101

anyathä dvayor api mahä-doñaù

çré-närada-païcarätre

yo väkti nyäya-rahitaà anyäyena çåëoti yaùtäv ubhau narakaà ghoraà vrajataù kälam akñayam

anyathä—otherwise; dvayoù—of them both; api—also; mahä-doñaù—great faults; çré-närada-païcarätre—in Çré Närada-païcarätra; yaù—one who; väkti—speaks; nyäya-rahitam—without logic; anyäyena—without logic; çåëoti—hears; yaù—who; täv—both; ubhau—both; narakam—to hell; ghoram—terrible; vrajataù—go; kälam—time; akñayam—without end.

A Great Fault on Both Sides

In Çré Närada-païcarätra it is said:

"A spiritual master who speaks wrongly, without logic, and a disciple who hears wrongly, without logic, both go to a terrible hell for a long time that seems not to end."


A disciple who does not properly examine his spiritual master before initiation, or who does not properly serve him, commits a great fault. This verse describes a situation where either the disciple or the spiritual master did not properly test the other before initiation.

Text 102

atha çiñya-prärthanä

vaiñëava-tantre

träyasva bho jagannätha guro saàsära-vahninädagdhaà mäà käla-dañöaà ca tväm ahaà çaraëaà gata iti.

atha—now; çiñya—of the disciple; prärthanä—the prayer; vaiñëava-tantre—in the Vaiñëava-tantra; träyasva—save; bhaù—O; jagannätha—master of the worlds; guraù—O spiritual master; saàsära-vahninä—by the fire of repeated birth and death; dagdham—burned; mäm—me; käla—by time; dañöam—bitten; ca—and; tväm—you; aham—I; çaraëam—to the shelter; gata—gone; iti—thus.

The Disciple's Prayer

In the Vaiñëava-tantra it is said:

"O spiritual master, O master of the worlds, please rescue me, who am bitten by time and burned by the flames of repeated birth and death. I surrender to you and take shelter of you."

Text 103

tatra çré-väsudevasya sarva-deva-çiromaëeùpädämbhujaika-bhäg eva dékñä grähyä manéñibhiù

tatra—there; çré-väsudevasya—of Lord Väsudeva; sarva-deva-çiromaëeù—the crest jewel of all Deities; päda—feet; ambhuja—lotus; eka—one; bhäk—possessing; eva—indeed; dékñä—initiation; grähyä—should be accepted; manéñibhiù—

by the wise.

The wise should accept initiation, for in this way they are able to attain the lotus feet of Lord Kåñëa, who is the crest jewel of all Deities, as the only treasure of their lives.


After initiation the disciple should worship the lotus feet of Lord Kåñëa, surrender to them, and take shelter of them. To fail to do this is very foolish.

Text 104

atha çré-bhagavan-mähätmyaà

prathama-skandhe

sattvaà rajas tama iti prakåter guëais tair yuktaù paraù puruña eka ihäsya dhattesthity-ädaye hari-viriïci-hareti-samjïäù çreyaàsi tatra khalu sattva-tanor nåëäà syuù

atha—now; çré-bhagavat—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; mähätmyam—the glory; prathama-skandhe—in the First Canto; sattvam—goodness; rajaù—passion; tamaù—the darkness of ignorance; iti—thus; prakåteù—of material nature; guëaiù—qualities; taiù—by them; yuktaù—associiated with; paraù—the transcendental; puruña—personality; eka—one; iha asya—of this material world; dhatte—accepts; sthity-ädaye—for the matter of creation, maintenance, and destruction, etc.; hari—Viñëu the Personality of Godhead; viriïci—Brahmä; hara—Lord Çiva; iti—thus; samjïäù—different features; çreyaàsi—ultimate benefit; tatra—therein; khalu—of course; sattva—goodness; tanoù—form; nåëäm—of the human being; syuù—derived.

The Glories of the Supreme Personality of Godhead


"The transcendental Personality of Godhead is indirectly associated with the three modes of material nature, namely passion, goodness, and ignorance, and just for the material world's creation maintenance, and destruction He accepts the qualitative forms of Brahmä, Viñëu, and Çiva. Of these three, all human beings can derive ultimate benefit form Viñëu, the form of the quality of goodness."*

Text 105

kià ca

athäpi yat-päda-nakhävasåñöaà jagad-viriïcopahåtärhaëämbhaùseçaà punäty anyatamo mukundät ko näma loke bhagavat-padärthaù

kià ca—furthermore; atha—therefore; api—certainly; yat—whose; päda-nakha—nails of the feet; avasåñöam—emanating; jagat—the whole universe; viriïca—Brahmäjé; upahåta—collected; arhaëa—worship; ambhaù—water; sa—along with; éçam—Lord Çiva; punäty—purifies; anyatamaù—who else; mukundät—besides the Personality of Godhead, Çré Kåñëa; kaù—who?; näma—name; loke—within the world; bhagavat—Supreme Lord; pada—position; arthaù—worth.

It is further said (Çrémad-Bhägavatam 1.18.21):

"Who can be worthy of the name of the Supreme Lord but the Personality of Godhead, Çré Kåñëa? Brahmäjé collected the water emanating from the nails of His feet in order to award it to Lord çiva as a worshipful welcome. This very water (the Ganges) is purifying the whole universe, including Lord Çiva."*

Text 106

çré-daçama-skandhe

tan niçamyätha munayo vismitä mukta-saàçayäùbhüyaàsaà çraddadhur viñëuà yataù kñemo yato 'bhayam

çré-daçama-skandhe—in the Tenth Canto; tat—that; niçamya—hearing; atha—then; munayaù—the sages; vismitä—filled with wonder; mukta—freed; saàçayäù—from doubts; bhüyaàsam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; çraddadhuù—faithful; viñëum—Lord Viñëu; yataù—from whom; kñemaù—auspiciousness; yataù—from whom; abhayam—fearlesness.

In the Tenth Canto it is said (Çrémad-Bhägavatam 10.89.14):

"Hearing these words, the sages became free of doubts. Now they had faith that Lord Viñëu is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, that from Him comes auspiciousness, that from Him comes fearlessness."

Text 107

pädme vaiçäkha-mähätmye yama-brähmaëa-samväde

vyamohäya caräcarasya jagatas te te puräëägamäs täà täm eva hi devatäà paramikäà jalpantu kalpävadhisiddhänte punar eka eva bhagavän viñëuù samastägama- vyäpäreñu vivecana-vyatikaraà néteñu niçcéyate

pädme vaiçäkha-mähätmye—in the Padma Puräëa, Vaiçäkha-mähätmya; yama-brähmaëa-samväde—in the conversation of Yama and a brähmaëa; vyamohäya—for bewilderment; caräcarasya—with moving and unmoving beings; jagataù—of the universe; te te—whoever; puräëägamäù—the Puräëas and Agamas; täà täm—them; eva—indeed; hi—certainly; devatäm—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; paramikäm—desired; jalpantu—may chant; kalpa—the kalpa; ävadhi—until the end; siddhänte—in the conclusion; punaù—again; eka—one; eva—indeed; bhagavän—Supreme Personality of Godhead; viñëuù—Lord Viñëu; samasta—all; ägama—Agamas; vyäpäreñu—in actions; vivecana—conclusion; vyatikaram——joint; néteñu—brought; niçcéyate—is concluded.

In the Padma Puräëa, Vaiçäkha-mähätmya, in the conversation of Yama and a brähmaëa, it is said:

"In order to fool the moving and unmoving beings in the universe, the Puräëas and Agamas pretended to spend an entire kalpa debating the true identity of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. At the end they came to this conclusion: Lord Viñëu is the Supreme."


The debate of the scriptures here was only a joke on their part. They all knew what the conclusion would be.

Text 108

närasiàhe

satyaà satyaà punaù satyaà utkñipya bhujam ucyatevedäc chästraà paraà nästi. na devaù keçavät paraù

närasiàhe—in the Nåsiàha Puräëa; satyam—true; satyam—true; punaù—again; satyam—true; utkñipya—throwing up; bhujam—arms; ucyate—is said; vedät—than the Vedas; çästram—scripture; param—better; na—not; asti—is; na—not; devaù—Deity; keçavät—than Lord Kåñëa; paraù—better.

In the Nåsiàha Puräëa it is said:

"Throwing my arms in the air, I proclaim: It is true! It is true! It is true! No scripture is better than the Vedas! No Deity is above Lord Kåñëa!"

Text 109

yataù pädme

arir mitraà viñaà pathyaà adharmo dharmatäà vrajetsu-prasanne håñékeçe viparéte viparyayaù

yataù—because; pädme—in the Padma Puräëa; ariù—enemy; mitram—friend; viñam—poison; pathyam—healthy food; adharmaù—impiety; dharmatäm—piety; vrajet—becomes; su-prasanne—pleased; håñékeçe—when Lord Kåñëa is; viparéte—reversed; viparyayaù—the opposite.


"When Lord Kåñëa is pleased enemies can become friends, poison can become healthy food, sin can become saintliness. Everything can become its opposite."

Text 110

tatraiva çré-bhagavad-väkyaà

man-nimittaà kåtaà päpaà api dharmäya kalpatemäm anädåtya dharmo 'pi päpaà syän mat-prabhävataù

tatra—there; eva—indeed; çré-bhagavad-väkyam—the words of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; man-nimittam—caused by Me; kåtam—done; päpam—sin; api—even; dharmäya—for religion; kalpate—becomes suited; mäm—Me; anädåtya—not respecting; dharmaù—religion; api—even; päpam—sin; syät—becomes; mat—of Me; prabhävataù—by the power.

In the Padma Puräëa the Supreme Personality of Godhead said:

"If one sins for My sake his sins become pious deeds. If one refuses to worship Me, then by My power his pious deeds become sins."

Text 111

ata evoktaà skändhe çré-brahma-närada-samväde

väsudevaà parityajya yo 'nya-devam upäsatesva-mätaraà parityajya çvapacéà vandate hi saù

ata eva—therefore; uktam—said; skändhe—in the Skanda Puräëa; çré-brahma-närada-samväde—in the conversation of Brahmä and Närada; väsudevam—Lord Kåñëa; parityajya—rejecting; yaù—one who; anya-devam—another deity; upäsate—worships; sva-mätaram—his own mother; parityajya—rejecting; çvapacém—a dogeater woman; vandate—bows before; hi—indeed; saù—he.

In the Skanda Puräëa, in a conversation of Brahmä and Närada it is said:

"One who rejects Lord Kåñëa and worships another deity rejects his own mother and worships a dogeater woman."

Text 112

tatraivänyatra

väsudevaà parityajya yo 'nya-devam upäsatetyaktvämåtaà sa müòhätmä bhuìkte halahalaà viñaà

tatra—there; eva—indeed; anyatra—in another place; väsudevam—Lord Kåñëa; parityajya—rejecting; yaù—one who; anya-devam—another deity; upäsate—worships; tyaktvä—rejecting; amåtam—nectar; sa—he; müòhätmä—bewildered; bhuìkte—drinks; halahalam—halahala; viñam—poison.

In another place in the Skanda Puräëa it is said:

"One who rejects Lord Kåñëa and worships another deity rejects nectar and drinks poison."

Text 113

mahäbhärate

yas tu viñëuà parityajya mohäd anyam upäsatesa hema-räçim utåsjya päàçu-räçià jighåkñati

mahäbhärate—in the Mahabharata; yaù—one who; tu—indeed; viñëum—Lord Viñëu; parityajya—rejecting; mohät—out of bewilderment; anyam—another; upäsate—worships; sa—he; hema-räçim—a pile of gold; utåsjya—rejecting; päàçu-räçim—a pile of stool; jighåkñati—wishes to grasp.

In the Mahäbhärata it is said:

"One who out of bewilderment rejects Lord Kåñëa and worships someone else rejects a heap of gold and embraces a heap of stool.

Text 114

anädåtya tu yo viñëuà anya-devaà samäçrayetgaìgämbhasaù sa tåñëärto måga-tåñëäà pradhävati

anädåtya—not worshiping; tu—indeed; yaù—one who; viñëum—Lord Viñëu; anya-devam—another deity; samäçrayet—takes shelter; gaìgämbhasaù—the water of the Gaìgä; sa—he; tåñëärtaù—tortured with thirst; måga-tåñëäm—a mirage; pradhävati—runs.

"One who, refusing to worship Lord Viñëu, takes shelter of a demigod is a person tortured with thirst who leaves the Gaìgä's waters and runs after a mirage."

Text 115

païcarätre

yo mohäd viñëum anyena héna-devena durmatiù

sädhäraëaà sakåd brüte so 'ntyajo näntyajo 'ntyajaù

païcarätre—in the Pancaratra; yaù—one who; mohät—out of illusion; viñëum—Lord Viñëu; anyena—another; héna-devena—insignificant demigod; durmatiù—fool; sädhäraëam—equality; sakåt—at once; brüte—says; saù—he; antyajaù—an outcaste; na—not; antyajaù—an outcaste; antyajaù—an outcaste.


h to be an outcaste."

Text 116

vaiñëava-tantre

na labheyur punar bhaktià harer aikäntikéà jaòäùekägra-manasaç cäpi viñëu-sämänya-darçinaù

vaiñëava-tantre—in the Vaiñëava-tantra; na—not; labheyuù—attain; punaù—again; bhaktim—devotional service; hareù—to Lord Kåñëa; aikäntikém—unalloyed; jaòäù—fools; ekägra-manasaç—minds fixed on one point; ca—and; api—also; viñëu-sämänya-darçinaù—see that Lord Viñëu is equal.

In the Vaiñëava-tantra it is said:

"Even though they may meditate with single-pointed attention, the stunted fools who think Lord Kåñëa and the many demigods are equals will not attain pure devotion to Lord Kåñëa."

Text 117

anyatra ca

yas tu näräyaëaà devaà brahma-rudrädi-daivataiùsamatvenaiva vékñeta sa päñaëòé bhavet sadä

anyatra—in another place; ca—and; yaù—any peeson; tu—however; näräyaëam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of such demigods as Brahmä and Çiva; devam—the Lord; brahma—Lord Brahmä; rudra—Lord Çiva; ädi—and others; daivataiù—with such demigods; samatvena—on an equal level; eva—certainly; vékñeta—observes; sa—such a person; päñaëòé—päñaëòé; bhavet—must be; sadä—always.

In another place it is said:

"A person who considers demigods like Brahmä and Çiva to be on an equal level with Lord Näräyaëa is to be considered an offender and an atheist."*

Text 118

sahasra-näma-stoträdau çlokaughä santi cedåçäùviçeñataù sattva-niñöhaiù sevyo viñëur na cäparaù

sahasra-näma-stoträdau—in the beginning of the Sahasra-näma prayers; çloka—of verses; aughäù—floods; santi—are; ca—and; édåçäù—like this; viçeñataù—specifically; sattva-niñöhaiù—by they who are in the mode of goodness; sevyaù—to be served; viñëuù—Lord Viñëu; na—not; ca—and; aparaù—another.

In the Sahasra-näma and other prayers there is a great flood of verses like these, verses affirming the they who are in the mode of pure goodness should worship Lord Viñëu and no one else.


In the Båhat-sahasra-näma-stotra, Lord Çiva affirms:

nävaiñëaväya dätavyaà vikalpopahatätmanebhakti-çraddhä-vihénäya viñëu-sämänya-darçine

"These thousand names should not be given to one who is not a devotee of Lord Viñëu, to one whose heart is destroyed by mental speculation, to one who has no faith in devotional service, or to one who thinks the demigods are equal to Lord Viñëu."

At the end of those prayers Goddess Durgä also affirms:

aho sarveçvaro viñëuù sarva-devottamottamaùjagad-ädi-gurur müòhaiù sämänya iva vékñyate

"Lord Viñëu is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of all the demigods, the first spiritual master of the universe. Only fools think the demigods are His equals."

Lord Çiva again affirms:

na yänti tat-paraà çreyo viñëuà sarveçvareçvaramsarva-bhävair anäçritya puräëaà puruñottamam

"They who do not wholeheartedly take shelter of Lord Viñëu, the master of all the demigods, the ancient Supreme Personality of Godhead, do not attain the most auspicious condition of life.

tam eva tapasä nityaà bhajämi staumi cintayetenädvitéya-mahimä jagat-püjyo 'smi pärvati

"With great austerities I worship Him always. I glorify Him. I meditate on Him. O Pärvaté, it is only because I always chant His peerless glories that I am worshiped in this world."

In the description of the Lord's holy names it is said:

sarva-devaika-çaraëaà sarva-devaika-devataàsürya-koöi-pratékäço yama-koöi-duräsadaù

"Lord Viñëu is the the shelter of all the demigods. He is the master of all the demigods. He is more splendid than many millions of suns. He is more invincible than many millions of Yamas.

brahma-koöi-jagat-srañöä väyu-koöi-mahä-balaùkoöéndu-jagad-änandé

çambhu-koöi-maheçvaraù

"He is the creator of many millions of Brahmäs and universes. He is stronger than many millions of Väyus. His happinesses are greater than those of many millions of Indras. He is more powerful than many millions of Çivas."

At the end of the Båhat-sahasra-näma, Goddess Durgä says:

aho bata mahat kañöaà samasta-sukhade harauvidyamäne 'pi sarveçe müòhäù kliçyanti saàsåtau

"Ah! How sad it is! Even though Lord Kåñëa, who is the controller of all, and who yearns to give happiness to everyone, is personally present, the fools insist that they must continue to suffer in this world of birth and death.

yam uddiçya sadä nätho maheço 'pi dig-ambaraùjaöä-bhäsmänuliptäìgas tapasvé vékñate janaiù

"It is to attain Lord Viñëu that the demigod Çiva performs austerities, his hair matted and his naked body covered with ashes. That is why the people see Lord Çiva in that way.

tato 'dhiko 'sti ko devo lakñmé-käntän madhu-dviñaù

"What demigod is superior to Lord Kåñëa, the husband of the goddess of fortune, the killer of the demon Madhu?"

In the beginning of the Laghu-sahasra-näma it is said:

paramaà yo mahat-tejaù paramaà yo mahat-tapaùparamaà yo mahad brahma paramaà yo paräyaëam

"Lord Viñëu is the most powerful. He is the most glorious. He is the Supreme Brahman. Attaining Him is the supreme goal of life.

paviträëäà pavitraà yo maìgalänäà ca maìgalamdaivataà devatänäà ca bhütänäà yo 'vyayaù pitä

"He is the purest of the pure. He is the most auspicious of the auspicious. He is the master of the demigods. He is the eternal father of all that live."

At the end of the Laghu-sahasra-näma it is said:

dyauù sa-candrärka-nakñaträ khaà diço bhür mahodadhiùväsudevasya véryeëa vidhåtäni mahätmanaù

"It is by the power of Lord Väsudeva that the sky, sun, moon, stars, ether, directions, earth, and the great oceans are established in their places."

Text 119

tathä ca hari-vaàçe çré-çiva-väkyaà

harir eva sadärädhyo bhavadbhiù sattva-saàsthitaiùviñëu-mantraà sadä vipräù paöhadhvaà dhyäta keçavam iti

tathä—so; ca—and hari-vaàçe—in the Hari-vaàça; çré-çiva-väkyam—the statement of Lord Çiva; hariù—Lord Kåñëa; eva—indeed; sadä—always; ärädhyaù—to be worshiped; bhavadbhiù—by you; sattva-saàsthitaiù—situated in the mode of goodness; viñëu-mantram—the mantras of Lord Viñëu; sadä—always; vipräù—O brähmaëas; paöhadhvaàyou should chant; dhyäta—you should meditate; keçavam—on Lord Kåñëa; iti—thus.

In the Hari-vaàça, Lord Çiva says:

"O brähmaëas in the mode of pure goodness, please always worship Lord Kåñëa. Please always chant the mantras of Lord Kåñëa. Please always meditate on Lord Kåñëa."

Text 120

édåì-mähätmya-väkyeñu saìgåhéteñu sarvataùgrantha-bähulya-doñaù syäl likhyante 'pekñitäni tat

édåk—like this; mähätmya—of the glories; väkyeñu—in the words; saìgåhéteñu—accepted; sarvataù—in all respects; grantha—books; bähulya—abundance; doñaù—fault; syät—may be; likhyante—are written; apekñitäni—in this regard; tat—that.

Here there is a problem. The problem is that very many books have been written describing the Lord's glories in this way.


Many suitable passages could be quoted here. Unfortunately. I cannot quote them all.

Text 121

atha çré-vaiñëava-mantra-mähätmyam

ägame

manträn çré-mantra-räjädin vaiñëavän gurv-anugrahätsarvaiçvaryaà japan präpya yäti viñëoù paraà padam

atha—now; çré-vaiñëava—of Lord Viñëu; mantra—of the mantras; mähätmyam—the glory; ägame—in the Agama-çästra; manträn—the mantras; çré-mantra—of mantras; räja—the king; ädén—beginning with; vaiñëavän—of Lord Viçnu; gurv-anugrahät—by teh mercy of the spiritual master; sarvaiçvaryam—all glory and opulence; japan—chanting; präpya—attaining; yäti—go; viñëoù—of Lord Viñëu; param—to the transcendental; padam—abode.

The Glories of the Mantras of Lord Viñëu

In the Agama-çästra it is said:

"They who, by the mercy of the spiritual master, chant the mantras of Lord Viñëu, which are the kings of all mantras, attain all glory and opulence and go to the supreme abode of Lord Viñëu.

Text 122

puëyaà varña-sahasrair yaù kåtaà su-vipulaà tapaùjapanti vaiñëavän manträn naräs te loka-pävanäù

puëyam—piety; varña-sahasraiù—by a thousand years; yaù—who; kåtam—attained; su-vipulam—very great; tapaù—austerities; japanti—chant; vaiñëavän—of Lord Viñëu; manträn—mantras; naräù—people; te—they; loka-pävanäù—purifiers of the worlds.

"They who chant the mantras of Lord Viñëu attain the pious results of a thousand years of austerities. They become the purifiers of the worlds."

Text 123

vaiñëave ca

prajapan vaiñëavän manträn yaà yaà paçyanti cakñuñäsadä vä saàspåçet sadyo mucyate 'sau mahä-bhayät

vaiñëave—in the Vaiñëava Tantra; ca—and; prajapan—chantign; vaiñëavän—of Lord Viñëu; manträn—mantras; yaà yam—whatever; paçyanti—see; cakñuñä—with eyes; sadä—always; vä—or; saàspåçet—touch; sadyaù—always; mucyate—is released; asau—he; mahä-bhayät—from great fear.

In the Vaiñëava-çästra it is said:

"A person who, chanting the mantras of Lord Viñëu, sees or touches the Lord, becomes freed from very terrible fears."

Text 124

likhyate viñëu-manträëäà mahimätha viçeñataùtätparyataù çré-gopäla- mantra-mähätmya-puñöaye

likhyate—is written; viñëu-manträëäm—of the mantras of Lord Viñëu; mahimä—the glory; atha—then; viçeñataù—specifically; tätparyataù—from the explanation; çré-gopäla-mantra-mähätmya-puñöaye—for expounding the glories of the Çré Gopäla mantra.

Now I will write explaining the glories of some specific mantras of Lord Viñëu. I will begin by glorifying the Çré Gopäla-mantra.


Here someone may ask: Why do you begin by describing the worship of the eighteen-syllable Gopäla-mantra? Why do you not begin with some other mantra? To this I reply. lord Gopäla is the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, the source of all incarnations. Çrémad-Bhägavatam 1.3.28 explains:

kåñëas tu bhagavän svayam

"Lord Çré Kåñëa is the original Personality of Godhead."*

The various incarnations of the Lord are very glorious, but the original form of the Lord, the source of the incarnations, is the most glorious.

Texts 125-127

padma-puräëe devadüta-vikuëòala-samväde

säìgaà samudraà sannyäsaà sa-åñi-cchanda-daivatamsa-dékñävadhi sa-dhyänaà sa-yantraà dvädaçäkñaram

añöäkñaraà ca mantreñäà ye japanti narottamäùtän dåñövä brahma-hä çudhyet te yato viñëavaù svayam

çaìkhinaç cakriëo bhütvä brahmäyur vana-mälinaùvasanti vaiñëave loke viñëu-rüpeëa te naräù

padma-puräëe—in rhe Padma Puräëa; devadüta-vikuëòala-samväde—in the conversation of Devaduta and Vikundala; säìgam——with angas; samudram—with mudras; sannyäsam—with nyasas; sa-åñi-cchanda-daivatam—with åñi, cchandaù, and daivata; sa-dékñävadhi—with initiation; sa-dhyänam—with meditation; sa-yantram—with yantras; dvädaçäkñaram;—twelve-syllable; añöäkñaram—eight-syylable; ca—and; mantreçam— the king of mantras; ye—they who; japanti—chant; narottamäù—the best of men; tän—them; dåñövä—seeing; brahma-hä—one who has killed a brähmaëa; çudhyet—becomes purified; te—they; yataù—from which; viñëavaù—like Lord Viñëu; svayam—personally; çaìkhinaç—holding conchshells; cakriëaù—holding discs; bhütvä—becoming; brahmäyuù—spiritual; vana-mälinaù—wearing forest garlands; vasanti—reside; vaiñëave—of Lord Viñëu; loke—in the realm; viñëu-rüpeëa—with forms like that of Lord Viñëu; te—they; naräù—people.

In the Padma Puräëa, in the conversation of Devadüta and Vikuëòala, it is said:

"They who with aìgas, mudräs, nyäsas, åñi, chandaù, daivata, initiation, meditation, and yantra, chant the twelve-syllable and eight-syllable mantras are the best of men. Seeing them, a killer of brähmaëas becomes purified. Holding conchshells and discs, wearing forest garlands, and manifesting spiritual forms like Lord Viñëu's, they reside in Lord Viñëu's transcendental abode."

Text 128

tatraiva dvädaçäkñarasya caturtha-skandhe çré-dhruvaà prati çré-näradoktau

japaç ca paramo guhyaù çruyatäà me nåpätmajayaà sapta-rätraà prapaöhan pumän paçyati khecarän

tatra—there; eva—indeed; dvädaçäkñarasya—of the twelve-syllable mantra; caturtha-skandhe—in the Fourht Canto; çré-dhruvam—Çré Dhruva; prati—to; çré-näradoktau—in the statement of Çré Närada; japaç—the chanting mantra in this connection; ca—and; paramaù—very, very; guhyaù—confidential; çruyatäm—plwease hear; me—from me; nåpätmaja—O son of the king; yam—which; sapta-rätram—seven nights; prapaöhan—chanting; pumän—a person; paçyati—can see; khecarän—human beings who travel in space.

The Twelve-syllable Mantra

The twelve-syllable mantra is described in Çrémad-Bhägavatam (4.8.53), where Çré Närada Muni tells Dhruva Mahäräja:

"O son of the king, now I will speak unto you the mantra which is to be chanted with this process of meditation. One who carefully chants this mantra for seven nights can see the perfect human beings flying in the sky."*

Text 129

çré-viñëu-puräëe

gatvä gatvä nivartante candra-süryädayo grahäùadyäpi na nivartante dvädaçäkñara-cintakäù

çré-viñëu-puräëe—in Çré Viñëu Puräëa; gatvä—going; gatvä—going; nivartante—return; candra-süryädayaù—beginning with the moon and the sun; grahäù—planets; adya—today; api—even; na—not; nivartante—return; dvädaçäkñara-cintakäù—meditating on the twelve-syllable mantra.

In Çré Viñëu Puräëa it is said:

"The sun, moon, and other planets leave and the return again and again. They who meditate on the twelve-syllable mantra never return to this world of birth and death."

Text 130

añöäkñarasya yathä närada-païcarätre

trayo vedäù ñaò-aìgäni chandäàsi vividhaù suräùsarvam añöäkñaräntaù-sthaà yac cänyad api väì-mayam

añöäkñarasya—of the eight syllable mantra; yathä—as; närada-païcarätre—in the Närada-païcarätra; trayaù—three; vedäù—Vedas; ñaò-aìgäni—six limbs; chandäàsi—meters; vividhaù—various; suräù—demigods; sarvam—all; añöäkñaräntaù—in the eight-syllable mantra; stham—situated; yat—what; ca—and; anyat—another; api—even; väì-mayam—consisting of words.

The Eight-syllable Mantra

In the Närada-païcarätra it is said:

"The three Vedas, six Vedäìgas, poetry, demigods, words, and everything else, are all situated in the eight-syllable mantra."

Text 131

sarva-vedänta-särärthaù saàsärärëava-täraëaùgatir añöäkñaro nå[98]ëäà na punar-bhava-kaìkñiëäm

sarva-vedänta-särärthaù—the essenc eof the meaning of all Vedanta; saàsärärëava-täraëaù—the boat to cross the ocean of birth and death; gatiù—the goal; añöäkñaraù—the eight-syllable mantra; nå[98]ëäm—of men; na—not; punar-bhava-kaìkñiëäm—desiring to stay in the world of birth and death.

"The eight-syllable mantra is the essence of all Vedänta philosophy. It is a boat to cross the ocean of repeated birth and death. It is the path followed by they who wish never to be born again.

Text 132

yaträñöäkñara-saàsiddho mahä-bhägo mahéyate

na tatra saïcariñyanti vyädhi-durbhikña-taskaräù

yatra—where; añöäkñara-saàsiddhaù—perfect in the eight-syllable mantra; mahä-bhägaù—very fortunate; mahéyate—is glorified; na—not; tatra—there; saïcariñyanti—will go; vyädhi-durbhikña-taskaräù—dosease, poevrty, and thieves.

"A country that honors a person perfect in chanting the eight-syllable mantra will not be touched by disease, poverty, or theft.

Text 133

deva-dänava-gandharväù siddha-vidyadharädayaùpraëamanti mahä-mänaà añöäkñara-vidaà naram

deva-dänava-gandharväù—the demigods, demons, and gandharvas; siddha-vidyadharädayaù—the beings headed by siddhas and vidyadharas; praëamanti—bow down; mahä-mänam—to the exalted person; añöäkñara-vidam—who knows the eight-syllable mantra; naram—person.

"The demigods, demons, Gandharvas, Siddhas, Vidyädharas, and others respectfully bow before a person exalted with knowledge of the eight-syllable mantra.

Text 134

vyaktaà hi bhagavän eva säkñän näräyaëaù svayamañöäkñara-svarüpeëa mukheñu parivartate

vyaktam—manifested; hi—indeed; bhagavän—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; eva—indeed; säkñän—directly; näräyaëaù—Lord Näräyaëa; svayam—personally; añöäkñara—of the eight-syylable mantra; svarüpeëa—in the form; mukheñu—on the mouth; parivartate—goes.

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Näräyaëa, personally appears in the mouth as the eight-syllable mantra."

Text 135

padmottara-khaëòe

evam añöäkñaro mantro jïeyaù sarvärtha-sädhakaùsarva-duùkha-haraù çrémän sarva-manträtmakaù çubhaù

padmottara-khaëòe—in the Uttara-khanda opf the Padma Puräëa; evam—thus; añöäkñaraù—the eight-syllable mantra; mantraù—mantra; jïeyaù—to be known; sarvärtha-sädhakaù—fulfilling all desires; sarva-duùkha-haraù—removing asll sufferings; çrémän—glorious; sarva-manträtmakaù—the heart of all mantras; çubhaù—beautiful.

In the Padma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, it is said:

"The glorious and beautiful eight-syllable mantra fulfills all desires and removes all sufferings. It is the heart of all mantras."

Text 136

liìga-puräëe

kim anyair bahubhir mantraiù kim anyair bahubhir vrataiùnamo näräyaëayeti mantraù sarvärtha-sädhakaù

liìga-puräëe—in the Liìga Puräëa; kim—what is the use?; anyaiù—of other; bahubhiù—many; mantraiùmantras; kim—what is the use?; anyaiù—of other; bahubhiù—many; vrataiù—vows; namaù—obeisances; näräyaëäya—to Lord Näräyaëa; iti—thus; mantraù—mantra; sarvärtha-sädhakaù—fulfilling all desires.

In the Liìga Puräëa it is said:

"What is the use of other mantras? What is the use of other vows? The mantra Namo Näräyaëäya (Obeisances to Lord Näräyaëa) fulfills all desires."

Text 137

tasmät sarveñu käleñu namo näräyaëeti yaùjapet sa yäti viprendra viñëu-lokaà sa-bandhavaù

tasmät—therefore; sarveñu—at all; käleñu—times; namaù—obeisances; näräyaëeti—to Lord Näräyaëa; yaù—one who; japet—chants; sa—he; yäti—goes; viprendra—O king of brähmaëas; viñëu-lokam—to the abode of Lord Viñëu; sa-bandhavaù—with his relatives.

"Therefore, O king of brähmaëas, one who always chants Namo Näräyaëäya goes with his kinsmen to the abode of Lord Viñëu."

Text 138

bhaviñya-puräëe

añöäkñaro mahä-mantraù sarva-päpa-haraù paraùsarveñäà viñëu-manträëäà räjatve parikértitaù

bhaviñya-puräëe—in the Bhaviñya Puräëa; añöäkñaraù—eight-syllable; mahä-mantraù—great mantra; sarva-päpa-haraù—remvoing all, sins; paraù—great; sarveñäm—of all; viñëu-manträëäm—Viñëu mantras; räjatve—as a king; parikértitaù—glorified.

In the Bhaviñya Puräëa it is said:

"The great eight-syllable mantra removes all sins. Of all Viñëu-mantras it is said to be the king."

Text 139

çré-çuka-vyäsa-samväde ca

namo näräyaëäyeti mantraù sarvärtha-sädhakaùbhaktänäà japatäà täta svarga-mokña-phala-pradaù

çré-çuka-vyäsa-samväde—in a conversatio of Çré Çuka and Çré Vyäsa; ca—and; namo näräyaëayeti mantraù—the mantra Namo Näräyaëäya; sarvärtha-sädhakaù—fulfilling all desires; bhaktänäm—of the devotees; japatäm—chanting; täta—O son; svarga-mokña-phala—the ruslt of all liberation; pradaù—giving.

In a conversation of Çré Çuka and Çré Närada it is said:

"O son, the mantra Namo Näräyaëäya fulfills all desires and gives all kinds of liberation to they who chant it with devotion.

Text 140

eña eva paro mokña eña svarga udähåtaùsarva-veda-rahasyebhyaù sära eña samuddhåtaù

eña—this; eva—indeed; paraù—supreme; mokña—liberation; eña—thus; svarga—Svarga; udähåtaù—is siad; sarva-veda—of all the Vedas; rahasyebhyaù—from the secrets; sära—the best secret; eña—this; samuddhåtaù—said.

"This mantra is said to be final liberation. It is said to be residence in Svargaloka. It is said to be the greatest secret in the Vedas.

Text 141

viñëunä vaiñëavänäà tu hitäya manunä puräkértitaù sarva-päpa-ghnaù sarva-käma-pradäyakaù

viñëunä—by Lord Viñëu; vaiñëavänäm—of the devotees; tu—indeed; hitäya—for the welfare; manunä—by Manu; purä—in ancient times; kértitaù—said; sarva-päpa-ghnaù—killing all sins; sarva-käma-pradäyakaù—fulfilling all desires.

"In ancient times Lord Viñëu gave this mantra to benefit His devotees. Manu declared that this mantra destroys all sins and fulfills all desires."

Text 142

näräyaëäya nama ity ayam eva satyaà saàsära-ghora-viña-saàharaëäya mantraùçåëvantu satya-matayo muditäs tarägä uccais taram upadiçämy aham ürdhva-bähuù

näräyaëäya nama—obesiances to Lord Näräyaëa; ity—thus; ayam—this; eva—indeed; satyam—truth; saàsära-ghora-viña—the terrible poison of repeated birth and detah; saàharaëäya—for removing; mantraù—mantra; çåëvantu—please hear; satya-matayaù—O saintly ones; muditäù—happy; tarägä—renounced; uccais taram—loudly; upadiçämy—declare; aham—I; ürdhva-bähuù—with arms raised.

It is also said:

"To counteract the terrible poison of repeated birth and death, austere, intelligent, pure-hearted men should always chant the mantra Namo Näräyaëäya. Raising my arms, I loudly declare this."

Text 143

bhütvordhva-bähur adyähaà satya-pürvaà bravémi vaùhe putra-siñyäù çåëuta na mantro 'stäkñarät paraù

bhütvä—bvecoming; urdhva-bähuù—with raised arms; adya—today; aham—I; satya-pürvam—the truth; bravémi—speak; vaù—to you; he—O; putra-siñyäù—disciples; çåëuta—please hear; na—not; mantraù—a mantra; astäkñarät—than

the eight-syllable mantra; paraù—better.

It is also said:

"O sons and disciples, raising my arms, I will declare to you the truth: No mantra is better than the eight-syllable mantra!"

Text 144

ata evoktaà gäruòe

äséno vä çayäno vä tiñöhäno yatra tatra vänamo näräyaëayeti mantraika-çarano bhavet

ata eva—therefore; uktam—said; gäruòe—in the Garuòa Puräëa; äsénaù—sitting; vä—or; çayänaù—reclining; vä—or; tiñöhänaù—standing; yatra—where; tatra—there; vä—or; namo näräyaëaya iti—the mantra Namo Näräyaëäya; mantraika-çaranaù—taking shelter of that mantra; bhavet—should be.

In the Garuòa Puräëa it is said:

"Standing, sitting, or reclining, wherever one is, one should take shelter of the mantra Namo Näräyaëäya."

Text 145

atha çré-närasiàhänuñöubùa-mantra-räjasya mähätmyaà

täpanéya-çrutiñu

devä ha prajäpatim abruvan tasya anuñöubùa-mantra-räjasya närasiàhasya phalaà no brühéti. sa hoväca prajäpatiù ya etaà mantra-räjaà närasiàham anuñöubhaà nityam adhéte, sa äditya-püto bhavati, so 'gni-püto bhavati, sa väyu-püto bhavati, sa sürya-püto bhavati, sa candra-püto bhavati, sa satya-püto bhavati, sa brahma-püto bhavati, sa viñëu-püto bhavati, sa rudra-püto bhavati, sa sarva-püto bhavati.

atha—now; çré-närasiàhänuñöubùa-mantra-räjasya—of the eight-syllable Nåsiàha-mantra; mähätmyam—the glory; täpanéya-çrutiñu—in the Nåsiàha-täpané Upaniñad; devä—the demigods; ha—indeed; prajäpatim—to Prajäpati; abruvan—said; tasya—of Him; anuñöubùa—in the meter anusthubh; mantra-räjasya—the king of mantras; närasiàhasya—of Lord Nåsiàha; phalam—the reuslt; naù—to us; brühi—please tell; iti—thus; sa—he; ha—indeed; uväca—said; prajäpatiù—Prajäpati; ya—who; etam—this; mantra-räjam—king of mantras; närasiàham—of Lord Nåsiàha; anuñöubham—in the meter Anusthubh; nityam—always; adhéte—recites; sa—he; äditya-pütaù—pure like the sun; bhavati—becomes; saù—he; agni-pütaù—pure likem fire; bhavati—becomes; sa—he; väyu-pütaù—pure,like the wind; bhavati—becomes; sa—he; sürya-pütaù—pure like the4 sun; bhavati—becomes; sa—he; candra-pütaù—pure like the moon; bhavati—becomes; sa—he; satya-pütaù—pure liek truth; bhavati—becomes; sa—he; brahma-pütaù—pure like Brahmä; bhavati—becomes; sa—he; viñëu-pütaù—pure like Viñëu; bhavati—becomes; sa—he; rudra-pütaù—pure like Çiva; bhavati—becomes; sa—he; sarva-pütaù—pure of everything; bhavati—becomes.

The Glory of the Regal Nåsiàha-mantra in the Meter Anuñöubh

In the Nåsiàha-täpané Upaniñad it is said:

"The demigods approached Lord Brahmä and said: Please describe to us the result of chanting the regal Nåsiàha-mantra in the meter anuñöubh. "Lord Brahmä replied: One who regularly chants the regal Nåsiàha-mantra in the meter anuñöubh becomes pure like the demigods. He becomes pure like fire. He becomes pure like the wind. He becomes pure like the sun. He becomes pure like the moon. He becomes pure like the truth. He becomes pure like Brahmä. He becomes pure like Viñëu. He becomes pure like Çiva. He becomes purified of all sins."

Text 146

tatraivänte

anupanéta-çatam ekam ekenopanétena tat-samam, upanéta-çatam ekam ekena gåhasthena tat-samam, gåhastha-çatam ekam ekena vanaprasthena tat-samam, vanaprastha-çatam ekam ekena yatinä tat-samam. yaténäà tu çataà pürëa-rudra-japakena tat-samam, rudra-japaka-çatam ekem ekenätharväìgirasa-çäkhädhyäpakena tat-samam, atharväìgirasa-çäkhädhyäpaka-çatam ekam ekena mantra-räjädhyäpakena tat-samam, tad vä etat paraà dhäma mantra-räjädhyäpakasya yatra na duùkhädi, yatra na süryo bhäti, yatra na väyur väti, yatra na candramäs tapati, yatra na nakñaträëi bhänti, yatra nägnir dahati, yatra na måtyuù praviçati, yatra na doñaù. tat sadänandaà çäçvataà çäntaà sadä-çivaà brahmädi-vanditaà yogi-dhyeyam, yatra gatvä na nivartante yoginaù. tad etad åcäbhyuktaà tad viñëoù paramaà padaà sadä paçyanti sürayaù, divéva cakñur ätatam. tad vipräso vipanyavo jägåväàsaù samindhate, viñëor yat paramaà padam. tatra—there; eva—indeed; ante—at the end; anupanéta—not initiated as a brähmaëa; çatam——a hundred; ekam—one; ekena—with one; upanétena—brähmaëa; tat-samam,—equal to that; upanéta-çatam—of a hundred brähmaëas; ekam—one; ekena—with one; gåhasthena—householder; tat-samam,—equal; gåhastha-çatam—a hundred householders; ekam—one; ekena—with one; vanaprasthena—vanaprastha; tat-samam,—equal; vanaprastha-çatam—a hundred vanaprasthaS; ekam—one; ekena—with one; yatinä—sannyasi; tat-samam.—equal; yaténäm—of sannyasis; tu—indeed; çatam—a hundred; pürëa-rudra-japakena—chanting the names of Lord Çiva; tat-samam—equal; rudra-japaka-çatam—of a hundred who chant the names of Lord Çiva; ekem—one; ekena—with one; atharväìgirasa-çäkhädhyäpakena—teacher of the Atharva Veda Angirasa; tat-samam,—equal; atharväìgirasa-çäkhädhyäpaka—of teachers of the Atharva angirasa; çatam—a hundred; ekam—one; ekena—with one; mantra-räjädhyäpakena—teacher of the king of mantras; tat-samam,—equal; tat—that; vä—indeed; etat—that; param—supreme; dhäma—abode; mantra-räjädhyäpakasya—of a teacher of the king of mantras; yatra—where; na—not; duùkhädi,—beginning with suffering; yatra—where; na—not; süryaù—the sun; bhäti,—shines; yatra—where; na—not; väyuù—the wind; väti,—blows; yatra—where; na—not; candramäù—the moon; tapati,—shines; yatra—where; na—not; nakñaträëi—the stars; bhänti,—shine; yatra—where; na—not; agniù—fire; dahati,—burns; yatra—where; na—not; måtyuù—death; praviçati,—enters; yatra—where; na—no; doñaù.—faults; tat—that; sadänandam—eternal bliss; çäçvatam—eternal; çäntam—peace; sadä-çivam—eternal asupiciousness; brahmädi-vanditam—glorified by Brahmä and the demigods; yogi-dhyeyam,—meditated on by the yogis; yatra—where; gatvä—going; na—not; nivartante—return; yoginaù.—the yogis; tat—that; etat—that; åcä—with the Åg mantras; abhyuktam—endowed; tat—taht; viñëoù—of Lord Viñëu; paramam—the supreme; padam—abode; sadä—always; paçyanti—sees; sürayaù,—the demigods; divi—in the sky; iva—like; cakñuù—eye; ätatam.—manifested; tat—that; vipräsothe brähmaëas; vipanyavaù—the praiseworthy; jägåväàsaù—spiritually awake; samindhate,—they reveal; viñëoù—of Viñëu; yat—whose; paramam—supreme; padam—abode.

At the end of the Nåsiàha-täpané Upaniñad it is said:

"One brähmaëa is equal to a hundred non-brähmaëas. One brähmaëa householder is equal to a hundred other brähmaëas. One vänaprastha is equal to a hundred householders. One sannyäsé is equal to a hundred vänaprasthas. One chanter of Çiva-mantras is equal to a hundred sannyäsés. One teacher of the Atharväìgirasa-çäkhä is equal to a hundred chanters of Çiva-mantras. One teacher of the regal Nåsiàha-mantra is equal to a hundred teachers of the Atharväìgirasa-çäkhä. A teacher of the regal Nåsiàha-mantra goes to a realm where there are no sufferings, where the sun does not shine, where the wind does not blow, where the moon and the stars do not shine, where fire does not burn, where death cannot enter, where there are no faults, where there is eternal bliss, eternal, peace, and eternal auspiciousness, a place worshiped by Brahmä and the demigods, a place meditated on by the yogés, a place where the yogé go and never return, a place glorified in the Åg Veda with the words:

"Just as the sun's rays in the sky are extended to the mundane vision, so in the same way the wise and learned devotees always see the supreme abode of Lord Viñëu. because those highly praiseworthy and spiritually awake brähmaëas are able to see the spiritual world, they are also able to reveal the supreme abode of Lord Viñëu."*

Text 147

atha çré-räma-manträëäà mähätmyam

agastya-saàhitäyäà

sarveñu mantra-vargeñu çreñöhaà vaiñëavam ucyategäëapatyeñu çaiveñu çäkta-saureñv abhéñöadam

atha—now; çré-räma-manträëäm—of the Çré Räma-mantras; mähätmyam—the glory; agastya-saàhitäyäm—in the

Agastya-samhita; sarveñu—in all; mantra-vargeñu—mantras; çreñöham—the best; vaiñëavam—of Lord Viñëu; ucyate—is said; gäëapatyeñu—in Gaëeça-mantras; çaiveñu—in çiva-mantras; çäkta-saureñu—in Durgä-mantras and Süryua-mantras; abhéñöadam—fulfilling desires.

The Glories of the Çré Räma-mantra


"Of all mantras the mantras glorifying Lord Viñëu are said to be the best. Viñëu-mantras fulfill desires better than the mantras glorifying Gaëeça, Çiva, Durgä, or Sürya.

Text 148

vaiñëaveñv api mantreñu räma-mantraù phalädhikaùgäëapatyädi-mantreñu koöi-koöi-guëädhikaù

vaiñëaveñu—among the mantras of Lord Viñëu; api—even; mantreñu—among the mantras; räma-mantraù—the Räma-mantra; phalädhikaù—best at giving results; gäëapatyädi-mantreñu—than the mantras glorifying Gaëeça and the other demigods; koöi-koöi-guëädhikaù—many millions and millions of times more.

"Of all Viñëu-mantras the Räma-mantra gives the best results. It gives results many millions of millions of times better than the mantras of Gaëeça and the other demigods.

Text 149

vinaiva dékñäà viprendra puraçcaryäà vinaiva hivinaiva nyäsa-vidhinä japa-mätreëa siddhi-däù

vinä—without; eva—indeed; dékñäm—initiation; viprendra—O king of brähmaëas; puraçcaryäm—parscarana; vinä—without; eva—indeed; hi—indeed; vinä—without; eva—indeed; nyäsa-vidhinä—nyasa; japa-mätreëa—simply by chanting; siddhi-däù—giving perfection.

"O king of brähmaëas, without initiation, without puraçcaraëa, and without nyäsa, simply by chanting the Räma-mantra one attains perfection.

Text 150

mantreñv äçu svanäyäsa- phala-do 'yaà ñaò-akñaraùñaò-akñaro 'yaà mantras tu mahäghaugha-niväraëaù

mantreñu—in mantras; açu—quickly; svanäyäsa-phala-daù—giving results; ayam—this; ñaò—six; akñaraù—syllables; ñaò-akñaraù—six syllables; ayam—this; mantraù—mantra; tu—indeed; mahä—great; agha—of sins; augha—flood; niväraëaù—stopping.

"The six-syllable Räma-mantra quickly fulfills all desires. The six-syllable Räma-mantra destroys a flood of sins.

Texts 151 and 152

mantra-räja iti proktaù sarveñäm uttamottamaùdainaà dinaà tu duritaà

pakña-mäsartu-varña-jam

sarvaà dahati niùçeñaà tüläcalam ivänalaùbrahma-hatyä-sahasräëi jïänäjïäna-kåtäni ca

mantra—of mantras; räja—the king; iti—thus; proktaù—said; sarveñäm—of all; uttamottamaù—the best of the best; dainam—wretched condition; dinam—day; tu—indeed; duritam—sins; pakña—fortnight; mäsa—month; åtu—season; varña—year; jam—born; sarvam—all; dahati—burns; niùçeñam—completely; tüläcalam—a mountain of cotton; iva—like; analaù—a fire; brahma-hatyä-sahasräëi—the thousand murders of brähmaëas; jïäna—with knowledge; ajïäna—without knowledge; kåtäni—done; ca—and.

"The Räma-mantra is the king of mantras. It is the best of all. As a flame quickly burns up a mountain of cotton swabs, so does the Räma-mantra burn away the sins committed in all one's days, fortnights, months, seasons, and years. It burns away a thousand murders of brähmaëas and a host of sins committed consciously or unconsciously.

Text 153

svarëa-steya-surä-päna- guru-talpa-yutäni cakoöi-koöi-sahasräëi hy upapäpäni yäny api sarväëy api praëaçyanti räma-mantränukértanät

svarëa—of gold; steya—theft; surä—wine; päna—drinking; guru—of ther spiritual master; talpa—the bed; yutäni—endowed; ca——and; koöi-koöi—millions and millions; sahasräëi—thousands; hy—also; upapäpäni—sins; yäny—which; api—also; sarväëy—all; api—also; praëaçyanti—destroys; räma-mantränukértanät—by chanting the Räma-mantra.

"By chanting the Räma-mantra the sins of stealing gold, drinking liquor, committing adultery with the spiritual master's wife, and many thousands of millions of millions of other sins are all destroyed."

Text 154

tapanéya-çrutiñu ca

ya etat tärakaà brähmaëo nityam adhéte, sa päpmänäà tarati, sa måtyuà tarati, sa bhrüëa-hatyäà tarati, sa sarva-hatyäà tarati, sa saàsäraà tarati, sa sarvaà tarati, sa vimuktäçrito bhavati, so 'måtatvaà ca gacchati.

tapanéya-çrutiñu—in the Räma-täpané Upaniñad; ca—and; ya—what; etat—thus; tärakam—delivering; brähmaëaù—a brähmaëa; nityam—regularly; adhéte,—chants; sa—he; päpmänäm—sin; tarati,—crossess beyond; sa—he; måtyum—death; tarati,—crossess beyond; sa—he; bhrüëa-hatyäm—the sin of abortion; tarati,—crossess beyond; sa—he; sarva-hatyäm—mass-murders; tarati,—crossess beyond; sa—he; saàsäram—birth and death; tarati,—crossess beyonbd; sa—and; sarvam—all; tarati,—crossess beyond; sa—he; vimuktäçritaù—liberated; bhavati,—becomes; saù—he; amåtatvam—immortality; ca—and; gacchati—attains.

In the Räma-täpané Upaniñad it is said:

"A brähmaëa who regularly chants the Räma-mantra crosses beyond sin. He crosses beyond death. He crosses beyond the sin of performing an abortion. He crosses beyond the sins of mass-murder and genocide. He crosses beyond the world of repeated birth and death. He crosses beyond all that is inauspicious. He becomes liberated."

Text 155

atha çré-gopäladeva-mantra-mähätmyaà

mantras tu kåñëadevasya säkñäd bhagavato hareù

sarvävatära-béjasya sarvato véryavattamaù

atha—now; çré-gopäladeva-mantra-mähätmyam—the glory of the Gopäladeva-mantra; mantraù—mantra; tu—indeed; kåñëadevasya—of Lord Kåñëa; säkñät—directly; bhagavataù—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; hareù—Lord Hari; sarvävatära-béjasya—the seed of all incarnations; sarvataù—in all respects; véryavattamaù—the most powerful.

The Glories of the Gopäla-mantra

The mantra of Lord Kåñëa, who is the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, the seed of all incarnations, is the most powerful.

Text 156

tathä ca båhad-gautaméye çré-govinda-våndävanäkhye

sarveñäà mantra-varyäëäà çreñöho vaiñëava ucyateviçeñät kåñëa-manavo bhoga-mokñaika-sädhanam

tathä—so; ca—and; båhad-gautaméye—in the Båhad-gautaméya Tantra; çré-govinda-våndävanäkhye—in the portion named Govinda-Våndävana; sarveñäm—of all; mantra-varyäëäm—great mantras; çreñöhaù—the best; vaiñëava—mantra of Lord Viñëu; ucyate—is said; viçeñät—specifically; kåñëa-manavaù—the Kåñëa-mantra; bhoga-mokñaika-sädhanam—the abode of happiness and liberation.

In the Gautaméya Tantra it is said:

"Of all mantras the Viñëu-mantras are said to be the best. Of these the Kåñëa-mantras, which are the abode of happiness and liberation, are the best of all.

Text 157

yasya yasya ca mantrasya yo yo devas tathä punaùabhedät tan-manünäà ca devatä saiva bhäñyate

yasya yasya—of whatever; ca—and; mantrasya—mantra; yo yaù—whatever; devaù—demigod; tathä—so; punaù—again; abhedät—from being not different; tan-manünäm—of the mantras; ca—and; devatä—deity; sä—He; eva—indeed; bhäñyate—is said.

"Whatever the mantra and whoever the Deity, the mantra and its Deity are said to be non-different.

Text 158

kåñëa eva paraà brahma sac-cid-änanda-vigrahaùsmåti-mätreëa teñäà vai bhukti-mukti-phala-pradaù

kåñëa—Lord Kåñëa; eva—indeed; param brahma—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; sac-cid-änanda-vigrahaù—whose form is eternal and full of knowledeg and bliss; småti—by remembering; mätreëa—simply; teñäm—of them; vai—indeed; bhukti-mukti-phala-pradaù—giving the results of material happiness and liberation.

"Lord Kåñëa is the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, and His form is eternal and full of knowledge and bliss. Simply by remembering Him, one attains both material happiness and liberation.

Text 159

taträpi bhagavattäà sväà tanvato gopa-lélayätasya çreñöhatamä manträs teñv apy añöädaçäkñaraù

taträpi—still; bhagavattäm—the state of being the Supreme Personality of Godhead; sväm—own; tanvataù—manifesting; gopa-lélayä—with the pastime of a cowherd boy; tasya—of Him; çreñöhatamä—best; manträù—mantras; teñv—in them; apy—also; añöädaçäkñaraù—the eighteen-syllable mantra.

"In His original form He enjoys pastimes as a cowherd boy. The mantras glorifying Him are the best of mantras. Among them the eighteen-syllable mantra is especially to be noted."

Text 160 (a)

athäñöädaçäkñara-mantra-mähätmyam

tapanéya-çrutiñu

oà munayo ha vai brahmäëam ücuù. kaù paramo devaù? kuto måtyur bibheti? kasya jïänenäkhilaà vijïätaà bhavati? kenedaà viçvaà saàsaratéti?

atha—now; añöädaçäkñara-mantra—of the eighteen-syllable mantra; mähätmyam—the glory; tapanéya-çrutiñu—in Çré Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad; om—invoking auspiciousness by reciting the name of the Personality of Godhead; munayaù—sages; ha—indeed; vai— certainly; brahmäëam—Brahmä; ücuù—-adresses; kaù—who? paramaù devaù—is the Supreme Personality of Godhead; kutaù— of whom? måtyu—is death; bibheti—afraid; kasya—of whom?; jïänena—with the knowledge; akhilam—everything; vijïätam— known; bhavati—becomes; kena—by whom?; viçvam—is the universe; saàsarati—manifest; iti—thus.

The Glories of the Eighteen-syllable Mantra

In Çré Gopäla-täané Upaniñad (1.2) the eighteen-syllable mantra is described in the following words:

"Oà. Some sages said to the demigod Brahmä: Who is the the Supreme Personality of Godhead? Whom does death fear? By knowing whom does everything else become known? Who created this world?

Text 160 (b)

tad u hoväca brähmaëaù. kåñëo vai paramaà daivataà.govindän måtyur bibheti. gopéjanavallabha-jïänena tajjïätaà bhavati. svähayedaà saàsarati.

tat—to them; u—certainly; ha—indeed; uväca—said; brähmaëaù—Brahmä; kåñëaù—Krçëa; vai—certainly; paramam—the Supreme; daivatam—Personalityof Godhead; govindät—Govinda; måtyuù—death; bibheti—fears; gopéjananvallabha—of Gopéjanavallabha; jïänene—by the understanding; tat—that; jïätam—known; bhavati—becomes; svähayä—by pronouncing the syllable svähä; idam—this; saàsarati—became manifested.

"Brahmä replied to them: Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Death fears Govinda. By understanding Gopéjananavallabha everything becomes known. By pronouncing the word svähä the Personality of Godhead created the world.

Text 160 (c)

tad u hocuù. kaù kåñëo govindaç ca ko 'sav iti gopéjanavallabhaù kaù kä sväheti.

tat—that; u—certainly; ha—indeed; ücuù—they asked; kaù—Who?; kåñëaù—is Kåñëa; govindaù—govinda; ca—also; kaù—who?; asau—is He; iti—thus; gopéjanavallabhaù—Gopéjanavallabha; kaù—Who?; kä—who? svähä—Svähä; iti—thus.

"They then said: Who is Kåñëa? Who is Govinda? Who is Gopéjanavallabha? What is Svähä?

Text 160 (d)

tän uväca brähmaëaù. päpa-karñaëo go-bhümi-veda-vidito gopéjanävidyä kalä-prerakas tan-mäyä ceti, sakalaà paraà brahmaivaitat.

tän—to them; uväca—replied; brähmaëaù—Brahmä; päpa—sin; karñaëaù—removing; gaù—the cows; bhümi—land; veda—and Vedas; viditaù—celebrated; gopéjana—the gopés;avidyä—enchantment; kalä—forms; prerakaù—manifesting; tat—His; mäyä—potency; ca—also; iti—thus; sakalam—with all the parts; param—supreme; brahma—spirit; eva—certainly; etat—He.

"To them Brahmä said: Kåñëa means He who delivers from sin, Govinda means He who is famous on the earth, in the Vedas, and among the surabhi cows, Gopéjanavallabha means He who enchants the gopés, and Svähä means the potency of the Supreme. All these names refer to the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 160 (e)

yo dhyäyati rasayati bhajati so 'måto bhavati, so 'måto bhavati.

yaù—he who; dhyäyati—meditates; rasayati; glorifies; bhajati—and worships; saù—he; amåtaù—immortal; bhavati—becomes.

"One who meditates on this Supreme Personality of Godhead, glorifies Him, and worships Him, becomes liberated. He becomes liberated.

Text 160 (f)

te hocuù. kim tad-rüpaà? kim rasanaà? kathaà vä ho tad-bhajanaà? tat sarva-vividiñatäm äkhyähéti.

te—they; ha—certainly; ücuù—asked; kim—what?; tat—His; rüpam—form; kim—what?; rasanam—glorification; katham—what?; vä—or; ha u—certainly; tat—His; bhajanam—devotional service; tat—that; sarva—all; vividiçatäm—äkhyähi—please describe; iti—thus.

"They said: What is His form? What is His glorification? How does one worship Him? Please describe this to us.

Text 160 (g)

tad u hoväca hairaëyo gopa-veçam abhraà taruëaà kalpa-drumäçritam.

tat—that; u—certainly; ha—indeed; uväca—replied; hairaëyaù—Brahmä; gopa-veçam—in the form of a cowherd boy; abhram—like a dark rain-cloud; taruëam—youth; kalpa-druma—under a desire-tree; äçritam—staying;

"Brahmä said: He appears like a cowherd boy. His complexion is like a monsoon cloud.

Text 161 (a)

kià ca tatraivägre

bhaktir asya bhajanam tad ihämutropädhi-nairäsyenämusmin manaù-kalpanam etad eva naiñkärmyaà iti.

kià ca—furthermore; tatra—there; eva—indeed; agre—in the beginning; bhaktiù—devotional service; asya—his; bhajanam—worship; tat—that; iha—here; amutra—and inthe next life after death;upädhi-nairäsyena—with freedom from material desires; amusmin—in Him; manaù—of the mind; kalpanam—thought; etat—that; eva—certainly; naiçkarmyam—freedom fromthe bonds of fruitive reaction; iti—thus.

Çré Gopäla-täpané Upanisad (1.14-16) continues:

"Devotional service to Lord Kåñëa is performed when the heart no longer desires any material benefit to be obtained in this life or the next. This is freedom from the bonds of karma.

Text 161 (b)

kåñëaà taà viprä bahudhä yajanti, govindaà santaà bahudhärädhayanti gopéjanavallabho bhüvanäni dadhre svähäçrito jagad ejayat suretäù.

kåñëam—Kåñëa; tam—Him; vipräù—brähmaëas; badhudhä—repeatedly; yajanti—worship; govindam—Govinda; santam—eternal; bahudhä—repeatedly; ärädhayanti—worship; gopéjanavallabhaù—gopéjanavallabha; bhuvanäni—the living entities; dadhre—maintains; svähä—of innumerable transcendental potencies; äçritaù—the shelter; jagat—the material universe; ejayat—causes to move; suretäù—supremely powerful.

"Many brähmaëas worship Kåñëa. Many worship eternal Govinda. Gopéjanavallabha maintains the worlds. Powerful Svähä moves the universe.

Text 162

väyur yathaiko bhuvanaà praviñöo janye janye païca-rüpo babhüva. kåñëas tathaiko jagad-dhitärtham çabdenäsau païca-pado vibhätéti.

väyuù—air; yathä—just as; ekaù—one; bhuvanam—the universe; praviñöaù entered; janye janye—in the body of each living entity; païca—in five; rüpäù—forms; babhüva—became manifested; kåñëaù—Lord Kåñëa; tathä—in the same way; ekaù—one; jagat—of the universe; hita—artham—for the benefit; çabdena—as sound; asau—He; païca—in five; rüpäù—forms; vibhäti—became manifested; iti—thus.

"Although originally one, air becomes the five life-airs in the bodies of all living entities. In the same way, for the benefit of the world Lord Kåñëa appears as these five words."

Text 163

kià ca tatraivopasäna-vidhi-kathanänantaram

eko vaçé sarvagaù kåñëa iòya eko 'pi san bahudhä yo 'vabhätitaà péöhasthaà ye tu yajanti dhéräs teñäà sukhaà çäçvataà netareñäm

kià ca—furthermore; tatra—there; eva—indeed; upasäna—of worship vidhi—rules; kathana—description; anantaram—then; tat—this; iha—here; çlokäù—verses; bhavanti—are; ekah—one; vaçé—the supreme controller; sarvagaù—all-pervading; kåñëaù—Lord Kåñna; iòyaù—supremely worshipable; ekaù—one; api—although; san—being; bahudhä—in many forms; yaù—who; avabhäti—manifests; tam—Him; péöhastham—in His transcendental abode; ye—those who; tu— indeed; yajanti—worship; dhéräù—intelligent persons; teñäm—of them; sukham—happiness; çäçvatam—eternal; na— not; itareñäm—of others.

The method of worship is then described in the following words of Çré Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad (1.20-25):

"Lord Kåñëa is the worshipable, all-pervading supreme controller, and although He is one, He manifests in many forms. They who are intelligent worship Him as He stands on His altar. They, and not others, attain eternal happiness.

Text 164

nityo nityänäà cetanäs cetanänäm eko bahünäm yo vidadhäti kämäntäm péöhagaà ye 'nuyajanti vipräs teñäà siddhiù çäçvaté netareñäm

nityaù—eternal; nityänäm—among the eternals; cetanaù—living entity; cetanänäm—among living entities; ekaù—one; bahünäm—among the many; yaù—who; vidadhäti—grants; kämän—desires; tam—unto Him péöha-gam—situated in his own abode; ye—those who; anuyajanti—worship; vipräù—devotees; teçäm—of them; siddhiù—perfection; çäçvaté—eternal; na itareñäm—of others.

"The brähmaëas, who worship, as He stands on His altar, the one greatest among the eternals and greatest among conscious persons, the one who fulfills the desires of the many, they, and not others, attain eternal perfection.

Text 165

etad viñëoù paramaà padaà ye nityodyuktäù samyajante na kämän teñäm asau gopa-rüpaù prayatnät prakäçayed ätma-padaà tadaiva

etat—this; viñëoù—of Lord Viñëu; paramam—supreme; padam—abode; ye—those who; nitya—always; udyuktaù—intently engaged; samyajante—engage in devotional service; na—not; kämän—material desires; teñäm—of them; asau—He; gopa—of a cowherd boy; rüpaù—with the transcendental form; prayatnät—with endeavor; prakäçayat—reveals; ätma—own; padam—abode; tadä—then; eva—certainly.

"To they who always dilignetly worship Lord Viñëu's transcendental form, the Lord, in His orginal form as a cowherd boy, shows His lotus feet.

Text 166

yo brahmäëaà vidadhäti pürvaà yo vai vidyäs tasmai gäpayati sma kåñëaùtaà ha devam ätma-buddhi-prakäçaà mumukñur vai çaraëam amuà vrajet

yaù—Who; brahmäëam—to Brahmä; vidadhäti—gave; pürvam—previously; yaù—who; vai—certainly; vidyäù—transcendental knowledge; tasmai—to him; gäpayati sma—instructed; kåñëaù—Kåñëa; tam—to Him; ha—certainly; devam—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; ätma-buddhi-spiritual knowledge; prakäçam—manifesting; mumukñuù—one whos desires liberation; vai—certainly; çaraëam—shelter; amum—this; vrajet—should go.

"It was Kåñëa who in the beginning instructed Brahmä in Vedic knowledge and who disseminated Vedic knowledge in the past.* They who desire liberation surrender to Him, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who grants transcendental knowledge to His devotees.

Text 167

oàkäreëäntaritaà ye japanti

govindasya païca-padaà manuà tamteñäm asau darçayed ätma-rüpaà tasmän mumukñur abhyasen nityaà ñäntyai

oàkäreëa—with the syllable om; antaritam—accompanied; ye—those who; japanti—chant; govindasya—of Lord Govinda; païca-padam—with five words; manum—mantra; tam—this; teñäm—of them; asau—He; darçayet—reveals; ätma—own; rüpam— transcendental form; tasmät—from that; mumukñuù—one who desires liberation; abhyäset—should chant; nityam—continually; ñantyai—to attain transcendental peace.

"To they who chant the five-word mantra with oà and govinda (oà kåñëäya govindäya gopéjanavallabhäya svähä) the Lord reveals His own form. Therefore, to attain transcendental peace, they who desire liberation should regularly chant this mantra.

Text 168

etasmäd anye païca-padäd abhuvan govindasya manavo mänavänämdaçärëädyas te 'pi saìkrandanädyair abhyasyante bhüti-kämair yathävat

etasmät—from this; anye—others; païca-padat—from this mantra consisting of five words; abhuvan—came into existance; govindasya—of Lord Govinda; manavaù—mantras; mänavänäm—of human society; dasä-arëa—he ten-syllable mantra; ädyaù—beginning with te—they; api—also; saìkrandana-ädyaih—by the four Kumäras, Indra, and other devotees who desire liberation from material existance; abhyasyante—is chanted; bhüti—kämaiù—by Narada and others who desire the spiritual opulence of pure devotional service; yathävat—just as;

"From this five-word mantra have come all other govinda-mantras in human society, including the ten-syllable govinda-mantra chanted by Indra's followers and by they who desire opulences."

Text 169 (a)

kià ca tatraiva

tad u hoväca brähmaëaù asäv anavaratam me dhyätaù stutaù parärdhänte so 'budhyata. gopa-veço me purastäd ävirbabhüva. tataù praëato mayänukülena hådä mahyam añöädaçarëaà svarüpaà såñöaye dattväntarhitaù.

kià ca—furthermore; tatra—there; eva—indeed; tat—then; u—certainly; ha—indeed; uväca—replied brähmaëaù—Brahmä; asau—He; anavaratam—continually; me—by me; dhyätaù—remembered; stutaù—glorified; parädhante—at the conclusion of the parärdha; saù—He; abudhyata—became perceived; gopa-veçaù—in the form of a cowherd boy; me—me; pruastät—in the presence; ävirbabhüva—became manifested; tataù—-then; praëataù—offered obeisances; mayä—by me; anukülena—with a compassionate; hådä—heart; mahyam—to me; añöädaça-arëam—the eighteen syllable mantra; svarüpam— form; såñöaye—for creation; dattvä—having given

Çré Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad (1.27-30) continues:

"Brahmä said: I continually glorified the Lord and meditated upon Him for millions of years, and at last I was able to understand the transcendental form of the Lord as Çré Kåñëa, in the dress of a cowherd boy.* With devotion in my heart I bowed down before Him. He gave me the eighteen-syllable mantra to be used for the activity of creation, and then He disappeared.

Text 169 (b)

punaù sisåkñato me prädurabhüt teñv akñareñu bhaviñyaj jagad-rüpaà prakäçayan.

punaù—again; sisåkñataù—desiring to create; me—of me; pradurabhüt—became manifest; teñu—in them; akñareñu—in the letters of the mantra; bhaviçyat—about to be; jagat-rüpam—the form of the universe; prakäçayan—manifesting.

"When I desired to create the universe He again appeared before me, showing me in these syllables the universe that was to be.

Text 169 (c)

tad iha käd äpo lat påthivé ito 'gnir bindor indus tat-sampätakäd arka iti klià-käräd asåjam. kåñëäyäd äkäçaà khäd väyur ity uttarät surabhià vidyäù prädurakärñaà tad-uttarät stré-pumädi cedaà sakalam iti. sakalam iti.

tat—that; iha—here; kät—from the letter ka; äpaù—water; lät—from the letter la; påthivé—earth; itaù—from the letter i; agniù—fire; bindoù—from the letter m; induù—the moon; tat—sampätakät—from the combination of these letter; arkaù—the sun; iti—thus; klémakärat—from the word klém; asåjam—I created the material universe; kåñëäyät—from the word kåñëäya; äkäçam—ether; khät—from ether; vayuù—air; iti—thus; uttarät—from the next word (govindäya); surabhim—the cows; vidyäù—as well as knowledge; prädurakärñam—I created; tat—uttarät—from the next word (gopéjanavallabhäya); stré-pum-ädi—men, women and all species of life; va—also; idam—this; sakalam—everything.

"From the letter k, I created water, from the letter l, earth, from the letter é, fire, from the letter à, the moon, and from the entire word kléà, the sun. From the word kåñëäya, I created ether, from govindäya, air, from gopéjanavallabhäya, knowledge and the surabhi cows, and from svähä, men, women, and everything else. Everything else."

Text 170

tathä ca gautaméya-tantre

kléà-käräd asåjad viçvaà iti präha çruteù çiraùla-kärät påthivé jätä ka-käräj jala-sambhavaù

tathä—so; ca—and; gautaméya-tantre—in the Gautamiya Tantra; kléà-kärät—from the syllable Klém; asåjat—created; viçvam—the universe; iti—thus; präha—said; çruteù—of the Vedas; çiraù—the head; la-kärät—from the syllable la; påthivé—the earth; jätä—born; ka-käräj—from the letter k; jala—of water; sambhavaù—birth.


"The head of the Vedas said: From the world Kléà He created the universe. From the letter l, earth was born. From the letter k, water was born.

Text 171 (a)

i-käräd vahnir utpanno nädäd väyur ajäyatabindor äkäça-sambhütir iti bhütätmako manuù

i-kärät—from the letter i; vahniù—fire; utpannaù—born; nädät—from the sound; väyuù—air; ajäyata—was born; bindoù—from the letter à; äkäça-sambhütiù—the birth of sky; iti—thus; bhütätmakaù—the heart of the elements; manuù—the mantra.

"From the letter i, fire was born. From the sound of these letters together, air was born. From the letter à, the sky was born. In this way the material elements were born from this mantra.

Text 171 (b)

svä-çabdena ca kñetra-jïo heti cit-prakåtiù para

tayor aikya-samudbhütir mukha-veñöana-varëakaù ata eva hi viçvasya layaù svähärëake bhavet

svä-çabdena—by the syllable svä; ca—and; kñetra-jïaù—the knower of the field; hä—hä; iti—thus; cit-prakåtiù—the spiritual consciousness; para—superior; tayoù—of them; aikya-samudbhütiù—becoming one; mukha-veñöana-varëakaù—in an important word; ata eva—therefore; hi—indeed; viçvasya—of the material universe; layaù—destruction; svähärëake—in the syllables Svähä; bhavet—is.

"From the syllable svä, the knower of the field of activities is manifested. From the syllable hä, spiritual knowledge is manifested. When these syllables meet in the mouth they become the word Svähä. It is with this word that the material universe is destroyed."

Text 172

punaç ca sä çrutiù

etasyaiva yajanena candradhvajo gata-mohätmänaà vedayitvä om-käräntarälakaà manum ävarttayet. saìga-rahito 'bhyänayat. tad viñëoù paramaà padaà sadä paçyanti sürayaù. divéva cakñur ätatam. tasmäd enaà nityam abhyaset. ity ädi.

punaù—again; ca—and; sä—that; çrutiù—Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad; etasya—of Him; eva—indeed; yajanena—with the worship; candradhvajaù—Çiva; gata—gone; moha—illusion; ätmänam—self; vedayitvä—knowing; om-käräntarälakam—Om; manum—mantra; ävarttayet.—chanted; saìga-rahitaù—alone; abhyänayat—attained; tat—that; viñëoù—of Lord Viñëu; paramam—supreme; padam—abode; sadä—always; paçyanti—see; sürayaù—the demigods; divi—in the sky; iva—like; cakñuù—eye; ätatam—manifested; tasmät—from that; enam—this; nityam—always; abhyaset.—practiced; ity—thus; ädi—beginning.

In the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñsad (1.31-33) it is said:

"by worshiping Lord Kåñëa, Çiva became free from illusion, and by chanting this mantra in a solitary place, eh attained the Lord. He attained the Lord's transcendental abode, which is like a sun in the sky, thye Lord's abode on which the demigods gaze."

Texts 173 and 174

tatraivägre

tad atra gäthä

yasya pürva-padded bhümir dvitéyät salilodbhavaùtåtéyät teja udbhütaà caturthäd gandha-vähanaù

païcamäd ambarotpattis tam evaikaà samabhyasancandradhvajo 'gamad viñëoù paramaà padam avyayam

tatra—there; eva—indeed; agre—before; tat—that; atra—here; gäthä—verses; yasya—of whom; pürva-padät—from the first word; bhümiù—earth; dvitéyät—from the second; salilodbhavaù—the creation of water; tåtéyät—from the third; teja—fire; udbhütam—bormn; caturthät—from the fourth; gandha—scent; vähanaù—carrying; païcamät—from the fifth; ambarotpattiù—the birth of ether; tam—that; eva—indeed; ekam—one; samabhyasan—practiced; candradhvajaù—Lord Çiva; agamat—went; viñëoù—of Lord Viñëu; paramam—to the supreme; padam—abode; avyayam—eternal.

In the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñsad (1.35-38) it is also said:

"About this are the following verses: One shoudl chant this mantra, of which from the first word the element earth came, from the decond word water, from the third fire, from the fourth air, and from the fifth ether. By chanting this

mantra Lord Çiva entered Lord Viñëu's eternal spiritual abode.

Text 175

tato viçuddhaà vimalaà viçokaà açeña-lobhädi-nirasta-saìgamyat tat padaà païca-padaà tad eva sa väsudevo na yato 'nyad asti

tataù—from this; viçuddham—pure; vimalam—without impurity; viçokam—without grief; açeña-lobhädi-nirasta-saìgam—without greed and other vices; yat—what; tat—that; padam—abode; païca-padam—five words; tat—that; eva—indeed; sa—he; väsudevaù—Kåñëa; na—not; yataù—from whom; anyat—another; asti—is.

"That spiritual world, completely pure, uncontaminated, free from suffering, free from greed and all other vices, and identical with this five-word mantra, is manifested from Lord Väsudeva. It is not separate from Him.

Text 176

tam ekaà govindaà sac-cid-ananda-vigrahaà païca-padaà våndävana-sura-bhüruha-taläsénäà satataà sa-marud-gaëo 'haà paramayä stutyä toñayämi. iti.

tam—Him; ekam—alone; govindam—Kåñëa; sac-cid-ananda-vigraham—whose form is eternal and full of knowledge anmd bliss; païca-padam—five words; våndävana-sura-bhüruha-taläsénäm—sitting undcer a kalpa-vrksa tree in Våndävana; satatam—always; sa-marud-gaëaù—with the Maruts; aham—I; paramayä—with great; stutyä—devotion; toñayämi.—praise; iti—thus.

"With eloquent prayers I and the Maruts please Lord Govinda, whose form is eternal and full of knowledge and bliss, who stays under a desire tree in Våndävana, and who is this five-word mantra."

Text 177

kià ca stuty-anantaram

amuà païca-padaà mantram ävarttayed yaù, sa yäty anäyasataù kevalaà tat. anejad ekaà manaso javéyo, na yad devä äpnuvan pürvam arñät.

kià ca—furthermore; stuty-anantaram—in the same Upaniñad; amum—this; païca-padaà mantram—five-word mantra; ävarttayet—practices; yaù,—one who; sa—he; yäty—attains; anäyasataù—easily; kevalam—transcendental; tat.—that; anejat—fixed; ekam—one; manasaù—than the mind; javéyo,—more swift; na—not; yat—this Supreme Lord; devä—the demigods like Indra, etc.; äpnuvan—can approach; pürvam—in front; arñät—moving quickly.

In the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñsad (1.52-53) it is also said:

"One who chants this five-word mantra easily attains the transcendental abode of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. "Although fixed in His abode, the Personality of Godhead is swifter than the mind and can overcome all others running. Even the powerful demigods cannot approach Him.*

Text 178

tasmät kåñëa eva paro devas taà dhyäyet taà rasayet taà yajed iti, oà tat sad iti.

tasmät—therefore; kåñëa—Lord Kåñëa; eva—indeed; paraù—the supreme; devaù—Lord; tam—on Him; dhyäyet—one should meditate; tam—Him; rasayet—one should glorify; tam—Him; yajet—one should worship; iti—thus; oà tat sat—Oà tat sat; iti—thus.

"Therefore, Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. One should meditate upon Him, glorify Him, serve Him,

and worship Him. Oà tat sat."

Text 179

trailokya-sammohana-tantre ca devéà prati çré-mahädevoktäñöädaçäkñara-prasaìga eva

dharmärtha-käma-mokñäëäà éçvaro jagad-éçvaraùsanti tasya mahä-bhägä avatäräù sahasraçaù

trailokya-sammohana-tantre—in the Trailokya-sammohana-tantra; ca—and; devém—to the goddess; prati—to; çré-mahädeva—of Lord Çiva; ukta—spoken; añöädaçäkñara-prasaìge—in relation to the eighteen syllable mantra; eva—thus; dharmärtha-kama-mokñäëäm—of religion, sense-gratifcication, economic development, and liberation; éçvaraù—the Lord; jagad-éçvaraù—the Lord of the univreses; santi—are; tasya—of Him; mahä-bhägä—filled with opulences; avatäräù—incarnations; sahasraçaù—thousands.

In the Trailokya-sammohana-tantra Lord Çiva, speaking to Goddess Durgä, glorifies the eighteen-syllable mantra in the following words:

"Lord Kåñëa is the master of the universes and the master of religion, economic development, sense-gratification, and liberation. From Him many thousands of very glorious incarnations of Godhead have come.

Text 180

teñäà madhye 'vatäräëäà bälatvam ati-durlabhamamänuñäëi karmäëi täni täni kåtäni ca

teñäm—of these; madhye—in the midst; avatäräëäm—incarnations; bälatvam—childhood; ati-durlabham—rare; amänuñäëi—superhuman; karmäëi—deeds; täni täni—them; kåtäni—performed; ca—and.

"In all these incarnations, the Lord's childhood pastimes, where He performs many superhuman activities, is very rarely seen.

Text 181

çäpänugraha-kartåtve yena sarvaà pratiñöhitamtasya mantraà pravakñyämi saìgopäìgam anuttamam

çäpa—curse; anugraha—and mercy; kartåtve—in ability to do; yena—by whom; sarvam—all; pratiñöhitam—established; tasya—of Him; mantram—the mantra; pravakñyämi—I will tell; saìgopäìgam—with its parts; anuttamam—the best.

"Lord Kåñëa has the power to curse or to show mercy. He created all that is. Now I will tell you His mantra with all its parts, a mantra that has no superior.

Text 182

yasya vijïäna-mätreëa naraù sarvajïatäm iyatputrärthé putram äpnoti dhanärthé labhate dhanam

yasya—of whom; vijïäna-mätreëa—simply with the knowledge; naraù—a person; sarvajïatäm—the state of knowing everything; iyat—attains; puträrthé—desiring a son; putram—a son; äpnoti—attains; dhanärthé—desiring wealth; labhate—attains; dhanam—wealth.

"Simply by knowing this mantra one attains all-knowledge. By knowing this mantra a person who desires a son attains a son, and a person who desires wealth attains wealth.

Text 183

sarva-çästrärtha-para-jïo bhavaty eva na saàçayaùtrailokyaà ca vaçé-kuryäd vyakulé-kurute jagat

sarva-çästrärtha-para-jïaù—knowing th meaning of all scriptures; bhavaty—becomes; eva—indeed; na—no; saàçayaù—doubt; trailokyam—the three worlds; ca—ansd; vaçé-kuryät—brings under control; vyakulé-kurute—agitates; jagat—the world.

"One becomes learned in all scriptures. Of this there is no doubt. One brings the three worlds under his control. One makes the universe tremble in fear of him.

Text 184

mohayet sakalaà so 'pi märayet sakalän ripünbahunä kim ihoktena mumukñur mokñam äpnuyät

mohayet—bewilders; sakalam—all; saù—he; api—and; märayet—kills; sakalän—all; ripün—enemies; bahunä—more; kim—what?; iha—here; uktena—spoken; mumukñuù—one who desires liberation; mokñam—liberation; äpnuyät—attains.

"One fools everyone. One kills all his enemies. One who desires liberation attains liberation. What more need be said?

Text 185

yathä cintämaëiù çreñöho yathä gauç ca yathä satéyathä dvijo yathä gaìgä tathäsau mantra uttamaù

yathä—as; cintämaëiù—a cintamani jewel; çreñöhaù—the best; yathä—as; gauù—a cow; ca—and; yathä—as; saté—a saintly woman; yathä—as; dvijaù—a brähmaëa; yathä—as; gaìgä—the Gaìgä; tathä—so; asau—this; mantra—mantra; uttamaù—the best.

"As cintämaëi is the best of jewels, kämadhenu is the best of cows, a chaste and saintly woman is the best of women, a brähmaëa is the best of men, and the Gaìgä is the best of rivers, so this mantra is the best of mantras.

Text 186

yathävad akhila-çreñöhaà yathä çästraà tu vaiñëavamyathä tu saàskåtä väëé tathäsau mantra uttamaù

yathävat—ass; akhila-çreñöham—the best opf all; yathä—as; çästram—scripture; tu—indeed; vaiñëavam—Vaiñëava; yathä—as; tu—indeed; saàskåtä—eloquent; väëé—words; tathä—so; asau—this; mantra—mantra; uttamaù—the best.

"As the Vaiñëava-çästras are the best of scriptures, and as eloquent words are the best of words, so this mantra is the best of mantras."

Text 187

kià ca

ato mayä pareçäni praty-ahaà japyate manuùnaitena sädåçaù kaçcij jagaty asmin caräcare

kià ca—furthermore; ataù—therefore; mayä—by me; pareçäni—O goddess; praty-aham—every day; japyate—is chanted; manuù—the mantra; na—not; etena—it; sädåçaù—like; kaçcit—anything; jagaty—in the world; asmin—in this; caräcare—of moving and immobile creatures.

Lord Çiva further said:

"That is why, O goddess, I chant this mantra every day. In this world of moving and unmoving beings there is nothing else like this mantra."

Text 188

çré-sanat-kumära-kalpe 'pi

gopäla-viñayä manträs trayas-triàçat-prabhedataùteñu sarveñu mantreñu mantra-räjam imaà çåëu

çré-sanat-kumära-kalpe—in the Çré Sanat-kumära-kalpa; api—also; gopäla-viñayä—in relation to Lord Gopäla; manträù—the mantra; trayas-triàçat-prabhedataù—33 divisons; teñu—in them; sarveñu—all; mantreñu—mantras; mantra-räjam—the king of mantras; imam—this; çåëu—please hear.

In the Çré Sanat-kumära-kalpa it is said:

"Thirty-three different mantras glorify Lord Gopäla. Now please hear the mantra that is the king of them all.

Text 189

su-prasannam imaà mantraà tantre sammohanähvayegopanéyas tvayä mantro yatnena muni-puìgava

su-prasannam—very clear; imam—this; mantram—mantra; tantre—in the Tantra; sammohanähvaye—named Sammohana; gopanéyaù—concealed; tvayä—by you; mantraù—the mantra; yatnena—with care; muni-puìgava—O best of sages.

"This best of mantras in very clearly described in the Sammohana Tantra. O best of sages, please protect this mantra very carefully.


The best of sages here is Närada Muni.

Text 190

anena mantra-räjena mahendratvaà purandaraùjagäma deva-deveço viñëunä dattam aïjasä

anena—with this; mantra-räjena—royal mantra; mahendratvam—the state of being Indra; purandaraù—Purandara; jagäma—went; deva-deveçaù—the master of the demigods; viñëunä—by lord Viñëu; dattam—given; aïjasä—easily.

"With this king of mantras Purandara attained the post of Indra. Lord Viñëu gave him the post very easily.

Text 191

durväsasaù purä çäpäd asaubhägyena péòitaùsa eva subhägatvaà vai tenaiva punar äptavän

durväsasaù—of Durvasa Muni; purä—before; çäpät—from the curse; asaubhägyena—by inauspiciousness; péòitaù—tormented; sa—he; eva—indeed; subhägatvam—auspiciousness; vai—indeed; tena—with that; eva—indeed; punaù—again; äptavän—attained.

"Once Indra was cursed by Durväsä Muni. Tormented with many troubles, Indra chanted this mantra and again attained an auspicious condition of life.

Text 192

bahunä kim ihoktena puraçcaraëa-sädhanaiùvinäpi japa-mätreëa labhate sarvam épsitam

bahunä—with more; kim—what?; iha—here; uktena—said; puraçcaraëa-sädhanaiù—with purascarana; vinä—without; api—even; japa-mätreëa—simply by chanting; labhate—attains; sarvam—all; épsitam—desired.

"What more need I say? Even without performing puraçcaraëa, simply by chanting the words of the mantra, one attains all that one desires."

Text 193

prabhuà çré-kåñëa-caitanyaà taà nato 'smi gurüttamamkathaïcid äçrayäd yasya präkåto 'py uttamo bhavet

prabhum—to the Supreme Personality of Godhead; çré-kåñëa-caitanyam—Çré Kåñëa Caitanya; tam—to Him; nataù—bow; asmi—I am; gurüttamam—the best of spiritual masters; kathaïcit—somehow; äçrayät—by shelter; yasya—of whom; präkåtaù—natural; api—also; uttamaù—the best; bhavet—may be.

I offer my respectful obeisances to Lord Çré Kåñëa Caitanya, the best of spiritual masters. By taking shelter of him even a materialist can become the best of devotees.

Text 194

athädhikära-nirëayaù

täntrikeñu ca mantreñu dékñäyäà yoñitäm apisädhvénäm adhikäro 'sti çüdrädénäà ca sad-dhiyäm

atha—now; adhikära—of qualification; nirëayaù—the dtermination; täntrikeñu—from the Tantras; ca—and; mantreñu—in mantras; dékñäyäm—in initiation; yoñitäm—of women; api—even; sädhvénäm—chaste; adhikäraù—qualification; asti—is; çüdrädénäm—of çüdras; ca—and; sad-dhiyäm—saintly.

The Qualifications

Chaste and saintly women, and saintly-hearted çüdras are qualified to be initiated in the chanting of mantras from the Tantras.

Text 195

tathä ca småty-artha-säre pädme ca vaiçäkha-mähätmye çré-näradämbaréña-samväde

ägamoktena märgeëa stré-çüdraiç caiva püjanamkartavyaà çraddhayä viñëoç cintayitvä patià hådi

tathä—so; ca—and; småty-artha-säre—in the Småty-artha-sära; pädme—in the Padma Puräëa; ca—and; vaiçäkha-mähätmye—Vaisakha-mahatmya; çré-näradämbaréña-samväde—in a conversation of Çré närada and Çré Ambaréña; ägamoktena—spoken in the Agamas; märgeëa—by the path; stré-çüdraiç—by women and çüdras; ca—and; eva—indeed; püjanam—worship; kartavyam—should be done; çraddhayä—with faith; viñëoç—of Lord Viñëu; cintayitvä—meditation; patim—the master; hådi—in the heart.

In the Småty-artha-sära, as well as in the Padma Puräëa, Vaiçäkha-mähätmya, in a conversation of Çré Närada and Çré Ambaréña it is said:

"Following the path described in the Agamas, women and çüdras may faithfully worship Lord Viñëu and meditate on Him as the Lord in the heart.

Text 196

çüdräëäà caiva bhavati nämnä vai devatärcanamsarve cägama-märgeëa kuryur vedänusäriëä

çüdräëäm—of sudras; ca—and; eva—indeed; bhavati—is; nämnä—by name; vai—indeed; devatärcanam—worship of the Lord; sarve—all;—and; ägama—of the Agamas; märgeëa—by the path; kuryuù—should do; vedänusäriëä—following the Vedas.

"Following the path of the Agamas, which themselves follow the path of the Vedas, women and çüdras may worship the Supreme Lord by chanting His holy names.

Text 197

stréëäm äpy adhikäro 'sti viñëor ärädhänädiñupati-priya-hitänäà ca çrutir eñä sanätané

stréëäm—of women; apy—also; adhikäraù—qualification; asti—is; viñëoù—of Lord Viñëu; ärädhänädiñu—in worship and other activities; pati-priya-hitänäm—desiring welfare for their husbands; ca—and; çrutiù—the Vedas; eñä—this; sanätané—eternal.

"Women who desire the welfare of their husbands are also entitled to worship Lord Viñëu. That is the conclusion of the eternal Vedas."

Text 198


çré-räma-mantra-räjam uddiçya

çuci-vrata-tamaù çüdrä dharmikä dvija-sevakäùstriyaù pati-vratäç cänye pratilomänuloma-jäù lokäç cäëòäla-paryantäù sarve 'py aträdhikäriëaù

agastya-saàhitäyäm—in the Agastya-saàhitä it is said; çré-räma-mantra-räjam—the king of Räma-mantras; uddiçya—in relation to; çuci-vrata-tamaù—the best of pure vows; çüdrä—sudras; dharmikä—religious; dvija-sevakäù—servants of the brähmaëas; striyaù—women; pati-vratäç—devoted to their husbands; ca—and; anye—others; pratilomänuloma-jäù—born in pratiloma and anuloma families; lokäù—people; caëòäla-paryantäù—down to the candalas; sarve—all; api—also; atra—here; adhikäriëaù—qualified.

In the Agastya-saàhitä, in relation to the regal Räma-mantra, it is said:

"Religious and pure çüdras, who are servants of the brähmaëas, as well as chaste women, those born in pratiloma and anuloma families, and everyone else, down even to the cäëòälas, are qualified to worship Lord Viñëu in this way."

Texts 199 and 200

guruç ca siddha-sädhyädi- mantra-däne vicärayetsva-kulänya-kulatvaà ca bäla-prauòhatvam eva ca

stré-pum-napuàsakatvaà ca räçi-nakñatra-melanamsupta-prabodha-kälaà ca tathä åëa-dhanädikam

guruù—the spiritual master; ca—and; siddha-sädhyädi—beginning with siddha-sadhya; mantra-däne—in giving the mantra; vicärayet—should consider; sva-kula—own family; anya-kulatvam—another family; ca—and; bäla—youth; prauòhatvam—or age; eva—indeed; ca—and; stré-pum-napuàsakatvam—man, woman, or eunuch; ca—and; räçi-nakñatra-melanam—the meeting of stars in the rasi; supta-prabodha-kälam—time of wakefulness or sleep; ca—and; tathä—so; åëa-dhanädikam—beginning with debt or wealth.

In giving the mantra and performing siddha-sädhya and other rituals, the spiritual master should consider whether the disciple is from his family or another family, is young or old, or is man, woman, or eunuch. The spiritual master should also consider where the stars are in the räçi, whether it is time of wakefulness or sleep, and whether the disciple is wealthy or in debt.

Text 201

atha siddha-sädhyädi-çodhanaà

saradä-tilake

präk pratyag agrä rekhä syuù païca yämyottarägra-gaù

tävatyaç ca catuñ-koñöha- catuñkaà maëòalaà bhavet

atha—now; siddha-sädhyädi-çodhanam—purification of the siddha-sadhya; saradä-tilake—in the Sarada-tilaka; präk—east; pratyag—west; agrä—in front; rekhä—lines; syuù—are; païca—five; yämya—south; uttarägra-gaù—and north; tävatyaç—as far as; ca—and; catuñ-koñöha-catuñkam—rectangle; maëòalam—area; bhavet—may be.

The Purification of the Siddha-sädhya

In the Saradä-tilaka it is said:

"Five lines, one after another, should be drawn in the east, west, south, and north. In this way a four-sided figure should be made.

Text 202

indv-agni-rudra-nava-netra-yugena-dikñu åtv-añöa-ñoòaça-caturdaça-bhautikeñupätäla-païcadaça-vahni-himäàçu-koñöhe varëäl likhel lipi-bhavän kramaças tu dhémän

indu—1; agni—3; rudra—11; nava—9; netra—2; yuga—4; ina—12; dikñu—10; åtu—6; añöa—8; ñoòaça—16; caturdaça—14; bhautikeñu—5; pätäla—7; païcadaça—15; vahni—3; himäàçu—1; koñöhe—in the surrouinding border; varëän—letters; likhel—should write; lipi-bhavän—in letters; kramaçaù—one after another; tu—indeed; dhémän—intelligent.

"Then, on the first, third, eleventh, ninth, second, fourth, twelfth, tenth, sixth, eighth, sixteenth, fourteenth, fifth, seventh, fifteenth, third and first parts of the four-sided figure, the intelligent spiritual master should write the letters of the alphabet, one after another.


In the first part he should write the Sanskrit letter a, in the third part the letter ä, in the eleventh i, and so forth. Completing the vowels, he should continue with the consonants, beginning in the first place with the letter k.

Text 203

janmarkñäkñarato vékñya yävan manträdimäkñaramcaturbhiù koñöhakais tv ekaà iti koñöha-catuñöaye

janma—birth; åkña—star; akñarataù—from the letter; vékñya—seeing; yävan—as; manträdimäkñaram—the letter beginning the manra; caturbhiù—with four; koñöhakaiù—parts; tv—indeed; ekam—one; iti—thus; koñöha-catuñöaye—in four parts.

Seeing the birth star, he should write the letters of the mantra. With four lines there is a four-sided figure.

Text 204

punaù koñöhaka-koñöheñu savyato janma-bhäkñarätsiddha-sädhya-su-siddhäri- kramäj jïeya vicakñaëaiù

punaù—again; koñöhaka-koñöheñu—on the lines of the four-sided figure; savyataù—on the left; janma-bhä—of the birth-star; akñarät—from the letter; siddha-sädhya-su-siddhäri—siddha, sädhya, su-siddha, and ari; kramät—one after the

other; jïeyä—may be known; vicakñaëaiù—by the wise.

Then, to the left of the letters of the birth star, one after the other, the wise one should know siddha, sädhya, su-siddha, and ari.

Text 205

siddhaù sidhyati kälena sädhyas tu japa-homataùsu-siddho graha-mätreëa arir müla-nikåntanaù

siddhaù—siddha; sidhyati—becomes perfect; kälena—in time; sädhyaù—sadhya; tu—indeed; japa-homataù—by japa and yajna; su-siddhaù—su-siddha; graha-mätreëa—simply by accepting; ariù—ari; müla-nikåntanaù—cutting at the root.

Siddha is that in time one attains perfection. Sädhya is attained by japa and yajïa. Su-siddha is simply by accepting. Ari is cutting at the root.

Text 206

siddha-siddho yathoktena dvi-guëät siddha-sädhakaùsiddha-su-siddho 'rdha-japät siddhärir hanti bandhanän

siddha-siddhaù—siddha-siddha; yathoktena—as said; dvi-guëät—doible; siddha-sädhakaù—siddha-sädhaka; siddha-su-siddhaù—siddha-su-siddha; ardha-japät—from saying half; siddhäriù—siddhäri; hanti—kills; bandhanän—bondage.

Siddha-siddha is said. Then siddha-sädhaka is twice. Siddha-su-siddha is from saying half. Siddhäri ends bondage.

Text 207

sädhya-siddho dvi-guëikaù sädhya-sädhyo hy anarthakaùtat-su-siddhas tri-guëitän sädhyärir hanti gotrajän

sädhya-siddhaù—sädhya-siddha; dvi-guëikaù—double; sädhya-sädhyaù—sädhya-sädhya; hy—indeed; anarthakaù—without artha; tat-su-siddhas tri-guëitän sädhyärir hanti gotrajän .

Sädhya-siddha is twice. Sädhya-sädhya is without artha. Tat-su-siddha is three times. Sädhyäri destroys the gotra.

Text 208

siddha-su-siddho 'rdha-japät tat-sädhyas tu guëädhikättat-su-siddho grahäd eva su-siddhäriù sva-gotra-hä

siddha-su-siddhaù—siddha-su-siddha; ardha-japät—from saying half; tat-sädhyaù—tat-sädhya; tu—indeed; guëädhikät—is more; tat-su-siddhaù—tat-su-siddha; grahät—from accepting; eva—indeed; su-siddhäriù—su-siddhäri; sva-gotra-hä—destroying the gotra.

Siddha-su-siddha is from chanting half. Tat-sädhya is more. Tat-su-siddha is from accepting. Su-siddhäri destroys the gotra.

Text 209

ari-siddhaù sutän hanyäd ari-sädhyas tu kanyakäùtat-su-siddhas tu patné-ghnas tad-arir hanti sädhakam

ari-siddhaù—ari-siddha; sutän—sons; hanyät—kills; ari-sädhyaù—ari-sadhya; tu—indeed; kanyakäù—daughters; tat-su-siddhaù—tat-su-siddha; tu—indeed; patné-ghnaù—kills thw wife; tad-ariù—tat-ari; hanti—kills; sädhakam—the method.

Ari-siddha kills sons. Ari-sädhya kills daughters. Tat-su-siddha kills the wife. Tad-ari kills the means."

Text 210

tathä ca tantre asya ca mantra-viçeñe 'pavädaù

nåsiàhärka-varähänäà präsäda-praëavasyavaidikasya tu mantrasya siddhädén naiva çodhayet

tathä—so; ca—and; tantre—in the Tantra; asya—of that; ca—and; mantra-viçeñe—specific mantra; apavädaù—exception; nåsiàhärka-varähänäm—of Nåsiàh, Arka, and Varäha; präsäda—of the palace; praëavasya—the syllable Oà; vaidikasya—Vedic; tu—but; mantrasya—of the mantras; siddhädén—beginning with siddha; na—not; eva—indeed; çodhayet—should purify.

In the Tantra is given the following exception to this mantra:

"He should not purify the siddha and other mantras when they begin with Oà, come from the Vedas, or glorify Nåsiàha, Sürya, or Varäha.

Text 211

svapna-labdhe striyä datte mälä-mantre ca try-akñareekäkñare tathä mantre siddhädén naiva çodhayet

svapna-labdhe—obtained in a dream; striyä—by a woman; datte—given; mälä-mantre—mala-mantra; ca—and; try-akñare—in three letters; ekäkñare—in one letter; tathä—so; mantre—in the mantra; siddhädén—beginning with siddha; na—not; eva—indeed; çodhayet—should purify.

"He should not purify the siddha and other mantras when they are obtained in a dream, given by a woman, are mälä-mantras, have three letters, or have one letter."

Text 212

sva-kulänya-kulatvädi vijïeyaà cägamäntarätna vistära-bhayäd atra vyarthatväd api likhyate

sva-kulänya-kulatvädi—from one's own family or another's family; vijïeyam—should be known; ca—and; ägamäntarät—from another Agama; na—not; vistära-bhayät—with great fear; atra—here; vyarthatvät—because of being irrelevant; api—indeed; likhyate—is written.

Fearing that I may insert many unnecessary details, I will not quote here from other Agamas the description of one's own family or another's.

Text 213

çrémad-gopäladevasya sarvaiçvarya-pradarçinaùtädåk-çaktiñu mantreñu na hi kiïcid vicäryate

çrémad-gopäladevasya—of Lord Gopäladeva; sarvaiçvarya-pradarçinaù—who has all opulences and powers; tädåk—like that; çaktiñu—in potencies; mantreñu—in the mantras; na—not; hi—indeed; kiïcit—anything; vicäryate—is considered.

In the mantras of all-powerful, all-glorious, and all-opulent Lord Gopäladeva, mantras that contain His potencies, this process of purification is not to be considered.

Text 214

tathä ca krama-dépikäyäà

sarveñu varëeñu tathäçrameñu näréñu nänähvaya-janmabheñudätä phalänäm abhiväïchitänäà dräg eva gopälaka-mantra eñaù

tathä—so; ca—and; krama-dépikäyäm—in the Krama-dipika; sarveñu—in all; varëeñu—varnas; tathä—so; äçrameñu—in asramas; näréñu—in women; nänä—various; ahvaya—names; janma—birth; bheñu—in stars; dätä—the giver; phalänäm—of results; abhiväïchitänäm—desired; dräg—at once; eva—indeed; gopälaka-mantra—the mantra of Lord Gopäla; eñaù—this.

In the Krama-dépikä it is said:

"The Gopäla-mantra immediately gives the desired results to everyone, to all varëas and äçramas, to women, and to everyone born under every birth-star."

Text 215

trailokya-sammohana-tantre ca añöädäçäkñara-mantram adhikåtya çré-çivenoktaà

na cätra çätravä doñä narëasvädi-vicäraëäåkña-räçi-vicäro vä na kartavyo manau priye

trailokya-sammohana-tantre—in the Trailokya-sammohana-tantra; ca—and; añöädäçäkñara-mantram—the eighteen-syllable mantra; adhikåtya—in relatiuon to; çré-çivena—by Lord Çiva; uktam—said; na—not; ca—and; atra—here; çätravä—enemeies; doñä—fault; na—not; åëasva—debtor or wealthy; ädi—beginning with; vicäraëä—consideration;; åkña-räçi-vicäraù—consideration of the birth star; vä—or; na—not; kartavyaù—to be done; manau—in the mantra; priye—O dear one.

In the Trailokya-sammohana-tantra, Lord Çiva describes the eighteen-syllable mantra:

"O beloved, in the eighteen-syllable mantra there is no consideration of the fault of çätravä. Nor is there consideration of the birth-star of the chanter or whether he is wealthy or a debtor."

Text 216

kecic chinnäç ca ruddhäç ca

kecin mada-samuddhatäùmalinaù stambhitaù kecit kilitä duñitä api etair doñair yuto näyaà yatas tribhuvanottamaù

kecit—some; chinnäç—broken; ca—and; ruddhäù—stopped; ca—and; kecin—some; mada-samuddhatäù—spoken wildly; malinaù—impure; stambhitaù—stuttered; kecit—some; kilitä—pierced; duñitä—defiled; api—also; etaiù—by them; doñaiù—faults; yutaù—endowed; na—not; ayam—this; yataù—because; tribhuvanottamaù—the best in the three worlds.

Sometimes the pronunciation of this mantra may be broken, sometimes stopped, sometimes contaminated, sometimes stuttered, sometimes impaled, and sometimes wrongly done. Still, these faults do not touch this mantra. For this reason this is the best mantra in the three worlds.

Text 217

sämänyataç ca yathä båhad-gautaméye

atha kåñëa-manün vakñye dåñöädåñöa-phala-pradänyän vai vijïäya munayo lebhire muktim aïjasä

sämänyataù—in general; ca—and; yathä—as; båhad-gautaméye—in the Båhad-gautaméya Tantra; atha—so; kåñëa-manün—of the mantras of Lord Kåñëa; vakñye—I will tell; dåñöa—seen; adåñöa—and not seen; phala—results; pradän—giving; yän—which; vai—indeed; vijïäya—underastanding; munayaù—the sages; lebhire—attained; muktim—liberation; aïjasä—easily.

In the Gautaméya Tantra it is said in a general way:

"Now I will tell you of the Kåñëa-mantras, which give benefits seen and not seen. Learning of these mantras, the great sages easily attained liberation.

Text 218

gåhasthä vanagäç caiva yatayo brahma-cäriëaùstriyaù çüdrädayaç caiva sarve yaträdhikäriëaù

gåhasthä—householders; vanagäç—vanaprasthas; ca—and; eva—indeed; yatayaù—sannyasis; brahma-cäriëaù—brahmacaris; striyaù—women; çüdrädayaù—beginning with sudras; ca—and; eva—indeed; sarve—all; yatra—in which; adhikäriëaù—are qualified.

"Householders, vänaprasthas, sannyäsés, brahmacärés, women, çüdras, and all others are qualified to chant these mantras.

Text 219

nätra cintyo 'ri-çuddhy-ädir näri-miträdi-lakñaëamna vä prayäsa-bähulyaà sädhane na pariçramaù

na—not; atra—in this; cintyaù—to be considered; ari-çuddhy-ädiù—beginning with ari-suddha; na—not; ari-miträdi-lakñaëam—characteristics beginning with friends and enemies; na—not; vä—or; prayäsa-bähulyam—with a great effort; sädhane—in execution; na—not; pariçramaù—great effort.

"In chanting the Kåñëa-mantras there is no consideration of the problems beginning with ari-çuddha, nor is there

consideration of the problems beginning with friends and enemies, nor is a great effort required to chant this mantra, nor need one become exhausted by chanting.

Text 220

ajïäna-tüla-raçeñ ca analaù kñaëa-mätrataùsiddha-sädhya-su-siddhäri- rüpä nätra vicäraëä

ajïäna—of ignorance; tüla—of cotton; raçeù—odf a heap; ca—and; analaù—fire; kñaëa-mätrataù—in a momwnt; siddha-sädhya-su-siddhäri-rüpä—those things beginning with siddha-sadhya-susiddha; na—not; atra—here; vicäraëä—consideration.

"The Kåñëa-mantras are a great fire that burns up a great heap of the cotton of ignorance. In chanting them there is no consideration of siddha, sädhya, su-siddha, ari, or other problems.

Text 221

sarveñäà siddha-manträëäà yato brahmäkñaro manuùprajäpatir aväpägryaà deva-räjyaà çacé-patiù aväpus tridaçäù svargaà vägéçatvaà båhaspatiù. ity ädi.

sarveñäm—of all; siddha-manträëäm—siddha-mantras; yataù—from which; brahma—best; akñaraù—letters; manuù—mantra; prajäpatiù—Prajäpati; aväpa—attained; ägryam—pre-eminence; deva-räjyam—a demigod's kingdom; çacé-patiù—the husband of Çaci; aväpuù—attained; tridaçäù—the demigods; svargam—Svargaloka; vägéçatvam—being a master of words; båhaspatiù.—Båhaspati; ity—thus; ädi—beginning.

"Of all siddha-mantras, the Kåñëa-mantras are the best. By chanting them Brahmä became the first of the demigods, Indra attained a demigod-kingdom, the demigods attained Svargaloka, and Båhaspati became a master of words."

Texts 222 and 223

tathätraivänte

viñëu-bhaktyä viçeñena kià na sidhyati bhü-talekéöädi-brahma-paryantaà govindänugrahän mune

sarva-sampatti-nilayäù sarvaträpy akuto-bhayäùity ädi kathitaà kiïcin mähätmyaà vo munéçvaräù

tathä—so; atra—here; eva—indeed; ante—at the end; viñëu-bhaktyä—by devotion to Lord Viñëu; viçeñena—specifically; kim—what?; na—not; sidhyati—becoems perfect; bhü-tale—on the earth; kéöädi-brahma-paryantam—from Lord Brahmä down to an insect; govindänugrahän—by the mercy of Lord Govinda; mune—O sage; sarva-sampatti-nilayäù—the abode of all opulences; sarvatra—everywhere; api—also; akuto-bhayäù—fearlessness; ity—thus; ädi—beginning; kathitam—spoken; kiïcit—something; mähätmyam—the glory; vaù—to you; munéçvaräù—O kings of the sages.

At the end, the Gautaméya Tantra explains:

"O sage, who on this earth, does not become perfect by worshiping Lord Kåñëa with devotion? By attaining Lord Kåñëa's mercy, all living entities, from the demigod Brahmä down to the insects, become the abodes of all good fortune.

They become free of all fears. O kings of the sages, in this way I have told you a small part of the glories of this mantra.

Text 224

äkäçe tärakä yadvat sindhoù saikata-såñöivatetad-vijïäna-mätreëa labhen muktià catur-vidhäm

äkäçe—in the sky; tärakä—stars; yadvat—as; sindhoù—of the ocean; saikata-såñöivat—creation of grains of sand; etad-vijïäna-mätreëa—simply by knowing this; labhen—attains; muktim—libreation; catur-vidhäm—four kinds.

"The glories of the Kåñëa-mantras are numberless like the stars in the sky or the grains of sand by the ocean's shore. By understanding these mantras one attains the four kinds of liberation.

Text 225

etad anyeñu mantreñu doñäù santi pare ca yetad-arthaà mantra-saàskärä likhyante tantrato daça

etat—this; anyeñu—in other; mantreñu—mantras; doñäù—faults; santi—are; pare—others; ca—and; ye—which; tad-artham—for this sake; mantra-saàskärä—purification of the mantra; likhyante—are written; tantrataù—from the Tantras; daça—ten.

"It is other mantras that have problems. That is why for them the Tantras prescribe ten kinds of purification."

Text 226

atha mantra-saàskäraù

saradä-tilake

jananaà jévanaà ceti täòanaà rodhanaà tathäathäbhiñeko vimalé- käraëäpyäyane punaù tarpaëaà dépanaà guptir daçaita mantra-saàskriyä

atha—now; mantra-saàskäraù—purification of the mantras; saradä-tilake—in the Saradä-tilaka; jananam—janana; jévanam—jivana; ca—and; iti—thus; täòanam—täòana; rodhanam—rodhana; tathä—so; atha—then; abhiñekaù—abhiñeka; vimalé-käraëa—vimalé-käraëa; äpyäyane—äpyäyana; punaù—again; tarpaëam—tarpana; dépanam—dipana; guptiù—gipti; daça—ten; etaù—they; mantra-saàskriyä—purification of the mantra.

Purification of Mantras

In the Saradä-tilaka it is said: "The ten purificatory rituals for mantras are: 1. janana, 2. jévana, 3. täòana, 4. rodhana, 5. abhiñeka, 6. vimalé-käraëa, 7. äpyäyana, 8. tarpaëa, 9. dépana, and 10. gupti.

Text 227

manträëäà mätåkä-madhyäd uddharo jananaà småtampraëaväntaritän kåtvä

mantra-varëän japet sudhéù

manträëäm—of mantras; mätåkä-madhyät—from the midst of a matrika; uddharaù—rising; jananam—janana; småtam—remembered; praëava—Oà; antaritän—within; kåtvä—doing; mantra-varëän—the letters of the mantra; japet—should chant; sudhéù—intelligent.

When the mantra is brought from the midst of a mätåikä, it is called janana. When an intelligent person chants the letters of the mantra with the sacred syllable Oà, the learned scholars of mantras and tantras call it jévana.

Texts 228-233

etaj jévanam ity ähur mantra-tantra-visäradaùmano-varëän samälikhya täòayec candanämbhasä

praty-ekaà väyunä mantré täòanaà tad-udähåtamvilikhya mantraà taà mantré prasünaiù karavérajaiù

tan-manträkñara-saìkhyätair hanyäd yat tena rodhanamsva-tantrokta-vidhänena mantré manträrëa-saìkhyayä

açvattha-pallavair mantraà abhiñiïced viçuddhayesaïcintya manasä mantraà jyotir-mantreëa nirdahet

mantre müla-trayaà mantré vimalé-käraëaà tv idamtara-vyomägnim anugä daëòi jyotir-manur mataù kuçodekena japtena praty-arëaà prokñaëaà manoù

tena mantreëa vidhivad etad äpyäyanaà småtammantreëa väriëä yantre tarpaëaà tarpaëaà småtam

etat—this; jévanam—jivana; ity—thus; ähuù—say; mantra-tantra-visäradaù—expert in mantras and tantras; mano-varëän—letters of the mantra; samälikhya—writing; täòayec—should strike; candanämbhasä—with sandal water; praty-ekam—many times; väyunä—with wind; mantré—the chanter of the mantra; täòanam—tadanam; tad-udähåtam—that is called; vilikhya—writing; mantram—the mantra; tam—that; mantré—the chanter of the mantra; prasünaiù—with flowers; karavérajaiù—from the karavira tree; tan-manträkñara-saìkhyätaiù—with the lettrs of trhe mantra; hanyät—should destroy; yat—what; tena—with that; rodhanam—rodhana; sva-tantrokta-vidhänena—with the rules of the Tantras; mantré—the chanter of the mantra; manträrëa-saìkhyayä—with the letters of the mantra; açvattha-pallavaiù—with asvattha leaves; mantram—the mantra; abhiñiïcet—is abhiseka; viçuddhaye—for purification; saïcintya—meditating; manasä—in the mind; mantram—the mantra; jyotir-mantreëa—as a mantra of light; nirdahet—should burn; mantre—in the mantra; müla-trayam—three times; mantré—mantri; vimalé-käraëam—vimalai-karana; tv—indeed; idam—this; tara-vyomägnim—with teh fire of the sky; anugä—following; daëòi—holding a staff; jyotir-manuù—a mantra of light; mataù—considered; kuçodekena—with kusa grass and water; japtena—chanted; praty-arëam—many times; prokñaëam—proksana; manoù—of the mantra; tena—by that; mantreëa—mantra; vidhivat—according to the rules; etat—this; äpyäyanam—apyayana; småtam—considered; mantreëa—by the mantra; väriëä—with water; yantre—in the yantra; tarpaëam—tarpana; tarpaëam—tarpana; småtam—considered.

When one writes the letters of the mantra and strikes it many times with sandal-water and air, it is called täòana. When one writes the letters of the mantra with karavéra flowers, that is called rodhana. When one writes the mantra with açvattha leaves, that is abhiñeka. When one three times meditates on the mantra as effulgent syllables, that is called vimalé-karaëa. When one meditates on the mantra as effulgent syllables, touches water and kuça grass, and chants the

mantra many times, that is called äpyäyana. When one places the mantra in a water-yantra, that is called tarpaëa.

Text 234

tära-mäyä-ramä-yogo manor dépanam ucyatejapyamänasya mantrasya gopänäà tv aprakäçanam

tära-mäyä-räma-yogaù—in connection with Tara, Maya, and Ramä; manoù—of the mantra; dépanam—dipana; ucyate—is said; japyamänasya—cahnting; mantrasya—of the mantra; gopänäm—gupti; tv—indeed; aprakäçanam—not openly.

When one chants the mantra with the syllables of Tära, Mäyä, and Ramä, that is called dépana. When one secretly chants the mantra that is called gupti.

Text 235

balitvät kåñëa-manträëäà saàskäräpekñaëaà na hisämänyoddeça-mätreëa tathäpy etad udéritam

balitvät—because of the power; kåñëa-manträëäm—of the Kåñëa-mantras; saàskäräpekñaëam—to be purified; na—not; hi—indeed; sämänyoddeça-mätreëa—in a general way; tathäpy—still; etat—this; udéritam—spoken.

Because the Kåñëa-mantras are so powerful they should not be purified in this way. Thus, in a general way, the purification of mantras has been described.

Eighth Vilasa

Text 1

çré-caitanya-prabhuà vande yat-padäçraya-véryataùsaìgåhnäty äkara-vrätäd raìko ratnävaléyamam

çré-caitanya-prabhum-to Çré Caitanya Mahäprabhu; vande-I bow down; yat-padäçraya-véryataù-by the power of taking shelter of whose feet; saìgåhnäty-colects; äkara-vrätädt-from the oceans; raìkaù-wretched person; ratnävaléyamam-jewels.

I bow down before Çré Caitanya Mahäprabhu. By the power of the shelter of His lotus feet this fallen person collects many jewels from the ocean of the scriptures.

Text 2

atha dhüpanaà

tataç ca dhüpam utsåjya nécais tan-mudrayärpayetkåñëaà saìkértayan ghaëöäà väma-hastena vädayan

atha-now; dhüpanam-incense; tataç-then; ca-and; dhüpam-incense; utsåjya-offering; nécaiù-by the fallen; tan-mudrayä-with a mudra; arpayet-may offer; kåñëam-to Lord Kåñëa; saìkértayan-glorifying; ghaëöäm-bell; väma-hastena-with the left hand; vädayan-sounding.

Offering Incense

One should place the incense below and offer it with a mudrä as one rings the bell with his left hand and chants the Lord's glories.


One should offer the incense with the mantra, "eña dhüpo namaù" (Here is some incense. I offer my obeisances to You). One should place the incense on the ground before the Lord and raise it to the Lord's navel. In the same way one should offer a fragrant and unbroken flower and chant the mantra “ghaëöäà ca svähä, asträya phat".

Text 3

tathä ca bahv-åcä-pariçiñöe

dhüpasya véjane caiva dhüpenäìga-vidhüpanenéräjaneñu sarveñu viñëor nämäni kértayet

tathä-so; ca-and; bahv-åcä-pariçiñöe-in the Bahv-åcä-pariçiñöa; dhüpasya-of incense; véjane-in waving; ca-and; eva-indeed; dhüpena-with incense; aìga-before the body; vidhüpane-waving; néräjaneñu-in arati; sarveñu-in all; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; nämäni-names; kértayet-should chant.

In the Bahv-åcä-pariçiñöa it is said:

"At every ärati one should wave incense before Lord Viñëu's form and chant His holy names.


One should wave the incense so the fragrance is spread everywhere.

Text 4

jaya-ghoñaà prakurvéta käruëyaà cäbhikértayettathä maìgala-ghoñaà ca jagad-béjasya ca stutim

jaya-ghoñam-sounds of victory; prakurvéta-should do; käruëyam-mercy; ca-and; abhikértayet-should glorify; tathä-so; maìgala-ghoñam-auspicious sounds; ca-and; jagad-béjasya-of the seed of the universes; ca-and; stutim-prayers.

"One should chant jaya-mantras, glorify the Lord's mercy, and recite auspicious prayers glorifying the Lord who is the seed of all universes.


The liberation of Pütanä is the first of many examples of the Lord's mercy. The prayers here are the prayers of Lord Brahmä and other great souls.

Text 5

anyatra ca

tataù samarpayed dhüpaà ghaëöä-vädya-jaya-svanaiùdhüpa-sthanaà samabhyarcya tarjaëyä vämayä hareù

anyatra-in another place; ca-and; tataù-then; samarpayet-should offer; dhüpam-incense; ghaëöä-bell; vädya-sounding; jaya-victory; svanaiù-sounds; dhüpa-of incense; sthanam-the place; samabhyarcya-worshiping; tarjaëyä-with the forefinger; vämayä-left; hareù-of Lord Hari.


"After worshiping the incense-dish with the left forefinger, one should offer the incense to Lord Hari as one rings the bell and chants jaya-mantras."

Text 6

tatra mantraù

vanaspati-rasotpanno gandhäòhyo gandha uttamaùäghreyaù sarva-devänäà dhüpo 'yaà pratigåhyatäm

tatra-ther; mantraù-themantra; vanaspati-of trees; rasa-from the juice; utpannaù-manifested; gandhäòhyaù-fragrance; gandha-fragrance; uttamaù-great; äghreyaù-to be smelled; sarva-devänäm-of all the demigods; dhüpaù-incense; ayam-this; pratigåhyatäm-may be accepted.

A Mantra For Offering Incense

"Please accept this very fragrant incense made from the nectar of trees, incense that all the demigods like to smell."

Text 7

atha dhüpaù

vämana-puräëe

ruhikäkhyaà kaëo däru- sihlakaà cäguruù sitäçaìkho jäté-phalaà çréçe dhüpäni syuù priyäëi vai

atha-now; dhüpaù-incense; vämana-puräëe-in the Vämana Puräëa; ruhikäkhyam-named ruhika; kaëaù-guggula; däru-daru; sihlakam-sihlaka; ca-and; aguruù-aguru; sitä-sita; çaìkhaù-sanka; jäté-phalam-jati-phala; çréçe-to the master of the goddess of fortune; dhüpäni-incenses; syuù-are; priyäëi-favorite; vai-indeed.

Kinds of Incense

In the Vämana Puräëa it is said:

"Ruhika, kaëa, däru, sihlaka, aguru, sitä, çaìkha, and jäté-phala are kinds of incense that are liked by Lord hari, the master of the goddess of fortune."

Text 8

mülägame

sa-guggulv-aguru-çéra- sitäjya-madhu-candanaiùsäräìgära-vinikñiptaiù kalpayed dhüpam uttamam

mülägame-in the Mülägama; sa-guggulv-aguru-çéra-sitäjya-madhu-candanaiù-with guggulu, aguru, çéra, sitä, äjya, madhu, and sandal; säräìgära-vinikñiptaiù-placed on charcoal; kalpayet-should maske; dhüpam-incense; uttamam-excellent.

In the Mülägama it is said:

"Guggulu, aguru, çéra, sitä, äjya, madhu, and sandal are excellent incense placed on heated coals."

Text 9

viñëu-dharmottare ca

tathaiva çubha-gandhä ye dhüpäs te jagataù pateùväsudevasya dharma-jïair nivedyä dänaveçvara

viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; ca-and; tathä-so; eva-inceed; çubha-gandhä-sweet fragrance; ye-which; dhüpäù-inscenses; te-they; jagataù-of the universe; pateù-the master; väsudevasya-Lord Väsudeva; dharma-jïaiù-by the knowers of religion; nivedyä-should be offered; dänaveçvara-O king of the danavas.

In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, it is said:

"O king of the dänavas, they who know the truths of religion should offer sweet incense to Lord Väsudeva, the master of the universe."

Text 10

atha dhüpeñu niñiddhaà

na dhüpärthe jéva-jätam

atha-now; dhüpeñu-in incenses; niñiddham-forbidden; na-not; dhüpärthe-for incesne; jéva-jätam-made form breathing living entities.

Kinds of Incense That Are Forbidden

One should not made incense from animal-products.

Text 11

tatraiväpavädaù

vinä mågamadaà dhüpe jéva-jätaà vivarjayet

tatra-there; eva-indeed; apavädaù-exception; vinä-except for; mågamadam-musk; dhüpe-in incense; jéva-jätam-madxe from animals; vivarjayet-one should avoid.

An Exception to This

Except for musk, one should not make incense from animal-products.

Text 12

kälikä-puräëe

na yakña-dhüpaà vitaren mädhaväya kadäcana

kälikä-puräëe-in the Kälikä Puräëa; na-not; yakña-dhüpam-incense from the çäla tree; vitaret-should offer; madhavaya-to Lord k; kadäcana-ever.

In the Kälikä Puräëa it is said:

"One should never offer to Lord Kåñëa incense made from the çäla tree."

Text 13

agni-puräëe

na çallakéjaà na tåëaà na çalka-rasa-sambhåtamdhüpaà pratyaìga-nirmuktaà dadyät kåñëäya buddhimän

agni-puräëe-in the Agni Puräëa; na-not; çallakéjam-made from sallaki; na-not; tåëam-grass; nanot; çalka-rasa-salkarasa; sambhåtam-made; dhüpam-incense; pratyaìga-nirmuktam-offered toi the limbs; dadyät-should give; kåñëäya-to Lord Kåñëa; buddhimän-an intelligent person.

In the Agni Puräëa it is said:

"An intelligent person should not offer to Lord Kåñëa's transcendental limbs incense made from çallaké, grass, or çalkarasa.

Texts 14 and 15

atha dhüpana-mähätmyaà

narasiàhe çré-märkaëòeya-çatänéka-samväde

mahiñäkhyaà gugguluà ca äjya-yuktaà sa-çarkaramdhüpaà dadäti räjendra narasiàhasya bhaktimän

sa dhüpitaù sarva-dikñu sarva-päpa-vivarjitaùapsaro-gaëa-yuktena vimänena viräjatä väyulokaà samäsädya viñëuloke mahéyate

atha-now; dhüpana-mähätmyam-the Glories of Offering Incense; narasiàhe çré-märkaëòeya-çatänéka-samväde-in the Nåsiàha Puräëa, in a conversation of Çré Märkaëòeya and Çré Çatänéka; mahiñäkhyam-called mahiña; guggulum-guggulu;

ca-and; äjya-yuktam-made with ghee; sa-with; çarkaram-sugar; dhüpam-incense; dadäti-offers; räjendra-O king of kings; narasiàhasya-to Lord Nåsiàha; bhaktimän-a devotee; sa-that; dhüpitaù-scented; sarva-dikñu-in all directions; sarva-päpa-vivarjitaù-free of all sins; apsaro-gaëa-the apsaras; yuktena-with; vimänena-in an airplane; viräjatä-shining; väyulokam-to Väyuloka; samäsädya-attaining; viñëuloke-in Viñëuloka; mahéyate-is glorified.

The Glories of Offering Incense

In the Nåsiàha Puräëa, in a conversation of Çré Märkaëòeya and Çré Çatänéka, it is said:

"O king of kings, a devotee who offers mahiña-guggula incense, made with ghee and sugar, to Lord Nåsiàha, makes all the directions fragrant. He becomes free of all sins. Accompanied by a host of apsaräs, he flies in a splendid airplane to Väyuloka. He is praised in Viñëuloka."

Text 16

skände

ye kåñëäguruëä kåñëaà dhüpayanti kalau naräùsa-karpüreëa räjendra kåñëa-tulyä bhavanti te

skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; ye-who; kåñëäguruëä-with Kåñëaguru; kåñëam-Kåñëa; dhüpayanti-offer incesne; kalau-in Kali-yuga; naräù-persons; sa-karpüreëa-with camphor; räjendra-Oking; kåñëa-tulyä-equal to Lord Kåñëa; bhavanti-become; te-they.

In the Skanda Puräëa it is said:

"In Kali-yuga they who offer kåñëäguru incense to Lord Kåñëa attain spiritual forms like Lord Kåñëa's.

Text 17

säjyena vai guggulunä su-dhüpena janärdanamdhüpayitvä naro yäti padaà tasya sadä-çivam

säjyena-with ghee; vai-indeed; guggulunä-with guggula; su-dhüpena-with incense; janärdanam-to Lord Kåñëa; dhüpayitvä-offering incense; naraù-a persopn; yäti-goes; padam-to the abode; tasya-of Him; sadä-çivam-eternally auspicious.

"A person who offers guggula incense with ghee to Lord Kåñëa goes to the Lord's eternally auspicious abode.

Text 18

aguruà tu sa-karpüra- divya-candana-saurabhamdattvä nityaà harer bhaktyä kulänäà tarayec chatam

agurum-aguru; tu-indeed; sa-karpüra-with camphor; divya-candana-saurabham-scentedwith divine sandal; dattvä-placing; nityam-always; hareù-of Lord Hari; bhaktyä-with devotion; kulänäm-of families; tarayet-delivers; çatam.

"A person who with devotion regularly offers to Lord Kåñëa aguru incense, mixed with camphor and splendid sandal, delivers a hundred generations of His relatives."

Text 19

viñëu-dharmottara-tåtéya-khaëòe

dhüpanam uttamaà tadvat sarva-käma-phala-pradamdhüpaà turuñkakaà dattvä vahniñöoma-phalaà labhet

viñëu-dharmottara-tåtéya-khaëòe-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, in the Third, or Uttara-khaëòa; dhüpanam-incense; uttamam-best; tadvat-then; sarva-all; käma-desires; phala-results; pradam-giving; dhüpam-incense; turuñkakam-turuñkaka; dattvä-offering; vahniñöoma-phalam-the result of an agnistoma-yajna; labhet-attains.

In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, in the Third, or Uttara-khaëòa, it is said:

"Offering incense to the Lord fulfills all desires. A person who offers turuñkaka incense to the Lord attains the result of performing an agniñöoma-yajïa.

Text 20

dattvä tu kåtrimaà mukhyaà sarva-kämän aväpnuyätgandha-yukta-kåtaà dattvä yajïa-gosavam äpnuyät

dattvä-offwering; tu-indeed; kåtrimam-artifical; mukhyam-primary; sarva-kämän-all desires; aväpnuyät-attains; gandha-fragrance; yukta-kåtam-with; dattvä-offering; yajïa-gosavam-a gosava yajna; äpnuyät-attains.

"A person who offers incense to the Lord attains all desires. A person who offers fragrant incense to the Lord attains the result of a gosava-yajïa.

Text 21

dattvä karpüra-niryäsaà väjimedha-phalaà labhetvasante guggulaà dattvä vahniñöomam aväpnuyät

dattvä-offering; karpüra-niryäsam-camphor; väjimedha-phalam-the result of an asvamedha-yajna; labhet-attains; vasante-in the spring; guggulam-guggula; dattvä-offering; vahniñöomam-agnistoma; aväpnuyät-attains.

"A person who offers camphor to the Lord attains the result of an açvamedha-yajïa. A person who in the spring offers guggula incense to the Lord attains the result of an agniñöoma-yajïa.

Text 22

gréñme candana-säreëa räjasüya-phalaà labhetturuñkasya pradänena pravåñy uttamatäà labhet

gréñme-in the summer; candana-säreëa-with sandal paste; räjasüya-phalam-the result of a rajasuya-yajna; labhet-attains; turuñkasya-of turuska; pradänena-by giving; pravåñy-during the monsson season; uttamatam-exalted position; labhet-attains.

"A person who in the summer offers sandal paste to the Lord attains the result of a räjasüya-yajïa. A person who in

the monsoon season offers turuñka incense to the Lord becomes exalted.

Text 23

karpüra-dänäc charadi räjasüyam aväpnuyät

karpüra-of camphor; dänät-by the gift; çaradi-in the autumn; räjasüyam-a rasjasuya; aväpnuyät-attains.

"A person who in the autumn offers camphor to the Lord attains the result of a räjasüya-yajïa.

Text 24

hemante måga-darpeëa väjimedha-phalaà labhet

çiçire 'guru-säreëa sarva-medha-phalaà labhet

hemante-in winter; måga-darpeëa-with musk; väjimedha-phalam-the result of an asvamedha-yajna; labhet-attains; çiçire-in second wither; aguru-säreëa-with aguru; sarva-medha-phalam-the result of all yajnas; labhet-attains.

"A person who in the first part of winter offers musk to the Lord attains the result of an açvamedha-yajïa. A person who in the second part of winter offers aguru incense to the Lord attains the result of all yajïas.

Text 25

padam uttamam äpnoti dhüpa-daù puñöim açnutedhüpa-lekhä yathaivordhvaà nityam eva prasarpati tathaivordhva-gato nityaà dhüpa-dänäd bhaven naraù

padam-abode; uttamam-supreme; äpnoti-attains; dhüpa-daù-one who offers incense; puñöim-properity; açnute-enjoys; dhüpa-lekhä-offering incense; yathä-as; eva-indeed; ürdhvaàabove; nityam-always; eva-indeed; prasarpati-goes; tathä-so; eva-indeed; ürdhva-gataù-gone above; nityam-always; dhüpa-dänät-by offering incense; bhaven-becomes; naraù-a person.

"A person who offers incense to the Lord attains prosperity in this world and at the end attains the spiritual abode. A person who offers incense to the Lord is always exalted. A person who offers incense to the Lord is always exalted."

Text 26

prahläda-saàhitäyäà ca

yo dadäti harer dhüpaà tulasé-kañöha-vahninäçata-kratu-samaà puëyaà go-'yutaà labhate phalam. iti.

prahläda-saàhitäyäm-in the Prahläda-saàhitä; ca-and; yaù-who; dadäti-offers; hareù-to Lord Hari; dhüpam-incense; tulasé-tulasé; kañöha-wood; vahninä-with wood; çata-kratu-samam-equal to a hunded yajnas; puëyam-piety; gaù-of cows; ayutam-ten thousand; labhate-attains; phalam-result; iti-thus.

In the Prahläda-saàhitä it is said:

r giving ten thousand cows in charity.

Text 27

dhüpayec ca tathä samyak çrémad-bhagavad-älayamdhüpa-çeñaà tato bhaktyä svayaà seveta vaiñëavaù

dhüpayet-offers incense; ca-as; tathä-so; samyak-properly; çrémad-bhagavad-älayam-to the abode of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; dhüpa-çeñam-the remaining incense; tataù-then; bhaktyä-with devotion; svayam-personally; seveta-should serve; vaiñëavaù-a devotee.

"A devotee should make the Lord's temple pleasant with the scent of incense. Thus, with devotion, he may smell the incense that has been offered to the Lord."

Text 28

tathä ca brähme ambaréñaà prati gautama-praçne

dhüpa-çeñaà tu kåñëasya bhaktyä bhajasi bhüpatekåtvä cärätrikaà viñëoù sva-murdhnä vandase nåpa

tathä-so; ca-and; brähme ambaréñaà prati gautama-praçne-in the Brahma Puräëa, Gautama Muni posed the following question to King Ambaréña; dhüpa-of incense; çeñam-the remnant; tu-indeed; kåñëasya-of Lord Kåñëa; bhaktyä-with devotion; bhajasi-you worship; bhüpate-O king; kåtvä-doing; ca-and; ärätrikam-arati; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; sva-murdhnä-with your head; vandase-bow down; nåpa-O king.

In the Brahma Puräëa, Gautama Muni posed the following question to King Ambaréña:

"O King, why do you devotedly smell the remnants of incense offered to the Lord? Why do you offer ärati to Lord Viñëu and then bow Your head before Him?"

Text 29

atha çré-bhagavad-älaya-dhüpana-mähätmyaà

kåñëäguru-samutthena dhüpena çrédharälayamdhüpayed vaiñëavo yas tu sa mukto narakärëavät

atha-now; çré-bhagavat-of the Lord; älaya-the abode; dhüpana-incense; mähätmyam-the glories; kåñëäguru-samutthena-made of Kåñëaguru; dhüpena-with incesne; çrédharälayam-the abode of the Lord; dhüpayet-offer incesne; vaiñëavaù-a devotee; yaù-who; tu-indeed; sa-he; muktaù-freed; naraka-of hell; arëavät-from the ocean.

The Glories of Making the Lord's Temple Fragrant With Incense

A devotee who makes the Lord's temple fragrant with kåñëäguru incense is rescued from the ocean of hellish life.

Text 30

dhüpa-çeña-sevana-mähätmyaà

pädme çré-gautamämbarisa-samväde

tértha-koöi-çatair dhauto yathä bhavati nirmalaùkaroti nirmalaà dehaà dhüpa-çeñas tathä hareù

dhüpa-of incense; çeña-remnant; sevana-service; mähätmyam-thwe glories; pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; çré-gautamämbarisa-samväde-in a conversation of Çré Gautama and Çré Ambaréña tértha-koöi-çataiù-with hundreds and millions of pilgrimages; dhautaù-purified; yathä-as; bhavati-is; nirmalaù-pure; karoti-does; nirmalam-pure; deham-body; dhüpa-çeñaù-remnants of incense; tathä-as; hareù-of Lord Hari.

The Glories of Smelling the Remnants of Incense Offered to the Lord

In the Padma Puräëa, in a conversation of Çré Gautama and Çré Ambaréña, it is said:

"By once smelling the remnants of incense offered to the Lord, a person attains the purity of hundreds and millions of pilgrimages.

Text 31

na bhayaà vidyate tasya bhaumaà divyaà rasätalamkåñëa-dhüpävaçeñena yasyäìgaà pariväsitam

na-not; bhayam-fear; vidyate-is; tasya-of him; bhaumam-on the earth; divyam-in Devaloka; rasätalam-in Rasatalaloka; kåñëa-of Lord Kåñëa; dhüpa-incense; avaçeñena-with the remnant; yasya-of whom; aìgam-the body; pariväsitam-is scented.

"A person whose body is scented with the remnants of incense offered to Lord Kåñëa need have no fears on earth, in Devaloka, or in Rasätalaloka.

Text 32

näpado vipadas tasya bhavanti khalu dehinaùharer dattävaçeñena dhüpayed yas tanuà sadä

na-not; äpadaù-calamities; vipadaù-distresses; tasya-of him; bhavanti-are; khalu-indeed; dehinaù-persons; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; dattä-offering; avaçeñena-with the remnants; dhüpayet-scents; tanum-body; sadä-always.

"A person whose body is always fragrant with the remnants of incense offered to the Lord never meets with any troubles or any calamities.

Text 33

näsaukhyaà na bhayaà duùkhaà nädhijaà naiva rogajamyaù sevayed dhüpa-çeñaà viñëor adbhuta-karmaëaù

na-not; asaukhyam-unhappiness; na-not; bhayam-fear; duùkham-suffering; na-not; adhijam-born of anxiety or mental distress; na-not; eva-indeed; rogajam-born of physical disease; yaù-one who; sevayet-serves; dhüpa-of incense; çeñam-the remnant; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; adbhuta-karmaëaù-whose deeds are wonderful.

"A person who smells the remnants of incense offered to Lord Viñëu, whose deeds are all filled with wonder, is never unhappy or afraid. He never suffers from anxiety or diseases.

Text 34

krüra-sattva-bhayaà naiva na ca caura-bhayaà kvacitsevayitvä harer dhüpaà nirmalyaà padayor jalam

krüra-sattva-of cruel persons; bhayam-fear; na-not; eva-indeed; na-not; ca-and; caura-bhayam-fear of thieves; kvacit-ever; sevayitvä-having served; hareù-of Lord Hari; dhüpam-the incense; nirmalyam-pure; padayoù-of the feet; jalam-the water.

"A person who has honored the incense offered to Lord Kåñëa or the water that has washed His feet need never fear cruel persons or thieves.

Text 35

hari-bhakti-sudhodaye ca

äghräëaà yad dharer dattaà dhüpocchiñöasya sarvataùtad-bhava-vyäla-dañöänäà bhavet karma-viñäpaham. iti.

hari-bhakti-sudhodaye-in the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya; ca-and; äghräëam-smelling; yat-what; dhareù-of Lord Hari; dattam-offered; dhüpa-of incense; ucchiñöasya-remnant; sarvataù-completely; tad-bhava-of repeated birth and death; vyäla-by the snake; dañöänäm-of they who are bitten; bhavet-is; karma-of karma; viña-of the poison; apaham-removal; iti-thus.

In the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya it is said:

"By smelling the remnants of incense offered to Lord Hari, they who are bitten by the serpent of repeated birth and death can become from from that serpent's poison of karmic reactions.

Text 36

darçanäd api dhüpasya dhüpa-dänädi-jaà phalamsarvam anye 'pi vindanti tac cägre vyatim eñyati

darçanät-by seeing; api-even; dhüpasya-of incense; dhüpa-of incense; däna-offering; ädi-beginning with; jam-born from; phalam-result; sarvam-all; anye-others; api-even; vindanti-find; tat-that; ca-and; agre-in the presence; vyatim-manifestation; eñyati-will attain.

"They who do not directly offer incense to the Lord, but only watch the offering, attain the result of offering it directly."

Text 37

atha dépanaà

tathaiva dépam utsåjya

prägvad ghaëöäà ca vädayanpädäbjäd ädåg-abjäntaà mudrayoccaiù pradépayet

atha-now; dépanam-offering a lamp; tathä-so; eva-indeed; dépam-lamp; utsåjya-offering; prägvat-as before; ghaëöäm-bell; ca-and; vädayan-ringing; pädäbjät-from the lotus feet; ädåg-abjäntam-up to the lotus eyes; mudrayä-with a mudrä; uccaiù-greatly; pradépayet-should offer a lamp.

Offering a Lamp

Ringing the bell as before, one should with a mudrä offer a lamp to the Lord, beginning with His lotus feet and going up to His lotus eyes.

Text 38

tatra mantraù

gautaméye

su-prakäço mahä-tejaù sarvatas timiräpahaùsa-bähyäbhyantara-jyotir dépo 'yaà pratigåhyatäm

tatra-there; mantraù-a mantra; gautaméye-in the Gautaméya Tantra; su-prakäçaù-spelndid; mahä-tejaù-great lamp; sarvataù-everywhere; timira-dakrness; apahaù-removing; sa-bähya-outside; abhyantara-and inside; jyotiù-shining; dépaù-lamp; ayam-this; pratigåhyatäm-please accept.

A Mantra For Offering a Lamp


"Please accept this brilliant lamp, which removes all darkness, both within and without."

Text 39

atha dépaù

dépaà prajvälayet çaktau karpüreëa ghåtena vägavyena taträsamarthye tailenäpi su-gandhinä

atha-now; dépaù-the lamp; dépam-a lamp; prajvälayet-should light; çaktau-ability; karpüreëa-with camphor; ghåtena-with ghee; vä-or; gavyena-from a cow; tatra-there; asamarthye-in the lack of ability; tailena-with oil; api-also; su-gandhinä-scented.

The Lamp

As far as one is able, one should offer a lamp burning with ghee or with camphor. If one cannot obtain ghee, one should offer a lamp of scented oil.

Text 40

tathä ca näradéya-kalpe

sa-ghåtaà guggulaà dhüpaà

dépaà go-ghåta-dépitamsamasta-pariväraya haraye çraddhayärpayet

tathä-so; ca-and; näradéya-kalpe-in the Närada-kalpa; sa-ghåtam-with ghee; guggulam-guggula; dhüpam-incense; dépam-lamp; go-ghåta-with cow's ghee; dépitam-burning; samasta-pariväraya-with all his associates; haraye-ot Lord Hari; çraddhayä-with faith; arpayet-should offer.

In the Närada-kalpa it is said:

"With faith one should offer to Lord Hari and all His associates incense of guggula and ghee, and a lamp burning with ghee."

Text 41

bhaviñyottare

ghåtena dépo dätavyo räjan tailena vä punaù

bhaviñya-uttare-in the Bhaviñya Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; ghåtena-with ghee; dépaù-lamp; dätavyaù-should be offered; räjan-O king; tailena-with oil; vä-or; punaù-again.

In the Bhaviñya Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa it is said:

"O king, one should offer to Lord Hari a lamp burning with ghee or with oil."

Text 42

mahäbhärate ca

haviñä prathamaù kalpo dvitéyaç cauñadhorasaiù

mahäbhärate-in the Mahäbhärata; ca-and; haviñä-with ghee; prathamaù-first; kalpaù-considered; dvitéyaç-second; caänd; auñadhorasaiùwith oil.


"Best is a lamp burning with ghee. Second best is a lamp burning with oil."

Text 43

atha dépe niñiddhaà

bhaviñyottare

vasämajjädibhir dépo na tu deyaù kadäcana

atha-now; dépe-in lamps; niñiddham-forbidden; bhaviñyottare-in the Bhaviñya Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; vasämajjä-with animal fat; ädibhiù-beginning with; dépaù-lamp; na-not; tu-indeed; deyaù-to be offered; kadäcana-ever.

Lamps That Are Forbidden


"One should never offer to Lord Hari a lamp burning with animal fat or other forbidden things."

Text 44

mahäbhärate

vasämajjästhi-niryäsair na käryaù puñöim icchatä

mahäbhärate-in the Mahäbhärata; vasämajjästhi-niryäsaiù-with animal fat; na-not; käryaù-to be done; puñöim-prosperity; icchatä-by a,person who desires.


"A person who desires happiness and prosperity should never offer to Lord Hari a lamp burning with animal fat."

Text 45

viñëu-dharmottare tåtéya-khaëòe

néla-rakta-daçaà dépaà prayatnena vivarjayet

viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; tåtéya-khaëòe-ijn the Third Part; néla-rakta-daçam--blue and red; dépam-lamp; prayatnena-with care; vivarjayet-one should avoid.

In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, Third Khaëòa, it is said:

"One should take care to avoid offering a lamp that is blue or red."

Text 46

kälikä-puräëe

dépa-våkñaç ca kartavyas taijasädyaiç ca bhairavavåkñeñu dépo dätavyo na tu bhümau kadäcana

kälikä-puräëe-in the Kälikä Puräëa; dépa-lamp; våkñaù-tree; ca-and; kartavyaù-should be done; taijasa-with metal; ädyaiù-beginning; ca-and; bhairava-O Bhairava; våkñeñu-in trees; dépaù-lamp; dätavyaù-should be done; na-not; tu-but; bhümau-on the earth; kadäcana-ever.


"O Bhairava, one should make a lamp out of metal or other suitable materials. One may place a lamp in a tree, but one should never place a lamp on the ground."

Text 47

atha dépa-mähätmyaà

skände brahma-närada-samväde

prajvälya deva-devasya karpüreëa ca dépakam

açvamedham aväpnoti kulaà caiva samuddharet

atha-now; dépa-mähätmyam-the Glories of Offering a Lamp; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; brahma-närada-samväde-in a conversation of Brahmä and Närada; prajvälya-lighting; deva-devasya-of the master of the demigods; karpüreëa-with camphor; ca-ansd; dépakam-lamp; açvamedham-asmavedham-yajna; aväpnoti-attains; kulam-family; ca-and; eva-indeed; samuddharet-delivers.

The Glories of Offering a Lamp

In the Skanda Puräëa, in a conversation of Brahmä and Närada, it is said:

"A person who offers a camphor-lamp to Lord Kåñëa, the master of the demigods, attains the result of offering an açvamedha-yajïa. He delivers everyone in his family."

Text 48

atraivänyatra ca

yo dadäti mahé-päla kåñëasyägre tu dépakampätakaà tu samutsåjya jyoté-rüpaà labhet phalam

atra-here' eva-indeed; anyatra-in another place; ca-and; yaù-one who; dadäti-gives; mahé-päla-O protector of the earth; kåñëasyägre-in the presence of Çré Kåñëa; tu-indeed; dépakam-a lamp; pätakam-hell; tu-indeed; samutsåjya-leaving; jyoté-rüpam-a splendid form; labhet-attains; phalam-result.

In another passage of the Skanda Puräëa it is said:

"O protector of the earth, a person who offers a lamp to Lord Kåñëa is saved from hell. He attains an effulgent spiritual form.

Text 49

värähe dépaà dadäti yo devi mad-bhaktyä tu vyavasthitaùnäträndhatvaà bhavet tasya sapta-janmani sundari

värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; dépam-lamp; dadäti-gives; yaù-who; devi-O goddess; mad-bhaktyä-with devotion to Me; tu-indeed; vyavasthitaù-situated; na-not; atra-here; andhatvam-blindness; bhavet-is; tasya-of him; sapta-janmani-for seven births; sundari-O beautiful one.

In the Varäha Puräëa it is said:

"O beautiful goddess, a person who offers Me a lamp with love and devotion will spend seven births immune to the danger of becoming blind.

Text 50

yas tu dadyät pradépaà me sarvataù çraddhayänvitaùsvayam-prabheñu deçeñu tasyotpattir vidhéyate

yaù-one who; tu-indeed; dadyät-offers; pradépam-a lamp; me-to Me; sarvataù-in all respects; çraddhayänvitaù-with faith; svayam-prabheñu-self-effulgent; deçeñu-in the abodes; tasya-of him; utpattiù-masnifestation; vidhéyate-is.

"A person who faithfully offers Me a lamp enters the effulgent spiritual worlds."

Text 51

hari-bhakti-sudhodaye

dattaà sva-jyotiñe jyotir yad vistärayati prabhämtadvad dharyati saj-jyotir dätuù päpatamo 'paham

hari-bhakti-sudhodaye-in the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya; dattam-offered; sva-jyotiñe-self-effulgent; jyotiù-lamp; yat-what; vistärayati-expands; prabhäm-effulgence; tadvat-taht; dharyati-maintains; saj-jyotiù-spiritual knowledge; dätuù-of the giver; päpatamaù-greatest sin; apaham-removal.


"When offered to the effulgent Supreme Person, a lamp enlightens the giver and removes all his sins."

Text 52

närasiàhe

ghåtena vätha tailena dépaà prajvälayen naraùviñëave vidhivad bhaktyä tasya puëya-phalaà çåëu

närasiàhe-in the Nåsiàha Puräëa; ghåtena-with ghee; vä-or; atha-then; tailena-with oil; dépam-lamp; prajvälayen-lighting; naraù-a person; viñëave-to Lord Viñëu; vidhivat-properly; bhaktyä-with devotion; tasya-of him; puëya-phalam-the result of piety; çåëu-please hear.


"Please hear the pious result attained by a person who properly and with devotion offers to Lord Viñëu a lamp burning either with ghee or oil.

Text 53

vihäya päpaà sakalaà sahasräditya-sa-prabhaùjyotiñmatä vimänena viñëuloke mahéyate

vihäya-abandoning; päpam-sins; sakalam-all; sahasräditya-sa-prabhaù-splendid like a thousand suns; jyotiñmatä-with effulgence; vimänena-with an airplane; viñëuloke-in Viñëuloka; mahéyate-is glorified.

"Free of all sins, He becomes glorious like a thousand suns. Traveling in a splendid airplane, he goes to Viñëuloka, where he is honored."

Text 54

prahläda-saàhitäyäà

ca tulasé-pävakenaiva dépaà yaù kurute hareùdépa-lakña-sahasräëäà puëyaà bhavati daityaja. iti.

prahläda-saàhitäyäm-in the Prahläda-saàhitä; ca-and; tulasé-of tulasé; pävakena-with a fire; eva-indeed; dépam-lamp; yaù-one who; kurute-does; hareù-to Lord Kåñëa; dépa-lakña-sahasräëäm-a hundred million lamps; puëyam-piety; bhavati-attains; daityaja-O son of a demon; iti-thus.

In the Prahläda-saàhitä it is said:

"O son of a demon, by offering to Lord Hari a lamp burning with tulasé wood, a person attains the pious result of offering a hundred million lamps."

Text 55

paçcäd dépaà ca taà bhaktyä mürdhnä vandeta vaiñëavaùdhüpasyevekñaëät tasya labhante 'nye 'pi tat phalam

paçcät-after; dépam-lamp; ca-and; tam-that; bhaktyä-with devotion; mürdhnä-with the head; vandeta-bows; vaiñëavaù-a devotee; dhüpasya-of incense; eva-indeed; ékñaëät-from the sight; tasya-of him; labhante-attain; anye-others; api-also; tat-that; phalam-result.

"After offering a lamp, a Vaiñëava should bow his head with devotion. By seeing someone offer incense to the Lord, others attain the same result as he who did the offering.

Text 56

kecic cänena dépena çré-mürter mürdhni vaiñëaväùnéräjanam ihecchanti mahä-néräjane yathä

kecit-some; ca-and; anena-with this; dépena-lamp; çré-mürteù-of the Deity of the Lord; mürdhni-ojn the head; vaiñëaväù-a Vaiñëavas; néräjanam-arati; iha-here; icchanti-desire; mahä-néräjane-in a great arati; yathä-as.

"Some Vaiñëavas meditate on offer a lamp to the Lord. In their meditation they offer an elaborate ärati to the Lord.

Text 57

tathä ca rämärcana-candrikäyäà dhüpänantaraà dépa-prasaìge

ärätrikaà tu viñama- bahu-vartti-samanvitamabhyarcya rämacandräya väma-madhyam athärpayet

tathä-so; ca-and; rämärcana-candrikäyäm-in the Rämärcana-candrikä; dhüpa-offering incense; anantaram-after; dépa-prasaìge-inj connection with a lamp; ärätrikam-arati; tu-indeed; viñama-uneven; bahu-vartti-samanvitam-many times; abhyarcya-worshiping; rämacandräya-Lord Rämacandra; väma-left; madhyam-middle; atha-then; arpayet-should offer.

In the Rämärcana-candrikä, in the description of offering a lamp after the offering of incense is completed, it is said:

"One should worship Lord Rämacandra by offering ärati to Him. In that ärati one should offer each article an odd

number of times.

Text 58

namo dépeçvaräyeti dadyät puñpäïjalià tataùavadhüpyäbhyarcya vädyair mürdhni néräjayet prabhum. iti.

namaù-obeisnaces; dépa-of the lamp; éçvaräya-to the master; iti-thus; dadyät-should offer; puñpa-flower; aïjaliàoffering; tataù-then; avadhüpya-offering incense; abhyarcya-worshiping; vädyaiù-with music; mürdhni-in the head; néräjayet-one should offer ärati; prabhum-to the Supreme Personality of Godhead; iti-thus.

"One should say, `Obeisances to the master of the lamps!' Thus worshiping the Lord with offerings of flowers, incense, and music, in meditation one should offer ärati to the Lord."

Text 59

ata eveñyate tasya karäbhyäà vandanaà ca taiùnäma cäratrikety ädi varttyo 'pi bahuläù samäù

ata eva-there; iñyate-is desired; tasya-of him; karäbhyäm-with both hands; vandanam-bowing down; ca-and; taiù-with them; näma-name; ca-and; äratrika-arati; iti-thus; ädi-beginning; varttyaù-to be done; api-also; bahuläù-many; asamäù-unequal.

After this one should bow down, extending both hands. This ceremony is called ärati, where offerings are made a plural, odd number of times.

Text 60

prasaìgäl likhyate 'traiva çrémad-bhagavad-älayedépa-dänasya mähätmyaà kärttikéyaà ca tad vina

prasaìgät-by touch; likhyate-is written; atra-here; eva-indeed; çrémad-bhagavad-älaye-in the abode of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; dépa-of a lamp; dänasya-of the offering; mähätmyam-the glory; kärttikéyam-in Kärttika; ca-and; tat-that; vina-without.

Now will be written the glory of offering a lamp in the temple of the Supreme Lord. This is different from the offering of a lamp during the month of Kärttika.

Text 61

atha çré-bhagavad-älaye dépa-prada-mähätmyaà

viñëu-dharmottare prathama-khaëòe

dépa-dänät paraà dänaà na bhütaà na bhaviñyatikeçaväyatane kåtvä dépa-våkñä manoharam atéva bhräjate lakñmyä divam äsädya sarvataù

atha-now; çré-bhagavad-älaye-in the temple of the Lord; dépa-prada-mähätmyam-the glory of offering a lamp; viñëu--dharmottare prathama-khaëòe-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, Part One; dépa-dänät-from offering a lamp; param-great; dänam-offering; na-not; bhütam-was; na-not; bhaviñyati-will be; keçava-of Lord Kåñëa; äyatane-in the temple; kåtvä-doing; dépa-våkñä-lamp; manoharam-beautiful; atéva-very; bhräjate-shines; lakñmyä-with glory; divam-day; äsädya-attaining; sarvataù-completely.

The Glory of Offering a Lamp in the Lord's Temple

In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, Part One, it is said:

"When a person makes a great tree of lamps that makes the temple of Lord Kåñëa gloriously shine like the sun-planet itself, that is a very great offering. There never was, nor will there ever be an offering better than that.

Text 62

dépa-mäläà prayacchanti ye naraù çärìgino gåhebhavanti te candra-samäù svargam äsädya mänaväù

dépa-of lamps; mäläm-a garland; prayacchanti-offer; ye-who; naraù-people; çärìginaù-of Lord Kåñëa; gåhe-in the home; bhavanti-become; te-they; candra-samäù-like the moon; svargam-in Svargaloka; äsädya-attaining; mänaväù-people.

"They who offer a row of lamps in Lord Kåñëa's temple go to Svargaloka where they are splendid like the moon.

Text 63

dépägäraà naraù kåtvä küöägära-nibhaà çubhamkeçavälayam äsädya loke bhäti sa çakravat

dépa-lamps; ägäram-room; naraù-a person; kåtvä-making; küöägära-s rooftop apartment; nibham-like; çubham-splendid; keçavälayam-the home of Lord Kåñëa; äsädya-attaining; loke-in thw world; bhäti-shines; sa-he; çakravat-like Indra.

"A person who, filling Lord Kåñëa's temple with lamps, makes it seem like a rooftop apartment in the moonlight, himself shines like a King Indra in this world.

Text 64

yathojjvalo bhaved dépaù sampradätäpi yädavatathä nityojjvalo loke näka-påñöhe viräjate

yathä-as; ujjvalaù-shining; bhavet-is; dépaù-lamp; sampradätä-the giver; api-also; yädava-O Yädava; tathä-so; nitya-always; ujjvalaù-shining; loke-in this world; näka-påñöhe-in the sky; viräjate-shines.

"O descendent of Yadu, a person who makes a lamp shine in the Lord's temple himself shines forever in the spiritual sky.

Text 65

sa-dépe ca yathä deçe

cakñüàsi phalavanti catathä dépasya dätäro bhavanti sa-phalekñaëäù

sa-dépe-with a lamp; ca-and; yathä-as; deçe-in the place; cakñüàsi-eyes; phalavanti-become successful; ca-and; tathä-so; dépasya-of a lamp; dätäraù-the givers; bhavanti-become; sa-phala-succesful; ékñaëäù-eyes.

"The eyes of they who see the Lord's temple lit with lamps become glorious and perfect. The eyes of they who light a lamp in the Lord's temple become glorious and perfect.

Text 66

ekädaçyäà ca dvädaçyäà prati-pakñaà tu yo naraùdépaà dadäti kåñëäya tasya puëya-phalaà çåëu

ekädaçyäm-on ekädaçé; ca-and; dvädaçyäm-on dvadasi; prati-pakñam-each fortnight; tu-indeed; yaù-who; naraù-person; dépam-lamp; dadäti-gives; kåñëäya-to Lord Kåñëa; tasya-of him; puëya-of piety; phalam-the result; çåëu-please hear.

"Please hear the pious result attained by a person who on every ekädaçé and dvädaçé offers a lamp to Lord Kåñëa.

Text 67

suvarëa-maëi-muktäòhyaà manojïam ati-sundaramdépa-mäläkulaà divyaà vimänam adhirohati

suvarëa-with gold; maëi-jewels; muktä-and pearls; äòhyam-opulent; manojïam-chamring; ati-sundaram-very beautiful; dépa-mäläkulam-Filled with of lamps; divyam-splendid; vimänam-airplane; adhirohati-climbs.

"Such a person leaves this world in a celestial airplane shining with lamps of gold, jewels, and pearls.

Text 68

padma-sütrodbhavaà vartti gandha-tailena dépakänvirogaù çubhagaç caiva dattvä bhavati mänavaù

padma-lotus; sütra-fiber; udbhavam-created; vartti-wick; gandha-tailena-with scented oil; dépakän-lamps; virogaù-free of disease; çubhagaù-fortunate and handsome; ca-and; eva-indeed; dattvä-offering; bhavati-is; mänavaù-a person.

"A person who offers to the Lord a lamp burning with scented oil and with a wick made from lotus fiber, becomes fortunate, handsome, and free from disease.

Text 69

dépa-dänaà mahä-puëyaà anya-deveñv api dhruvamkià punar väsudevasyä- nantasya tu mahätmanaù

dépa-dänam-the gift of a lamp; mahä-puëyam-very pious; anya-deveñv-to other deities; api-even; dhruvam-indeed; kim-

what?; punaù-more; väsudevasya-of Lord Väsudeva; anantasya-limitless; tu-indeed; mahätmanaù-the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

"Even when offered to other deities the gift of a lamp is very pious. What can be said, then, of the piety attained when a lamp is offered to Lord Väsudeva, the Supreme Personality of Godhead?

Text 70

tatraiva tåtéya-khaëòe

dépaà cakñuù-pradaà dadyät tathäivordhva-gati-pradamürdhvaà yathä dépa-çikhä dätä cordhva-gatis tathä

tatra-there; eva-certainly; tåtéya-khaëòe-in the Third khanda; dépam-lamp; cakñuù-eyes; pradam-giving; dadyät-gives; tathä-so; eva-indeed; ürdhva-gati-pradam-giving an exalted destination; ürdhvam-up; yathä-as; dépa-çikhä-the flame of a lamp; dätä-the giver; ca-and; ürdhva-up; gatiù-going; tathä-so.

In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, Part Three, it is said:

"As the flame in a lamp reaches up, so a person who offers a lamp to the Lord travels up to the spiritual world.

Text 71

yävad akñi-nimeñäëi dépo devälaye jvalettavad varña-sahasräëi näka-påñöhe mahéyate

yävat-as; akñi-nimeñäëi-the blinking of an eye; dépaù-lamp; devälaye-in the home of the Lord; jvalet-blazing; tavat-so; varña-years; sahasräëi-thousand; näka-påñöhe-in the world of the sky; mahéyate-is glorified.

"When he offers a lamp in the Lord's temple, a person earns a thousand years in Devaloka for each second the lamp burns."

Text 72

båhan-näradéye vétihotraà prati yajïadhvajasya pürva-janma-våtta-kathane

pradépaù sthäpitas tatra suratärthaà dvijottamatenäpi mama duñkarma niùçeñaà kñayam ägatam

båhan-näradéye-in the Närada Puräëa; vétihotram-to Vitihotra; prati-to; yajïadhvajasya-of Yajnadhvaja; pürva-janma-våtta-kathane-in the story of the previous biurth; pradépaù-lamp; sthäpitaù-placed; tatra-there; suratärtham-for amorous pastimes; dvijottama-O best of brähmaëas; tena-by that; api-even; mama-of me; duñkarma-wicked deed; niùçeñam-all; kñayam-destrcution; ägatam-attained.

In the Närada Puräëa, Yajïadhvaja, in the course of describing his previous birth, tells Vétihotra:

"O best of brähmaëas, even though I did it only to help my lust, when I lit that lamp in the Lord's temple, all my sins became destroyed."

Text 73

viñëu-dharme

ca viléyate sva-haste tu sva-tantre sati dépakaùmahä-phalo viñëu-gåhe na datto narakäya saù

viñëu-dharme-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa; ca-and; viléyate-is merge; sva-haste-in thr hand; tu-indeed; sva-tantre-independnet; sati-O saintly one; dépakaù-lamp; mahä-phalaù-great result; viñëu-gåhe-in the home of the Lord; na-not; dattaù-offered; narakäya-for hell; saù-he.

In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa it is said:

"If one offers a lamp that is somehow is placed in one's hand in the Lord's temple, that act bears a great result. A person who will not offer a lamp to the Lord is destined to go to hell.

Text 74

näradéye mohinéà prati çré-rukmäìgadoktau

tiñöhantu bahu-vittäni dänärthaà vara-varëinihådayäyäsakåt türëi dépa-dänäd divaà vrajet

näradéye mohinéà prati çré-rukmäìgadoktau-in the Närada Puräëa, Çré Rukmäìgada tells Çré Mohiné; tiñöhantu-may stand; bahu-great; vittäni-wealth; dänärtham-for the puspose of giving charity; vara-varëini-O beautiful one; hådayäya-for the heart; asakåt-many times; türëi dépa-dänät-from giving a lamp; divam-to Devaloka; vrajet-goes.

In the Närada Puräëa, Çré Rukmäìgada tells Çré Mohiné:

"O beautiful one, by giving great wealth in charity one only troubles his heart, but by giving a lamp to the Lord one quickly goes to Devaloka.


The word "devaloka" here may mean either Svargaloka or Vaikuëöhaloka.

Text 75

tasyäpy abhäve çubhage para-dépa-prabodhanamkartavyaà bhakti-bhävena sarva-dänädhikaç ca yat. iti.

tasya-of him; api-also; abhäve-in the absence; çubhage-O beautiful one; para-dépa-prabodhanam-lighting another's lamp; kartavyam-to be done; bhakti-bhävena-with devotion; sarva-dänädhikaç-better than all charities; ca-and; yat-which; iti-thus.

"O beautiful one, if one cannot personally offer a lamp to the Lord, then he should devotedly light the lamp that someone else offers. That action is better than giving everything in charity."

Text 76

sadä käla-viçeñe 'pi bhaktyä bhagavad-älayemahä-dépa-pradänasya mahimäpy atra likhyate

sadä-regulkarly; käla-viçeñe-at a sepcific time; api-also; bhaktyä-with devotion; bhagavad-älaye-in the Lord's temple; mahä-dépa-a great lamp; pradänasya-givinh; mahimä-glory; apy-also; atra-here; likhyate-is written.

Now will be written a description of the glory of regularly, at a specific time, offering with devotion a great lamp in the Lord's temple.

Texts 77-79

atha mahä-dépa-mahätmyaà


mahä-varttiù sadä deyä bhümi-päla mahä-phaläkåñëa-pakñe viçeñena taträpi sa viçeñataù

amävasyä ca nirdiñöä dvädaçi ca mahä-phaläaçva-yujyam atétäyäà kåñëa-pakñaç ca yo bhavet

amävasyä tadä puëyä dvädaçi ca viçeñataùdevasya dakñiëe pärçve deyä taila-tulä nåpa

atha-now; mahä-dépa-mahätmyam-the Glories of Offering a Great Lamp viñëu-dharmottare prathama-khaëòe-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, Part One; mahä-varttiù-great deed; sadä-always; deyä-to be done; bhümi-päla-O protector opf the earth; mahä-phala-great result; kåñëa-pakñe-on the dark fornight; viçeñena-specifically; tatra-there; api-also; sa-that; viçeñataù-specifically; amävasyänew moon; ca-and ; nirdiñöä-indicvated; dvädaçi-dvadasi; ca-and; mahä-phalä-great result; açva-yujyam-Asvina; atétäyäm-passed; kåñëa-pakñaç-dark fortnight; ca-and; yaù-who; bhavet-does; amävasyä-new moon; tadä-then; puëyä-piety; dvädaçi-dvadasi; ca-and; viçeñataù-specifically; devasya-of the Lord; dakñiëe-on the right; pärçve-side; deyä-should be given; taila-tulä-oil lamp; nåpa-O king.

The Glories of Offering a Great Lamp


"O king, by offering an oil-lamp to the Lord on His right side, during the kåñëa-pakña dvädaçé, the amävasyä, or specifically the kåñëa-pakña dvädaçé and amävasyä of the month of Açvina, one attains a great result.

Text 80

paläñöaka-yutaà räjan vartti tatra ca dépayetvasasä tu samagreëa sopaväso jitendriyaù

paläñöaka-yutam-with paläñöaka oil; räjan-O king; vartti-wick; tatra-ther; ca-and; dépayet-lights; vasasä-with vloth; tu-indeed; samagreëa-sompletelu; sopaväsaù-fasting; jitendriyaù-controlling the senses.

"Fasting and controlling the senses one should offer to the Lord a lamp burning with paläñöaka oil.

Texts 81-83

mahä-vartti-dvayam idaà sakåd dattvä mahä-matesvarlokaà su-ciraà bhuktvä jäyate bhü-tale yadä

tadä bhavati lakñmévän jaya-draviëa-samyutaùräñöre ca jäyate svasmin deçe ca nagare tathä

kule ca räja-çärdüla tatra syät dépavat-prabhaùpratyujjvalaç ca bhavati yuddheñu kalaheñu ca

mahä-vartti-dvayam-with two great wicks; idam-this; sakåt-once; dattvä-offering; mahä-mate-O noble-hearted one; svarlokam-to Svargaloka; su-ciram-for a long time; bhuktvä-enjoying; jäyate-is born; bhü-tale-on the earth; yadä-when; tadä-then; bhavati-is; lakñmévän-wealthy; jaya-draviëa-samyutaù-glorious; räñöre-in the kingdom; ca-and; jäyate-is born; svasmin-in his own; deçe-province; ca-and; nagare-in the city; tathä-so; kule-in the family; ca-and; räja-çärdüla-O tiger of kings; tatra-there; syät-is; dépavat-prabhaù-splendid like a lamp; pratyujjvalaù-splendid; ca-and; bhavati-is; yuddheñu-in battle; kalaheñu-in quarrels; ca-and.

"O noble-hearted one, a person who once offers the Lord a great lamp burning with two wicks enjoys for a very long time on Svargaloka, and when he is again born on the earth he becomes a wealthy man. In his country, province, city, and family he is splendid and glorious like a brilliant lamp. O tiger of kings, in battle or in a quarrel he is brilliant and glorious.

Text 84

khyätià yäti tathä loke sad-guëänäà ca sad-guëaiùekam apy atha yo dadyäd abhiñöatamayor dvayoù

khyätim-fame; yäti-attains; tathä-so; loke-in the world; sad-guëänäm-of the virtuous; ca-and; sad-guëaiù-with the virtues; ekam-one; apy-also; atha-then; yaù-who; dadyät-gives; abhiñöatamayoù-desired; dvayoù-of both.

"A person who offers a lamp of one wick to Lord becomes famous in this world as a person possessing all the virtues of the great souls.

Text 85

mänuñye sarvam äpnoti yad uktaà te mahänaghasvarge tathätvam äpnoti bhoga-käle tu yädava

mänuñye-in the human world; sarvam-everything; äpnoti-attains; yat-what; uktam-said; te-they; mahänagha-O saintly one; svarge-in Svarga; tathätvam-in the sdame way; äpnoti-attains; bhoga-käle-at the time of enjoyment; tu-indeed; yädava-O descendent of Yadu.

"O sinless one, he attains everything good that exists in the world of men. In Svargaloka he attains all enjoyments.

Text 86

sämänyasya tu dépasya räjan dänaà mahä-phalamkià punar mahato dépasy- ätreyattä na vidyate

sämänyasya-ordinary; tu-indeed; dépasya-lamp; räjan-O king; dänam-giving; mahä-phalam-great result; kim-what?; punaù-again; mahataù-great; dépasya-of a lamp; ätreyattä na vidyate-is not.

"Even one who offers an ordinary lamp to the Lord attains a great result. What, then, can be said of one who offers a great lamp?

Text 87

atha çoëa-malinädi-vastra-varttyä dépa-däna-niñedhaù

çoëaà vädarakaà vastraà jérëaà malinam eva caupabhuktaà na vä dadyät varttikärthaà kadäcana. iti.

atha-now; çoëa-red; malina-dirty; ädi-beginning with; vastra-cloth; varttyä-with a wick; dépa-lamp; däna-offering; niñedhaù-forbidding; çoëam-red; vädarakam-cotton; vastram-garment; jérëam-torn; malinam-dirty; eva-indeed; ca-and; upabhuktam-second-hand; na-not; vä-or; dadyät-shoul give; varttikä-wick; artham-for the purpose; kadäcana-ever; iti-thus.

One Should Not Offer a Lamp With a Wick Made From Cloth That Is Red, Dirty, or Otherwise Defective

"One should not make a lap-wick from red cotton cloth, or from cloth that is dirty, torn, or has already been used for other things.

Text 88

svayam anyena vä dattaà dépän na çré-harer haretnirväpayen na hiàsäc ca çubham icchan kadäcana

svayam-personally; anyena-by another; vä-or; dattam-offered; dépän-lamps; na-not; çré-hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; haret-should take; nirväpayen-should extinguish; na-not; hiàsäc-from disturbance; ca-and; çubham-auspiciousness; icchan-desiring; kadäcana-ever.

"A person who desires auspiciousness should never remove, extinguish, or trouble any lamps that he or anyone else has offered to Lord Hari."

Text 89

atha dépa-nirväpaëädi-doñaù


dattvä dépo na hartavyas tena karma vijänatänirväpaëaà ca dépasya

hiàsanaà ca vigarhitam

atha-now; dépa-nirväpaëädi-doñaù-the Fault of Extinguishing Lamps; viñëu-dharmottare prathama-khaëòe-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, Part One; dattvä-offering; dépaù-lamp; na-not; hartavyaù-to be removed; tena-by him; karma-work; vijänatä-knowing; nirväpaëam-extinguishing; ca-and; dépasya-of the lamps; hiàsanam-trouble; ca-and; vigarhitam-forbidden.

The Fault of Extinguishing Lamps


"A person who knows the truth of the laws of karma should never remove a lamp as it burns before Lord Hari. Such a lamp should never be extinguished or troubled.

Text 90

yaù kuryäd dhiàsanaà tena karmaëä puñpitekñaëaùdépa-hartä bhaved andhaù käëo nirväëa-kåd bhavet

yaù-one who; kuryät-does; dhiàsanam-trouble; tena-by that; karmaëä-deed; puñpita-diseased; ékñaëaù-eyes; dépa-lamp; hartä-removing; bhavet-becomes; andhaù-blind; käëaù-one-eyed; nirväëa-kåt-extinguishing; bhavet-becomes.

"A person who troubles such a lamp contracts a disease in his eyes. A person who removes such a lamp while it still burns becomes blind. A person who extinguishes such a lamp becomes one-eyed."

Text 91

viñëu-dharme ca narakän prati çré-dharmaräjoktau

yuñmäbhir yauvanonmadaà uditair avivekibhiùdyutodyotäya govinda- gehäd dépaù purä håtaù

viñëu-dharme ca narakän prati çré-dharmaräjoktau-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa Çré Yamaräja tells the residents of hell: yuñmäbhiù-by you all; yauvana-by yuthfulness; unmadam-intoxicated; uditaiù-spoken; avivekibhiù-without intelligence; dyutodyotäya-burning; govinda-gehät-from Lord Govinda's home; dépaù-lamp; pura-before; håtaù-taken.

In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa Çré Yamaräja tells the residents of hell:

"Filled with youthful folly, you removed from Lord Govinda's temple a still-burning lamp.

Text 92

tenädya narake ghore kñut-tåñëa-paripéòitaùbhavanti patitäs tévre çéta-väta-vidäritäù

tena-because of that; adya-today; narake-in hell; ghore-terrible; kñut-tåñëa-paripéòitaù-tormented by hunger and thirst; bhavanti-are; patitäù-fallen; tévre-sharp; çéta-cold; väta-winds; vidäritäù-pierced.

"That is why, tortured by hunger and thirst, and torn apart by freezing winds, you are now suffering in this terrible hell."

Text 93

tatraiva çré-pulasyoktau

ca tasmäd äyatane viñëor dadyäd dépän dvijottamataàç ca dattvä na hiàseta na ca taila-viyojitän

tatra-there; eva-indeed; çré-pulasyoktau-in the words of Çré Pulastya; ca-and; tasmät-from that; äyatane-in the temple; viñëoù-of Lord Kåñëa; dadyät-should give; dépän-lamps; dvijottama-O best of brähmaëa!s; taàç-them; ca-and; dattvä-giving; na-not; hiàseta-should trouble; na-not; ca-and; taila-viyojitän-filled with oil.

In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa Çré Pulastya Muni explains:

"O best of brähmaëas, that is why one should offer lamps in the temple of Lord Viñëu. While the lamps' oil has not yet burned away one should not trouble them.

Text 94

kurvéta dépa-hantä ca müko 'ndho jäyate måtaùandhe tamasi duñpäre narake pacyate kila

kurvéta-does; dépa-hantä-extinguishing the lamp; ca-and; mükaù-dumb; andhaù-blind; jäyate-is born; måtaù-dead; andhe-in blind; tamasi-darkness; duñpäre-impassable; narake-in hell; pacyate-is cooked; kila-indeed.

"A person who extinguishes a lamp as it burns before Lord Kåñëa becomes blind and dumb and when he dies he burns in a hell he cannot escape."

Text 95

bhümau dépa-däna-niñedhaù

kälikä-puräëe

dépa-våkñaç ca kartavyas taijasädyaiç ca bhairavavåkñeñu dépo dätavyo na tu bhümau kadäcana

bhümau dépa-däna-niñedhaù-one Should Not Offer a Lamp on the Ground; kälikä-puräëe-in the Kälikä Puräëa it is said: dépa-lamp; våkñaù-tree; ca-and; kartavyaù-should be done; taijasädyaiç-with oil; ca-and; bhairava-O Bhairava; våkñeñu-in trees; dépaù-lamp; dätavyaù-may be placed; na-not; tu-but; bhümau-on the ground; kadäcana-ever.

On Should Not Place a Lamp on the Ground


"O Bhairava, one may place a lamp in a tree, but never on the ground.

Text 96

atha naivedyaà

dattvä puñpäïjalià péöhaà padyam äcamanaà tathäkåtvä patreñu kåñëayar- päyed bhojyaà yathä-vidhi

atha-now; naivedyam-offerings of food; dattvä-offering; puñpäïjalim-flower; péöham-the place; padyam-for the feet; äcamanam-for sipping; tathä-then; kåtvä-doing; patreñu-in cups; kåñëäya-to Lord Kåñëa; arpäyet-should offer; bhojyam-food; yathä-as; vidhi-proper.

Offering Food

"After offering a flower, a sitting place, water for washing the feet, and äcamana water, one should offer to Lord Kåñëa appropriate food in many plates and cups.

Text 97

atha naivedyärpaëa-vidhiù

astraà jäptvämbunä prokñya naivedyaà cakra-mudrayäsamrakñya prokñayed väyu- béja-japta-jalena ca

atha-now; naivedyärpaëa-vidhiù-the way of offering food; astram-astraya phat; jäptvä-chanting; ambunä-with water; prokñya-sprinkling; naivedyam-offering of food; cakra-mudrayä-with the cakra-mudra; samrakñya-protecting; prokñayet-should sprinkle; väyu-béja-japta-chanting the syllable yam; jalena-with water; ca-and.

How to Offer Food

One should chant the mantra "asträya phaö", sprinkle water before the offering of food, show the cakra-mudrä, chant the mantra "yaà", and also sprinkle water.

Text 98

tena saàçoñya tad-doñaà agni-béjaà ca dakñiëedhyätvä kara-tale 'nyat tat påñöhe samyojya darçyate

tena-by this; saàçoñya-is dried up; tad-doñam-the faults; agni-béjam-the syllable ram; ca-and; dakñiëe-on the right; dhyätvä-meditating; kara-tale-in the palm of the hand; anyat-another; tat-that; påñöhe-on the back; samyojya-placing; darçyate-is shown.

In this way the faults of the offering wither away. Then one should place the syllable "raà" in the right palm and on the back.

Text 99

tad-uttha-vahninä tasya çuñka-doñaà hådä dahettataù kara-tale savye 'måta-béjaà vicintayet

tat-from that; uttha-risen; vahninä-by the fire; tasya-of that; çuñka-dried; doñam-fault; hådä-by the heart; dahet-may burn; tataù-then; kara-of the hand; tale-in the palm; savye-left; amåta-béjam-the syllable öhaà; vicintayet-should consider.

By the fire of that syllable the faults of the offering are dried away. Then, meditating with the mind, one should place the syllable öhaà in the left palm.

Text 100

tat-påñöhe dakñiëaà päëi- talaà samyojya darçayettad-utthäya nivedyaà tat siïced amåta-dhärayä

tat-påñöhe-on the back; dakñiëam-right; päëi-of the hand; talam-the palm; samyojya-joining; darçayet-should show; tad-utthäya-rising; nivedyam-the offering; tat-that; siïcet-should sprinkle; amåta-dhärayä-with a shower of nectar.

Then one should place the right palm on the back of the left hand. In this way one sprinkles nectar on the offering.

Text 101

jalena müla-japtena prokñya tac cämåtätmakamsarvaà vicintya saàspåçya mülaà väräñöakaà japet

jalena-with water; müla-japtena-by chanting the mula-mantra; prokñya-sprinkling; tat-that; ca-and; amåta-nectar; ätmakam-self; sarvam-all; vicintya-considering; saàspåçya-touching; mülam-mula; vära-times; añöakam-eight; japet-should chant.

Then by chanting the müla-mantra one should meditate on sprinkling nectar on the offering. Then one should touch the offering and chant the müla-mantra eight times.


One should touch the offering with the right hand.

Text 102

amåti-kåtya tad dhenu- mudrayä salilädibhiùtac ca kåñëaà ca sampüjya gåhétvä kusumäïjalim

amåti-kåtya-transforming into nectar; tat-that; dhenu-mudrayä-with the dhenu-mudra; salilädibhiù-beginning with water; tac-that; ca-and; kåñëam-Çré Kåñëa; ca-and; sampüjya-worshiping; gåhétvä-taking; kusumäïjalim-offering of flowers.

After transforming the offering into nectar with the dhenu-mudrä, water, and other things, one should worship Lord Kåñëa, take a handful of flowers, . . .


In the phrase "water, and other things", the “other things" are a cup of water with fragrant flowers. One should worship Lord Kåñëa with the mantra "kåñëäya namaù"

Text 103

çré-kåñëaà prärthya tad-vakträt tejo dhyätvä vinirgatamsamyojya ca nivedyaitat patraà vämena saàspåçan

çré-kåñëam-to Lord Kåñëa; prärthya-praying; tad-vakträt-from His mouth; tejaù-splendor; dhyätvä-meditating; vinirgatam-emanated; samyojya-joining; ca-and; nivedya-offering; etat-that; patram-dish; vämena-with the left; saàspåçan-touching.

. . . offer prayers to Lord Kåñëa, meditate on splendor emanating from the Lord's mouth, offer the dish of food, touching the dish with the left hand, . . .

Text 104

dakñeëa päëinädäya gandha-puñpänvitaà jalamsvähäntaà mülam uccärya taj-jalaà visåjed bhuvi

dakñeëa-with the right; päëinä-hand; ädäya-taking; gandha-fragrant; puñpa-flower; anvitam-with; jalam-water; svähä-with svähä; antam-ending; mülam-mula-mantra; uccärya-reciting; taj-jalam-that water; visåjet-should release; bhuvi-on the ground.

. . . with the right hand take water with fragrant flowers, recite the müla-mantra that ends with the word svähä, and then let the water fall to the ground.

Text 105

tat päëibhyäà samutthäya nivedyaà tulasé-yutampaträòhyaà tasya mantreëa bhaktyä bhagavate 'rpayet

tat-that; päëibhyäm-with both hands; samutthäya-rising; nivedyam-offering; tulasé-yutam-with tulasé; patra-plate; äòhyaàenriched; tasya-of that; mantreëa-with the mantra; bhaktyä-with devotion; bhagavate-to the Supreme Personality of Godhead; arpayet-should offer.

Then with both hands one should pick up the offering of food mixed with tulasé leaves and offer it to the Lord with the proper mantra.

Text 106

nivedana-mantraç cäyaà

nivedayämi bhavate juñäëedaà havir hare. iti.

nivedana-for offering food; mantraù-mantra; ca-and; ayam-this; nivedayämi-I offer; bhavate-to You; juñäëa-please accept; idam-this; haviù-offering; hare-O Lord Hari; iti-thus.

The Mantra For Offering Food

"I offer this to You. O Lord Hari, please accept this offering."

Text 107

amåtopästaraëam asi svähety uccärayan hareùdattvätha vidhivad väri- gaëòüñaà väma-päëinä darçayed gräsa-mudräà tu praphullotpala-sannibham

amåta-nectar; upastaraëam-sprinkling; asi-You are; svähä-svähä; iti-thus; uccärayan-reciting; hareù-of Lord Hari; dattvä-placing; atha-then; vidhivat-properly; väri-of water; gaëòüñam-handful; väma-päëinä-with the left hand; darçayet-should show; gräsa-mudräm-gräsa-mudrä; tu-indeed; praphullotpala-sannibham-like a blossoming lotus.

Reciting the mantra, "You are sprinkling nectar. Svähä.", one should offer a handful of water of water with the left hand showing the gräsa-mudrä, which is like a blossoming lotus flower.

Text 108

präëädi-mudrä-hastena dakñiëena tu darçayetmantraiç caturthé-svähäntais tärädyais tat-tad-ähvayaiù

präëädi-beginning with präëa; mudrä-mudräs; hastena-with the hand; dakñiëena-right; tu-indeed; darçayet-should show; mantraiç-with mantras; caturthé-with the datuve case; svähä-with svähä; antaiù-at the end; tärä-oà; ädyaiù-beginning with; tat-tad-ähvayaiù-with the various names.

Then with the right hand one should show the präëa-mudrä and other mudräs. Then one should chant mantras with various names, mantras with oà in the beginning, and with svähä at the end.


The five mudräs beginning with präëa-mudrä are described in the following words of Krama-dipikä:

spåçet kaniñöhopakaniñöhe dve sväìguñöha-mürdhnä prathameha mudrätathäparä tarjani-madhyame syäd anämikä-madhyamike ca madhyä

anämikä-tarjani-madhyamäù syät tac-caturthé-sa-kaniñöhikäs täùsyät païcamé tadvad iti pratiñöhä präëädi-mudrä. . .

"In the first mudrä the little finger and the ring finger touch the thumb. In the second mudrä the thumb touches the middle finger and the forefinger. In the third mudrä the the thumb touches the middle finger and the ring finger. In the fourth mudrä the the thumb touches the ring finger and the forefinger. In the fifth mudrä the little finger touches the ring finger and the forefinger. These are the mudräs beginning with the präëa-mudrä."

The corresponding mantras begin with "oà präëäya svähä". (The other mantras are: oà apänäya svähä, oà vyänäya svähä, oà udänäya svähä, and oà samänäya svähä.)

Text 109

tataù spåçaàç ca karayor aìguñöhäbhyäm anämikepradarçayen nivedyasya mudräà tasya manuà japan

tataù-then; spåçan-touching; ca-and; karayoù-of both hands; aìguñöhäbhyäm-with both thumbs; anämike-both ring fingers; pradarçayen-showing; nivedyasya-offering; mudräm-mudra; tasya-of that; manum-mantra; japan-chanting.

Touching the thumbs of both hands with the ring fingers of both hands, one should show the nivedya-mudrä. Then one should chant the nivedya-mantra.

Text 110

mantraç cäyaà krama-dépikäyäà

nandajo 'mbu-manu-bindu-yug natiù pärçva-ra-marud-avätmane ni caruddha-de-yuta-nivedyam ätma-bhu-masa- pärçvam anila-sthami-yug iti

mantraù-mantra; ca-and; ayam-this; krama-dépikäyäm-in the Krama-dipikä; nandajaù-the letter öha; ambu-manu-the letter au; bindu-the letter à; yuk-with; natiù-namaù; pärçva-the letter pa; rä-the letter rä; marut-the letter ya; avätmane-avatmane; ni-ni; ca-and; ruddha-ruddha; de-dative case; yuta-with; nivedyam-offering; ätma-bhü-ka; mäàsa-la; pärçvam-pa; anila-ya; sthämi-yuk-with ämi; iti-thus.

This mantra is given in the Krama-dépikä:

"The mantra here is: Öhau namaù paräya avätmane 'niruddhäya nivedyaà kalpayämi (Obeisances to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who cannot be thwarted from anything He wishes to do. I offer this to Him.)

Text 111

nivedyasya manutvena sväbhéñöaà manum eva teekantino japantas tu gräsa-mudräà vitanvate

nivedyasya manutvena-as the nivedya-mantra; sväbhéñöam-the abhista; manum-mantra; eva-indeed; te-they; ekantinaù-alone; japantaù-chanting; tu-indeed; gräsa-mudräm-the gräsa-mudrä; vitanvate-do.

"In a secluded place they chant the abhéñöa-mantra as the nivedya-mantra. Then they show the gräsa-mudrä.

Text 112

na ca dhyäyante te kåñëa- vakträt tejo-vinirgamammaïjula-vyavahäreëa bhojayanti harià mudä

na-not; ca-and; dhyäyante-meditate; te-they; kåñëa-of Lord Kåñëa; vakträt-from the mouth; tejo-vinirgamam-splendor; maïjula-graceful; vyavahäreëa-with activities; bhojayanti-feed; harim-Lord Hari; mudä-happily.

"They do not meditate on splendor emerging from Lord Kåñëa's mouth. In this way, with graceful actions, they happily feed Lord Kåñëa."

Text 113

anyatra ca

çälé-bhaktaà su-bhaktaà çiçira-kara-sthitaà päyasaà püpa-süpaà lehyaà peyaà su-cuñyaà sitam amåta-phalaà ghärikädyaà sukhädyamäjyaà präjyaà samijyaà nayana-ruci-karaà väjikailä-maréca- svädéyaù çäkaräjé-parikaram amåtähära-joñaà juñasva

anyatra-in another place; ca-and; çälé-bhaktam-rice; su-bhaktam-nicely cooked; çiçira-kara-sthitam-situated in the cool moonlight; päyasam-sweet-rice; püpa-cakes; süpam-soups; lehyam-to be licked; peyam-to be drunk; su-cuñyam-to be sucked; sitam-pure; amåta-nectar; phalam-fruit; ghärikädyam-cooked in ghee; sukhädyam-the cause of happiness; äjyam-ghee; präjyam-cooked in much ghee; samijyam-excellent; nayana-ruci-karam-pleasing to the eyes; väjikailä-with ghee; maréca-and pepper; svädéyaù-delicious; çäka-räjé-parikaram-vegetables; amåtähära-joñam-like nectar; juñasva-please enjoy.


"O Lord, please enjoy this delicious cooked rice, this sweet-rice placed in the cooling moonlight, these cakes, soups, foods to be licked, drunk, and sucked, nectar fruits, very delicious foods cooked in ghee, foods pleasing to the eye, foods delicious with ghee and black pepper, and vegetables delicious like nectar."

Text 114

kià ca garuòa-puräëe

naivedyaà parayä bhaktyä ghaëöädyair jaya-nisvanaiùnéräjanaiç ca haraye dadyäd dépäsanaà budhaù

kià ca-furthermore; garuòa-puräëe-in the Garuòa Puräëa; naivedyam-offering; parayä-with great; bhaktyä-devotion; ghaëöä-with bells; ädyaiù-beginning; jaya-nisvanaiù-with sounds of victory; néräjanaiç-with arati; ca-and; haraye-to Lord Kåñëa; dadyät-should offer; dépa-lamp; äsanam-seat; budhaù-intelligent.


"With great devotion an wise person should offer food to Lord Kåñëa. He should offer Lord Kåñëa a seat, a lamp, and ärati. There should be jaya-mantras and the sounding of bells and other musical instruments."


The word "wise" here means a person who is learned and whose activities are saintly.

Text 115

atha naivedya-paträëi

skände çré-brahma-närada-samväde

naivedya-pätraà vakñyämi keçavasya mahätmanaùhairaëyaà räjataà tämraà kaàsyaà mån-mayam eva ca päläçaà padma-patraà ca pätraà viñëor ati-priyam

atha-now; naivedya-of the offering; paträëi-the dishes; skände-in ther Skanda Puräëa; çré-brahma-närada-samväde-in a

conversation of Brahmä and Närada; naivedya-of the offering; pätram-the dish; vakñyämi-I will tell; keçavasya-of Lord Keçava; mahätmanaù-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; hairaëyam-gold; räjatam-silver; tämram-copper; kaàsyam-bell-metal; mån-mayam-clay; eva-indeed; ca-and; päläçam-päläça leaf; padma-patram-lotus leaf; ca-and; pätram-dish; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; ati-priyam-favorite.

The Plates on Which Food May Be Offered


"Now I will tell you of the plates on which food may be offered to Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Plates of gold, silver, copper, bell-metal, clay, paläça-leaf, and lotus-leaf are Lord Kåñëa's favorites."

Text 116

viñëu-dharmottare

päträëäà tu pradänena narakaà ca na gacchati

viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; päträëäm-of plates; tu-indeed; pradänena-by giving; narakam-to hell; ca-and; na-not; gacchati-goes.

In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa it is said:

"A person who gives to the Lord a gift of many plates will not go to hell."

Text 117

pätra-parimäëaà

devé-puräëe

ñaö-triàsad-aìgulaà pätraà uttamaà parikértitammadhyamaà ca tribhägonaà kanyasaà dvädaçäìgulaà vasv-aìgula-vihénaà tu na pätraà kärayet kvacit

pätra-of plate; parimäëam-the measurement; devé-puräëe-in the Devé Puräëa; ñaö-triàsad-aìgulam-36 fingers; pätram-plate; uttamam-excellent; parikértitam-said; madhyamam-middle; ca-and; tribhägonam-less by one third; kanyasam-small; dvädaça-twelve; aìgulam-fingers; vasu-eight; aìgula-fingers; vihénam-less; tu-but; na-npt; pätram-plate; karayet-should do; kvacit-ever.

Measurements of the Plates

In the Devé Puräëa it is said:

"A large plate should be 36 fingers, a middle-sized plate one third smaller (24 fingers), and a small plate 12 fingers. One should not make a plate smaller than 8 fingers."

Text 118

atha bhojyäni

ekädaça-skände

guòa-päyasa-sarpéàñi çañkulyäpüpa-modakänsamyäva-dadhi-süpäàç ca naivedyaà sati kalpayet

atha-now; bhojyäni-Foods That Should Be Offered; ekädaça-skände-in the Eleventh Canto; guòa-sugar candy; päyasa-sweet-rice; sarpéàñi-and ghee; çañkuly-cake; äpüpa-sweet cakes; modakän-modakas; samyäva-samyava cakes; dadhi-yogurt; süpän-soup; ca-and; naivedyam-offering of food; sati-is he has sufficent means; kalpayet-should arrange.

Foods That Should Be Offered

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (11.27.34) Lord Kåñëa says:

"Within his means, the devotee should arrange to offer Me sugar candy, sweet rice, ghee, çaskulé (rice-flour cakes), äpüpa (various sweet cakes), modaka (steamed rice-flour dumplings filled with sweet-coconut and sugar), samyäva (wheat cakes made with ghee and milk and covered with sugar and spices), yogurt, vegetable soups, and other palatable foods."***

Text 119

kià ca

yad yad iñöatamaà loke yac cäti-priyam ätmanaùtat tan nivedayen mahyaà tad anantyäya kalpate

kià ca-furthermore; yad-yat-whatever; iñöatamam-most desirable; loke-in the world; yat yat-whatever; ca-and; ati-very; priyam-dear; ätmanaù-to the heart; tat tan-that; nivedayet-may offer; mahyam-to Me; tat-that; anantyäya-for being without limit; kalpate-is qualified.

Lord Kåñëa also says:

"A person who offers to Me whatever is most precious in the world, or whatever is most dear to his heart, attains in return a benefit that has no end."

Text 120

añöama-skande

naivedyaà cädhi-guëavad dadyät puruña-tuñöi-dam

añöama-skande-in the Eighth Canto; naivedyam-food offered to the Deity; ca-and; ati-guëavat-prepared very gorgeously with all varieties of taste; dadyät-should offer; puruña-tuñöi-dam-everything extremely pleasing to the Supreme Personality of Godhead.


"With great attention one must prepare an oblation of grains boiled in ghee and milk and must chant the Puruña-sükta mantra. The offerings of foods should be of varieties of tastes. In this way one should worship the Supreme Personality of Godhead."*

Text 121

baudhäyana-småtau ca

nänä-vidhänna-pänaiç ca bhakñaëädyair manoharaiùnaivedyaà kalpayed viñëos tad-abhäve ca päyasaà kevalaà ghåta-samyuktam

baudhäyana-småtau-In the Baudhäyana-småti; ca-and; nänä-vidhänna-pänaiç-with various kinds of drinks; ca-and; bhakñaëädyaiù-beginning with foods; manoharaiù-delicious; naivedyam-offering; kalpayet-should do; viñëoù-to Lord Viñëu; tad-abhäve-in the absence of that; ca-and; päyasam-sweet-rice; kevalam-only; ghåta-samyuktam-prepared with ghee.

In the Baudhäyana-småti it is said:

"One should offer to Lord Viñëu many kinds of delicious foods and drinks. In the absence of such variety one should at least offer sweet-rice prepared with ghee."

Text 122

vämana-puräëe

haviñä saàskåta ye ca yava-godhüma-çälayaùtila-mudgädayo mäñä vréhayaç ca priyä hareù

vämana-puräëe-in the Vämana Puräëa; haviñä-with ghee; saàskåta-prepared; ye-who; ca-and; yava-barley; godhüma-wheat; çälayaù-rice; tila-sesame; mudga-mudga beans; ädayaù-beginning with; mäñä-masa beans; vréhayaç-rice; ca-and; priyä-dear; hareù-to Lord Kåñëa.


"Barley, wheat, rice, sesame, mudga beans, mäña beans, and other foods like them, all cooked in ghee, are dear to Lord Kåñëa."

Text 123

gäruòe

annaà catur-vidhaà puëyaà guëäòhyaà cämåtopamamniñpannaà sva-gåhe yad vä çraddhayä kalpayed dhareù

gäruòe-in the Garuòa Puräëa; annam-food; catur-vidham-four kinds; puëyam-pious; guëäòhyam-virtuous; ca-and; amåta-nectar; upamam-like; niñpannam-prepared; sva-gåhe-in one's own home; yat-what; vä-or; çraddhayä-with faith; kalpayet-should be suitable; dhareù-for Lord Kåñëa.


"At home one should prepare four kinds of pure foods, delicious like nectar, and with faith one should offer them to Lord Hari."

Texts 124-126

bhaviñye

puñpaà dhüpaà tathä dépaà naivedyaà su-manoharamkhaëòa-laòòuka-çré-veñöa- käsäräçoka-varttikäù

svastikolläsikä-dugdha- tila-veñöa-kiläöikäùphaläni caiva pakväni nägaraìgädikäni ca

anyäni vidhinä dattvä bhakñyäni vividhäni caevam ädéni dapayed bhaktito nåpa

bhaviñye-in the Bhaviñya Puräëa; puñpam-flower; dhüpam-incense; tathä-so; dépam-lamp; naivedyam-food; su-manoharam-beautiful; khaëòa-laòòuka-khaëòa-laòòus; çré-veñöa-çré-veñöa; käsära-kaseru; äçoka-varttikäù-seva-laddus; svastika-svastika; ulläsikä-ullasika; dugdha-dugdha-vesta; tila-veñöa-tila-vesta; kiläöikäù-kilatika; phaläni-fruits; ca-and; eva-indeed; pakväni-ripe; nägaraìga-oranges; ädikäni-beginning with; ca-and; anyäni-other; vidhinä-properly; dattvä-offering; bhakñyäni-delicious; vividhäni-varieties; ca-and; evam-thus; ädéni-beginning with; däpayet-should give; bhaktitaù-with devotion; nåpa-O king.


"O king, with devotion one should properly offer to the Lord flowers, incense, lamps, and delicious foods, such as khaëòa-laòòu, çré-veñöa, kaseru, sevä-laòòu, svastika, ulläsikä, dugdha-veñöa, tila-veñöa, kiläöikä, oranges and other ripe fruits, and many other kinds of delicious foods."

Text 127

värähe

yas tu bhägavato devi annäd yena tu préëayetpréëitas tiñöhate 'sau vä bahu-janmäni mädhavi

värähe-In the Varäha Puräëa; yaù-one who; tu-indeed; bhägavataù-a Vaiñëava; devi-O goddess; annät-from food; yena-by whom; tu-indeed; préëayet-pleases; préëitaù-pleased; tiñöhate-stands; asau-he; vä-or; bahu-janmäni-many births; mädhavi-O beloved of Mädhava.

In the Varäha Puräëa teh Supreme Personality of Godhead sais:

"O Goddess Mädhavé, a person who with an offering of food pleases Me is happy for many births."

Text 128

sarva-vréhi-mayaà gåhyaà çubhaà sarva-rasänvitammantreëa me pradéyeta na kiïcid api saàspåçet

sarva-all; vréhi-rice; mayam-consisting of; gåhyam-to be accepted; çubham-beautiful; sarva-rasänvitam-with all delicious tastes; mantreëa-with a mantra; me-of Me; pradéyeta-should be given; na-not; kiïcit-anything; api-even; saàspåçet-should touch.

"With a mantra one should offer to me pure and delicious rice. One should not taste it before it is offered.

Text 129

iìgudé-phala-bilväni badarämalakäni cakharjuräàç cäsanaàç caiva mänaväàç ca parüñakän

iìgudé-phala-bilväni-iìgudé and bilvaa fruits; badarämalakäni-badara and amalaka; ca-and; kharjurän-kharjura; ca-and; äsanan-carabija; ca-and; eva-indeed; mänaväàç-cocnut; ca-and; parüñakän-parusa.

"One should offer to Me iìgudé and bilva fruits, badara, amalaka, kharjura, carabéja, coconut, parüñaka, . . .

Text 130

çäloòòambarikäàç caiva tathä plakña-phaläni capaippalaà kaëöakéyaà ca tumburuà ca priyaìgukam

çäloòòambarikän-çäla and uòòambarika; ca-and; eva-indeed; tathä-so; plakña-phaläni-plaksa fruits; ca-and; paippalam-pippala; kaëöakéyam-kaëöakéya; ca-and; tumburum-tumburu; ca-and; priyaìgukam-priyangu.

. . . çäla, uòòambarika, plakña fruits, pippala; kaëöakéya, tumburu, priyaìgu, . . .

Text 131

marécaà çiàça-päkaà ca bhallätakara-mardakamdräkñäà ca däòimaà caiva piëòa-kharjüram eva ca

marécam-black pepper; çiàça-päkam-simsa-paka; ca-and; bhallätakara-mardakam-bhalläta; karamardakam-karamardaka; dräkñäm-grapes; ca-and; däòimam-pomegranate; ca-and; eva-indeed; piëòa-kharjüram-piëòa-kharjüra; eva-indeed; ca-and.

. . . maréca, çiàça-päka, bhalläta, karamardaka, grapes, pomegranates, piëòa-kharjüra, . . .

Text 132

sauvéraà kelikaà caiva tathä çubha-phaläni capiëòäraka-phalaà caiva punnäga-phalam eva ca

sauvéram-sauvira; kelikam-kelika; ca-and; eva-indeed; tathä-so; çubha-phaläni-auspicious fruits; ca-and; piëòäraka-phalam-pindaraka-fruit; ca-and; eva-indeed; punnäga-phalam-punnaga fruit; eva-indeed; ca-and.

. . . sauvéra, kelika, auspicious fruits, piëòäraka fruits, punnäga fruits, . . .

Text 133

çaméà caiva kavéraà ca kharjüraka-mahä-phalamkumudasya phalaà caiva vaheòaka-phalaà tathä

çamém-sami; ca-and; eva-indeed; kavéram-kavira; ca-and; kharjüraka-mahä-phalam-great khrajuraka fruits; kumudasya-of the lotus; phalam-fruit; ca-and; eva-indeed; vaheòaka-phalam-vahedaka fruits; tathä-so.

. . . çamé, kavéra, great kharjüraka fruits, lotus fruits, vaheòaka fruits, . . .

Text 134

ajaà karkoöakaà caiva tathä täla-phaläni cakadambaù kaumudaà caiva dvi-vidhaà sthala-kaïjayoù

ajam-aja; karkoöakam-karkotaka; ca-and; eva-indeed; tathä-so; täla-phaläni-tala fruits; ca-and; kadambaù-kadamba; kaumudam-kumuda; ca-and; eva-indeed; dvi-vidham-two kinds; sthala-kaïjayoù-of land-growing lotus flowers.

. . .aja, karkoöaka, täla fruits, kadamba, kaumuda, two kinds of sthala-kaïja fruits, . . .

Text 135

piëòikandeti vikhyätaà vaàça-népaà tataù parammadhu-kandeti vikhyataà mähiñaà kandam eva ca

piëòikanda-pindarootl iti-thus; vikhyätam-famous; vaàça-népam-vamsa-nipa; tataù-so; param-more; madhu-kanda-madhu root; iti-thus; vikhyatam-known; mähiñam-mahisa; kandam-root; eva-indeed; ca-and.

. . . piëòi root, vaàça-népa, madhu root, mähiña root, . . .

Text 136

karamardaka-kandaà ca tathä nélotpalasya camåëälaà pauñkaraà caiva çälükasya phalaà tathä

karamardaka-kandam-karamardaka root; ca-and; tathä-so; nélotpalasya-of the blue lotus; ca-and; måëälam-root; pauñkaram-of puskara; ca-and; eva-indeed; çälükasya-of saluka; phalam-fruit; tathä-so.

. . . karamardaka root, nélotpala root, puñkara fruit, çälüka fruit.

Text 137

ete cänye ca bahavaù kanda-müla-phaläni caetäni copayojyäni ye mayä parikalpitäù

ete-these; ca-and; anye-others; ca-and; bahavaù-many; kanda-müla-phaläni-roots and fruits; ca-and; etäni-they; ca-and; upayojyäni-suitable; ye-which; mayä-by Me; parikalpitäù-considered.

These and many other roots and fruits may be offered to Me.

Text 138

mülakasya tataù çäkaà kià cäçäkaà tathaiva caçäkaà caiva kaläyasya sarñapasya tathaiva ca

mülakasya-of radish; tataù-so; çäkam-vegetable; kim ca-furthermore; açäkam-nali saka; tathä-so; eva-indeed; ca-and; çäkam-saka; ca-and; eva-indeed; kaläyasya-kalaya; sarñapasya-sarsapa; tathä-so; eva-indeed; ca-and.

One may also offer to Me vegetables and herbs such as radish, nälé-çäka, kaläya-çäka, mustard, . . .

Text 139

vaàçakasya tu çäkaà ca çäkam eva kalambitamärdrakasya ca çäkaà vai päläìkaà çäkam eva ca

vaàçakasya-of vamsaka; tu-indeed; çäkam-saka; ca-and; çäkam-saka; eva-indeed; kalambitam-kalambita; ärdrakasya-of ardraka; ca-and; çäkam-saka; vai-indeed; päläìkam-palanka; çäkam-saka; eva-indeed; ca-and.

. . . vaàçaka-çäka, kalambita-çäka, ärdraka-çäka, päläìka-çäka, . . .

Text 140

ambiloòaka-çäkaà ca çäkaà kaumärakaà tathäçüka-maëòala-patraà ca dväv eva taru-vänakau

ambiloòaka-çäkam-ambilodaka-saka; ca-and; çäkam-çäka; kaumärakam-kaumaraka; tathä-so; çüka-maëòala-patram-suka-mandala-patra; ca-and; dväv-both; eva-indeed; taru-vänakau-taru-vanaka.

. . . ambiloòaka-çäka, kaumäraka-çäka, çüka-maëòala-patra, taru, vänaka, . . .

Text 141

carasya caiva çäkaà ca madhu-koòòumbaraà tathäete cänye ca bahavaù çataço 'tha sahasraçaù karmaëyäç caiva sarve vai ye mayä parikirtitäù

carasya-of cara; ca-and; eva-indeed; çäkam-saka; ca-and; madhu-koòòumbaram-madhu-koòòumbaraà; tathä-so; ete-they; ca-and; anye-others; ca-and; bahavaù-many; çataçaù-hundreds; atha-then; sahasraçaù-thousands; karmaëyäù-expert; ca-and; eva-indeed; sarve-all; vai-indeed; ye-who; mayä-by Me; parikirtitäù-said.

. . . cara-çäka, madhu-koòòumbara-çäka, and many hundreds and thousands of other vegetables and herbs.

Text 142

vréhénäà ca pravakñyämi upayogaàç ca mädhavieka-cittaà samädhäya

tat sarvaà çåëu sundari

vréhénäm-of rice; ca-and; pravakñyämi-I will tell; upayogaàç-proper; ca-and; mädhavi-O Mädhavé; eka-cittam-one heart; samädhäya-placing; tat-that; sarvam-all; çåëu-please hear; sundari-O beautiful one.

"O Mädhavé, now I will speak about rice. O beautiful one, please listen carefully.

Text 143

dharmädharmika-raktaà ca su-gandhaà rakta-çälikamdérgha-çükaà mahä-çälià vara-kuìkuma-patrakam

dharma-pious; adharma-impious; eka-one; raktam-liked; ca-and; su-gandham-fragrant; rakta-çälikam-rakta sali; dérgha-çükam-dirgha-suka; mahä-çälim-maha-sali; vara-kuìkuma-patrakam-vara-kunkuma-patra.

Different kinds of fragrant rice, such as dharma-rakta, adharma-rakta, dérgha-çuka, mahä-älé, vara-kuìkuma-patraka, . . .

Text 144

gräma-çälià samadräçäà sa-çréçäà kuça-çälikämyaväç ca dvi-vidhä jïeyäù karmaëyä mama sundari

gräma-çälim-grama-sali; samadräçäm-samudrasa; sa-çréçäm-srisa; kuça-çälikäm-kusa-sali; yaväù-barley; ca-and; dvi-vidhä-two kinds; jïeyäù-are known; karmaëyä-to be done; mama-by Me; sundari-O beautiful one.

. . . gräma-çäli, madräça, çréça, and kuça-çäli, as well as the two kinds of barley, may be offered to Me.

Text 145

karmaëyäç caiva mudgäç ca tiläù kåñëäù kulatthakäùgodhümakaà mahä-mudga- mudgäñöakam aväöa-jit

karmaëyäù-may be offered; ca-and; eva-indeed; mudgäç-mudga beans; ca-and; tiläù-sesame; kåñëäù-Kåñëa; kulatthakäù-kulattha; godhümakam-wheat; mahä-mudga-maha-mudga; mudgäñöakam-eitgh kinds of mudga; aväöa-jit-conqueror of the worlds.

O conqueror of the worlds, sesame, wheat, kåñëa, kulatthaka, mudga beans, mahä-mudga beans, and eight kinds of mudga beans may be offered to Me.

Text 146

karmäëy etäni coktäni vyajanäni priyänvitänpratigåhëämy ahaà hy etän sarvän bhägavatän priyän

karmäëy-may be offered; etäni-they; ca-and; uktäni-said; vyajanäni-spices and condiments; priyänvitän-dear; pratigåhëämy-I accept; aham-I; hy-indeed; etän-them; sarvän-all; bhägavatän-the devotees; priyän-dear.

"One may also offer to Me many kinds of delicious condiments and spices. I accept these offerings from My dear devotees."

Text 147

kià ca

ye mayaivopayojyäni gavyaà dadhi payo ghåtam

kià ca-furthermore; ye-who; mayä-by Me; eva-indeed; upayojyäni-suitable; gavyam-milk products; dadhi-yogurt; payaù-milk; ghåtam-ghee.

The Lord also says:

"One may offer to Me milk products, like milk, yogurt, and ghee.

Text 148

skände ca brahma-närada-samväde

haviù çälyodanaà divyaà äjya-yuktaà sa-çarkaramnaivedyaà deva-deväya yävakaà päyasaà tathä

skände ca brahma-närada-samväde-in the Skanda Puräëa, in a conversation of Brahma and Närada, it is said:; haviù-butter; çälyodanam-rice; divyam-divine; äjya-yuktam-with ghee; sa-çarkaram-with sugar; naivedyam-offering; deva-deväya-to the master of the demigods; yävakam-barley; päyasam-sweet-rice; tathä-so.

In the Skanda Puräëa, in a conversation of Brahma and Närada, it is said:

"One should offer to Lord Kåñëa foods cooked with rice, ghee, sugar, and barley, and also sweet-rice.

Text 149

naivedyänäm abhäve tu phaläni vinivedayetphalänäm äpy abhäve tu tåëa-gulmauñadhir api

naivedyänäm-of offerings; abhäve-in the absence; tu-indeed; phaläni-fruits; vinivedayet-should offer; phalänäm-of fruits; äpy-even; abhäve-in the absence; tu-indeed; tåëa-grass; gulma-trees; auñadhiù-herbs; api-even.

"In the absence of these things one may offer fruits. In the absence of fruits one may offer the edible parts of trees, grass, and other plants.

Text 150

auñadhénäm aläbhe tu toyaà ca vinivedyettad-aläbhe tu sarvatra mänasaà pravaraà småtam

auñadhénäm-of plants; aläbhe-in the absence; tu-indeed; toyam-water; ca-asnd; vinivedyet-may offer; tad-aläbhe-in the absence of that; tu-indeed; sarvatra-everywhere; mänasam-in the mind; pravaram-excellent; småtam-remembered.

"In the absence of plants one may offer water. In the absence of water one may meditate on offering foods to the Lord."

Text 151

skände mahendraà prati çré-närada-vacanaà

yacchanti tulasé-çäkaà çrutaà ye mädhavägrataùkalpäntaà viñëuloke tu vasanti pitåbhiù saha

skände mahendraà prati çré-närada-vacanam-In the Skanda Puräëa, Çré Närada tells King Indra:; yacchanti-offer; tulasé-çäkam-tulasé; çrutam-heard; ye-who; mädhavägrataù-in the preswnce of Lord Kåñëa; kalpäntam-at the end of the kalpa; viñëuloke-in Viñëuloka; tu-indeed; vasanti-live; pitåbhiù-the pitäs; saha-with.

In the Skanda Puräëa, Çré Närada tells King Indra:

"They who offer tulasé-çäka to Lord Mädhava live with their ancestors in Viñëuloka until the end of the kalpa."

Text 152

atha naivedya-niñiddhäni

härita-småtau

näbhakñyaà naivedyärthe bhakñyeñv apy ajä-mahiñé-kñéraà païca-nakhä matsyäç ca

atha-now; naivedya-niñiddhäni-forbidden offerings; härita-småtau-in the Harita-smrti; na-not; abhakñyam-inedible; naivedya-offering; arthe-for the purpose; bhakñyeñv-edible; apy-even; ajä-of the goat; mahiñé-of the buffalo; kñéram-milk; païca-nakhä-animals with five nails; matsyäç-fish; ca-and.

What Is Forbidden To Offer the Lord

In the Härita-småti it is said:

"One may not offer to the Lord what is inedible. One also may not offer goat milk, buffalo milk, fish, or the flesh of five-clawed beasts or other beasts."

Text 153

dvärakä-mähätmye

nélé-kñetraà väpayanti mülakaà bhakñayanti yenaivästi narakottäraù kalpa-koöi-çatair api

dvärakä-mähätmye-in the Dvärakä-mähätmya; nélé-kñetram-niliksetra; väpayanti-offer; mülakam-radish; bhakñayanti-offer; ye-who; na-not; eva-indeed; asti-is; naraka-from hell; uttäraù--deliverance; kalpa-koöi-çataiù-for hundreds and millions of kalpas; api-even.

In the Dvärakä-mähätmya it is said:

"They who offer to the Lord the foods nélékñetra or radish are not rescued from hell for hundreds and millions of kalpas."

Text 154

värähe

mähiñaà cävikaà cäjaà ayajïéyam udähåtam

värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; mähiñam-buffalo; ca-and; avikam-sheep; ca-and; ajam-goat; ayajïéyam-not to be offered; udähåtam-said.


"One should not offer buffalo ghee or goat ghee in a yajïa."

Text 155

kià ca

mähiñaà varjayen mahyaà kñéraà dadhi ghåtaà yadi

kià ca-furthermore; mähiñam-from a buffalo; varjayet-should avpid; mahyam-to Me; kñéram-milk; dadhi-yogurt; ghåtam-ghee; yadi-if.

The Lord Himself says:

"One should not offer to Me milk, yogurt, or ghee that have come from a buffalo."

Text 156


abhakñyaà cäpy ahåtaà ca naivedyaà na nivedyatekeça-kéöävapannaà ca tathä cävihitaà ca yat

viñëu-dharmottare tåtéya-khaëòe-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, Part Three; abhakñyam-inedible; ca-and; api-also; ahåtam-not taken; ca-and; naivedyam-offering; na-and; nivedyate-should offer; keça-hair; kéöa-and insect or worm; avapannam-attained; ca-and; tathä-so; ca-and; avihitam-improper; ca-and; yat-what.

In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, Part Three, it is said:

"Food into which a hair, an insect, or a worm has entered should not be offered to the Lord.

Text 157

müñikä-laìgulopetaà avadhütam avakñutamuòòumbaraà kapitthaà ca tathä danta-çaöhaà ca yat evam ädéni deväya na deyäni kadäcana

müñikä-of a mouse or a rat; laìgula-tail; upetam-attained; avadhütam-rejected; avakñutam-sneezed; uòòumbaram-uddumbara; kapittham-kapittha; ca-and; tathä-so; danta-çaöham-jambira; ca-and; yat-what; evam-thus; ädéni-beginning; deväya-to ther Supreme Personality of Godhead; na-not; deyäni-to be offered; kadäcana-ever.

"One should never offer to the Supreme Personality of Godhead food that has been touched by a rat's tail, food that is rejected by others, or food that has been sneezed on, nor should one ever offer uòòumbara, kapittha, or danta-çaöha."

Text 158

athäbhakñyäëi

kaurme

våntäkaà jälikäçäkaà kusumbhäçmantakaà tathäphaläëòuà laçunaà çuklaà niryäsaà caiva varjayet

atha-now; abhakñyäëi-inedible; kaurme-in the Kürma Puräëa; våntäkam-eggplant; jälikäçäkam-plantain; kusumbha-safflower; äçmantakam-açmantaka; tathä-so; phaläëòum-onion; laçunam-garlic; çuklam-sour cereal; niryäsam-tree sap; ca-and; eva-indeed; varjayet-one should avoid.

What Is Inedible (For the Purpose of Offering to the Lord)

In the Kürma Puräëa it is said:

"One should avoid eggplant, plantain, safflower, açmantaka, onion, garlic, sour cereal, and the sap of trees.

Text 159

grïjanaà kiàçukaà caiva kukuëòaà ca tathaiva cauòumbaram alävuà ca jagdhvä patati vai dvijaù

grïjanam-grnjana; kiàçukam-kimsuka; ca-and; eva-indeed; kukuëòam-kukunda; ca-and; tatha-so; eva-indeed; ca-and; uòumbaram-uddumbara; alävum-alavu; ca-and; jagdhvä-eating; patati-falls; vai-indeed; dvijaù-a brähmaëa.

"A brähmaëa who eats grïjana, kiàçuka, kukuëòa, uòumbara, or alävu falls down from his exalted position."

Text 160

vaiñëave

bhuïjétodhåta-säräëi na kadäcin nareçvara

vaiñëave-in the Viñëu Puräëa; bhuïjéta-eats; udhåta-säräëi-udhåta-sära; na-not; kadäcin-ever; nareçvara-O king.

In the Viñëu Puräëa it is said:

"O king, one should never eat udhåta-sära."

Text 161

skände

na bhakñayati våntäkaà tasya dürataro hariù

skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; na-not; bhakñayati-eats; våntäkam-eggplant; tasya-of him; dürataraù-far away; hariù-Lord Hari.


"Lord Kåñëa stays far away from anyone who eats eggplant."

Text 162

kià cänyatra

värtäkuà båhatéà caiva dagdham annaà masürakamyasyodare pravarteta tasya dürataro hariù

kià ca-furthermore; anyatra-in another place; värtäkum-eggplant; båhatém-eggplant; ca-and; eva-indeed; dagdham-burned; annam-food; masürakam-masura dal; yasya-of whom; udare-in the stomach; pravarteta-is; tasya-of him; dürataraù-far away; hariù-Lord Kåñëa.


"Lord Kåñëa stays far away from anyone who places eggplant, burned food, or masüra däl in his stomach."

Text 163

kià ca

alävuà bhakñayed yas tu dagdham annaà kalambikämsa nirlajjaù kathaà brüte püjayämi janärdanam

kià ca-furthermore; alävum-alavu; bhokñayet-eats; yaù-one; tu-indeed; dagdham-burned; annam-food; kalambikäm-kalambika; sa-he; nirlajjaù-shameless; katham-how?; brüte-speak; püjayämi-I worship; janärdanam-Lord Hari.

It is also said:

"How can a shameless person who eats alävu, kalambikä, and burned food, say the words: `I worship Lord Hari'?

Text 164

ata evoktaà yämale

yatra madyaà tathä mäàsaà tathä våntäka-mülakenivedayen naiva tatra harer aikäntiké ratiù

ata eva-therefore; uktam-said; yämale-in the Yamala; yatra-where; madyam-liquor; tathä-so; mäàsam-meat; tathä-so; våntäka-eggplant; mülake-and radish; nivedayen-may offer; na-not; eva-inded; tatra-there; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; aikäntiké-unalloyed; ratiù-love.

In the Yämala it is said:

"Only a person without genuine devotion for the Lord will offer Him wine, meat, eggplant, or radish."

Text 165

atha naivedyärpaëa-mähätmyam

skände

naivedyäni manojïäni kåñëasyägre nivedayetkalpäntaà tat-pitåëäà tu tåptir bhavati çäçvaté

atha-now; naivedyärpaëa-of offering food; mähätmyam-the glories; skände-in thr Skanda Puräëa; naivedyäni-should be offered; manojïäni-beautiful; kåñëasyägre-in Lord Kåñëa's presence; nivedayet-should offer; kalpäntam-to the end of the kalpa; tat-pitåëäm-of his ancestors; tu-indeed; tåptiù-satisfaction; bhavati-becomes; çäçvaté-eternal.

The Glories of Offering Food to the Lord


"By offering many delicious foods to Lord Kåñëa, a person makes his ancestors happy until the end of the kalpa.

Text 166

phaläni yacchate yo vai suhådyäni nareçvarakalpäntaà jäyate tasya sa-phalaà ca manorathaù

phaläni-fruits; yacchate-offers; yaù-who; vai-indeed; suhådyäni-pleasing; nareçvara-O king; kalpäntam-to the end of the kalpa; jäyate-is born; tasya-of him; sa-phalam-successful; ca-and; manorathaù-desire.

"O king, by offering many delicious foods to Lord Kåñëa, a person attains all his desires until the end of the kalpa."

Texts 167 and 168

närasiàhe

haviù çälyodanaà diyyaà äjya-yuktaà sa-çarkaramnivedya narasiàhäya yävakaà päyasaà tathä

samäs taëòula-saìkhyäyä yävatyas tävatér nåpaviñëuloke mahä-bhogän bhuïjänas te sa-vaiñëaväù

närasiàhe-in the Nåsiàha Puräëa; haviù-ghee; çälyodanam-rice; divyam-splendid; äjya-yuktam-with ghee; sa-with; çarkaram-sugar; nivedya-offering; narasiàhäya-to Lord Nåsiàha; yävakam-as; päyasam-sweet-rice; tathä-so; samäù-years; taëòula-saìkhyäyä-with the number of grains of rice; yävatyaù-as many; tävatéù-so many; nåpa-O King; viñëuloke-in Viñëuloka; mahä-bhogän-great enjoyment; bhuïjänaù-enjoy; te-they; sa-vaiñëaväù-with the Vaiñëavas..


"By offering to Lord Hari sweet rice with sugar and ghee, a person enjoys for one year with the Vaiñëavas in Viñëuloka for each grain of rice he offered."

Text 169

viñëu-dharmottare

anna-das tåptim äpnoti svargalokaà ca gacchatidattvä ca samvibhägäya tathaivännam atandritaù trailokya-tarpite puëyaà tat-kñaëät samaväpnuyät

viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; anna-daù-offering food; tåptim-happiness; äpnoti-attains; svargalokam-Svargaloka; ca-and; gacchati-goes; dattvä-giving; ca-and; samvibhägäya-for an offering; tatha-so; eva-indeed; annam-food; atandritaù-diligent; trailokya-tarpite-pleasing the three worlds; puëyam-sacred; tat-kñaëät-from that moment; samaväpnuyät-attains.


"A person who offers food to Lord Hari goes to Svargaloka and becomes happy. By diligently offering food to the Lord, a person becomes very pious. He pleases the three worlds.

Text 170

akñayyam anna-pänaà ca pitåbhyaç copatiñöhateodanaà vyaïjanopetaà dattvä svargam aväpnuyät

akñayyam-imperishable; anna-pänam-food and drink; ca-and; pitåbhyaç-with the pitäs; ca-and; upatiñöhate-stays; odanam-rice; vyaïjana-spices; upetam-with; dattvä-giving; svargam-to SAvargaloka; aväpnuyät-attains.

"A person who offers to the Lord rice and cuddy goes to Svargaloka where, in the company of the pitäs, he enjoys imperishable food and drink."

Text 171

paramännaà tathä dattvä tåptim äpnoti çäçvatémviñëulokam aväpnoti kulam uddharate tathä

paramännam-sweet rice; tathä-so; dattvä-giving; tåptim-happiness; äpnoti-attains; çäçvatém-eternal; viñëulokam-Viñëuloka; aväpnoti-attains; kulam-family; uddharate-delivers; tathä-so.

"A person who offers sweet-rice to Lord Kåñëa attains eternal happiness, delivers his relatives, and goes to Viñëuloka.

Text 172

ghåtaudana-pradänena

dérgham äyur aväpnuyätdadhy-odana-pradänena çriyam äpnoty anuttamam

ghåta-ghee; odana-rice; pradänena-by giving; dérgham-long; äyuù-life; aväpnuyät-attains; dadhy-odana-yogurt and rice; pradänena-by giving; çriyam-opulence; äpnoty-attains; anuttamam-peerless.

"By offering to the Lord rice and ghee one attains long life. By offering rice and yogurt one attains peerless wealth."

Text 173

kñirodana-pradänena dérgha-jévitam äpnuyätékñüëäà ca pradänena paraà saubhägyam açnute

kñérodana-pradänena-by offering milk and rice; dérgha-jévitam-long life; äpnuyät-attains; ékñüëäm-of sugarcane; ca-and; pradänena-by offering; param-great; saubhägyam-good fortunte; açnute-enjoys.

"By offering rice and milk one attains long life. By offering sugarcane one attains great good fortune.

Text 174

ratnänäà caiva bhägé syät svargalokaà ca gacchatiphäëitasya pradänena agnyädhäna-phalaà labhet

ratnänäm-of jewels; ca-and; eva-indeed; bhägé-possessing; syät-becomes; svargalokam-to Svargaloka; ca-and; gacchati-goes; phäëitasya-of raw sugar; pradänena-by offering; agnyädhäna-phalam-the result of offering a yajna; labhet-attains.

"Such a person goes to Svargaloka and becomes wealthy with many jewels. By offering raw sugar to the Lord one attains the result of offering a yajïa.

Text 175

tathä guòa-pradänena kämitäbhéñöam äpnuyät

tathä-so; guòa-pradänena-by offering mollasses; kämitäbhéñöam-the attainment of desire; äpnuyät-attains.

"By offering molasses to the Lord one attains his desire.

Text 176

nivedyekñu-rasaà bhaktyä paraà saubhägyam äpnuyätsarvän kämän aväpnoti kñaudraà yaç ca prayacchati

nivedya-offering; ikñu-sugarcane; rasam-juice; bhaktyä-with devotion; param-great; saubhägyam-good fortune; äpnuyät-attains; sarvän-all; kämän-desires; aväpnoti-attains; kñaudram-honey; yaç-one who; ca-and; prayacchati-offers.

"By offering sugarcane juice to the Lord one attains great good fortune. By offering honey to the Lord one attains all

his desires.

Text 177

tad eva tuhitopetaà räjasüyam aväpnuyätvahniñöomam aväpnoti yävakasya nivedakaù ati-rätram aväpnoti tathä püpa-nivedakaù

tat-that; eva-indeed; tuhinopetam-cool; räjasüyam-rajasuya; aväpnuyät-attains; vahniñöomam-agnistoma; aväpnoti-attains; yävakasya-of barely; nivedakaù-offering; ati-rätram-atiratra; aväpnoti-attains; tathä-so; püpa-nivedakaù-a person who offers cakes.

"By offering cold honey to the Lord one attains the result of a räjasüya-yajïa. By offering barley to the Lord one attains the result of an agniñöoma-yajïa. By offering cakes to the Lord one attains the result of an atirätra-yajïa.

Text 178

vaidalänäà ca bhakñyänäà dänät kämän aväpnuyätdérgha-jévitam äpnoti ghåta-püra-nivedakaù

vaidalänäm-of dal; ca-and; bhakñyänäm-to be eaten; dänät-by giving; kämän-desires; aväpnuyät-attains; dérgha-long; jévitam-life; äpnoti-attains; ghåta-püra-nivedakaù-offering ghrtapura candy.

"By offering däl to the Lord one attains his desire. By offering ghåtapüra candy to the Lord one attains a long life.

Text 179

modakänäà pradänena kämän äpnoty abhépsitän

modakänäm-of modaka candy; pradänena-by offering; kämän-desires; äpnoty-attains; abhépsitän-desired.

"By offering modaka candy to the Lord one attains his desires.

Text 180

nänä-vidhänäà bhakñyänäà dänät svargam aväpnuyätbhojanéya-pradänena tåptim äpnoty anuttamäm

nänä-vidhänäm-various kinds; bhakñyänäm-of foods; dänät-by giving; svargam-Svargaloka; aväpnuyät-attains; bhojanéya-pradänena-by offering delicious foods; tåptim-happiness; äpnoty-attains; anuttamäm-peerless.

"By offering many kinds of food to the Lord one attains Svargaloka. By offering delicious foods to the Lord one attains peerless happiness.

Text 181

tathä lehya-pradänena saubhägyam adhigacchati

bala-varëam aväpnoti cüñyänäà ca nivedane

tathä-so; lehya-pradänena-by opffering drinks; saubhägyam-good fortune; adhigacchati-attains; bala-power; varëam-and glory; aväpnoti-attains; cüñyänäm-of foods that are sucked; ca-and; nivedane-in the offering.

"By offering to the Lord delicious drinks one attains good fortune. By offering foods that are sucked one attains power and glory.

Text 182

kulmäñolläsikä-dätä vahny-ädheyaà phalaà labhettathä kåñara-dänena vahniñöomam aväpnuyät

kulmäña-ulläsikä-dätä-one who offers kulmasa and ullasika; vahny-ädheyam-an agnyadhana-yajna; phalam-result; labhet-attains; tathä-so; kåñara-dänena-by offering krsara; vahniñöomam-agnistoma-yajna; aväpnuyät-attains.

"By offering kulmäña and ulläsikä one attains the result of an agnyädhäna-yajïa. By offering kåñara to the Lord one attains the result of an agniñöoma-yajïa.

Text 183

dhänänäà kñaudra-yuktänäà läjänäà ca nivedakaùmukhyäà caiva çaktünäà vahniñöomam aväpnuyät

dhänänäm-of freid barley; kñaudra-yuktänäm-with honey; läjänäm-of freid grains; ca-and; nivedakaù-a persojn who offers; mukhyäm-primarily; ca-and; eva-indeed; çaktünäm-of barley meal; vahniñöomam-agnistoma-yajna; aväpnuyät-attains.

"A person who offers fried barley with honey and other fried grains and barley meal attains the result of an agniñöoma-yajïa.

Text 184

vänaprasthäçritaà puëyaà labhec chäka-nivedakaùdattvä haritakaà caiva tad eva phalam äpnuyät

vänaprasthäçritam-in thr vanaprastha asrama; puëyam-piety; labhec-attains; chäka-nivedakaù-offering vegetables; dattvä-offering; haritakam-haritaka; ca-and; eva-indeed; tat-that; eva-indeed; phalam-result; äpnuyät-attains.

"A person who offers vegetables to the Lord attains the pious result of following the vow of vänaprastha. A person who offers haritaka to the Lord also attains that same result.

Text 185

dattvä çäkäni ramyäëi viçokas tv abhijäyatedattvä ca vyaïjanärthäya tathopakaraëäni ca

dattvä-offering; çäkäni-vegetables; ramyäëi-delicious; viçokaù-free of grief; tv-indeed; abhijäyate-is born; dattvä-offering; ca-and; vyaïjanärthäya-condiments and spices; tathä-so; upakaraëäni-offerings; ca-and.

"A person who offers delicious spiced vegetables to the Lord becomes free of grief.

Text 186

su-kule labhate janma kanda-müla-nivedakaùnélotpala-vidäréëäà taruöasya tathä dvijäù

su-kule-in a good family; labhate-attains; janma-birth; kanda-müla-nivedakaù-offering roots and herbs; nélotpala-blue lotus; vidäréëäm-seeds; taruöasya-of lotus root; tathä-so; dvijäù-O brähmaëas.

"O brähmaëas, a person who offers to the Lord roots, herbs, lotus roots, and lotus seeds takes birth in a good family.

Text 187

kanda-dänäd aväpnoti vänaprastha-phalaà çubhamtrapuñer värukaà dattvä puëòaréka-phalaà labhet

kanda-dänät-by offering roots; aväpnoti-attains; vänaprastha-phalam-the result of vanaprastha; çubham-auspicious; trapuñeù-cucumber; värukam-varuka; dattvä-offering; puëòaréka-phalam-lotus fruit; labhet-attains.

"A person who offers to the Lord väruka, cucumbers, and lotus fruits attains the auspicious result of following the vänaprastha vow.

Text 188

karkandhu-vadare dattvä tathä päraivataà kalamparüñakaà tathäbhraà ca panasaà närikelakam

karkandhu-vadare-karkandhu and vadara; dattvä-offering; tathä-so; päraivatam-paraivata; kalam-kala; parüñakam-parisaka; tathä-so; abhram-abhra; ca-and; panasam-panasa; närikelakam-coconut.

"A person who with devotion offers to Lord Kåñëa, the master of the demigods, karkandhu, vadara, päraivata, kala, parüñaka, abhra, panasa, coconut, . . .

Text 189

bhavyaà mocaà tathä cocaà kharjüram atha däòimamämrätaka-sruvämloöa- phala-mäna-priyälakam

bhavyam-bhavya; mocam-moca; tathä-so; cocam-coca; kharjüram-kharjura; atha-then; däòimam-pomegranate; ämrätaka-mango; sruva-sruva; amloöa-amlota; phalamäna-phalamana; priyälakam-priyalaka.

. . . bhavya, moca, coca, kharjüra, pomegranate, mango, sruva, amloöa, phalamäna, priyälaka, . . .

Text 190

jambu-bilvämalaà caiva jätyaà véëätakaà tathänäraìga-véjapüre ca véja-phalguphaläny api

jambu-bilvämalam-jambu, bilva, amala; ca-and; eva-indeed; jätyam-jatya; véëätakam-vinataka; tathä-so; näraìga-oranges; véjapüre-vijapura; ca-and; véja-phalguphaläni-vija and phlaguphala; api-also.

. . . jambu, bilva, ämala, jätya, véëätaka, oranges, véjapüra, véja, phalguphala, . . .

Text 191

evam ädéni divyäni yaù phaläni prayacchatitathä kandäni mukhyäni deva-deväya bhaktitaù

evam-thus; ädéni-beginning; divyäni-splendid; yaù-who; phaläni-fruits; prayacchati-offers; tathä-so; kandäni-roots; mukhyäni-beginning with; deva-deväya-to the master of the demigods; bhaktitaù-with devotion.

. . . and other splendid fuits and roots, . . .

Text 192

kriyä-säphalyam äpnoti svargalokaà tathaiva capräpnoti phalam arogyaà mådvékänäà nivedakaù

kriyä-of activities; säphalyam-success; äpnoti-attains; svargalokam-Svargaloka; tathä-so; eva-indeed; ca-and; präpnoti-attains; phalam-result; arogyam-without disease; mådvékänäm-grapes; nivedakaù-one who offers.

. . . attains the result of many pious deeds. He goes to Svargaloka. A person who offers grapes to the Lord attains freedom from disease.

Text 193

rasän mukhyän aväpnoti saubhägyam api cottamamämrair abhyarcya deveçaà äçvamedha-phalaà labhet

rasän-nectar; mukhyän-beginning with; aväpnoti-attains; saubhägyam-good fortune; api-also; ca-and; uttamam-best; ämraiù-with mangoes; abhyarcya-worshiping; deveçam-the master of the dmeigods; äçvamedha-phalam-the result of an asvamedha-yajna; labhet-attains.

"He attains sweet happiness. He attains great good fortune. A person who offers mangoes to Lord Kåñëa, the master of the demigods, attains the result of an açvamedha-yajïa."

Text 194

kià ca

mocakaà panasaà jambü tathänyat kumbhalé-phalampräcénämalakaà çreñöhaà madhukoòòumbarasya ca yatna-pakvam api grahyaà kadalé-phalam uttamam

kià ca-furthermore; mocakam-mocaka; panasam-panasa; jambü-jambu; tathä-so; anyat--another; kumbhalé-phalam-kumbhali-phala; präcénämalakam-pracinamalaka; çreñöham-best; madhukoòòumbarasya-madhukodumbara; ca-and; yatna-pakvam-properly ripe; api-also; grahyam-to ber taken; kadalé-phalam-kadali-phala; uttamam-best.

It is also said:

"One should offer to the Supreme Personality of Godhead mocaka, panasa, jambü, kumbhalé-phala, präcénämalaka, madhukoòòumbara, and other excellent, perfectly ripe fruits."

Text 195

hari-bhakti-sudhodaye ca

yat kiïcid alpaà naivedyaà bhakta-bhakti-rasa-plutampratibhojayati çréças tad-dätå[98]n sva-sukhaà drutam. iti.

hari-bhakti-sudhodaye-in the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya; ca-and; yat-what; kiïcit-something; alpam-little; naivedyam-offering; bhakta-bhakti-rasa-plutam-plunged in the nectar of the devotee's love; pratibhojayati-enjoys; çréçaù-the master of the goddess of fortune; tad-dätå[98]n-to the givers; sva-sukham-own happiness; drutam.-at once; iti-thus.


"When He enjoys even a very small offering that His devotees have showered with the nectar of love and devotion, then Lord Kåñëa, the master of the goddess of fortune gives His own happiness to them."

Text 196

tataù prägvad viciträëi pänakäny uttamäni casu-gandhi çétalaà svacchaà jalam apy arpayet tataù

tataù-then; prägvat-as before; viciträëi-variegated; pänakäni-drinks; uttamäni-excellent; ca-and; su-gandhi-fragrant; çétalam-cool; svaccham-clear; jalam-water; api-also; arpayet-should offer; tataù-then.

As one offers food to the Lord so one should also offer many kinds of delicious nectar drinks and one should also offer clear, cool, scented water.

Text 197

atha pänakäni

tan-mahätmyaà ca

viñëu-dharmottare

pänakäni su-gandhéni çétaläni viçeñataùnivedya deva-deväya väjimedham aväpnuyät

atha-now; pänakäni-drinks; tan-mahätmyam-the glory of them; ca-and; viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; pänakäni-drinks; su-gandhéni-scented; çétaläni-cool; viçeñataù-various; nivedya-offering; deva-deväya-to the master of the demigods; väjimedham-an asvamedha-yajna; aväpnuyät-attains.

Drinks

The Glory of Offering Drinks to the Lord


"A person who offers cool, scented, delicious drinks to the Lord attains the result of an açvamedha-yajïa.

Text 198

tvagelä-näga-kusuma- karpüra-sita-samyutaiùsitä-kñaudra-guòopetair gandha-varëa-guëänvitaiù

tvagelä-tvagela; näga-kusuma-naga flowers; karpüra-camphor; sita-yogurt; samyutaiù-with; sitä-sugar; kñaudra-honey; guòa-molasses; upetaiù-with; gandha-varëa-guëänvitaiù-fragrant.

"A person who offers to the Lord nectar drinks made with tvagela, näga flowers, camphor, yogurt, sugar, honey, molasses, fragrances, . . .

Text 199

véjapüraka-näraìga- sahakära-samanvitaiùräjasüyam aväpnoti pänakair viniveditaiù

véjapüraka-vijapuraka; näraìga-oranges; sahakära-mango; samanvitaiù-with; räjasüyam-a rajasuya-yajna; aväpnoti-attains; pänakaiù-with the drinks; viniveditaiù-described.

. . . véjapüraka, orange, and mango, attains the result of a räjasüya-yajïa.

Text 200

nivedya närikelämbu- vahniñöoma-phalaà labhetsarva-käma-vahä nadyo nityaà yatra manoramäù tatra päna-pradä yänti yatra rämä guëänvitaù. iti.

nivedya-offering; närikelämbu--coconut juice; vahniñöoma-phalam-the result of an agnistoma-yajna; labhet-attains; sarva-käma-all desires; vahä-fulfilling; nadyaù-rivers; nityam-always; yatra-where; manoramäù-beautiful; tatra-there; päna-pradä-giving drinks; yänti-go; yatra-where; rämä-beasutiful; guëänvitaù.-virtuous; iti-thus.

"A person who offers coconut-juice to the Lord attains the result of an agniñöoma-yajïa. A person who offers nectar drinks to the Lord goes to the spiritual world, where beautiful flowing rivers fulfill all desires, and where many beautiful

and virtuous goddesses of fortune reside."

Text 201

itthaà samarpya naivedyaà dattvä javanikäà tataùbahir bhüya yathä çakti japaà sandhyänam äcaret

ittham-thus; samarpya-offering; naivedyam-food; dattvä-offering; javanikäm-curtain; tataù-then; bahiù-outside; bhüya-being; yathä-as; çakti-power; japam-japa; sandhyänam-meditation; äcaret-should perform.

"After thus making the offering to the Lord, one should go to the other side of the curtain, and then chant the mantras and meditate on the Lord as far as one is able.

Text 202

atha dhyänaà

brahmeçädyaiù parita åñibhiù süpaviñöaiù sameto lakñmyä çiïjad alaya-karayä sädaraà véjyamänämarma-kréòä-prahasita-mukho häsayan paìkti-bhoktån bhuìkte pätre kanaka-ghaöite ñaò-rasaà çré-rameçaù. iti.

atha-now; dhyänam-meditation; brahmeçädyaiù-by the demigods headed by Brahmä and Çiva; parita-everywhere; åñibhiù-by the sages; süpaviñöaiù-entered; sametaù-accompanied; lakñmyä-by ther goddess of fortune; çiïjat-sounding; valaya-karayä-with the bracelets; sädaram-respectfully; véjyamänä-being fanned; marma-heart; kréòä-pastimes; prahasita-smiling; mukhaù-face; häsayan-making -the master of the goddess of fortune; iti-thus.

Meditation

"Smiling as He enjoys transcendental pastimes, surrounded by Brahmä, Çiva, the demigods, and the sages, and fanned by the goddess of fortune as her bracelets tinkle, the Supreme Personality of Godhead enjoys eating six kinds of delicious food from a golden plate."

Text 203

ekäntibhiç cätma-kåtaà sa-vayasyasya gokuleyaçodä-lälyamänasya dhyeyaà kåñëasya bhojanam

ekäntibhiù-unalloyed; ca-and; ätma-self; kåtam-done; sa-vayasyasya-with friends; gokule-in Gokula; yaçodä-by Yaçodä; lälyamänasya-showered with love; dhyeyam-to be meditated on; kåñëasya-of Lord Kåñëa; bhojanam-the meal.

In this way the pure devotees meditate on Lord Kåñëa, who is accompanied by His friends, and who is showered with love Mother Yaçodä as He enjoys His meal in Gokula.

Text 204

atha homaù

nityaà cävaçyakaà homaà kuryät çakty-anusärataùhomäçaktau tu kurvéta japaà tasya catur-guëam

atha-now; homaù-homa; nityam-always; ca-and; avaçyakam-necessarily; homam-homa; kuryät-should do; çakty-anusärataù-as far as one is able; homäçaktau-unable to perform homa; tu-indeed; kurvéta-should do; japam-chanting; tasya-of Him; catur-guëam-four kinds.

Homa

As far as one is able, one should perform homa daily. If unable to perform homa, one should chant the four kinds of mantras.

Text 205

ke 'py evaà manvate 'vaçyaà nitya-homaà sadäcaretpuraçcaraëa-homasyä- çaktau hi sa vidhir mataù

ke 'pi-some; evam-thus; manvate-think; avaçyam-mandatory; nitya-homam-daily homa; sadä-always; äcaret-should perform; puraçcaraëa-homasya-of purascarana and homa; açaktau-inability; hi-indeed; sa-that; vidhiù-way; mataù-considered.

Some think that one must always perform daily homa. However, if unable to perform puraçcaraëa and homa, one may chant mantras instead.

Text 206

pürvaà dékñä-vidhau homa- vidhiç ca likhitaù kiyäntad-vistäraç ca vijïeyas tat-tac-chäträt tad-icchubhiù

pürvam-beginning; dékña-vidhau-in initiation; homa-of homa; vidhiù-rules; ca-and; likhitaù-written; kiyän-how many?; tat-of that; vistäraù-elaboration; ca-and; vijïeyaù-may be known; tat-tac-chäträt-from various scriptures; tad-icchubhiù-by they who desire to study that.

How many rules are there for performing homa? They who wish to know may study the various scriptures that describe this in elaborate detail.

Text 207

samäptià bhojane dhyätvä dattvä gaëòüñikaà jalamamåtäpidhänam asi svähety uccärayet sudhéù

samäptim-attainment; bhojane-in eating; dhyätvä-meditationg; dattvä-giving; gaëòüñikam-a mouthful; jalam-water; amåta-nectar; äpidhänam-covering; asi-You are; svähä-svaha; iti-thus; uccärayet-should recite; sudhéù-intelligent.

When one meditates on the Lord finishing His meal, one should offer the Lord a mouthful of water and one should chant the mantra, "amåtäpidhänam asi svähä" (You are sprinkling nectar).

Text 208

visåjed deva-vaktre tat

tejaù saàhära-mudrayäsa-känti-tejasaù kuryän niñkräntim iva saìkramam

visåjet-should emit; deva-vaktra-the Lord's mouth; tat-that; tejaù-splendor; saàhära-mudrayä-with the samhara-mudra; sa-känti-tejasaù-splendor; kuryän-should do; niñkräntim-departure; iva-like; saìkramam-moving.

Then one should show the saàhära-mudrä. One should meditate on effulgence emanating from the Lord's mouth and again returning there.

Text 209

atha bali-dänaà

tato javanikäà vidvän apasärya yathä-vidhiviñvaksenäya bhagavan- naivedyäàçaà nivedayet

offering; nivedayet-should offer.

Offering Gifts

the Lord's meal.

Text 210

tathä ca païcarätre çré-närada-vacanaà

viñvaksenäya dätavyaà naivedyaà tac-chatäàçakampädodakaà prasädaà ca liìge caëòeçvaräya ca

tathä-so; ca-and; païcarätre-in the Pancaratra; çré-närada-vacanam-the wprds pf Çré Narada; viñvaksenäya-to Visvaksena; dätavyam-shouldf be given; naivedyam-offering; tac-chatäàçakam-a hundredth part; pädodakam-the water that washed the Lord's feet; prasädam-prasada; ca-and; liìge-on the linga; caëòeçvaräya-of Lord Çiva, the husband of Durgä; ca-also.

In the Païcarätra, Çré Närada explains:

"One should offer a one-hundredth part of the remnants of Lord Viñëu's meal and the water that has washed His feet to Viñvaksena and also to the liìga of Lord Çiva."

Texts 211-213

tad-vidhiù

mukhyäd éçänataù päträn naivedyäàçaà samuddharetsarva-deva-svarüpäya

paräya parameñöhine

çré-kåñëa-seva-yuktäya viñvaksenäya te namaùity uktvä çré-harer vame tértha-klinnaà samarpayet

çatäàçaà vä sahasräàçaà anyathä niñphalaà bhavet

tad vidhiù-the way of that; mukhyät-primarily; éçänataù-from the north; päträn-objects; naivedyäàçam-part of the offering; samuddharet-should offer; sarva-deva-svarüpäya-the form of all the demigods; paräya-the master; parameñöhine-lord; çré-kåñëa-seva-yuktäya-engaged in service to Lordf Kåñëa; viñvaksenäya-to Visvaksena; te-to you; namaù-obeisances; iti-thus; uktvä-saying; çré-hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; vame-on the left; tértha-klinnam-water of the feet; samarpayet-should offer; çatäàçam-a hundredth part; vä-or; sahasräàçam-a thousandth part; anyathä-otherwise; niñphalam-useless; bhavet-becomes.

The Proper Method To Do This

Facing north one should offer part of the remnants of the Lord's meal by chanting the mantra:

sarva-deva-svarüpäya paräya parameñöhineçré-kåñëa-seva-yuktäya viñvaksenäya te namaù

"O Viñvaksena, O master of the demigods, O master engaged in Lord Kåñëa's service, obeisances to you!"

After reciting this mantra one should on the left offer a one-hundredth or a a one-thousandth portion of the water that washed Lord Hari's feet. Otherwise everything is useless.

Text 214

paçcäc ca balir-ity-ädi- çlokäv uccärya vaiñëavaùsarvebhyo vaiñëavebhyas tac- chatäàçaà vinivedayet

paçcät-after; ca-and; balir-ity-ädi-beginning with bali; çlokäv-verses; uccärya-reciting; vaiñëavaù-Vaiñëava; sarvebhyaù-to all; vaiñëavebhyaù-Vaiñëavas; tat-of that; çatäàçam-hundreth part; vinivedayet--should offer.

Then, reciting two verses, the devotee should offer a hundredth part of the Lord's remnants to all the Vaiñëavas.

Text 215

tau ca çlokau

balir vibhéñaëo bhéñmaù kapilo närado 'rjunaùprahlädaç cämbaréñaç ca vasur väyu-sutaù çivaù

viñvaksenoddhaväkrüräù sanakädyäù çukädayaùçré-kåñëasya prasädo 'yaà sarve gåhëantu vaiñëaväù

tau-they; ca-and; çlokau-two verses; baliù-Bali; vibhéñaëaù-Vibhisana; bhéñmaù-Bhisma; kapilaù-Kapila; näradaù-Narada; arjunaù-Arjuna; prahlädaù-Prahlada; cämbaréñaù-Ambarisa; ca-and; vasuù-Vasudeva; väyu-sutaù-Hanuman; çivaù-Çiva; viñvaksenoddhaväkrüräù-Visvakseba, Uddhava, and Akrura; sanakädyäù-the sages headed by Sanaka;

çukädayaù-the sages headed by Sukadeva; çré-kåñëasya-of Lord Kåñëa; prasädaù-the mercy; ayam-this; sarve-all; gåhëantu-please accept; vaiñëaväù-Vaiñëavas.

These two verses follow:

"May Bali, Vibhéñaëa, Bhéñma, Kapila, Närada, Arjuna, Prahläda, Ambaréña, Vasu, Hanumän, Çiva, Viñvaksena, Uddhava, Akrüra, the four kumäras headed by Sanaka, and the sages headed by Çukadeva accept these remnants, which are the mercy of Lord Çré Kåñëa."

Text 217

idaà yadyapi yujyeta darpaëärpaëataù paramtathäpi bhakta-vätsalyät kåñëasyäträpi sambhavet

idam-this; yadyapi-although; yujyeta-engaged; darpaëärpaëataù-by offering a mirror; param-then; tathäpi-still; bhakta-devotee; vätsalyät-out of love; kåñëasya-of Lord Kåñëa; atra-here; api-also; sambhavet-may be.

After offering the Lord a mirror one should offer the remnants of His meal to the devotees. There is no fault in this because Lord Kåñëa loves His devotees.

Text 218

atha bali-däna-mähätmyaà

närasiàhe

tatas tad-anna-çeñena pärñadebhyaù samäntataùpuñpakñatair vimiçreëa balià yas tu prayacchati

balinä vaiñëavenätha tåptäù santo divaukasaùçäntià tasya prayacchanti çriyam arogyam eva ca

atha-now; bali-däna-mähätmyam-the glories of offering the remnants; närasiàhe-in the Nåsiàha Puräëa; tataù-then; tad-anna-çeñena-with the remnant of the meal; pärñadebhyaù-to the associates; samäntataù-comepletely; puñpa-flowers; akñataiù-unbroken; vimiçreëa-mixed; balim-offering; yaù-who; tu-indeed; prayacchati-gives; balinä-by the offering; vaiñëavena-the Vaiñëava; atha-then; tåptäù-pleased; santaù-saintly; divaukasaù-in Devaloka; çäntim-peace; tasya-to him; prayacchanti-give; çriyam-handsomeness and wealth; arogyam-freedom from disease; eva-indeed; ca-also.

The Glories of Offering the Remnants of the Lord's Meal to the Devotees


"One who offers to the devotees the remnants of Lord Kåñëa's meal and the remnants of the flowers offered to Him, pleases the demigods in the higher worlds. The demigods then give to him peacefulness, handsomeness, wealth, and freedom from disease."

Text 220

atha jala-gaëòüñädy-arpaëam

upalipya tato bhümià

punar gaëòüñikaà jalamdadyät trir agre kåñëasya tato 'smai danta-çodhanam

atha-now; jala-gaëòüñädy-arpaëam-offering a mouthful of water; upalipya-cleaning; tataù-then; bhümim-the ground; punaù-again; gaëòüñikam-mouthful of water; jalam-water; dadyät-should offer; triù-three; agre-in the presence; kåñëasya-of Lord Kåñëa; tataù-then; asmai-to Him; danta-çodhanam-an instrument for cleaning the teeth.

Offering a Mouthful of Water

Then one should wipe the ground. Then one should three times offer a mouthful of water to Lord Kåñëa. Then one should offer Him a toothbrush-twig.

Text 221

punar äcamanaà dattvä çré-päëyoù çré-mukhasya camärjanäyäàçukaà dattvä sarväëy aìgäni märjayet

punaù-again; äcamanam-water for rinsing the mouth; dattvä-offering; çré-päëyoù-on both hands; çré-mukhasya-on the mouth; ca-and; märjanäya-for washing; aàçukam-a cloth; dattvä-offering; sarväëi-all; aìgäni-limbs; märjayet-should wash.

One should again offer water for rinsing the mouth (äcamana). One should offer a cloth for wiping the mouth and hands. Then one should clean all the limbs of the Lord.

Text 222

paridhäpyäpare vastre punar dattväsanäntarampadyam äcamanéyaà ca pürvavat punar arpayet

paridhäpya-offering; apare-another; vastre-two garments; punaù-again; dattvä-placing; äsana-seat; antaram-on; padyam-padya; äcamanéyam-acamana; ca-and; pürvavat-as before; punaù-again; arpayet-should offer.

Then one should dress the Lord in another set of garments, again place Him on His throne, and again offer Him padya and äcamana as before.

Text 223

candanäguru-cüånädi pradadyät kara-märjanamkarpürädy-äsya-väsaà ca tämbülaà tulasém api

candanäguru-cüånädi-sandal paste, aguru paste, and other scented substances; pradadyät-should offer; kara-märjanam-washing the hand; karpüra-camphor; ädi-beginning; äsya-of the mouth; väsam-scenting; ca-and; tämbülam-betelnuts; tulasém-tulasé; api-also.

Then one should offer the Lord sandal paste, aguru paste, and other fragrances as kara-märjana. Then one should offer camphor and other similar things to scent the Lord's mouth. Then one should offer betelnuts and tulasé.

Texts 224 and 225

atha mukha-vasädi-mähätmyaà


püga-jäté-phalaà dattvä jäté-patraà tathaiva calavaìga-phala-kakkola- melä-kaöa-phalaà tathä

tämbülénäà kiçalayaà svargalokam aväpnuyätsaubhägyam atulaà loke tathä rüpam anuttamam

atha-then; mukha-mouth; väsa-scenting; ädi-beginning; mähätmyam-the glroies; viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; tåtéya-khaëòe-Third Part; püga-betelnuts; jäté-jati; phalam-fruits; dattvä-offering; jäté-jati; patram-leaves or petals; tathä-so; eva-indeed; ca-and; lavaìga-clove; phala-fruits; kakkola-melä-kaöa-phalam-kakkola, mela, and kata fruits; tathä-so; tämbülénäm-of betel; kiçalayam-the sprouts; svargalokam-to Svargaloka; aväpnuyät-attains; saubhägyam-good fortune; atulam-incomparable; loke-in the world; tathä-so; rüpam-handsomeness; anuttamam-peerless.

The Glory of Scenting the Lord's Mouth


"A person who offers to the Lord betelnuts, jäté-phala, jäté-patra, lavaìga-phala, kakkola-phala, melä-phala, kaöa-phala, and tämbülé-kiçalaya attains Svargaloka. He attains peerless handsomeness and good fortune in this world."

Text 226

skände

tämbülaà ca sa-karpüraà sa-pügaà nara-näyakakåñëäya yacchati prétyä tasya tuñöo hariù sadä

skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; tämbülam-betelnuts; ca-and; sa-karpüram-with camphor; sa-pügam-with betelnuts; nara-näyaka-O king; kåñëäya-to Lord Kåñëa; yacchati-offers; prétyä-with love; tasya-of him; tuñöaù-pleased; hariù-Lord Kåñëa; sadä-always.


"O king, Lord Kåñëa is always pleased with a person who affectionately offers Him betelnuts and camphor."

Text 227

atha punar gandhärpaëaà

divyaà gandhaà punar dattvä yatheñöam anulepanaiùdivyair vicitraiù çré-kåñëaà bhakti-cchedena lepayet

atha-now; punaù-again; gandha-scents; arpaëam-offering; divyam-splendid; gandham-scent; punaù-again; dattvä-offering; yathä-as; iñöam-desired; anulepanaiù-with ointments; divyaiù-splendid; vicitraiù-wonderful; çré-kåñëam-to Lord Kåñëa; bhakti-chedena-with devotion; lepayet-should anoint.

Again Offering Fragrances to the Lord

One should again offer fragrance to the Lord. To one's heart's content one should anoint the Lord with splendidly fragrant ointments.

Text 228

ramyäni cordhva-puëòräëi sad-varëena yathäspadamsu-gandhinänulepena kåñëasya racayettaram

ramyäni-beautiful; ca-and; ürdhva-puëòräëi-tilaka; sad-varëena-of a nice color; yathä-as; aspadam-the place; su-gandhina-fragrant; anulepena-with ointment; kåñëasya-of Lord Kåñëa; racayettaram-should do.

Then one should anoint the Lord with splendid, beautiful, and fragrant tilaka.

Text 229

tathä cägame dhyäna-prasaìge

laläöe hådaye kukñau kaëöhe bähvoç ca pärçvayoùviräjatordhva-puëòreëa sauvarëena vibhüñitam. iti.

tathä-so; ca-and; ägame-in the Agama; dhyäna-prasaìge-in connection withmeditation; laläöe-on the forehead; hådaye-on the chest; kukñau-on the belly; kaëöhe-on the neck; bähvoù-on both arms; ca-and; pärçvayoù-on both sides; viräjata-splendid; ürdhva-puëòreëa--with tilaka; sauvarëena-golden; vibhüñitam-is decorated; iti-thus.


"The Lord is decorated with splendid golden tilaka on His forehead, chest, abdomen, neck, arms, and sides."

Text 230

divyäni kaïcukoñëéña- käïcy-ädéni paräëy apivasträëi su-viciträëi çré-kåñëaà paridhäpayet

divyäni-splendid; kaïcuka-garments; uñëéña-crown or turban; käïci-belt; ädéni-beginning; paräëi-others; api-also; vasträëi-garments; su-viciträëi-very wonderful and colorful; çré-kåñëam-to Çré Kåñëa; paridhäpayet-should give.

One should dress Lord Kåñëa in a splendid upper-garment, crown or turban, belt, and other wonderful and colorful garments.

Text 231

tato divya-kiréöädi- bhüñaëäni yathä-rucivicitra-divya-mälyäni paridhäpya vibhüñayet

tataù-then; divya-splendid; kiréöa-crown; ädi-beginning with; bhüñaëäni-ornaments; yathä-ruci-gracefully; vicitra-wonderful; divya-splendid; mälyäni-garlands; paridhäpya-placing; vibhüñayet-should decorate.

Then one should gracefully decorate the Lord with a splendid crown, other ornaments, and wonderful flower garlands.

Text 232

atha mahä-räjopacärärpaëaà

tataç ca cämara-cchatra- pädukädén parän apimahä-räjopacäräàç ca dattvädarçaà pradarçayet

atha-now; mahä-of a great; räja-king; upacära-worship; arpaëam-offering; tataù-then; ca-and; cämara-camara; chatra-parasol; päduka-slippers; ädén-beginning; parän-others; api-also; mahä-räjopacäräàù-worthy of a great king; ca-and; dattvä-offering; adarçam-mirror; pradarçayet-should show.

Worshiping the Lord With Royal Opulence

One should worship the Lord with royal opulence, serving Him with cämara, parasol, and other signs of royalty. One should show Him a mirror.

Text 233

viñëu-dharmottare

yathädeçaà yathä-kälaà räja-liìgaà surälayedattvä bhavati räjaiva nätra käryä vicäraëä

e signs of a king; surälaye-in the temple; dattvä-offering; bhavati-is; räjä-a king; eva-indeed; na-not; atra-here; käryä-to be done; vicäraëä-doubt.


"A person who, according to time and place, worships Lord Kåñëa, treating Him like a king in the temple, himself becomes a king. Of this there is no doubt."

Text 234

tatra cämara-mähätmyaà

tathä cämara-dänena çrémän bhavati bhü-talemucyate ca tathä päpaiù svargalokaà ca gacchati

tatra-there; cämara-mähätmyam-the glories of acamara; tathä-so; cämara-dänena-by offering a camara; çrémän-glorious; bhavati-is; bhü-tale-in the world; mucyate-is liberated; ca-and; tathä-so; päpaiù-by sins; svargalokam-to Svargaloka; ca-and; gacchati-goes.

The Glory of Worshiping the Lord with a Cämara


A person who fans the Lord with a cämara becomes glorious, handsome, and wealthy in this world. He becomes free of sins. He goes to Svargaloka.

Texts 235 and 236

chatrasya mähätmyaà tatraiva

chatraà bahu-çaläkaà ca jhallaré-vastra-samyutamdivya-vastraiç ca samyuktaà hema-daëòa-samanvitam

yaù prayacchati kåñëasya chatra-lakña-yutair våtaùprärthyate so 'maraiù sarvaiù kréòäte pitåbhiù saha

chatrasya-of a parasol; mähätmyam-the glory; tatra-there; eva-indeed; chatram-a parasol; bahu-çaläkam-with many sticks; ca-and; jhallaré-vastra-samyutam-with with splendid cloth; divya-vastraiù-with spelndid cloth; ca-and; samyuktam-endowed; hema-daëòa-with a golden handle; samanvitam-with; yaù-who; prayacchati-offers; kåñëasya-to Lord Kåñëa; chatra-lakña-yutaiù-with a hundred pitåbhiù-the pitas; saha-with.

The Glory of Worshiping the Lord with a Parasol


"A person who offers to Lord Kåñëa a parasol with a golden handle, many wooden ribs, and a covering of splendid and glorious cloth, is himself served with a hundred thousand parasols. All the demigods offer prayers to him. He enjoys with the pitäs."

Text 237

tatraiva vänyatra

räja bhavati loke 'smin chatraà dattvä dvijottamäùnäpnoti ripujaà duùkhaà saìgrame ripu-jid bhayet

tatra-there; eva-indeed; vä-or; anyatra-in another place; räja-a king; bhavati-is; loke-world; asmin-in this; chatram-a parasol; dattvä-giving; dvijottamäù-O best of the brähmaëas; na-not; äpnoti--attains; ripu-from enemies; jam-born; duùkham-suffering; saìgrame-in battle; ripu-jit-victory of the enemy; bhayet-fears.


"O best of the brähmaëas, a person who offers a parasol to Lord Kåñëa becomes a king in this world. Enemies will never trouble him. He will never need to fear that an enemy will defeat him in battle.

Text 238

upänat-sampradänena vimänam adhirohatiyatheñöaà tena lokeñu vicaraty amara-prabhaù

upänat-a sandal; sampradänena-by offering; vimänam-an airplane; adhirohati-ascends; yathä-as; iñöam-desired; tena-by him; lokeñu-in the worlds; vicarati-goes; amara-prabhaù-splendid demigod.

"A person who offers sandals or shoes to Lord Kåñëa flies in an airplane to any planet he desires. He becomes splendid like a demigod."

Text 239

dhvajasya mähätmyaà tatraiva

lokeñu dhvaja-bhütaù syäd dattvä viñëor varaà dhvajamçakralokam aväpnoti bahün abda-gaëän naraù

dhvajasya-of a flag; mähätmyam-the glory; tatra-there; eva-indeed; lokeñu-in the worlds; dhvaja-bhütaù-a flag; syät-may be; dattvä-offering; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; varam-excellent; dhvajam-flag; çakra-lokam-Indraloka; aväpnoti-attains; bahün-many; abda-gaëän-years; naraù-a person.

The Glory of Offering the Lord a Flag


"A person who offers a flag to Lord Viñëu becomes like a flag himself, famous in all the worlds. He goes to Indraloka, where he stays for many years."

Text 240

kià ca

yuktaà péta-patäkäbhiù nivedya garuòa-dhvajamkeçaväya dvija-çreñöhäù sarva-loke mahéyate. iti.

kià ca-also; yuktam-engaged; péta-patäkäbhiù-with yellow flags; nivedya-offering; garuòa-dhvajam-a Garuòa flag; keçaväya-to Lord Kåñëa; dvija-çreñöhäù-O best of brähmaëas; sarva-loke-in all the worlds; mahéyate.-is glorified; iti-thus.

It is also said:

"O best of brähmaëas, a person who offers Lord Kåñëa a Garuòa flag and many yellow flags is praised in all the worlds."

Text 241

yat-präsäde dhvajäropa- mähätmyaà likhitaà purätad aträpy akhilaà jïeyaà taträtratyam idaà tathä

yat-präsäde-in whose temple; dhvajäropa-raising the flag; mähätmyam-the glory; likhitam-written; purä-before; tat-that; atra-here; api-also; akhilam-all; jïeyam-to be known; tatra-there; atratyam-here; idam-this; tathä-so.

The glories of raising a flag over the Lord's temple have already been completely described in this book. Still, one quote

Text 242

kià ca bhaviñye

viñëor dhvaje tu sauvarëaà daëòaà kuryäd vicakñaëaùpaytäkä cäpi pétä syäd garuòasya samépa-gä

kià ca-furthermore; bhaviñye-in the Bhavisya Puräëa; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; dhvaje-the flag; tu-indeed; sauvarëam-gold; daëòam-pole; kuryät-should do; vicakñaëaù-wise; paytäkä-flag; ca-and; api-also; pétä-yellow; syät-should be; garuòasya-of Garuòa; samépa-gä-near.


"An intelligent person should raise Lord Viñëu's flag on a golden staff. The flag should be yellow and bear the picture of Garuòa."

Text 243

vyajanasya mähätmyaà

viñëu-dharmottare

täla-vånta-pradänena nirvåtià präpnuyät param

vyajanasya-of a fan; mähätmyam-the glory; viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; täla-vånta-pradänena-by giving a palm-frond fan; nirvåtim-happiness; präpnuyät-attains; param-great.

The Glory of Giving a Fan


"A person who serves the Lord with a palm-frond fan becomes happy."

Text 244

vitänasya mähätmyaà

tatraiva

vitänaka-pradänena sarva-päpaiù pramucyateparaà nirvåtim äpnoti yatra taträbhijäyate

vitänasya-of a canopy; mähätmyam-the glory; tatra-there; eva-indeed; vitänaka-pradänena-by giving a canopy; sarva-all; päpaiù-sins; pramucyate-freed; param-great; nirvåtim-happiness; äpnoti-attains; yatra-where; tatra-there; abhijäyate-is born.

The Glory of Giving a Canopy


"A person who gives a canopy to the Lord becomes free from all sins. Wherever he takes birth he becomes very happy."

Text 245

khaògädénäà mähätmyaà

dattvä nistriàçakän mukhyän çatrubhir näbhibhüyatedattvä tad-bandhanaà mukhyaà agnyädheya-phalaà labhet

khaògädénäm-beginning with a sword; mähätmyam-the glories; dattvä-giving; nistriàçakän-swords; mukhyän-excellent; çatrubhiù-by enemies; na-not; abhibhüyate-is defeated; dattvä-giving; tad-bandhanam-in relation to that; mukhyam-excellent; agnyädheya-phalam-the reasult of an agnistoma-yajna; labhet-attains.

The Glory of Giving a Sword or a Similar Gift

"A person who gives an excellent sword to Lord Viñëu is never defeated by enemies. A person who gives many excellent swords attains the result of an agniñöoma-yajïa."

Text 246

kià ca

patad-grahaà tathä dattvä çubha-das tv abhijäyatepäda-péöha-pradänena sthänaà sarvatra vindati

kià ca-furthermore; patad-graham-a spitoon; tathä-so; dattvä-giving; çubha-daù-giving auspiciousness; tv-indeed; abhijäyate-is born; päda-péöha-pradänena-by giving a footstool; sthänam-a place; sarvatra-everywhere; vindati-finds.

It is also said:

"A person who gives the Lord a spittoon becomes happy. A person who gives the Lord a footstool finds that he has a home everywhere.

Text 247

darpaëasya pradänena rüpavän darpavän bhavetmärjayitvä tathä taà ca çubhagas tv abhijäyate

darpaëasya-of as mirror; pradänena-by the gift; rüpavän-handsome; darpavän-glorious; bhavet-is; märjayitvä-by cleaning; tathä-so; tam-Him; ca-and; çubhagaù-happiness; tv-indeed; abhijäyate-is born.

"By giving the Lord a mirror one becomes handsome and glorious. By cleaning the Lord's mirror one becomes happy.

Text 248

yat kiïcid deva-deväya dadyäd bhakti-samanvitaùtad eväkñayam äpnoti svargalokaà sa gacchati

yat kiïcit-whatever; deva-deväya-to the master of the demigods; dadyät-one gives; bhakti-samanvitaù-with devotion; tat-that; eva-indeed; akñayam-imperishable; äpnoti-attains; svargalokam-Svargaloka; sa-he; gacchati-goes.

"Whatever one gives to the Lord with devotion, one receives back as an eternal gift. One who gives gifts to the Lord goes to Svargaloka."

Text 249

kià ca vämana-puräëe çré-balià prati çré-prahlädoktau

çraddadhänair bhakti-parair yäny uddiçya janärdanambali-dänäni déyante akñayäëi vidur budhäù

kià ca-furthermore; vämana-puräëe-in the Vämana Puräëa; çré-balim-to Çré Bali; prati-to; çré-prahlädoktau-in the statement of Çré Prahläda; çraddadhänaiù-faithful; bhakti-paraiù-devoted; yäni-what; uddiçya-in relatiuon to; janärdanam-to Lord Kåñëa; bali-dänäni-gifts; déyante-are given; akñayäëi-eternal; viduù-know; budhaù-the wise.

In the Vämana Puräëa, Çré Prahläda tells Çré Bali:

"The wise know that whatever the faithful devotees give to Lord Kåñëa they receive back as eternal gifts.

Text 250

aträpi kecid icchanti dattvä puñpäïjali-trayampürvoktä daça çaìkhädyä mudräù sandarçayed iti

aträpi-still; kecit-some; icchanti-desire; dattvä-offering; puñpäïjali-trayam-three handsful of flowers; pürvoktä-previously described; daça-ten; çaìkha-ädyä-beginning with sankha; mudräù-mudras; sandarçayet-should show; iti-thus.

They who desire in this way should, when they offer gifts to the Lord, offer three handsful of flowers and show the previously described ten mudräs that begin with the çaìkha-mudrä.

Text 251

atha géta-vädya-nåtyäni

tato vicitrair lalitaiù käritair vä svayaà kåtaiùgétair vädyaiç ca nåtyaiç ca çré-kåñëaà paritoñayet

atha-now; géta-singing; vädya-music; nåtyäni-dancing; tataù-then; vicitraiù-wonderful; lalitaiù-graceful; käritaiù-caused; vä-or; svayam-personally; kåtaiù-done; gétaiù-with singing; vädyaiù-music; ca-and; nåtyaiù-dancing; ca-and; çré-kåñëam-Lord Kåñëa; paritoñayet-should please.

Singing, Music, and Dancing

One should please Lord Kåñëa with singing, music, and dancing, performed either by oneself or by others.

Text 252

atha tatra niñiddhaà

nåtyädi kurvato bhaktän nopaviñöo 'valokayetna ca tiryag vrajet tatra

taiù sahäntarayan prabhum

atha-now; tatra-there; niñiddham-prohibitions; nåtyädi-beginning with dancing; kurvataù-performing; bhaktän-devotees; na-not; upaviñöaù-sitting; avalokayet-should see; na-not; ca-and; tiryag-crossing; vrajet-should go; tatra-there; taiù-with them; saha-with; antarayan-making obstacles; prabhum-to the Lord.

Prohibitions

One should not passively sit down and look while the devotees are singing and dancing. Nor should one enter among them but act badly and become an obstacle to their activities.

Text 253tathä coktaà

nåtyantaà vaiñëavaà harñäd äséno yas tu paçyatikhaïjo bhavati räjendra so 'yaà janmani janmani

tathä-so; ca-and; uktam-spoken; nåtyantam-dancing; vaiñëavam-Vaiñëava; harñät-out of happiness; äsénaù-sitting; yaù-who; tu-indeed; paçyati-sees; khaïjaù-lame; bhavati-becomes; räjendra-O great king; saù-he; ayam-that person; janmani-birth; janmani-after birth.

It is said:

"O king, a person who sits down and passively watches the happily dancing devotees becomes lame for many births."

Text 254kià ca

nåtyatäà gäyatäà madhye bhaktänäà keçavasya catän åte yas tiro yäti tiryag-yoëià sa gacchati

kià ca-furthermore; nåtyatäm-dancing; gäyatäm-singing; madhye-in the midst; bhaktänäm-of the devotees; keçavasya-of Lord Kåñëa; ca-and; tän-to them; åte-without; yaù-who; tiraù-obstacle; yäti-does; tiryag-yoëim-birth as an animal; sa-he; gacchati-goes.

It is also said:

"A non-devotee who troubles the singing and dancing devotees of Lord Kåñëa becomes an animal in his next birth.

Text 255atha gétädi-mähätmyam ädau sämänyataù

närasiàhe

géta-vädyädikaà näöyaà çaìkha-turyädi-nisvanamyaù kärayati viñëos tu sandhyäyäà mandire naraù sarva-käle viçeñena kämagaù käma-rüpavän

atha-now; géta-singing; ädi-beginning with; mähätmyam-the glories; ädau-in the beginning ; sämänyataù-in general; närasiàhe-in the Nåsiàha Puräëa; géta-singing; vädya-and music; ädikam-beginning with; näöyam-dancing; çaìkha-turyädi-nisvanam-the sounds of conchshells and drums; yaù-who; kärayati-causes; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; tu-indeed;

sandhyäyäm-at sandhya; mandire-in the temple; naraù-a person; sarva-käle-at all times; viçeñena-specifically; kämagaù-attaining desires; käma-rüpavän-any form he wishes.

The Glories of Singing, Music, and Dancing Described, At First, in a General Way


"A person who arranges that at all times, or especially at sunrise, noon, and sunset, there be in the Lord's temple singing, dancing, and music with the sounds of conchshells and drums, attains his desires. He attains the power to assume any form he wishes.

Text 256su-saìgéta-vidagdhaiç ca sevyamäno 'psaro-gaëaiùmahärheëa vimänena vicitreëa viräjätä svargät svargam anupräpya viñëuloke mahéyate

su-saìgéta-at graceful singing; vidagdhaiù-expert; ca-and; sevyamänaù-served; apsaro-gaëaiù-by apsaras; mahärheëa-glorious; vimänena-with an airplane; vicitreëa-wonderful; viräjätä-shining; svargät-from Svarga; svargam-to Svarga; anupräpya-attaining; viñëuloke-in Viñëuloka; mahéyate-is glorified.

"Served by gracefully singing apsaräs, he travels among the heavenly planets in a splendid and glorious airplane. He is glorified in Viñëuloka."

Text 257skände viñëu-närada-samväde

gétaà vädyaà ca nåtyaà ca näöyaà viñëu-kathäà muneyaù karoti sa puëyätmä trailokyopari saàsthitaù

skände-In the Skanda Puräëa; viñëu-närada-samväde-Lord Viñëu tells Närada Muni; gétam-singing; vädyam-music; ca-and; nåtyam-dancing; ca-and; näöyam-drama; viñëu-kathäm-the topics of Lord Viñëu; mune-O sage; yaù-one who; karoti-does; sa-he; puëyätmä-very pious; trailokyopari-above the three worlds; saàsthitaù-situated.

In the Skanda Puräëa, Lord Viñëu tells Närada Muni:

"O sage, a person who arranges for singing, music, dancing, and drama glorifying Lord Viñëu is very saintly and pure at heart. His home is above the three worlds."

Text 258båhan-närädéye çré-yama-bhagératha-samväde

devatäyatane yas tu bhakti-yuktaù pranåtyatigétäni gäyaty athavä tat-phalaà çåëu bhü-pate

båhan-närädéye çré-yama-bhagératha-samväde-in the Närada Puräëa, Çré Yama tells King Bhagératha;; devatäyatane-in the Lord's temple; yaù-who; tu-indeed; bhakti-yuktaù-with devotion; pranåtyati-dances; gétäni-songs; gäyati-sings; athavä-or; tat-phalam-that result; çåëu-please hear; bhü-pate-O master of the earth.

In the Närada Puräëa, Çré Yama tells King Bhagératha:

"O king, please hear the pious result attained by a person who with devotion sings or dances in the Lord's temple.

Text 259gandharva-räjatäà gänair nåtyäd rudra-gaëeçatämpräpnoty añöa-kulair yuktas tataù syän mokña-bhäì naraù

gandharva-räjatäm-the king of the gandharvas; gänaiù-with singing; nåtyät-dancing; rudra-gaëeçatäm-the king of the rudras; präpnoti-attains; añöa-kulaiù-with eight generations; yuktaù-engaged; tataù-then; syän-is; mokña-bhäk-liberated; naraù-person.

"By singing he becomes king of the gandharvas. By dancing he becomes king of the rudras. With eight generations of his family he attains liberation."

Texts 260 and 261

laiìge çré-märkaëòeyämbaréña-samväde

viñëu-kñetre tu yo vidvän kärayed bhakti-samyutaùgäna-nåtyädikaà caiva viñëv-äkhyäà ca kathäà tathä

jätià småtià ca medhäà ca tathaiva paramäà sthitimpräpnoti viñëu-sälokyaà satyam etan narädhipa

laiìge çré-märkaëòeyämbaréña-samväde-in the Liìga Puräëa, Çré Märkaëòeya tells King Ambaréña; viñëu-kñetre-in the realm of Lord Viñëu; tu-indeed; yaù-who; vidvän-wise; kärayet-causes to be done; bhakti-samyutaù-with devotion; gäna-nåtyädikam-beginning with singing and dancing; ca-and; eva-indeed; viñëv-äkhyäm-the name of Lord Viñëu; ca-and; kathäm-topics; tathä-so; jätim-birth; småtim-memory; ca-and; medhäm-intelligence; ca-and; tatha-so; eva-indeed; paramäm-supreme; sthitim-destination; präpnoti-attains; viñëu-sälokyam-the same planet as Lord Viñëu; satyam-truth; etan-this; narädhipa-O king.

In the Liìga Puräëa, Çré Märkaëòeya tells King Ambaréña:

"A wise devotee who arranges that in the Lord's temple there be singing, dancing, the chanting of Lord Viñëu's holy names, the description of Lord Viñëu's glories, and other activities glorifying Lord Viñëu attains good birth, memory, intelligence, and the supreme destination. He goes to the realm of Lord Viñëu. O king, that is the truth."

Text 262

anyatra ca çré-bhagavad-uktau

visåjya lajjäà yo 'dhéte gäyate nåtyate 'pi cakula-koöi-samayukto labhate mämakaà padam

anyatra-in another place; ca-and; çré-bhagavad-uktau-in the words of the Lord; visåjya-abandoning; lajjäm-shyness; yaù-one who; adhéte-reads; gäyate-sings; nåtyate-dances; api-and; ca-also; kula-koöi-samayuktaù-with ten million relatives; labhate-attains; mämakam-My; padam-abode.

In another scripture the Supreme Personality of Godhead declares:

"A person who, throwing away all shyness, glorifies Me by singing, dancing, or study, goes to My abode with ten million of his relatives."

Text 263ata evoktaà

bhärate nåtya-géte tu kuryät sväbhävike 'pi väsväbhävikena bhagavän préëätéty äha çaunakaù

ata eva-therefore; uktam-said; bhärate-in the Bharata-sastra; nåtya-géte-singing and dancing; tu-indeed; kuryät-should do; sväbhävike-natural; api-even; vä-or; sväbhävikena-natural; bhagavän-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; préëäti-is pleased; iti-thus; äha-saud; çaunakaù-Saunaka Muni.

It is also said:

"Çaunaka Muni explains that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is pleased when one glorifies Him with song and dance following the Bharata-çästra."

Text 264

ata eva näradéye

viñëor gétaà ca nåtyaà ca naöanaà ca viçeñataùbrahman brähmaëa-jäténäà kartavyaà nitya-karma-vat

ata eva-therefore; näradéye-in the Närada Puräëa; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; gétam-song; ca-and; nåtyam-dance; ca-and; naöanam-drama; ca-and; viçeñataù-specifically; brahman-O brähmaëa; brähmaëa-jäténäm-of they who are brähmaëas; kartavyam-should be done; nitya-karma-vat-constant activity.

In the Närada Puräëa it is said:

"O great brähmaëa, they who are brähmaëas should always glorify Lord Viñëu with song, dance, and theater."

Text 265kintu småtau

géta-nåtyäni kurvéta dvija-devädi-tuñöayena jévanäya yuïjéta vipraù päpa-bhiyä kvacit. iti.

kintu-however; småtau-In the Småti-sastra; géta-nåtyäni-song and dance; kurvéta-should be done; dvija-devädi-tuñöaye-to please the master of the demigods and brähmaëas; na-not; jévanäya-for a livelihood; yuïjéta-should do; vipraù-a brähmaëa; päpa-bhiyä-with fear of sin; kvacit-ever; iti-thus.

In the Småti-çästra it is said:

"One should sing and dance for the pleasure of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of the demigods and brähmaëas. A brähmaëa will never sing and dance to earn his livelihood. He fears that will be a a sin."

Text 266

evaà kåñëa-préëanatväd gétäder nityatä paräsaàsiddhair aviçeñena jïeyä sä hari-väsare

evam-thus; kåñëa-préëanatvät-because of pleasing Lord Kåñëa; gétädeù-beginning weith singing; nityatä-regularity; parä-great; saàsiddhaiù-by the perfect; aviçeñena-without distinction; jïeyä-should be known; sä-that; hari-väsare-on ekädaçé.

Thus, to please Lord Kåñëa the perfect souls should glorify Him with song, dance, and theater every day and especially on ekädaçé.

Text 267

tathä coktaà

keçavägre nåtya-gétaà na karoti harer dinevahninä kià na dagdho 'sau gataù kià na rasätalam

tathä-so; ca-and; uktam-said; keçavägre-in the presence of Lord Keçava; nåtya-gétam-song and dance; na-not; karoti-does; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; dine-in a day; vahninä-by fire; kim-how?; na-not; dagdhaù-burned; asau-he; gataù-gone; kim-whather?; na-not; rasätalam-to hell.

It is therefore said:

"Will a person not be burned when fire touches him? Will a person not go to hell when he does not sing and dance before Lord Keçava on the ekädaçé day?"

Text 268atha viçeñato gétasya mähätmyaà

dvaraka-mähätmye çré-märkaëòeyendradyumna-samväde

kåñëaà santoñayed yas tu su-gétair madhura-svanaiùsarva-veda-phalaà tasya jäyate nätra saàçayaù

atha-now; viçeñataù-specifically; gétasya-of singing; mähätmyam-the glories; dvaraka-mähätmye çré-märkaëòeyendradyumna-samväde-in the Dvaraka-mähätmya, Märkaëòeya Muni tells King Indradyumna; kåñëam-Lord Kåñëa; santoñayet-pleases; yaù-one who; tu-indeed; su-gétaiù-with singing; madhura-svanaiù-sweet; sarva-veda-phalam-the result of asll the Vedas; tasya-of him; jäyate-is born; na-not; atra-here; saàçayaù-doubt.

The Glories of Singing

In the Dvaraka-mähätmya, Märkaëòeya Muni tells King Indradyumna:

"A person who with sweet singing pleases Lord Kåñëa attains the result of studying all the Vedas. Of this there is no doubt."

Text 269skände çré-mahädevoktau

çruti-koöi-samaà japyaà japa-koöi-samaà haviù

haviù-koöi-samaà geyaà geyaà geya-samaà viduù

skände çré-mahädevoktau-in the Skanda Puräëa, Lord Çiva explains:; çruti-koöi-samam-equal to ten million Çrutis; japyam-to be chanted; japa-koöi-samam-equal to ten million japas; haviù-yajna; haviù-koöi-samam-equal to ten million yajnas; geyam-song; geyam-to be sung; geya-samam-equal to son; viduù-they know.

In the Skanda Puräëa, Lord Çiva explains:

"The wise know that chanting mantras is equal to ten million Vedic studies, yajïas are equal to ten million mantra-chantings, and songs glorifying Lord Viñëu are equal to ten million yajïas."

Text 270

käçé-khaëòe viñëuduta-çivaçarma-samväde

yadi gétaà kvacid gétaà çrémad-dhari-haräìkitammokñaà tu tat phalaà prahuù sannidhyäm athavä tayoù

käçé-khaëòe viñëuduta-çivaçarma-samväde-in the Käçé-khaëòa, in a conversation bewteen the Viñëudütas and Çivaçarma, it is said:; yadi-if; gétam-sung; kvacit-sometime; gétam-song; çrémad-dhari-haräìkitam-glorifying Lord Hari; mokñam-liberation; tu-indeed; tat-that; phalam-result; prahuù-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; sannidhyäm-nearness; athavä-of; tayoù-of the two.

In the Käçé-khaëòa, in a conversation bewteen the Viñëudütas and Çivaçarma, it is said:

"A person will attain liberation if he sings songs glorifying Lord Hari. He will attain Lord Hari's association."

Text 271

viñëuçarme çré-bhagavad-uktau

rägeëäkåñyate ceto gandharväbhimukhaà yadimayi buddhià samasthäya gäyetha mama sat-kathäù

viñëuçarme çré-bhagavad-uktau-the Supreme Personality of Godhead explains to Viñëuçarma; rägeëa-by music; äkåñyate-is attracted; cetaù-the heart; gandharva-O gandharva; abhimukham-facing; yadi-if; mayi-in Me; buddhim-intelligence; samasthäya-placing; gäyetha-please sing; mama-of Me; sat-kathäù-the glories of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

The Supreme Personality of Godhead explains to Viñëuçarma:

"O gandharva, if your heart is attracted to music, then place your intelligence in Me and sing about My glories."

Text 272


yo gäyatéçam aniçaà bhuvi bhakta uccaiù sa drak samasta-jana-päpa-bhide 'lam ekaùdépeñv asatsv api nanu prati-geham antar dhväntaà kim atra vilasaty amale dyu-näthe

hari-bhakti-sudhodaye-in the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya; yaù-one who; gäyati-sings; éçam-to the Puräëa; aniçam-day and night; bhuvi-on the earth; bhakta-a devotee; uccaiù-aloud; sa-he; drak-quickly; samasta-jana-päpa-bhide-for breaking the sins of all the people; alam-able; ekaù-alone; dépeñv-in the lamps; asatsv-among the temporary; api-even; nanu-indeed; prati-geham-to every home; äntaù-within; dhväntam-darkness; kim-what?; atra-here; vilasati-shines; amale-pure; dyu-näthe-sun.


"A devotee who always sings aloud of Lord Kåñëa's glories has the power to purify the sins of every person in the world. Even when all candles are extinguished, how can darkness devour any home once the sun has risen in the sky?"

Text 273

yad-änanda-kalaà gäyan bhaktaù puëyäçru varñatitat sarva-tértha-salila- snänaà sva-mala-çodhanam

yad-änanda-bliss; kalam-music; gäyan-singing; bhaktaù-devotee; puëya-pure; açru-tears; varñati-showers; tat-that; sarva-all; tértha-holy places; salila-weater; snänam-bath; sva-mala-çodhanam-purifying sins.

"A person who rains tears of love as he sings blissful songs of Lord Kåñëa's glories washes away all his sins with those tears as if he had bathed in all holy rivers and lakes."

Texts 274-276

värähe

brähmaëo vasudevärthaà gäyamäno 'niçaà paramsamyak täla-prayogena sannipätena vä punaù

nava varña-sahasräëi nava varña-çatäni cakuvera-bhavanaà gatvä modate vai yadåcchayä

kuvera-bhavanäd bhrañöaù svacchanda-gamanälayaùphalam äpnoti su-çroëi mama karma-paräyaëaù

värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; brähmaëaù-a brähmaëa; vasudevärtham-for Lord Kåñëa's sake; gäyamänaù-singing; aniçam-always; param-best; samyak-completely; täla-prayogena-with rhythm; sannipätena-by placing; vä-or; punaù-again; nava varña-sahasräëi-9,000 years; nava varña-çatäni-900 years; ca-and; kuvera-bhavanam-the abode of Kuvera; gatvä-going; modate-enjoys; vai-indeed; yadåcchayä-spontaneously; kuvera-bhavanät-from Kuvera's abode; bhrañöaù-fallen; svacchanda-gamanälayaù-going wherever he wishes; phalam-result; äpnoti-attains; su-çroëi-O girl with the beautiful thighs; mama-of Me; karma-paräyaëaù-devoted to the work.

In the Varäha Puräëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead says:

"A brähmaëa who with graceful rhythms always sings songs to please Lord Kåñëa enjoys in Kuvera's abode for 9,900 years, and when he falls down from there he may go wherever he wishes. O girl with the beautiful thighs, a person who is devoted to serving Me attains the greatest benefit.


The greatest benefit here means that he attains the spiritual world of Vaikuëöha.

Text 277

näräyaëänäà vidhinä gänaà çreñöhatamaà småtamgänenärädhito viñëuù sva-kérti-jïäna-varcasä dadäti tuñöaù sthänaà svaà yathäsmai kauçikäya vai

näräyaëänäm-of Lord Näräyaëa; vidhinä-properly; gänam-song; çreñöhatamam-most excellent; småtam-remembered; gänena-by song; ärädhitaù-worshiped; viñëuù-Lord Viñëu; sva-kérti-jïäna-varcasä-by the power of the knowledge of His glories; dadäti-gives; tuñöaù-pleased; sthänam-place; svam-own; yathä-as; asmai-to him; kauçikäya-to kausika; vai-indeed.

"Of the different ways one may serve Lord Näräyaëa, singing His glories is the best. Pleased with someone who sings His glories, Lord Näräyaëa gives him residence in the spiritual world, as he did to Kauçika Vipra."

Text 278

kià ca

eña vo muni-çardülaù prokto géta-kramo muneùbrähmaëo väsudeväkhyaà gäyamäno 'niçaà param

kià ca-furthermore; eña-he; vaù-of you; muni-çardülaù-O tigers of the sages; proktaù-spoken; géta-kramaù-songs; muneù-of the sage; brähmaëaù-brähmaëa; väsudeväkhyam-the names of Lord Kåñëa; gäyamänaù-singing; aniçam-day and night; param-greatly.

It is also said:

"O tigers of the sages, in our presence Närada has sung Lord Kåñëa's glories again and again.

Text 279

hareù sälokyam äpnoti rudra-gänädhiko bhavetkarmaëä manasä vacä väsudeva-paräyaëaù gäyan nåtyaàs tam äpnoti tasmäd geyaà paraà viduù

hareù-of Lord Hari; sälokyam-residence on the same planet; äpnoti-attains; rudra-gänädhikaù-great songs; bhavet-is; karmaëä-by deeds; manasä-mind; vacä-words; väsudeva-paräyaëaù-devoted to Lord Kåñëa; gäyan-singing; nåtyaàù-dancing; tam-that; äpnoti-attains; tasmät-from that; geyam-to be sung; param-great; viduù-they know.

"A person who is devoted to singing Lord Kåñëa's glories goes to the realm where Lord Kåñëa stays. A person who with mind, words, and deeds is devoted to Lord Kåñëa and who glorifies Him with songs and dances, attains Him. That is why the wise say that singing about the Lord's glories is the best of all spiritual deeds."

Text 280

prathama-skandhe çré-näradoktau

pragäyataù sva-véryäëi tértha-padaù priya-çraväùähüta iva me çéghraà darçanaà yäti cetasi

prathama-skandhe-in the First Canto; çré-näradoktau-in the words of Çré Närada; pragäyataù-thus singing; sva-véryäëi-own activities; tértha-padaù-the Lord, whose lotus feet are the source of all virtues or holiness; priya-çraväù-pleasing to hear; ähüta-called for; iva-just like; me-to me; çéghram-very soon; darçanam-sight; yati-appears; cetasi-on the seat of the heart.

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (1.6.33) Çré Närada explains:

"The Supreme Lord Çré Kåñëa, whose glories and activities are pleasing to hear, at once appears on the seat of my heart, as if called for, as soon as I begin to chant His holy activities."*

Text 281

dvädaça-skandhe çré-sütoktau

måñä giras ta hy asatir asat-kathä na kathyate yad bhagavän adhokñajaùtad eva satyaà tad uhaiva maìgalaà tad eva puëyaà bhagavad-guëodayam

davaça-skandhe-in the eleventh canto; çré-sütoktau-in the words of Çré Suta Gosvami; måñä-false; giraù-words; ta-they; hi-indeed; asatiù-untrue; asat-kathä-improper words; na-not; kathyate-to be spoken; yat-what; bhagavän-the Lord; adhokñajaù-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; tat-that; eva-indeed; satyam-truth; tat-that; u-indeed; ha-indeed; eva-indeed; maìgalam-auspicious; tat-that; eva-indeed; puëyam-sacred; bhagavad-guëodayam-describing the Lord's transcendental qualities.

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (12.12.49-50), Çré Süta Gosvämé explains:

"Words that do not describe the transcendental Supreme Personality of Godhead but instead deal with temporary matters are simply false and useless. Only those words that manifest the transcendental qualities of the Supreme Lord are actually truthful, auspicious, and pious.***

Text 282

tad evaà ramyaà ruciraà navaà navaà tad eva çaçvan manaso mahotsavamtad eva çokärëava-çoñaëaà nåëäà yad uttama-çloka-yaço 'nugéyate

tat-that; evam-indeed; ramyam-beautiful; ruciram-charming; navam-newer; navam-newer; tat-that; eva-indeed; çaçvan-always; manasaù-of the heart; mahotsavam-a great festival; tat-that; eva-indeed; çokärëava-çoñaëam-drying up the ocean of grief; nåëäm-of the people; yat-what; uttama-çloka-yaçaù-the glories of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; anugéyate-are sung.

"Those words describing the glories of the all-famous Supreme Personality of Godhead are attractive, relishable, and ever fresh. Indeed, such words are a perpetual festival for the mind, and they dry up the ocean of misery."***

Text 283

viñëu-dharmottare

dattvä ca gétaà dharma-jïa gandharvaiù saha modatesvayaà gétena sampüjya tasyaivänucaro bhavet

viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; dattvä-giving; ca-and; gétam-song; dharma-jïa-o knower of religon; gandharvaiù-gandharvas; saha-with; modate-pleases; svayam-personally; gétena-with song; sampüjya-worshiping; tasya-of Him; eva-indeed; anucaraù-an associate; bhavet-becomes.


"O knower of religion, the Supreme Lord enjoys pastimes with the gandharvas, who glorify Him with song. A person who worships Him by glorifying Him in song becomes a personal companion of the Lord."

Text 284

pädme çré-kåñëa-satyabhämä-samvädéya-kärttika-mähätmye çré-påthu-närada-samaväde çré-bhagavad-uktau

nähaà vasämi vaikuëöhe na yogi-hådayeñu vämad-bhaktä yatra gäyanti tatra tiñöhämi närada

pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; çré-kåñëa-satyabhämä-samvädéya-in a conversation of Kåñëa and Satyabhämä; kärttika-mähätmye-in the Karttika-mahatmya; çré-påthu-närada-samaväde-in a conversation of Påthu and Narada; çré-bhagavad-uktau-in the words of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; na-not; aham-I; vasämi-reside; vaikuëöhe-in Vaikuëöha; na-not; yogi-hådayeñu-in the hearts of the yogis; vä-or; mad-bhakta-My devotees; yatra-where; gäyanti-sing; tatra-there; tiñöhämi-I stay; närada-O Narada.

In the Padma Puräëa, in a conversation of Kåñëa and Satyabhämä, in the Kärttika-mähätmya, in a conversation of Påthu and Närada, the Supreme Personality of Godhead explains:

"O Närada, I am not in Vaikuëöha, nor in the hearts of the yogés. I remain where My devotees engage in glorifying My activities.*

Text 285

teñäà püjädikaà gandha- padyädyaiù kriyate naraiùtena prétià paräà yämi na tathä mat-püjanät

teñäm-of them; püjä-worship; ädikaàbeginning eith; gandha-fragrance; padya-padya; ädyaiù-beginning eith; kriyate-is done; naraiù-by people;; tena-by that; prétim-pleasure; paräm-great; yämi-I attain; na-not; tathä-so; mat-püjanät-from worshiping Me.

"When the people, with fragrances, padya, and other things, worship My devotees, who are always singing My glories, I become very pleased. I am not pleased in the same way when the people worship Me directly."

Text 286

ata evoktaà

karmaëy aupayikatvena brähmaëo 'nya iti småtaùkärikäyäm ataù proktaà vipro gétai ramed iti

ata eva-therfore; uktam-said; karmaëi-in action; aupayikatvena-by the method; brähmaëaù-a brähmaëa; anya-another; iti-thus; småtaù-considered; kärikäyäm-in verses; ataù-then; proktam-said; vipraù-a brähmaëa; gétai-with songs; ramet-enjoys; iti-thus.

It is also said:

"Whether a person is a brähmaëa or is not a brähmaëa is determined by his actions. The scriptures declare that a brähmaëa is very happy to sing the glories of the Supreme Personality of Godhead."

Text 287

atha nåtyasya mähätmyam

dvärakä-mähätmye tatraiva

yo nåtyati prahåñöätmä bhävair bahu-su-bhaktitaùsa nirdahati päpäni janmäntara-çateñv api

atha-now; nåtyasya-of dancing; mähätmyam-the glories; dvärakä-mähätmye-in the Dvärakä-mähätmya; tatra-there; eva-indeed; yaù-a person who; nåtyati-dances; prahåñöätmä-happy at heart; bhävaiù-with love; bahu-su-bhaktitaù-with great devotion; sa-he; nirdahati-burns; päpäni-sins; janmäntara-çateñv-in a hundred births; api-even.

The Glory of Dancing


"A person who with a happy heart and with great love and devotion, dances to please the Lord burns to ashes the sins of a hundred births."

Text 288


bahudhotsäryate harñäd viñëu-bhaktasya nåtyataùpadbhyäà bhümer diço 'kñibhyäà dorbhyäà vämäìgalaà divaù

hari-bhakti-sudhodaye-in the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya; bahudhä-greatly; utsäryate-expelled; harñät-by happiness; viñëu-of Lord Viñëu; bhaktasya-of a devotee; nåtyataù-dancing; padbhyäm-with feet; bhümeù-of the earth; diçaù-the directions; akñibhyäm-with eyes; dorbhyäm-with arms; vä-or; amaìgalam-inauspiciousness; divaù-to heaven.


"Striking the ground, the feet of a blissfully dancing devotee of Lord Viñëu chase away all inauspiciousness. So also do his moving arms and eyes turning to every direction."

Text 289

värähe

yaç ca nåtyati su-çroëi puräëoktaà samäsataùtriàçad-varña-sahasräëi triàçad-varña-çatäni ca

puñkara-dvépam äsädya modate vai yadåcchayä

värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; yaù-who; ca-and; nåtyati-dances; su-çroëi-O girl with the beautioful thighs; puräëa-in the Puräëas; uktam-said; samäsataù-completely; triàçad-varña-sahasräëi-30,000 years; triàçad-varña-çatäni-3,000 years; ca-and; puñkara-dvépam-to Puñkara-dvépa; äsädya-attaining; modate-enjoys; vai-indeed; yadåcchayä-spontaneously.

In the Varäha Puräëa the Supreme Personality of Godhead explains:

"O girl with the beautiful thighs, in the Puräëas it is said that a person who dances to please Me goes to Puñkara-dvépa, where he enjoys as he likes for 33,000 years."

Text 290

puñkaräc ca paribhrañöaù svacchanda-gamanälayaùphalam äpnoti su-çroëi mama karma-paräyaëaù

puñkarät-from Puskara; ca-and; paribhrañöaù-fallen; svacchanda-gamanälayaù-free to go anywhere he wishes; phalam-result; äpnoti-attains; su-çroëi-O girlw ith the beautiful thiughs; mama-of Me; karma-paräyaëaù-devoted to work.

"When he finally falls from Puñkara-dvépa, he is free to go wherever he wishes. O girl with the beautiful thighs, that is the great benefit attained by My devoted servant."

Text 291

viñëu-dharmottare

nåtyaà dattvä tathäpnoti rudralokam asaàçayamsvayaà nåtyena sampüjya tasyaivänucaro bhavet

viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; nåtyam-dancing; dattvä-giving; tathä-so; äpnoti-attains; rudralokam-Rudraloka; asaàçayam-without doubt; svayam-personally; nåtyena-by dancing; sampüjya-worshiping; tasya-of him; eva-indeed; anucaraù-a follower; bhavet-becomes.


"A person who dances to please the Lord goes to Rudraloka. Of this there is no doubt. A person who with his dancing worships the Lord becomes a personal associate of the Lord."

Text 292

anyatra çré-näradoktau

nåtyatäà çré-pater agre tälikä-vädanair bhåçamuòòéyante çaréra-sthäù sarve pätaka-pakñiëaù

anyatra-in another place; çré-närada-of Narada Muni; uktau-in the words; nåtyatäm-dancing; çré-pateù-of the master of the goddess of fortune; agre-in the presence; tälikä-vädanaiù-with rhytm and music; bhåçam-greatly; uòòéyante-fly away; çaréra-sthäù-in the body; sarve-all; pätaka-of sins; pakñiëaù-the birds.

In another scripture Närada Muni explains:

"When music plays, drums sound, and the devotees dance before the Supreme Personality of Godhead, all the birds of past sins fly far away."

Text 293

atha vädyasya mähätmyam

saìgéta-çästre

véëä-vädana-tattva-jïaù çruti-jäti-viçäradaùtälajïaç cäprayäsena mokña-märgaà niyacchati

atha-now; vädyasya-of music; mähätmyam-the glory; saìgéta-çästre-In the Saìgéta-çästra; véëä-vädana-tattva-jïaù-expert at playing the vina; çruti-jäti-viçäradaù-expert in music; tälajïaù-expert in rhythm; ca-and; aprayäsena-easily; mokña-märgam-the path of liberation; niyacchati-gives.

The Glory of Instrumental Music

In the Saìgéta-çästra it is said:

"A véëa player expert in melody and rhythm who glorifies the Lord with music easily walks on the path to liberation."

Text 294

viñëu-dharmottare

vädyaà dattvä tathä vipraù çakralokam aväpnuyätsvayaà vädyena sampüjya tasyaivänucaro bhavet

viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; vädyam-music; dattvä-giving; tathä-so; vipraù-dear; çakralokam-to Indraloka; aväpnuyät-attains; svayam-personally; vädyena-with music; sampüjya-worshiping; tasya-of him; eva-indeed; anucaraù-a follower; bhavet-becomes.


"A brähmaëa who glorifies the Lord with music goes to Indraloka. A person who worships the Lord with music becomes a personal associate of the Lord.

Text 295

vädyänäm api devasya tantré-vädyaà sadä priyamtena sampüjya varadaà. gäëapatyam aväpnuyät

vädyänäm-of music; api-and; devasya-of the Lord; tantré-vädyam-music of string isntruments; sadä-always; priyam-dear; tena-by that; sampüjya-worshiping; varadam-the giver of boons; gäëapatyam-Gaëeçaloka; aväpnuyät-attains.

"The Lord is especially fond of the music of string instruments. A person who worships the Lord with the music of a string instrument goes to Gaëeçaloka.

Text 296

ataù çaktau punaù püjä

çaktaç cet sa-paréväraà kåñëaà gandhädibhiù punaùpaïcopacärair mülena sampüjyärghyaà samarpayet

ataù-then; çaktau-in the ability; punaù-again; püjä-worship; çaktaù-able; cet-if; sa-paréväram-with associates; kåñëam-Lord Kåñëa; gandhädibhiù-with things beginning with fragrances; punaù-again; païca-five; upacäraiù-with services; mülena-with the root; sampüjya-worshiping; arghyam-arghya; samarpayet-should offer.

Worshiping the Lord According to One's Ability

"If one is able, one should worship Lord Kåñëa and His associates by offering arghya and the five items beginning with sweet fragrances.

Text 297

atha néräjanaà

tataç ca müla-mantreëa dattvä puñpäïjali-trayammahä-néräjanaà kuryän mahä-vädya-jaya-svanaiù

atha-now; néräjanam-arati; tataù-then; ca-and; müla-mantreëa-with the mula-mantra; dattvä-giving; puñpäïjali-trayam-three handsful of flowers; mahä-néräjanam-great arati; kuryän-should do; mahä-vädya-jaya-svanaiù-with geat instrumental music and jaya-mantras.

Arati

After chanting the müla-mantras and offering three handsful of flowers one should offer a great ärati accompanied by great instrumental music and the chanting of jaya-mantras.

Text 298

prajjvälayet tad-arthaà ca karpüreëa ghåtena väärätrikaà çubhe patre viñamäneka-vartikam

rikam-arati; çubhe-beautiful; pätre-in a cup; viñama-not an even number; aneka-plural; vartikam-with wicks.

During ärati one should offer to the Lord a lamp burning with ghee or camphor on an uneven plural number of wicks in a beautiful dish.

Text 299

atha néräjana-mähätmyaà


bahu-vartti-samäyuktaà jvalantaà keçavopari

kuryäd ärätrikaà yas tu kalpa-koöià vased divi

atha-now; néräjana-mähätmyam-the glory of arati; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; brahma-närada-samväde-in a conversation of Brahma and Narada; bahu-many; vartti-wicks; samäyuktam-with; jvalantam-burning; keçavopari-o Lord Kåñëa; kuryät-should do; ärätrikam-arai; yaù-one who; tu-indeed; kalpa-koöim-for ten million kalpas; vaset-resides; divi-in Devaloka.

The Glory of Arati


"A person who offers to Lord Keçava a lamp burning with many wicks resides in Devaloka for ten million kalpas.

Text 300

karpüreëa tu yaù kuryäd bhaktyä keçava-mürdhaniärätrikaà muni-çreñöha praviçed viñëum avyayam

karpüreëa-with camphor; tu-indeed; yaù-who; kuryät-does; bhaktyä-withy devotion; keçava-mürdhani-to Lord Kåñëa's head; ärätrikam-lamp; muni-çreñöha-O best of sages; praviçet-enters; viñëum avyayam-the eternal world of Lord Viñëu.

"O best of sages, a person who with devotion offers a camphor lamp to Lord Keçava enters the eternal world of Lord Viñëu."

Text 301

tatraivänyatra

déptimantaà sa-karpüraà karoty ärätrikaà nåpakåñëasya vasate loke sapta kalpäni mänavaù

tatra-there; eva-indeed; anyatra-in another place; déptimantam-shining; sa-karpüram-with camphor; karoti-does; ärätrikam-arati; nåpa-O king; kåñëasya-of Lord Kåñëa; vasate-resides; loke-in the world; sapta-seven; kalpäni-kalpas; mänavaù-person.

In another verse of the Skanda Puräëa it is said:

"O king, a person who offers a camphor-lamp to the Lord resides in Lord Kåñëa's realm for seven kalpas."

Text 302

tatraiva çré-çivomä-samväde

mantra-hénaà kriyä-hénaà yat kåtaà püjanaà hareùsarvaà sampürëatäm eti kåte néräjane çive

tatra-there; eva-indeed; çré-çivomä-samväde-in a conversation of Çiva and Umä; mantra-hénam-without mantras; kriyä-hénam-without pious deeds; yat-what; kåtam-done; püjanam-worship; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; sarvam-all; sampürëatäm-perfection; eti-attains; kåte-done; néräjane-arati; çive-O Umä.

In another verse of the Skanda Puräëa, Lord Çiva tells Umä:

"O beautiful one, even if it is performed without the proper mantras or the proper actions, a person who offers ärati to Lord Kåñëa attains all perfection.

Text 303


kåtvä néräjanaà viñëor dépävalyä sudåçyayätamo-vikäraà jayati jite tasmiàç ca ko bhavaù

hari-bhakti-sudhodaye-in the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya; kåtvä-doing; néräjanam-arati; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; dépävalyä-with many lamps; sudåçyayä-beautiful; tamo-vikäram-darkness; jayati-defeats; jite-defeated; tasmiàù-in that; ca-and; kaù-what?; bhavaù-repeated birth and death.


"By offering ärati with many beautiful lamps to Lord Viñëu, a person defeats all darkness. How can the cycle of birth and death survive that defeat?"

Text 304

anyatra ca

koöayo brahma-hatyänäà agamyägama-koöayaùdahaty äloka-mätreëa viñëoù särätrikaà mukham. iti.

anyatra-in anogther place; ca-and; koöayaù-ten million; brahma-hatyänäm-murders of brähmaëas; agamyägama-koöayaù-ten million adulteries; dahati-burns; äloka-mätreëa-simply by seeing; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; särätrikam-in arati; mukham.-the face; iti-thus.


"Simply by seeing Lord Viñëu's face during ärati, a person burns away the sinful reactions of ten million adulteries and ten million brähmaëa murders."

Text 305

yac ca dépasya mähätmyaà pürvaà likhitam asti tatdrañöavyaà sarvaträpi präyeëäbhedato 'nayoù

yat-what; ca-and; dépasya-of a lamp; mähätmyaà -the glory; pürvam-before; likhitam-written; asti-is; tat-that; drañöavyam-should be seen; sarvatra-everywhere; api-also; präyeëa-primarily; abhedataù-because of the lack of difference; anayoù-of the two.

The glories of offering a lamp, glories that have already been described in this book, apply in all situations. There is not a difference because of different situations.

Text 306

ataù sädaram utthäya mahä-néräjanaà tv idamdrañöavyaà dépavat sarvair vandyam ärätrikaà ca yat

ataù-then; sädaram-respectfully; utthäya-rising; mahä-néräjanam-great arati; tv-indeed; idam-this; drañöavyam-should be seen; dépavat-with a lamp; sarvaiù-by all; vandyam-to be worshiped; ärätrikam-offering a lamp; ca-and; yat-what.

The ärati ceremony, where a lamp is offered to the Lord, should be seen and honored by all.

Text 307

tad uktaà çré-pulastyena viñëu-dharme

dhüpaà cärätrikaà paçyet karäbhyäà ca pravandatekula-koöià samuddhåtya yati viñëoù paraà padam

tat-that; uktam-said; çré-pulastyena-by Çré Pulastya Muni; viñëu-dharme-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa; dhüpam-incense; ca-and; ärätrikam-lamp; paçyet-should see; karäbhyäm-with both hands; ca-and; pravandate-should offer obeisances; kula-koöim-ten million relatives; samuddhåtya-delivering; yati-goes; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; param-to the supreme; padam-abode.

In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Pulastya Muni explains:

"A person who see the ärati ceremony, where incense and a lamp are offered to the Lord, and then bows down with both hands, goes to Lord Viñëu's supreme abode and takes ten million of his kinsmen with him.

Text 308

mülägame ca

néräjanaà ca yaù paçyed deva-devasya cakriëaùsapta janmäni vipraù syäd ante ca paramaà padam

mülägame-in the Mülägama; ca-and; néräjanam-arati; ca-and; yaù-who; paçyet-sees; deva-devasya-of the master of the demigods; cakriëaù-who holds the cakra; sapta-seven; janmäni-births; vipraù-a brähmaëa; syät-is; ante-atthe end; ca-and; paramam-the supreme; padam-abode.

In the Mülägama it is said:

"A person who sees an ärati ceremony offered to Lord Viñëu, who holds the Sudarçana-cakra and who is the master of the demigods, becomes a brähmaëa for seven births, and at the end goes to the Lord's supreme abode."

Text 309

atha çaìkhädi-vadana-mähätmyaà

brhan-näradéya çré-yama-bhagératha-samväde

keçaväyatane räjan kurvan çaìkha-ravaà naraùsarva-päpa-vinirmukto

brahmaëä saha modate

atha-now; çaìkhädi-vadana-mähätmyam- The Glories of Sounding the Conchshell and Other Musical Instruments; brhan-näradéya-in the Narada Puräëa; çré-yama-pf Çré yama; bhagératha-and King Bhagiratha; samväde-in a conversation; keçaväyatane-in the temple of Lord Kåñëa; räjan-O king; kurvän-doing; çaìkha-ravam-the sound of a conchshell; naraù-a person; sarva-päpa-vinirmuktaù-free of all sins; brahmaëä-with Brahma; saha-with; modate-enjoys.

The Glories of Sounding the Conchshell and Other Musical Instruments

"O king, a person who sounds a conchshell in Lord Keçava's temple becomes free of all sins. He goes to Brahmaloka where he enjoys with Lord Brahmä."

Text 310

kara-çabdaà prakurvanti keçaväyataneñu yete sarve päpa-nirmuktä vimäneçä yuga-dvayam

kara-çabdam-clapping the hands;; prakurvanti--do; keçaväyataneñu-in Lord Kåñëa's temple; ye-who; te-they; sarve-all; päpa-sins; nirmuktä-freed; vimäneçä-the masters of airplanes; yuga-dvayam-for two yugas.

"They who clap their hands in Lord Keçava's temple become free from all sins. For two yugas they travel in their own celestial airplanes.

Text 311

tälädi-kaàsya-ninadaà kurvan viñëu-gåhe naraùyat phalaà labhate räjan çåëuñva gadato mama

tälädi-kaàsya-ninadam-the sound of karatalas; kurvan-making; viñëu-gåhe-in Lord Viñëu's house; naraù-a person; yat-what; phalam-result; labhate-attain; räjan-O king; çåëuñva-please hear; gadataù-speaking; mama-from me.

"O king, please listen and I will tell you the benefit attained by a person who plays karatälas in Lord Viñëu's temple.

Text 312

sarva-päpa-vinirmukto vimäna-çata-saìkulaùgéyamänaç ca gandharvair viñëunä saha modate

sarva-päpa-vinirmuktaù-free of all sins; vimäna-çata-saìkulaù-with a hundred airplanes; géyamänaù-glorified; ca-and; gandharvaiù-by the gandharvas; viñëunä-Lord Viñëu; saha-with; modate-enjoys.

"He becomes free of all sins. Glorified by the gandharvas, he leaves this world in a fleet of a hundred celestial airplanes. He enjoys with Lord Viñëu.

Text 313

bheré-mådaìga-paöaha- niçänädyaiç ca òiëòimaiùsantarpya deva-deveçaà

yat phalaà labhate çåëu

bheré-mådaìga-paöaha-bherés, mådaìgas, paöahas; niçäna-nisana; ädyaiù-beginning with; ca-and; òiëòimaiù-with dindimas; santarpya-pleasing; deva-deveçam-the master of the demigods; yat-what; phalam-result; labhate-attains; çåëu-please hear.

"Please hear the benefit attained by a person who pleases Lord Viñëu with the music of bherés, mådaìgas, paöahas, niçänas, and òiëòimas.

Text 314

deva-stré-çata-samyuktaù sarva-käma-samanvitaùsvargalokam anupräpya modate païca-kalpakam. iti.

deva-stré-çata-samyuktaù-with a hundred demigoddesses; sarva-käma-samanvitaù-all desires fulfilled; svargalokam-Svargaloka; anupräpya-attaining; modate-enjoys; païca-kalpakam-for five kalpas; iti-thus.

"He goes to Svargaloka where, surrounded by a hundred demigoddesses, and his every desire fulfilled, he enjoys for five kalpas.

Text 315

atha sa-jala-çaìkha-néräjanaà

tataç ca sa-jalaà çaìkhaà bhagavan-mastakoparitri-bhrämayitvä kurvéta punar néräjanaà prabhoù

atha-now; sa-with; jala-water; çaìkha-conchshell; néräjanam-arati; tataù-then; ca-and; sa-jalam-with water; çaìkham-conchshell; bhagavat-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; mastaka-head; upari-abode; tri-bhrämayitvä-circling three times; kurvéta-should do; punaù-again; néräjanam-arati; prabhoù-of the Lord.

Offering a Conchshell Filled With Water

One should offer a conchshell filled with water, circling it three times over the head of the Supreme Lord.

Text 316

tan-mähätmyaà ca

dvärakä-mähätmye tatraiva

çaìkhe kåtvä tu pänéyaà bhrämitaà keçavoparisannidhau vasate viñëoù kalpäntaà kñéra-sägare. iti.

tan-mähätmyam-the glory of that; ca-and; dvärakä-mähätmye-in the Dvaraka-mahatmya; tatra-there; eva-indeed; çaìkhe-conchshell; kåtvä-doing; tu-indeed; pänéyam-with water; bhrämitam-circled; keçavopari-over Lord Kåñëa; sannidhau-near; vasate-resides; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; kalpäntam-to the end of the kalpa; kñéra-sägare-in the ocean of milk; iti-thus.

The Glory of Offering a Conchshell Filled With Water


"A person who before Lord Keçava circles a conchshell filled with water stays with the Lord in the ocean of milk until the end of the kalpa."

Text 317

néräjana-dvayaà caitat tämbülasyärpaëaà paramkecid icchanti kecic ca darpaëärpaëataù param

néräjana-dvayam-two aratis; ca-and; etat-this; tämbülasya-of betelnuts; arpaëam-offering; param-supreme; kecit-some; icchanti-desire; kecit-some; ca-and; darpaëärpaëataù-from offering a mirror; param-then.

There are two kinds of ärati. In one betelnuts are offered. In another one may prefer to offer a mirror.

Text 318

tathä ca païcarätre

punar äcamanaà dadyät karod vartanam eva casa-karpüraà ca tämbülaà kuryän néräjanaà tathä

tathä-so; ca-and; païcarätre-in the Païcarätra; punaù-again; äcamanam-acamana; dadyät-should offer; karot-does; vartanam-offering; eva-indeed; ca-and; sa-karpüram-with camphor; ca-and; tämbülam-betelnuts; kuryän-should do; néräjanam-arati; tathä-so.


"One should perform the ärati ceremony, offering to the Lord äcamana and betelnuts mixed with camphor.

Text 319

samarpya mukuöädéni bhüñaëäni vicakñaëaùadarçayet tathädarçaà prakalpya chatra-cämare

samarpya-offering; mukuöa-a crown; ädéni-beginning with; bhüñaëäni-ornaments; vicakñaëaù-an intelligent person; adarçayet-should show; tathä-so; ädarçam-a mirror; prakalpya-arranging; chatra-cämare-a parasol and camara.

"A wise devotee should offer the Lord a crown, many ornaments, a parasol, and a cämara. Then the devotee should place a mirror there so the Lord may see Himself.

Text 320

gäruòe ca

atha bhuktavate dattvä jalaiù karpüra-väsitaiùäcamanaà ca tämbülaà candanaiù karamärjanam

gäruòe-in the Garuda Puräëa; ca-and; atha-then; bhuktavate-eaten; dattvä-giving; jalaiù-with water; karpüra-väsitaiù-scented with camphor; äcamanam-acamana; ca-and; tämbülam-betelnuts; candanaiù-with sandal; karamärjanam-water for washing the hands.


"When the Lord has finished His meal, the devotee should offer Him äcamana water scented with camphor so the Lord may rinse His mouth. Then the devotee should offer betelnuts, and then water scented with sandal paste so the Lord may wash His hands."

Text 321

puñpäïjalià tataù kåtvä bhaktyädarçaà pradarçayetnéräjanaà punaù käryaà karpüraà vibhave sati

puñpäïjalim-a handful of flowers; tataù-then; kåtvä-doing; bhaktyä-with devotion; ädarçam-a mirror; pradarçayet-should show; néräjanam-arati; punaù-again; karyam-to be done; karpüram-camphor; vibhave-O glorious one; sati-O saintly girl.

"O glorious and saintly girl, then the devotee should with devotion offer a handful of flowers, a mirror, and again camphor."

Text 322

ata eva väyu-puraëe

ärätrikaà tu niùsnehaà niùsnehayati devatämataù saàçamayitvaiva punaù püjanam äcaret

ata eva-therefore; väyu-puraëe-in the Vayu Puräëa; ärätrikam-arati; tu-indeed; niùsneham-without ghee of roil; niùsnehayati-causing to not love of be merciful; devatäm-the Lord; ataù-then; saàçamayitvä-extinguishing; eva-indeed; punaù-again; püjanam-worship; äcaret-should do.

In the Väyu Puräëa it is said:

"If a devotee offers the Lord a lamp that has neither ghee nor oil in it, the devotee will not earn the Lord's love and mercy. If the lamp becomes extinguished, the worship should be done again."

Text 323

ata eva dvärakä-mähätmye

tatraiva kåtvä püjädikaà sarvaà jvalantaà kåñëa-murdhaniärätrikaà prakurväëo modate kåñëa-sannidhau. iti.

ata eva-therefore; dvärakä-mähätmye-In the Dvärakä-mähätmya; tatra-there; eva-indeed; kåtvä-doing; püjädikam-beginning with worship; sarvam-all; jvalantam-shining; kåñëa-murdhani-at Lord Kåñëa's head; ärätrikam-lamp; prakurväëaù-doing; modate-enjoys; kåñëa-sannidhau-in the company of Lord Kåñëa; iti-thus.


"A person who offers a shining lamp, placing it before Lord Kåñëa's face, enjoys in Lord Kåñëa's company."

Text 324

kecin néräjanät paçcäd icchanti praëatià tataùpradakñiëaà tataù stotraà géta-nåtyädikaà tataù

; tataù-then; stotram-prayers; géta-nåtyädikam-beginning with singing and dancing; tataù-then.

When the ärati is completed, some devotees wish to offer obeisances, then circumambulate, then recite prayers, and then glorify the Lord with singing, dancing, and other activities.

Text 325

evaà bhagavataù sva-sva- sampradäyänusärataùpravartante prabhor bhaktau bhaktyä sarvaà hi çobhanam

evam-thus; bhagavataù-of the Lord; sva-sva-pwn; sampradäya-sampradaya; anusärataù-following; pravartante-do; prabhoù-of the Lord; bhaktau-in devotion; bhaktyä-with devotion; sarvam-all; hi-indeed; çobhanam-glorious.

Each following his own sampradäya, the devotees engage in devotional service to the Lord in different ways. All these services are glorious.

Text 326

tato nékñipya devasyo- pari puñpäïjali-trayamvicitrair madhuraiù stotraiù stutià kurvéta bhaktimän

tataù-then; nékñipya-offering; devasya-of the Lord; upari-above; puñpa-of flowers; aïjali-handsful; trayam-three; vicitraiù-wonderful; madhuraiù-sweet; stotraiù-with prayers; stutim-prayers; kurvéta-should do; bhaktimän-devotee.

Then the devotee should offer three handsful of flowers to the Lord, and then he should glorify the Lord with many sweet and wonderful prayers.

Text 327

atha stuti-vidhiù

mahäbhärate

ärirädhäyiñuù kåñëaà väcaà jigädisämi yamtayä vyäsa-samäsinyä préyatäà madhusüdanaù. iti.

atha-now; stuti-vidhiù-offering prayers; mahäbhärate-in the Mahabharata; ärirädhäyiñuù-desiring to worship; kåñëam-Lord Kåñëa; väcam-words; jigädisämi-I desire to speak; yam-which; tayä-by that; vyäsa-elaborate; samäsinyä-concise; préyatäm-may be pleased; madhusüdanaù-Lord Kåñëa; iti-thus.

Offering Prayers to the Lord


"I desire to worship the Lord with my words. I pray that Lord Kåñëa will be pleased with these prayers, where much is said with few words."

Text 328

ärambhe ca stuter etaà çlokaà stuti-paraù paöhetsatyäà tasyäà samäptau ca çlokaà saìkértayed imam

ärambhe-in the beginning; ca-and; stuteù-of the prayers; etam-this; çlokam-verse; stuti-paraù-devoted to offering prayers; paöhet-should recite; satyäm-truth; tasyäm-in this; samäptau-in the conclusion; ca-and; çlokam-verse; saìkértayet-should recite; imam-this.

A devotee who wishes to offer prayers should begin his prayers with this verse. At the end of his prayers he should recite the following verse:

Text 329

iti vidyä-tapo-yonir ayonir viñëur éritaùväg-yajïenärcito devaù préyatäà me janärdanaù

iti-thus; vidyä-of knowledge; tapaù-and austerity; yoniù-the place of birth; ayoniù-who has no birth; viñëuù-Lord Viñëu; éritaù-is glorified; väk-of words; yajïena-by the yajna; arcitaù-worshiped; devaù-the Lord; préyatäm-may be pleased; me-with me; janärdanaù-who rescues His devotees from grief.

"With these words I have glorified Lord Viñëu, who, although He never takes birth, is the parent from whom knowledge and austerity are born. I pray that Lord Viñëu, who has been worshiped with the yajïa of these words, and who rescues His devotees from distress, will be pleased with me."

Text 330

atha stoträëi

pürva-täpané-çrutiñu

oà namo viçva-rüpäya viçva-sthity-anta-hetaveviçveçvaräya viçväya govindäya namo namaù

atha-now; stoträëi-prayers; pürva-täpané-çrutiñu-in Gopala-tapani Upanisad; om namaù-I offer my respectful obeisances; viçva-within the universe; rüpäya-beauty and glory; viçva-of the universe; sthiti-maintenance; anta-anihillation; hetave-cause; viçva-of the universe; éçvaräya-the supreme controller; viçväya-the universe; govindäya-unto Lord Govinda; namaù namaù-I repeatedly offer my respectful obeisances.

Prayers

In Çré Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad the following prayers are given:

"Oà namaù. To Lord Govinda, who is the form of the universe, the creator, maintainer, and destroyer of the universe, the master of the universe, and the universe itself, I offer my respectful obeisances.

Text 331

namo vijïäna-rüpäya paramänanda-rüpiëekåñëäya gopénäthäya govindäya namo manaù

namaù-I offer my respectful obeisances; vijïäna-of transcendental knowledge; rüpäya-the form; parama-supreme; änanda-bliss; rüpiëe-form; kåñëäya-unto Lord Kåñëa; gopénäthäya-unto the master of the gopés; govindäya-the Lord who pleases the cows, land and senses; namaù-namaù-I repeatedly offer my respectful obeisances.

"Obeisances to Lord Govinda, whose form is full of knowledge, whose form is full of supreme bliss, who is all-attractive, and who is the master of the gopés.

Text 332

namaù kamala-neträya namaù kamala-mälinenamaù kamala-näbhäya kamalä-pataye namaù

namaù-obeisances; kamala-lotus; neträya-eyes; namaù- obeisances; kamala-of lotuses; mäline-wearing a garland; namaù-obeisances; kamala-lotus; näbhäya-navel; kamalä-of the gopés; pataye-the master; namaù-obeisances.

"Obeisances to Him, His eyes lotus flowers. Obeisances to Him, garlanded with lotuses. Obeisances to Him, His navel a lotus. Obeisances to Him, the husband of the goddesses of fortune.

Text 333

barhäpéòäbhiramäya ràäyäkuëöha-medhaseramä-mänasa-haàsäya govindäya namo namaù

barha-äpéòa-whose crown is decorated with a peacock feather; abhirämäya-very beautiful; rämäya-who also appears as Lord Balaräma; akuëöha-very sharp; medhase-with intelligence; ramä-of Çrématé Rädhäräëé; mänasa-in the mänasa lake of the thoughts; haàsäya-the swan; govindäya-unto Lord Govinda; namaù namaù-I repeatedly offer my respectful obeisances.

"Obeisances to Lord Govinda, handsome with a peacock-feather crown, identical with Balaräma, His intelligence sharp, and He the swan in the Mänasa lake of the goddess of fortune's thoughts.

Text 334

kaàsa-vaàça-vinäçäya keçi-cäëüra-ghätinevåçabhadhvaja-vandyäya pärtha-särathaye namaù

käàsa-vaàça-Kaàsa and all His messengers; vinäçäya-killing; kesi-Kesi; cäëüra-and Cäëüra; ghätine- killing; våçabhadhvaja-by Lord Çiva; vandyäya-worshiped and glorified; pärtha-of Arjuna; särathaye-the chariot driver; namaù-I offer my respectful obeisances.

"Obeisances to Him, the death of Kaàsa and his allies, the killer of Keçé and Cäëüra, the object of worship for Çiva, and the chariot-driver of Arjuna.

Text 335

veëu-vädana-çéläya gopäläyähi-mardinekälindé-küla-loläya lola-kuëòala-valgave

veëu-vädana-çéläya-expert at playing the flute; gopäläya-cowherd boy; ahi-the Käliya serpent; mardine-defeating; kälindé-of the Yamuna river; küla-on the shore; loläya-moving; lola-moving; kuëòala-earrings; valgave- beautiful.

"Obeisances to Him, the cowherd boy fond of playing the flute, the crusher of Käliya, the person who walks on the Yamunä's shore and whose earrings gracefully swing to and fro.

Text 336

ballavé-nayanämbhoja- mäline nåtya-çälinenamaù praëata-päläya çré-kåñëäya namo namaù

ballavé-of the gopés; nayana-of the eyes; ambhoja- of lotus flowers; mäline-garlanded; nåtya-çäline-fond of dancing; namaù-I offer my respectful obeisances; praëata-of the surrendered souls; päläya-unto the protector; çré-kåñëäya-unto Lord Kåñëa; namaù namaù-I repeatedly offer my respectful obeisances.

"Obeisances to Çré Kåñëa, the protector of the surrendered souls. Obeisances to Him, the expert dancer garlanded with the gopés' lotus glances.

Text 337

namaù päpa-pranäçäya govardhana-dharäya capütanä-jévitäntäya tåëävartäsu-häriëe

namaù-I offer my respectful obeisances; päpa-of sins; pranäçäya-to the dwstroyer; govardhana-of Govardhana Hill; dharäya-to the lifter; ca-also; pütanä-of Pütanä; jévita-the life; antäya-ending; tåëävarta-of Tåëävarta; asu-the life; häriëe-removing.

"Obeisances to Him, the death of sin, the lifter of Govardhana Hill, the end of Pütanä's life, the thief of Tåëävarta's life.

Text 338

niñkaläya vimohäya çuddhäyäçuddhi-vairiëeadvitéyäya mahate çré-kåñëäya namo namaù

niçkaläya-decorated with golden necklace (or beyond the spell of the material energy) vimohäya-who rescues the devotees from material illusion; çuddhäya-pure; açuddhi-vairiëe- enemy of the impure; advitéyäya-without a second; mahate-full of all powers and opulences; çré-kåñëäya-unto Lord Kåñëa; namaù namaù-I repeatedly offer my respectful obeisances.

"Obeisances to Çré Kåñëa, decorated with a golden necklace, charming, pure, the enemy of impurity, one without a second, the greatest.

Text 339

praséda paramänanda praséda parameçvaraädhi-vyädhi-bhujaìgena dañöaà mäm uddhara prabho

praséda-please be merciful; parama-supreme; änanda- bliss; praséda-please be merciful; parama-supreme; éçvara-O controller; ädhi-mental suffering; vyädhi-physical suffering; bhujaìgenea-by the snake; dañöam-bitten; mäm-me; uddhara-please rescue; prabhaù-O Lord.

"Be kind, O blissful one. Be kind, O Supreme Lord. O Lord, please rescue me, who am bitten by the snake of physical and mental pain.

Text 340

çré-kåñëa rukmiëé-känta gopéjana-manoharasaàsära-sägare magnaà mäm uddhara jagad-guro

çré-kåñëa-O Kåñëa; rukmiëé-of Rukmini; känta-O husband; gopéjana-of the gopés; manaù-the minds; hara- enchanting; saàsära-of birth and death in material existance; sägare-in the ocean; magnam-drowing; mam-me; uddhara-please rescue; jagat-of the universe; guraù-O master.

"O Kåñëa, O husband of Rukmiëé, O enchanter of the gopés, O master of the universe, please rescue me, drowning in the ocean of repeated birth and death.

Text 341

keçava kleça-haraëa näräyaëa janärdanagovinda paramänanda mäà samuddhara mädhava

keçava-O father of Brahmä and Çiva; kleça-of distress; haraëa-O remover; näräyaëa-O resting place of all living beings; janärdana-O LOrd who fulfills the desires of the distressed conditioned souls; govinda-O Pleaser of the cows, land, and senses; parama-O supreme; änanda-bliss; mäm-me; samuddhara-please rescue; mädhava-O lover of Çrématé Rädhäräëé.

"O Keçava, O Näräyaëa, O Govinda, O Janärdana, O source of all transcendental bliss, O Lord who rescues the devotees from distress, O Mädhava, please rescue me."

Text 342

viçeñataù kali-käle stoträëi

ekädaça-skandhe

dhyeyaà sadä paribhaväghnam abhiñöa-dohaà térthäspadaà çiva-viriïci-nutaà çaraëyambhåtyärti-haà praëata-päla bhaväbdhi-potaà

vande mahä-puruña te caraëäravindam

viçeñataù-specifically; kali-käle-in the time of Kali; stoträëi-prayers; ekädaça-skandhe-in the eleventh canto; dhyeyam-fit to be meditated upon; sadä-always; paribhava-the insults of masterial existence; ghnam-which destroy; abhiñöa-the true desire of the soul; doham-which amply reward; tértha-of all the holy places and hreat saintly personalities; aspadam-the abode; çiva-viriïci-by the greatest of the demigods, Lord Çiva and Brahmä; nutam-which are bowed down to; çaraëyam-most woprthy of taking shelter of; bhåtya-of Your servants; ärti-ham-which relieve the distress; praëata-päla-O protector of all who simply offer respects to You; bhaväbdhi-of the ocean of birth and death; potam-which are a suitable boat (for crossing); vande-I offer my homage; mahä-puruña-O Lord Mahäprabhu; te-to Your; caraëäravindam-lotus feet.

Prayers Specifically Suitable for the Kali-yuga

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (11.5.33 and 34) the following prayers are given:

"We offer our respectful obeisances unto the lotus feet of Him, the Lord, upon whom we should always meditate. He destroys insults to His devotees. He removes the distresses of His devotees and satisfies their desires. He, the abode of all holy places and the shelter of all sages, is worshipable by Lord Çiva and Lord Brahmä. He is the boat of the demigods for crossing the ocean of birth and death.*

Text 343

tyaktvä su-dustyaja-surepsita-räjya-lakñméà dharmiñöha ärya-vacasä yad-agädarapyammäyä-mågaà dayitepsitam anvadhävad vande mahä-puruña te caraëäravindam

tyaktvä-abandoning; su-dustyaja-most difficult ot give up; sura-épsita-anxiously desired by the demigods; räjya-lakñmém-the goddess of fortune and her opulence; dharmiñöha-most perfectly fixed in religiousness; ärya-vacasä-according to the words of a brähmaëa (who had cursed Him to be deprived of all the happiness of family life); yat-He who; agät-went; araëyam-to the forest (taking to the renounced order of life); mäyä-mågam-the conditioned soul who is always searching out illusory enjoyment; dayitayä-out of sheer mercy; épsitam-His desired object; anvadhävat-running after; vande-I offer my homage; mahä-puruña-O Lord Mahäprabhu; te-to Your; caraëäravindam-lotus feet.

"We offer our respectful obeisances unto the lotus feet of the Lord, upon whom one should always meditate. He left His householder life, leaving aside His eternal consort, whom even the denizens of heaven adore. He went into the forest to deliver the fallen souls, who are put into illusion by material energy."*

Text 344

vaidikänédåçäny eva kåñëe pauräëikäny apitantrikäni ca çästräëi stoträëy abhinaväny api

vaidikäni-Vedic; édåçäni-like this; eva-indeed; kåñëe-to Lord Kåñëa; pauräëikäni-Puranic; api-also; tantrikäni-Tantric; ca-and; çästräëi-scriptures; stoträëi-prayers; abhinaväni-new; api-also.

In this way there are many prayers to Lord Kåñëa, prayers from the Vedas, Puräëas, Tantras, and recent authors also.

Text 345

viñëu-dharmottare haàsa-gétäyäm

abhrañöa-lakñaëaiù kåtvä svayaà viracitäkñaraiùstavaà brähmaëa-çardüläs tasmät kämän aväpnuyät

viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; haàsa-gétäyäm-in the Hamsa-gita; abhrañöa-not fallen; lakñaëaiù-nature; kåtvä-doing; svayam-personally; viracita-created; akñaraiù-with words; stavam-prayers; brähmaëa-çardüläù-O tigers of the sages; tasmät-from that; kämän-desires; aväpnuyät-attain.

In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, Haàsa-gétä, it is said:

"O tigers of the brähmaëas, they who compose eloquent prayers glorifying Lord Kåñëa attain what they desire."

Text 346

stuti-mähätmyaà

viñëu-dharme

sarva-deveñu yat puëyaà sarva-desveñu yat phalamnaras tat phalam äpnoti stutvä devaà janärdanam

stuti-mähätmyam-the Glories of Offering Prayers; viñëu-dharme-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa; sarva-deveñu-to all the demigods; yat-what; puëyam-piety; sarva-all; desveñu-the demigods; yat-what; phalam-result; naraù-a person; tat-that; phalam-result; äpnoti-attains; stutvä-praying; devam-to Lord; janärdanam-Kåñëa.

The Glories of Offering Prayers


"By reciting prayers glorifying to Lord Kåñëa one attains the pious result of praying to all the demigods."

Text 347

viñëu-dharmottare

na vitta-däna-nicayair bähubhir madhusüdanaùtathä toñam aväpnoti yathä stotrair dvijottamäù

viñëu-dharmottare-Ti In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, it is said; na-not; vitta-däna-nicayaiù-by giving great wealth in charity; bähubhiù-many; madhusüdanaù-Lord Kåñëa; tathä-so; toñam-satisfaction; aväpnoti-attains; yathä-as; stotraiù-with prayers; dvijottamäù-O best of brähmaëas.


"O best of brähmaëa, Lord Kåñëa is not as pleased with very generous charity as he is with hearing eloquent prayers."

Text 348

närasiàhe

stotrair japaiç ca devägre yaù stauti madhusüdanamsarva-päpa-vinirmukto viñëulokam aväpnuyät

närasiàhe-in the Nåsiàha Puräëa; stotraiù-with prayers; japaiù-with japa; ca-and; devägre-in ther Lord's presence; yaù-one who; stauti-offers prayers; madhusüdanam-to Lord Kåñëa; sarva-päpa-vinirmuktaù-free from all sins; viñëulokam-

Viñëuloka; aväpnuyät-attains.


"A person who chants japa and recites prayers before Lord Hari becomes free of all sins and goes to Viñëuloka."

Text 349


stuvann ameya-mähätmyaà bhakti-granthi-taramya-väkbhaved brahmädi-durlabhya- prabhu-käruëya-bhäjanam

hari-bhakti-sudhodaye-in the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya; stuvann-praying; ameya-mähätmyam-limitless glories; bhakti-of devotion; granthi-taramya-väk-with eloquent words; bhavet-may be; brahmädi-by Brahma and the other demigods; durlabhya-difficult to attain; prabhu-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; käruëya-of mercy; bhäjanam-the object.


"A person who with eloquent words praises the limitless glories of the Supreme Personality of Godhead attains the Lord's mercy, which even Brahmä and the demigods find difficult to attain.

Text 350

yathä narasya stuvato bälakasyeva tuñyatimugdha-väkyair na hi tathä vibudhänäà jagat-pitä

yathä-as; narasya-of a person; stuvataù-offering prayers; bälakasya-of a child; iva-like; tuñyati-is pleased; mugdha-väkyaiù-with charming and bewildered words; na-not; hi-indeed; tathä-so; vibudhänäm-of the intelligent demigods; jagat-pitä-teh father of the universe.

"When Lord Kåñëa, the father of the universes, hears the prayers of a sincere devotee, he is pleased as a father is pleased to hear the broken words of his small son. The Lord is not as pleased when he hears the elegant prayers of the very intelligent demigods.

Text 351

abalaà prabhur épsitonnatià kåta-yatnaà sva-yasaù-stave ghåëésvayam uddharati stanärthinaà pada-lagnaà jananéva bälakam

abalam-weak; prabhuù-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; épsita-desired; unnatim-great; kåta-yatnam-with a great effort; sva-yasaù-stave-in prayers glorifying the Lord; ghåëé-compassionate; svayam-personally; uddharati-picks up; stanärthinam-eager for the breast; pada-lagnam-grasping the foot; janané-a mother; iva-like; bälakam-an infant.

"When, wishing to drink from her breast, an infant son clutches his mother's foot, the kind mother picks him up. In the same way when a sincere devotee, although not expert with words, yearns to speak many words of praise, the Supreme Lord picks him up."

Text 352

skände amåta-säroddhäre

çré-kåñëa-stava-ratnaughair yeñäà jihvä tv alaìkåtänamasyä muni-siddhänäà vandanéyä divaukasäm

skände amåta-säroddhare-in the Skanda Puräëa, Amåta-säroddhära; çré-kåñëa-stava-ratnaughaiù-with many jewels of prayers to Lord Kåñëa; yeñäm-of whom; jihvä-the tongue; tv-indeed; alaìkåtä-ddecorated; namasyä-obeisdances; muni-siddhänäm-of the sages and perfect saints; vandanéyä-to be offered obeisances; divaukasäm-of the residents of the higher planets.

In the Skanda Puräëa, Amåta-säroddhära, it is said:

"They whose tongues are decorated with jewel prayers glorifying Lord Kåñëa are praised by the residents of Devaloka. The great munis and siddhas bow down before them."

Text 353

tatraiva kärttika-mähätmye çré-brahma-närada-samväde

stoträëäà paramaà stotraà viñëor näma-sahasrakamhitvä stotra-sahasräëi paöhanéyaà mahä-mune

tatra-there; eva-indeed; kärttika-mähätmye-in the Kärttika-mähätmya; çré-brahma-närada-samväde-in a conversation of Çré Brahma and Çré Narada; stoträëäm-of prayers; paramam-supreme; stotram-prayer; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; näma-sahasrakam-thousand names; hitvä-offering; stotra-of prayers; sahasräëi-thousands; paöhanéyam-to be recited; mahä-mune-O great sage.

In the Skanda Puräëa, Kärttika-mähätmya, Çré Brahmä tells Çré Närada:

"Of all prayers the thousand names of Lord Viñëu is the best. O great sage, put aside the other prayers and recite the Lord's thousand names.

Text 354

tenaikena muni-çreñöha paöhitena sadä hariùprétim äyati deveço yuga-koöi-çatäni ca. iti.

tena-by this; ekena-one; muni-çreñöha-O best of sages; paöhitena-recited; sadä-always; hariù-Lord Hari; prétim-pleasure; äyati-attains; deveçaù-the master of the dmeigods; yuga-koöi-çatäni-hundreds and millions of yugas; ca-and; iti-thus.

"When a person once recites these thousand names, Lord Hari, the master of the demigods becomes very pleased. That pleasure stays with Him for hundreds and millions of yugas."

Text 355

snäne yat stotra-mähätmyaà likhitaà lekhyam agrataùyac ca kértana-mähätmyaà sarvaà jïeyam ihäpi tat

snäne-in bathing; yat-what; stotra-mähätmyam-glorification ofm prayers; likhitam-written; lekhyam-to be written; agrataù-in the presence; yac-ehat; ca-and; kértana-mähätmyam-the glory of praises; sarvam-all; jïeyam-to be known; iha-here; api-also; tat-that.

The glories of chanting this prayer as one bathes have already been described in this book. In this place the glories of reciting the Lord's thousand names as one offers prayers is described.

Text 356

tan-nityatä

viñëu-dharme

nünaà tat kaëöha-çälükaà athavä prati-jihvikärogo vänyo na sä jihvä yä na stauti harer guëän

tan-of that; nityatä-regularity; viñëu-dharme-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa; nünam-indeed; tat-that; kaëöha-çälükam-a tumor in the throat; athavä-or; prati-jihvikä-soft palate; rogaù-disease; vä-or; anyaù-another; na-not; sä-that; jihvä-tongue; yä-which; na-not; stauti-praises; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; guëän-the virtues.

One Should Always Chant the Lord's Glories


"A tongue that will not chant Lord Hari's glories will be attacked by a disease."

Text 357

atha vandanaà

praëamed atha säñöäìgaà tan-mudräà ca pradarçayetpaöhet prati-praëämaà ca praséda bhagavann iti

atha-now; vandanam-obeisances; praëamet-one should bow down; atha-now; säñöäìgam-with eight limbs; tan-mudräm-that mudra; ca-and; pradarçayet-should show; paöhet-should recite; prati-praëämam-with every obeisance; ca-and; praséda-be pleased; bhagavann-O Supreme Personality of Godhead; iti-thus.

Bowing Down

One should bow down with all eight parts of the body and also show the appropriate mudrä. Each time one bows down, one should recite, "praséda bhagavan" (O Lord, please be merciful to me!).

Text 358

tad-uktam ekädaçe çré-bhagavatä

stavair uccävacaiù stotraiù pauräëaiù präkåtair apistutvä praséda bhagavann iti vandeta daëòavat

tat-that; uktam-said; ekädaçe-in the eleventh canto; çré-bhagavatä-by the Supreme Personality of Godhead; stavaiù-with prayers; uccävacaiù-great and small; stotraiù-with prayers; pauräëaiù-from the Puräëas; präkåtaiù-ordinary; api-also;

stutvä-praying; praséda-be mericful; bhagavann-O Lord; iti-thus; vandeta-shoudl bow down; daëòavat-like a stick.

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (11.27.45), the Supreme Personality of Godhead explains:

"The devotee should offer homage to the Lord with all kinds of hymns and prayers, both from the Puräëas and other ancient scriptures, and also from ordinary traditions. Praying, `O Lord, please be merciful to me!' he should fall down flat like a rod and offer obeisances."***

Text 359

atha praëäma-vidhiù

tatraiva

çiro mat-pädayoù kåtvä bähubhyäà ca parasparampräpannaà pähi mäm éça bhétaà måtyu-grahärëavät

atha-now; praëäma-vidhiù-the way to bow down; tatra-there; eva-indeed; çiraù-head; mat-pädayoù-at My feet; kåtvä-doing; bähubhyäm-with both arms; ca-and; parasparam-together; präpannam-surrendered; pähi-please protecte; mäm-me; éça-O Lord; bhétam-aftraid; måtyu-grahärëavät-of the ocean of death.

The Way to Bow Down

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (11.27.45), the Supreme Personality of Godhead again explains:

"Placing his head at the feet of the Deity, he should then stand with folded hands before the Lord and pray, `O my Lord, please protect me, who am surrendered unto You. I am most fearful of this ocean of material existence, standing as I am in the mouth of death.' "***

Text 360

kià cägame

dorbhyäà padbhyäà ca jänubhyäà urasä çirasä dåçämanasä vacasä ceti praëämo 'ñöäìga éritaù

kià ca-furthermore; agame-in the Aagama-sastra; dorbhyäm-with both arms; padbhyäm-with both feet; ca-and; jänubhyäm-with both knees; urasä-with the chest; çirasä-with the head; dåçä-with the eyes; manasä-with the heart; vacasä-with the words; ca-and; iti-thus; praëämaù-bowing down; añöa-eight; aìga-parts of the body; éritaù-said.


"One should bow down with both arms, both feet, both knees, the chest, head, eyes, heart, and words. This is called bowing down with eight parts of the body.

Text 361

jänubhyäà caiva bähubhyäà çirasä vacasä dhiyäpaïcäìgakaù praëämaù syät püjäsu pravaräv imau. iti.

jänubhyäm-with both knees; ca-and; eva-indeed; bähubhyäm-with both arms; çirasä-with the head; vacasä-with

words; dhiyä-intell;igence; païcäìgakaù-with five parts of the body; praëämaù-bowing down; syät-is; püjäsu-in worship; pravaräv-excellent; imau.-these two; iti-thus.

"One should bow down with both arms, both knees, the head, words, and intelligence. This is called bowing down with five parts of the body. These two kinds of bowing down are excellent when one worships the Lord."

Text 362

garuòaà dakñiëe kåtvä kuryät tat-påñöhato budhaùavaçyaà ca praëämäàs trén çaktaç ced adhikädhikän

garuòam-garuòa; dakñiëe-on the right; kåtvä-doing; kuryät-should do; tat-påñöhataù-on the back; budhaù-wise; avaçyam-necessarily; ca-and; praëäman-bwoing down; trén-three; çaktaù-able; cet-if; adhika-better; adhikän-better.

A wise devotee should bow down, keeping Garuòa on one's right. One should bow down three times. If one is able, he should bow down many times.


Garuòa stands facing the Lord, so if Garuòa is at one's right, then the Lord is at one's left. One should not bow down keeping the Lord at one's right. One also should not bow down directly facing the Lord. As one is forbidden to circumambulate only once, so also one is forbidden to bow down only once. One should bow down three times. If one is able, he should bow down many times: six times, eight times, or 108 times. The more times the better.

Text 363

tathä ca närada-païcarätre

sandhià vékñya harià cädyaà gurün sva-gurum eva cadvi-catur-viàçad athavä catur-viàçät tad-ardhakam namet tad-ardham athavä tad-ardhaà sarvathä namet

tathä-so; ca-and; närada-païcarätre-in the Närada-païcarätra; sandhim-an opportunity; vékñya-seeing; harim-to Lord Hari; ca-and; ädyam-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; gurün-to the gurus; sva-gurum-to one's own guru; eva-indeed; ca-and; dvi-twice; catur-viàçat-24; athavä-or; catur-viàçät-24; tad-ardhakam-half of that; namet-should bow down; tad-ardham-half of that; athavä-or; tad-ardham-half of that; sarvathä-in all respects; namet-one should bow down.


"At an appropriate time one should bow down before the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, the many spiritual masters, and one's own spiritual master. One should bow down 48 times, or 36 times, or 18 times, or 9 times."


The original Supreme Personality of Godhead is Lord Kåñëa. The many spiritual masters are described in the Kürma Puräëa:

yo bhävayati yä süte yena vidyopadiçyate

jyeñöo bhrätä ca bhartä ca païcaite guravaù småtäù

"The five spiritual masters are a person's father, mother, teacher, elder brother, and husband."

Text 364

viñëu-dharmottare

devärcä-darçanäd eva praëamen madhusüdanamsnänäpekñä na kartavyä dåñövärcäà dvija-sattamäù devärcä-dåñöa-pütaà hi çuci-sarvaà prakértitam

viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; devärcädarçanät-by seeing the worship of the Lord; eva-indeed; praëamen-may bow down; madhusüdanam-to Lord Kåñëa; snäna-bathing in holy places; apekñäin relation to; na-not; kartavyä-needing to be done; dåñövä-seeing; arcäm-the worship; dvija-sattamäù-O best of brähmaëas; devärcä-the worship of the Lord; dåñöa-by seeing; pütam-purified; hi-indeed; çuci-sarvam-completely purified; prakértitam-said.


"A person who sees the worship ceremony of the Lord and then bows down before Lord Kåñëa does not need to bathe in sacred rivers. O best of brähmaëas, simply by seeing the worship of the Lord he has become completely purified."

Text 365

atha namaskära-mähätmyaà

närasiàhe

namaskäraù småto yajïaù sarva-yajïeñu cottamaùnamaskäreëa caikena naraù püto harià vrajet

atha-now; namaskära-mähätmyam-the Glories of Bowing Down; närasiàhe-in the Nåsiàha Puräëa; namaskäraù-obeisances; småtaù-remembered; yajïaù-yajna; sarva-yajïeñu-among all yajnas; ca-and; uttamaù-the best; namaskäreëa-by obeisances; ca-and; ekena-one; naraù-a person; pütaù-purified; harim-to Lord Kåñëa; vrajet-goes.

The Glories of Bowing Down


"The yajïa of bowing down before the Lord is the best of all yajïas. By bowing down only once a person becomes purified and goes to Lord Kåñëa."

Text 366

skände

daëòa-praëämaà kurute viñëave bhakti-bhävitaùreëu-saìkhyaà vaset svarge manvantara-çataà naraù

skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; daëòa-praëämam-bowing down like a stick; kurute-does; viñëave-to Lord Viñëu; bhakti-

bhävitaù-with love and devotion; reëu-of paritcles of dust; saìkhyam-the number; vaset-resides; svarge-in Svargaloka; manvantara-çatam-for a hundred manvantaras; naraù-a person.


"A person who with love and devotion bows down like a stick (daëòavat) before Lord Viñëu resides in Svargaloka for a period of time equal to a hundred manvantaras multiplied by the number of particles of dust he touches as he bows down."

Text 367

tatraiva çré-brahma-närada-samväde

praëamya daëòavad bhümau namaskäreëa yo 'rcayetsa yaà gatim aväpnoti na taà kratu-çatair api namaskäreëa caikena naraù püto harià vrajet

tatra-there; eva-indeed; çré-brahma-närada-samväde-in a conversation of Çré Brahma and Çré Narada; praëamya-bowing down; daëòavat-like a stick; bhümau-to the ground; namaskäreëa-with obeisances; yaù-one who; arcayet-worships; sa-he; yam-whom; gatim-destination; aväpnoti-attains; na-not; tam-that; kratu-çataiù-with a hundred yajnas; api-even; namaskäreëa-with obeisances; ca-and; ekena-one; naraù-a person; pütaù-purified; harim-to Lord Kåñëa; vrajet-goes.

In the Skanda Puräëa, in a conversation of Çré Brahmä and Çré Närada, it is said:

"A person who worships Lord Hari by bowing down like a stick falling to the ground (daëòavat) attains a destination not to be attained by performing a hundred yajïas. By bowing down only once a person becomes purified and goes to Lord Kåñëa."

Text 368


bhümim äpéòya jänubhyäà çira äropya vai bhuvipraëamed yo hi deveçaà so 'çvamedha-phalaà labhet

tatra-there; eva-indeed; çré-çivomä-samväde-in a conversation of Çré Çiva and Çré Umä, it is said; bhümim-to the ground; äpéòya-pressing; jänubhyäm-with both knees; çiraù-head; äropya-placing; vai-indeed; bhuvi-to the ground; praëamet-bows; yaù-who; hi-indeed; deveçam-the master of the demigods; saù-he; açvamedha-of an asvamedha-yajna; phalam-the result; labhet-attains.

In the Skanda Puräëa, in a conversation of Çré Çiva and Çré Umä, it is said:

"A person who, His head and knees touching the ground, bows down before Lord Kåñëa, the master of the demigods, attains the result of an açvamedha-yajïa."

Text 369

tatraivänyatra

tértha-koöi-sahasräëi tértha-koöi-çatäni canäräyaëa-praëämasya

kaläà närhanti ñoòañém

tatra-there; eva-indeed; anyatra-in another place; tértha-koöi-sahasräëi-thousands and millions of holy places; tértha-koöi-çatäni-hundreds and millions of holy places; ca-and; näräyaëa-praëämasya-of one who bows down before the Lord; kaläm-a part; na-not; arhanti-is worthy; ñoòañém-sixteenth.

In the Skanda Puräëa, in another passage, it is also said:

"Hundreds and thousands and millions of pilgrimages are not equal to even a sixteenth part of bowing down before Lord Näräyaëa.

Text 370

çäöheynäpi namaskäraà kurvataù çärìga-dhanvaneçataçan märjitaà päpaà tat kñaëäd eva naçyati

çäöheyna-by cheating; api-even; namaskäram-obeisances; kurvataù-doing; çärìga-dhanvane-to the Lord who holds the Çärìga bow; çataçan-hundreds; märjitam-purified; päpam-sins; tat-that; kñaëät-from the moment; eva-indeed; naçyati-is destroyed.

"A hypocrite who makes a show of bowing down before Lord Kåñëa, who holds the Çärìga bow, becomes purified of hundreds of sins. His sins are destroyed in a moment.

Text 371

reëu-maëòita-gätrasya kaëä dehe bhavanti yattävad varña-sahasräëi viñëuloke mahéyate

reëu-maëòita-gätrasya-limbs decorated with dust; kaëä-particles; dehe-on the body; bhavanti-are; yat-what; tävat-so many; varña-sahasräëi-thousand years; viñëuloke-in Viñëuloka; mahéyate-is glorified.

"A person who bows down before Lord Viñëu is glorified on Viñëuloka for a period of time equal to a thousand years multiplied by the number of particles of dust that decorated his body as he bowed down.

Text 372

viñëu-dharmottare

abhivädyaà jagannäthaà kåtärthaç ca tathä bhavetnamaskära-kriyäà tasya sarva-päpa-praëäçiné

viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; abhivädyam-obeisances; jagannätham-the Lord of the universes; kåtärthaù-successful; ca-and; tathä-so; bhavet-may be; namaskära-kréyam-obeisances; tasya-of him; sarva-päpa-praëäçiné-destroying all sins.


"A person who bows down before Lord Kåñëa, the master of the universes, becomes all-successful and all-perfect. By bowing down he becomes free of all sins.

Text 373

jänubhyäà caiva päëibhyäà çirasä ca vicakñaëaùkåtvä praëämaà devasya sarvän kämän aväpnuyät

jänubhyäm-with knees; ca-and; eva-indeed; päëibhyäm-with both hands; çirasä-with head; ca-and; vicakñaëaù-intelligent; kåtvä-doing; praëämam-bowing down; devasya-to the Lord; sarvän-all; kämän-desires; aväpnuyät-attains.

"A wise devotee who with his head, both hands, and both knees bows down before Lord Kåñëa attains all his desires."

Text 374

viñëu-puräëe

anädi-nidhanaà devaà daitya-dänava-daraëamye namanti narä nityaà na hi paçyanti te yamam

viñëu-puräëe-in the Viñëu Puräëa; anädi-nidhanam-without beginning or end; devam-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; daitya-dänava-daraëam-who kills the demons; ye-who; namanti-bow; narä-people; nityam-always; na-not; hi-indeed; paçyanti-see; te-they; yamam-Yamaräja.


"They who again and again bow down before Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead who has neither beginning nor end, and who crushes the demons, never see Yamaräja.

Text 375

ye janä jagatäà näthaà nityaà näräyaëaà dvijäùnamanti na hi te viñëoù sthänäd anyatra gäminaù

ye-who; janä-persons; jagatäm-of the universes; nätham-the master; nityam-always; näräyaëam-Lord Näräyaëa; dvijäù-brähmaëas; namanti-bow down; na-they; hi-indeed; te-they; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; sthänät-place; anyatra-in another place; gäminaù-go.

"O brähmaëas, they who again and again bow down before Lord Näräyaëa, the master of the universes, go to the Lord's transcendental abode. They do not go to any other place."

Text 376

näradéye

eko 'pi kåñëasya kåtaù praëämo daçäçvamedhävabhåtair na tulyaùdaçäçvamedhé punar eti janma kåñëa-praëämé na punar-bhaväya

näradéye-in the Närada Puräë; ekaù-one; api-even; kåñëasya-of Lord Kåñëa; kåtaù-done; praëämaù-obeisances; daçäçvamedhävabhåtaiù-with ten asvamedhas and avabhrtas; na-not; tulyaù-equal; daçäçvamedhé-a person who mperforms ten asvamedhas; punaù-atain; eti-goes; janma-to a birth; kåñëa-praëämé-a person who bows down before Lord Kåñëa; na-not; punar-bhaväya-for another birth.


"Ten açvamedha-yajïas and avabhåtas are not equal to once bowing down before Lord Kåñëa. A person who performs ten açvamedha-yajïas must still take birth again, but a person who bows down before Lord Kåñëa will never take birth again."

Text 377


viñëor daëòa-praëämärthaà bhaktena patito bhuvipatitaà pätakaà kåtsnaà nottiñöhati punaù saha

hari-bhakti-sudhodaye-In the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; daëòa-praëämärtham-dandavat obeisances; bhaktena-by a devotee; patitaù-fallen; bhuvi-to the ground; patitam-fallen; pätakam-sins; kåtsnam-all; na-not; uttiñöhati-rise up; punaù-again; saha-with.


"A devotee who falls down to the ground to offer daëòavat obeisances to Lord Viñëu drops all his sins at that spot. They will never rise from there again."

Text 378

pädme devadüta-vikuëòala-samväde

tapas taptvä naro ghoraà araëye niyatendriyaùyat phalaà samaväpnoti tan natvä garuòa-dhvajam

pädme devadüta-vikuëòala-samväde-in the Padma Puräëa, in a conversation of Devadüta and Vikuëòala; tapaù-auspterities; taptvä-performing; naraù-a person; ghoram-terruble; araëye-in the forest; niyatendriyaù-controlling the senses; yat-what; phalam-result; samaväpnoti-attains; tan-that; natvä-bowing down; garuòa-dhvajam-before the Lord who holds a flag of Garuòa.

In the Padma Puräëa, in a conversation of Devadüta and Vikuëòala, it is said:

"A person who bows down before Lord Kåñëa, whose flag is marked with the picture of Garuòa, attains the same result earned by an ascetic who performs terrible austerities in the forest."

Text 379

kåtväpi bahuçaù päpaà naro moha-samanvitaùna yäti narakaà natvä sarva-päpa-haraà harim

kåtvä-performed; api-even; bahuçaù-many; päpam-sins; naraù-a person; moha-samanvitaù-bewildered; na-not; yäti-goes; narakam-to hell; natvä-bowing; sarva-päpa-haram-who removes all sins; harim-to Lord Hari.

"A very sinful fool who bows down to Lord Hari, who removes all sins, will not go to hell."

Text 380

tatraiva vedanidhi-stutau

api päpaà duräcäraà naraù tat praëato hareùnekñante kiìkarä yämyä jalükäs tapanaà yathä

tatra-there; eva-indeed; vedanidhi-stutau-ijn the prayers of Vedanidhi; api-whether?; päpam-sin; duräcäram-mischief; naraù-a person; tat-that; praëataù-bowing down; hareù-to Lord Hari; na-not; ékñante-see; kiìkarä-the servants; yämyä-of Yama; jalükäù-leeches; tapanam-the sun; yathä-so.

In the Padma Puräëa, in the prayers of Vedanidhi, it is said:

"Is it possible that a person who has bowed down before Lord Hari will be held guilty of sin? As leeches cannot see the sun, so the servants of Yamaräja cannot find any sins on such a person."

Text 381

viñëu-puräëe çré-yamasya nija-bhaöänuçäsane

harim amara-ganärcitäìghri-padmaà praëamati yaù paramärthato hi martyäùtam apagata-samasta-päpa-bandhaà vraja parihåtya yathägnim äjya-siktam

viñëu-puräëe-in the Viñëu Puräëa; çré-yamasya-of Çré Yamaräja; nija-own; bhaöa-soldiers; anuçäsane-in the teaching; harim-to Lord Kåñëa; amara-gaëa-by the demigods; arcita-worshiped; aìghri-padmam-lotus feet; praëamati-bows; yaù-who; paramärthataù-in truth; hi-indeed; martyäù-mortals; tam-to Him; apagata-gone; samasta-all; päpa-of sins; bandham-bondage; vraja-go; parihåtya-removing; yathä-as; agnim-fire; äjya-with ghee; siktam-anointed.

In the Viñëu Puräëa, Çré Yamaräja teaches his soldiers:

"They who bow down before Lord Hari, whose lotus feet are worshiped by all the demigods, have no sins. Avoid them as you would avoid jumping into a fire burning with ghee."

Text 382

brahma-vaivarte

çaraëägata-rakñaëodyataà harim éçaà praëamanti ye naräùna patanti bhavämbudhau sphuöaà patitän uddharati sma tän asau

brahma-vaivarte-in the Brahma-vaivarta Puräëa; çaraëägata-the surrendered souls; rakñaëa-protection; udyatam-prepared; harim-Lord Kåñëa; éçam-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; praëamanti-bow; ye-they; naräù-people; na-not; patanti-fall down; bhavämbudhau-into the ocean of birth and death; sphuöam-clearly; patitän-fallen; uddharati sma-delivered; tän-them; asau-He.

In the Brahma-vaivarta Puräëa it is said:

"They who bow down before Lord Hari, who is always eager to protect the surrendered souls, never fall into the ocean of repeated birth and death. If somehow they do fall, Lord Hari delivers them."

Text 383

añöama-skändhe ca bali-väkye

aho praëämäya kåtaù samudyataù präpanna-bhaktärtha-vidhau samähitaùyal-loka-pälais tvad-anugraho 'marair alabdha-pürvo 'pasade 'sure 'rpitaù

añöama-skändhe-ijn the eighth canto; ca-also; bali-väkye-in the statement of King Bali; ahaù-alas!; praëämäya-to offer my respectful obeisances; kåtaù-I did; samudyataù-only an endeavor; präpanna-bhaktärtha-vidhau-in the regulative principles observed by pure devotees; samähitaù-is capable; yal-what; loka-pälaiù-by the leaders of various planets; tvad-anugrahaù-Your causeless mercy; amaraiù-by the demigods; alabdha-pürvaù-not achieved previously; apasade-unto a fallen person like me; asure-belonging to the asura community; arpitaù-endowed.

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (8.23.2) Bali Mahäräja explains:

"What a wonderful effect there is in even attempting to offer respectful obeisances to You! I merely endeavored to offer You obeisances, but nonetheless the attempt was as successful as those of pure devotees. The causeless mercy You have shown to me, a fallen demon, was never achieved even by the demigods or the leaders of the various planets."*

Text 384

ata eva näräyaëa-vyüha-stave

aho bhägyam aho bhägyaà aho bhägyaà nåëäm idamyeñäà hari-padäbjägre çiro nyastaà yathä tathä

ata eva-therefore; näräyaëa-vyüha-stave-in the Näräyaëa-vyüha-stava; ahaù-Oh; bhägyam-fortunate; ahaù-Oh; bhägyam-fortune; ahaù-Oh; bhägyam-fortunate; nåëäm-of the people; idam-this; yeñäm-of whom; hari-padäbjägre-at Lord Kåñëa's lotus feet; çiraù-head; nyastam-placed; yathä-as; tathä-so.

In the Näräyaëa-vyüha-stava it is said:

"How fortunate! How fortunate! How fortunate are they who place their heads before Lord Hari's lotus feet!"

Text 385

kià ca närasiàhe çré-yamoktau

tasya vai narasiàhasya viñëor amita-tejasaùpraëämaà ye prakurvanti teñäm api namo namaù

kià ca-furthermore; närasiàhe-in the Nåsiàha Puräëa; çré-yamoktau-in the words of Yama; tasya-of Him; vai-indeed; narasiàhasya-Lord Nåsiàha; viñëoù-Lord Viñëu; amita-tejasaù-whose power is limitless; praëämam-obeisances; ye-who; prakurvanti-do; teñäm-to them; api-also; namaù-obeisances; namaù-obeisances.

In the Nåsiàha Puräëa, Yamaräja declares:

Text 386

bhaviñyottare ca

viñëor deva-jagad-dhätur janärdana-jagat-pateùpraëämaà ye prakurvanti teñäm api namo namaù. iti.

bhaviñyottare-in the Bhaviñya Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; ca-and; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; deva-jagad-dhätuù-the creator of the universe and the demigods; janärdana-who rescues the devotees form sufferings; jagat-pateù-who is ther master of the universes; praëämam-obeisances; ye-who; prakurvanti-do; teñäm-of them; api-also; namaù-obeisances; namaù.-obeisances; iti-thus.

In the Bhaviñya Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, it is said:

"Again and again I bow down before the devotees who themselves bow down before Lord Viñëu, who is the master of the universes, the creator of the universes and the demigods, and the protector who rescues His devotees from dangers and sufferings."

Text 387

atha praëäma-nityatä

båhan-näradéye lubdhakopäkhyänärambhe

sakåd vä na named yas tu viñëave çarma-käriëeçavoparaà vijänéyät kadäcid api nälapet

atha-now; praëäma-nityatä-regularly bowing down; båhan-näradéye-in the Narada Puräëa; lubdhaka-of a hunter; upäkhyäna-of the story; ärambhe-in the beginning; sakåt-once; vä-or; na-not; namet-bows; yaù-who; tu-indeed; viñëave-to Lord Viñëu; çarma-käriëe-who grants auspiciousness and happiness; çavoparam-a corpse; vijänéyät-know; kadäcit-ever; api-even; na-not; älapet-should talk.

One Should Regularly Bow Down Before the Lord

In the Närada Puräëa, in the beginning of the hunter's story, it is said:

"He is like a living corpse who has never, not even a single time, bowed down before Lord Viñëu, who brings happiness and good fortune. A devotee should know that and never even speak to such a sinner."

Text 388

kià ca pädme vaiçäkha-mähätmye yama-brähmaëa-samväde

paçyanto bhagavad-dväraà näma çastra-paricchadamakåtvä tat-praëämädi yänti te narakaukasaù

kià ca-furthermore; pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; vaiçäkha-mähätmye-in the Vaisakha-mahatmya; yama-brähmaëa-samväde-in a conversation of yamaraja and a brähmaëa; paçyantaù-seeing; bhagavat-to the Supreme Personality of Godhead; dväram-the door; näma-indeed; çastra-paricchadam-with the weapon; akåtvä-not doing; tat-praëämädi-beginning with offering obeisances; yänti-go; te-they; narakaukasaù-to a home in hell.

In the Padma Puräëa, Vaiçäkha-mähätmya, in a conversation of Yamaräja and a brähmaëa, it is said:

"They who see the Sudarçana-cakra-marked entrance to Lord Viñëu's temple but do not bow down to offer respects, make for themselves a home in hell."

Text 389

atha namaskära-niñiddhäni

viñëu-småtau

janma-prabhåti yat kiïcit pumän vai dharmam äcaretsarvaà tan niñphalaà yäti eka-hastäbhivädanät

atha-now; namaskära-nisiddhäni-prohibitions in bowing down; viñëu-småtau-in the Viñëu-småti; janma-prabhåti-beginning from birth; yat-what; kiïcit-something; pumän-a person; vai-indeed; dharmam-religion; äcaret-does; sarvam-all; tan-that; niñphalam-useless; yäti-goes; eka-hasta-with one hand; abhivädanät-by offering obeisances with one hand.

Prohibitions in Offering Obeisances


"A person who since his birth has carefully followed the principles of religion, but who nevertheless bows with only one hand before the Lord, negates all that he has done."

Text 390

värähe

vastra-prävåta-dehas tu yo naraù praëameta mämçvitré sa jäyate mürkhaù sapta janmäni bhämini

värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; vastra-with cloth; prävåta-covered; dehaù-body; tu-indeed; yaù-who; naraù-a person; praëameta-bows down; mäm-to Me; çvitré-a leper; sa-he; jäyate-is born; mürkhaù-a fool; sapta-seven; janmäni-births; bhämini-O beautiful one.

In the Varäha Puräëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead declares:

"O beautiful one, a fool who bows down before me when his entire body is completely covered with cloth becomes a leper for seven births."

Text 391

kià cänyatra

agre påñöhe väma-bhäge samépe garbha-mandirejapa-homa-namaskärän na kuryät keçavälaye

kià ca-furthermore; anyatra-in another place; agre-in the presewnce; påñöhe-in the back; väma-bhäge-on the left; samépe-near; garbha-mandire-at the altar; japa-homa-namaskärän-japa, yajnas, and obeisances; na-not; kuryät-does; keçavälaye-in Lord Kåñëa's temple.


"In Lord Kåñëa's temple one should not perform japa, yajïa, or obeisances directly facing the altar, very close to the altar, or with the altar at the right or back."

Text 392

api ca

sakåd bhümau nipatito na çaktaù praëamen muhuùutthayotthäya kartavyaà daëòavat praëipätanam. iti.

api ca-also; sakåt-once; bhümau-to the ground; nipatitaù-fallen; na-not; çaktaù-able; praëamen-offers obeisances; muhuù-again and again; utthaya-rising; utthäya-and rising; kartavyam-to be done; daëòavat-like a stick; praëipätanam-bowing down; iti-thus.

It is also said:

"One should not fall to the ground to offer obeisances only once. If one is able, one should offer obeisances in this way again and again. One should stand up, fall down like a stick, and stand up again. Thus one should offer obeisances."

Text 393

atha pradakñiëä

tataù pradakñiëäà kuryäd bhaktyä bhagavato hareùnämäni kértayan çaktau taà ca säñöäìga-vandanam

atha-now; pradakñiëä-circumambulation; tataù-then; pradakñiëäm-circumambulation; kuryät-should do; bhaktyä-with devotion; bhagavataù-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; hareù-Lord Kåñëa; nämäni-the names; kértayan-chanting; çaktau-in the ability; tam-to Him; ca-and; säñöäìga-vandanam-obeisances with eight parts of the body.

Circumambulation

e by again and again bowing down with eight parts of the body.

Text 394

pradakñiëä-saìkhyä

närasiàhe

ekaà caëòyäà ravau sapta tisro dadyäd vinäyakecatasraù keçave dadyät çive tv ardha-pradakñiëäm

pradakñiëä-of circumambulation; saìkhyä-the number; närasiàhe-in the Nåsiàha Puräëa; ekam-one; caëòyäm-Durgä; ravau-the sun; sapta-seven; tisraù-three; dadyät-should do; vinäyake-Gaëeça; catasraù-four; keçave-Kåñëa; dadyät-should do; çive-Çiva; tv-indeed; ardha-half; pradakñiëäm-circumambulation.

The Number of Circumambulations


"One should circumambulate Durgä one time, the sun-god seven times, Gaëeça three times, Lord Kåñëa four times, and Çiva half a time."

Text 395

atha pradakñiëä-mähätmyaà

värähe

pradakñiëäà ye kurvanti bhakti-yuktena cetasäna te yama-puraà yänti yänti puëya-kåtäà gatim

atha-now; pradakñiëä-mähätmyam-trhe glories of circumambulation; värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; pradakñiëäm-circumambulation; ye-who; kurvanti-do; bhakti-yuktena-with devotion; cetasä-in the heart; na-not; te-they; yama-puram-the city of yamaräja; yänti-go; yänti-go; puëya-kåtäm-of they who act piously; gatim-to the goal.

The Glories of Circumambulation


"They who, their hearts filled with devotion, circumambulate the Lord do not enter Yamaräja's city. They go to the place where the saintly devotees go.

Text 396

yas triù pradakñiëaà kuryät säñöäìgaka-praëämakamdaçäçvamedhasya phalaà präpnuyän nätra saàçayaù

yaù-one who; triù-thrice; pradakñiëam-circumambulation; kuryät-does; säñöäìgaka-praëämakam-with eight parts of the body; daçäçvamedhasya-of ten asvamedha-yajnas; phalam-the result; präpnuyän-attains; na-not; atra-here; saàçayaù-doubt.

"A person who, bowing down again and again with eight parts of his body, performs circumambulation, attains the result of ten açvamedha-yajïas. Of this there is no doubt."

Text 397


viñëor vimänaà yaù kuryät sakåd bhaktyä pradakñiëamaçvamedha-sahasrasya phalam äpnoti mänavaù

skände çré-brahma-närada-samväde-in the Skanda Puräëa, in a conversation of Brahmä and Närada; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; vimänam-the temple or chariot; yaù-who; kuryät-does; sakåt-once; bhaktyä-with devotion; pradakñiëam-circumambulation; açvamedha-sahasrasya-of a thousand asvamedha-yajnas; phalam-the result; äpnoti-attains; mänavaù-a person.


"A person who with devotion once circumambulates the temple or chariot of Lord Viñëu attains the result of a thousand açvamedha-yajïas."

Text 398

tatra cäturmäsya-mähätmye

catur-väraà bhramébhis tu jagat sarvaà caräcaramkräntaà bhavati viprägrya tat tértha-gamanädhikam

tatra-there; cäturmäsya-mähätmye-the glories of Caturmasya; catur-väram-four times; bhramébhiù-with circumambulation; tu-indeed; jagat-the universe; sarvam-entire; caräcaram-with moving and unmvoing beings; kräntam-passing through; bhavati-does; viprägrya-O best of brähmaëas; tat-that; tértha-gamanädhikam-better than pilgrimage.

In the Skanda Puräëa, Cäturmäsya-mähätmya, it is said:

"O best of brähmaëas, a person who four times circumambulates the Lord attains the result of circumambulating the entire universe filled with moving and unmoving beings. He attains a result better than going on all pilgrimages."

Text 399

tatraivänyatra

pradakñiëaà tu yaù kuryät harià bhaktyä samanvitaùhaàsa-yukta-vimänena viñëulokaà sa gacchati

tatra-there; eva-indeed; anyatra-in another place; pradakñiëam-circumambulation; tu-indeed; yaù-who; kuryät-does; harim-Lord Kåñëa; bhaktyä-with devotion; samanvitaù-with; haàsa-yukta-vimänena-flying on a swan; viñëulokam-to Viñëuloka; sa-he; gacchati-goes.

In the Cäturmäsya-mähätmya it is also said:

"A person who with devotion circumambulates Lord Hari flies on a swan to Lord Viñëu's world."

Text 400

närasiàhe

pradakñiëena caikena deva-devasya mandirekåtena yat phalaà nåëäà tac chånuñva nåpätmaja påthvé-pradakñiëa-phalaà yat tat präpya harià vrajet

närasiàhe-in the Nåsiàha Puräëa; pradakñiëena-circuma,bul;ation; ca-and; ekena-with one; deva-devasya-of the master of the demiogds; mandire-in ther temple; kåtena-done; yat-what; phalam-result; nåëäm-of the people; tac-that; chånuñva-please hear; nåpätmaja-O prince; påthvé-pradakñiëa-phalam-the result of circumambulating the earth; yat-what; tat-that; präpya-attaining; harim-to Lord Hari; vrajet-goes.


"O prince, please hear the result attained by a person who once circumambulates Lord Hari in His temple. Such a person attains the result of circumambulating the earth. He goes to Lord Hari."

Text 401

anyatra ca

evaà kåtvä tu kåñëasya yaù kuryäd dviù pradakñiëamsapta-dvépavaté-puëyaà labhate tu pade pade paöhan näma-sahasraà tu nämäny evätha kevalam

anyatra-in another place; ca-and; evam-thus; kåtvä-doing; tu-indeed; kåñëasya-of Lord Kåñëa; yaù-who; kuryät-does; dviù-two; pradakñiëam-circumambulations; sapta-dvépavaté-puëyam-the piety of circumambulating the earth with its seven continents; labhate-attains; tu-indeed; pade-step; pade-by step; paöhan-reciting; näma-sahasram-the thousand names of the Lord; tu-indeed; nämäni-names; eva-indeed; atha-then; kevalam-only.


"A person who, as he chants the holy names of Lord Kåñëa or the thousand names of the Lord, twice circumambulates Lord Kåñëa attains the result of circumambulating the earth or giving the earth in charity."

Text 402


viñëuà pradakñiëé-kurvan yas taträvartate punaùtad evävartanaà tasya punar nävartate bhave

hari-bhakti-sudhodaye-in the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya; viñëum-Lord Viñëu; pradakñiëé-kurvan-circumambulating; yaù-one who; tatra-there; ävartate-returns; punaù-again; tat-that; eva-indeed; ävartanam-return; tasya-of him; punaù-again; na-not; ävartate-returns; bhave-to the world of birth and death.


"A person who walks around Lord Viñëu and then returns to the place where he began guarantees that he will not return to the world of birth and death."

Text 403

båhan-näradéye yama-bhagératha-samväde

pradakñiëa-trayaà kuryäd yo viñëor manujeçvarasarva-päpa-vinirmukto devendratvaà samaçnute

båhan-näradéye yama-bhagératha-samväde-in the Närada Puräëa, in a conversation of Yamaräja and King Bhagératha; pradakñiëa-trayam-three circumambulations; kuryät-does; yaù-who; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; manujeçvara-O king; sarva-päpa-vinirmuktaù-freed from all sins; devendratvam-the post of Lord Indra; samaçnute-enjoys.

In the Närada Puräëa, Yamaräja tells King Bhagératha:

"O king, a person who three times circumambulates Lord Viñëu become free of all sins. He enjoys the post of King Indra."

Text 404

tatraiva pradakñiëa-mähätmye sudharmopäkhyänärambhe

bhaktyä kurvanti ye viñëoù pradakñiëa-catuñöayamte 'pi yänti paraà sthänaà sarva-lokottamottamam. iti.

tatra-there; eva-indeed; pradakñiëa-mähätmye-in the Pradaksina-mahatmya; sudharmopäkhyänärambhe-in the beginning of the story of Sudharma; bhaktyä-with devotion; kurvanti-do; ye-who; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; pradakñiëa-catuñöayam-four circumambulations; te-they; api-also; yänti-go; param-to the supreme; sthänam-abode; sarva-lokottamottamam.-above all the worlds; iti-thus.

In the Närada Puräëa, Pradakñiëa-mähätmya, in the beginning of Sudharma's story, it is said:

"They who with devotion circumambulate Lord Viñëu go to the supreme abode above all the worlds.

Text 405

tat khyätaà yat su-dharmasya pürvasmin gådhra-janmanikåñëa-pradakñiëäbhyäsän mahä-siddhir abhüd iti

tat-that; khyätam-fame; yat-ehat; su-dharmasya-of Sudharma; pürvasmin-prwviously; gådhra-janmani-in the birth as a vulture; kåñëa-pradakñiëäbhyäsät-by circumambulating Lord Kåñëa; mahä-siddhiù-great perfection; abhüt-was; iti-thus.

"Because in his previous life as a vulture he had circumambulated Lord Kåñëa, Sudharma attained perfection."

Text 406

atha pradakñiëäyäà niñiddhaà

viñëu-småtau

eka-hasta-praëämaç ca eka caiva pradakñiëäakäle darçanaà viñëor hanti puëyaà purä-kåtam

atha-now; pradakñiëäyäm-in circumambulation; niñiddham-forbidden; viñëu-småtau-in the Viñëu-småti; eka-hasta-with one hand; praëämaù-obeisances; ca-and; eka-one; ca-and; eva-indeed; pradakñiëä-circumambulation; akäle-at the wrong time; darçanam-seeing; viñëoù-of Lord Viiñëu; hanti-kills; puëyam-piety; purä-kåtam-of previous time.

Prohibitions in Circumambulation


"Offering obeisances with only one hand, circumambulating only once, and seeing the Deity of Lord Viñëu at the wrong time kill the pious merit earned before."

Text 407

kià ca

kåñëasya purato naiva süryasyaiva pradakñiëämkuryäd bhramarikä-rüpaà vaimukhyäpadanéà prabhoù

kià ca-furthermore; kåñëasya-of Lord k; purataù-in the presence; na-not; eva-indeed; süryasya-of the sun; eva-indeed; pradakñiëäm-circumambulation; kuryät-should do; bhramarikä-rüpam-circumambulation; vaimukhyäpadaném-turned from the face; prabhoù-of the Lord.

It is also said:

"A person who does not perform circumambulation before Lord Kåñëa, the supreme Deity of the sun, is not allowed to appear before the Lord."

Text 408

tathä coktaà

pradakñiëaà na kartavyaà vimukhatväc ca karaëät

tathä-so; ca-and; uktaàsaid; pradakñiëam-circumambulation; na-not; kartavyam-to be done; vimukhatvät-because of not facing; ca-and; karaëät-for the reason.

It is also said:

"During circumambulation one should not place one's back to the Lord."

Text 409

atha karmädy-arpaëaà

tataù çré-kåñëa-pädäbje däsyenaiva samarpayettribhir mantraiù sva-karmäëi sarväëy ätmänam apy atha

atha-now; karma-work; ädi-beginning with; arpaëam-offering; tataù-then; çré-kåñëa-pädäbje-to Lord Kåñëa's lotus feet; däsyena-by service; eva-indeed; samarpayet-should offer; tribhiù-with three; mantraiù-mantras; sva-karmäëi-own work; sarväëi-all; ätmänam-self; api-also; atha-then.

Giving the Results of Work and Other Offerings to the Lord

Thinking oneself a servant of Lord Kåñëa's lotus feet, and chanting three mantras, one should offer all the results of one's work to the Lord. One should also offer oneself to the Lord.

Text 410

mantraç ca

itaù pürvaà präëa-buddhi-dharmädhikarato jägrat-sväpna-suñupty-avasthäsu manasä väcä karmaëä hastäbhyäà padbhyäm udareëa çiñëä yat småtaà yad uktaà yat kåtaà tat sarvaà çré-kåñëärpaëaà bhavatu svähä. mäà madéyaà ca sakalaà haraye samarpayäméti. oà tat sat. iti.

mantraù-the mantra; ca-and; itaù-thus; pürvam-before; präëa-life; buddhi-intelligence; dharma-and religion; adhikarataù-being more; jägrat-waking; sväpna-dreaming; suñupti-and dreamless sleep; avasthäsu-in the conditions; manasä-with the mind; väcä-words; karmaëä-deeds; hastäbhyäm-with both hands; padbhyäm-with both feet; udareëa-with stomach; çiñëä-with genitals; yat-what; småtam-remembered; yat-what; uktam-said; yat-what; kåtam-done; tat-that;

sarvam-all; çré-kåñëärpaëam-an offering to Lord Kåñëa; bhavatu-may be; svähä-Svähä; mäm-to me; madéyam-mine; ca-and; sakalam-all; haraye-to Lord Hari; samarpayämi-I offer; iti-thus; oà tat sat-Oà Tat Sat; iti-thus.

The Mantra

"My life, intelligence, pious deeds, whatever in waking, dreaming, or dreamless sleep I have done with my mind, words, actions, hands, feet, stomach, and genitals, and everything I have remembered, spoken, and done is now offered to Lord Kåñëa. Svähä. I now offer myself and everything I possess to Lord Hari. Oà Tat Sat."

Text 411

atha tatra karmärpaëaà

brhan-näradéye

virägé cet karma-phale na kiïcid api kärayetarpayet sva-kåtaà karma préyatäm iti me hariù

atha-now; tatra-there; karmärpaëam-offering work; brhan-näradéye-in the Narada Puräëa; virägé-renounced; cet-if; karma-of work; phale-in the result; na-not; kiïcit-anything; api-even; kärayet-may do; arpayet-may iffer; sva-kåtam-personally done; karma-work; préyatäm-may be pleased; iti-thus; me-with me; hariù-Lord Kåñëa.

Offering the Results of One's Work


"Even if a person is renounced and does not engage in fruitive work, he may still offer what he does to the Lord and pray, `May Lord Kåñëa have mercy on me'."

Text 412

ata eva kürma-puräëe

préëatu bhagavän éçaù karmaëänena çaçvataùkaroti satataà buddhyä brahmärpaëam idaà param

ata eva-therefore; kürma-puräëe-in the Kürma Puräëa; préëatu-may be pleased; bhagavän-the Lord; éçaù-the Supreme; karmaëä-by work; anena-this; çaçvataù-always; karoti-soes; satatam-always; buddhyä-with intelligence; brahmärpaëam-an offering to the Supreme; idam-this; param-then.


"May the Supreme Personality of Godhead always be pleased with my work. Because He gives intelligence it is He who does everything. This work is therefore offered to Him.

Text 413

yad vä phalänäà sannyäsaà prakuryät parameçvarekarmaëäm etad apy ähur brahmärpaëam anuttamam

yat-what; vä-or; phalänäm-of the results; sannyäsäm-renunciation; prakuryät-should do; parameçvare-to the Supreme Personality of Godhead; karmaëäm-of work; etat-this; api-also; ähuù-said; brahmärpaëam-an offering to the Supreme; anuttamam-peerless.

"In this way one should renounce the fruits of one's work, offering them to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. the sages say this is the best offering to the Supreme4."

Text 414

atha karmärpaëa-vidhiù

dakñeëa päëinärghya-sthaà gåhétvä cülukodakamnidhäya kåñëa-pädäbja- samépe prärthayed idam

atha-now; karmärpaëa-vidhiù-the way to offer one;s work; dakñeëa-with the right; päëinä-hand; arghya-stham-arghya; gåhétvä-taking; cülukodakam-a handful of water; nidhäya-placing; kåñëa-pädäbja-samépe-at Lord Kåñëa's lotus feet; prärthayet-should pray; idam-this.

The Way to Offer the Results of One's Work

In one;s right hand one should take a palmful of water, place it near Lord Kåñëa's lotus feet, and recite the following prayer.

Text 415

päda-traya-kramäkräntä trailokeçvara keçavatvat-prasädäd idaà toyaà pädyaà te 'stu janärdana

päda-traya-kramäkräntä-O Lord who covered the universe in three steps; trailokeçvara-O master of the three worlds; keçava-O Kåñëa; tvat-of You; prasädät-by mercy; idam-this; toyam-water; pädyam-for washing the feet; te-of You; astu-may be; janärdana-O Lord who rescues the devotees from troubles and sufferings.

"O Lord Keçava, O master of the three worlds, O Lord who traversed the universe in three steps, O Lord who rescues the devotees from dangers and sufferings, by Your mercy may this water be accepted to wash Your feet."

Text 416

atha karmärpaëa-mähätmyaà

båhan-näradéye

para-loka-phala-prepsuù kuryät karmäëy atandritaùharer nivedayet täni tat sarvaà tv akñayaà bhavet

result of the supreme world; prepsuù-desiring; kuryät-should do; karmäëi-work; atandritaù-without fatigue; hareù-to Lord Kåñëa; nivedayet-should offer; täni-that; tat-that; sarvam-all; tv-indeed; akñayam-eternal; bhavet-may become.

The Glories of Offering the Results of One's Work to the Lord


"A person who desires to attain the spiritual world should work tirelessly on the Lord's behalf. He should offer everything to the Lord and everything will bring an eternal result."

Text 417

ata eva näräyaëa-vyüha-stave

kåñëärpita-phaläù kåñëaà sva-dharmeëa yajanti yeviñëu-bhakty-arthino dhanyäs tebhyo 'péha namo namaù

ata eva-therefore; näräyaëa-vyüha-stave-in the Näräyaëa-vyüha-stava;kåñëärpita-phaläù kåñëam-the results offered to Çré Kåñëa; sva-dharmeëa-by one;s own nature; yajanti-worship; ye-who; viñëu-bhakty-arthinaù-desiring devotional service to Lord Viñëu; dhanyäù-fortunate; tebhyaù-to them; api-also; iha-here; namo namaù-obeisances.

In the Näräyaëa-vyüha-stava it is said:

"I offer my respectful obeisances to they who, desiring to attain pure devotion to Lord Kåñëa, worship Him by following their own religious duties and offering all the results of their work to Him."

Text 418

atha svärpaëa-vidhiù

ahaà bhagavato 'àço 'smi sadä däso 'smi sarvathätat-kåpäpekñako nityaà ity ätmänaà samarpayet

atha-now; svärpaëa-vidhiù-the way to offer oneself; aham-I; bhagavataù-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; aàçaù-par and parcel; asmi-I am; sadä-eternally; däsaù-servant; asmi-I am; sarvathä-in all ways; tat-kåpäpekñakaù-dependent on His mercy; nityam-eternally; iti-thus; ätmänam-myself; samarpayet-I offer.

The Way to Offer Oneself to the Lord

"I am part and parcel of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. I am His servant eternally. I am always dependent on His mercy." Saying this, one should offer oneself to the Lord.

Text 419

tathä coktaà çré-saìkaräcarya-padaiù

saty api bhedägame nätha tavähaà na mämakénas tvamsamudro hi taraìgaù kvacana samudro na taraìgaù

tathä-so; ca-and; uktam-said; çré-saìkaräcarya-padaiù-by AkrüraÇaìkaracarya; sati-in the Supreme; api-even; bheda-difference; ägame-in the arrival; nätha-O Lord; tava-of You; aham-i; na-not; mämakénaù-mine; tvam-You; samudraù-an ocean; hi-indeed; taraìgaù-wave; kvacana-somwhere; samudraù-oceasn; na-not; taraìgaù-wave.

Çrépada Çaìkaräcärya explains:

"O Lord, when we meet I will be Your property, but You will not be my property. A wave is part of the ocean, but the ocean is not part of the wave."


Living in the material world, one is separated from the Supreme Lord. When a person becomes enlightened with spiritual knowledge he is not longer separated from the Lord. This verse gives a good example to describe the truth that the living entities are simultaneously one and different from the Lord.

Text 420

athätmärpaëa-mähätmyaà

saptama-skändhe çré-prahlädoktau

dharmärtha-kämä iti yo 'bhihitäs tri-varga ékñä trayé naya-damau vividha ca värtämanye tad etad akhilaà nigamasya satyaà svätmärpaëaà sva-suhådaù paramasya puàsaù

atha-now; ätmärpaëa-mähätmyam-the glories of offering oneself; saptama-skändhe-in the Seventh Canto; çré-prahlädoktau-in the words of Çré Prahlada; dharma-religion; artha-economic development; kämä-regulated sense gratification; iti-thus; yaù-which; abhihitäù-prescribed; tri-varga-the group of three; ékñä-self realization; trayé-the Vedic ritualistic ceremonies; naya-logic; damau-and the science of law and order; vividha-varieties of ; ca-also; värtä-occupational duties, or one;s livelihood; manye-I consider; tat-them; etat-these; akhilam-all; nigamasya-of the Vedas; satyam-truth; svätmärpaëam-the full surrendering of one's self; sva-suhådaù-unto the supreme friend; paramasya-the ultimate; puàsaù-pesonality.

The Glories of Offering Oneself to the Lord

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (7.6.26) Prahläda Mahäräja explains:

"Religion, economic development, and sense gratification: these are described in the Vedas as tri-varga, or three ways to salvation. Within these three categories are education and self realization, ritualistic ceremonies performed according to Vedic injunction, logic, the science of law and order, and the various means of earning one's livelihood. These are the external subject matters of study in the Vedas, and therefore I consider them material. However, I consider surrender to the lotus feet of Lord Viñëu to be transcendental."*

Text 421

ekädaçe çré-bhagavad-uddhava-samväde

martyo yadä tyakta-samasta-karmä niveditätmä vicikérñito metadämåtatvaà pratipadyamäno mayätma-bhüyäya ca kalpate vai

ekädaçe-in the eleventh canto; çré-bhagavad-uddhava-samväde-in a conversation of Uddhava and the Supreme Personality of Godhead; martyaù-the living entity sibjected to birth and death; yadä-as soon as; tyakta-given up; samasta-all; karmä-fruitive activities; niveditätmä-a fully surrendered soul; vicikérñitaù-desired to act; me-by me; tadä-at that time; amåtatvam-immortality; pratipadyamänaù-attaining; mayä-with Me; ätma-bhüyäya-for becoming of a similar nature; ca-also; kalpate-is eligible; vai-certainly.

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (11.29.34) the Supreme Personality of Godhead tells Uddhava:

"The living entity who is subjected to birth and death attains immortality when he gives up all material activities, dedicates his life to the execution of My order, and acts according to My directions. In this way he becomes fit to enjoy the spiritual bliss derived from exchanging loving mellows with Me."*

Text 422

atha japaù

japasya purato kåtvä präëäyäma-trayaà budhaùmanträrtha-småti-pürvaà ca japed añöottaraà çatam mülaà lekhyena vidhinä sadaiva japa-mälayä

atha-now; japaù-japa; japasya-of japa; purataù-in the presence; kåtvä-doing; präëäyäma-trayam-three pranayamas; budhaù-wise; manträrtha-småti-pürvam-remembrance of the mantra's meaning; ca-and; japet-should chant; añöottaraà çatam-108; mülam-mula; lekhyena-what is written; vidhinä-by rules; sadä-always; eva-indeed; japa-mälayä-of a garland of japa.

Japa

After performing three präëäyäamas and remembering the purpose of the mantra, one should, following the regulations written in scripture, chant one's japa mantra 108 times regularly.

Text 423

çaktau 'ñöädhika-sähasraà japet taà cärpayan japampräëäyämaç ca kåtvä trén dadyät kåñëa-kare jalam

çaktau-in ability; añöädhika-sähasram-1,008; japet-should chant japa; tam-that; ca-and; arpayan-offering; japam-japa; präëäyämaù-pranayama; ca-and; kåtvä-doing; trén-three; dadyät-should give; kåñëa-kare-in Lord Kåñëa's hand; jalam-water.

If one is able, one should chant the japa mantra 1,008 times. After performing three präëäyämas one should offer water to Lord Kåñëa's hand.

Text 424

tatra cäyaà mantraù

guhyäti-guhya-goptä tvaà gåhäëäsmat-kåtaà japamsiddhir bhavatu me deva tvat-prasädät tvayi sthite. iti.

tatra-there; ca-and; ayam-this; mantraù-mantra; guhyäti-guhya-goptä-the protector of the greatest secrets; tvam-You; gåhäëa-please accept; äsmat-by us; kåtam-done; japam-japa; siddhiù-perfection; bhavatu-may be; me-of me; deva-O Lord; tvat-prasädät-by Your mercy; tvayi-in You; sthite-situated; iti-thus.

That Mantra

"O Lord, You are the protector of the most confidential secrets. Please accept my offering of japa. O Lord, by Your mercy may I attain spiritual perfection."

Text 425

japa-prakäro yo 'pekñyo mälädi-niyamätmakaù

puraçcarya-prasaìge tu sa vilikhiñyate 'grataù

japa-of japa; prakäraù-the method; yaù-which; apekñyaù-to be considered; mälädi-niyamätmakaù-a prescribed number of chantings; puraçcarya-prasaìge-in relation to purascarana; tu-indeed; sa-that; vilikhiñyate-will be written; agrataù-in the beginning.

The method one should adopt for chanting japa will be described later in this book.

Text 426

arpitaà taà ca saïcintya svi-kåtaà prabhunäkhilampunaù stutvä yatha-çakti praëamya prärthayed imam

arpitam-offered; tam-that; ca-and; saïcintya-thinking; svi-kåtam-accepted; prabhunä-by the Lord; akhilam-all; punaù-again; stutvä-praying; yatha-çakti-as one is able; praëamya-bowing down; prärthayet-should offer prayers; imam-this.

When one has offered his chanting of japa and one thinks the Lord has accepted it all, then, as far as one is able, one should bow down and recite prayers.

Text 427

atha prärthanam

ägame

mantra-hénaà kriyä-hénaà bhakti-hénaà janärdanayat püjitaà mayä deva paripürëaà tad astu me

atha-now; prärthanam-prayers; ägame-in the Agama-sastra; mantra-hénam-without mantras; kriyä-hénam-without proper actions; bhakti-devotion; hénam-without; janärdana-O Lord Kåñëa; yat-what; püjitam-worshiped; mayä-by me; deva-O Lord; paripürëam-perfect; tat-that; astu-may be; me-of me.

Prayers


"O Lord Kåñëa, may my worship become perfect, even though it is offered without proper actions, proper mantras, or real devotion."

Text 428

kià ca

yad dattaà bhakti-mätreëa patraà puñpaà phalaà jalamäveditaà nivedyaà tu tad gåhäëänukampayä

kià ca-furthermore; yat-what; dattam-offered; bhakti-mätreëa-simply with devotion; patram-leaf; puñpam-flower; phalam-fruit; jalam-water; äveditam-offered; nivedyam-offering; tu-indeed; tat-that; gåhäëa-please accept; anukampayä-with mercy.

It is also said:

"O Lord, please accept this fruit, leaf, flower, and water that I have offered with love.

Text 429

vidhi-hénaà mantra-hénaà yat kiïcid upapäditamkriyä-mantra-vihénaà vä tat sarvaà kñantum arhasi

vidhi-hénam-without rules; mantra-hénam-without mantras; yat-what; kiïcit-something; upapäditam-done; kriyä-mantra-vihénam-without mantras or proper actions; vä-or; tat-that; sarvam-all; kñantum-to forgive; arhasi-are worthy.

"Please forgive all that I have done without proper mantras or proper actions."

Text 430

kià ca

ajïänäd athavä jïänäd açubhaà yan mayä kåtamkñantum arhasi tat sarvaà däsyenaiva gåhäëa mäm

kià ca-furthermore; ajïänät-out of ignorance; athavä-or; jïänät-with knowledge; açubham-inauspicious; yan-what; mayä-by me; kåtam-done; kñantum-to forgive; arhasi-are worthy; tat-that; sarvam-all; däsyena-by service; eva-indeed; gåhäëa-please accept; mäm-me.

It is also said:

"Please forgive whatever wrong I have done, either knowingly or unknowingly. Please accept me as Your servant.

Text 431

sthitiù sevä gatir yäträ småtiç cintä stutir vacaùbhüyät sarvätmanä viñëo madéyaà tvayi ceñöitam

sthitiù-situation; sevä-service; gatiù-goal; yäträ-travel; småtiù-memory; cintä-meditation; stutiù-prayers; vacaù-words; bhüyät-may be; sarvätmanä-with the entire heart; viñëaù-O Lord Viñëu; madéyam-my; tvayi-in You; ceñöitam-deeds.

"My place, service, goal, travel, memory, thought, prayers, words, and everything I do, O Lord Viñëu, I offer to You with all my heart."

Text 432

api ca

kåñëa räma mukunda vämana väsudeva jagad-guro matsya kacchapa närasiàha varäha räghava pähi mäm

api-also; ca-and; kåñëa-O Kåñëa; räma-O Räma; mukunda-O Mukunda; vämana-O Vämana; väsudeva-O Väsudeva; jagad-guraù-O master of the worlds; matsya-O Matsya; kacchapa-O Kürma; närasiàha-O Nåsiàha; varäha-O Varäha; räghava-O Rämacandra; pähi-please protect; mäm-me.

It is also said:

"O Kåñëa, O Räma, O Mukunda, O Vämana, O Väsudeva, O master of the worlds, O Matsya, O Kürma, O Nåsiàha, O Varäha, O Rämacandra, please protect me.

Text 433

deva-dänava-näradädi-vandya dayä-nidhe devaké-suta dehi me tava päda-bhaktim acaïcaläm

deva-dänava-näradädi-vandya-worshiped by the devas and danavas headed by Narada; dayä-nidhe-O ocean of mercy; devaké-suta-O son of Devaké; dehi-please give; me-to me; tava-of You; päda-bhaktim-devotion for the feet; acaïcaläm-unwavering.

"O Lord worshiped by the devas and dänavas headed by Närada, O ocean of mercy, O son of Devaké, please give me unwavering devotion for Your feet."

Text 434

çré-viñëu-puräëe

nätha yoëi-sahasreñu yeñu yeñu vrajämy ahamteñu teñv acyutä bhaktir acyutästu sadä tvayi

çré-viñëu-puräëe-in the Viñëu Puräëa; nätha-O Lord; yoëi-sahasreñu-in thousands of wombs; yeñu yeñu-in whatever; vrajämi-I go; aham-I; teñu teñu-in them; acyutä-unwavering; bhaktiù-devotion; acyutä-O infallible one; astu-may be; sadä-always; tvayi-for You.


"O infallible Lord, in whatever thousands of births I will take in this world may I always have unflinching devotion for You.

Text 435

yä prétir avivekänäà viñayeñv anapäyinétväm anusmarataù sä me hådayän mäpasarpatu

yä-what; prétiù-happiness; avivekänäm-of the fools; viñayeñv-in the objects of the material senses; anapäyiné-following; tvam-You; anusmarataù-by remembering; sä-that; me-of me; hådayän-from the heart; mä-may not; apasarpatu-depart.

"O Lord, as the fools love material sense objects, let me always love and remember You. May love for You never leave my heart."


If the last word is divided "mäpa sarpatu", the word "mä" may mean "the goddess of fortune, and “pa" may mean "husband". Thus the word mäpa" means "O husband of the goddess of fortune". Interpreted in this way the verse means:

"O husband of the goddess of fortune, the fools love material sense objects. Please let me always remember You. May the love for material sense objects leave my heart."

Text 436

päëòava-gétäyäà

kéöeñu pakñiñu mågeñu sarésåpeñu rakñaù-piçäcä-manujeñv api yatra tatrajätasya me bhavatu keçava te prasädät tvayy eva bhaktir atulä vyäbhicäriëé ca

päëòava-gétäyäm-in the Päëòava-gétä; kéöeñu-in insects and worms; pakñiñu-in birds; mågeñu-in beasts; sarésåpeñu-in snakes; rakñaù-in raksasas; piçäcä-witches; manujeñv-human beings; api-and; yatra-where; tatra-there; jätasya-born; me-of me; bhavatu-may be; keçava-O Keçava; te-of You; prasädät-by the mercy; tvayi-in You; eva-indeed; bhaktiù-devotion; atulä-peerless; vyäbhicäriëé-unwavering; ca-and.

In the Päëòava-gétä it is said:

"O Lord Keçava, wherever I take birth, whether as a worm, an insect, a beast, a snake, a demon, a witch, or a human being, may I, by Your mercy, always have unflinching devotion to You."

Text 437

pädme

yuvaténäà yathä yuni yunäà ca yuvatau yathämano 'bhiramate tadvan mano me ramatäà tvayi

pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; yuvaténäm-of young girls; yathä-as; yuni-fro a young boy; yunäm-of young boys; ca-and; yuvatau-for a young girl; yathä-as; manaù-mind; abhiramate-takes pleasure; tadvan-so; manaù-mind; me-of me; ramatäm-may take pleasure; tvayi-in You.


"O my Lord, I know that young girls have natural affection for young boys, and that young boys have natural affection for young girls. I am praying at Your lotus feet that my mind may become attracted unto You in the same spontaneous way."*

Text 438

athäparädha-kñamärpaëaà

tato 'parädhän çré-kåñëaà kñamä-çélaà kñamäpayetsa-käku kértayan çlokän uttamän sampradäyikän

atha-now; aparädha-offenses; kñamä-forgiveness; arpaëam-offering; tataù-then; aparädhän-offenses; çré-kåñëam-to Lord Kåñëa; kñamä-frgiveness; çélam-by nature; kñamäpayet-may forgive; sa-käku-with plaintive words; kértayan-glorifying; çlokän-verses; uttamän-peerless; sampradäyikän-from the sampradaya.

The Forgiveness of Offenses

Then, glorifying Him with peerless prayers handed down in the disciplic succession, with words filled with emotion

one shou

Text 439

tathä hi

aparädha-sahasräëi kriyante 'har-niçaà mayädäso 'ham iti mäà matvä kñamasva madhusüdana

tathä hi-furthermore; aparädha-sahasräëi-thousands of offesnes; kriyante-are done; ahaù-day; niçam-and night; mayä-by me; däsaù-servant; aham-I; iti-thus; mäm-me; matvä-considering; kñamasva-please forgive; madhusüdana-O Kåñëa.

It is said:

"Day and night I commit thousands of offenses. O Lord Madhusüdana, please think of me as Your servant and forgive me."

Text 440

kià ca

pratijïä tava govinda na me bhaktaù praëaçyatiiti saàsrtya saàsmåtya präëän sandhärayämy aham

kià ca-furthermore; pratijïä-promise; tava-of You; govinda-O Lord Kåñëa; na-not; me-of Me; bhaktaù-the devotee; praëaçyati-pewrishes; iti-this; saàsrtya-remembering; saàsmåtya-and remem,bering; präëän-life; sandhärayämi-I maintain; aham-I.

It is also said:

"`My devotee will never perish.' O Lord Govinda, that was Your promise. I remember that promise again and again. That is how I stay alive."

Text 441

athäparädhäù

ägame

yänair vä pädukair väpi gamanaà bhagavad-gåhedevotsavädy-asevä ca apraëämas tvad-agrataù

atha-now; aparädhäù-offenses; ägame-in the Agama-sastra; yänaiù-by vehicles; vä-or; pädukaiù-with shoes; vä-or; api-also; gamanam-going; bhagavad-gåhe-in the temple of the Lord; deva-of the Lord; utsava-festivals; ädi-beginning with; asevä-without service; ca-and; apraëämaù-without bowing down; tvad-agrataù-in Your presence.

Offenses


"1. One should not enter the temple of the Deity in a car or palanquin or with shoes on the feet, 2. One should not fail

to observe the various festivals for the pleasure of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, such as Janmäñöamé and Rathayäträ, 3. One should not avoid bowing down before the Deity, . . .*

Text 442

ucchiñöe väthaväçauce bhagavad-darçanädikameka-hasta-praëämaç ca tat-purastät pradakñiëam

ucchiñöe-in eating remnants; vä-or; athavä-or; açauce-uncelan; bhagavad-darçanädikam-beginning with seeing the Lord; eka-hasta-with one hand; praëämaù-bowing; ca-and; tat-purastät-before Him; pradakñiëam-circumambulating.

. . . 4. One should not enter the temple to worship the Lord without having washed one's hands and feet after eating, 5. one should not enter the temple in a contaminated state, (According to Vedic scripture, if someone dies in the family the whole family becomes contaminated for some time, according to its status. For example, if the family is brähmaëa their contamination period is twelve days, for the ksatriyas and vaiçyas it is fifteen days, and for the çüdras thirty days.) 6. One should not bow down on one hand, 7. One should not circumambulate in front of Çré Kåñëa, (the process of circumambulating the temple is that one should begin circumambulating from the Deity's right-hand side of the temple and come round. Such circumambulation should be performed outside the temple structure at least three times daily.) . . .*

Text 443

päda-prasäraëaà cägre tathä paryaìka-bandhanamçayanaà bhakñaëaà väpi mithyä-bhäñaëam eva ca

päda-prasäraëam-spreading the feet; ca-and; agre-in the presence; tathä-so; paryaìka-bandhanam-holding on the seat; çayanam-lying down; bhakñaëam-eating; vä-or; api-also; mithyä-bhäñaëam-speaking lies; eva-indeed; ca-and.

. . . 8. One should not spread his legs before the Deity, 9. One should not sit before the Deity holding the ankles, elbows, or knees with one's hands, 10. One should not lie down before the Deity of Kåñëa, 11. One should not accept prasäda before the Deity, 12. One should never speak a lie before the Deity, . . .*

Text 444

uccair bhäñä mitho jalpo rodanäni ca vigrahaùnigrahänugrahau caiva nåñu ca krüra-bhäñaëam

uccaiù-loudly; bhäñä-talking; mithaù-together; jalpaù-talking; rodanäni-crying out; ca-and; vigrahaù-fighting; nigraha-rebuking; anugrahau-being kind; ca-and; eva-certainly; nåñu-to the people; ca-and; krüra-bhäñaëam-speaking harshly.

. . . 13. One should not talk very loudly before the Deity, 14. One should not talk with others before the Deity, 15. One should not cry or howl before the Deity, 16. One should not quarrel or fight before the Deity, 17. One should not chastise anyone before the Deity, 18. One should not be charitable to beggars before the Deity, 19. One should not speak very harshly to others before the Deity, . . .*

Text 445

kambalävaraëaà caiva para-nindä para-stutiùaçléla-bhäñaëaà caiva

adho-väyu-vimokñaëam

kambalävaraëam-a fur blanket; ca-and; eva-indeed; para-nindä-rebuking others; para-stutiù-praising others; açléla-bhäñaëam-speaking ill names; ca-and; eva-indeed; adho-väyu-vimokñaëam-passing air.

. . . 20. One should not wear a fur blanket before the Deity, 21. One should not eulogize or praise anyone before the Deity, 22. One should not speak any ill names before the Deity, 23. One should not pass air before the Deity, . . .*

Text 446

çaktau gauëopacäraç ca anivedita-bhakñaëamtat-tat-kälodbhavänäà ca phalädénäm anarpaëam

çaktau-in ability; gauëopacäraù-worshiping; ca-and; anivedita-waht is not offered to the Deity; bhakñaëam-eating; tat-tat-käla-various times; udbhavänäm-grown; ca-and; phalädénäm-fruits and other things; anarpaëam-not offering.

. . . 24. One should not fail to worship the Deity according to one's means, (In the Bhagavad-gétä it is stated that the Lord is satisfied if some devotee offers Him a leaf or a little water. This formula prescribed by the Lord is universally applicable, even for the poorest man. But that does not mean that one who has sufficient means to worship the Lord very nicely should also adopt this method and try to satisfy the Lord simply by offering water and a leaf. If he has sufficient means, he should offer nice decorations, nice flowers, and nice foodstuffs and observe all ceremonies. It is not that one should try to satisfy the Supreme Lord with a little water and a leaf, and for himself spend all his money in sense gratification.), 25. One should not eat anything that is not offered first to Kåñëa, 26. One should not fail to offer fresh fruit and grains to Kåñëa, according to the season, . . . *

Text 447

viniyuktävaçiñöasya pradänaà vyaïjanädikepåñöhé-kåtväsanaà caiva pareñäm abhivädanam

viniyuktävaçiñöasya-of what is not offered; pradänam-offering; vyaïjanädike-foodstuffs; påñöhé-kåtväsanam-sitting by placing the back; ca-and; eva-certainly; pareñäm-of superiors; abhivädanam-obeisances.

. . . 27. After food has been cooked, no one should be offered any foodstuff unless it is first offered to the Deity, 28. One should not sit with his back toward the Deity, . . . *

Text 448

gurau maunaà nija-stotraà devatä-nindanaà tathäaparädhäs tathä viñëor dva-triàçat parikértitäù

gurau-before the spiritual master; maunam-silence; nija-stotram-praising oneself; devatä-nindanam-insulting the demigods; tathä-so; aparädhäù-offenses; tathä-so; viñëoù-of Lord Viñnu; dva-triàçat-32; parikértitäù-said.

. . . 29. One should not offer obeisances silently to the spiritual master, or in other words, one should recite aloud the prayers to the spiritual master while offering obeisances, 30. One should not fail to offer some praise in the presence of the spiritual master, 31. One should not praise himself before the spiritual master, 32. One should not deride the demigods before the Deity.* These are thirty-two offenses to Lord Viñëu."

Text 449

värähe

dva-triàçad aparädhä ye kértyante vasudhe mayävaiñëavena sadä te tu varjanéyäù prayatnataù

värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; dva-triàçat-32; aparädhä-offenses; ye-which; kértyante-said; vasudhe-O earth; mayä-by Me; vaiñëavena-by a Vaiñëava; sadä-always; te-they; tu-indeed; varjanéyäù-to be avoided; prayatnataù-carefully.

In the Varäha Puräëa the Supreme Personality of Godhead says:

"O earth-goddess, now I will describe to you thirty-two offenses that the Vaiñëavas should avoid with care.

Text 450

ye vai na varjayanty etän aparädhän mayoditänsarva-dharma-paribhrañöäù pacyante narake ciram

ye-who; vai-indeen; na-not; varjayanti-avoid; etän-these; aparädhän-offenses; mayä-by me; uditän-spoken; sarva-all; dharma-religion; paribhrañöäù-broken; pacyante-burn; narake-in hell; ciram-for a long time.

"They who do not avoid these offenses I will describe will burn in hell for a long time.

Texts 451-469

räjänna-bhakñaëaà caivaà äpady api bhayävahamdhväntägäre hareù sparçaù paraà su-kåta-näçanaù

tathaiva vidhim ullaìghya sahasä sparçanaà hareùdvärodghäöo vinä vädyaà kroòa-mäàsa-nivedanam

pädhukäbhyäà tathä viñëor mandiräyopasarpaëamkukkurocchiñöa-kalanaà mauna-bhaìgo 'cyutärcane

tathä püjana-käle ca viò-utsargäya sarpaëamçraddhädikam akåtvä ca navännasya ca bhakñaëam

adattvä gandha-mälyädi dhüpanaà madhughätinaùakarmaëy aprasünena püjanaà ca hares tathä

akåtvä daëòa-käñöhaà ca kåtvä nidhüvanaà tathäspåñövä rajasvaläà dépaà

tathä måtakam eva ca

raktaà nélam adhautaà ca pärakyaà malinaà paöamparidhäya måtaà dåñövä vimucyäpäna-märutam

krodhaà kåtvä çmaçänaà ca gatvä bhütväpy ajérëa-bhukbhakñayitvä kroda-mäàsaà piëyäkaà jala-pädakam

tathä kusumbha-çäkaà ca tailäbhyaìgaà vidhäya cahareù sparço hareù karma- käraëaà pätakävaham

kià ca tatraiva

mama çästraà bahiñ-kåtya asmäkaà yaù prapadyatemuktvä ca mama çästräëi çästram anyat prabhäñate

madyapas tu samäsädya praviçed bhavanaà mama

yo me kusumbha-çäkena präpaëaà kurute naraù

api ca

mama dåñöer abhimukhaà tämbülaà cärcayet tu yaùkurüvaka-paläça-sthaiù puñpaiù kuryän mamärcanam

mamärcäm äsure käle yaù karoti vimüòha-dhéùpéöhäsanopaviñöo yaù püjayed vä niräsanaù

väma-hastena mäà dhåtvä snäpayed vä vimüòha-dhéùpüjä paryuñitaiù puñpaiù ñöhévanaà garva-kalpanam

tiryak-puëòra-dharo bhütvä yaù karoti mamärcanamyäcitaiù patra-puñpadyair yaù karoti mamärcanam

aprakñälita-pädo yaù praviçen mama mandiramavaiñëavasya pakvännaà yo mahyaà vinivedayet

avaiñëaveñu paçyatsu mama püjäà karoti yaùapüjayitvä vighneçaà sambhäñya ca kapälinam

naraù püjäà tu yaù kuryät snäpanaà ca nakhämbhasäamauné gharma-liptäìgo

mama püjäà karoti yaù

räjänna-bhakñaëam-eating rajanna; ca-and; evam-thus; äpady-in calamity; api-also; bhayävaham-bringing fear; dhväntägäre-in a dark room; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; sparçaù-touchinng; param-then; su-kåta-näçanaù-self-destructive; tathä-so; eva-indeed; vidhim-rules; ullaìghya-jumping over; sahasä-suddenly; sparçanam-touching; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; dvärodghäöaù-coming to the door; vinä-without; vädyam-sound; kroòa-mäàsa-nivedanam-offering kroda-mamsa; pädhukäbhyäm-with shoes; tathä-so; viñëoù-of Lord Viñnu; mandiräya-to the temple; upasarpaëam-going; kukkurocchiñöa-kalanam-seen by dogs; mauna-bhaìgaù-breaking the siulence; acyuta-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; arcane-in the worship; tathä-so; püjana-käle-at the time of worship; ca-and; viò-utsargäya-passing stool; sarpaëam-going; çraddhädikam-beginning with faith; akåtvä-not doing; ca-and; navännasya-of new grains; ca-and; bhakñaëam-eating; adattvä-not offering; gandha-mälyädi-fragrant flowers; dhüpanam-incense; madhughätinaù-to Lord Kåñëa; akarmaëy-not done; aprasünena-without a flower; püjanam-worship; ca-and; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; tathä-so; akåtvä-not doing; daëòa-käñöham-a wooden stick; ca-and; kåtvä-doing; nidhüvanam-sex; tathä-so; spåñövä-touching; rajasvaläm-a woman in her menstrual periood; dépam-lamp; tathä-so; måtakam-corpse; eva-indeed; ca-and; raktam-red; nélam-blue; adhautam-unwashed; ca-and; pärakyam-of another; malinam-dirty; paöam-garment; paridhäya-wearing; måtam-corspe; dåñövä-seeing; vimucyäpäna-märutam-passing air; krodham-anger; kåtvä-doing; çmaçänam-crematorium; ca-and; gatvä-going; bhütvä-becoming; api-also; ajérëa-bhuk-eating 3waht isn not offered; bhakñayitvä-feedintg; kroda-mäàsam-kroda-mamsa; piëyäkam-pinyaka; jala-pädakam-jala-padaka; tathä-so; kusumbha-çäkam-kusumbha-saka; ca-and; tailäbhyaìgam-anointed with oil; vidhäya-placing; ca-and; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; sparçaù-touching; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; karma-work; käraëam-cause; pätakävaham-bringing sin; kià ca-furthewrmore; tatra-there; eva-indeed; mama-of Me; çästram-scripture; bahiñ-kåtya-outside; asmäkam-of us; yaù-who; prapadyate-attaining; muktvä-leaving; ca-and; mama-of Me; çästräëi-scriptires; çästram-scripture; anyat-qanother; prabhäñate-speaks; madyapaù-chewing betelnuts; tu-indeed; samäsädya-attaining; praviçet-enters; bhavanam-temple; mama-of Me; yaù-who; me-of Me; kusumbha-çäkena präpaëam-a flower in an unclean pot; kurute-does; naraù-person; api ca-also; mama-of Me; dåñöeù-in the sight; abhimukham-facingg; tämbülam-betelnuts; cärcayet-should chew; tu-indeed; yaù-who; kurüvaka-paläça-sthaiù-kept in an unclean pot; puñpaiù-with flowers; kuryän-should do; mama-of Me; arcanam-worship; mama-of Me; ärcäm-worship; äsure-demonic; käle-time; yaù-who; karoti-does; vimüòha-dhéù-fool; péöhäsanopaviñöaù-sitting down; yaù-who; püjayet-worships; vä-or; niräsanaù-without a sitting place; väma-hastena-with the left hand; mäm-Me; dhåtvä-holding; snäpayet-should bathe; vä-or; vimüòha-dhéù-fool; püjä-worship; paryuñitaiù-bad; puñpaiù-with flowers; ñöhévanam-spitting; garva-kalpanam-bragging; tiryak-puëòra-dharaù-wearing th3e wrong tilaka; bhütvä-being; yaù-who; karoti-does; mama-of Me; arcanam-worship; yäcitaiù-praying; patra-puñpadyaiù-with flowers, leaves, and other offerings; yaù-who; karoti-does; mama-of Me; arcanam-the worship; aprakñälita-unwashed; pädaù-feet; yaù-who; praviçen-enters; mama-My; mandiram-temple; avaiñëavasya-of one who is not a Vaiñëava; pakvä-cooked; annam-food; yaù-one who; mahyam-to Me; vinivedayet-offers; avaiñëaveñu-as they who are not Vaiñëavas; paçyatsu-look on; mama-of Me; püjäm-worship; karoti-does; yaù-who; apüjayitvä-not worshiping; vighneçam-Gaëeça; sambhäñya-talking; ca-and; kapälinam-to an outcaste; naraù-person; püjäm-worship; tu-indeed; yaù-who; kuryät-does; snäpanam-bathing; ca-and; nakhämbhasä-with water touching the nails; amauné-not silent; gharma-liptäìgaù-perspiring; mama-of Me; püjäm-worship; karoti-does; yaù-who.

"1. One should not touch the Deity in a dark room, 2. one should not fail to strictly follow the rules and regulations in worshiping the Deity, 3. One should not enter the temple of the Deity without first making some sound, 4. One should not offer any foodstuff to the Deity which has been seen by dogs or other lower animals, 5. One should not break silence while worshiping, 6. One should not pass urine or evacuate while engaged in worshiping, 7. One should not offer incense without offerings some flower, 8. Useless flowers without any fragrance should not be offered, 9. One should not fail to wash his teeth very carefully every day, 10. One should not enter the temple directly after sexual intercourse. 11. One should not touch a woman during her menstrual period, 12. One should not enter the temple after touching a dead body, 13. One should not enter the temple wearing garments of red or blue color or garments that are unwashed, 14. One should not enter the temple after seeing a dead body, 15. One should not pass air within the temple, 16. One should not be angry within the temple, 17. One should not enter the temple after visiting a crematorium, 18. One should not belch before the Deity. So, until one has fully digested his food, he should not enter the temple, 19. One should not smoke marijuana, or ganja, 20. One should not take opium or similar intoxicants, 21. One should never enter the Deity room or touch the body of the Deity after having smeared oil over his body, 22. one should not show disrespect to a scripture teaching about the supremacy of the Lord, 23. One should not introduce any opposing scripture, 24. One should not chew betel before the Deity, 25. One should not offer a flower that was kept in an unclean pot, 26. One should not worship the Lord while sitting on the bare floor. One must have a sitting place or carpet, 27. One should not touch the Deity before one has completed taking bath, 28. One should not decorate his forehead with three-lined tilaka, 29. One should not enter the temple without having washed his hands and feet, 30. One should not offer foodstuff which is cooked by a non-Vaiñëava, 31. One should not worship the Deity before a non-devotee, 32. One should begin the worship of the demigod Gaëapati, who drives away all impediments in the execution of devotional service. (In the Brahma-saàhitä it is stated that Gaëapati worships the lotus feet of Lord Nåsiàhadeva and in that way has become auspicious for the devotees in clearing out all impediments. Therefore all devotees should worship gaëapati.) Also, the Deities should not be bathed in water that has been touched by the nails or fingers. When a devotee is perspiring, he should not engage himself in worshiping the Deity."*

Text 470

jïeyäù pare 'pi bahavo 'parädhäù sad-asammataiùäcaraiù çästra-vihita- niñiddhäti-kramädibhiù taträpi sarvathä kåñëa- nirmälyaà tu na laìghayet

jïeyäù-should be known; pare-others; api-also; bahavaù-many; aparädhäù-offenses; sat-by the Vaiñëavas; asammataiù-not approved; äcaraiù-byactivities; çästra-by the scriptures; vihita-given; niñiddha-prohibited; äti-kramädibhiù-by transgressions; taträpi-nevertheless; sarvathä-in all respects; kåñëa-of Lord Kåñëa; nirmälyam-the remnants of offerings of flowers the Lord; tu-indeed; na-not; laìghayet-should cross or step over.

The scriptures and the Vaiñëavas explain that there are also many other prohibitions. For example, one should not cross or step over the flowers offered to the Deities.*

Text 471

tathä ca närasiàhe çäntanuà prati närada-väkyam

ataù paraà tu nirmälyaà na laìghaya mahé-patenarasiàhasya devasya tathänyeñäà divaukasäm

tathä-so; ca-and; närasiàhe-in the Nåsiàha Puräëa; çäntanum-King Santanu; prati-to; närada-väkyam-the words of Narada Muni; ataù-then; param-then; tu-indeed; nirmälyam-offerings of flowers; na-not; laìghaya-step over; mahé-pate-O king; narasiàhasya-of Nåsiàha; devasya-Lord; tathä-so; anyeñäm-of other; divaukasäm-Deities.

In the Nåsiàha Puräëa, Närada Muni tells King Çäntanu:

"O king, one should not cross or step over the flowers offered to Lord Nåsiàha or any other Deity.

Text 472

kåñëasya paritoñepsur na tac-chapatham äcaretnänä-devasya nirmälyaà upayuïjéta na kvacit

kåñëasya-of Lord Kåñëa; paritoña-the satisfaction; épsuù-desiring; na-not; tac-chapatham-taking a vow in His name; äcaret-should do; nänä-devasya-of various demigods; nirmälyam-offerings of flowers; upayuïjéta-should enjoy; na-not; kvacit-ever.

"One should not take a vow in the name of God. One should not accept the remnants of flowers offered to the various demigods."

Text 473

tathä viñëu-dharmottare

äpady api ca kastäyäà deveça-çapathaà naraùna karoti hi yo brahmaàs tasya tuñyati keçavaù

tathä-so; viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; äpady-in calamity; api-even; ca-and; kastäyäm-in distress; deveça-çapatham-taking a vow in the Lord's name; naraù-a person; na-not; karoti-does; hi-indeed; yaù-wjo; brahmaàù-O brähmaëa; tasya-of him; tuñyati-pleased; keçavaù-Lord Kåñëa.


"O brähmaëa, a person who, even in danger or calamity, does not take a vow in the name of God, pleases Lord Keçava.

Text 474

na dhärayati nirmälyaà anya-deva-dhåtaà tu yaùbhuìkte na cänya-naivedyaà tasya tuñyati keçavaù. iti.

na-not; dhärayati-wears; nirmälyam-flowers; anya-deva-dhåtam-worn by any other deity; tu-indeed; yaù-who; bhuìkte-enjoys; na-not; ca-and; anya-of any demigod; naivedyam-offerings of food; tasya-of him; tuñyati-is pleased; keçavaù-Lord Kåñëa; iti-thus.

"O brähmaëa, a person who does not accept the remnants of food or flowers offered to any demigod pleases Lord Keçava."

Text 475

athäparädha-çamanaà

samvatsarasya madhye ca térthe çaukarake mamakåtopaväsaù snänena gaìgäyäà çuddhim äpnuyät

atha-now; aparädha-of offenses; çamanam-pacification; samvatsarasya-of a year; madhye-in the midst; ca-and; térthe-at a holy place; çaukarake-Çaukara-tértha; mama-of Me; kåtopaväsaù-fasting; snänena-with bathing; gaìgäyäm-in the Gaìgä; çuddhim-purity; äpnuyät-attains.

Becoming Free of Offenses

The Supreme Personality of Godhead explains:

"A person who stays at Çaukara-tértha for one year, fasts for My sake, and bathes in the Gaìgä, is purified of his offenses.

Text 476

mathuräyäà tathäpy evaà säparädhäù çucir bhavet

mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; tathäpy-still; evam-thus; säparädhäù-an offender; çuciù-pure; bhavet-becomes.

"A person who stays at Mathurä for one year, fasts for My sake, and bathes in the Yamunä, is also purified of his offenses.

Text 477

anayos térthayor aìke

yaù sevet sukåté naraùsahasra-janma-janitän aparädhän jahäti saù

anayoù-of bothe; térthayoù-holy places; aìke-on the lap; yaù-one who; sevet-serves; sukåté-pious; naraù-person; sahasra-janma-a thousand births; janitän-born; aparädhän-offenses; jahäti-abandons; saù-he.

"Anyone who stays in either of these holy places and engages in My devotional service becomes free from the offenses of a thousand births."

Text 478

skände

ahany ahani yo martyo gétädhyäyaà tu sampaöhetdva-triàçad-aparädhais tu ahany ahani mucyate

skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; ahany-day; ahani-after day; yaù-who; martyaù-a person; gétädhyäyam-study of Bhagavad-gétä; tu-indeed; sampaöhet-studies; dva-triàçad-aparädhaiù-32; tu-indeed; ahany-day; ahani-by day; mucyate-is freed.


"A person who every day reads Bhagavad-gétä is every day freed of the thirty-two offenses."

Text 479

tatra kärttika-mähätmye

tulasyä kurute yas tu çäla-gräma-çilärcanamdva-triàçad-aparädhäàç ca kñamate tasya keçavaù

tatra-there; kärttika-mähätmye-in the kärttika-mähätmya; tulasyä-of Tulasé; kurute-does; yaù-who; tu-indeed; çäla-gräma-çilä-of the Çälagräma-çilä; arcanam-worship; dva-triàçad-aparädhäàç-32 offenses; ca-and; kñamate-forgives; tasya-of him; keçavaù-Lord Kåñëa.

In the Skanda Puräëa, Kärttika-mähätmya, it is said:

"Lord Keçava forgives the thirty-two offenses committed by a devotee who worships the Çälagräma-çilä and Tulasé."

Text 480

tatraivänyatra

dvädaçyaà jägare viñëor yaù paöhet tulasé-stavamdva-triàçad-aparädhäni kñamate tasya keçavaù

tatra-there; eva-indeed; anyatra-in another place; dvädaçyam-on dvadasi; jägare-vigil; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; yaù-who; paöhet-recites; tulasé-of Tulasé; stavam-prayer; dva-triàçad-aparädhäni-32 offenses; kñamate-forgives; tasya-of him; keçavaù-Lord Kåñëa.

In another passage of the Skanda Puräëa it is said:

"Lord Keçava forgives the thirty-two offenses committed by a devotee who on dvädaçé keeps an all-night vigil and recites prayers to Tulasé-devé.

Text 481

yaù karoti hareù püjäà kåñëa-çästräìkito naraùaparädha-sahasräëi nityaà harati keçavaù. iti.

yaù-who; karoti-does; hareù-of Lord Hari; püjäm-worship; kåñëa-çästräìkitaù-marked with Lord Kåñëa's cakra; naraù-a person; aparädha-offenses; sahasräëi-thousands; nityam-always; harati-removes; keçavaù-Lord Keçava; iti-thus.

"Lord Keçava again and again removes many thousands of offenses committed by a devotee who, marked with the Lord's cakra, worships Lord Hari."

Text 482

atha çeña-grahanaà

tato bhagavatä dattaà manyamäno dayälunämahä-prasäda ity uktvä çeñaà çirasi dhärayet

atha-now; çeña-grahanam-accepting the remnants; tataù-then; bhagavata-by the Supreme Personality of Godhead; dattam-given; manyamänaù-considering; dayälunä-by the merciful; mahä-prasäda-great mercy; ity-thus; uktvä-saying; çeñam-the remnants; çirasi-on the head; dhärayet-should place.

Accepting the Remnants

Thinking, "This is the great mercy of the merciful Supreme Lord", one should place on one's head the remnants of flowers offered to Lord Kåñëa.

Text 483

atha nirmälya-dhäraëa-nityatä

pädme çré-gautamaàbaréña-samväde

ambaréña harer lagnaà niåaà puñpaà vilepanambhaktyä na dhatte çirasä çvapacäd adhiko hi saù

atha-now; nirmälya-the remnants of flowers; dhäraëa-wearing; nityatä-regularity; pädme--in the Padma Puräëa; çré-gautamaàbaréña-samväde-in a conversation of Gautama Muni and Kin g Ambarisa; ambaréña-O Ambarisa; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; lagnam-touching; niåam-water; puñpam-flower; vilepanam-ointment; bhaktyä-with devotion; na-not; dhatte-p;aces; çirasä-on the head; çvapacät-than a dogeater; adhikaù-lower; hi-indeed; saù-he.

One Should Always Accept the Remnants of Flowers Offered to the Lord

In the Padma Puräëa, Gautama Muni tells King Ambaréñaq:

"O King Ambaréña, a person who does not place on his head the remnants of flowers, water, or sandal paste offered to Lord Hari is lower than a dogeater."

Text 484

atha çré-bhagavan-nirmälya-mähätmyaà


kåñëottérëaà tu nirmälyaà yasyäìgaà spåçate munesarva-rogair tathä päpair mukto bhavati närada

atha-now; çré-bhagavan-nirmälya-mähätmyam-the Glories of the Remnants of Flowers Offered to the Lord; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; brahma-närada-samväde-in a conevsration of Brahma and Narada; kåñëottérëam-offered to Lord Kåñëa; tu-indeed; nirmälyam-flower remnants; yasya-of whom; aìgam-the body; spåçate-touches; mune-O sage; sarva-all; rogaiù-diseases; tathä-so; päpaiù-sins; muktaù-free; bhavati-is; närada-O Narada.

The Glories of the Remnants of Flowers Offered to the Lord

In the Skanda Puräëa, Brahmä tells Närada:

"O sage Närada, a person whose body touches the remnants of flowers offered to Lord Kåñëa is never touched by sins or diseases."

Text 485

viñëor nirmälya-çeñeëa yo gätraà parimärjayetduritäni vinaçyanti vyädhayo yänti khaëòaçaù

viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; nirmälya-çeñeëa-by ther remnants of flowers; yaù-whose; gätram-limbs; parimärjayet-wipes; duritäni-sins; vinaçyanti-destroys; vyädhayaù-diseases; yänti-go; khaëòaçaù-broken.

"Sins die and, broken into pieces, diseases flee, when a person touches to his body flowers offered to Lord Viñëu.

Text 486

mukhe çirasi dehe tu viñëüttérëaà tu yo vahettulaséà muni-çardüla na tasya spåçate kaliù

mukhe-in the mouth; çirasi-on the head; dehe-on the body; tu-indeed; viñëüttérëam-offered to Lord Viñëu; tu-indeed; yaù-who; vahet-carries; tulasém-Tulasé; muni-çardüla-O tiger of the sages; na-not; tasya-of him; spåçate-touches; kaliù-Kali-yuga.

"O tiger of the sages, Kali-yuga cannot touch a person who places to his head, mouth, and limbs, tulasé leaves offered to Lord Viñëu."

Text 487

kià ca

viñëu-mürti-sthitaà puñpaà çirasä yo vahen naraùaparyuñita-päpas tu yävad yuga-catuñöayam

kià ca-furthermore; viñëu-mürti-sthitam-situated on the Deity of Lord Viñëu; puñpam-flower; çirasä-with the head; yaù-who; vahen-carries; naraù-a person; aparyuñita-päpaù-free of sin; tu-indeed; yävat-as; yuga-catuñöayam-four yugas.

It is also said:

"A person who places to his head a flower offered to Lord Viñëu becomes free from the sins of four yugas.

Text 488

kià kariñyati su-snäto gaìgäyäà bhüsurottamayo vahet çirasä nityaà tulaséà viñëu-sevitäm

kim-what?; kariñyati-will do; su-snätaù-carefgully bathed; gaìgäyäm-in the Gaìgä; bhüsurottama-O best of brähmaëas; yaù-who; vahet-carries;çirasä-with his head; nityam-regularly; tulasém-tulasé; viñëu-sevitäm-offered to Lord Viñëu.

"O best of brähmaëas, why should a person who regularly places on his head tulasé leaves offered to Lord Viñëu be very interested to bathe in the Gaìgä?

Text 489

viñëu-pädäbja-samlagnäà aho-ratroñitäà çubhämtulaséà dhärayed yo vai tasya puëyam anantakam

viñëu-pädäbja-samlagnäm-offered to Lord Viñëu's lotus feet; aho-ratroñitäm-day and night; çubhäm-auspiciousness; tulasém-tulasé; dhärayet-carries; yaù-who; vai-indeed; tasya-of him; puëyam-piety; anantakam-limitless.

"A person who day and night places on his head tulasé leaves offered to Lord Viñëu's lotus feet attains piety that has no end.

Text 490

aho-rätraà çire yasya tulasé viñëu-sevitäna sa lipyati päpena padma-patram ivämbhasä

aho-rätram-day and night; çire-on the head; yasya-of whom; tulasé-tulasé; viñëu-sevitä-offered to Lord Viñëu; na-not; sa-he; lipyati-touched; päpena-by sin; padma-patram-a lotus leaf; iva-like; ambhasä-by the water.

"As a lotus leaf is never touched by water, so a person who day and night places on his head tulasé leaves offered to Lord Viñëu's lotus feet is never touched by sin."

Text 491

kià ca

viñëoù çiraù-paribhrañöäà bhaktyä yas tulaséà vahetsidhyanti sarva-käryäëi manasäcintitäni ca

kià ca-furthermore; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; çiraù-paribhrañöäm-on the head; bhaktyä-with devotion; yaù-who; tulasém-tulasé; vahet-carries; sidhyanti-become perfect; sarva-käryäëi-all work; manasäcintitäni-conceived by the mind; ca-and.

It is also said:

"A person who with devotion places a tulasé leaf to his head attains success in all his plans and endeavors.

Text 492

api ca

pramärjayati yo dehaà tulasyä vaiñëavo naraùsarva-térthamayaà dehaà tat-kñaëät dvija jäyate

api ca-also; pramärjayati-touches; yaù-who; deham-body; tulasyä-with tulasé; vaiñëavaù-a Vaiñëava; naraù-person; sarva-all; térthamayam-consisting of holy places; deham-body; tat-kñaëät-from that moment; dvija-O brähmaëa; jäyate-is born.

"O brähmaëa, when a devotee touches a tulasé leaf his body at once becomes the home of all holy places."

Text 493

gäruòe

harer mürty-avaçeñaà tu tulasé-käñöha-candanamnirmälyaà tu vahed yas tu koöi-tértha-phalaà labhet

gäruòe-in the Garuòa Puräëa; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; mürty-from the Deity; avaçeñam-remnant of an offering; tu-indeed; tulasé-käñöha-candanam-candana and tulasé; nirmälyam-flower; tu-indeed; vahet-carries; yaù-who; tu-indeed; koöi-tértha-phalam-the result of ten million pilgrimages; labhet-attains.


"A person who accepts a tulaséwoodpaste-sandalpaste flower offered to the Deity of Lord Hari attains the result of ten million pilgrimages.

Text 494

närada-païcarätre

bhojanänantaraà viñëor arpitaà tulasé-dalamtat-kñaëät päpa-nirmoktas cändräyaëa-çatädhikaù

närada-païcarätre-in the Närada-païcarätra; bhojanänantaram-after food; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; arpitam-offered; tulasé-dalam-a tulasé leaf; tat-kñaëät-from that moment; päpa-nirmoktaù-free of sin; cändräyaëa-çatädhikaù-more than observing

a hundred candrayana fasts.


"By honoring food and a tulasé leaf offered to Lord Viñëu, a person becomes more free of sins than if he had followed a hundred cändräyaëa fasts."

Text 495

kià cänyatra

kautukaà çåëu me devi viñëor nirmälya-vahninätäpitaà näçam äyäti brahma-hatyädi-pätakam

kià ca-furthermore; anyatra-in another place; kautukam-wonder; çåëu-please hear; me-of me; devi-O goddess; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; nirmälya-of the remnants of flowers; vahninä-by the fire; täpitam-heated; näçam-destruction; äyäti-attains; brahma-hatyädi-pätakam-a host of sins, beginning with the murder of a brähmaëa.

It is also said:

"O goddess, please hear from me something very wonderful. the act of touching a flower offered to Lord Viñëu is a fire that burns away a host of sins, beginning with the murder of a brähmaëa."

Text 496

ekädaça-skandhe çré-bhagavantaà praty uddhavoktau

tvayopayukta-srag-gandha- vaso-'laìkära-carcitaùucchiñöa-bhogino däsäs tava mäyäà jayema hi

ekädaça-skandhe-in the eleventh canto; çré-bhagavantam-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; praty-to; uddhavoktau-in the words of Uddhava; tvayä-by You; upayukta-used; srag-flower garlands; gandha-scented substances like sandalwood pulp; vasaù-garments; alaìkära-ornaments; carcitaù-being decorated with; ucchiñöa-remnants of food; bhoginaù-eating; däsäù-servants; tava-Your; mäyäm-illusory energy; jayema-can conquer over; hi-certainly.

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (11.6.46), Uddhava tells the Supreme Personality of Godhead:

"My dear Lord, the garlands, scented substances, garments, ornaments, and other such things that have been offered to You may later be used by Your servants. By partaking of these things and eating the remnants of food You have left, we will be able to conquer the illusory energy."*

Text 497

ata eva skände çré-yamasya dütän anuçäsane

pädodaka-ratä ye ca harer nirmälya-dhärakäùviñëu-bhakti-ratä ye vai te tu tyäjyäù su-dürataù. iti.

ata eva-therefore; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; çré-yamasya-of Çré Yama; dütän-to the messengers; anuçäsane-in instyruction; pädodaka-the water that has washed the feet; ratä-devoted; ye-who; ca-and; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; nirmälya-dhärakäù-holding the flowers; viñëu-bhakti-ratä-devoted to Lord Viñëu; ye-who; vai-indeed; te-they; tu-indeed; tyäjyäù-should be abandoned; su-dürataù.-far away; iti.-thus.

In the Skanda Puräëa, Yamaräja teaches his messengers:

"Stay far way from the Lord Viñëu's devotees, who touch water that has washed the Lord's feet and hold flowers offered to the Lord."

Text 498

visarjanaà tu cet käryaà visåjyävaraëäni tatdeve tan-mudrayä prärthya devaà hådi visarjayet

visarjanam-offering; tu-indeed; cet-if; käryam-to be done; visåjya-removing; ävaraëäni-coverings; tat-that; deve-to the Lord; tan-mudrayä-with that mudrä; prärthya-praying; devam-to the Lord; hådi-in the heart; visarjayet-should offer.

Then one should open his heart and, showing the visarjané-mudrä, invite the Lord to enter there.

Text 499

tathä coktaà

püjito 'si mayä bhaktyä bhagavan kamalä-patesa lakñméko mama sväntaà viça viçränti-hetave

tathä-so; ca-and; uktam-said; püjitaù-worshiped; asi-You are; mayä-by me; bhaktyä-with devotion; bhagavan-O Lord; kamalä-pate-O husband of the goddess of fortune; sa-accompanied by; lakñmékaù-the goddess of fortune; mama-of me; sväntam-the heart; viça-please enter; viçränti-hetave-to rest.

Then one should say:

"O Supreme Personality of Godhead, O husband of the goddess of fortune, I have worshiped You with devotion. Now, taking with You the goddess of fortune, please enter my heart and take rest there."

Text 500

prärthyaivaà päduke dattvä saìgam udväsayed dharimpräëäyämaà ñaò-aìgaà ca kåtvä mudräà visarjaném

prärthya-praying; evam-thus; päduke-shoes; dattvä-offering; sa-with; aìgam-body; udväsayet-should leave; harim-Lord Kåñëa; präëäyämam-pranayama; ñaò-aìgam-six limbs; ca-and; kåtvä-doing; mudräm-mudra; visarjaném-visarjani.

After speaking this prayer, one should perform präëäyäma, ñaò-aìga-nyäsa, and visarjané-mudrä. Then one should offer sandals to the Lord and give Him leave to go.

Text 501

atha püjä-vidhi-vivekaù

ayaà püjä-vidhir mantra- siddhy-arthasya japasya hi

aìgaà bhaktes tu tan-niñöhair nyäsädén antareñyate

atha-now; püjä-of worship; vidhi-rules; vivekaù-distinction; ayam-this; püjä-vidhiù-rules of worship; mantra-of mantras; siddhy-perfection; arthasya-purpose; japasya-chanting japa; hi-indeed; aìgam-body; bhakteù-of devotional service; tu-indeed; tan-niñöhaiù-faith in that; nyäsädén-beginning with nyasa; antarä-without; éñyate-is approved.

The Rules of Worship

The rules of worship we have described and the chanting of mantras we have described should be performed. However, they who have faith that the Deity in the temple is identical with the Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself need not perform nyäsa and other rituals.

Text 502

tatra devälaye püjä nityatvena mahä-prabhoùkämyatvenäpi gehe tu präyo nityatayä matä

tatra-there; devälaye-in the temple; püjä-worship; nityatvena-regularly; mahä-prabhoù-of thr Supreme Personality of Godhead; kämyatvena-to attain a specific desire; api-also; gehe-in the home; tu-indeed; präyaù-for the most part; nityatayä-regularly; matä-considered.

The worship of the Lord should regularly be performed in the temple. The Lord may also be worshiped to attain a specific desire. The Lord may be also be regularly worshiped at home.

Text 503

sevädi-niyamo devä- laye devasya ceñyatepräyaù sva-gehe svacchanda- sevä sva-vrata-rakñayä

sevädi-niyamaù-the rules of worship; devälaye-in the temple; devasya-of the Lord; ca-and; éñyate-is appropriate; präyaù-mostly; sva-gehe-in one's own home; svacchanda-spontaneous; sevä-service; sva-vrata-rakñayä-following one's vow.

The rules of worship should be followed in the temple. However, at home one may follow less strictly.

Text 504

kià ca viñëu-dharmottare

ghåtena snäpitaà devaà candanenänulepayetsita-jätyäç ca kusumaiù püjayet tad-anantaram

kià ca-furthermore; viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; ghåtena-with ghee; snäpitam-bathed; devam-the Lord; candanena-sandal paste; anulepayet-one should anoint; sita-jätyäç-with white jasmine flowers; ca-and; kusumaiù-with flowers; püjayet-should worship; tad-anantaram-then.


"One should bathe the Deity with ghee, anoint Him with sandal paste, worship Him with white jasmine flowers, . . .

Text 505

çvetena vastra-yugmena tathä muktä-phalaiù çubhaiùmukhya-karpüra-dhüpena payasä päyasena ca

svetena-white; vastra-yugmena-with both garments; tathä-so; muktä-phalaiù-with pearls; çubhaiù-beautiful; mukhya-karpüra-with camphor; dhüpena-incense; payasä-milk; päyasena-sweet-rice; ca-and.

. . . offer Him white garments, beautiful pearls, camphor,. incense, milk, and sweet-rice, . . .

Text 506

padma-sütrasya varttyä ca ghåta-dhépena cäpy athapüjayet sarvathä yatnät sarva-käma-pradärcanam

padma-sütrasya-of lotus fiber; varttyä-with a wick; ca-and; ghåta-dhépena-with a ghee lamp; ca-and; api-also; atha-then; püjayet-should worship; sarvathä-in all respects; yatnät-carefully; sarva-käma-pradärcanam-the worship the gives all desires.

. . . and carefully worship Him with a ghee lamp burning with a lotus-fiber wick. This worship fulfills all desires.

Text 507

kåtvemaà mucyate rogé rogät çéghram asaàçayamduùkharto mucyate duùkhäd baddho mucyeta bandhanät

kåtvä-doing; imam-this; mucyate-is fee; rogé-diseased; rogät-from disease; çéghram-quickly; asaàçayam-without doubt; duùkhartaù-unhappy; mucyate-free; duùkhät-from unhappiness; baddhaù-imprisoned; mucyeta-free; bandhanät-from prison.

"By worshiping in this way a diseased person is quickly freed from disease, a person afflicted with sufferings is quickly freed from his sufferings, a prisoner is quickly freed from prison, . . .

Text 508

räja-grastaç ca mucyeta tathä räja-bhayän naraùkñemena gacched adhvänaà sarvänartha-vivarjitaù. iti.

räja-grastaù-in the grip of the king; ca-and; mucyeta-is freed; tathä-so; räja-bhayän-from fear of the king; naraù-a pewrson; kñemena-happily; gacchet-goes; adhvänam-on the path; sarva-all; anartha-vivarjitaù-free from calamities; iti-thus.

. . . a criminal caught by the king is quickly freed from the king's wrath, and person troubled by calamity is quickly made happy and free from troubles.

Ninth Vilasa

Text 1

sa prasédatu caitanya- devo yasya prasädataùmahä-prasäda-jätärhaù sadyaù syäd adhamo 'py aham

saù-He; prasédatu-may be pleased; caitanyadevaù-Lord Caitanya; yasya-of whom; prasädataù-by the mercy; mahä-prasäda-great mercy; jäta-born; arhaù-worthy; sadyaù-suddenly; syät-is; adhamaù-fallen; api-although; aham-I.

May Lord Caitanyadeva be merciful to me. Even though I am fallen, may He be merciful to me.

Text 2

atha çaìkhodakaà tac kåñëa-dåñöi-sudhokñitamvaiñëavebhyaù pradäyäbhi- vandya mürdhani dhärayet

atha-now; çaìkha-of a conchshell; udakam-water; tat-that; kåñëa-of Lord Kåñëa; dåñöi-sight; sudhä-nectar; ukñitam-sprinkled; vaiñëavebhyaù-to the Vaiñëavas; pradäya-giving; abhivandya-bowing down; mürdhani-on the head; dhärayet-should place.

One should offer to the Lord water in a conchshell. When by Lord Kåñëa's glance the water is transformed into nectar, one should sprinkle it on the Vaiñëavas, offer obeisances to it, and sprinkle it on one's own head.

Text 3

çaìkhodaka-mähätmyaà


çaìkhodakaà harer bhaktir nirmälyaà pädayor jalamcandanaà dhüpa-çeñaà tu brahma-hatyäpahärakam

çaìkhodaka-mähätmyam-the glories of the conchell-water; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; brahma-närada-samväde-in a conversation of Brashma and Narada; çaìkhodakam-the concshell water; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; bhaktiù-devotion; nirmälyam-flower remnants; pädahmaëa murder; apahärakam-removing.

The Glories of Water Offered in a Conchshell


"Devotion to Lord Hari and the remnants of offerings to Lord Hari of water offered in a conchshell, flowers, water offered at His feet, sandal paste, and incense, all remove the sin of murdering a brähmaëa."

Text 4

tatraiva çaìkha-mähätmye

çaìkha-sthitaà tu yat toyaà

bhrämitaà keçavoparivandate çirasä nityaà gaìgä-snänena tasya kim

tatra-there; eva-indeed; çaìkha-mähätmye-in the Çaìkha-mähätmys; çaìkha-sthitam-situated in a conchshell; tu-indeed; yat-what; toyam-water; bhrämitam-circled; keçavopari-over Lord Kåñëa; vandate-bows down; çirasä-with the head; nityam-regularly; gaìgä-snänena-by bathing in the Gaìgä; tasya-of him; kim-what is the need?

In the Skanda Puräëa, Çaìkha-mähätmya, it is said:

"Why should a person who regularly bows his head before the conchshell-water circled over Lord Keçava be very interested to bathe in the Gaìgä?

Text 5

na däho na klamo närtir narakägni-bhayaà na hiyasya çaìkhodakaà mürdhni kåñëa-dåñöyävalokitam

na-not; dahaù-fire; na-not; klamaù-fatiugue; na-not; ärtiù--suffering; narakägni-bhayam-fear of the fires of hell; na-not; hi-indeed; yasya-of whom; çaìkhodakam-conchshell water; mürdhni-on the herad; kåñëa-dåñöyävalokitam-seen by Lord Kåñëa.

"A person who places on his head the conchshell-water seen by Lord Kåñëa does not experience fever, fatigue, suffering, or the fear of hellfire.

Text 6

na grahä na ca kuñmaëòäù piçäcoraga-rakñakäùdåñövä çaìkhodakaà mürdhni vidravanti diço daça

na-not; grahä-grahas; na-not; ca-and; kuñmaëòäù-kusmandas; piçäca-witches; uraga-snakes; rakñakäù-cannibals; dåñövä-seeing; çaìkhodakam-conchshell water; mürdhni-on the head; vidravanti-flee; diçaù-in the directions; daça-ten.

"Ghosts, demons, witches, snakes, and cannibals do not trouble him. Seeing the Lord's conchshell water on his head, they flee in the ten directions.

Text 7

kåñëa-mürdhni bhrämitaà tu jalaà tac-chaìkha-saàsthitamkåtvä mürdhany aväpnoti muktià viñëoù prasädataù

kåñëa-of Lord Kåñëa; mürdhni-on the head; bhrämitam-circled; tu-indeed; jalam-water; tac-chaìkha-saàsthitam-in the conchshell; kåtvä-soing; mürdhani-on the head; aväpnoti-attains; muktim-liberation; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; prasädataù-by the mercy.

"A person who places on his head the conchshell water circled over Lord Kåñëa attains liberation by the Lord's mercy.

Text 8

bhrämayitvä harer mürdhni mandiraà çaìkha-väriëäprokñayed vaiñëavo yas tu näçubhaà tad-gåhe bhavet

bhrämayitvä-circiling; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; mürdhni-on the head; mandiram-the temple; çaìkha-värinä-with conchshell water; prokñayet-sprinkles; vaiñëavaù-Vaiñëava; yaù-who; tu-indeed; na-not; açubham-inauspiciousness; tad-gåhe-in his home; bhavet-will be.

"Nothing inauspicious will happen in the home of a Vaiñëava who circles conchshell-water over Lord Hari's head and then sprinkles it in the temple.

Text 9

néräjana-jalaà yatra yatra pädodakaà hareùtiñöhati muni-çärdüla vardhante tatra sampadaù

néräjana-offered in arati; jalam-water; yatra yatra-wherever; pädodakam-water that washed the Lord's feet; hareù-of Lord Ha

"O tiger of sages, prosperity and good fortune will stay in any place where there is water that has washed Lord Hari's feet or water offered to Lord Hari during ärati."

Text 10

tatraivägre

néräjana-jalaà viñëor yasya gäträëi saàspåçetyajïävabhåta-lakñaëaà snänajaà labhate phalam

tatra-there; eva-indeed; agre-in the beginning; néräjana-jalam-water from arati; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; yasya-of whom; gäträëi-the limbs; saàspåçet-touches; yajïävabhåta-lakñaëam-the nature of an avabhrta bath in a yajna; snänajam-born from the bath; labhate-attains; phalam-the result.

In the Skanda Puräëa it is also said:

"Whoever touches to his limbs the ärati-water of Lord Viñëu attains the result of an avabhåta bath."

Text 11

tatraiva çré-çivoktau

pädodakena devasya hatyäyuta-samanvitaùçudhyate nätra sandehas tathä çaìkhodakena hi

tatra-there; eva-indeed; çré-çivoktau-in the statement of Lord Çiva; pädodakena-with the weater from the feet; devasya-of the Lord; hatyä-of murders; ayuta-ten thousand; samanvitaù-with; çudhyate-is purified; na-not; atra-here; sandehaù-doubt; tathä-so; çaìkhodakena-with conchsell-water; hi-indeed.


"Even a sinner who has committed ten thousand murders will become purified by touching the Lord's conchshell-water or the water that has washed the Lord's feet. Of this there is no doubt."

Text 12

båhad-viñëu-puräëe ca

térthädhikaà yajïa-çatäc ca pävanaà jalaà sadä keçava-dåñöi-saàsthitamchinatti päpaà tulasé-vimiçritaà viçeñataç cakra-çilä-vinirmitam

båhad-viñëu-puräëe-in the Viñëu Puräëa; ca-and; térthädhikam-more than pilgrimages; yajïa-çatät-than a hundred yajnas; ca-and; pävanam-purifying; jalam-water; sadä-always; keçava-dåñöi-saàsthitam-seen by Lord Kåñëa; chinatti-cuts; päpam-sin; tulasé-vimiçritam-mixed with tulasé; viçeñataù-specifically; cakra-cakra; çilä-stone; vinirmitam-done.


"the water seen by Lord Kåñëa is a more purifying that a hundred yajïas and a host of pilgrimages. The water, mixed with tulasé leaves, that has washed the Çälagräma-çilä cuts apart all sins."

Text 13

atha tértha-dhäraëaà

kåñëa-pädäbja-térthaà ca vaiñëavebhyaù pradäya hisvayaà bhaktyäbhivandyädau pétvä çirasi dhärayet

atha-now; tértha-dhäraëam-the water that has washed the Lord's feet; kåñëa-pädäbja-tértham-the lotus feet of Lord Kåñëa; ca-and; vaiñëavebhyaù-to the Vaiñëavas; pradäya-giving; hi-indeed; svayam-personally; bhaktyä-with devotion; abhivandya-bowing; ädau-in the beginning; pétvä-drinking; çirasi-on the head; dhärayet-should place.

The Water That Has Washed the Lord's Feet

One should give to the devotees the water that has washed the Lord's feet. With devotion one should offer obeisances to that water, drink it, and sprinkle it on one's head.

Text 14

tasya mantra-vidhiç ca präk prätaù-snäna-prasaìgataùlikhito hy adhunä päne viçeño likhyate kiyän

tasya-of that; mantra-vidhiù-the way of chanting the mantra; ca-and; präk-first; prätaù-snäna-prasaìgataù-at early morning bath; likhitaù-written; hi-indeed; adhunä-now; päne-in drinking; viçeñaù-specifically; likhyate-is written; kiyän-how much?

How much can be written about drinking this water that has washed the Lord's feet! Now I will give the mantra for honoring the water of the Lord's early-morning bath.

Text 15

sa coktaù

oà caraëaà pavitraà vitataà puräëaà yena pütas tarati duñkåtänitena pavitreëa çuddhena pütä api päpmänam arätià tarema

sa-it; ca-and; uktaù-said; om-Oà; caraëam-feed; pavitram-poure; vitatam-manifested; puräëam-ancient; yena-by which; pütaù-purified; tarati-crosses; duñkåtäni-sins; tena-by it; pavitreëa-pure; çuddhena-pure; pütä-pure; api-also; päpmänam-of sins; arätim-the enemy; tarema-we cross.

The Mantra

"Oà. The sacred water that has washed the Lord's feet and that is famous from ancient times washes away all sins. Purified by that sacred water, we will will escape the hostile world of birth and death, the home of sins.

Text 16

lokasya dväram ärcayat pavitraà jyotiñmat vibhräjamänaà mahas tad amåtasya dhärä bahudhä dohamänaà caraëaà loke sudhitäà dadhätu. iti.

lokasya-of the world; dväram-the door; arcayat-should worship; pavitram-sacred; jyotiñmat-with effulgence; vibhräjamänam-shining; mahaù-splendor; tad -that; dhärä-stream; bahudhä-in many ways; dohamänam-milking; caraëam-feet; loke-in the world; sudhitäm-nectar; dadhätu-may give; iti-thus.

"The splendid and sacred stream of nectar that has washed the Lord feet is the door to the spiritual world. Running in many swelling streams, it floods the world with nectar."

Text 17

imaà mantraà samuccärya sarva-duñöa-grahäpahampräçnéyät prokñayed dehaà putra-mitra-parigraham

imam-this; mantram-mantra; samuccärya-reciting; sarva-duñöa-graha-all sins; apaham-removing; präçnéyät-should drink; prokñayet-should sprinkle; deham-the body; putra-mitra-parigraham-family, children, and friends.

Reciting this mantra, one should drink the water that has washed the Lord's feet, sprinkle it on his body, and sprinkle it on his wife, children, family, and friends.

Text 18

kià ca

viñëoù pädodakaà pétaà koöi-hatyägha-näçanamtad eväñöa-guëaà päpaà bhümau bindu-nipätanät

kià ca-furthermore; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; päda-feet; udakam-water; pétam-drunk; koöi-hatyägha-näçanam-destroying millions of sins; tat-that; eva-indeed; añöa-guëam-eight times; päpam-of sin; bhümau-on the earth; bindu-of drops; nipätanät-by the falling.

It is also said:

"By drinking the water that has washed Lord Viñëu's feet one atones for ten million murders and other sins.

Sprinkling that water is even more effective than drinking it. Sprinkling it destroys sins eight times more than drinking it."

Text 19

atha çré-caraëodaka-päna-mähätmyaà

pädme gautamämbaréña-samväde

hareù snänävaçeñas tu jalaà yasodare sthitamambaréña praëamyoccaiù päda-päàçuù pragåhyatäm

atha-now; çré-caraëa-of the Lord's feet; udaka-of the water; päna-drinking; mähätmyam-the glory; pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; gautama-ambaréña-of Gautama Muni and King Ambarisa; samväde-ina conversation; hareù-of Lord Hari; snäna-bathing; avaçeñaù-remnant; tu-indeed; jalam-water; yasya-of whom; udare-in the stomach; sthitam-is situated; ambariña-O King Ambarisa; praëamya-bowing; uccaiù-greatly; päda-päàçuù-the dust; pragåhyatäm-should be taken.

The Glory of Drinking the Water That Has Washed the Lord's Feet

In the Padma Puräëa, Gautama Muni tells King Ambaréña:

"O King Ambaréña, please bow down before a person who places in his stomach the water that has washed the Lord 's feet. You should touch the dust from that devotee's feet."

Text 20

tatraiva devadüta-vikuëòala-samväde

ye pibanti narä nityaà çälagräma-çilä-jalampaïca-gavya-sahasrais tu sevitaiù kià prayojanam

tatra-there; eva-indeed; devadüta-vikuëòala-samväde-in a conversation of Devaduta and Vikundala; ye-who; pibanti-drink; narä-people; nityam-regularly; çälagräma-çilä-jalam-the water that has washed the Çälagräma-çilä; païca-gavya-sahasraiù-with a thousand panca-gavyas; tu-indeed; sevitaiù-served; kim-what?; prayojanam-is the need.


"Why should they who regularly drink the water that has washed the Çälagräma-çilä think drinking a thousand païca-gavyas is very important?"

Text 21

koöi-tértha-sahasrais tu sevitaiù kià prayojanamnityaà yadi pibet punayà çälagräma-çilä-jalam

koöi-tértha-sahasraiù-with ten million pilgrimages; tu-indeed; sevitaiù-served; kim-what?; prayojanam-need; nityam-regularly; yadi-if; pibet-drink; puëyam-sacred; çälagräma-çilä-jalam-water that has washed the Çälagräma-çilä.

"Why should they who regularly drink the water that has washed the Çälagräma-çilä think ten million pilgirmages are very important?

Text 22

çälagräma-çilä-toyaà yaù pibed bindunä samammätuù stanyaà punar naiva na pibed bhakti-bhäì naraù

çälagräma-çilä-toyam-water that has washed the Çälagräma-çilä; yaù-who; pibet-drinks; bindunä-with a drop; samam-equal; matuù-of a mother; stanyam-the breast milk; punaù-again; na-not; eva-indeed; na-not; pibet-drinks; bhakti-bhäk-devotee; naraù-person.

"A devotee who drinks even a single drop of water that has washed the Çälagräma-çilä will never again drink a mother's milk."

Text 23

kià ca

dahanti narakän sarvän garbha-väsaà ca däruëampétaà yasi tu sadä nityaà çälagräma-çilä-jalam

kià ca-furthermore; dahanti-burn; narakän-hells; sarvän-all; garbha-väsam-residence in the womb; ca-and; däruëam-terrible; pétam-drunk; yaiù-by whom; tu-indeed; sadä-regularly; nityam-always; çälagräma-çilä-jalam-Çälagräma-çilä-water that has washed the Çälagräma-çilä.

It is also said:

"By regularly drinking water that has washed the Çälagräma-çilä one burns away that chance that in the future he live in hell or enter the horrible prison of a mother's womb."

Text 24

tatraiva çré-yama-dhümraketu-samväde

çälagräma-çilä-toyaà bindu-mätraà tu yaù pibetsarva-päpaiù pramucyeta bhakti-märge kåtodyamaù

tatra-there; eva-indeed; çré-yama-dhümraketu-samväde-in a conversation of Çré Yama and Çré Dhumraketu; çälagräma-çilä-toyam-water that has washed the Çälagräma-çilä; bindu-a drop; mätram-oly; tu-indeed; yaù-who; pibet-drinks; sarva-päpaiù-from all sins; pramucyeta-freed; bhakti-märge-on the path of devotional service; kåtodyamaù-endeavoring.

In the Padma Puräëa, in a conversation of Çré Yama and Çré Dhümraketu, it is said:

"A person who drinks a single drop of the water that has washed the Çälagräma-çilä become free from all sins. He becomes advanced on the path of devotional service."

Text 25

tatraiva pulastya-bhagératha-samväde

pädodakasya mähätmyaà bhagératha vadämi te

pävanaà sarva-térthebhyo hatyä-koöi-vinäçakam

tatra-there; eva-indeed; pulastya-bhagératha-samväde-in a conversatio of Pulastya and Bhagiratha; pädodakasya-of the water that has washed the feet; mähätmyam-the glory; bhagératha-O King Bhagiratha; vadämi-I tell; te-to you; pävanam-purifying; sarva

In the Padma Puräëa, Pulastya Muni tells King Bhagératha:

"O King Bhagératha, I will tell you the glories of the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet. That water is more purifying than all holy places. That water kills the sinful reactions of ten million murders."

Text 26

dhåte çirasi péte ca sarväs tuñyanti devatäùpräyaçcittaà tu päpänäà kalau pädodakaà hareù

dhåte-held; çirasi-on the head; péte-drunk; ca-and; sarväù-all; tuñyanti-are satisfied; devataù-the demigods; präyaçcittam-atonement; tu-indeed; päpänäm-of sins; kalau-in Kali-yuga; pädodakam-the water that has washed the feet; hareù-of Lord Hari.

"In Kali-yuga the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet is the atonement for all sins. When a person drinks that water or places it on his head, all the demigods become pleased with him."

Texts 27 and 28

kià ca

tribhiù särasvataà toyaà saptähena tu närmadamsadyaù punäti gäìgeyaà darçanäd eva yämunam

punanty etäni toyäni snäna-darçana-kértanaiùpunäti smaraëäd eva kalau pädodakaà hareù

kià ca-furthermore; tribhiù-with three; särasvatam-of the Sarasvati; toyam-water; saptähena-wityh seven days; tu-indeed; närmadam-of the Narmada; sadyaù-at once; punäti-purifies; gaìgeyam-of the Gaìgä; darçanät-by seeing; eva-indeed; yämunam-of the Yamunä; punanti-purify; etäni-they; toyäni-water; snäna-darçana-kértanaiù-by bathing, seeing, or gloiåifying; punäti-purifies; smaraëät-by remembering; eva-indeed; kalau-in kali-yuga; pädodakam-the water that has washed the feet; hareù-of Lord Hari.

It is also said:

by simply seeing the Yamunä, or by seeing, glorifying, and bathing in all these sacred rivers, is attained in Kali-yuga by simply remembering the water that has washed the Lord Hari's feet."

Text 29

kià ca

arcitaiù koöibhir liìgair

nityaà yat kriyate phalamtat phalaà çata-sähasraà péte pädodake hareù

kià ca-furthermore; arcitaiù-worshiped; koöibhiù-ten million; liìgaiù-Çiva-liìgas; nityam-regularly; yat-what; kriyate-done; phalam-piety; tat-that; phalam-result; çata-sähasram-100,000 times; péte-drunk; pädodake-the water that has washed the feet; hareù-of Lord Hari.

It is also said:

"By once drinking the water that has washed the feet of Lord Hari one attains a hundred thousand times the pious benefit of daily worshiping ten million Çiva-liìgas.

Text 30

açucir vä duräcäro mahä-pätaka-samyutaùspåñövä pädodakaà viñëoù sadä çudhyati mänavaù

açuciù-impure; vä-or; duräcäraù-misbehaved; mahä-pätaka-samyutaù-a great sinner; spåñövä-touching; pädodakam-the water that has washed the feet; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; sadä-eternally; çudhyati-is purified; mänavaù-a person.

"Whether impure, or ill-behaved, or a great sinner, anyone who once touches the water that has washed Lord Viñëu's feet becomes eternally purified.

Text 31

päpa-koöi-yuto yas tu måtyu-kale çiro-mukhedehe pädodakaà tasya na prayäti yamälayam

päpa-koöi-yutaù-committed millions of sins; yaù-who; tu-indeed; måtyu-kale-at the time of death; çiro-mukhe-on his head; dehe-on his body; pädodakam-the water that has washed the feet; tasya-of him; na-not; prayäti-goes; yamälayam-to the abode of Yamaräja.

ater that has washed Lord Viñëu's feet will not go to Yama's abode.

Text 32

na dänaà na havir yeñäà svädhyäyo na surärcanamte 'pi pädodakaà pétvä prayänti paramäà gatim

na-not; dänam-charity; na-not; haviù-yajna; yeñäm-of whom; svädhyäyaù-study; na-not; surärcanam-worship of the demigods; te-they; api-even; pädodakam-the water that has washed the feet; pétvä-drinkiong; prayänti-go; paramäm-to the supreme; gatim-abode.

"They who, even though they never gave any charity, performed any yajïas, studied the Vedas, or worshiped the demigods, have one drunk the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet, will go to the Lord's supreme abode.

Text 33

kärttike kärttiké-yoge kià kariñyati puñkarenityaà ca puñkaraà tasya yasya pädodakaà hareù

kärttike-in the month of Kärttika; kärttiké-yoge-with the star Krttika; kim-what?; kariñyati-will do; puñkare-at Puskara; nityam-always; ca-and; puñkaram-Puskara; tasya-of him; yasya-of whom; pädodakam-the water that has washed the feet; hareù-of Lord Hari.

"Why would a person who has once drunk the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet be very interested to stay at Puñkara-tértha during the month of Kärttika, when the star Kåttikä is prominent?

Text 34

viçäkhä-åkña-samyuktä vaiçäkhé hi kariñyatipiëòärake mahä-térthe ujjäyinyäà bhagératha

viçäkhä-åkña-samyuktä-with the star visakha; vaiçäkhé-the month of Visakha; hi-what; kariñyati-will do; piëòärake-at POindaraka; mahä-térthe-the great holy place; ujjäyinyäm-in Ujjain; bhagératha-O King Bhagiratha.

"Why would a person who has once drunk the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet be very interested to stay at Piëòäraka-tértha during the month of Vaiçäkhä, when the star Viçäkhä is prominent?

Text 35

mägha-mäse prayäge tu snänaà kià kariñyatiprayägaà satataà tasya yasya pädodakaà hareù

mägha-mäse-in the month of Magha; prayäge-at Prayaga; tu-indeed; snänam-bath; kim-what?; kariñyati-will do; prayägam-Prayaga; satatam-always; tasya-of him; yasya-of whom; pädodakam-the water that has washed the feet; hareù-of Lord Hari.

"Why would a person who has once drunk the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet be very interested to bathe at Prayäga during the month of Mägha?

Text 36

prabodha-väsare präpte mathuräyäà ca tasya kimnityaà ca yämunaà snänaà yasya pädodakaà hareù

prabodha-väsare-probodhini ekädaçé; präpte-attained; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; ca-and; tasya-of him; kim-what?; nityam-always; ca-and; yämunam-in the Yamuna; snänam-bath; yasya-of whom; pädodakam-the water from the feet; hareù-of Lord Hari.

"Why would a person who has once drunk the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet be very interested to bathe in the Yamunä at Mathurä during the prabodhiné ekädaçé?

Text 37

käçyäm uttara-vähinyäà gaìgäyäà tu måtasya kimyasya pädodakaà viñëor mukhe caivävatiñöhate

käçyäm-in Varanasi; uttara-vähinyäm-most sacred; gaìgäyäm-in the Ganga; tu-indeed; måtasya-corpse; kim-what?; yasya-of whom; pädodakam-water from the feet; viñëoù-of Lord Hari; mukhe-in the mouth; ca-and; eva-indeed; avatiñöhate-is situated.

"Why would a person who has once drunk the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet be very interested to have his dead body placed in the most sacred Gaìgä at Väräëasé?"

Text 38

kià ca

hitvä pädodakaà viñëor yo 'nya-térthäni gacchatianarghaà ratnam utsåjya loñöraà väïchati durmatiù

kià ca-furthermore; hitvä-leaving; pädodakam-the water from the feet; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; yaù-who; anya-térthäni-to other holy places; gacchati-goes; anargham-priceless; ratnam-jewel; utsåjya-rejecdting; loñöram-a clod of earth; väïchati-desires; durmatiù-fool.

It is also said:

"A person who leaves behind the water that has washed Lord Viñëu's feet and goes on pilgrimage to many holy places is a fool who has left behind a priceless gem to search for clumps of earth.

Text 39

kurukñetra-samo deço binduù pädodakaà mataù

kurukñetra-samaù-equal to Kuruksetra; deçaù-place; binduù-drop; pädodakam-water from the feet; mataù-considered.

"Any place where a drop of the water that has washed Lord Viñëu's feet falls is sacred like Kurukñetra.

Text 40

pated yaträkñayaà puëyaà nityaà bhavati tad-gåhegayä-piëòä-samaà puëyaà puträëäm api jäyate

patet-falls; yatra-where; akñayam-eternal; puëyam-piety; nityam-always; bhavati-is; tad-gåhe-in his home; gayä-piëòä-samam-equal to offering pinda at Gaya; puëyam-piety; puträëäm-of sons; api-also; jäyate-is born.

"Any home where there is always water that has washed Lord Viñëu's feet falls is sacred always. The sons born in that home will always offer piëòa at Gayä.

Text 41

pädodakena devasya

ye kuryuù pitå-tarpaëamnäsuräëäà bhayaà tasya pretä-janyaà ca räkñasam

pädodakena-with the water of the feet; devasya-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; ye-who; kuryuù-do; pitå-tarpaëam-pitr

"A person who offers pitå-tarpaëa with water that has washed Lord Hari's feet need never fear demons, ghosts, or cannibals.

Text 42

na rogasya bhayaà caiva nästi vighna-kåtaà bhayamna duñöä naiva ghoräkñäù sväpa-dottha-bhayaà na hi

na-not; rogasya-of disease; bhayam-fear; ca-and; eva-indeed; na-not; asti-is; vighna-kåtam-created by obstacles; bhayam-fear; na-not; duñöä-wicked; na-not' eva-indeed; ghoräkñäù-with horrible eyes; sväpa-dottha-bhayam-fears born from nightmares; na-not; hi-indeed.

"He need never fear diseases, obstacles, nightmares, or wicked men with fearful eyes.

Text 43

grahäù péòäà na kurvanti caurä naçyanti däruëäùkià tasya tértha-gamane devarñéëäà ca darçane

grahäù-ghosts; péòäm-trouble; na-not; kurvanti-do; caurä-theives; naçyanti-perish; däruëäù-terrible; kim-what?; tasya-of him; tértha-gamane-pilgrimage; devarñéëäm-of the demigods and sages; ca-and; darçane-in seeing.

"Ghosts will not trouble him. Thieves that try to rob him will perish. What to him are pilgrimages or the audience of demigods and sages?

Text 44

yasya pädodakaà mürdhni çälagräma-çilodbhavampréto bhavati martaëòaù préto bhavati keçavaù brahmä bhavati su-prétaù préto bhavati çaìkaraù

yasya-of whom; pädodakam-the water from the feet; mürdhni-on the head; çälagräma-çilodbhavam-from the Çälagräma-çilä; prétaù-pleased; bhavati-is; martaëòaù-the sun-god; prétaù-pleased; bhavati-is; keçavaù-Lord Kåñëa; brahmä-Brahmä; bhavati-is; su-prétaù-very pleased; prétaù-pleased; bhavati-is; çaìkaraù-Lord Çiva.

with him. Brahmä is pleased with him. Sürya is pleased with him.

Text 45

pädodakasya mähätmyaà yaù paöhet keçavägrataù

sa yäti paramaà sthänaà yatra devo janärdanaù

pädodakasya-of the water that has washed the feet; mähätmyam-the glories; yaù-who; paöhet-recites; keçavägrataù-in the presence of Lord Kåñëa; sa-he; yäti-goes; paramam-to the supreme; sthänam-abode; yatra-where; devaù-the Lord; janärdanaù-Kåñëa.

"A person who before the Deity of Lord Kåñëa chants the glories of the water that has washed the Lord's feet goes to the spiritual world where Lord Kåñëa always stays."

Text 46

brahmäëòa-puräëe çré-brahma-närada-samväde

präyaçcittaà yadi präptaà kåcchraà vä tv agha-marñaëamso 'pi pädodakaà pétvä çuddhià präpnoti tat-kñaëät

brahmäëòa-puräëe çré-brayhma-närada-samväde-in the Brahmäëòa Puräëa, in a conversation of Lord Brahmä and Närada Muni; präyaçcittam-atonement; yadi-if; präptam-attained; kåcchram-difficulty; vä-or; tv-indeed; agha-marñaëam-the crushing of sins; saù-he; api-even; pädodakam-the waster from the feet; pétvä-drinking; çuddhim-purity; präpnoti-attains; tat-kñaëät-at that moment.

In the Brahmäëòa Puräëa, in a conversation of Lord Brahmä and Närada Muni, it is said:

"A person who drinks the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet at once becomes pure. He has performed severe penance. He has crushed all his sins.

Text 47

açaucaà naiva vidyeta sütake måtake 'pi cayeñäà pädodakà mürdhni präçanaà ye ca kurvate

açaucam-impure; na-not; eva-indeed; vidyeta-becomes; sütake-in birth; måtake-in death; api-even; ca-and; yeñäm-of whom; pädodakm-the water from the feet; mürdhni-on the head; präçanam-drinking; ye-who; ca-and; kurvate-do.

"A person who at the time of birth and the time of death drinks the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet and places that water on his head becomes completely pure.

Text 48

anta-käle 'pi yasyeha déyate pädayor jalamso 'pi sad-gatim äpnoti sad-äcärair bahiñ-kåtaù

anta-käle-at the last moment; api-also; yasya-of whom; iha-here; déyate-is given; pädayoù-of the feet; jalam-the water; saù api-he; sad-gatim-the spiritula world; äpnoti-attains; sad-äcäraiù-with saintly deeds; bahiñ-kåtaù-outside.

"A person who at the moment of death receives the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet goes to the spiritual world even if he lived far away from any pious deeds.

Text 49

apeyaà pibate yas tu bhuìkte yaç cäpy abhojanamagamyägamanä ye vai päpäcäräç ca ye naräù te 'pi püjyä bhavanty äçu sadyaù pädämbu-sevanät

apeyam-not to be drunk; pibate-drinks; yaù-who; tu-indeed; bhuìkte-eats; yaù-who; ca-and; api-also; abhojanam-not to be eaten; agamyä-women who should not be approached; gamanä-approaching; ye-who; vai-indeed; päpäcäräù-sinners; ca-and; ye-who; naräù-people; te-they; api-also; püjyä-to be worshiped; bhavanti-are; äçu-at once; sadyaù-suddenly; pädämbu-sevanät-by serving the water that has washed the Lord's feet.

"Even they who drink what should not be drunk, eat what should not be eaten, approach women who should not be approached, and commit a host of sinful deeds, become at once worshipable if they honor the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet."

Text 50

kià ca

apavitraà yad-annaà syät pänéyaà cäpi päpinämbhuktvä pétvä viçuddhaù syät pétvä pädodakaà hareù

huktvä-eating; pétvä-drinking; viçuddhaù-pure; syät-is; pétvä-drinking; pädodakam-the water from the feet; hareù-of Lord Hari.

It is also said:

"Sinners who eat and drink impure things become purified by drinking the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet.

Text 51

tapta-kåcchrät païca-gavyän mahä-kåcchräd viçiñyatecändräyaëät pära-kåcchrät paräkäd api suvrata käya-çuddhir bhavaty äçu pétvä pädodakaà hareù

täpta-kåcchrät-from severe austerities; païca-gavyät-from panca-gavya; mahä-kåcchrät-from great troubles; viçiñyate-is distinguished; cändräyaëät-from candrayana; pära-kåcchrät-very difficult; parakät-great; api-even; suvrata-O saintly one; käya-çuddhiù-purification of the body; bhavati-is; äçu-at once; pétvä-drinking; pädodakam-the water that has washed the feet; hareù-of Lord Hari.

"O saintly one, drinking the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet is more purifying that performing païca-gavya, tapta-kåcchra, cändräyaëa, pära-kåcchra, or paräka-vrata. By drinking the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet one's body becomes completely pure.

Text 52

aguruà kuìkumaà cäpi karpüraà cänulepanamviñëu-pädämbu-samlagnaà

tad vai pävana-pävanam

agurum-aguru; kuìkumam-kunkuma; ca-and; api-and; karpüram-camphor; ca-and; anulepanam-sandal; viñëu-pädämbu-samlagnam-the water from Lord Viñëu's feet; tat-that; vai-indeed; pävana-pävanam-the most purifying.

"Touched by the water that has washed Lord Viñëu's feet, aguru, kuìkuma, camphor, and sandal paste become supremely purifying.

Text 53

dåñöi-pütaà tu yat toyaà viñëunä prabhaviñëunätad vai päpa-haraà putra kià punaù padayor jalam

dåñöi-by seeing; pütam-purified; tu-indeed; yat-what; toyam-water; viñëunä-by Lord Viñëu; prabhaviñëunä-all-powerful; tat-that; vai-indeed; päpa-sins; haram-removing; putra-O son; kim-what?; punaù-again; padayoù-of the feet; jalam-water.

"My son, water that all-powerful Lord Viñëu has glanced upon has the power to remove all sins. What, then, can be said of the water that has washed His feet?

Text 54

etad-artham ahaà putra çirasä viñëu-tat-paraùdhärayämi pibämy adya mähätmyaà viditaà mama

etad-artham-for tyhis purpose; aham-I; putra-O son; çirasä-with the head; viñëu-tat-paraù-devoted to Lord Viñëu; dhärayämi-I hold; pibämi-I drink; adya-now; mähätmyam-the glory; viditam-known; mama-of me.

"My son, that is why I, who am a devotee of Lord Viñëu, drink that water and place it on my head. Now you have learned from me about the glories of the water that has washed Lord Viñëu's feet.

Text 55

priyas tvam agrajaù putras tad-arthaà gaditaà mayärahasyaà me tv anarhasya na vaktavyaà kadäcana

priyaù-dear; tvam-you; agrajaù-first-born; putraù-son; tad-artham-for that reason; gaditam-spoken; maya-by me; rahasyam-secret; me-of me; tv-indeed; anarhasya-unworthy; na-not; vaktavyam-to be spoken; kadäcana-ever.

"You are my first son and you are very dear to me. That is why I have told you this secret knowledge. Please do not repeat it to anyone who is unworthy.

Text 56

dhärayasva sadä mürdhni präçanaà kuru nityaçaùjanma-måtyu-jara-duùkhair mokñaà yäsyasi putraka

dhärayasva-please hold; sadä-always; mürdhni-on the head; präçanam-drinking; kuru-do; nityaçaù-always; janma-birth; måtyu-death; jarä-old-age; duùkhaiù-with suffering; mokñam-freedom; yasyasi-you will attain; putraka-O son.

, and old-age."

Texts 57 and 58

viñëu-dharmottare

sadyaù phala-pradaà puëyaà sarva-päpa-vinäçanamsarva-maìgala-maìgalyaà sarva-duùkha-vinäçanam

duùsvapna-näçanaà puëyaà viñëu-pädodakaà çubhamsarvopadrava-häntäraà sarva-vyädhi-vinäçanam

viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; sadyaù-at once; phala-pradam-giving the result; puëyam-pious; sarva-päpa-all sins; vinäçanam-destroying; sarva-maìgala-maìgalyam-all-auspiciousness; sarva-duùkha-vinäçanam-destroying all sufferings; duùsvapna-näçanam-destruction of nightmares; puëyam-piety; viñëu-pädodakam-water that has wasehd Lord Viñëu;s feet; çubham-beautiful; sarvopadrava-häntäram-removing all obstacles; sarva-vyädhi-vinäçanam-destroying all diseases.


"The beautiful water that has washed Lord Viñëu's feet quickly brings great auspiciousness and the benefits of pious deeds, destroys all sins, nightmares, obstacles, diseases, and sufferings, . . .

Text 59

sarvotpäta-praçamanaà sarva-päpa-niväraëamsarva-kalyäëa-sukhadaà sarva-käma-phala-pradam

sarvotpäta-praçamanam-quells all calamities; sarva-päpa-niväraëam-removes all sins; sarva-kalyäëa-sukhadam-brings all-auspicious happiness; sarva-käma-phala-pradam-fulfills all desires.

. . . stops all calamities, removes all sins, brings all-auspicious happiness, fulfills all desires, . . .

Text 60

sarva-siddhi-pradaà dhanyaà sarva-dharma-vivardhanamsarva-çatru-praçamanaà sarva-bhoga-pradäyakam

sarva-siddhi-pradam-gives all perfection; dhanyam-glorious; sarva-dharma-vivardhanam-increases all piety; sarva-çatru-praçamanam-quiets all enemies; sarva-bhoga-pradäyakam-gives all pleasures.

. . . brings all perfections, glories, piety, and pleasures, and quiets all enemies.

Text 61

sarva-térthasya phala-daà mürdhni pädämbu-dhäraëamprayägasya prabhäsasya puñkarasya ca sevane påthüdakasya térthasya äcänto labhate phalam

sarva-térthasya-of all holy places; phala-dam-giving the results; mürdhni-on the head; pädämbu-dhäraëam-the water from the lotus feet; prayägasya-of Prayaga; prabhäsasya-of Prabhasa; puñkarasya-of Puskara; ca-and; sevane-in service; påthüdakasya-of the water; térthasya-from the feet; äcäntaù-sipping; labhate-attains; phalam-the result.

"A person who places on his head the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet attains the benefit of all pilgrimages. A person who sips some of the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet attains the benefit of going on pilgrimage to Prayäga, Prabhäsa, and Puñkara.

Text 62

cakra-térthaà phalaà yädåk tädåk pädämbu-dhäraëätsarasvatyäà gayäyäà ca gatvä yat präpnuyät phalam tat phalaà labhate çreñöhaà mürdhni pädämbu-dhäraëät

cakra-tértham-Cakra-tirtha; phalam-result; yädåk-as; tädåk-that; pädämbu-dhäraëät-by placing on one;s head the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet; sarasvatyäm-in the Sarasvati; gayäyäm-in Gaya; ca-and; gatvä-going; yat-what; präpnuyät-attains; phalam-result; tat-that; phalam-result; labhate-attains; çreñöham-best; mürdhni-on the head; pädämbu-dhäraëät-by accepting the water from the Lord's feet.

"By placing on one's head the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet one attains the benefit of going on pilgrimage to Cakra-tértha and Gayä, and bathing in the Sarasvaté."

Text 63

skände

pädodakasya mähätmyaà devo jänäti çaìkaraùviñëu-päda-cyutä gaìgä çirasä yena dhäritä sthänaà naivästi päpasya dehinäà deha-madhyataù

skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; pädodakasya-of the water that has washed the Lord';s feet; mähätmyam-the glorty; devaù-the Lord; jänäti-knows; çaìkaraù-Çiva; viñëu-of Lord Viñëu; päda-from the feet; cyutä-fallen; gaìgä-the Gaìgä; çirasä-by the head; yena-by which; dhäritä-held; sthänam-abode; na-not; eba-indeed; asti-is; päpasya-of sin; dehinäm-of the embodies souls; deha-madhyataù-in the midst of bodies.


"Lord Çiva, who carries on his head the Gaìgä, which flows from Lord Viñëu's feet, well knows the glory of the water that has washed Lord Viñëu's feet. That is why sin can never touch him.

Texts 64 and 65

sa-bähyäbhyantaraà yasya vyäptaà pädodakena vaipädodaà viñëu-naivedyaà udare yasya tiñöhati

näçrayaà labhate päpaà svayam eva vinaçyatimahä-päpa-graha-grasto vyäpto roga-çatair yadi

sa-bähyäbhyantaram-within and without; yasya-of whom; vyäptam-pervaded; pädodakena-with the water of the feet; vai-indeed; pädodam-the water of the feet; viñëu-naivedyam-food offered to Lord Viñëu; udare-in the stomach; yasya-of whom; tiñöhati-stays; na-not; äçrayam-shelter; labhate-attains; päpam-sin; svayam-personally; eva-indeed; vinaçyati-perishes; mahä-päpa-graha-grastaù-haunted by great sins; vyäptaù-pervaded; roga-çataiù-by hundreds of diseases; yadi-if.

"When a person places on his head and in his stomach the water that has washed Lord Viñëu's feet, and when he places in his stomach the remnants of food offered to Lord Viñëu, sin cannot make its home in him. Even if he is haunted by many great sins, and even if he is tormented by hundreds of diseases, all his sins perish.

Texts 66 and 67

hareù pädodakaà pétvä mucyate nätra saàçayaùçirasä tiñöhate yeñäà nityaà pädodakaà hareù

kià kariñyati te loke tértha-koöi-manorathaiùayam eva paro dharma idam eva paraà tapaù idam eva paraà térthaà viñëu-pädämbu yat pibet

hareù-of Lord Hari; pädodakam-the water that has washed the feet; pétvä-drinking; mucyate-is released; na-not; atra-here; saàçayaù-doubt; çirasä-with the head; tiñöhate-stands; yeñäm-of whom; nityam-always; pädodakam-the water of the feet; hareù-of Lord Hari; kim-why?; kariñyati-will do; te-they; loke-in the world; tértha-koöi-manorathaiù-with the desire for millions of pilgrimages; ayam-this; eva-indeed; paraù-supreme; dharma-piety; idam-this; eva-indeed; param-supreme; tapaù-austerity; idam-this; eva-indeed; param-supreme; tértham-pilgirmage; viñëu-pädämbu-the water that has washed Lord Viñëu's feet; yat-what; pibet-drinks.

"A person who drinks the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet becomes liberated. Of this there is no doubt. Why would they who place on their heads the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet be very interested to go on millions of pilgrimages? To drink the water that has washed Lord Viñëu's feet is the greatest pilgrimage, the greatest pious act, the greatest austerity."

Text 68

tatraiva çré-çivoma-samväde

vilayaà yänti päpäni péte pädodake hareùkià punar viñëu-pädodaà çälagräma-çilä-cyutam

tatra-there; eva-indeed; çré-çivoma-samväde-in a conversation of Lord Çiva and Umä; vilayam-to destruction; yänti-go; päpäni-sins; péte-when drunk; pädodake-the water of the feet; hareù-of Lord Hari; kim-what?; punaù-more; viñëu-pädodam-the water of Lord Viñëu's feet; çälagräma-çilä-cyutam-faleen from the Çälagräma-çilä.

In the Skanda Puräëa Lord Çiva tells Goddess Umä:

"When a person drinks the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet, all his sins perish. What, then, can be said when a person drinks the water that has washed the Çälagräma-çilä?

Text 69

viçeñena haret päpaà brahma-hatyädikaà priyepéte pädodake viñëor yadi präëair vimucyate hatvä yama-bhaöän sarvän vaiñëavaà lokam äpnuyät

viçeñena-specifically; haret-removes; päpam-sin; brahma-hatyädikam-beginning with the murder of a brähmaëa; priye-O beloved; péte-drunk; pädodake-the water of the feet; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; yadi-if; praëaiù-with life; vimucyate-released; hatvä-killing; yama-bhaöän-from the soldiers of Yama; sarvän-all; vaiñëavam-of Lord Viñëu; lokam-the world; äpnuyät-attains.

"O beloved, the act of drinking the water that has washed Lord Viñëu's feet removes all sins, beginning with the sin of killing a brähmaëa. When a person who has drunk this water dies, he defeats Yama's soldiers and goes to the world of Lord Viñëu."

Text 70

tatraiva çré-çiva-kärttikeya-samväde çré-çälagräma-çilä-mähätmye

chinnas tena mahä-sena garbhäväsaù su-däruëaùpétäà yena sadä viñëoù çälagräma-çilä-jalam

tatraiva çré-çiva-kärttikeya-samväde çré-çälagräma-çilä-mähätmye-in the Skanda Puräëa, in the Çré Çälagräma-çilä-mähätmya, Lord Çiva tells Kärttikeya; chinnaù-broken; tena-by that; mahä-sena-O great general; garbhäväsaù-living in a mother's womb; su-däruëaù-very terrible; pétäm-drunk; yena-by whom; sadä-regularly; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; çälagräma-çilä-jalam-the water of the Çälagräma-çilä.

In the Skanda Puräëa, in the Çré Çälagräma-çilä-mähätmya, Lord Çiva tells Kärttikeya:

"O great general, they who regularly drink the water that has washed the Çälagräma-çilä are rescued from having again to enter a mother's womb.

Text 71

ye pibanti narä nityaà çälagräma-çilä-jalampaïca-gavya-sahasrais tu präçitaiù kià prayojanam

ye-who; pibanti-drink; narä-people; nityam-regularly; çälagräma-çilä-jalam-the water of the Çälagräma-çilä; païca-gavya-sahasraiù-with a thousand panca-gavyas; tu-indeed; präçitaiù-drunk; kim-what?; prayojanam-is the need.

aïca-gavyas?

Text 72

präyaçcitte samutpanne kià dänaiù kim upoñaëaiùcändräyaëaiç ca térthaiç ca pétvä pädodakaà çuci

präyaçcitte-atonement; samutpanne-performed; kim-what?; dänaiù-with charity; kim-what?; upoñaëaiù-with fasting; cändräyaëaiù-with candrayana; ca-and; térthaiù-with pilgrimages; ca-and; pétvä-having drunk; pädodakam-the water that has washed the feet; çuci-sacred.

"What need is there for charity, fasting, cändräyaëa-vrata, and pilgrimages for a person who already atoned for his sins by drinking the sacred water that has washed Lord Viñëu's feet?"

Text 73

båhan-näradiye lubdhakopakhyänärambhe

hari-pädodakaà yas tu kñaëa-mätraà ca dhärayetsa snätaù sarva-térthesu viñëoù priyataras tathä

båhan-näradiye lubdhakopakhyänärambhe-in the Närada Puräëa, in the beginning of the hunter's story; hari-pädodakam-the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet; yaù-who; tu-indeed; kñaëa-mätram-for a single moment; ca-and; dhärayet-holds; sa-he; snätaù-bathed; sarva-térthesu-in all holy rivers; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; priyataraù-very dear; tathä-so.

In the Närada Puräëa, in the beginning of the hunter's story, it is said:

"A person who for a single moment places on his head the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet has bathed in all holy rivers. He is very dear to Lord Viñëu.

Text 74

akäla-måtyu-çamanaà sarva-vyädhi-vinäçanamsarva-duùkhopaçamanaà hari-pädodakaà çubham

akäla-untimely; måtyu-death; çamanam-making quiet; sarva-vyädhi-vinäçanam-destroying all diseases; sarva-duùkhopaçamanam-quieting all sufferings; hari-pädodakam-the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet; çubham-sacred.

"The sacred water that has washed Lord Hari's feet stops untimely death, all diseases, and all sufferings."

Text 75

tatraiva tad-upäkhyänänte

hari-pädodaka-sparçäl lubdhako vita-kalmañaùdivyaà vimänäm äruhya munim enam athäbravét

tatra-there; eva-indeed; tad-upäkhyänänte-at the end of the story; hari-pädodaka-sparçäl-by touching th water that has washed Lord Hari's feet; lubdhakaù-the hunter; vita-kalmañaù-freed of sins; divyam-celestial; vimänäm-airplane; äruhya-

climbing; munim-sage; enam-to the; atha-then; abravét-said.

In the Närada Puräëa, at the end of the hunter's story, it is said:

"By touching the water that had washed Lord Hari's feet, the hunter became at once free of all sins. Entering the celestial airplane, he said to the sage:

Text 76

hari-pädodakaà yasmän mayi tvaà kñiptavän munepräpito 'smi tvayä tasmät tad viñëoù paramaà padam

hari-pädodakam-the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet; yasmän-because; mayi-on me; tvam-you; kñiptavän-thrown; mune-O sage; präpitaù-attained; asmi-I have; tvayä-by you; tasmät-therefore; tat-that; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; paramam-the supreme; padam-abode.

" `O sage, it is because you sprinkled on me the water that washed Lord Hari's feet that I am now about to enter Lord Viñëu's supreme abode.' "

Text 77


pädaà pürvaà kila spåñövä gaìgäbhüt smartå-mokña-däviñëoù sadyas tu tat-saìgé pädämbu katham éòyate

hari-bhakti-sudhodaye-in the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya; pädam-foot; pürvam-before; kila-indeed; spåñövä-touching; gaìgä-the Gaìaìgé-touching that; pädämbu-the water of the feet; katham-why?; éòyate-is glorified.


"In ancient times the Gaìgä touched Lord Viñëu's foot. The Gaìgä gives liberation to they who think of her. Why should the water that has washed Lord Viñëu's feet be glorified in this way? Why should it be thought more purifying that the Gaìgä?

Text 78

täpa-trayänalo yo 'sau na çämyet sakaläbdhibhiùdrutaà çämyati so 'lpena çrémad-viñëu-padämbunä

täpa-sufferings; traya-three; analaù-fire; yaù-which; asau-that; na-not; çämyet-remembers; sakala-all; abdhibhiù-by oceans; drutam-at once; çämyati-extinguishes; saù-that; alpena-small; çrémad-viñëu-padämbunä-with the water that has washed Lord Viñëu's feet.

"The fire of the threefold material miseries, a fire all the oceans in the world cannot extinguish, is extinguished at once by a single drop of the water that has washed Lord Viñëu's feet.

Text 79

yuddhästräbhedya-kavacaà bhavägni-stambhanauñadhamsarväìgaiù sarvathä dhäryaà pädyaà çuci-padaù sadä

yuddhästra-by weapons; abhedya-unbreakable; kavacam-armor; bhava-of birth and death; agni-the fever; stambhana-stopping; auñadham-medicine; sarväìgaiù-with all limbs; sarvathä-in all respects; dhäryam-to be held; pädyam-the water of the feet; çuci-padaù-sacred; sadä-always.

"One should always place on all his limbs the water that has washed Lord hari's feet, water that is an armor invincible to all weapons, water that is a medicine to cure the fever of repeated birth and death.

Text 80

amåtatvävahaà nityaà viñëu-pädämbu yaù pibetsa pibaty amåtaà nityaà mäse mäse tu devatäù

amåtatva-immortality; avaham-bringing; nityam-always; viñëu-pädämbu-the water that has washed Lord Viñëu's feet; yaù-who; pibet-drinks; sa-he; pibati-drinks; amåtam-nectar; nityam-daily; mäse-month; mäse-after month; tu-indeed; devatäù-a demigod.

"Every month the demigods drink nectar, but still they do not become immortal. It is they who regularly drink the water that has washed Lords Viñëu's feet who attain immortality.

Text 81

mähätmyam iyad ity asya vaktä yo 'pi sa nirbhayaùnanv anargha-maëer mülyaà kalpayann agham açnute

mähätmyam-glory; iyat-attain; iti-thus; asya-of him; vaktä-the speaker; yaù-who; api-also; sa-he; nirbhayaù-fearless; nanv-indeed; anargha-maëeù-of a priceless jewel; mülyam-price; kalpayann-considering; agham-sin; açnute-attain.

"A person who glorifies the water that has washed Lord Viñëu's feet becomes fearless. A person who tries to set a limit on the value of the priceless gem of that water commits a sin."

Text 82

anyaträpi

sa brahmacäré sa vraté äçramé ca sadä-çuciùviñëu-pädodakaà yasya mukhe çirasi vigrahe

anyatra-in another place; api-also; sa-he; brahmacäré-brahmacari; sa-he; vraté-following vows; äçramé-following the asrmas; ca-and; sadä-çuciù-always pure; viñëu-pädodakam-the water that has washed Lord Viñëu's feet; yasya-of whom; mukhe-in the mouth; çirasi-on the head; vigrahe-on the body.


"A person who places the water that has washed Lord Viñëu's feet on his head, on his body, and in his mouth is always pure. He is a brahmacäré. He is a follower of vows. He is a follower of varëäçrama.

Text 83

janma-prabhåti-päpänäà prayaçcittaà yadécchatiçälagräma-çilä-väri päpa-haré niñevyatäm

janma-from birth; prabhåti-beginning; päpänäm-of sins; prayaçcittam-atonement; yadi-if; icchati-desires; çälagräma-çilä-väri-the water that has washed the Çälagräma-çilä; päpa-haré-removing sins; niñevyatäm-should be served.

"If a person wishes to become free from all the sins committed since the time of his birth, he should honor the water that has washed the Çälagräma-çilä, water that removes all sins."

Text 84

ata eva tejodraviëa-païcarätre çré-brahmaëoktaà

péöha-praëäläd udakaà påthag ädäya putrakasiïcayen mürdhni bhaktänäà sarva-tértha-mayaà hi tat. iti.

ata eva-therefore; tejodraviëa-païcarätre çré-brahmaëoktam-in the Tejodraviëa-païcarätra, Çré Brahmä explains; péöha-of the feet; praëälät-flowing in a current; udakam-the water; påthag-specifically; ädäya-taking; putraka-O son; siïcayet-should sprinkle; mürdhni-on th ehead; bhaktänäm-of the devotees; sarva-tértha-mayam-consiting of all holy places; hi-indeed; tat-that; iti-thus.

In the Tejodraviëa-païcarätra, Çré Brahmä explains:

"My son, a person should take the water that has washed Lord Hari's feet and sprinkle it over the Vaiñëavas' heads. That water contains within it all holy places."

Text 85

pädodakasya mähätmyaà vikhyätaà sarva-çästrataùlikhituà çaknuyät ko hi sindhürmén gaëayann api

pädodakasya-of the water that has washed the feet; mähätmyam-the glory; vikhyätam-famous; sarva-çästrataù-in all the scriptures; likhitum-to write; çaknuyät-may be able; kaù-who?; hi-indeed; sindhürmén-the waves in the ocean; gaëayann-counting; api-even.

The glories of the water that has washed Lord Viñëu's feet are described in all the scriptures. What person, even if he has the power to count all the waves in the ocean, has the power to write about them all.

Text 86

viçeñataç ca pädodaà tulasé-dala-samyutamçaìkhe kåtvä vaiñëavebhyo dattvä prägvat pibet svayam

viçeñataù-specifically; ca-and; pädodam-the water of the feet; tulasé-dala-samyutam-with tulasé leaves; çaìkhe-in a conchshell; kåtvä-doing; vaiñëavebhyaù-to the Vaiñëavas; dattvä-offered; prägvat-as before; pibet-should drink; svayam-personally.

One should offer to Lord Hari water mixed with tulasé leaves in a conchshell. One should then offer the remnants of this water to the Vaiñëavas and one should then also drink it himself.

Text 87

atha çaìkha-kåta-pädodaka-mähätmyaà


kåtvä pädodakaà çaìkhe vaiñëavänäà mähätmanämyo dadyät tulasé-miçraà cändräyaëa-çataà labhet

atha-now; çaìkha-kåta-pädodaka-mähätmyam-the Glories of Water Offered in a Conchshell; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; çré-brahma-närada-samväde-in a conversation of Çré Brahma and Çré Narada; kåtvä-doing; pädodakam-water fo thew feet; çaìkhe-in a conchshell; vaiñëavänäm-of the Vaiñëavas; mähätmanäm-great souls; yaù-who; dadyät-offers; tulasé-miçram-mixed with tulasé leaves; cändräyaëa-çatam-a hundred candrayanas; labhet-attains.

The Glories of Water Offered in a Conchshell

In the Skanda Puräëa, in a conversation of Çré Brahmä and Çré Närada, it is said:

"A person who offers to Lord Hari water mixed with tulasé leaves in a conchshell, and then offers the remnants of this water to the saintly-hearted Vaiñëavas attains the pious benefit of a hundred cändräyaëas.

Text 88

gåhétvä kåñëa-pädämbu çaìkhe kåtvä tu vaiñëavaùyo vahet çirasä nityaà sa munis tapasottamaù

gåhétvä-taking; kåñëa-pädämbu-the water of Lord Kåñëa's feet; çaìkhe-in a conchshell; kåtvä-doing; tu-indeed; vaiñëavaù-Vaiñëava; yaù-who; vahet-should carry; çirasä-on his head; nityam-always; sa-he; muniù-sage; tapasottamaù-the most austere.

"A Vaiñëava who regularly places on his head the water offered in a conchshell to Lord Kåñëa is the most austere of saintly sages.

Text 89


çälagräma-çilä-toyaà yadi çaìkha-bhåtaà pibethatyä-koöi-vinäçaà ca kurute nätra saàçayaù

pädme devadüta-vikuëòala-samväde-in the Padma Puräëa, in a conversation of Devadüta and Vikuëòala; çälagräma-çilä-toyam-the water of the Çälagräma-çilä; yadi-if; çaìkha-bhåtam-in a conchshell; pibet-drinks; hatyä-koöi-vinäçam-the destruction of ten million murders; ca-and; kurute-does; na-not; atra-here; saàçayaù-doubt.


"A person who drinks the water that has washed the Çälagräma-çilä destroys the sinful reactions of ten million murders. Of this there is no doubt."

Text 90

agastya-saàhitäyaà

çälagräma-çilä-toyaà tulasé-dala-väsitamye pibanti punas teñäà stanya-pänaà na vidyate. iti.

agastya-saàhitäyam-in the Agastya-saàhitä; çälagräma-çilä-toyam-the water of the Çälagräma-çilä; tulasé-dala-väsitam-scented with a tulasé leaf; ye-who; pibanti-drink; punaù-again; teñäm-of them; stanya-pänam-the drinking of a mother's milk; na-not; vidyate-is; iti-thus.

In the Agastya-saàhitä

"A person who drinks the water mixed the tulasé leaves that has washed the Çälagräma-çilä will never again drink from a mother's breast."

Text 91

çré-viñëor vaiñëavänäà ca pävanaà caraëodakamsarva-tértha-mayaà pétvä kuryäd äcamanaà na hi

çré-viñëoù-of Çré Viñëu; vaiñëavänäm-of the Vaiñëavas; ca-and; pävanam-purifying; caraëodakam-water from the feet; sarva-tértha-mayam-consisting of all holy places; pétvä-drinking; kuryät-should do; äcamanam-sipping; na-not; hi-indeed.

"A person who drinks the water that has washed the feet of Lord Viñëu and the Vaiñëavas, supremely purifying water that contains within it all sacred rivers, need never drink any other sacred water to become purified.

Text 92

tad uktaà skände çivena

viñëoù pädodakaà pétvä paçcäd açuci-çaìkayääcämati ca yo mohäd brahma-hä sa nigadyate

tat-that; uktam-said; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; çivena-by Lord Çiva; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; pädodakam-the water that has washed the feet; pétvä-drinking; paçcät-after; açuci-impurity; çaìkayä-with anxiety; äcämati-sips; ca-and; yaù-who; mohät-our of bewilderment; brahma-hä-the killing of a brähmaëa; sa-he; nigadyate-is said.


"A person who after drinking the water that has washed Lord Viñëu's feet worries that he is still impure is a sinner. He is the killer of a brähmaëa."

Text 93

çrutiç ca

bhagavän pavitram. bhagavat-pädau pavitram. bhagavat-pädodakaà pavitram. na tat-päna äcamanéyam. yathä hi soma iti.

çrutiù-the Çruti-sastra; ca-and; bhagavän-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; pavitram-pure; bhagavat-pädau-the feet of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; pavitram-pure; bhagavat-padodakam-the water that has washed the feet of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; pavitram-pure; na-not; tat-päna-drinking that; äcamanéyam-to be spat out; yathä-as; hi-indeed; soma-soma; iti-thus.

The Çruti-çästra explains:

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is supremely purifying.The feet of the Supreme Personality of Godhead are supremely purifying.The water that has washed the feet of the Supreme Personality of Godhead is supremely purifying. One should not drink that water and then spit it out. It is purifying like soma."

Text 94

sauparëe ca

viñëu-pädodakaà pétvä bhakta-pädodakaà tathäya äcämati sammohäd brahma-hä sa nigadyate. iti.

sauparëe-in the Garuòa Puräëa; ca-and; viñëu-pädodakam-the water of Lord Viñëu's feet; pétvä-drinking; bhakta-pädodakam-the water of the devotees' feet; tathä-so; ya-who; äcämati-spits; sammohät-out of illusion; brahma-hä-a killer of a brähmaëa; sa-he; nigadyate-is called; iti-thus.


"A person who first sips and then foolishly spits out the water that has washed the feet of Lord Viñëu or the Vaiñëavas is sinful like the killer of a brähmaëa."

Text 95

tataù çuddhaà payaù-pürëaà gandha-puñpäkñatänvitamadharopari sannyasec chaìkhaà bhagavad-agrataù

tataù-then; çuddham-pure; payaù-pürëam-water; gandha-puñpäkñatänvitam-with scents and flowers and whole grains of rice; adhara-lips; upari-above; sannyasec-should offer; çaìkham-conchshell; bhagavad-agrataù-in the presence of the Lord.

Then one should offer to the lips of the Deity a conchshell filled with pure water in which are scents, flowers, and unbroken grains of rice.

Text 96

atha çré-bhagavad-agrataù çaìkha-sthäpana-mähätamyaà

skände brahma-närada-samväde çaìkha-mähätmye

purato väsudevasya sa-puñpaà sa-jaläkñatamçaìkham abhyarcitaà paçyet tasya lakñmér na durlabhä

atha-then; çré-bhagavad-agrataù-in the presence opf the Supreme Personality of Godhead; çaìkha-sthäpana-mähätamyam-the glories of offering a conchshell; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; brahma-närada-samväde-in a conversation of Brahma and Narada; çaìkha-; akñatam-with unbroklen grains of rice; çaìkham-conchshell; abhyarcitam-worshiped; paçyet-should see; tasya-of him; lakñméù-opulence; na-not; durlabhä-difficult to obtain.

In the Skanda Puräëa, Çaìkha-mähätmya, in a conversation of Brahma and Närada, it is said:

"For a person who looks on as a conchshell filled with water in which are scents, flowers, and unbroken grains of rice, is offered to the Deity, opulence and prosperity are not difficult to obtain.

Text 97

sa-puñpaà väri-jaà yasya durväkñata-samanvitampurato väsudevasya tasya çréù sarvato-mukhi. iti.

sa-puñpam-with flowers; väri-jam-a conchshell; yasya-of whom; durvä-druva grass; akñata-unbroken grains of rice; samanvitam-with; purataù-in the presence; väsudevasya-of Lorrd Kåñëa; tasya-of him; çréù-opulence; sarvato-mukhi-is everywhere; iti-thus.

"At every turn opulence and prosperity rush to meet a person who offers to the Deity of Lord Kåñëa a conchshell filled with water in which are dürvä grass, flowers, and unbroken grains of rice.

Text 98

bhütvätha bhaktimän çrémat- tulasyä känane prabhumsampüjyäbhyarcayet täà ca çré-kåñëa-caraëa-priyäm

bhütvä-becoming; atha-then; bhaktimän-a devotee; çrémat-glorious; tulasyä-of Tulasé; känane-in the forest; prabhum-the Lord; sampüjya-worshiping; abhyarcayet-should worship; täm-her; ca-and; çré-kåñëa-caraëa-priyäm-dear to the lotus feet of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

"A devotee should go to a glorious Tulasé forest and worship Tulasé-devé, who is dear to Lord Kåñëa's feet.

Text 99

atha çré-tulasé-vana-püjä

prägvat tv arghyaà tato 'bhyarcya gandha-puñpäkñatädinästutvä bhagavatéà taà ca praëamet prärthya daëòavat

atha-now; çré-tulasé-vana-püjä-the worship of the Tulasé forest; prägvat-as before; tv-indeed; arghyam-arghya; tataù-then; abhyarcya-worshiping; gandha-puñpäkñatädinä-with scents, flowers, unroken grains fo rice, and other things; stutvä-offering prayers; bhagavatém-to the goddess; tam-to her; ca-and; praëamet-should bow down; prärthya-pffering prayers; daëòavat-like a stick.

The worship of the Beautiful Tulasé Forest

As before, one should offer arghya with scents, flowers, unbroken grains of rice, and other things. Then one should glorify Tulasé-devé, bow down like a stick (daëòavat) before her, and make some request.

Text 100

athärghya-mantraù

çriyaù çriye çriyäväse nityaà çrédhara-satkåtebhaktyä dattaà mayä devi arghyaà gåhëa namo 'stu te

atha-then; arghya-mantraù-the arghya mantra; çriyaù-of the goddess of fortune; çriye-to the goddess of fortune; çriyäväse-the home of the goddess of fortune; nityam-always; çrédhara-of the husband of the goddess of fortune; satkåte-honored; bhaktyä-with devotion; dattam-given; mayä-by me; devi-o goddess; arghyam-arghya; gåhëa-please accept; namaù-obeisances; astu-are; te-to you.

The Mantra For Offering Arghya

"O goddess, O glory of the goddess of fortune, O home of the goddess of fortune, O object of worship for the goddess of fortune's husband, please accept this arghya I offer to you with devotion. I offer my respectful obeisances to you."

Text 101

püjä-mantraù

nirmitä tvaà purä devair arcitä tvaà suräsuraiùtulasi hara me päpaà püjäà gåhëa namo 'stu te

püjä-for worship; mantraù-the mantra; nirmitä-created; tvam-you; purä-before; devaiù-by the demigods; arcitä-worshiped; tvam-you; suräsuraiù-by the suras and asuras; tulasi-O Tulasé; hara-please remove; me-of me; päpam-the sin; püjäm-worship; gåhëa-please accept; namaù-obeisances; astu-are; te-unto you.

The Mantra For Worshiping Tulasé-devé

"In ancient times you were planted by the demigods. You are worshiped by the suras and asuras. O Tulasé, please remove my sins. Please accept the worship I offer you. I offer my respectful obeisances to you."

Text 102

stutiç ca

mahä-prasäda-janané sarva-saubhagya-vardhinéädhi-vyädhi-haré nityaà tulasi tvaà namo 'stu te

stutiù-glorification; ca-and; mahä-prasäda-janané-the mother of great mercy; sarva-saubhagya-vardhiné-in the increaser of all good fortune; ädhi-vyädhi-haré-the remover of all diseases and anxieties; nityam-always; tulasi-O Tulasé; tvam-you; namaù-obesiances; astu-are; te-to you.

A Prayer Chanting the Glories of Tulasé-devé

"You are the mother of great mercy. You grant all good fortune. You remove diseases and anxieties. O Tulasé-devé, again and again I offer my respectful obeisances to you."

Text 103

prärthanä

çriyaà dehi yaço dehi kértim äyus tathä sukhambalaà puñöià tathä dharmaà tulasi tvaà praséda me

prärthanä-request; çriyam-wealth; dehi-please give; yaçaù-fame; dehi-please give; kértim-glory; äyuù-long life; tathä-so; sukham-happiness; balam-strength; puñöim-properity; tathä-so; dharmam-piety; tulasé-O Tulasé; tvam-you; praséda-please be merciful; me-to me.

A Prayer Filled With Requests

"Please give me wealth. Please give me fame, glory, long life, happiness, strength, prosperity, and piety. O Tulasé-devé, please be merciful to me."

Text 104

praëäma-väkyam

avanté-khaëòe

yä dåñöä nikhilägha-saìgha-çamané spåñöä vapuù-pävané rogäëäm abhivanditä nirasiné siktäntaka-träsinépratyäsatti-vidhäyiné bhagavataù kåñëasya samropitä nyastä tac-caraëe vimukti-phaladä tasyai tulasyai namaù

praëäma-väkyam-words for bowing down; avanté-khaëòe-in the Avanti-khanda; yä-who; dåñöä-seen; nikhilägha-all sins; saìgha-multitude; çamané-pacifying; spåñöä-touched; vapuù-pävané-purifying the body; rogäëäm-of diseases; abhivanditä-bowed down; nirasiné-expellling; siktä-watered; antaka-death; träsiné-terrifying; pratyäsatti-vidhäyiné-giving nearness; bhagavataù-to the Supreme Personality of Godhead; kåñëasya-Lord Kåñëa; samropitä-planted; nyastä-placed; tac-caraëe-at the feet; vimukti-phaladä-giving liberation; tasyai-to her; tulasyai-Tulasé-devé; namaù-obeisances.

Words to Recite While Offering Obeisances to Tulasé-devé

In the Avanté-khaëòa it is said:

"I offer my respectful obeisances to Tulasé-devé. When someone sees her, she destroys all his sins. When someone touches her, she purifies his body. When someone offers obeisances to her, she cures his diseases. When someone waters her, she makes Yamaräja afraid of him. When someone plants her, she brings him near to Lord Kåñëa. When someone places her at Lord Kåñëa's feet, she gives him liberation.

Text 105

bhagavatyäs tulasyäs tu mähätmyämåta-sägarelobhät kürditum icchämi kñudras tat kñamyatäà tvayä

bhagavatyäù-of Goddess; tulasyäù-Tulasé; tu-indeed; mähätmyämåta-sägare-in the ocean of the nectar glories; lobhät-out of greed; kürditum-to jump; icchämi-I wish; kñudraù-tiny; tat-that; kñamyatäm-to be forgiven; tvayä-by you.

"Even though I am only a tiny creature, I still yearn to dive into the nectar ocean of Goddess Tulasé's glories. O goddess, please forgive me."

Text 106

atha tulasé-vana-püja-mähätmyaà

skände

çravaëa-dvädaçé-yoge çälagräma-çilärcaneyat phalaà saìgame proktaà tulasé-püjanena tat

atha-now; tulasé-vana-püja-mähätmyam-the Glories of Worshiping the Tulasé Forest; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; çravaëa-dvädaçé-yoge-on sravana-dvadasi; çälagräma-çilärcane-in thwe worship of the Çälagräma-çilä; yat-what; phalam-result; saìgame-in the contact; proktam-said; tulasé-of Tulasé; püjanena-by the worship; tat-that.

The Glories of Worshiping the Tulasé Forest


"By worshiping Tulasé-devé one attains the same result that is obtained by worshiping the Çälagräma-çilä on Çravaëä dvädaçé."

Text 107

gäruòe

dhätré-phalena yat puëyaà jayantyäà samupoñaëekhagendra bhavate nåëäà tulasé-püjanena tat

gäruòe-in the Garuòa Puräëa; dhätré-phalena-by the dhatri fruit; yat-what; puëyam-piety; jayantyäm-on Jayanti; samupoñaëe-fasting; khagendra-O king of birds; bhavate-is; nåëäm-of the people; tulasé-püjanena-by worshipign Tulasé; tat-that.


"O king of birds, by worshiping Tulasé-devé one attains the same result as one attains by honoring the dhätré fruit or by fasting on Janmäñöamé.

Text 108

prayäga-snäna-niratau käçyäà präëa-vimokñaëeyat phalaà vihitaà devais tulasé-püjanena tat

prayäga-snäna-niratau-bathing at Prayaga; käçyäm-at Varanasi; präëa-vimokñaëe-dying; yat-what; phalam-result; vihitam-placed; devaiù-by the devas; tulasé-püjanena-by worshiping Tulasé-0devé; tat-that.

"O king of birds, the demigods say that by worshiping Tulasé-devé one attains the same result as one attains by bathing at Prayäga or dying at Väräëasé."

Text 109


caturëäm api varëäëäà äçramäëäà viçeñataùstréëäà ca puruñänäà ca püjiteñöaà dadäti hi

agastya-saàhitäyäm-in the Agastya-saàhitä; caturëäm-four; api-indeed; varëäëäm-of varnas; äçramäëäm-of asramas; viçeñataù-specifically; stréëäm-of women; ca-and; puruñänäm-of men; ca-and; püjita-worshiped; iñöam-desired; dadäti-gives; hi-thus.


"When she is properly worshiped, Tulasé-devé fulfills the desires of the men and women of the four varëas and äçramas.

Text 110

tulasé ropitä siktä dåñöä spåñöä ca pävayetärädhitä prayatnena sarva-käma-phala-pradä

tulasé-Tulasé; ropitä-planted; siktä-watered; dåñöä-seen; spåñöä-touched; ca-and; pävayet-purifies; ärädhitä-worshiped; prayatnena-with care; sarva-käma-phala-pradä-fulfilling all desires.

"When she is planted, watered, seen, or touched, Tulasé-devé brings purification. When she is worshiped she fulfills all desires.

Text 111

kià ca

pradakñinäà bhramitvä ye namaskurvanti nityaçaùna teñäà duritaà kiïcid akñénam avaçiñyate

kià ca-furthermore; pradakñinäm-circumambulation; bhramitvä-going around; ye-who; namaskurvanti-bow down; nityaçaù-regularly; na-not; teñäm-of them; duritam-sin; kiïcit-anything; akñénam-great; avaçiñyate-remains.

It is also said:

"They who regularly circumambulate Tulasé-devé and bow down before her become free from sin.

Text 112

båhan-näradéye yajïadhvajopäkhyänänte

püjyamänä ca tulasé yasya veçmani tiñöhatitasya sarväëi sreyäàsi vardhante 'har ahar dvijäù

båhan-näradéye yajïadhvajopäkhyänänte-in the Närada Puräëa, at the end of Yajïadhvaja's story; püjyamänä-worshiped; ca-and; tulasé-Tulasé; yasya-of whom; veçmani-in the home; tiñöhati-stays; tasya-of him; sarväëi-all; sreyäàsi-good; vardhante-increases; ahar ahaù-day after day; dvijäù-O brähmaëas.

In the Närada Puräëa, at the end of Yajïadhvaja's story, it is said:

"A person who worships Tulasé-devé in his home finds that his good fortune increases day by day."

Text 113

ata eva pädme devadüta-vikuëòala-samväde

pakñe pakñe tu sampräpte dvädaçyäà vaiçya-sattamabrahmädayo 'pi kurvanti tulasé-vana-püjanam

ata eva-therefore; pädme devadüta-vikuëòala-samväde-in the Padma Puräëa, in a conversation of Devadüta and Vikuëòala; pakñe pakñe-fortnight after fortnight; tu-indeed; sampräpte-attained; dvädaçyäm-on dvadasi; vaiçya-sattama-O best of vaisyas; brahmädayaù-headed by Brahmä; api-even; kurvanti-do; tulasé-vana-püjanam-worship of the Tulasé forest.


"O best of vaiçyas, dvädaçé after dvädaçé, the demigods headed by Brahmä worship the Tulasé forest."

Text 114

ata eva çré-tulasé-stuti-mahimä

ananya-manasä nityaà tulaséà stauti yo naraùpitå-deva-manuñyänäà priyo bhavati sarvadä

ata eva-therefore; çré-tulasé-stuti-mahimä-the glory of offering prayers to Tulasé; ananya-manasä-with unwavering mind; nityam-regularly; tulasém-Tulasé; stauti-praises; yaù-who; naraù-a person; pitå-deva-manuñyänäm-of the pitas, devas, and human beings; priyaù-dear; bhavati-is; sarvadä-in all respects.

The Glories of Offering Prayers Praising Tulasé

A person who with an unwavering heart glorifies Tulasé with prayers becomes very dear to the devas, pitäs, and human beings.

Text 115

atha tulasé-vana-mähätmyaà

skände

ratià badhnäti nänyatra tulasé-känanaà vinädeva-devo jagat-svämé kali-käle viçeñataù

atha-now; tulasé-vana-mähätmyam-the glories of the Tulasé fgorest; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; ratim-love; badhnäti-does; na-not; anyatra-in any other object; tulasé-känanam-Tulasé forest; vinä-without; deva-devaù-the master of the demigods; jagat-svämé-the master of the universe; kali-käle-at the time of Kali; viçeñataù-specifically.

The Glory of the Tulasé Forest


"In the age of Kali, Lord Hari, the master of the universes and demigods, is especially pleased by a Tulasé forest and by nothing else.

Text 116

hitvä tértha-sahasräëi sarvän api çiloccayäntulasé-känane nityaà kalau tiñöhati keçavaù

hitvä-leaving aside; tértha-sahasräëi-thousands of holy places; sarvän-all; api-even; çiloccayän-mountains; tulasé-känane-in a Tulasé forest; nityam-always; kalau-in kali-yuga; tiñöhati-stays; keçavaù-Lord Kåñëa.

"Avoiding a thousand holy places and the chains of sacred mountains, in Kali-yuga Lord Kåñëa stays always in a Tulasé forest.

Text 117

nirékñitä narair yais tu tulasé-vana-väöikäropitä yaiç ca vidhinä sapräptaà paramaà padam

nirékñitä-seen; naraiù-by people; yaiù-who; tu-indeed; tulasé-vana-väöikä-the Tulasé forest; ropitä-planted; yaiù-by whom; ca-and; vidhinä-properlu; sapräptam-attained; paramam-the supreme; padam-abode.

"They who see or plant a Tulasé forest attain the Lord's supreme abode.

Text 118

na dhätré sa-phalä yatra na viñëus tulasé-vanamtat çmaçäna-samaà sthänaà santi yatra na vaiñëaväù

na-not; dhätré-dhatri; sa-phalä-with fruit; yatra-where; na-not; viñëuù-Lord Viñëu; tulasé-vanam-a Tulasé forest; tat-that; çmaçäna-samam-like a crematorioum; sthänam-plance; santi-are; yatra-where; na-no; vaiñëaväù-Vaiñëavas.

"Any place where there is no Deity of Lord Viñëu, no fruit-bearing dhätré tree, no Tulasé forest, or no Vaiñëavas is like a cremation-ground.

Text 119

keçavärthe kalau ye tu ropayantéha bhü-talekià kariñyaty asantuñöo yamo 'pi saha kiìkaraiù

keçava-of Lord Kåñëa; arthe-for the sake; kalau-in kali-yuga; ye-who; tu-indeed; ropayanti-plant; iha-here; bhü-tale-on the earth; kim-what?; kariñyaty-will do; asantuñöaù-displeased; yamaù-yamaräja; api-even; saha-with; kiìkaraiù-his servants.

"Even if they are displeased with him, what can Yamaräja and his servants do to a person who in this world has

planted a Tulasé forest for Lord Kåñëa's sake.

Texts 120 and 121

tulasyä ropaëaà käryaà çravaëena viçeñataùaparädha-sahasräëi kñamate puruñottamaù

devälayeñu sarveñu puëya-kñetreñu yo naraùväpayet tulaséà puëyäà tat térthaà cakra-päëinaù

tulasyäù-of Tulasé; ropaëam-planting; käryam-to be done; çravaëena-bythe star Sravana; viçeñataù-specifically; aparädha-sahasräëi-thousands of offenses; kñamate-forguves; puruñottamaù-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; devälayeñu-in temples; sarveñu-all; puëya-kñetreñu-in holy places; yaù-who; naraù-a person; väpayet-plants; tulasém-Tulasé; puëyäm-sacred; tat-that; tértham-place; cakra-päëinaù-to Lord Kåñëa.

"One should plant Tulasé at the time of the star Çravaëa. The Supreme Personality of Godhead forgives a thousand offenses for one who plants Tulasé in holy places and temples. Wherever Tulasé is planted, that place becomes sacred to Lord Viñëu.

Text 122

ghaöair yantra-ghaöébhiç ca siïcitaà tulasé-vanamjala-dhäräbhir viprendra préëitaà bhuvana-trayam

ghaöaiù-with pitchers; yantra-ghaöébhiç-with watering devices; ca-and; siïcitam-watered; tulasé-vanam-the Tulasé forest; jala-dhäräbhiù-with streams of water; viprendra-O king of brähmaëas; préëitam-pleased; bhuvana-trayam-the three worlds.

"O king of brähmaëas, he pleases the three worlds who, with streams of water from pitchers and other watering devices, waters a Tulasé forest."

Text 123

tatraiva çré-brahma-närada-samväde

tulasé-gandham ädäya yatra gacchati märutaùdiço daça ca pütäù syur bhüta-grämaç catur-vidhaù

tatraiva çré-brahma-närada-samväde-in the Skanda Puräëa, in a conversation of Brahmä and Närada; tulasé-gandham-the scent of Tulasé; ädäya-taking; yatra-where; gacchati-goes; märutaù-breeze; diçaù-directions; daça-ten; ca-and; pütäù-purified; syuù-are; bhüta-grämaç-living entities; catur-vidhaù-four kinds.


s there all become purified.

Text 124

tulasé-känanodbhütä chäyä yatra bhaved dvijatatra çräddhaà pradätavyaà pitåëäà tåpti-hetave

tulasé-känanodbhütä-born from aTulasé forest; chäyä-shade; yatra-where; bhavet-is; dvija-O d; tatra-there; çräddham-sraddha; pradätavyam-should be given; pitåëäm-to the pitas; tåpti-hetave-for satisfaction.

"O brähmaëa, offerings of çräddha to please the pitäs should be given in the shade of a Tulasé forest.

Text 125

tulasé-béja-nikaraù patate yatra näradapiëòa-dänaà kåtaà tatra pitåëäà dattam akñayam

tulasé-béja-nikaraù-Tulasé seeds; patate-fall; yatra-where; närada-O Narada; piëòa-dänam-offering of pinda; kåtam-done; tatra-theer; pitåëäm-to the pitas; dattam-given; akñayam-without failure.

"O Närada, to be perfectly successful, piëòa offerings to the pitäs should be presented in a place where Tulasé seeds have fallen."

Text 126

tatraivägre

dåñöä spåñöä tathä dhyätä kértitä namitä çrutäropitä sevitä nityaà püjitä tulasé çubhä

tatra-there; eva-indeed; agre-in the beginning; dåñöä-seen; spåñöä-touched; tathä-so; dhyätä-remembered; kértitä-praised; namitä-bowed before; çrutä-heard; ropitä-planted; sevitä-served; nityam-regularly; püjitä-worshiped; tulasé-Tulasé; çubhä-auspicious.


"When she is regularly seen, touched, remembered, glorified, bowed before, heard about, planted, served, or worshiped, Tulasé-devé brings great auspiciousness.

Text 127

navadhä tulaséà nityaà ye bhajanti dine dineyuga-koöi-sahasräëi te vasanti harer gåhe

navadhä-in nine ways; tulasém-Tulasé; nityam-regularly; ye-who; bhajanti-worship; dine-day; dine-after day; yuga-koöi-sahasräëi-ten billion yugas; te-they; vasanti-reside; hareù-of Lord Hari; gåhe-in the home.

"They who daily worship Tulasé-devé in these nine ways reside in Lord Hari's spiritual realm for ten billion yugas.

Text 128

ropitä tulasé yävat kurute müla-vistäramtävat koöi-sahasraà tu tanoti sukåtaà kalau

ropitä-planted; tulasé-Tulasé; yävat-as; kurute-does; müla-vistäram-spreading of roots; tävat-so; koöi-sahasram-ten billion; tu-indeed; tanoti-spread; sukåtam-pious deeds; kalau-in Kali-yuga.

"As each new root appears on Tulasé-devé, the person in Kali-yuga who planted her earns ten billion pious deeds.

Text 129

yävac chäkhä-praçäkhäbhir béja-puñpaiù phalair muneropitä tulasé pumbhir vardhate vasudhä-tale

yävat-as; çäkhä-praçäkhäbhiù-with branches and sub-braqnches; béja-puñpaiù-with seeds and flowers; phalaiù-with fruits; mune-O sage; ropitä-planted; tulasé-Tulasé; pumbhiù-by people; vardhate-prosper; vasudhä-tale-on the earth.

"As each new branch, twig, seed, flower, and fruit appears on Tulasé-devé, the human being who planted her gains a host of pious descendants.

Text 130

kule teñäà tu ye jätä ye bhaviñyanti ye måtäùäkalpaà yuga-sähasraà teñäà väso harer gåhe

kule-in the family; teñäm-of them; tu-indeed; ye-who; jätä-born; ye-who; bhaviñyanti-will be; ye-who; måtäù-died; äkalpam-t

"All who were born in his family and all who will be born in his family, beginning with the start of the kalpa and extending a thousand yugas into the future, will reside in Lord Hari's transcendental abode."

Text 131

tatraiva cävanté-khaëòe

tulasé ye vicinvanti dhanyäs tat-kara-pallaväùkeçavärthe kalau ye ca ropayantéha bhü-tale

tatra-there; eva-indeed; ca-and; avanté-khaëòe-in the Avanté-khaëòa; tulasé-Tulasé; ye-who; vicinvanti-collect; dhanyäù-fortunate; tat-kara-pallaväù-leaves; keçavärthe-for Lord Kåñëa; kalau-in Kali-yuga; ye-who; ca-and; ropayanti-plant; iha-here; bhü-tale-ojn the earth.

In the Avanté-khaëòa it is said:

"They are very fortunate who in Kali-yuga plant Tulasé, pick her leaves, and offer them to Lord Kåñëa.

Text 132

snäne däne tathä dhyäne präçane keçavärcanetulasé dahate päpaà ropaëe kértane kalau

snäne-in bathing; däne-in giving; tathä-so; dhyäne-in remembering; präçane-in eating; keçavärcane-in the worship of Lord Kåñëa; tulasé-Tulasé; dahate-burns; päpam-sins; ropaëe-in planting; kértane-in praising; kalau-in Kali-yuga.

"In Kali-yuga when she is planted, glorified, bathed, given in charity, remembered, offered to Lord Kåñëa, and when the remnants of her offered leaves are eaten, Tulasé-devé burs away all sins.

Text 133

käçé-khaëòe sva-dütän prati çré-yamänuçäsane

tulasy-alaìkåtä ye ye tulasé-näma-jäpakäùtulasé-vana-pälä ye te tyäjyä dürato bhaöäù

y-with Tulasé; alaìkåtä-decorated; ye ye-whoever; tulasé-näma-jäpakäù-chanting the name of Tulasé; tulasé-vana-pälä-protecting a Tulasé forest; ye-who; te-they; tyäjyä-left alone; dürataù-far away; bhaöäù-O soldiers.

In the Käçé-khaëòa, Yamaräja teaches his messengers:

"O my soldiers, you should stay far away from anyone who has been decorated with Tulasé, who has chanted Tulasé's names, or who has protected a Tulasé forest.

Text 134

tatraiva dhruva-carite

tulasé yasya bhavane praty-ahaà paripüjyatetad-gåhe nopasarpanti kadäcid yama-kiìkaräù

tatra-there; eva-indeed; dhruva-carite-in the Dhruva-carita; tulasé-Tulasé; yasya-of whom; bhavane-in the home; praty-aham-every day; paripüjyate-is worshiped; tad-gåhe-in his home; na-not; upasarpanti-approahces; kadäcit-ever; yama-kiìkaräù-Yama's servants.

In the Käçé-khaëòa, Dhruva-carita, it is said:

"Yama's servants will never enter a home where Tulasé is worshiped every day."

Text 135


na paçyanti yamaà vaiçya tulasé-vana-ropaëätsarva-päpa-haraà sarva- kämadaà tulasé-vanam

pädme devadüta-vikuëòala-samväde-in the Padma Puräëa, in a conversation of Devadüta and Vikuëòala; na-not; paçyanti-see; yamam-Yama; vaiçyä-O Vaisya; tulasé-vana-ropaëät-because of planting a Tulasé forest; sarva-päpa-haram-

removing all sins; sarva-all; käma-desires; dam-fulfilling; tulasé-vanam-Tulasé forest.


"O noble vaiçya, they who plant a Tulasé forest will not see Yamaräja. A Tulasé forest removes all sins and grants all desires.

Text 136

tulasé-känanaà vaiçya gåhe yasmiàs tu tiñöhatetad-gåhaà térthi-bhütaà hi no yänti yama-kiìkaräù

tulasé-känanam-a Tulasé forest; vaiçya-O vaisya; gåhe-in the home; yasmiàù-in which; tu-indeed; tiñöhate-stays; tad-gåham-that home; térthi-bhütam-a holy place; hi-indeed; na-not; u-indeed; yänti-go; yama-kiìkaräù-Yama's servants.

"A person who keeps a Tulasé forest there transforms his home into a holy place. Yamaräja's servants will never enter that home.

Text 137

tävad varña-sahasräëi yävad béja-daläni cavasanti devaloke tu tulaséà ropayanti ye

tävat-so; varña-sahasräëi-for a thousand years; yävat-so; béja-daläni-seeds and leaves; ca-and; vasanti-resides; devaloke-in Devaloka; tu-indeed; tulasém-Tulasé; ropayanti-plant; ye-they.

"They who plant Tulasé stay, for each seed and leaf, a thousand years in Devaloka.

Text 138

tulasé-gandham äghräya pitaras tuñöa-mänasäùprayänti garuòärüòhas tat padaà cakra-päëinaù

tulasé-gandham-the scent of Tulasé; äghräya-smelling; pitaraù-pitas; tuñöa-mänasäù-pleased at heart; prayänti-go; garuòärüòhaù-riding on Garuòa; tat-that; padam-abode; cakra-päëinaù-of Lord Hari.

"When they smell the scent of Tulasé, the pitäs become happy at heart. Riding on Garuòa, they go to Lord Hari's spiritual abode.

Text 139

darçanaà narmadäyäs tu gaìgä-snänaà viçäà varatulasé-dala-saàsparçaù samam etat trayaà småtam

darçanam-the sight; narmadäyäù-of the Narmada; tu-indeed; gaìgä-snänam-bathing in the Ganga; viçäm-of vaisyas; vara-O best;

"Seeing the Narmadä, bathing in the Gaìgä, and touching a Tulasé leaf are three equally pious actions."

Text 140

ropaëät pälanät sekäd darçanät sparçanän nåëämtulasé dahate päpaà väì-manaù-käya-saïcitam

ropaëät-from planting; pälanät-from protecting; sekät-from watering; darçanät-from seeintg; sparçanän-from touching; nåëäm-of people; tulasé-Tulasé; dahate-burns; päpam-sin; väk-words; manaù-mind; käya-body; saïcitam-performed.

"When the people plant, protect, water, see, or touch her, Tulasé burns away any sins they may have committed with their bodies, minds, or words.

Text 141

amra-våkña-sahasreëa pippalänäà çatena cayat phalaà hi tad ekena tulasé-viöapena tu

amra-våkña-sahasreëa-of a thousand mango trees; pippalänäm-of pippala trees; çatena-with a hundred; ca-and; yat-what; phalam-fruit; hi-indeed; tat-that; ekena-with one; tulasé-vitapena-a single branch of a Tulasé tree; tu-indeed.

"A single branch of Tulasé is equal to a hundred pippala trees or a thousand mango trees.

Text 142

viñëu-püjana-samyuktas tulaséà yas tu ropayetyugäyuta-daçaikaà sa ropako ramate divi

viñëu-püjana-samyuktaù-engaged in the worship,of Lord Viñëu; tulasém-Tulasé; yaù-who; tu-indeed; ropayet-plants; yugäyuta-ten thousand yugas; daça-ten; ekam-one; sa-he; ropakaù-planter; ramate-enjoys; divi-in heaven.

"A Vaiñëava who plants a Tulasé tree enjoys in Devaloka for a hundred thousand yugas."

Text 143

tatraiva vaiçäkha-mähätmye

puñkarädéni térthäni gaìgädyäù saritas tathäväsudevädayo devä vasanti tulasé-dale

tatra-there; eva-indeed; vaiçäkha-mähätmye-in the Vaisakha-mahatmya; puñkarädéni-beginnign wuth Puskara; térthäni-holy places; gaìgädyäù-beginning with the Ganga; saritaù-holy rivers; tathä-so; väsudevädayaù-beginning with Lord k; devä-Deities; vasanti-reside; tulasé-dale-in a Tulasé leaf.

In the Padma Puräëa, Vaiçäkha-mähätmya, it is said:

"Puñkara and all other holy places, the Gaìgä and all other holy rivers, as well as Lord Kåñëa and all other Deities reside in every Tulasé leaf.

Text 144

däridrya-duùkha-rogärti- päpäni su-bahüny apitulasé harato kñipraà rogän iva harétaké

däridrya-poverty; duùkha-suffering; roga-disease; arti-torment; päpäni-sins; su-bahüny-very many; api-also; tulasé-Tulasé; harati-removes; kñipram-at once; rogän-diseases; iva-as; harétaké-haritaki.

"As the harétaké cures diseases, so Tulasé quickly removes poverty, suffering, disease, and sin."

Text 145

tatraiva kärttika-mähätmye

yad-gåhe tulasé bhäti rakñäbhir jala-secanaiùtad-gåhe yamadütäç ca dürato varjayanti hi

tatra-there; eva-indeed; kärttika-mähätmye-in the Karttika-mahatmya; yad-gåhe-in whose home; tulasé-Tulasé; bhäti-is; rakñäbhiù-with protection; jala-secanaiù-with watering; tad-gåhe-in that home; yamadütäç-the messengers of Yama; ca-and; dürataù-far away; varjayanti-avoid; hi-indeed.

In the Padma Puräëa, Kärttika-mähätmya, it is said:

Text 146

tulasyäs tarpaëaà ye ca pitån uddiçya mänaväùkurvanti teñäà pitaras tåptä varñäyutaà jalaiù

tulasyäù-of Tulasé; tarpaëam-tarpana; ye-who; ca-and; pitån-to the pitas; uddiçya-in relation to; mänaväù-people; kurvanti-do; teñäm-of them; pitaraù-the pitas; tåptä-pleased; varñäyutam-for ten thousand years; jalaiù-with water.

"When they are given the remnants of an offering of water and Tulasé, the pitäs are pleased as if they were offered water for ten thousand years.

Text 147

paricäryäà ca ye tasya rakñayäbala-bandhanaiùçuçrüñito haris tais tu nätra käryä vicäraëä

paricäryäm-worship; ca-and; ye-who; tasya-of Him; rakñayä-with protection; äbäla-bandhanaiù-with a trench; çuçrüñitaù-worshiped; hariù-Lord Kåñëa; taiù-by them; tu-indeed; na-not; atra-here; käryä-to be done; vicäraëä-doubt.

"They worship Tulasé and protect her by arranging a water-trench to circle her base, worship Lord Kåñëa with these deeds. Of this there is no doubt.

Texts 148-150

nävajïä jätu käryäsyä våkña-bhävän manéñibhiùyathä hi väsudevasya vaikuëöha-bhoga-vigrahaù

çälagräma-çilä-rüpaà sthävaraà bhuvi dåçyatetathä lakñmyaikam äpannä tulasé bhoga-vigrahä

aparaà sthävaraà rüpaà bhuvi loka-hitäya vaispåñöä dåñöä rakñitä ca mahä-pätaka-näçiné

na-not; avajïä-offense; jätu-ever; käryä-should be done; asyäù-of her; våkña-bhävän-thinking to be a tree; manéñibhiù-by th-the form of the Çälagräma-çilä; sthävaram-a stone; bhuvi-on the earth; dåçyate-is seen; tathä-so; lakñmyaikam-oneness with the goddess of fortune; äpannä-attained; tulasé-Tulasé; bhoga-vigrahä-Tulasé form; aparam-another; sthävaram-immobile; rüpam-form; bhuvi-on the earth; loka-hitäya-for the benefit of the people; vai-indeed; spåñöä-touched; dåñöä-seen; rakñitä-protected; ca-and; mahä-pätaka-näçiné-destroying great sins.

"As they should not commit the offense of thinking Lord Väsudeva is an ordinary person who happens to be enjoying in Vaikuëöha, or the offense of thinking that the Çälagräma-çilä is an ordinary stone, so the wise should not commit the offense of thinking that Tulasé-devé is an ordinary tree. Tulasé-devé is an incarnation of the goddess of fortune, and she appears as a tree in order to benefit the people of the world. When she is seen, touched, or protected, she destroys the greatest sins."

Text 151


viñëos trailokya-näthasya rämasya janakätmajäpriyä tathaiva tulasé sarva-lokaika-pävané

agastya-saàhitäyäm-in the Agastya-saàhitä; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; trailokya-näthasya-the master of the three worlds; rämasya-of Lord Räma; janakätmajä-the daughter of King Janaka; priyä-beloved; tathä-so; eva-indeed; tulasé-Tulasé; sarva-lokaika-pävané-the purifier of all the worlds.


"As Sétä-devé is dear to Lord Räma, the all-pervading master of the three worlds, so Tulasé-devé, the purifier of all the worlds, is also dear to Him.

Text 152

tulasé-väöikä yatra puñpäntara-çatävåtäçobhate räghavas tatra sétayä sahitaà svayam

tulasé-väöikä-a Tulasé forest; yatra-where; puñpäntara-çatävåtä-with hundreds of other flowers; çobhate-is beautiful; räghavaù-Lord Räma; tatra-there; sétayä-Sét; sahitam-with; svayam-personally.

"Lord Räma personally stayed with Sétä-devé in a forest filled with Tulasé and with hundreds of other flowers

Text 153

tulasé-vipinasyäpi samantät pävanaà sthalamkroça-mätraà bhavaty eva gäìgeyasyaiva päthasaù

tulasé-vipinasya-of a Tulasé tree; api-even; samantät-everywhere; pävanam-purifying; sthalam-place; kroça-mätram-two miles; bhavaty-is; eva-indeed; gäìgeyasya-of the Ganga shore; eva-indeed; päthasaù-from the water.

"A single Tulasé plant purifies every place for two miles around. It is as if the entire area had been flooded by the Gaìgä.

Text 154

tulasé-sannidhau präëän ye tyajanti munéçvarana teñäà naraka-klesäù prayänti paramaà padam

tulasé-Tulasé; sannidhau-near; präëän-life; ye-who; tyajanti-abandon; munéçvara-O king of sages; na-not; teñäm-of them; naraka-klesäù-the suffering of hell; prayänti-they go; paramam-to the supreme; padam-abode.

"O king of the sages, they who die near Tulasé do not suffer in hell. They go to the spiritual world."

Text 155

kià ca

ananya-darçanäù prätar ye paçyanti tapo-dhanaaho-rätra-kåtaà päpaà tat-kñaëät praharanti te

kià ca-furthermore; ananya-darçanäù-without seeing anything else; prätaù-in the morning; ye-who; paçyanti-see; tapo-dhana-O sages whose wealth is austerity; ahaù-day; rätra-and night; kåtam-done; päpam-sin; tat-kñaëät-from that moment; praharanti-remove; te-they.

It is also said:

"O sage whose wealth is austerity, they who see Tulasé when they first open their eyes in the morning become from that moment free from all the sins of all their days and nights."

Text 156

gäruòe

kåtaà yena mahä-bhäga tulasé-vana-ropaëammuktis tena bhaved dattä

präëinäà vinatä-suta

gäruòe-in the Garuòa Puräëa; kåtam-done; yena-by whom; mahä-bhäga-O very fortunate one; tulasé-vana-ropaëam-the planting of a Tulasé forest; muktiù-liberation; tena-by him; bhavet-may be; dattä-given; präëinäm-of living entities; vinatä-suta-O son of Vinatä.


"O fortunate Garuòa, O son of Vinatä, a person who plants a Tulasé forest attains liberation.

Text 157

tulasé väpitä yena puëyäräme vane gåhepakñéndra tena satyoktaà lokäù sapta pratiñöitäù

tulasé-Tulasé; väpitä-planted; yena-by whom; puëyäräme-in a pleasant garned; vane-in a forest; gåhe-in a home; pakñéndra-O king of birds; tena-by him; satyoktam-in truth; lokäù-worlds; sapta-seven; pratiñöitäù-established.

"O king of birds, a person who plants a Tulasé tree in a beautiful garden, in a forest, or in his home has done a very important deed. It is as if he has created the seven worlds.

Text 158

tulasé-känane yas tu muhürtam api viçrametjanma-koöi-kåtät päpän mucyate nätra saàçayaù

tulasé-Tulasé; känane-in a forest; yaù-one who; tu-indeed; muhürtam-for a moment; api-even; viçramet-rests; janma-koöi-ten million births; kåtät-done; päpän-from the sins; mucyate-is freed; na-not; atra-here; saàçayaù-doubt.

"A person who for even a moment rests in a Tulasé forest becomes freed from the sins of ten million births. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 159

pradakñinäà yaù kurute paöhan näma-sahasrakamtulasé-känane nityaà yajïäyuta-phalaà labhet

pradakñinäm-circumambulation; yaù-who; kurute-does; paöhan-reciting; näma-sahasrakam-the thousand names; tulasé-känane-in the Tulasé forest; nityam-regularly; yajïa-of yajnas; ayuta-ten thousand; phalam-results; labhet-attains.

"A person who, chanting the thousand names, circumambulates a Tulasé forest attains the result of ten thousand yajïas.

Text 160


nityaà sannihito viñëuù samspåhas tulasé-vane

api me 'kñata-patraikaà kaçcid dhanyo 'rpayed iti

hari-bhakti-sudhodaye-in the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya it is said; nityam-always; sannihitaù-staying; viñëuù-Lord Viñëu; samspåhaù-desiring; tulasé-vane-in the Tulasé forest; api-also; me-of me; akñata-patraikam-a single unbroken Tulasé leaf; kaçcit-someone; dhanyaù-fortunate; arpayet-may offer; iti-thus.


" `Perhaps someone will offer Me an unbroken Tulasé leaf.' Thinking these words, Lord Viñëu always stays in a Tulasé forest."

Text 161

båhan-näradéye

gaìgä-prasaìge saàsära-päpa-vicchedi gaìgä-näma prakértitamtathä tulasyä bhaktiç ca hari-kérti-pravaktaré

båhan-näradéye-in thr Narada Puräëa; gaìgä-prasaìge-by touching the Ganga; saàsära-päpa-vicchedé-which destroys all sins; gaìgä-näma-with the name Ganga; prakértitam-called; tathä-so; tulasyä-of Tulasé; bhaktiç-devotion; ca-and; hari-kérti-pravaktaré-chanting the glories of Lord Kåñëa.


"When one chants the name Gaìgä, the Gaìgä destroys all his sins. When one chants the names of Lord Hari, Tulasé gives one the gift of devotional service.

Text 162

tulasé-känanaà yatra yatra padma-vanäni capuräëa-paöhanaà yatra tatra sannihito hariù

tulasé-känanam-the Tulasé forest; yatra-where; yatra-where; padma-vanäni-lotus forests; ca-and; puräëa-paöhanam-reading the Puräëas; yatra tatra-there; sannihitaù-stays; hariù-Lord Kåñëa.

"Lord Hari stays wherever there is a lotus forest or a Tulasé forest, or wherever the Puräëas are read."

Text 163

tatraiva çré-yama-bhagératha-samväde

tulasé-ropaëaà ye tu kurvate manujeçvarateñäà puëya-phalaà vakñye vadatas tvaà niçämaya

tatra-there; eva-indeed; çré-yama-bhagératha-samväde-in a conversation of Yama and Bhagiuratha; tulasé-ropaëam-planting Tulasé; ye-who; tu-indeed; kurvate-does; manujeçvara-O master of men; teñäm-of them; puëya-phalam-pious result; vakñye-I will tell; vadataù-speaking; tvam-you; niçämaya-please hear.

In the Närada Puräëa, Yamaräja tells King Bhagératha:

"O king, please listen and I will tell you the pious benefit gained by a person who plants Tulasé.

Text 164

sapta-koöi-kulair yukto mätåtaù pitåtas tathävaset kalpa-çataà sägraà näräyaëa-samépagaù

sapta-koöi-kulaiù-with seventy million relatives; yuktaù-accopanied; mätåtaù-from hsi mother's side; pitåtaù-from his father's side; tathä-so; vaset-resides; kalpa-çatam-for a hundred kalpas; sägram-in the presence; näräyaëa-samépagaù-near Lord Näräyaëa.

"Accompanied by seventy million relatives from his father's and mother's families, for a hundred kalpas he stays near Lord Näräyaëa.

Text 165

tåëäni tulasé-mülät yävanty apahiëoti vaitävatér brahma-hatyä hi chinatty eva na saàçayaù

tåëäni-grass; tulasé-mülät-at Tulasé's roots; yävanty-as many; apahiëoti-removes; vai-indeed; tävatéù-that many; brahma-hatyä-murders of a brähmaëa; hi-indeed; chinatty-cuts; eva-indeed; na-no; saàçayaù-doubt.

"When a person removes the blades of grass growing at Tulasé's roots, with each blade of grass he becomes free of the sin of killing a brähmaëa.

Text 166

tulasyäà siïcayed yas tu culukodaka-mätrakamkñéroda-çäyinä särdhaà vased äcandra-tärakam

tulasyäm-on Tulasé; siïcayet-sprinkles; yaù-who; tu-indeed; culukodaka-mätrakam-a palmful of water; kñiroda-çäyinä-with Lord Kñérodakaçäyé Viñëu; särdham-with; vaset-resides; äcandra-tärakam-for as long as the sun and the moon shine.

"A person who waters Tulasé with even a small palmful of water stays with Lord Kñérodakaçäyé Viñëu for as long as the sun and moon shine in the sky.

Text 167

kaëöakävaraëaà väpi våtià käñöhaiù karoti yaùtulasyäù çåëu räjendra tasya puëya-phalaà mahat

kaëöaka-of thorns; ävaraëam-covering; vä-or; api-also; våtim-fence; käñöhaiù-with wood; karoti-does; yaù-who; tulasyäù-of Tulasé-devi; çåëu-please hear; räjendra-O king; tasya-of him; puëya-phalam-the pious result; mahat-great.

"O king, please hear the pious result attained by a person who protects Tulasé with a wooden fence or a hedge of thorns.

Text 168

yävad dinäni santiñöhet kaëöakävaraëaà prabhokula-traya-yutas tävat tiñöhed brahma-pade yugam

yävat-as; dinäni-days; santiñöhet-stays; kaëöakävaraëam-thorn hedge; prabhaù-O king; kula-traya-yutaù-with three generations; tävat-so long; tiñöhet-stays; brahma-pade-in the abode of Brahma; yugam-for a yuga.

"For each day that thorn hedge remains he stays for a yuga with three generations of his kinsmen in Brahmaloka.

Text 169

präkära-kalpako yas tu tulasyä manujeçvarakula-trayeëa sahito viñëoù särüpyataà vrajet

präkära-kalpakaù-building a wall; yaù-who; tu-indeed; tulasyä-of t; manujeçvara-O king; kula-trayeëa-with three generations; sahitaù-with; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; särüpyatam-attaining the same form; vrajet-attains.

"O king, when a person builds a wall around Tulasé-devé, he and three generations of his kinsmen attain spiritual forms like that of Lord Viñëu."

Text 170

ata eva tatraiva yajïadhvajopäkhyänänte

durlabhä tulasé-sevä durlabhä saìgatiù satämdurlabhhä hari-bhaktiç ca saàsärärëava-pätinäm

ata eva tatraiva yajïadhvaopäkhyänänte-in the Närada Puräëa, at the end of Yajïadhvaja's story; durlabhä-rare; tulasé-sevä-service to Tulasé; durlabhä-rare; saìgatiù-aswsociate; satäm-of the devotees; durlabhhä-rare; hari-bhaktiç-devotion to Lord Hari; ca-and; saàsärärëava-pätinäm-for they who have fallen in the ocean of birth and death.

In the Närada Puräëa, at the end of Yajïadhvaja's story, it is said:

"Service to Tulasé, association with the devotees, and devotion to Lord Hari are rarely attained by they who have fallen into the ocean of birth and death."

Text 171

puräëäntareñu ca

yat phalaà kratubhiù sviñöaiù samäpta-vara-dakñiëaiùtat phalaà koöi-guëitaà ropayitvä hareù priyäm

ed; vara-dakñiëaiù-daksina; tat-that; phalam-result; koöi-guëitam-multiplied ten million times; ropayitvä-having planted; hareù-to Lord Kåñëa; priyäm-dear.

In other Puräëas it is said:

"They who plant Lord Hari's dear Tulasé attain a pious result ten million times better than what is attained by performing a host of yajïas and giving very generous dakñiëä to the brähmaëas.

Text 172

tulaséà ye prayacchanti suräëäm arcanäya vairopayanti çucau deçe teñäà loko 'kñayaù småtaù

tulasém-Tulasé; ye-who; prayacchanti-give; suräëäm-of the Lord; arcanäya-for worship; vai-indeed; ropayanti-plant; çucau-in a sacred; deçe-place; teñäm-of them; lokaù-world; akñayaù-eternal; småtaù-considered.

"They whom plant Tulasé in a pure place and offer her leaves in worship to Lord Viñëu attain the eternal spiritual world.

Text 173

ropitäà tulaséà dåñövä nareëa bhuvi bhümipavivarëa-vadano bhütvä tal-lipià märjayed yamaù

ropitäm-planted; tulasém-Tulasé; dåñövä-seeing; nareëa-by a person; bhuvi-on the earth; bhümipa-O king; vivarëa-vadanaù-with a silent mouth; bhütvä-becoming; tal-lipim-his letters; märjayet-wipes away; yamaù-Yamaräja.

"When he sees that someone has planted a Tulasé tree, from his book Yamarja silently erases that person's name.

Text 174

tulaséti ca yo brüyät tri-kälaà vadane yadinityaà sa go-sahasrasya phalam äpnoti bhüsura

tulasé-Tulasé; iti-thus; ca-and; yaù-who; brüyät-says; tri-kälam-three times; vadane-in the mouth; yadi-if; nityam-regularly; sa-he; go-sahasrasya-of giving a thousand cows in charity; phalam-the result; äpnoti-attains; bhüsura-O brähmaëa.

"O brähmaëa, a person who morning, noon, and night, regularly speaks the name of Tulasé attains the result of giving a thousand cows in charity.

Text 175

tena dattaà hutaà japtaà kåtaà çräddhaà gayä-çiretapas taptaà khaga-çreñöha tulasé yena ropitä

tena-by him; dattam-offered; hutam-yajna; jäptam-japa; kåtam-done; çräddham-sraddha; gayä-çire-at Gayä; tapaù-austerities; taptam-performed; khaga-çreñöha-O best of birds; tulasé-Tulasé; yena-by whom; ropitä-planted.

"O best of birds, a person who plants Tulasé attains the benefit of offering yajïas, chanting japa, and following austere

vows.

Text 176

çrutäbhilañitä dåñöä ropiträ siïcitä natätulasé dahate päpaà yugäntägnir iväkhilam

çrutä-heard; abhilañitä-desired; dåñöä-seen; ropiträ-planted; siïcitä-watered; natä-bowed before; tulasé-Tulasé; dahate-burns; päpam-sin; yugäntägniù-the fire at the end of the yuga; iva-like; akhilam-all.

"When she is heard about, desired, seen, planted, watered, or offered respectful obeisances, Tulasé burns away all sins. She becomes like the great fire at the yuga's end.

Text 177

keçaväyatane yas tu kärayet tulasé-vanamlabhate cäkñayaà sthänaà pitåbhiù saha vaiñëavaù

keçaväyatane-in Lord Keçava's temple; yaù-who; tu-indeed; kärayet-causes; tulasé-vanam-a Tulasé forest; labhate-attains; ca-and; akñayam-eternal; sthänam-place; pitåbhiù-pitas; saha-with; vaiñëavaù-Vaiñëava.

"A person who plants a Tulasé forest in Lord Kåñëa's temple attains the eternal spiritual world with his devotee ancestors."

Text 178

anyaträpi

tulasé-känane çräddhaà pitåëäà kurute tu yaùgayä-çräddhaà kåtaà tena bhäñitaà viñëunä purä

anyatra-in another place; api-even; tulasé-känane-in a Tulasé forest; çräddham-sraddha; pitåëäm-of the pitas; kurute-does; tu-indeed; yaù-who; gayä-çräddham-sraddha at Gaya; kåtam-done; tena-by him; bhäñitam-spoken; viñëunä-by Lord Viñëu; purä-in ancient times.


"A person who in a Tulasé forest offers çräddha to the pitäs attains the result of offering çräddha in Gayä. Lord Viñëu Himself said this long ago.

Text 179

tulasé-gahanaà dåñövä vimukto yäti pätakätsarvathä muni-çärdüla brahma-hä puëya-bhäg bhavet

tulasé-gahanam-a Tulasé forest; dåñövä-seeing; vimuktaù-liberated; yäti-goes; pätakät-from sin; sarvathä-in all respects; muni-çärdüla-O tiger of sages; brahma-hä-a brähmaëa killer; puëya-bhäg-pious; bhavet-become.

"O tiger of sages, a person who sees a Tulasé forest becomes free from all sins. Although in the past he may have killed many brähmaëas, he becomes pure and saintly.

Text 180

kià ca skände vaçiñöha-mandhätå-samväde

çukla-pakñe yadä räjan tåtéyä budha-samyutäçravaëena mahä-bhaga tulasé cäti-puëyadä. iti.

kià ca-furthermore; skände vaçiñöha-mandhätå-samväde-in the Skanda Puräëa, Vaçiñöha Muni tells King Mandhätä; çukla-pakñe-on the sukla paksa; yadä-when; räjan-O king; tåtéyä-third; budha-samyutä-with mercury; çravaëena-with Sravana; mahä-bhagä-O very fortunate one; tulasé-Tulasé; ca-an; ati--puëyadä-giving great piety; iti-thus.

In the Skanda Puräëa, Vaçiñöha Muni tells King Mandhätä:

"O very fortunate king, Tulasé-devé gives great pious benefits to anyone who worships her on a third tithi of the çukla-pakña when Mercury is conjoined with the star Çravaëa.

Text 181

prasaìgät çré-tulasyä hi mådaù käñöhasya cädhunämähätmyaà likhyate kåñëe arpitasya dalasya ca

prasaìgät-by the touch; çré-tulasyä-of Çré Tulasé; hi-indeed; mådaù-of the earth; käñöhasya-of the wood; ca-and; adhunä-now; mähätmyam-glory; likhyate-is written; kåñëe-to Lord Kåñëa; arpitasya-offered; dalasya-leaf; ca-and.

Now will be written the glories of the Tulasé's leaves offered to Lord Kåñëa and the glories of the touch of Tulasé's wood and earth.

Text 182

çré-tulasé-måttikä-käñöhädi-mähätmyaà


bhü-gatais tulasé-mülair måttikä sparçitä tu yätértha-koöi-samä jïeyä dhäryä yatnena sä gåhe

çré-tulasé-måttikä-käñöhädi-mähätmyam-the Glories of Tulasé's Wood and Earth; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; çré-brahma-närada-samväde-in a conversation of Brahma and Narada; bhü-gataiù-on the ground; tulasé-mülaiù-with Tulasé roots; måttikä-earth; sparçitä-touched; tu-indeed; yä-which; tértha-koöi-samä-equal to ten million pilgrimages; jïeyä-should be known; dhäryä-to be held; yatnena-with care; sä-that; gåhe-in the home.

The Glories of Tulasé's Wood and Earth


"Touching the earth at Tulasé's roots is equal to ten million pilgrimages. One should carefully keep some of this earth in his home.

Text 183

yasmin gåhe dvija-çreñöha tulasé-müla-måttikäsarvadä tiñöhate dehe devatä na sa mänusaù

yasmin-in which; gåhe-home; dvija-çreñöha-O best of brähmaëas; tulasé-müla-måttikä-the earth at Tulasé's roots; sarvadä-in all respects; tiñöhate-stays; dehe-in the body; devatä-a demigod; na-not; sa-he; mänusaù-a human being.

"O best of the brähmaëas, a person who in his home keeps some earth from Tulasé's roots is no longer a human being. Now he is a demigod.

Text 184

tulasé-måttika-lipto yadi präëät parityajetyamena nekñituà çakto yuktaù päpa-çatair api

tulasé-måttika-liptaù-anointed with the earth from Tulasé; yadi-if; präëät-life; parityajet-leaves; yamena-by Yamaraja; na-not; ékñitum-to be seen; çaktaù-is able; yuktaù-endowed; päpa-çataiù-with a hundred sins; api-even.

"A person who at his death is anointed with Tulasé earth is invisible to Yamaräja. Yamaräja cannot even see him, even if he has committed a hundred sins.

Text 185

çirasi kriyate yais tu tulasé-müla-måttikävighnäni tasya naçyanti sänukulä grahäs tathä

çirasi-on the head; kriyate-is done; yaiù-by whom; tu-indeed; tulasé-müla-måttikä-Tulasé earth; vighnäni-obstacles; tasya-of him; naçyanti-perish; sänukulä-favorable; grahäù-planets; tathä-so.

"When a person places Tulasé earth on his head, all obstacles that trouble him perish. All the planets become auspicious for him.

Text 186

tulasé-måttikä yatra käñöhaà patraà ca veçmanitiñöhate muni-çärdüla niçcalaà vaiñëavaà padam

tulasé-måttikä-Tulasé earth; yatra-where; käñöham-wood; patram-leaf; ca-and; veçmani-ijn the home; tiñöhate-stays; muni-çärdüla-O tiger of the sages; niçcalam-eternal; vaiñëavam-of Lord Viñëu; padam-the abode.

Viñëu."

Text 187

tatraivänyatra

maìgalärthaà ca doña-ghnaà paviträrthaà dvijottamatulasé-müla-samlagnaà måttikäm ävahed budhaù

tatra-there; eva-indeed; anyatra-in another place; maìgalärtham-for auspiciousness; ca-and; doña-ghnam-destroying faults; paviträrtham-for purification; dvijottama-O best of brähmaëas; tulasé-müla-samlagnam-touching Tulasé's roots; måttikäm-earth; ävahet-should carry; budhaù-wise.


"O best of the brähmaëas, in order to create auspiciousness, drive away faults, and bring purification, a wise man should carry with him some of the earth that has touched Tulasé-devé's roots.

Text 188

tan-müla-måttikäà yo vai dhärayiñyati mastaketasya tuñöo varän kämän pradadäti janärdanaù

tan-müla-måttikäm-the earth fropm Tulasé's roots; yaù-who; vai-indeed; dhärayiñyati-will place; mastake-on the head; tasya-of him; tuñöaù-pleased; varän-boons; kämän-desires; pradadäti-gives; janärdanaù-Lord Kåñëa.

"Lord Kåñëa is pleased with whoever places the earth from Tulasé's roots on his head. Lord Kåñëa grants him anything he may desire."

Text 189

båhan-näradéye gaìgä-prasaìge

tulasé-müla-sambhütä hari-bhakta-padodbhavägaìgodbhavä ca mål-lekhä nayaty acyuta-rüpatäm

båhan-näradéye-in the narada Puräëa; gaìgä-prasaìge-in connection with the Ganga; tulasé-müla-sambhütä-from Tulasé's roots; hari-bhakta-padodbhavä-from Lord Hari's devotees; gaìgodbhavä-from the Gangä; ca-and; mål-lekhä-earth; nayaty-brings; acyuta-rüpatäm-an eternal form.

In the Närada Puräëa's description of the Gaìgä, it is said:

"A person who touches the earth that has touched Tulasé, Lord Hari's devotees, or the Gaìgä, attains an eternal spiritual form."

Text 190

gäruòe

yad-gåhe tulasé-käñöhaà patraà suñkam athärdrakambhavate naiva päpaà tad- gåhe saìkramate kalau

gäruòe-in the Garuòa Puräëa; yad-gåhe-in whose home; tulasé-käñöham-Tulasé wood; patram-leaf; suñkam-dry; atha-then; ardrakam-moist; bhavate-is; na-not; eva-indeed; päpam-sin; tat-of him; gåhe-in the home; saìkramate-enters; kalau-

in Kali-yuga.


"When in the Kali-yuga a person keeps in his home Tulasé wood and Tulasé leaves, either dry or moist, sin cannot enter his home."

Text 191

çré-prahläda-saàhitäyäà tathä viñëu-dharmottare' pi

patraà puñpaà phalaà käñöhaà tvak-çäkhä-pallaväìkuramtulasé-sambhavaà mülaà pävanaà måttikädy api

çré-prahläda-saàhitäyäà tathä viñëu-dharmottare-in both the Çré Prahläda-saàhitä and the Çré Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; api-also; patram-leaf; puñpam-flower; phalam-fruit; käñöham-wood; tvak-bark; çäkhä-branches; pallava-twigs; aìkuram--sprout; tulasé-sambhavam-from Tulasé; mülam-root; pävanam-purifying; måttikädy-beginning with earth; api-even.

In both the Çré Prahläda-saàhitä and the Çré Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, it is said:

"Tulasé's leaves, flowers, fruits, wood, bark, branches, twigs, sprouts, roots, and earth are all supremely purifying.

Text 192

homaà kurvanti ye vipräs tulasé-käñöha-vahninälave lave bhavet puëyaà agniñöoma-çatodbhavam

homam-yajna; kurvanti-do; ye-who; vipräù-brähmaëas; tulasé-käñöha-vahninä-with fire lit with Tulasé wood; lave-moment; lave-after moment; bhavet-is; puëyam-piety; agniñöoma-çatodbhavam-equal to a hundred agnistomas.

"brähmaëas who offer homa with a fire burning with Tulasé wood attain at every moment the piety of offering a hundred agniñöoma-yajïas.

Text 193

naivedyaà pacate yas tu tulasé-käñöha-vahninämeru-tulyaà bhaved annaà tad dattaà keçaväya hi

naivedyam-an offering fo food; pacate-cooks; yaù-who; tu-indeed; tulasé-käñöha-vahninä-with a fire burning with Tulasé wood; meru-tulyam-equal to Mount Meru; bhavet-is; annam-food; tat-that; dattam-given; keçaväya-to Lord Kåñëa; hi-indeed.

"When someone, using a fire burning with Tulasé wood, cooks an offering of food to give to Lord Keçava, that offering becomes like a great Mount Meru of food.

Text 194

çaréraà dahyate yeñäà

tulasé-käñöha-vahninäna teñäà punar ävåttir viñëulokät kathaïcana

çaréram-body; dahyate-is burning; yeñäm-of whom; tulasé-käñöha-vahninä-with a fire of Tulasé wood; na-not; teñäm-of them; punaù-again; ävåttiù-return; viñëulokät-from Viñëuloka; kathaïcana-ever.

"A person whose dead body burns in a fire of Tulasé wood goes to Viñëuloka. He never returns to this world.

Text 195

grasto yadi mahä-päpair agamyägamanädikaiùmåtaù çudhyati dahena tulasé-käñöha-vahninä

be approached; måtaù-dead; çudhyati-is purified; dahena-by burning; tulasé-käñöha-vahninä-in a fire of Tulasé wood.

"Even if he was haunted by many great sins beginning with the sin of approaching a woman who should not be approached, a person who dies and is cremated in a fire of Tulasé wood becomes completely pure.

Text 196

térthaà yadi na sampräptaà småtir vä kértanaà hareùtulasé-käñöha-dagdhasya måtasya na punar bhavaù

tértham-holy place; yadi-if; na-not; sampräptam-attained; småtiù-memory; vä-of; kértanam-chanting the glories; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; tulasé-of Tulasé; käñöha-with the wood; dagdhasya-burned; måtasya-dead; na-not; punaù-again; bhavaù-birth.

"Even if a person never went on pilgrimage to any holy places, never meditated on Lord Hari, and never chanted Lord Hari's glories, if when he dies he is cremated in a fire of Tulasé wood, he will not take birth again.

Text 197

yady ekaà tulasé-käñöhaà madhye käñöha-cayasya hidaha-käle bhaven muktiù päpa-koöi-yutasya ca

yady-if; ekam-one; tulasé-käñöham-Tulasé wood; madhye-in the middle; käñöha-cayasya-of much wood; hi-indeed; daha-käle-at the time of burning; bhavet-is; muktiù-liberation; päpa-koöi-yutasya-committed ten million sins; ca-and.

"A person who commits ten million sins, dies, and is cremated in a fire where among much other wood there is a single piece of Tulasé, attains liberation.

Text 198

janma-koöi-sahasrais tu toñito yair janärdanaùdahyante te janä loke tulasé-käñöha-vahninä

janma-koöi-sahasraiù-ten billion births; tu-indeed; toñitaù-pleased; yaiù-by whom; janärdanaù-Lord Kåñëa; dahyante-burn; te-they; janä-persons; loke-in this world; tulasé-käñöha-vahninä-in a fire of Tulasé wood.

ds for ten billion births.

Text 199


yaù kuryät tulasé-käñöhair akña-mäläà su-rüpiëémkaëöha-mäläà ca yantena kåtaà tasyäkñayaà bhavet

agastya-saàhitäyäm-in the Agastya-saàhitä; yaù-who; kuryät-does; tulasé-käñöhaiù-with Tulasé wood; akña-mäläm-japa beads; su-rüpiëém-beautiful; kaëöha-mäläm-neck beads; ca-and; yantena-cearefully; kåtam-done; tasya-of him; akñayam-eternal; bhavet-is.


"A person who carefully makes beautiful japa beads or neck beads out of Tulasé wood attains a benefit that is eternal.

Text 200

atha tulasé-patra-dhäraëa-mähätmyaà


yasya näbhi-sthitaà patraà mukhe çirasi karëayoùtulasé-sambhavaà nityaà térthais tasya makhaiç ca kim

atha-now; tulasé-patra-dhäraëa-mähätmyam-the Glories of Honoring a Tulasé Leaf; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; çré-brahma-närada-samväde-in a convesration of Çré Brahma and Çré Narada; yasya-of whom; näbhi-sthitam-onm the navel; patram-leaf; mukhe-on the mouth; çirasi-on the head; karëayoù-on the ears; tulasé-sambhavam-born from Tulasé; nityam-always; térthaiù-with holy places; tasya-of him; makhaiç-with yajnas; ca-and; kim-what is the use?

The Glories of Honoring a Tulasé Leaf


"What is the use of many pilgrimages and yajïas for a person who places on his mouth, head, ears, and navel, a Tulasé leaf offered to Lord Hari?"

Text 201

tatraivänyatra

çatrughnaà ca supuëyaà ca çré-karaà roga-näçanamkåtvä dharmam aväpnoti çirasä tulasé-dalam

tatra-there; eva-indeed; anyatra-in another place; çatrughnam-killing enemies; ca-and; supuëyam-very pious; ca-and; çré-karam-bringing opulences; roga-diseases; näçanam-destroying; kåtvä-doing; dharmam-piety; aväpnoti-attains; çirasä-by the head; tulasé-dalam-a Tulasé leaf.


"A person who places on his head a Tulasé leaf offered to Lord Hari attains purity, piety, wealth, and the destruction of all diseases. He vanquishes his enemies.

Text 202

yaù kaçcid vaiñëavo loke mithyäcäro 'py anäçramépunäti sakaläl lokän çirasä tulaséà vahan

yaù-who; kaçcit-someone; vaiñëavaù-a Vaiñëava; loke-in the world; mithyäcäraù-a lier; api-even; anäçramé-not following varnasrama; punäti-purifies; sakalän-all; lokän-worlds; çirasä-with the head; tulasém-Tulasé; vahan-carrying.

"A person who rejects varëäçrama and is addicted to telling lies, but nevertheless worships Lord Viñëu and places on his head a Tulasé leaf offered to Lord Viñëu, purifies all the worlds."

Text 203

båhan-näradéye çré-yama-bhagératha-samväde

karëena dhärayed yas tu tulaséà satataà naraùtat-käñöhaà väpi räjendra tasya nästy upapätakam

båhan-näradéye-in the Narada Puräëa; çré-yama-bhagératha-samväde-in a conversation of Yama and Bhagiratha; karëena-with the ear; dhärayet-holds; yaù-who; tu-indeed; tulasém-Tulasé; satatam-always; naraù-a person; tat-käñöham-Tulasé wood; vä-or; api-also; räjendra-O great king; tasya-of him; na-not; asti-is; upapätakam-sin.

In the Närada Puräëa, Çré Yama tells King Bhagératha:

"O great king, a person who regularly touches to his ear a Tulasé leaf or a portion of Tulasé wood, is never touched by sin.

Text 204

hari-bhakti-sudhodaye vaiñëava-vipraà prati yamadütänäm uktau

kasmäd iti na jänémas tulasyä hi priyo hariùgacchantaà tulasé-hastaà rakñann evänugacchati

hari-bhakti-sudhodaye-in the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya; vaiñëava-vipram-a Vaiñëava brähmaëa; prati-to; yamadütänäm-of the Yamadutas; uktau-in the words; kasmät-how?; iti-thus; na-not; jänémaù-we know; tulasyä-of Tulasé; hi-indeed; priyaù-dear; hariù-Lord Hari; gacchantam-going; tulasé-hastam-Tulasé in the hand; rakñann-protecting; eva-indeed; anugacchati-follows.

In the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya, the messengers of Yamaräja tell a Vaiñëava brähmaëa:

"We did not understand. Lord Hari loves Tulasé-devé. When a person carries Tulasé in his hand, Lord Hari follows him and gives him all protection.

Text 205

puräëäntare ca

yaù kåtvä tulasé-patraà çirasä viñëu-tat-paraùkaroti dharma-käryäëi phalam äpnoti cäkñayam

puräëäntare-in another Puräëa; ca-and; yaù-who; kåtvä-doing; tulasé-patram-a Tulasé leaf; çirasä-with the head; viñëu-tat-paraù-a Vaiñëava; karoti-does; dharma-käryäëi-pious deeds; phalam-result; äpnoti-attains; ca-and; akñayam-eternal.

In another Puräëa it is said:

"By placing a Tulasé leaf to his head, a Vaiñëava performs a host of pious deeds. He attains a result that is eternal."

Text 206

garuòa-puräëe

mukhe tu tulasé-patraà dåñövä çirasi karëayoùkurute bhäskaris tasya duñkåtasya tu märjanam

garuòa-puräëe-in the Garuòa Puräëa; mukhe-in the mouth; tu-indeed; tulasé-patram-a t leaf; dåñövä-seeing; çirasi-on the hea


"When he sees that a person has touched a Tulasé leaf to his mouth, head, or ears, from his book Yamaräja at once erases all his sins.

Text 207

tri-kälaà vinatä-putra präçayet tulaséà yadiviçiñyate käya-çuddhis cändräyaëa-çataà vinä

tri-kälam-three times; vinatä-putra-O Garuòa; präçayet-eats; tulasém-Tulasé; yadi-if; viçiñyate-is distinguished; käya-of the body; çuddhiù-purity; cändräyaëa-çatam-a hundred candrasyana-vratas; vinä-without.

"O son of Vinatä, if he eats a Tulasé leaf at sunrise, noon and sunset, a person becomes very pure. He does not need to perform a hundred cändräyaëa-vratas.

Text 208

skände çré-vaçiñöha-mandhätå-samväde

cändräyaëät tapta-kåcchrät brahma-kurchät kuçodakätviçiñyate käya-çuddhis tulasé-patra-bhakñaëät

skände çré-vaçiñöha-mandhätå-samväde-in the Skanda Puräëa, Çré Vaçiñöha Muni tells King Mandhätä; cändräyaëät-

than candrayana; tapta-kåcchrät-than great austerities; brahma-kurchät-brahma-kurcha; kuçodakät-kusodaka; viçiñyate-better; käya-çuddhiù-purity; tulasé-patra-bhakñaëät-from eating a Tulasé leaf.

In the Skanda Puräëa, Çré Vaçiñöha Muni tells King Mandhätä;

"By eating a Tulasé leaf one becomes very pure. More pure than if he had followed the cändräyaëa-vrata, tapta-kåcchra-vrata, brahma-kurcha-vrata, or kuçodaka-vrata.

Text 209

tathä ca tulasé-patra- bhakñaëäd bhäva-varjitaùpäpo 'pi sad-gatià präpta ity etad api viçrutam

tathä-so; ca-and; tulasé-patra-a Tulasé leaf; bhakñaëät--by eating; bhäva-varjitaù-without spiritual love; päpaù-a sinner;

"It is well known that simply by eating a Tulasé leaf offered to the Lord, even a sinner who has no spiritual love will attain the abode of the Lord."

Text 210

tathä ca skände çré-brahmä näradaà prati kathite amåta-säroddhare lubdhakopäkhyänänte yamadütän prati çré-viñëudütänäà vacanaà

kñiräbdhau mathyamäne hi tulasé käma-rüpiëéutpäditä mahä-bhägä lokoddhäraëa-hetave

tathä-so; ca-and; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; çré-brahmä-Çré Brahma; näradam-Narada; prati-to; kathite-spoken; amåta-säroddhare-in ther Amrta-saroddhara; lubdhakopäkhyänänte-at the end of the hunter;s stor; yamadütän-the yamadutas; prati-to; çré-viñëudütänäm-of the Çré Viñëudütas; vacanam-the words; kñiräbdhau-in the milk ocean; mathyamäne-churned; hi-indeed; tulasé-Tulasé; käma-rüpiëé-who has the power to assume any form at will; utpäditä-born; mahä-bhägä-very fortunate and beautiful; lokoddhäraëa-hetave-to deliver the worlds.

In the Skanda Puräëa, where Çré Brahmä speaks this verse to Çré Närada, as well as in the Amåta-säroddhara, where, at the end of the hunter's story, the Çré Viñëudütas speak this verse to the Yamadütas, it is said:

"As the milk ocean was being churned, beautiful Tulasé, who has the power to assume any form at will, and whose purpose was to deliver all the worlds, suddenly appeared.

Text 211

yasyäù smaraëa-mätreëa darçanät kértanäd apivilayaà yänti päpäni kià punar viñëu-püjanät

yasyäù-of whom; smaraëa-by remembering; mätreëa-simply; darçanät-by seeing; kértanät-by glorifying; api-also; vilayam-to destruction; yänti-go; päpäni-sins; kim-what?; punaù-more; viñëu-püjanät-by worshiping Lord Viñëu.

"When she is remembered, seen, or glorified, sins race to destruction. How much more, then, are sins destroyed when Lord Viñëu Himself is worshiped?

Text 212

jäta-rüpa-mayaà puñpaà padmaräga-mayaà çubhamhitvä tu ratna-jätäni gåhëäti tulasé-dalam

jäta-rüpa-mayam-made of gold; puñpam-flower; padmaräga-mayam-made of rubies; çubham-beautiful; hitvä-offering; tu-indeed; ratna-jätäni-made of jewels; gåhëäti-accepts; tulasé-dalam-a Tulasé leaf.

"Lord Viñëu will push aside a flower of gold, a flower of rubies, or a flower of many jewels, and choose instead a single Tulasé leaf.

Text 213

bhakñitaà lubdhakenäpi patraà tulasé-sambhavampaçcäd diñöäntam äpanno bhasmé-bhütaà kalevaram

bhakñitam-eaten; lubdhakena-by a hunter; api-even; patram-leaf; tulasé-sambhavam-Tulasé; paçcät-after; diñöäntam-death; äpannaù-attained; bhasmé-bhütam-burned to ashes; kalevaram-body.

"Even a cruel hunter who eats a Tulasé leaf at the time of death burns all his sins to ashes.

Text 214

sitäsitaà yathä néraà sarva-päpa-kñayävahamtathä ca tulasé-patraà präçitaà sarva-käma-dam

sita-white; asitam-black; yathä-as; néram-water; sarva-päpa-kñayävaham-removes sins; tathä-so; ca-and; tulasé-patram-a Tulasé leaf; präçitam-eaten; sarva-käma-dam-fulfills all desires.

As the Gaìgä and the Yamunä was away all sins, so does eating a Tulasé leaf. Eating a Tulasé leaf bring the fulfillment of all desires.

Text 215

yathä jäta-balo vahnir dahate känanädikampräçitaà tulasé-patraà yathä dahati pätakam

yathä-as; jäta-balaù-powerful; vahniù-fire; dahate-burns; känanädikam-beginning with a forest; präçitam-eaten; tulasé-Tulasé; patram-leaf; yathä-as; dahati-burns; pätakam-sins.

Text 216

yathä bhakti-rato nityaà naro dahati pätakamtulasé-bhakñaëät tat tad

dahate päpa-saïcayam

yathä-as; bhakti-rataù-a devotee; nityam-always; naraù-a person; dahati-burns; pätakam-sin; tulasé-Tulasé; bhakñaëät-by eating; tat-that; tat-that; dahate-burns; päpa-saïcayam-a multitude of sins.

"By serving Lord Viñëu, a person burns away his sins. In the same way, by eating a Tulasé leaf, a person burns away a great multitude of sins.

Text 217

cändräyaëa-sahasrasya paräkäëäà çatasya cana tulyaà jäyate puëyaà tulasé-patra-bhakñaëät

cändräyaëa-sahasrasya-of a thousand candrayanas; paräkäëäm-of parakas; çatasya-of a hundred; ca-and; na-not; tulyam-equality; jäyate-is born; puëyam-piety; tulasé-patra-bhakñaëät-by eating a Tulasé leaf.

"A thousand cändräyaëa-vratas and a hundred paräka-vratas do not bring piety equal to what is attained by eating a Tulasé leaf.

Text 218

kåtvä päpa-sahasräëi pürve vayasi mänavaùtulasé-bhakñaëän mucyet çrutam etat purä hareù

kåtvä-doing; päpa-sahasräëi-a thousand sins; pürve-in the first; vayasi-age; mänavaù-a person; tulasé-bhakñaëän-by eating a Tulasé leaf; mucyet-is released; çrutam-heard; etat-that; purä-before; hareù-from Lord Hari.

"I heard Lord Hari say that a person who eats a Tulasé leaf becomes free form a thousands sins committed in his youth.

Text 219

tävat tiñöhanti päpäni dehinäà yama-kiìkaräùyävan na tulasé-patraà mukhe çirasi tiñöhati

tävat-so; tiñöhanti-stand; päpäni-sins; dehinäm-of the embodied beings; yama-kiìkaräù-the servnats of Yamaräja; yävan-as; na-not; tulasé-Tulasé; patram-leaf; mukhe-in the mouth; çirasi-on the head; tiñöhati-stays.

"When a person places a Tulasé leaf on his mouth or on his head, neither sins nor Yama's servants can again approach him.

Text 220

amåtäd utthitä dhätré tulasé viñëu-vallabhäsmåtä saìkértitä dhyätä präçitä sarva-käma-dä

amåtät-from nectar; utthitä-arisen; dhätré-dhatri; tulasé-Tulasé; viñëu-vallabhä-dear to Lord Viñëu; småtä-remembered; saìkértitä-glorified; dhyätä-meditated; präçitä-eaten; sarva-käma-dä-fulfilling all desires.

"The dhätré fruit was manifested from nectar. The Tulasé plant is dear to Lord Viñëu. When they are remembered, praised, meditated on, or eaten, they fulfill all desires.

Text 221

tatraiva çré-yamaà prati çré-bhagavad-väkyaà

dhätré-phalaà ca tulasé måtyu-käle bhaved yadimukhe yasya çire dehe durgatir nästi tasya vai

tatra-there; eva-indeed; çré-yamam-Çré Yama; prati-to; çré-bhagavad-väkyam-the words of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; dhätré-phalam-the dhatri fruit; ca-and; tulasé-Tulasé; måtyu-käle-at the time fo death; bhavet-may be; yadi-if; mukhe-on the mouth; yasya-of whom; çire-on the head; dehe-on the body; durgatiù-trouble; na-not; asti-is; tasya-of him; vai-indeed.

In the Skanda Puräëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead tells Yamaräja:

"A person who places Tulasé or the dhätré fruit on his mouth, head, or body at the moment of his death does not attain an inauspicious destination.

Text 222

yukto yadi mahä-päpaiù sukåtaà närjitaà kvacittathäpi déyate mokñas tulasé bhakñitä yadi

yuktaù-endowed; yadi-if; mahä-päpaiù-with great sins; sukåtam-piety; na-not; arjitam-earned; kvacit-ever; tathäpi-still; déyate-is given; mokñaù-liberation; tulasé-Tulasé; bhakñitä-eaten; yadi-if.

"Even a great sinner who has not done a single pious deed will attain liberation if he eats a Tulasé leaf.

Text 223

lubdhakenätma-dehena bhakñitaà tulasé-dalamsampräpto mat-padaà nünaà kåtvä präëasya samkñayam

lubdhakena-by the hunter; ätma-dehena-his own body; bhakñitam-eaten; tulasé-dalam-Tulasé leaf; sampräptaù-attained; mat-padam-My abode; nünam-indeed; kåtvä-doing; präëasya-of the life; samkñayam-death.

"That hunter ate a Tulasé leaf, and therefore when he died he went to My abode."

Text 224

puräëäntare ca

upoñya dvädaçéà çuddhäà päraëe tulasé-dalampräçayed yadi viprendra açvamedhäñöakaà labhet. iti.

puräëa-Puräëa; antare-in another; ca-and; upoñya-fasting; dvädaçém-on dvadasi; çuddhäm-pure; päraëe-on breaking the fast; tulasé-dalam-a Tulasé leaf; präçayet-eats; yadi-if; viprendra-O king of brähmaëas; açvamedhäñöakam-eight asvamedha-yajanas; labhet-attains; iti-thus.

In another Puräëa it is said:

"A person who fasts on a pure dvädaçé, and then on the next day breaks his fast by eating a Tulasé leaf, attains the result of eight açvamedha-yajïas.

Text 225

tathaiva tulasé-sparsät kåñëa-cakreëa rakñitaùbrahma-bandhur iti khyäto hari-bhakti-sudhodaye

tathä-so; eva-indeed; tulasé-sparsät-by touchign Tulasé; kåñëa-cakreëa-by Lord Kåñëa's cakra; rakñitaù-"rotected; brahma-bandhuù-a brähmaëa's friend; iti-thus; khyätaù-famous; hari-bhakti-sudhodaye-in the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya.

"A brahma-bandhu who ate a Tulasé leaf was protected by Lord Kåñëa's cakra. This story is famous in the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya.

Text 226

ata evoktaà

kià citram asyäù patitaà tulasyä dalaà jalaà vä patitaà punételagnädhibhäla-sthalam älaväla- måt-snäpé kåtsnägha-vinäçanäya. iti.

ata eva-therefore; uktam-said; kim-what?; citram-wonder; asyäù-of this; patitam-fallen; tulasyä-of Tulasé; dalam-a leaf; jalam-water; vä-or; patitam-fallen; punéte-purifies; lagnädhibhäla-sthalam-on the forehead; älaväla-around the roots; måt-earth; snäpé-bathing; kåtsna-all; agha-sins; vinäçanäya-for destruction; iti-thus.

It is also said:

"How wonderful it is! A fallen Tulasé leaf, some water placed on Tulasé, or some earth from Tulasé's roots placed on one's forehead destroy every sin."

Text 227

çrémat-tulasyäù patrasya mähätmyaà yady apédåçamtathäpi vaiñëavais tan na grähyaà kåñëärpaëaà vinä

çrémat-tulasyäù-of Çré Tulasé; patrasya-of a leaf; mähätmyam-the glory; yady-if; api-evem; édåçam-like this; tathäpi-nevertheless; vaiñëavaiù-by the Vaiñëavas; tan-that; na-not; grähyam-to be tasken; kåñëärpaëam-being offered to Lord Kåñëa; vinä-without.

Even though Tulasé's leaves are glorious in this way, the Vaiñëavas will never accept them unless they are first offered to Lord Kåñëa.

Text 228

kåëa-priyatvät sarvatra çré-tulasyäù prasaìgataùsaìkértyamänaà dhätryäç ca mähätmyaà likhyate 'dhunä

kåñëa-priyatvät-because of being dear to Kåñëa; sarvatra-everywhere; çré-tulasyäù-of Çré Tulasé; prasaìgataù-by the touch; saìkértyamänam-being glorified; dhätryäç-of dhatri; ca-and; mähätmyam-glory; likhyate-is written; adhunä-now.

Because she is very dear to Lord Kåñëa, Çré Tulasé-devé is glorified in all the scriptures. Now we will write about the glories of the dhätré fruit.

Text 229

atha dhätré-mähätmyaà skände brahma-närada-samväde dhätré-cchäyäà samäçritya yo 'rcayec cakra-päëinampuñpe puñpe 'svamedhasya phalaà präpnoti mänavaù

Text 230

tatraivägre dhätré-cchäyäà tu saàsprsya kuryät piëòaà tu yo munemuktià prayänti pitaraù prasädän mädhavasya ca

Text 231

mürdhni ghräëe mukhe caiva dehe ca muni-sattamadhatte dhätré-phalaà yas tu sa mähätmä su-durlabhaù

Text 232

dhätré-phala-viliptäìgo dhätré-phala-vibhüñitaùdhätré-phala-kåtaharo naro näräyaëo bhavet

Text 233

yaù kaçcid vaiñëavo loke dhatte dhätré-phalaà munepriyo bhavati devänäà manuñyänäà tu kä kathä

Text 234

yaù kaçcid vaiñëavo loke mithyäcaro 'pi duysta-dhiùpunäti sakaläl lokän dhätré-phala-dalänvitaù

Text 235

dhätré-phaläni yo nityaà vahate kara-sampuöetasya näräyaëo devo varam ekaà prayacchati

Text 236

dhätå-phalaà ca bhoktavyaà kadäcit kara-sampuöätyaçaù çriyam aväpnoti prasädäc cakra-päëinaù

Text 237

dhätré-phalaà ca tulasé måttikä dvarakodbhavasaphalaà jévitaà tasya tritayaà yasya veçmäni

Text 238

dhätré-phalais tu sammiçraà tulasé-dala-väsitampibate vahate yas tu tértha-koöi-phalaà labhet

Text 239

yasmin gåhe bhavet toyaà tulasé-dala-väsitamdhätré-phalaiç ca viprendra gäìgeyaiù kià prayojanam

Text 240

tulasé-dala-naivedyaà dhätryä yasya phalaà gåhekavacaà vaiñëavaà tasya sarva-päpa-vinäsanam

Text 241

brahma-puraëe ca dhätré-phaläni tulasé hy anta-käle bhaved yadimukhe caiva çirasy aìge pätakaà nästi tasya vai

Text 242

kåtvä tu bhagavat-püjaà na térthaà snänam äcaretna ca devalayopeta 'sprsya-saàsprsanädinä

Text 243

atha snäna-viçeña-kälaù småty-artha-sare na snäyäd utsave térthe maìgalyaà vinivartya caanuvrajya suhåd-bandhun arcayitveñöa-devatäm

Text 244

viñëu-småtau ca viçv-alaya-smipa-sthän viñëu-sevärtham ägatäncandalän patitän väpi spåñövä na snänam äcaret

Text 245

deva-yatra-vivaheñu yajïopakaraëeñu cautsaveñu ca sarveñu spåñöaspåñöir na vidyate

Text 246

evaà prataù samabhyarcya çré-kåñëaà tad-anäntaramçästräbhyäsäà dvijaù saktyä kuryäd vipro viçeñataù

Text 247

yad uktaà çruti-småti ubhe netre vipräëäà parikértiteekena vikalaù kano dväbhyäm andhaù prakértitaù

Text 248

kià ca kaurme vyasa-gitäyäà yo 'nyatra kurute yatnaà anadhitya çrutià dvijaùsa sa-mudho na sambhasyo veda-bahyo dvijatibhiù

Text 249

na veda-paöha-mätreëa santuñyed eña vai dvijaùyathoktäcära-hénas tu paìke gaur iva sidati

Text 250

yo 'dhitya vidhivad vedaà vedärthaà na vicärayetsa candhaù çudra-kalpas tu padärthaà na präpädyate. iti.

Text 251

ato 'dhitanvahaà vidvän athadhyäpya ca vaiñëavaùsamarpya tac ca kåñëäya yatena nija-våttaye

Text 252

våttau satyaà ca çåëuyät sadhün saìgatya sat-katham

Text 253

atha våtti-sampadänaà saptama-skandhe rtämåtäbhyäà jéveta måtena prämåtena väsatyanåtäbhyäm api vä na sva-våttya kadäcana

Text 254

rtam uïcha-silaà proktaà amåtaà syäd ayacitammåtaà tu nityaà yacna syät prämåtaà karsanaà småtam

Text 255

satyanåtaà tu vanijyaà sva-våttir nica-sevanam

Text 256

ätmano nica-lokänäà sevanaà våtti-siddhayenitaraà nindyate sadbhir vaiñëavasya viçeñataù

Text 256

tad uktaà seva sva-våttir yair uktä na samyak tair udahåtamsvacchanda-caritaù kva sva vikritasuù kva sevakaù

Text 258

pani-kåtyätmanaù präëän ye vartante dvijadhamaùteñäà durätmanäm annaà bhuktvä cändräyaëaà caret. iti.

Text 259

çukla-våtter asiddhau ca bhojyännän çudra-vargataùtathaiva grähyägrähyäni janéyäc chastrato budhaù

Text 260

çukla-våttiç ca çré-viñëu-dharmottare tåtéya-khaëòe pratigrahena yal labdhaà yajyataù çiñyatas tathäguëänvitebhyo viprasya çuklaà tat tri-vidhaà småtam

Text 261

yuddhopakaräl labdhaà ca dandäc ca vyavaharataùkñatriyasya dhanaà çuklaà tri-vidhaà parikértitam

Text 262

krsi-vanijya-go-rakñaù kåtvä çuklaà tathä visaùdvija-suçrusayä labdhaà çuklaà çudrasya kértitam

Text 263

kramägataà préti-dänaà präptaà ca saha bharyayäaviçeñena sarveñäà dhanaà çuklaà prakértitam

Text 264

atha grähyägrähyäni kaurme tatraiva nadyäc chudrasya vipro 'nnaà mohäd vä yadi kämataùna çudra-yonià vrajati yas tu bhuìkte hy anapadi

Text 265

duñkåtaà hi manuñyasya sarvam anne pratiñöhitamyo yasyännaà samasnäti sa tasyasnäti kilbisam

Text 266

ardhikaù kula-mitraç ca sva-gopälaç ca napitaùete çudreñu bhojyännä dattvä sv-alpa-panaà budhaiù

Text 267

payäsäà sneha-pakvaà yad gorasaà caiva saktavaùpinyakaà caiva tailaà ca çudräd grähyaà tathaiva ca

Text 268

aìgiraù gorasaà caiva saktuàç ca taila-pinyakam eva caapupän bhakñayec chudrät yat kiïcit payasä kåtam

Text 269

atri-småtau sva-sutayaç ca yo bhuìkte sa bhuìkte påthivi-mälämnarendra-bhavane bhuktvä viñöhäyäà jäyate krmiù

Text 270

anyatra ca daça-napita-gopäla- kula-miträrdha-sirinaùbhojyännaù çudra-varge 'mi tathätma-vinivedakaù

Text 271

madhudakaà phalaà mülaà edhaàsya-bhaya-dakñinäabhyudyatäni tv etäni grähyäny api nikåñöataù

Text 272

khala-kñetra-gataà dhanyaà kupa-vapiñu yaj-jalamagrähyäd api tad-grähyaà yac ca goñöha-gataà payaù

Text 273

panéyaà payäsäà bhakñyaà ghåtaà lavanam eva cahasta-dattaà na gåhnéyät tulyaà go-maàsa-bhakñaëaiù

Text 274

manu-småtau samudraà saindhavaà caiva lavane paramädbhutepratyakñe pai tu grähye nisedhas tv anya-gocaraù

Text 275

ayasenaiva patreëa yad annam upanéyatebhoktä tad vit-samaà bhuìkte datä ca narakaà vrajet

Text 276

go-rakñakän vanijakän tathä karuka-silinaùprosyän vardhusikaàç caiva viprän çudravad äcaret

Text 277

kaurme catatraiva trnaà käñöhaà phalaà puñpaà prakasaà vai harer budhaùdharmärthaà kevalaà vipra hy anyathä patito bhavet

Text 278

tila-mudga-yavädénäà muñöir grähya pathi sthitaiùkñudhärthair nänyathä vipra dharma-vidbhir iti sthitiù

Text 279

vaiñëavänäà hi bhoktavyaà prärthyännaà vaiñëavaiù sadäavaiñëavänäm annaà tu parivarjyam amedhyavat

Text 280

tathä ca pädme devadüta-vikuëòala-samväde prärthayed vaiñëaväd annaà prayatnena vicakñaëaùsarva-päpa-viçudhy-arthaà tad-abhave jalaà pibet

Text 281

näradéye mahä-pätaka-samyukto vrajed vaiñëava-mandiramyacayed annam amåtaà tad-abhave jalaà pibet

Text 282 viñëu-småtau srotriyännaà vaiñëavännaà huta-çeñaà ca yad-dhaviùanakhät sodhayet päpaà tusagniù kanakaà yathä

Text 283

skände markandeya-bhagératha-samväde çuddhaà bhagavatasyännaà çuddhaà bhagérathi-jalamçuddhaà viñëu-paraà cittaà çuddham ekadäsi-vratam

Text 284

avaiñëava-gåhe bhuktvä pitvä vä jïanato 'pi väçuddhiç cändräyaëe proktä iñöapurtaà våtha sadä

Text 285

çré-prahlada-vakye ca keçavärca gåhe yasya na tiñöhati mahi-patetasyännaà naiva bhoktavyaà abhakñyena samaà småtam

Text 286

kecid våtty-anapekñasya japa-çräddhavataù prabhoviçvas tasyädisanty asmin käle 'pi kåtino japam

Text 287

atha madhyähnika-kåtyäni madhyähne snänataù pürvaà puñpädy ahåtya vä svayambhåtyädinä vä sampädya kuryän madhyähnikiù kriyaù

Text 288

snänasaktau ca madhyähne snänam äcarya mantrikamyathoktaà bhagavat-püjaà saktaç cet pragvad äcaret

Text 289

atha vaiñëava-vaisvadevädi-vidhiù tataù kåñëarpitenaiva çuddhenanena vaiñëavaùvaisvadevädikaà daivaà karma paitraà ca sadhayet

Text 290

tad uktaà sasthe dina-vibhage tu kuryät païca mahä-makhändaivo homena yajïa syät bhautas tu bali-dänataù

Text 291

paitro vipränna-danena paitreëa balinäthaväkiïcid anna-pradänäd vä tarpaëäd vä catur-vidhaù

Text 292

nr-yajïo 'tithi-satkarät hanta-kareëa cambunä

brahma-yajïo veda-japat puraëa-paöhanena vä

Text 293

tan-nityatä kaurme akåtvä tu dvijaù païca mahä-yajïän dvijottamaùbhuïjita cet su-mudhätmä tiryag-yonià na gacchati

Text 294

atha vaiñëava-çräddha-vidhiù präpte çräddha-dine 'pi prag annaà bhagavate 'rpayettac-chesenaiva kurvéta çräddhaà bhagavato naraù

Text 295

yac ca småtau gåhagni-çisu-devänäà yaténäà brahmacarinämpitå-pako na datavyo yävat piëòän na nirvapet. iti.

Text 296

idrk samänya-vacanaà viçeña-vacana-vrajaiùçruti-småti-puraëädi- varttibhir badhyate dhruvam

Text 297

tathä ca pädme viñëor niveditännena yastavyaà devatäntarampitåbhyaç cäpi tad deyaà tad anantyäya kalpate

Text 298

mokña-dharme näradoktau satvataà vidhim asthäya prak surya-mukha-nisrtampüjayäm äsa devesaà tac-chesena pitamahän

Text 299

brahmanda-puraëe yaù çräddha-käle hari-bhukta-çeñaà dadäti bhaktyä pitå-devatänämtenaiva piëòaàs tulasé-vimiçrän akalpa-koöià pitaraù su-tåptaù

Text 300

skände devän pitån samuddiçya yad viñëor viniveditamtän uddiçya tathä kuryät pradänäà tasya caiva hi

Text 301

prayänti tåptim atulaà sodakena tu tena vaimukunda-gatra-lagnena brahmanänäà vilepanam

Text 302

candanena tu piëòänäà kartavyaà pitå-tåptayedevänäà ca pitåëäà ca jäyate tåpti-rakñayä

Text 303

evaà kåte mahi-päla ma bhavet saàçayaù kvacit

Text 304

tatraiva çré-puruñottama-khaëòe annädyaà çräddha-käle tu patitädyair nirékñitamtulasé-dala-miçreëa salilenäbhisiïcayet

Text 305

tad-ännaà çuddhatam eti viñëor naivedya-miçritamviñëor naivedya-çeñaà tu tasmäd deyaà dvijätmanämpiëòe caiva viçeñena pitåëäà tåptim icchatä

Text 306

tatraiva çré-brahma-närada-samväde pitån uddiçya yaiù püjä keçavasya kåtä naraiùtyaktvä te narakià pidaà muktià yänti mahä-mune

Text 307

dhanyas te mänava loke kali-käle viçeñataùye kurvanti harer nityaà pitå-arthaà püjanaà mune

Text 308

kià dattair bahubhir piëòair gaya-çräddhädibhir muneyair arcito harir bhaktyä pitå-arthaà ca dine dine

Text 309

yam uddiçya hareù püjä kriyate muni-puìgavauddhåtya narakavasät taà nayet paramaà padam

Text 310

yo dadäti hareù sthänaà pitån uddiçya näradakartavyaà hi pitåëäà yat tat kåtaà tena bho dvija

Text 311

çrutau ca eka eva näräyaë asit. na brahma. neme dyäva-préthivyau. sarve devah. sarve itarah. sarve manuñyah, viñëuna asitam asnänti. viñëunaghrätaà jighranti. viñëuna pitaà ibantiu. tasmäd vidhvaàso viñëupahåtaà bhakñayeyuh. iti.

Text 312

ata evoktaà çré-bhagavatä viñëu-dharme präëebhyo juhuyäd ännaà man-niveditam uttamamtåpyanti sarvada präëä man-nivedita-bhakñaëät

Text 313

tasmät sarva-prayatnena pradeyaà man-niveditammamäpi hådaya-sthasya pitåëäà ca viçeñataù

Text 314

kià ca tatraivänyatra bhakñyaà bhojyaà ca yat kiïcid anivedyägra-bhoktarina deyaà pitå-devebhyaù prayacitti yato bhavet

Text 315

svargädau kathito devair agra-bhug bhagavän hariùyajïa-bhaga-bhujo devas tatas tena prakalpitaù

Eleventh Vilasa

Text 176

atha çré-bhagavad-arcana-mähätmyaà

çré-kürma-puräëe

na viñëv-ärädhanät puëyaà vidyate karma vaidikamtasmäd anädi-madhyäntaà nityam ärädhayed dharim

atha-now; çré-bhagavad-arcana-mahätmyam-the glory of worshiping the Supreme Personality of Godhead; çré-kurma-puräëe-in the Kürma Puräëa; na-not; viñëv-arädhänät-than the worship of Lord Viñëu; puëyam-piety; vidyate-is; karma-work; vaidikam-Vedic; tasmät-from that; anädi-without beginning; madhya-middle; antam-or end; nityam-eternal; arädhäyet-should worship; dharim-Lord Hari.

The Glory of Worshiping the Supreme Personality of Godhead


"No work described in the Vedas is more sacred that the worship of Lord Viñëu. Therefore one should always worship Lord Viñëu, who has no beginning, middle, or end."

Text 177

tatraiva

bhågv-ädén prati säkñät çré-bhagavad-uktau

ye 'rcayiñyanti mäà bhaktyä nityaà kali-yuge dvijäùvidhinä veda-dåñöena te gamiñyanti tat-padam

tatra-there; eva-indeed; bhågv-ädén-to the sages headed by Brhgu Muni; prati-to; säkñät-directly; çré-bhagavad-uktau-in the words of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; ye-who; arcayiñyanti-will worship; mäm-Me; bhaktyä-with devotion; nityam-always; kali-yuge-in Kali-yuga; dvijäù-O brähmaëas; vidhinä-properly; veda-dåñöena-following the Vedas; te-they; gamiñyanti-will go; tat-padam-to that abode.

In the Kürma Puräëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead explains to Bhågu and the sages:

"O brähmaëas, in the Kali-yuga they who again and again properly worship Me, following the rules of the Vedas, will go to My transcendental abode."

Text 178

viñëu-rahasye

çré-viñëor arcanaà ye tu prakurvanti narä bhuvite yänti çäçvataà viñëor änandaà paramaà padam. iti.

viñëu-rahasye-in the Viñëu-rahasya; çré-viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; arcanam-worship; ye-who; tu-indeed; prakurvanti-do; narä-people; bhuvi-on the earth; te-they; yänti-go; çäçvatam-eternal; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; änandam-bliss; paramam-supreme; padam.-abode; iti-thus.

In the Viñëu-rahasya it is said:

"They who worship Lord Viñëu will go to His eternal and blissful abode."

Text 179

tatraiva çré-bhagavad-uktau

na me dhyäna-rataù samyag- yoginaù parituñöayetathä bhavanti devarñe kriyä-yoga-ratä yathä

tatra-there; eva-indeed; çré-bhagavad-uktau-in the words of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; na-not; me-on Me; dhyäna-rataù-devoted to meditation; samyag- yoginaù-practiced in yoga; parituñöaye-for pleasing; tatha-so; bhavanti-are; devarñe-O Narada; kriyä-yoga-ratä-engaged in devotional service; yathä-as.

In the Viñëu-rahasya, the Supreme Personality of Godhead explains:

"They who follow the yoga of meditation do please Me as much as they who follow the yoga of work.

Text 180

kriyä-yogo hi me 'bhiñöaù para-yogät svanuñöhitättuñöir me sambhavet pumbhir bhaktimadbhir amatsaraiù

kriyä-yogaù-following the yoga of work; hi-indeed; me-of me; abhiñöaù-pleased; para-yogät-than the best yoga; svanuñöhität-properly situated; tuñöiù-pleasure; me-of me; sambhavet-is; pumbhiù-by people; bhaktimadbhiù-with devotion; amatsaraiù-without envy.

"One who follows the yoga of work pleases Me more than other yogés. I am pleased by they who love Me and are free from envy and hatred,

Text 181

ye 'rcayanti narä nityaà kriyä-yoga-ratäù svayamdhyäyanti ye ca mäà nityaà teñäà çreñöhäù kriyä matäù

ye-who; arcayanti-worship; narä-people; nityam-always; kriyä-yoga-ratäù-engaged in the yoga of work; svayam-personally; dhyäyanti-meditate; ye-eho; ca-and; mäm-on me; nityam-always; teñäm-of them; çreñöhäù-the best; kriyä-in work; matäù-considered.

"They who always worship me and think of Me are the best of they who follow the yoga of work.

Text 182

kriyä-hénasya devarñe tathä dhyänaà na muktidamna tathä mäà vidur vipra dhyäninas tattvato vinä kriyä-yoga-ratäù samyag labhante mäà samädhinä

kriyä-hénasya-without work; devarñe-O Narada; tathä-so; dhyänam-meditation; na-not; muktidam-gives liberation; na-not; tathä-so; mäm-Me; viduù-know; vipra-O brähmaëa; dhyäninaù-meditating; tattvataù-in truth; vinä-without; kriyä-yoga-ratäù-following the yoga of work; samyag-properly; labhante-attain; mäm-Me; samädhinä-in the trance of

meditation.

"O Närada, without working for My sake, meditation does not give liberation. O brähmaëa, they who only meditate cannot understand Me in truth. They who work for My sake become rapt in a trance of meditation on Me and thus they attain Me.

Text 183

yathä hi kämadaà nåëäà mama tuñöi-karaà parambhakti-yogaà mahä-puëyaà bhukti-mukti-pradaà çubham

yathä-as; hi-indeed; kämadam-fulfilling desires; nåëäm-of the people; mama-of Me; tuñöi-karam-pleasing; param-great; bhakti-yogam-the yoga of devotional service; mahä-puëyam-very sacred; bhukti-mukti-pradam-giving happiness and liberation; çubham-auspicious.

"The sacred and auspicious yoga of devotional service pleases me and fulfills the devotee's desires. It brings happiness and liberation.

Text 184

samvatsareëa yat puëyaà labhante dhyänino mamapräpyate tad ihaikähät kriyä-yoga-parair naraiù

samvatsareëa-in a year; yat-what; puëyam-piety; labhante-attains; dhyäninaù-meditrating; mama-of Me; präpyate-is attained; tat-that; iha-here; eka-one; ähät-in a day; kriyä-yoga-paraiù-by they who follow the yoga of work; naraiù-by people.

"In a single day they who follow the yoga of work attain the same pious results the meditating yogés struggle to attain in an entire year."

Text 185

ädi-puraëe

na karma-sädåçaà dhyänaà na karma-sädåçaà phalamna karma-sädåças tyägo na karma-sädåçaà tapaù na karma-sädåçaà puëyaà na karma-sädåçé gatiù

ädi-puraëe-in the Adi Puräëa; na-not; karma-sädåçam-like work; dhyänam-meditation; na-not; karma-sädåçam-like work; phalam-the result; na-not; karma-sädåçaù-like work; tyägaù-renunciation; na-not; karma-sädåçam-like work; tapaù-austerity; na-not; karma-sädåçam-like work; puëyam-piety; na-not; karma-sädåçé-like work; gatiù-destination.

In the Adi Puräëa it is said:

"No meditation is equal to working for the Supreme Personality of Godhead. No result is equal to that obtained by working for the Supreme Personality of Godhead. No renunciation is equal to working for the Supreme Personality of Godhead. No austerity is equal to working for the Supreme Personality of Godhead. No piety is equal to working for the Supreme Personality of Godhead. No destination is equal to that obtained by working for the Supreme Personality of Godhead."

Text 186

näradéye

bhakti-grähyo håñékeço na dhanair dharaëé-suräùbhaktyä sampüjito viñëuù pradädati saméhitam

näradéye-in the Narada Puräëa; bhakti-grähyaù--attained by devotional service; håñékeçaù-Lord Kåñëa, the master of the senses; na-not; dhanaiù-by wealth; dharaëé-suräù-O brähmaëas; bhaktyä-with devotion; sampüjitaù-worshiped; viñëuù-Lord Viñëu; pradädati-gives; saméhitam-desire.


"O brähmaëas, the Supreme Personality of Godhead is attained by devotional service, not by giving money. Lord Viñëu fulfills the desires of they who worship Him with devotion.

Text 187

jalenäpi jagannäthaù püjitaù kleça-hä hariùparitoñaà vrajaty äçu tåñärtaù su-jalair yathä

jalena-with water; api-also; jagannätha-the master ofntheuniverses; püjitaù-worshiped; kleça-ha-destroying sufferings; hariù-Lord Kåñëa; paritoñam-satisfaction; vrajati-attains; äçu-at once; tåñärtaù-thirsty; su-jalaiù-with water; yathä-as.

"As a thirsty man is at once pleased when he drinks some clear water, so Lord Kåñëa, the master of the universes and the killer of all sufferings, is pleased when He is worshiped with an offering of water."

Text 188


kåtäpi dambha-häsyärthe sevä tärayate janänviphalä nänya-karmeva kåpäluù ko nv ataù paraù

hari-bhakti-sudhodaye-in the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya; kåtä-performed; api-even; dambha-häsyärthe-for the sake of pride or mockery; sevä-service; tärayate-delivers; janän-the people; viphalä-worthless; na-not; anya-karma-other work; iva-like; kåpäluù-merciful; kaù-who?; nu-indeed; ataù-than He; paraù-more.


"Even if performed with pride or the intent to mock, devotional service delivers the people. Such devotional service is not useless, as it would be if it were some other work. Who is more merciful than the Supreme Personality of Godhead?"

Text 189

brahma-vaivarte

sa samarädhito devo mukti-kåt syäd yathä tathäanicchayäpi hüta-bhuk

saàspåñöo dahati dvija

brahma-vaivarte-in the Brahma-vaivarta Puräëa; sa-He; samarädhitaù-worshiped; devaù-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; mukti-kåt-giving liberation; syät-is; yathä-as; tathä-so; anicchayä-without desire; api-also; hüta-bhuk-fire; saàspåñöaù-touched; dahati-burns; dvija-O brähmaëa.


"As when one accidentally touches fire, it burns, so when one somehow or other worships the Supreme Personality of Godhead, He responds by giving liberation."

Text 190

dhanavän putravän bhogé yaçasvé bhaya-varjitaùmedhävé matimän präjïo bhavaty arädhänäd dhareù

dhanavän-wealthy; putravän-with good children; bhogé-happy; yaçasvé-famous; bhaya-varjitaù-fearless; medhävé-intelligent; matimän-philosopher; präjïaù-wise; bhavati-becomes; arädhänät-by worshiping; hareù-Lord Kåñëa.

"By worshiping Lord Kåñëa one becomes wealthy, happy, famous, fearless, intelligent, wise, thoughtful, and the parent of good children."

Texts 191 and 192

skände sanatkumära-märkaëòeya-samväde

visiñöaù sarva-dharmäc ca dharmo viñëv-arcanaà nåëämsarva-yajïa-tapo-homäs tértha-snänais ca yat phalam

tat phalaà koti-guëitaà viñëuà sampüjya cäpnuyättasmät sarva-prayatnena näräyaëam ihärcayet

skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; sanatkumära-märkaëòeya-samväde-in the conversation of Sanatkumara and markandeya; visiñöaù-specific; sarva-all; dharmät-from dharma; ca-and; dharmaù-the religion; viñëv-arcanam-the worship of Lord Viñëu; nåëäm-of men; sarva-yajïa-tapo-homäù-all yajnas, austerities, and homas; tértha-snänaiù-bathing in holy rivers; ca-and; yat-what; phalam-result; tat-that; phalam-result; koti-guëitam-millions of times; viñëum-Lord Viñëu; sampüjya-worshiping; ca-and; äpnuyät-attains.

In the Skanda Puräëa, in a conversation of Sanatkumära and Märkaëòeya, it is said:

"The worship of Lord Viñëu is the best of all religions. By worshiping Lord Viñëu one attains a result many millions of times greater than the results of all yajïas, homas, austerities, and bathing in holy places. Therefore one should diligently worship Lord Viñëu."

Text 193


yaù pradadyäd dvijendräya sarväà bhümià sa-sägaräm

arcayed yaù sakåd viñëuà tat phalaà labhate naraù

tatra-there; eva-indeed; çré-çivomä-samväde-in a conversation of Lord Çiva and Goddess Umä; yaù-who; pradadyät-gives; dvijendräya-to a kin gof brähmaëas; sarväm-all; bhümim-the earth; sa-sägaräm-with the oceans; arcayet-worships; yaù-one whop; sakåt-once; viñëum-Lord Viñëu; tat-that; phalam-result; labhate-attains; naraù-a person.

In the Skanda Puräëa, in a conversation of Lord Çiva and Goddess Umä, it is said: "A person who once worships Lord Viñëu attains the same result that is attained by giving the entire earth with all its oceans in charity to the king of brähmaëas.

Text 194

mäsärdham api yo viñëuà nairäntaryeëa püjayetpuruñottamaù sa vijïo (?????) viñëu-bhakto na saàçayaù

mäsärdham-for half a month; api-even; yaù-one who; viñëum-Lord Viñëu; nairäntaryeëa-continually; püjayet-worships; puruñottamaù-the best of persons; sa-he; vijïaù-wise; viñëu-bhaktaù-a devotee of Lord Viñëu; na-no; saàçayaù-doubt.

"One who for half a month diligently worships Lord Viñëu is the best of men. He is wise. He is a great devotee of Lord Viñëu. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 195

madhyandina-gate sürye yo viñëuà paripüjayetvasu-pürëa-mahé-dätur yat puëyaà tad aväpnuyät

madhyandina-gate-at midday; sürye-the sun; yaù-one who; viñëum-Lord Viñëu; paripüjayet-worships; vasu-pürëa-with all its wealth; mahé-the earth; dätuù-giving in charity; yat-what; puëyam-piety; tat-that; aväpnuyät-attains.

"A person who at midday worships Lord Viñëu attains the same pious result as that obtained by giving the entire earth, with all its wealth, in charity."

Text 196

prätar utthäya yo viñëuà satataà paripüjayetagniñöoma-sahasrasya labhate phalam uttamam

prätaù-early in the morning; utthäya-rising; yaù-who; viñëum-Lord Viñëu; satatam-always; paripüjayet-worships; agniñöoma-sahasrasya-of a thousand agnistoma-yajnas; labhate-attains; phalam-result; uttamam-supreme.

"A person who regularly rises early and worships Lord Viñëu attains a pious result better than that obtained by performing a thousand agniñöoma-yajïas.

Text 197

yo viñëuà präyato bhütvä säyam-käle samarcayet

gaväà medhasya yajïasya phalam äpnoti durlabham

yaù-one who; viñëum-Lord Viñëu; präyataù-mostly; bhütvä-becoming; säyam-käle-at evening; samarcayet-worships; gaväm-of cows; medhasya-medha; yajïasya-of a yaujna; phalam-result; äpnoti-attains; durlabham-rare.

"A person who in the evening worships Lord Viñëu attains the same result as that obtained by performing a gomedha-yajïa.

Text 198

evaà sarväsu veläsu aveläsu ca keçavamsampüjayän naro bhaktyä sarvän kämän aväpnuyät

evam-thus; sarväsu-in all; veläsu-the three sandhya times; aveläsu-at the other times; ca-and; keçavam-Lord k; sampüjayät-worships; naraù-a person; bhaktyä-with devotion; sarvän-all; kämän-desires; aväpnuyät-attains.

"A person at any time, at the sandhyä times, or at any other time as well, devotedly worships Lord Kåñëa, attains all his desires.

Text 199

kià punar yo 'rcayen nityaà sarva-deva-namaskåtamdhanyaù saù kåta-kåtyas ca viñëulokam aväpnuyät

kim-what; punaù-more; yaù-one who; arcayet-worships; nityam-always; sarva-deva-namaskåtam-to whom all the demigods bow down; dhanyaù-fortunate; saù-he; kåta-kåtyaù-successful; ca-and; viñëulokam-Viñëuloka; aväpnuyät-attains.

"What, then, can be said of one who always worships Lord Viñëu? Such a person is very fortunate. His life is a perfect success. He goes to the realm of Lord Viñëu.

Text 200

kià ca

dékña-mätreëa kåñëasya narä mokñaà labhanti vaikià punar ye sadä bhaktyä püjayanty acyutaà naräù

kià ca-furthermore; dékña-mätreëa-simply by initiation; kåñëasya-of Lord Kåñëa; narä-people; mokñam-liberation; labhanti-attain; vai-indeed; kim-what?; punaù-again; ye-who; sadä-always; bhaktyä-with devotion; püjayanti-worship; acyutam-the infallible Lord; naräù-people.

"They who are simply initiated into the worship of Lord Kåñëa attain liberation. What can said, then, of they who always worship the Lord with devotion?"

Text 201

tatraiva sri-brahma-närada-samväde

saàsäre 'smin mahä-ghore janma-måtyu-bhayäkulepüjanaà väsudevasya tärakaà vädibhiù småtam

tatra-there; eva-indeed; çré-brahma-närada-samväde-in a conversation of Brahmä and Närada; saàsäre-material world; asmin-in this; mahä-ghore-very horrible; janma-måtyu-bhayäkule-filled with birth, death, and fears; püjanam-worship; väsudevasya-of Lord Kåñëa; tärakam-the deliverer; vädibhiù-by the philosophers; småtam-considered.


"In the material world, which is full of darkness and dangers, combined with birth and death and full of different anxieties, the only way to get out of the great entanglement is to accept loving transcendental devotional service to Lord Väsudeva. This accepted by all classes of philosophers."*

Text 202

sa näma sukåté loke kulaà tena hy alaìkåtamädhäraù sarva-bhütänäà yena viñëuù prasäditaù

sa-he; näma-indeed; sukåté-pious; loke-in the world; kulam-in the family; tena-by him; hi-indeed; alaìkåtam-decorated; ädhäraù-the resting place; sarva-bhütänäm-of everything; yena-by whom; viñëuù-Lord Viñëu; prasäditaù-is pleased.

"A person who pleases Lord Viñëu, in whom everything rests, is the most pious person. He is a splendid ornament decorating his entire family.

Text 203

yajïänäà tapasäà caiva çubhänäm api karmaëämtad visiñöa-phalaà nåëäà sadaivärädhanaà hareù

yajïänäm-of yajnas; tapasäm-of austerities; ca-and; eva-certainly; çubhänäm-auspicious; api-also; karmaëäm-of deeds; tat-that; visiñöa-phalam-best result; nåëäm-of men; sadä-aslways; eva-indeed; ärädhanam-the worship; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa.

"The worship of Lord Kåñëa brings a result far better than anything obtained by performing many yajïas, austerities or pious deeds.

Text 204

kalau kali-maläkrantä na jänanti harià paramye 'rcayanti tam éçänaà kåta-kåtyäs ta eva hi nästi çreyottamaà nåëäà viñëor ärädhanät param

kalau-in Kali-yuga; kali-mäläkrantä-filled with quarrel; na-not; jänanti-know; harim-Lord Kåñëa; param-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; ye-who; arcayanti-worship; tam-Him; éçänam-the Lord; kåta-kåtyäù-successful; ta-they; eva-indeed; hi-indeed; na-not; asti-is; çreyottamam-better; nåëäm-of men; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; ärädhanät-than the worship; param-better.

"In Kali-yuga the people generally are impure and quarrelsome, and they do know that Lord Viñëu is the Supreme. However, those fortunate people that do worship Lord Viñëu become successful and perfect in every way. Nothing is better for the people than the worship of Lord Viñëu.

Texts 205 and 206

yuge 'smin tämase tasmät satataà harim arcayetarcite deva-deveçe çaìkha-cakra-gadä-dhare

arcitäù sarva-deväù syur yataù sarva-gato hariùarcite sarva-lokeçe suräsura-namaskåte keçave keçi-kaàsa-ghne na yäti narakaà naraù

yuge-yuga; asmin-in this; tämase-dark; tasmät-from that; satatam-a;ways; harim-Lord Kåñëa; arcayet-shouild worship; arcite-worshiped; deva-deveçe-the master of the demigods; çaìkha-cakra-gadä-dhare-who holds a conch, disc, and club; arcitäù-worshiped; sarva-deväù-all the demigods; syuù-are; yataù-because; sarva-gataù-all-pervading; hariù-Lord Viñëu; arcite-worshiped; sarva-lokeçe-the master of all the worlds; suräsura-namaskåte-to whom the demigods and demons boy down; keçave-Lord Keçava; keçi-kaàsa-ghne-the killer of Kaàsa and Kesi; na-not; yäti-goes; narakam-to hell; naraù-a person.

"In this dark Kali-yuga one should always worship Lord Viñëu. When Lord Viñëu, who holds a conchshell, disc, and club, and who is the master of all the demigods, is worshiped, then all the demigods are also worshiped automatically, because Lord Viñëu is all-pervading. A person who worships Lord Keçava, who is the master of the worlds, who is worshiped by the demigods and demons, and who killed Kaàsa and Keçi, will not go to the hellish worlds.

Text 207

sakåd abhyarcito yena helayäpi namaskåtaùsa yäti paramaà sthänaà yat surair api püjitam

sakåt-once; abhyarcitaù-worshiped; yena-by whom; helayä-with mockery; api-even; namaskåtaù-bowed down; sa-he; yäti-goes; paramam-to the supreme; sthänam-abdoe; yat-that; suraiù-by the demigods; api-even; püjitam-worshiped.

"A person who once mocks the Lord by pretending to worship Him or bow down before Him still goes to the supreme abode, the abode worshiped by the demigods.

Text 208

samasta-loka-näthasya deva-devasya çärìginaùsäkñäd bhagavato nityaà püjanaà janmanaù phalam

samasta-loka-näthasya-the master of all the worlds; deva-devasya-the master of the demigods; çärìginaù-who holds the Sarnga bow; säkñät-directly; bhagavataù-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; nityam-always; püjanam-worship; janmanaù-of birth; phalam-success.

"Worship of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who holds the Çärìga bow and is the master of the demigods and all

the worlds, makes one's life a complete success."

Text 209

tatraivägre

asäre khalu saàsäre säram etan nirüpitamsamasta-loka-näthasya çraddhayärädhanaà hareù

tatra-there; eva-indeed; agre-in the beginning; asäre-useless; khalu-indeed; saàsäre-in the material world; saräm-vaule; etan-this; nirüpitam-is described; samasta-loka-näthasya-of the master of all the worlds; çraddhayä-with faith; ärädhanam-the worship; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa.

In the beginning of the Skanda Puräëa it is said:

"In this worthless material world the only valuable things is faithful worship of Lord Viñëu, who is the master of all the worlds."

Text 210

kià ca

yatra viñëu-kathä nityaà yatra tiñöhanti vaiñëaväùkali-bähyä naräs te vai ye 'rcayanti sadä harim

kià ca-furthermore; yatra-where; viñëu-kathä-topics of Lord Viñëu; nityam-always; yatra-where; tiñöhanti-are; vaiñëaväù-devotees of Lord Viñëu; kali-bähyäù-untouched by kali-yuga; naräù-people; te-they; vai-indeed; ye-who; arcayanti-worship; sadä-always; harim-Lord Viñëu.

It is further said:

"The age of Kali cannot enter any place where the devotees of Lord Viñëu stay, where they talk of Lord Viñëu, where they always worship Him."

Text 211

käçé-khaëòe

harer ärädhanaà puàsäà kià kià na kurute bataputra-mitra-kalaträrthaà räjya-svargäpavargadam

käçé-khaëòe-in the Käçé-khaëòa; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; ärädhanam-worship; puàsäm-of the people; kim-why?; kim-why?; na-not; kurute-do; bata-indeed; putra-mitra-kalaträrtham-children, freinds, wife, and wealth; räjya-svargäpavargadam-which guve kingdom, Svargaloka, and liberation.

In the Käçé-khaëòa it is said:

"Why, why do the people not worship Lord Viñëu, whose worship brings a beautiful wife, good children, good friends, wealth, kingdom, residence in Svarga, and final liberation?

Text 212

haraty aghaà dhvaàçayati vyädhén ädhén niräsyatidharmaà vivardhayet kñipraà prayacchanti mano-ratham

harati-removes; agham-sin; dhvaàçayati-destroys; vyädhén-disease; ädhén-distress; niräsyati-destroys; dharmam-piety; vivardhayet-increases; kñipram-quickly; prayacchanti-gives; mano-ratham-desire.

"The worship of Lord Viñëu removes sins, destroys diseases and anguish, increases piety, and quickly brings the fulfillment of desires."

Text 213

ata eva skände dhruvaà prati märkaëòeyasya vacanaà

sakåd abhyarcito yena deva-devo janärdanaùsa präpnoti paraà sthänaà satyam etan mayoditam

ata eva-therefore; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; dhruvam-Dhruva Mahäräja; prati-to; märkaëòeyasya-of Markandeya; vacanam-the words; sakåt-once; abhyarcitaù-worshiped; yena-by whom; deva-devaù-the master of the demigods; janärdanaù-Lord Viñëu; sa-he; präpnoti-attains; param-supreme; sthänam-place; satyam-truth; etan-this; mayä-by me; uditam-spoken.

In the Skanda Puräëa, Märkaëòeya Muni tells King Dhruva:

"A person who once worships Lord Viñëu, the master of the demigods, attains the supreme abode in the spiritual world. I tell you the truth."

Text 214

tathäìgirasaù

yasyäntaù sarvam evedaà yasya nänto mahätmanaùtam ärädhaya govindaà sthänam ägryaà yadécchasi

tathä-so; äìgirasaù-of Angira Muni; yasya-of whom; antaù-within; sarvam-all; eva-indeed; idam-this; yasya-of whom; na-not; antaù-the end; mahätmanaù-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; tam-Him; ärädhaya-worship; govindam-Lord Kåñëa; sthänam-the place; ägryam-best; yadi-if; icchasi-you wish.

Aìgirä Muni explains:

"If you wish to enter the spiritual world, then please worship Lord Govinda, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who has no end, and in whom everything rests."

Text 215

pulastasya

paraà brahma paraà dhäma yo 'sau çäçvata-puruñaùtam ärädhya harià yäti

muktim apy ati-durlabhäm

pulastasya-of Pulastya Muni; param-Supreme; brahma-Brahman; param-supreme; dhäma-abode; yaù-who; asau-He; çäçvata-eternal; puruñaù-person; tam-Him; ärädhya-worshiping; harim-Lord Kåñëa; yäti-goes; muktim-to liberation; api-also; ati-durlabhäm-very rare.

Pulastya Muni explains:

"One who worships Lord Kåñëa, who is the eternal Supreme Person, the Supreme Brahman, and the Supreme Abode, attains final liberation, which is otherwise very difficult to attain."

Text 216

pulahasya

aindram indraù paraà sthänaà yam ärädhya jagat-patimpräpa yajïa-patià viñëuà tam ärädhaya su-vrata

pulahasya-of Pulaha Muni; aindram-the supreme king; indraù-Indra; param-the supreme; sthänam-abode; yam-whom; ärädhya-worshiping; jagat-of the universe; patim-the master; präpa-attained; yajïa-patim-the master of all yajnas; viñëum-Lord Viñëu; tam-Him; ärädhaya-please worship; su-vrata-O saintly one.

Pulaha Muni explains:

"O saintly one, please worship Lord Viñëu, the master of all yajïas and all the worlds. By worshiping Him, King Indra attained his royal post."

Text 217

vaçiñöhasya

präpnoty ärädhite viñëau manasä yad yad icchatitrailokyäntar-gataà sthänaà kim u sarvottamottamam

vaçiñöhasya-of Vasistha Muni; präpnoti-attains; ärädhite-worshiped; viñëau-Lord Viñëu; manasä-with the mind; yad yat-whatever; icchati-desires; trailokyäntar-gatam-in th4e three worlds; sthänam-place; kim u-indeed; sarvottamottamam-the best of all.

Vaçiñöha Muni explains:

"One who worships Lord Viñëu can attain anything his heart desires in the three worlds, what to speak of in that world above all others.

Text 218

yän yän kämayate kämän näré vä puruño 'pi vätän samäpnoti vipulän samärädhya janärdanam

yän yän-whatever; kämayate-desires; kämän-desires; näré-a woman; vä-or; puruñaù-a man; api-also; vä-or; tän-that; samäpnoti-attains; vipulän-many; samärädhya-worshiping; janärdanam-Lord Kåñëa.

"By worshiping Lord Viñëu a man or a woman will attain whatever they desire."

Text 219


ärädhyaiva naro viñëuà manasä yad yad icchatiphalaà präpnoty avihataà bhüri svalpam athäpi vä

agastya-saàhitäyäm-in the Agastya-saàhitä; ärädhya-worshiping; eva-certainly; naraù-a man; viñëum-Lord Viñëu; manasä-with the mind; yad yat-whatever; icchati-desires; phalam-result; präpnoti-attains; avihatam-complete; bhüri-great; svalpam-small; athäpi-or; vä-or.


"A person who worships Lord Viñëu will attain whatever thing, great or small, his heart desires."

Text 220

édåçaà viñëu-puräëe 'pi kiïcid adhikaà cedaà

çré-maréceù

anärädhita-govindair narair sthänaà nåpätmajana hi sampräpyate çreñöhaà tasmäd ärädhayäcyutam

édåçam-like this; viñëu-puräëe-in the Viñëu Puräëa; api-also; kiïcit-something; adhikam-more; ca-and; idam-this; çré-maréceù-of Marici Muni; anärädhita-govindaiù-by they who do not worship Lord Govinda; naraiù-by people; sthänam-the place; nåpätmaja-O prince; na-not; hi-indeed; sampräpyate-is attained; çreñöham-the best; tasmät-from that; ärädhaya-please worship; acyutam--the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead.

In the Viñëu Puräëa, Maréci Muni explains:

"They who do not worship Lord Govinda cannot attain the Supreme Abode. Therefore, O prince, please worship Him, the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead."

Text 221

kià ca tatraiva

bhaumän manorathän svargaà svarga-vandyaà tathäspadampräpnoty ärädhite viñëau nirväëam api cottamam

kià ca-furthermore; tatra-there; eva-indeed; bhauman-a kingdom; manorathän-desires; svargam-Svarga; svarga-vandyam-worshiped in Svarga; tathä-so; aspadam-the abode; präpnoti-attains; ärädhite-worshiped; viñëau-Lord Viñëu; nirväëam-liberation; api-also; ca-and; uttamam-the highest.

In the Viñëu Puräëa it is also said:

"By worshiping Lord Viñëu one attains all his desires. He attains a great kingdom, residence in Svargaloka, and residence in the transcendental abode worshiped by the people of Svarga. He attains the highest liberation."

Texts 222 and 223

tathä brahma-vaivarte

yat-pädodakam ädhäya çivaù çirasi nåtyatiyan-näbhi-nalinäd äséd brahmä loka-pitämahaù

yad-icchä-çakti-vikñobhäd brahmäëòodbhava-saìkñayautam ärädhaya govindaà sthänam ägryaà yadécchasi

tathä-so; brahma-vaivarte-in Brahma-vaivarta Puräëa; yat-pädodakam-the water that has washed His feet; ädhäya-placing; çivaù-Lord çiva; çirasi-on his head; nåtyati-dances; yan-näbhi-nalinät-from the lotus of His navel; äsét-was; brahmä-Brahmä; loka-pitämahaù-the grandfather of the worlds; yad-icchä-çakti-vikñobhät-by the pwoer of whose desire; brahmäëòodbhava-saìkñayau-the creation and destruction of thr material universes; tam-Him; ärädhaya-worship; govindam-Lord Kåñëa; sthänam-the place; ägryam-transcendental; yadi-if; icchasi-you desire.


"If you wish to enter the spiritual world, then please worship Lord Govinda, by whose desire the material universes are created and destroyed, from the lotus of whose navel Brahmä, the grandfather of the worlds was born, the water of whose feet Lord Çiva sprinkles on his head as he dances."

Text 224

närasiàhe märkaëòeya-sahasränéka-samväde

yas tu sampüjayen nityaà narasiàha nareçvarasa svarga-mokña-bhägé syän nätra käryä vicäraëä

närasiàhe-in the Nriàha Puräëa; märkaëòeya-sahasränéka-samväde-in the conversation of Markandeya and sahasranika; yaù-one who; tu-indeed; sampüjayet-may worship; nityam-always; narasiàha-O Lord Nåsiàha; nareçvara-O master of the living entites; sa-He; svarga-mokña-bhägé-the enjoyer of Svarga and liberation; syät-is; na-not; atra-here; käryä-to be done; vicäraëä-consideration.

In the Nåsiàha Puräëa, in a conversation of Märkaëòeya and Sahasränéka it is said:

"One who, calling out, `O Lord Nåsiàha! O master of the living entities!', regularly worships Lord Nåsiàha, will attain both Svargaloka and liberation. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 225

tasmäd eka-manä bhütvä yaväj jévaà pratijïayäarcanän narasiàhasya sampräpnoty abhiväïchitam

tasmät-therefore; eka-manä-with a single mind; bhütvä-becoming; yaväj-as long as; jévam-life; pratijïayä-with a vow; arcanän-from the worship; narasiàhasya-of Lord Nåsiàha; sampräpnoti-attains; abhiväïchitam-desire.

"A person who devotedly spends his entire life worshiping Lord Nåsiàha in this way will attain whatever he desires."

Text 226

tatraiva çré-vyäsa-çuka-samväde çré-märkaëòeya-måtyuïjaya-samvädänantaraà

narake pacyamänas tu yamena paribhäñitaùkià tvayä närcito devaù keçavaù kleça-näçanaù

tatra-there; eva-inded; çré-vyäsa-çuka-samväde-in the conversation of Sri Vytas and Sri Suka; çré-märkaëòeya-måtyuïjaya-samvädänantaram-after a conversation of Sri Markandeya nd Lord Siva; narake-in hell; pacyamänaù-being cooked; tu-inded; yamena-by Yamaraja; paribhäñitaù-said; kim-why?; tvayä-by you; na-not; ärcitaù-worshiped; devaù-th Supreme Personality of Godhead; keçavaù-Lord Kåñëa; kleça-od sufferings; näçanaù-the destroyer.

In the Nåsiàhe Puräëa, after a conversation of Lord Çiva and Märkaëòeya Muni, in a conversation of Çré Vyäsa and Çré Çukadeva Gosvämé, is the following statement:

"They who do not worship Lord Kåñëa suffer in hell, where they are tortured by Yamaräja. Why, then, do you not worship Lord Kåñëa, the destroyer of sufferings?

Text 227

udakenäpy aläbhe tu dravyänäà püjitaù prabhuùyo dadäti svakaà lokaà sa tvayä kià na püjitaù

udakena-by water; api-also; aläbhe-in non-attainment; tu-indeed; dravyänäm-of things; püjitaù-worshiped; prabhuù-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; yaù-who; dadäti-gives; svakam-own; lokam-realm; sa-He; tvayä-by you; kim-why?; na-not; püjitaù-worshiped.

"If other things are not available, one may worship Lord Kåñëa by offering Him a cup of water. Why do you not worship Him?

Text 228

narasiàho håñékeçaù puëòaréka-nibhekñaëaùsmaraëän mukti-do nåëäà sa tvayä kià na püjitaù

narasiàhaù-Nåsima; håñékeçaù-the master of the senses; puëòaréka-nibhekñaëaù-His eyes like lotus petals; smaraëän-by remembering; mukti-daù-giving liberation; nåëäm-of the people; sa-He; tvayä-by you; kim-why?; na-not; püjitaù-worshiped.

"To they who remember Him, lotus-eyed Lord Nåsiàha, the supreme master of the senses, easily gives liberation. Why do you not worship Him?

Text 229

båhan-näradéye 'diti-mahätmye çré-sütoktau

yatra püjä-paro viñëos tatra vighno na bädhate

räjä ca taskaraç cäpi vyädhayaç ca na santi hi

båhan-näradéye-in Båhan-näradéya Puräëa; aditi-mahätmye-in the glories of Aditi; çré-sütoktau-in the statement of Çré Süta Gosvämé; yatra-where; püjä-to worship; paraù-devoted; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; tatra-there; vighnaù-obstacle; na-not; bädhate-stops; räjä-king; ca-and; taskaraù-thief; ca-and; api-also; vyädhayaù-diseases; ca-and; na-not; santi-are; hi-indeed.

In the Närada Puräëa, in the chapter on the glories of Aditi, Çré Süta Gosvämé explains:

"When one is devoted to the worship of Lord Viñëu, no obstacles stand in his way. Kings, thieves, and diseases do not attack him.

Text 230

pretäù piçäcäù kuñmäëòäù grahä bälagrahäs tathädäkiëyo räkñasäç caiva na bädhante 'cyutärcakam

pretäù-pretas; piçäcäù-pisacas; kuñmäëòäù-kusmandas; grahä-grahas; bälagrahäù-balagrahas; tathä-so; däkiëyaù-dakinis; räkñasäù-raksasas; ca-and; eva-indeed; na-not; bädhante-stop; acyutärcakam-one who worships the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead.

"Pretas, piçäcas, kuñmäëòas, grahas, bälagrahas, däkiëés, and räkñasas cannot attack a devotee of the infallible Personality of Godhead."

Text 231

tatraiva yama-bhagératha-samväde

patraiù puñpaiù phalair värcyä püjä-rahitam acyutamsa yäti viñëu-sälokyaà kula-saptati-samyutaù

tatra-there; eva-indeed; yama-bhagératha-samväde-in a conversation of Yama and Bhagiratha; patraiù-with leaves; puñpaiù-flowers; phalaiù-fruits; vä-or; arcyä-to be worshiped; püjä-worship; rahitam-in a secluded place; acyutam-the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead; sa-he; yäti-goes; viñëu-sälokyam-to the same planet as Lord Viñëu; kula-saptati-samyutaù-with seventy generations of his relatives.

In the Närada Puräëa, in a conversation of Yamaräja and Bhagératha it is said:

"A person who in a secluded place worships Lord Viñëu with fruits, leaves, and flowers, travels, with seventy generations of his relatives, to the abode of Lord Viñëu."

Text 232

tatraiva dhvajäropana-mahätmye çré-viñëu-dütänäm uktau

utkränti-käle yan-näma çrutavanto 'pi vai sakåtlabhante paramaà sthänaà kim u çuçrüñaëe rataù

tatra-there; eva-indeed; dhvajäropana-mahätmye-in the Dhvajaropana-mahatmya; çré-viñëu-dütänäm-of the Viñëudutas; uktau-in the statement; utkränti-käle-at the time of dath; yan-näma-whose name; çrutavantaù-hearingt; api-even; vai-indeed; sakåt-once; labhante-attain; paramam-supreme; sthänam-destination; kim u-what?; çuçrüñaëe-with

faith; rataù-engaged.

In the Närada Puräëa, in the Dhvajäropana-mähätmya chapter, the Viñëudütas explains:

"They who at the time of hear a single utterance of the Lord's holy name go to the supreme spiritual abode. What need be said, then, of they who serve the Lord with faith?"

Text 233

muhürtaà vä muhürtärdhaà yas tiñöhed dhari-mandiresa yäti paramaà sthänaà kim u çuçrüñaëe rataù

muhürtam-a moment; vä-or; muhürtärdham-half a moment; yaù-one who; tiñöhet-stays; hari-mandire-in the temple of Lord Kåñëa; sa-he; yäti-goes; paramam-to the supreme; sthänam-abode; kim u-what?; çuçrüñaëe-with faith; rataù-engaged.

"A person who for a moment, or even half a moment, visits a temple of Lord Kåñëa, goes to the supreme spiritual abode. What need be said, then, of they who serve the Lord with faith?"

Text 234

tatraiva vibhaëòaka-muneù sumati-nåpaà prati

avaçenäpi yat karma kåtaà tu su-mahat phalamdadäti nåëäà räjendra kià punaù samyag-arcanä

tatra-there; eva-indeed; vibhaëòaka-muneù-of Vibhandaka Muni; sumati-nåpam-King Sumati; prati-to; avaçena-whimsically; api-also; yat-what; karma-deed; kåtam-done; tu-indeed; su-mahat-very great; phalam-result; dadäti-gives; nåëäm-of the human beings; räjendra-O great king; kim-what?; punaù-more; samyag-arcanä-properly engaged in worship.

In the Närada Puräëa, Vibhaëòaka Muni tells King Sumati:

"Even a person who on a whim does some service to the Lord attains a very great result. What need be said, then, of they who serve the Lord with with care?"

Text 235

präyaçcitta-prakaraëänte

samparkäd yadi vä mohäd yas tu püjayate harimsarva-päpa-vinirmuktaù sa yäti paramaà padam

präyaçcitta-prakaraëänte-after the description of prayascitta; samparkät-because of contact; yadi-if; vä-or; mohät-by mistake; yaù-one who; tu-indeed; püjayate-worships; harim-Lord Kåñëa; sarva-päpa-vinirmuktaù-free of all sins; sa-he; yäti-goes; paramam-to the supreme; padam-abode.

After the description of präyaçcitta it is said:

"A person who, somehow or other, by meeting the devotees or by mistake, worships Lord Kåñëa, becomes free of all sins and goes to the supreme abode.

Text 236

sarväntaräyä naçyanti manah-çuddhiç ca jäyateparaà mokñaà labhec caiva püjyamäne janärdane

sarva-all; antaräyäù-obstacles; naçyanti-are destrioyed; manah-çuddhiù-purioty of the mind; ca-and; jäyate-is born; param-great; mokñam-liberation; labhec-attains; ca-and; eva-indeed; püjyamäne-worshiped; janärdane-when Lord Kåñëa is.

"By worshiping Lord Kåñëa a person attains a pure heart and mind. All the obstacles that stood before him perish, and he goes to the supreme abode.

Text 237

dharmärtha-käma-mokñäkhyä puruñärthäù sanätanäùhari-püjä-paräëäà tu sidhyante nätra saàçayaù

dharmärtha-käma-mokñäkhyä-called piety, economic development, desne gratification, and liberation; puruñärthäù-the goals of life; sanätanäù-eternal; hari-püjä-paräëäm-of they who worship Lord Kåñëa; tu-indeed; sidhyante-are perfected; na-not; atra-here; saàçayaù-doubt.

"They who devotedly worship Lord Kåñëa attain the four eternal goals of life: religion, sense gratification, economic development, and liberation.

Text 238

sarva-térthäni yajïäç ca säìgä vedäç ca sattamäùnäräyaëärcanasyaite kaläà närhanti ñoòaçém

sarva-térthäni-all pilgrimages; yajïäù-yajnas; ca-ands; säìgä-with their parts; vedäù-the Vedas; ca-and; sattamäù-O saintly ones; näräyaëa-of Lord Näräyaëa; arcanasya-of the worship; ete-they; kaläm-part; na-not; arhanti-are worthy; ñoòaçém-sixteenth.

"All pilgrimages, yajïas, Vedas, and Vedäìgas are not equal to even a sixteenth of the value of worship to Lord Näräyaëa."

Text 239

çré-viñëu-toña-vidhi-praçnottare

satyaà vacmi hitaà vacmi säraà vacmi punaù punaùasärodägra-saàsäre säraà yad viñëu-püjanam

çré-viñëu-toña-vidhi-praçnottare-in answer to the question about Çré Viñëu-toña-vidhi; satyam-the truth; vacmi-I tell; hitam-auspiciousness; vacmi-I tell; säram-the best; vacmi-I tell; punaù-again; punaù-and again; asärodägra-saàsäre-in this worthless world of birth and death; säram-the best; yat-what;; viñëu-of Lord Viñëu; püjanam-the worship.

In answer to a question about Çré Viñëu-toña-vidhi it is said:

"I will tell you the truth. I will tell you what is auspicious. Again and again I will tell what is the best thing to know: In this worthless world of birth and death the best thing is the worship of Lord Viñëu.

Text 240

upalepana-mähätmyänte

akämäd api ye viñëoù sakåt püjaà prakurvatena teñäà bhava-bandhas tu kadäcid api jäyate

upalepana-mähätmyänte-aftre the chapter on the glories of anointing the Lord sandal paste; akämät-without desire; api-also; ye-they who; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; sakåt-once; püjam-worship; prakurvate-do; na-not; teñäm-of them; bhava-bandhaù-the bondage of birth and death; tu-indeed; kadäcit-ever; api-even; jäyate-is born.

After the Upalepana-mähätmya it is said:

"They who without material desire once worship Lord Viñëu become free from the bonds of birth and death."

Text 241

yajïadhvajopakhyänänte

tasmät çåëuta viprendra devo näräyaëo 'vyayaùjïänato 'jïänato väpi püjakänäà vimukti-daù

yajïadhvajopakhyänänte-after the story of Yajïadhvaja; tasmät-therefore; çåëuta-please hear; viprendra-O king of brähmaëas; devaù-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; näräyaëaù-Lord Näräyaëa; avyayaù-eternal; jïänataù-with knowledge; ajïänataù-without knowledge; vä-or; api-also; püjakänäm-of they who worship Him; vimukti-daù-the giver of liberation.

After the story of Yajïadhvaja it is said:

"O kings of the brähmaëas, please hear this: Lord Näräyaëa, the eternal Personality of Godhead, gives liberation to whoever knowingly or unknowingly worships Him.

Text 242

te vandyäs te präpüjyäs ca namaskäryä viçeñataùye 'rcayanti mahä-viñëuà präpannärti-praëäçanam

te-they; vandyäù-worthy of being glorified; te-they; präpüjyäù-worthy of being worshiped; ca-and; namaskäryä-they worthy of receiving obeidances; viçeñataù-specifically; ye-they who; arcayanti-worship; mahä-viñëum-Lord Mahä-Viñëu; präpanna-of the surrendered souls; arti-teh distresses; praëäçanam-the destruction.

"They who worship Lord Mahä-Viñëu, the destroyer of the surrendered souls' sufferings, should be worshiped. They should be glorified. They should be offered respects.

Text 243

ye yajanti spåhä-çünyä harià vä haram eva väta eva bhuvanaà sarvaà punanti vibudharñabhäù

ye-who; yajanti-worship; spåhä-çünyä-without material desires; harim-Lord Viñëu; vä-or; haram-Lord Çiva; eva-indeed; vä-or; ta-they; eva-indeed; bhuvanam-world; sarvam-all; punanti-purify; vibudharñabhäù-O best of the sages.

"O wise sages, they who without material desires worship Lord Viñëu or Lord Çiva purify all the world."

Text 244

pädme çré-näräyaëa-närada-samväde püjä-vidhi-prasaìge

mad-bhakto yo mad-arcäà ca karoti vidhi-dåñöayetasyäntaräyaù svapne 'pi na bhavaty abhayo hi saù

pädme-in the Pamda Puräëa; çré-näräyaëa-närada-samväde-in a conversation of Çré Näräyaëa and Çré Närada Åñi; püjä-vidhi-prasaìge-on the topic of the rules of worship; mad-bhaktaù-My devotee; yaù-who; mad-arcäm-My worship; ca-and; karoti-does; vidhi-dåñöaye-properly; tasya-of him; antaräyaù-an obstacle; svapne-in dream; api-even; na-not; bhavati-is; abhayaù-fearless; hi-indeed; saù-he.

In the Padma Puräëa, in a conversation about the rules of worship, Lord Näräyaëa tells Närada Muni:

"For one who becomes My devotee and properly worships Me, no obstacle will ever appear, even in a dream. Such a devotee becomes fearless."

Text 245

tatraiva vaiçäkha-mähätmye näradämbaréña-samväde

puträn kalaträn dérghäyü räjyaà svargäpavaragakamsa dadyäd épsitaà sarvaà bhaktyä sampüjito 'jitaù

tatra-there; eva-indeed; vaiçäkha-mähätmye-in the Vaiçäkha-mähätmya; näradämbaréña-samväde-in a conversation of Närada Muni and King Ambaréña; puträn-sons; kalaträn-wives; dérghäyü-long life; räjyam-kingdom; svarga-residence in Svargaloka; apavaragakam-and liberation; sa-He; dadyät-gives; épsitam-desire; sarvam-all; bhaktyä-with devotion; sampüjitaù-worshiped; ajitaù-the invicible Supreme Personality of Godhead.

In the Padma Puräëa, in the Vaiçäkha-mähätmya, in a conversation of Närada Muni and King Ambaréña, it is said:

"When He is worshiped with devotion, the Supreme Personality of Godhead responds by fulfilling all desires. He gives beautiful wife, good children, long life, kingdom, residence in Svargaloka, and final liberation.

Text 246

narake 'pi ciraà magnäù pürvajä ye kula-dvayetatraiväyänti te svargaà yad arceta suto harim

narake-in hell; api-even; ciram-for a long time; magnäù-drowning; pürvajä-ancestors; ye-who; kula-dvaye-in both families; tatra-there; eva-indeed; äyänti-go; te-they; svargam-to Svargaloka; yat-because; arceta-worships; sutaù-

descendent; harim-Lord Viñëu.

"When one of their descendents worships Lord Viñëu, many ancestors from both sides of the family become released from hell and go to Svargaloka."

Text 247

tatraiva çré-yama-brähmaëa-samväde ca

anärädhya harià bhaktyä ko lokän präpnuyäd budhaùärädhite harau kämaù sarve kara-tala-sthitäù

tatra-there; eva-indeed; çré-yama-brähmaëa-samväde-in a conversation of Yamaräja and a brähmaëa; ca-and; anärädhya-without worshiping; harim-Lord Viñëu; bhaktyä-with devotion; kaù-what?; lokän-planets; präpnuyät-attain; budhaù-demigod; ärädhite-when worshiped; harau-Lord Viñëu; kämaù-desires; sarve-all; kara-tala-sthitäù-sitting in the palm of one's hand.

In the Padma Puräëa, in a conversation of Yamaräja and a brähmaëa, it is said:

"What demigod attained the celestial world without devotedly worshiping Lord Viñëu? One who worships Lord Viñëu finds that whatever he wishes appears in the palm of his hand."

Text 248

viñëu-dharmottare çré-kåñëämåta-stotre

so 'pi dhanyatamo loke yo 'rcayed acyutaà sakåtkià punaù çraddhayä yuktaù su-puñpaiù prati-väsaram

viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khanda; çré-kåñëämåta-stotre-in the Kåñëaamrta-stotra; saù-he; api-also; dhanyatamaù-most fortunate; loke-in this world; yaù-who; arcayet-worships; acyutam-the infallibel Supreme Personality of Godhead; sakåt-onde; kim-what?; punaù-more; çraddhayä-with faith; yuktaù-engaged; su-puñpaiù-with nice flowers; prati-väsaram-every day.

In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, in the Çré Kåñëämåta-stotra, it is said:

"In this world a person who once worships infallible Lord Viñëu is very fortunate. What, then, may be said of a person who faithfully worships the Lord every day with many nice flowers?

Text 249

vaiñëavän api ye nityaà prapaçyanty arcayanti cate 'pi viñëu-padaà yänti kià punar viñëu-sevakäù

vaiñëavän-the devotees of Lord Viñëu; api-also; ye-they who; nityam-regularly; prapaçyanti-see; arcayanti-worship; ca-and; te-they; api-also; viñëu-padam-the abode of Lord Viñëu; yänti-attain; kim-what?; punaù-more; viñëu-sevakäù-the servants of Lord Viñëu.

"They who regularly see and worship Lord Viñëu's devotees go to Lord Viñëu's transcendental abode. What, then, may be said of Lord Viñëu's devotees themselves?"

Text 250

sa yogé sa viçuddhätmä sa çäntaù sa mahä-matiùsa çuddhaù sa ca sampürëaù kåñëaà seveta yo naraù

sa-he; yogé-a yogi; sa-he; viçuddhätmä-pure at heart; sa-he; çäntaù-peaceful; sa-he; mahä-matiù-very intelligent; sa-he; çuddhaù-pure; sa-he; ca-and; sampürëaù-perfect; kåñëam-Lord Kåñëa; seveta-serves; yaù-who; naraù-a person.

"A person who serves Lord Kåñëa is a great yogé. He is pure in heart. He is peaceful. He is wise. He is pure. He is perfect.

Text 251


ananya-manasaù çaçvad gaëayanto 'kñamälayäjapanto räma rämeti sukhämåta-nidhau manaù pravilapyämåté-bhüya mukhaà tiñöhanti kecana

agastya-saàhitäyäm-in the Agastya-samhita; ananya-manasaù-whose heart does not go to anyone else; çaçvat-always; gaëayantaù-counting; akña-mälayä-with jkapa beads; japantaù-chanting; räma-Räma; räma-Räma; iti-thus; sukha-of bliss; amåta--of nectar; nidhau-an ocean; manaù-the heart; praviläpya-saying; amåté-bhüya-becoming eternal; mukham-mouth; tiñöhanti-stays; kecana-some.


"Some devotees, again and again intently chanting Räma! Räma! on japa-beads, dive into a nectar ocean of bliss. Attaining eternal liberation, they become filled with bliss.

Text 252

paricaryä-paräù kecit präsädeñv eva çeratemanuñyam iva taà drañöuà vyavahartuà ca bandhuvat

paricaryä-paräù-devoted to worship; kecit-some; präsädeñv-in temples; eva-indeed; çerate-stay; manuñyam-human; iva-as if; tam-Him; drañöum-to see; vyavahartum-to act; ca-and; bandhuvat-like a friend.

"Other devotees, attracted to Deity-worship, stay in temples to see Lord Räma, who appeared in a humanlike form to become the friend of His devotees."

Text 253

kià ca

yathä vidhi-niñedhau tu muktaà naivopasarpataùtathä na spåçato rämo- päsakaà vidhi-pürvakam

kià ca-furthermore; yathä-as; vidhi-niñedhau-injunctions and prohibitions; tu-indeed; muktam-free; na-not; eva-inded; upasarpataù-by approaching; tathä-so; na-not; spåçataù-touched; räma--of Lord Räma; upäsakam-a worshiped; vidhi-pürvakam-according to the rules.

It is further said:

"As a liberated soul need not follow the great myriad of Vedic orders and prohibitions, so a worshiper of Lord Räma is also free."


The devotees of the Lord are also glorified in Bhagavad-gétä 11.55, 9.31, 7.17, and 4.36.

Text 254

çré-bhagavad-gétäsu

evaà satata-yuktä ye bhaktäs tväà paryupäsateye cäpy akñaram avyaktaà teñäà ke yoga-vittamäù

çré-bhagavad-gétäsu-in Çré Bhagavad-gétä; evam-thus; satata-yuktä-always engaged; ye-those who; bhaktäù-devotees; tväm-You; paryupäsate-properly worship; ye-those who; ca-also; api-again; akñaram-beyond the senses; avyaktam-the unmanifested; teñäm-of them; ke-who?; yoga-vittamäù-the most perfect in knowledge of yoga.

In Çré Bhagavad-gétä (12.1) Arjuna asked:

"Which are considered to be more perfect, those who are always properly engaged in Your devotional service, or those who worship the impersonal Brahman, the unmanifested?"*

Text 255

ity arjunena påñöaù çré-bhagavän uväca

mayy aveçya mano ye mäà nitya-yuktä upäsateçraddhayä parayopetäs te me yuktatamä matäù

iti-thus; arjunena-by Arjuna; påñöaù-asked; çré-bhagavän-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; uväca-said; mayi-upon Me; aveçya-fixing; manaù-the mind; ye-those who; mäm-me; nitya-always; yuktä-engaged; upäsate-worship; çraddhayä-with faith; parayä-transcendental; upetäù-endowed; te-they; me-by Me; yuktatamä-most perfect; matäù-are considered.

Asked in this way, the Supreme Personality of Godhead said (Bhagavad-gétä 12.2):

"Those who fix their minds on My personal form and are always engaged in worshiping Me with great and transcendental faith are considered by me to be most perfect."*

Text 256

caturtha-skandhe çré-påthüktau

yat-päda-seväbhirucis tapasvinäm açeña-janmopacitaà malaà dhiyaù

sadyaù kñinoty anv-aham edhaté saté yathä padäìguñöha-viniùsåtä sarit

caturtha-skandhe-in the Fourht Canto; çré-påthüktau-in the words of Çré Påthu; yat-päda-whose lotus feet; sevä-service; abhiruciù-inclination; tapasvinäm-persons undergoing severe penances; açeña-innumerable; janma-births; upacitam-acquire; malam-dirtiness; dhiyaù-mind; sadyaù-immediately; kñinoti-destroys; anv-aham-day after day; edhaté-increasing; saté-being; yathä-as; padäìguñöha-the toes of His lotus feet; viniùsåtä-emanating from; sarit-water.

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (4.21.31), King Påthu explains:

"By the inclination to serve the lotus feet of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, suffering humanity can immediately cleanse the dirt which has accumulated in their minds during innumerable births. Like the Ganges water, which emanates from the toes of the lotus feet of the Lord, such a process immediately cleanses the mind, and thus spiritual or Kåñëa consciousness gradually increases."*

Text 257

kià ca näradoktau

yathä taror müla-niñecanena tåpyanti tat-skandha-bhujopaçäkhäùpräëopahäräc ca yathendriyäëäà tathaiva sarvärhaëam acyutejyä

kià ca-furthermore; näradoktau-in the words of Närada Muni; yathä-as; taroù-of a tree; müla-the root; niñecanena-by watering; tåpyanti-are satisfied; tat-its; skandha-trunk; bhuja-branches; upaçäkhäù-and twigs; präëa-the life air; upahärät-by feeding; ca-and; yathä-as; indriyäëäm-of the senses; tathä eva-similarly; sarva-of all demigods; arhaëam-worship; acyuta-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; ijyä-worship.

Çréla Närada Muni explains (Çrémad-Bhägavatam 4.31.14):

"As pouring water on the root of a tree energizes the trunk, branches, twigs, and everything, and as supplying food to the stomach enlivens the senses and limbs of the body, simply worshiping the Supreme Personality of Godhead through devotional service automatically satisfies the demigods, who are parts of that Supreme Personality."*

Text 258

ekädaça-skandhe ca kavi-yogeçvarasya väkyaà

manye 'kutaçcid bhayam acyutasya padämbujopäsanam atra nityamudvigna-buddher asad-ätma-bhäväd viçvätmanä yatra nivartate bhéù

ekädaça-skandhe-in the Eleventh Canto; ca-and; kavi-yogeçvarasya-of the Yogic manster Kavi; väkyam-the statement; manye-I think; akutaçcit-not anywhere; bhayam-fear; acyutasya-of the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead; padämbujopäsanam-worship of the lotus feet; atra-here; nityam-alwasy; udvigna-agitated; buddheù-intelligence; asad-ätma-bhävät-my thinking that the self is temporary; viçvätmanä-thoroughly; yatra-where; nivartate-ceases; bhéù-fear.

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (11.2.3) Kavi Muni, a great master of yoga, explains:

"I think that service to the lotus feet of the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead is the creator of fearlessness. They whose minds are agitated because they identify with the temporary material world will find that engagement in the Lord's service makes their fears flee far away."

Text 259

çré-bhagavataç ca

evaà kriyä-yoga-pathaiù pumän vaidika-tantrikaiùarcann ubhayataù siddhià matto vindaty abhépsitam

çré-bhagavataù-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; ca-and; evam-thus; kriyä-yoga-pathaiù-by the opath of kriya-yioga; pumän-a person; vaidika-Vedic; tantrikaiù-an Tantric; arcann-worshiping; ubhayataù-both; siddhim-perfection; mattaù-from Me; vindati-finds; abhépsitam-desired.

The Supreme Personality of Godhead explained (Çrémad-Bhägavatam 11.27.49):

"By serving Me according to the rules of the Vedas and Tantras, a person will gain from Me his desired perfection in both this life and the next."

Text 260

kià ca

mäm eva nairapkñyeëa bhakti-yogena vindatibhakti-yogaà sa labhate evaà yaù püjayeta mäm

kià ca-furethermore; mäm-Me; eva-indeed; nairapkñyeëa-without material desire; bhakti-yogena-by devotional service; vindati-finds; bhakti-devotional service; yogam-yoga; sa-he; labhate-attains; evam-thus; yaù-who; püjayeta-worships; mäm-Me.

The Supreme Personality of Godhead further says (Çrémad-Bhägavatam 11.27.53):

"One who serves Me without material desire attains Me. One who worships Me attains pure devotional service unto Me."

Text 261

gautaméya-tantre çré-näradasya

tulasé-dala-mätreëa jalasya culukena cavikréëéte svam ätmänaà bhaktebhyo bhakta-vatsalaù

gautaméya-tantre-in the Gautamiya Tantra; çré-näradasya-of Çré narada; tulasé-dala-mätreëa-with simply a tulasé leaf; jalasya-of water; culukena-for a sip; ca-and; vikréëéte-sells; svam-His own; ätmänam-Self; bhaktebhyaù-to the devotees; bhakta-vatsalaù-He who loves His devotees.

In the Gautaméya Tantra, Närada Muni explains:

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead, who dearly loves His devotees, sells Himself to them for the price of a tulasé leaf and a sip of water."

Text 262

atha püjä-nityatä

mahäbhärate

mätåvat parirakñantaà såñöi-saàhära-kärakamyo närcayati deveçaà taà vidyäd brahma-ghätakam

atha-now; püjä-of worship; nityatä-the eternality; mahäbhärate-in the Mahäbhärata; mätåvat-like a mother; parirakñantam-protectingt; såñöi-creation; saàhära-destruction; kärakam-the cause; yaù-one who; na-not; arcayati-worships; deveçam-the master of the demigods; tam-Him; vidyät-should know; brahma-ghätakam-a killer of a brähmaëa.

The Supreme Personality of Godhead Should Always Be Worshiped


"Please know that a person who will not worship the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is the master of the demigods and the creator and destroyer of the worlds, and who protects everyone as of He were their mother, is sinful like a brähmaëa-killer."

Text 263

ata evoktaà brhan-näradéye padodaka-mähätmyäkhyänärambhe

hari-püjä-vidhänäà tu yasya veñmäni no dvijäùçmaçäna-sadåçaà vidyän na kadäpi viçec ca tat

ata eva-therefore; uktam-said; brhan-näradéye-in the Närada Puräëa; padodaka-mähätmyäkhyänärambhe-in the beginning of the Padoadaka-mahatmya; hari-püjä-vidhänam-the worship of Lord Viñëu; tu-indeed; yasya-of whom; veñmäni-in the home; naù-not; dvijaù-a brähmaëa; çmaçäna-a funeral ground; sadåçam-like; vidyän-should know; na-not; kadäpi-ever; viçet-should enter; ca-and; tat-that.

In the Närada Puräëa, at the beginning of the Pädodaka-mähätmya chapter, it is said:

"O brähmaëas, please know that the home of someone who does not worship Lord Viñëu is like a cremation ground. One should never enter such a home."

Text 264

ata evoktaà viñëu-dharmottare

puñpair vä yadi vä patraiù phalair vä yadi vämbubhiùyañöavyaù puëòarékäkñas tyaktvä kärya-çatäni ca

ata eva-thus; uktam-said; viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khanda; puñpaiù-with flowers; vä-or; yadi-if; vä-or; patraiù-with leaves; phalaiù-with fruits; vä-or; yadi-if; vä-or; ambubhiù-with water; yañöavyaù-should be worshiped; puëòarékäkñaù-the lotus-eyed Supreme Personality of Godhead; tyaktvä-abandoning kärya-çatäni-hundreds of ordinary duties; ca-and.


"Forget a hundred material duties and instead worship the lotus-eyed Supreme Personality of Godhead with flowers, or with leaves, or with fruit, or with water."

Text 265

kià ca näradéye

nimitteñu ca sarveñu tat-tat-käla-viçeñataùpüjayed deva-deveçaà dravyaà sampadya yatnataù

kià ca-furthermore; näradéye-in the Närada Puräëa; nimitteñu-in reasons; ca-and; sarveñu-all; tat-tat-käla-viçeñataù-according to various times; püjayet-should worship; deva-deveçam-the master of the demigods; dravyam-thing; sampadya-attaining; yatnataù-with care.

In the Närada Puräëa it is also said:

"On special holy days one should carefully collect many gifts and offer them in the worship of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of the demigods."

Text 266

ata evoktaà bhagavatä hayagréveëa hayaçérña-païcarätre

pratiñöitärcä na tyajyä yävaj jévaà samarcayetvaraà präëasya vä tyägaù çiraso väpi karttanam

ata eva-therefore; uktam-said; bhagavatä-by the Supreme Personality of Godhead; hayagréveëa-Lord hayagréva; hayaçérña-païcarätre-in the hayasirsa-pancaratra; pratiñöita-established; arcä-worship; na-not; tyajyä-be be abandoned; yävaj-as long as; jévam-life; samarcayet-should worship; varam-best; präëasya-of life; vä-or; tyägaù-abandonment; çirasaù-of the head; vä-or; api-even; karttanam-cutting.

In the Hayaçérña-païcarätra Lord Hayagréva explains:

"When the Deity of the Lord is installed the worship of the Deity should never be stopped. One should worship as long as he lives. Better than stopping the Lord's worship is to give up one's life or cut off one's head."

Text 267

püjäyä nityatälekhi prak ca naivedya-bhakñaëemähätmyaà ca paraà çäla- gräma-cakra-prasaìgataù

püjäyä-of worship; nityatä-eternality; alekhi-I wrote; prak-before; ca-and; naivedya-bhakñaëe-in eating food offered to the Lord; mähätmyam-the glory; ca-and; param-then; çälagräma-cakra-prasaìgataù-in connection with the Çälagräma and the cakra.

Previously, first in discussing the eating of food offered to the Lord, and then in discussing the Çälagräma and cakra stones, I also explained that one should always worship the Lord.

Text 268

püjäìgänäà ca mähätmyaà yad yad vilikhitaà purätat sarvam iha püjäyäà paryavasyati hi svataù

püjäìgänäm-of the different parts of worship; ca-and; mähätmyam-the glory; yad yat-whatever; vilikhitam-written; purä-before; tat-that; sarvam-all; iha-here; püjäyäm-in worship; paryavasyati-is completed; hi-here; svataù-of itself.

I have already written of the glories of the different aspects of Deity-worship. Thus the discussion of Deity-worship has come to a close.

Text 269

püjä-mahima-mattebhaù çästräraëya-vihäriëaùkéöena kati saìgrähyäù prabhävaà çré-harer vinä

püjä-mahima-mattebhaùintoxicated by the glories of the worship, of Lord Kåñëa; çästra-of the scriptures; äraëya-in the forest; vihäriëaù--enjoying pastimes; kéöena-by an insect; kati-how much?; saìgrähyäù-can be accumulated; prabhävam-the power; çré-hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; vinä-without.

Without the mercy of Lord Kåñëa, how much can this tiny insect, intoxicated by the nectar glories of the worship of Lord Kåñëa, collect as it flies here and there in the forest of the Vedic literatures?

Text 270

atha çré-bhagavan-näma sadä seveta sarvataùtan-mähätmyaà ca vikhyätaà saìkñepeëätra likhyate

atha-now; çré-bhagavat-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; näma-the holy name; sadä-always; seveta-should serve; sarvataù-in all respects; tan-mähätmyam-its glories; ca-and; vikhyätam-fame; saìkñepeëa-briefly; atra-here; likhyate-is written.

One should always and in every way serve the holy name of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Now in this book we will briefly write of the holy name's glories.

Text 271

atha çré-bhagavan-näma-mähätmyam

tatra çré-bhagavan-näma- viçeñasya ca sevanamåñibhiù kåpayädiñöaà tat-tat-käma-hatätmanäm

atha-now; çré-bhagavan-näma-mähätmyam-the glories of the holy name; tatra-there; çré-bhagavan-näma-of the Lord's holy name; viçeñasya-sepcifically; ca-and; sevanam-service; åñibhiù-bythe sages; kåpayä-by the mercy; ädiñöam-indicated; tat-tat-käma-various material desires; hata-killed; ätmanäm-of people.

The Glories of the Lord's Holy Name

Out of kindness to they who have been destroyed by a host of material desires, the great sages have taught about service to the Lord's holy name.

Text 272

atha käma-viçeñena çré-bhagavan-näma-viçeña-seva-mähätmyam

tatra papa-kñayärthaà

çré-kaurme

çré-çabda-pürvaà jaya-çabda-madhyaà jaya-dvayäd uttaratas tathä hitriù-sapta-kåtvo narasiàha-näma japtaà nihanyäd api vipra-hatyäm

atha-now; käma-viçeñena-with specific desire; çré-bhagavan-näma-viçeña-seva-mähätmyam-the glori of service to the Lord's Holy Name; tatra-there; papa-kñayärtham-the destruction of sin; çré-kaurme-in Çré Kürma Puräëa; çré-çabda-pürvam-preceded by the word Çré ; jaya-çabda-teh word jaya; madhyam-in the middle; jaya-dvayät-from two jayas; uttarataù-after; tathä-then; hi-indeed; triù-sapta-kåtvaù-21 times; narasiàha-näma-the name opf Lord Nåsiàha; japtam-cahnted; nihanyät-kills; api-also; vipra-hatyäm-the sin of killing a brähmaëa.

The Glories of Serving the Lord's Holy Name In Order to Attain Specific Goals

Chanting the Lord's Holy Name to Become Free of Sins


"Saying the word Çré first, with the word Jaya in the middle, and then the word Jaya twice, by chanting the holy mantra of Lord Nåsiàha twenty-one times, one becomes free of the sin of killing a brähmaëa."


The mantra chanted here is: Çré Nåsiàha, Jaya Nåsiàha, Jaya Jaya Nåsiàha.

Text 273

mahä-bhaya-niväraëärthaà

tatraiva

çré-pürvo narasiàho dvir jayäd uttaratas tu saùtriù-säpta-kåtvo japato mahä-bhaya-niväraëaù

mahä-bhaya-niväraëärtham-to become free from great fears; tatra-there; eva-indeed; çré-pürvaù-with Çré first; narasiàhaù-Nåsiàha; dviù-twice; jayät-from jaya; uttarataù-then; tu-indeed; saù-he; triù-säpta-kåtvaù-twenty-one times; japataù-chanting; mahä-bhaya-great fear; niväraëaù-stopping.

Chanting the Lord's Holy Name to Become Free of Great Fears

In the Kürma Puräëa it is also said:

es, one becomes free of great fears."


The mantra here is: Çré Nåsiàha Jaya Jaya Nåsiàha.

Text 274

käla-viçeñe tu maìgalärthaà

viñëu-dharmottare märkaëòeya-vajra-samväde

puruñaà väsudevaà ca tathä saìkarñaëaà vibhumpradyumnam aniruddhaà ca kramäd abdeñu kértayet

käla-viçeñe-at a specific time; tu-indeed; maìgalärtham-for auspiciousness; viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; märkaëòeya-of Markandeya; vajra-and Vajra; samväde-in the conversation; puruñam-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; väsudevam-Väsudeva; ca-and; tathä-so; saìkarñaëam-Saìkarñaëa; vibhum-all-powerful; pradyumnam-Pradyumna; aniruddham-Aniruddha; ca-and; kramät-in sequence; abdeñu-in the years; kértayet-should chant.

Chanting the Lord's Holy Name to Attain Auspiciousness at Certain Times In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, in a conversation of Märkaëòeya Muni and King Vajra it is said:

"At the times of the different years one should chant the names of the puruña-avatäras: Väsudeva, Saìkarñaëa, Pradyumna, and Aniruddha."


These names should be chanted for the first five years.

Texts 275 and 276

balabhadraà tathä kåñëaà kértayed anaya-dvayemädhavaà puëòarékäkñaà tathä vai bhoga-çäyinam

padmanäbhaà håñékeçaà tathä devaà trivikramamkrameëa räja-çärdüla vasantädiñu kértayet

balabhadram-Balabhadra; tathä-then; kåñëam-Kåñëa; kértayet-should chant; anaya-dvaye-at the time of daksinayana; mädhavam-Mädhava; puëòarékäkñam-Puëòarékäkña; tathä-so; vai-indeed; bhoga-çäyinam-Bhoga-çäyé; padmanäbham-Padmanäbha; håñékeçam-Håñékeça; tathä-so; devam-Deva; trivikramam-Trivikrama; krameëa-one after another; räja-çärdüla-O tiger of kings; vasantädiñu-in the seasons beginning with springtime; kértayet-one should chant.

"At the time of daksiëäyana one should chant the holy names of Balabhadra and Kåñëa. O tiger of kings, at the time of spring and the other seasons one should chant the holy names of Mädhava, Puëòarékäkña, Bhoga-çäyé, Padmanäbha, Håñékeça, Deva, and Trivikrama.

Texts 277-279

viñëuà ca madhu-häntaraà tathä devaà trivikramamvämanaà çrédharaà caiva håñékeçaà tathaiva ca

dämodaraà padmanäbhaà keçavaà ca yadüttamam

näräyaëaà mädhavaà ca govindaà ca tathä kramät

caiträdiñu ca mäseñu deva-devam anusmaretpradyumnam aniruddhaà ca pakñayoù kåñëa-çuklayoù

viñëum-Viñëu; ca-and; madhu-häntaram-Madhu-hantä; tathä-so; devam-Deva; trivikramam-Trivikrama; vämanam-Vämana; çrédharam-Çrédhara; ca-and; eva-indeed; håñékeçam-Håñékeça; tathä-so; eva-indeed; ca-and; dämodaram-Damodara; padmanäbham-Padmanabha; keçavam-Kesava; ca-and; yadüttamam-Yaduttama; näräyaëam-Narayana; mädhavam-Madhava; ca-and; govindam-Govinda; ca-and; tathä-so; kramät-one after another; caiträdiñu-in the months beginning with Caitra; ca-and; mäseñu-in the moths; deva-devam-the master of the demigods; anusmaret-one should remember; pradyumnam-Pradyumna; aniruddham-Aniruddha; ca-and; pakñayoù-in the two paksas; kåñëa-çuklayoù-Kåñëa and sukla.

"In the months beginning with Caitra one should remember the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of the demigods, by chanting the names Viñëu, Madhu-hantä, Deva, Trivikrama, Vämana, Çrédhara, Håñékeça, Dämodara, Padmanäbha, Keçava, Yadüttama, Näräyaëa, Mädhava, and Govinda. At the times of the kåñëa and çukla pakñas one should chant the names of Pradyumna and Aniruddha.

Text 280

sarvaù çarvaù çivaù sthänur bhütädir nidhir avyayaùädityädiñu vareñu kramäd evam anusmaret

sarvaù-Sarva; çarvaù-Sarva; çivaù-Siva; sthänuù-Sthanu; bhütädiù-Bhutadi; nidhiù-Nidhi; avyayaù-Avyaya; ädityädiñu-beginning with Sunday; vareñu-in the days; kramät-one after another; evam-thus; anusmaret-one should remember.

In the days beginning with Sunday one should remember the Supreme Personality of Godhead by chanting the names Sarva, Çarva, Çiva, Sthänu, Bhütädi, Nidhi, and Avyaya.

Texts 281-283

viçvaà viñëur vañaö-käro bhüta-bhavya-bhavat-prabhuùbhüta-bhåd bhüta-kåd bhävo bhütätmä bhüta-bhävanaù

avyaktaù puëòarékäkño viçvakarmä çuciçraväùsad-bhävo bhävano bhartä prabhavaù prabhur éçvaraù

aprameyo håñékeçaù padmanäbho 'mara-prabhuùagrähyaù çäçvato dhätä kåñëaç caitäny anusmaret deva-devasya nämäni kåttikädiñu yädava

viçvaà viñëur vañaö-käro bhüta-bhavya-bhavat-prabhuù bhüta-bhåd bhüta-kåd bhävo bhütätmä bhüta-bhävanaù avyaktaù puëòarékäkño viçvakarmä çuciçraväù sad-bhävo bhävano bhartä prabhavaù prabhur éçvaraù aprameyo håñékeçaù padmanäbho 'mara-prabhuù agrähyaù çäçvato dhätä kåñëaù-these names; ca-and; etäni-these; anusmaret-should remember; deva-devasya-of the Lord; nämäni-the names; kåttikädiñu-beginning with Krttika; yädava-O descendent of King Yadu.

"O descendent of King Yadu, at the time of the nakñatras, beginning with Kåttikä, one should remmber the Lord by chanting His names of Viçva, Viñëu, Vañaö-kära, Bhüta-bhavya-bhavat-prabhu, Bhüta-bhåt, Bhüta-kåt, Bhäva, Bhütätmä, Bhüta-bhävana, Avyakta, Puëòarékäkña, Viçvakarmä, Çuciçravä, Sad-bhäva, Bhävana, Bhartä, Prabhava, Prabhu, Içvara, Aprameya, Håñékeça, Padmanäbha, Amara-prabhu, Agrähya, Çäçvata, Dhätä, Kåñëa.

Texts 284 and 285

brahmäëaà çré-patià viñëuà kapilaà çrédharaà prabhumdämodaraà håñékeçaà govindaà madhusüdanam

bhüdharaà gadinaà devaà çaìkhinaà padminaà tathäcakriëaà ca mahä-räja prathamädiñu saàsmaret

brahmäëaà çré-patià viñëuà kapilaà çrédharaà prabhum dämodaraà håñékeçaà govindaà madhusüdanam bhüdharaà gadinaà devaà çaìkhinaà padminaà tathä cakriëam-these names; ca-and; mahä-räja-O great king; prathamädiñu-on the tithis beginning with pratipat; saàsmaret-should remember.

"O great king, at the time of Pratipat and the other tithis, one should remember the Lord by chanting His names of Brahmä, Çrépati, Viñëu, Kapila, Çrédhara, Prabhu, Dämodara, Håñékeça, Govinda, Madhusüdana, Bhüdhara, Gadé, Deva, Çaìkhé, Padmé, and Cakré.

Text 286

sarvaà vä sarvadä näma deva-devasya yädava

sarvam-all; vä-or; sarvadä-in all times; näma-names; deva-devasya-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; yädava-O descendent of King Yadu.

"O descendent of King Yadu, one may always chant all the names of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 287

nämäni sarväëi janärdanasya kälaç ca sarvaù puruña-pravéraùtasmät sadä sarva-gatasya näma grähyaà yatheñöaà varadasya räjan

nämäni-names; sarväëi-all; janärdanasya-of Lord Kåñëa; kälaù-time; ca-and; sarvaù-all; puruña-pravéraù-the most powerful person; tasmät-therefore; sadä-always; sarva-gatasya-everywhere; näma-name; grähyam-to be taken; yatheñöam-as desired; varadasya-of the giver of boons; räjan-O king.

"An intelligent person will always chant all the names of Lord Kåñëa. O king, please chant the names of the all-pervading Supreme Personality of Godhead whenever you wish."

Text 288

vividha-käma-siddhaye ca

pulastyoktau

kämaù käma-pradaù käntaù käma-pälas tathä hariùänando mädhavaç caiva käma-saàsiddhaye japet

vividha-käma-siddhaye-to attain various desires; ca-and; pulastyoktau-in the statement of Pulastya Muni; kämaù käma-pradaù käntaù käma-pälas tathä hariù änando mädhavaù-these names; ca-and; eva-indeed; käma-saàsiddhaye-to attain desires; japet-should chant.

Chanting the Lord's Holy Name to Attain the Fulfillment of Various Desires

Pulastya Muni explains:

"To attain one's desire one should chant the names of Käma, Käma-prada, Känta, Käma-päla, Hari, Ananda, and Mädhava.

Text 289

rämaù paraçurämaç ca nåsiàho viñëur eva cavikramaç caivam ädéni japyäny ari-jigéñubhiù

rämaù paraçurämaç ca nåsiàho viñëur eva ca vikramaù-these names; ca-and; evam-thus; ädéni-beginning; japyäni-should be chanted; ari-jigéñubhiù-by one who desires victory over his enemies.

"One who desires victory over his enemies should chant names like Räma, Paraçuräma, Nåsiàha, Viñëu, and Vikrama.

Text 290

vidyäm abhyastatä nityaà japtavyaù puruñottamaùdämodaraà bandha-gato nityam eva japen naraù

vidyäm abhyastatäby one who studies to attain knowledge; nityam-always; japtavyaù-should be chanted; puruñottamaù-Puruñottama; dämodaram-Dämodara; bandha-gataù-by one in bonds; nityam-always; eva-indeed; japen-should chant; naraù-a person.

"A student should always chant the name Puruñottama. A prisoner should always chant the name Dämodara.

Text 291

keçavaà puëòarékäkñaà aniçaà hi tathä japetnetra-bädhäsu sarväsu håñékeçaà bhayeñu ca

keçavam-Keçava; puëòarékäkñam-Puëòarékäkña; aniçam-day and night; hi-indeed; tathä-so; japet-should chant; netra-bädhäsu-in eye troubles; sarväsu-all; håñékeçam-Håñékeça; bhayeñu-in fears; ca-and.

"When there are eye troubles one should chant the names Keçava and Puëòarékäkña. When there are fears one should chant the name Håñékeça.

Text 292

acyutaà cämåtaà caiva japed auñadha-karmaëisaìgrämäbhimukho gacchan saàsmared aparäjitam

acyutam-Acyuta; ca-and; amåtam-Amåta; ca-and; eva-indeed; japet-should chant; auñadha-karmaëi-in the actyion of medicine; saìgräma-battle; abhimukhaù-facing; gacchan-going; saàsmaret-should remember; aparäjitam-Aparäjita.

"When taking medicine one should chant the names Acyuta and Amåta. When going into battle one should remember the Lord by chanting the name Aparäjita.

Text 293

cakriëaà gadinaà caiva çärìginaà khaòginaà tathäkñemärthé pravasan nityaà dikñu pracyädiñu smaret

cakriëam-Cakré; gadinam-Gadé; ca-and; eva-indeed; çärìginam-Çärìgé; khaòginam-Khaògé; tathä-so; kñema-auspiciousness; arthé-desiring; pravasan-going on a journey; nityam-always; dékñu-in trhe directions; pracyädiñu-beginning with the east; smaret-should remember.

"A person desiring auspiciousness as he goes on a journey to the east or to another direction should always remember the Lord by chanting the names Cakré, Gadé, Çärìgé, and Khaògé.

Text 294

ajitaà cädhipaà caiva sarvaà sarveçvaraà tathäsaàsmaret puruño bhaktyä vyavahäreñu sarvadä

ajitaà cädhipaà caiva sarvaà sarveçvaram-these names; tathä-so; saàsmaret-should remember; puruñaù-a person; bhaktyä-with devotion; vyavahäreñu-in ordinary activities; sarvadä-always.

"In his ordinary activities a person should always remember the Lord with devotion by chanting the names Ajita, Adhipa, Sarva, and Sarveçvara.

Text 295

näräyaëaà sarva-kälaà kñuta-praskhalanädiñugraha-nakñatra-péòañu deva-bädhäsu sarvataù

näräyaëam-Näräyaëa; sarva-kälam-Sarva-käla; kñuta-praskhalanädiñu-in coughs, sneezes, stumbling, and similar troubles; graha-nakñatra-of planets and stars; péòañu-in trouble; deva-bädhäsu-in trouble from the demigods; sarvataù-in all respects.

"When one sneezes, coughs, stumbles, is troubled in another way like that, or is troubled by the demigods or the stars and planets, one should always chant the name Näräyaëa.

Text 296

dasyu-vairi-nirodheñu vyäghra-siàhädi-saìkaöeandhakäre tamas-tévre narasiàham anusmaret

dasyu-theives; vairi-enemies; nirodheñu-in attacks; vyäghra-siàhädi-saìkaöe-in attacks by tigers, lions, or other ferocious beasts; andhakäre-in blinding darkness; tamas-tévre-in darkness; narasiàham-Narasiàha; anusmaret-should remember.

"When attacked by thieves, enemies, tigers, lions, or other ferocious assailants, or when trapped in blinding darkness, one should remember the Lord by chanting the name Narasiàha.

Text 297

agni-dähe samutpanne saàsarej jala-çäyinamgaruòadhvajänusmaraëäd viña-véryaà vyapohati

agni-dähe-fire; samutpanne-manifested; saàsmaret-one should remember; jala-çäyinam-Jalaçäyé; garuòadhvaja-Garuòadhvaja; anusmaraëädby remembering; viña-véryam-the power of poison; vyapohati-counteracts.

"When trapped in blazing fire one should remember the Lord by chanting the name Jalaçäyé. By chanting the name Garuòadhvaja one counteracts the power of poison.

Text 298

snäne devärcane home praëipäte pradakñiëekértayed bhagavan-näma väsudeveti tat-paraù

snäne-in bathing; devärcane-in worshiping the Lord; home-in a homa; praëipäte-in bowing down; pradakñiëe-in circumambulating; kértayet-should glorify; bhagavan-näma-the name of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; väsudeva-väsudeva; iti-thus; tat-paraù-devoted to the Lord.

"While bathing, worshiping the Lord, offering homa, bowing down, or circumambulating, a devotee should chant the name Väsudeva and other names of the Lord.

Text 299

sthäpane vitta-dhanyäder apadhyäne ca duñöajekurvéta tan-manä bhütvä anantäcyuta-kértanam

sthäpane-in establishment; vitta-of wealth; dhanya-and treasure; ädeù-beginning with; apadhyäne-in worry; ca-and; duñöaje-caused by the wicked; kurvéta-one should do; tan-manä-his mind; bhütvä-being; ananta-Ananta; acyuta-and Acyuta; kértanam-chanting.

"When storing money or other valuables, or when made to worry by wicked men, one should chant the names Ananta and Acyuta.

Text 300

näräyaëaà çärìga-dharaà çrédharaà puruñottamamvämanaà khaòginaà caiva duñöa-svapne sadä smaret

näräyaëaà çärìga-dharaà çrédharaà puruñottamam vämanaà khaòginam-these names; ca-and; eva-indeed; duñöa-svapne-in a nightmare; sadä-alwasy; smaret-should remember.

"When having a nightmare one should always remember the Lord by chanting the names Näräyaëa, Çärìga-dhara, Çrédhara, Puruñottama, Vämana, and Khaògé.

Text 301

mahärëavädau paryaìka- çäyinaà ca naraù smaretbalabhadraà samåddhy-arthaà sarva-karmaëi saàsmaret

mahärëavädau-in places beginning with the great ocean; paryaìka-on a bed; çäyinam-reclining; ca-and; naraù-a pewrson; smaret-should remember; balabhadram-Balabhadra. samåddhy-artham-to attain success; sarva-karmaëi-in all actions; saàsmaret-should remember.

"Whether in the midst of the great ocean, reclining on a couch, or in some other place, in order to succeed in all one's efforts, a person should remember the Lord by chanting the name Balabhadra.

Text 302

jagat-patim apatyärthaà stuvan bhaktyä na sédatiçrésaà sarväbhyudayike karmaëy äçu prakértyet

jagat-patim-jagat-pati; apatyärtham-for the sake of good children; stuvan-praying; bhaktyä-with devotion; not-and; sédati-perishes; çrésam-Çréça; sarväbhyudayike karmaëi-in all auspicious activities; äçu-at once; prakértyet-should chant.

"One who with devotion chants the name Jagat-pati and prays to beget good children will not disappointed. In all auspicious rituals and festivals one should chant the name Çréça.

Text 303

ariñöeñu hy açeñeñu viçokaà ca sadä japetmaru-prapätägni-jala- bandhanädiñu måtyuñu svatantra-paratantreñu väsudevaà japed budhaù

ariñöeñu-in calamities; hi-indeed; açeñeñu-all; viçokam-Viçoka; ca-and; sadä-always; japet-should chant; maru-in a desert; prapäta-in a attack; agni-in fire; jala-in water; bandhana-in bondage; ädiñu-beginning with; måtyuñu-in death; svatantra-independent; paratantreñu-dependent on others; väsudevam-Vasudeva; japet-should chant; budhaù-intelligent.

"In all calamities one should chant the name Viçoka. In a desert, attacked by others, in fire, in water, in bondage, on the verge of death, or in other troubles, whether free or in the grip of others, a wise person should chant the name Väsudeva.

Text 304

sarvärtha-çakti-yuktasya deva-devasya cakriëaùyathäbhirocate näma tat sarvärtheñu kértayet

sarvärtha-çakti-yuktasya-with the power to fulfill all eishes; deva-devasya-of the master of the demigods; cakriëaù-who holds the cakra; yathä-as; abhirocate-onme desires; näma-the name; tat-that; sarvärtheñu-for all desires; kértayet-should chant.

"To fulfill all desires, however one likes one should chant the names of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is the master of the demigods, who carries the Sudarçana-cakra, and who has the power to grant all requests.

Text 305

sarvärtha-siddhim äpnoti nämnäm ekärthatä yathäsarväëy etäni nämäni parasya brahmaëo hareù

sarvärtha-siddhim-the fulfillment of all desires; äpnoti-obtains; nämnäm-of the names; ekärthatä-one desire; yathä-as; sarväëi-all; etäni-them; nämäni-names; parasya-of the Supreme; brahmaëaù-Brahman; hareù-Lord Kåñëa.

"These are all names of Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. A person who understands this one truth about these names attains all his desires."

Text 306

evaà viñëu-dharmottare ca märkaëòeya-vajra-samväde kià ca

kürmaà varähaà matsyaà vä jala-prasthäraëe smaretbhräjiñëum agni-janane japen näma tv akhaëòitam

evam-thus; viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; ca-and; märkaëòeya-vajra-samväde-in a conversation of Märkaëòeya and Vajra; kià ca-furthermore; kürmam-Kürma; varäham-varäha; matsyam-Matsya; vä-or; jala-prasthäraëe-in water; smaret-one should remember; bhräjiñëum-burning; agni-janane-in fire; japen-should chant; näma-the name; tv-inded; akhaëòitam-without stopping.

In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, in a conversation of Märkaëòeya Muni and King Vajra, it is said:

"When crossing the waters one should remember the Lord by chanting the names of Kürma, Varäha, and Matysa. In the midst of a blazing fire one should chant these names without stop.

Text 307

garuòadhvajänusmaraëäd äpado mucyate naraùjvara-juñöa-çiro-roga- viña-véryaà ca çämyati

garuòadhvaja-of Garuòadhvaja; anusmaraëät-by remembering; äpadaù-from calamities; mucyate-is freed; naraù-a person; jvara-juñöa-fever; çiro-roga-headache; viña-véryam-poison; ca-and; çämyati-cures.

"By remembering the Lord by chanting the name Garuòadhvaja, one becomes free from calamities and cures fevers, headaches, and poisoning.

Text 308

balabhadraà tu yuddhärthé kåñyärambhe haläyudhamuttäraëaà vanijyärthé rämam abhyudaye nåpa

balabhadram-Balabhadra; tu-indeed; yuddhärthé-wishing to fight; kåñyärambhe-in the beginning of plowing; haläyudham-Haläyudha; uttäraëam-Uttäraëa; vanijyärthé-to sell goods; rämam-Räma; abhyudaye-in festivals; nåpa-O king.

"O king, a warrior eager to fight should chant the name Balabhadra. While plowing one should chant the name Haläyudha. A person eager to sell goods should chant the name Uttäraëa. In auspicious festivals one should chant the name Räma.

Text 309

maìgalyaà maìgalaà viñëuà maìgalyeñu ca kértayetuttiñöhan kértayed viñëuà prasvapan mädhavaà naraù bhojane caiva govindaà sarvatra madhusüdanam

maìgalyam-giving auspiciousness; maìgalam-auspicious; viñëum-Viñëu; maìgalyeñu-in asupcious ceremonies; ca-and; kértayet-should chant; uttiñöhan-rising; kértayet-should chant; viñëum-Viñëu; prasvapan-sleeping; mädhavam-mädhava; naraù-a person; bhojane-in eating; ca-and; eva-indeed; govindam-Govinda; sarvatra-everywhere; madhusüdanam-Madhusüdana.

"In auspicious ceremonies one should chant the auspicious name Viñëu. When rising one should chant the name Viñëu. While going to sleep one should chant the name Mädhava. While eating one should chant the name Govinda. In every situation one should chant the name Madhusüdana.

Text 310

tatraivänyatra

auçadhe cintayed viñëuà bhojane ca janärdanamçayane padmanäbhaà ca maithune ca prajäpatim

tatra-there; eva-indeed; anyatra-in another place; auçadhe-in medicine; cintayet-should meditate; viñëum-Viñëu; bhojane-in eating; ca-and; janärdanam-Janärdana; çayane-in sleeping; padmanäbham-Padmanäbha; ca-and; maithune-in sex; ca-and; prajäpatim-Prajäati.

In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa it is also said:

"When taking medicine one should remember the Lord by chanting the name Viñëu. When eating one should chant the name Janärdana. When going to sleep one should chant the name Padmanäbha. In the garbhädhäna-saàskära one should chant the name Prajäpati.

Text 311

saìgräme cakriëaà kruddhaà sthäna-bhraàçe trivikramamnäräyaëaà våñotsarge çrédharaà priya-saìgame jala-madhye ca värähaà pävake jalaçäyinam

saìgräme-in battle; cakriëam-Cakré; kruddham-angry; sthäna-bhraàçe-in falling from one's post; trivikramam-Trivikrama; näräyaëam-Näräyaëa; våñotsarge-in giving a bull; çrédharam-Çrédhara; priya-saìgame-in meeting the beloved; jala-madhye-in the water; ca-and; väräham-varäha; pävake-in fire; jalaçäyinam-Jalaçäyé.

"In battle one should chant the name Kruddha-cakré. When there is danger of losing one's post one should chant the name Trivikrama. In giving a bull in charity one should chant the name Näräyaëa. In meeting what is pleasing one should chant the name Çrédhara. In the midst of the waters one should chant the name Varäha. In the midst of fire one should chant the name Jalaçäyé.

Text 312

känane narasiàhaà ca parvate raghunandanamduùsvapne smara govindaà viçuddhau madhusüdanam mäyäsu vämanaà devaà sarva-käryeñu mädhavam

känane-in a forest; narasiàham-Narasiàha; ca-and; parvate-on a mountain; raghunandanam-Raghunandana; duùsvapne-in a nightmare; smara-remember; govindam-Govinda; viçuddhau-to becoem purified; madhusüdanam-Madhusdana; mäyäsu-in bewilderments; vämanam-Vämana; devam-Deva; sarva-käryeñu-in all activities; mädhavam-Mädhava.

"In a forest one should chant the name Narasiàha. On a mountain one should chant the name Raghunandana. In a nightmare one should chant the name Govinda. To become purified one should chant the name Madhusüdana. In a bewildering situation one should chant the name Vämanadeva. In all activities one should chant the name Mädhava."

Text 313

kià ca

kértayed väsudevaà ca anukteñv api yädavakäryärambhe tathä räjan yatheñöhaà näma kértayet

kià ca-furthermore; kértayet-one should chant; väsudevam-Väsudeva; ca-and; anukteñv-in not speaking; api-even; yädava-O descendent of King Yadu; käryärambhe-in activities; tathä-so; räjan-O king; yatheñöham-as desired; näma-the name; kértayet-should chant.

In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa it is also said:

"O descendent of King Yadu, even without actually pronouncing the syllables one should chant the name Väsudeva. O king, in all activities, whenever one wishes, one should chant the holy names of the Lord.

Text 314

sarväni nämäni hi tasya räjan sarvärtha-siddhayai tu bhavanti puàsaù

tasmäd yatheñöhaà khalu kåñëa-näma sarveñu käryeñu japeta bhaktyä

sarväni-all; nämäni-names; hi-indeed; tasya-of Him; räjan-O king; sarvärtha-siddhayai-to attain all desires; tu-indeed; bhavanti-are; puàsaù-of the people; tasmät-therfeore; yatheñöham-as desired; khalu-indeed; kåñëa-näma-the nameof Lord Kåñëa; sarveñu-in all; käryeñu-activities; japeta-should chant; bhaktyä-with devotion.

"O king, all the names of the Supreme Personality of Godhead fulfill all the desires of the living entities. Therefore, whenever one wishes, in every activity one should chant the holy name of Lord Kåñëa with devotion.

Text 315

taträkhila-päponmulanatvam

atha sämänyataù çré-bhagavan-näma-kértana-mahätmyaà

viñëu-dharme hari-bhakti-sudhodaye coktaà näradena

aho su-nirmalä yüyaà rägo hi hari-kértaneavidhüya tamaù kåtsnaà nåëäm udeti süryavat

tatra-there; akhila-päpa-all sins; unmulanatvam-uprooting; atha-then; sämänyataù-in a general way; çré-bhagavan-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; näma-fo the name; kértana-chanting; mähätmyam-the glory; viñëu-dharme-in thre Viñëu-dharma Puräëa; hari-bhakti-sudhodaye-in the hari-bhakti-sudhodaya; ca-and; uktam-said; näradena-by Närada Muni; ahaù-Oh!; su-nirmalä-very pure; yüyam-you; rägaù-love; hi-indeed; hari-kértane-for chanting the names of Lord Kåñëa; avidhüya-shaking off; tamaù-darkness; kåtsnam-all; nåëäm-of men; udeti-rises; süryavat-like the sun.

First, The Holy Name of the Lord Uproots All Sins, and Then a General Description of the Glories of Chanting the Holy Name

In both the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa and the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya, Närada Muni explains:

"Because you are attracted to the Lord's holy name, you are all very pure in heart. When the holy name rises in one's heart it shines like the sun and shakes away all darkness."

Text 316

gäruòe

päpänalasya déptasya mä kurvantu bhayaà naraùgovinda-näma-meghaughair naçyate néra-bindubhiù

gäruòe-in the Garuòa Puräëa; päpa-of sin; analasya-of the fire; déptasya-blazing; mä-don't; kurvantu-do; bhayam-fear; naraù-people; govinda-näma-of the name of Govinda; megha-of clouds; aughaiù-with the floods; naçyate-destroyed; néra-bindubhiù-with drops of water.


"O people, please do not fear this blazing fire of sin. The monsoon clouds of Lord Govinda's holy name will extinguish it with a flood of rain.

Text 317

avaçenäpi yan-nämni

kértane sarva-pätakaiùpumän vimucyate sadyaù siàha-trastair mågair iva

avaçena-spontaneously; api-even; yan-nämni-in whose name; kértane-in the chanting; sarva-pätakaiù-by all sins; pumän-a person; vimucyate-is freed; sadyaù-at once; siàha-trastaiù-frightened by a lion; mågaiù-by deer; iva-like.

"When one chants the holy name of Lord Govinda, all his sins flee far away, like deer frightened by a lion.

Text 318

yan-näma-kértanaà bhaktyä viläpanam anuttamammaitreyäçeña-päpänäà dhätünäm iva pävakaù

yan-näma-kértanam-chanting whose name; bhaktyä-with dewvotion; viläpanam-saying; anuttamam-unequalled; maitreya-O Maitreya; açeña-päpänäm-of all sins; dhätünäm-of metals; iva-like; pävakaù-fire.

"O Maitreya, as fire purifies metal cast into it, so chanting the holy name of Lord Govinda with devotion purifies the heart of all sins.

Text 319

yasmin nyasta-matir na yäti narakaà svargo 'pi yac-cintane vighno yatra niveñitätma-manaso brähmo 'pi loko 'lpakaùmuktià cetasi yaù sthito 'mala-dhiyaà puàsäà dadäty avyayaù kià citraà yad-aghaà prayäti vilayaà taträcyute kértite

yasmin-in which; nyasta-placed; matiù-thought; na-not; yäti-goes; narakam-to hell; svargaù-Svargaloka; api-also; yac-cintane-in the thought of whom; vighnaù-obstacle; yatra-where; niveñita-entered; ätma-manasaù-the heart; brähmaù-Brahma; api-even; lokaù-planet; alpakaù-slight; muktim-liberation; cetasi-in the heart; yaù-who; sthitaù-situated; amala-dhiyam-pure heart; puàsäm-of the people; dadati-burns; avyayaù-enetrnal; kim-what?; citram-wonder; yad-agham-to sin; prayäti-goes; vilayam-destruction; tatra-there; acyute-when the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead; kértite-is glorified.

"One whose thoughts are placed in the holy name of Lord Govinda does not go to hell. He thinks Svargaloka is an obstacle and Brahmaloka is not important. Eternal Lord Kåñëa stays in his pure heart and offers him liberation. How can it be surprising, then, that all sins perish when the holy name of the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead is chanted?"

Text 320

viñëu-dharmottare

säyaà prätas tathä kåtvä deva-devasya kértanamsarva-päpa-vinirmuktaù svarga-loke mahéyate

viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; sayam-in the evening; prätaù-in the morning; tathä-so; kåtvä-doing; deva-devasya-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; kértanam-glory; sarva-päpa-vinirmuktaù-free from all sin; svarga-loke-in Svargaloka; mahéyate-is glorified.


"A person who in the morning and evening chants the holy names of the Supreme Personality of Godhead becomes

free of all sins. He is glorified in Svargaloka.

Text 321

vämane

näräyaëo näma naro naräëäà prasiddha-cauraù kathitaù påthivyämaneka-janmarjita-päpa-saïcayaà haraty açeñaà çrutam atra eva hi

vämane-in the vämana Puräëa; näräyaëaù-näräyaëa; näma-name; naraù-a person; naräëäm-of persons; prasiddha-cauraù-famous as a thief; kathitaù-said; påthivyäm-on the earth; aneka-janmarjita-päpa-saïcayam-sins gathered in many births; harati-removes; açeñam-all; çrutam-heard; atra-here; eva-indeed; hi-certainly.


"The holy name of Lord Näräayaëa is famous as the greatest thief on the earth. When it is heard, that name robs one of the sinful reactions accumulated in many, many births."

Text 322

skände

govindeti tathä proktaà bhaktyä vä bhakti-varjitaiùdahate sarva-päpäni yugäntägnir ivotthitaù

skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; govinda-Govinda; iti-thus; tathä-so; proktam-spoken; bhaktyä-with devotion; vä-or; bhakti-varjitaiù-without devotion; dahate-burns; sarva-päpäni-all sins; yugäntägniù-the fires at the end of the yuga; iva-like; utthitaù-risen.


"Spoken with or without devotion, the holy name of Lords Govinda rises like the fire at the yuga's end, and burns away all sins.

Text 323

govinda-nämnä yaù kaçcin naro bhavati bhü-talekértanäd eva tasyäpi päpaà yäti sahasradhä

govinda-nämnä-with the name of Lord Govinda; yaù-one who; kaçcin-someone; naraù-a person; bhavati-is; bhü-tale-onm the earth; kértanät-by chanting; eva-indeed; tasya-of him; api-also; päpam-sin; yäti-goes; sahasradhä-a thousand times.

"Thousands of sins flee from anyone who chants the holy name of Lord Govinda in this world."

Text 324

käçé-khaëòe

pramädäd api saàspåñöo

yathänala-kaëo dahettathauñöha-püta-saàspåñöaà hari-näma dahed agham

käçé-khaëòe-in the Käçé-khaëòa; pramädät-foolishly; api-even; saàspåñöaù-touched; yathä-as; anala-kaëaù-a spark; dahet-burns; tathä-so; auñöha-püta-the lips; saàspåñöam-touching; hari-näma-the name of Lord Kåñëa; dahet-burns; agham-sin.

In the Käçé-khaëòa it is said:

"Even if touched only by mistake, a spark still burns. In the same way, when it touches the lips the holy name of Lord Kåñëa burns all sins."

Text 325

båhan-näradéye lubdhakopakhyänänte

naräëäà viñayändhänäà mamatäkula-cetäsämekam eva harer näma sarva-päpa-vinäçnam

båhan-näradéye-in the Närada Puräëa; lubdhakopakhyänänte-at the end of the story of the hunter; naräëäm-of the people; viñayändhänäm-blinded with material desires; mamatäkula-cetäsäm-their hearts filled with possessiveness; ekam-one; eva-indeed; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; näma-the name; sarva-päpa-vinäçnam-destroying all sins.

In the Närada Puräëa, at the end of the story of the hunter, it is said:

"One utterance of the holy name of Lord Kåñëa destroys all the sins of the people of this world, people blinded by material desires, people whose hearts are filled with the desire to claim the various things of this world."

Text 326

ata eva tatraiva yamenoktaà

hari hari sakåd uccaritaà dasyu-cchalena yair manuñyaiùjanané-jaöhara-märga-luptä na mama paöa-lipià viçanti märtyäù

ata eva-therefore; tatra-there; eva-indeed; yamena-by yama; uktam-spoken; hari-Hari; hari-Hari; sakåt-once; uccaritam-spoken; dasyu-cchalena-disguised as theives; yaiù-by whom; manuñyaiù-people; janané-jaöhara-märga-luptä-stopped from the path to a mother's womb; na-not; mama-of me; pata-lipim-writing; viçanti-enter; märtyäù-human beings.

In the Närada Puräëa, Yamaräja says:

"A thief who once proclaims: Hari! Hari! (I am thief! A thief!) is stopped from traveling on the path to another mother's womb. His name is not entered in my book."

Text 327

pädme vaiçäkha-mahätmye devaçarmopakhyänänte çré-näradoktau

hatyäyutaà päna-sahasram ugraà gurv-aìganä-koöi-niñevaëaà casteyäny anekäni hari-priyeëa govinda-nämnä nihatäni sadyaù

pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; vaiçäkha-mahätmye-Vaiçäkha-mähätmya; devaçarmopakhyänänte-at bthe end of the story of Devaçarma; çré-näradoktau-in thew words of Närada Muni; hatyä-of murders; ayutam-tne thousand times; päna-sahasram-a thousand times drinking liquor; ugram-terrible; guru-of the spiritual master; aìganä-the wife; koöi-ten million times; niñevaëam-service; ca-and; steyäni-thefts; anekäni-very many; hari-priyeëa-dear to Lord Kåñëa; govinda-nämnä-by the name of Lord Govinda; nihatäni-killed; sadyaù-at once.

In the Padma Puräëa, Vaiçäkha-mähätmya, at the end of the story of Devaçarmä, Närada Muni explains:

"The dear holy name of Lord Govinda at once destroys the sinful reactions of ten thousand murders, a thousand drunken binges, ten million adulteries with the spiritual master's wife, and very many thefts.

Text 328

anicchayäpi dahati spåñöo huta-vaho yathätathä dahati govinda- näma vyäjäd apéritam

anicchayä-without desiring; api-even; dahati-burns; spåñöaù-touched; huta-vahaù-fire; yathä-as; tathä-so; dahati-burns; govinda-näma-the name of Lord Govinda; vyäjät-as a pretense; api-even; éritam-spoken.

"Even though one does not wish it to burn, fire burns whenever it is touched. In the same way the holy name of Lord Govinda burns away all sins, even though one chanted it only as a joke."

Text 329

tatraiva çré-yama-brähmaëa-samväde

kértanäd eva kåñëasya viñëor amita-tejasaùduritäni viléyante tamäàséva dinodaye

tatra-there; eva-indeed; çré-yama-brähmaëa-samväde-in a conversation of Yamaräja and a brähmaëa; kértanät-by chanting; eva-indeed; kåñëasya-of Lord Kåñëa; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; amita-tejasaù-unlimitedly powerful; duritäni-sins; viléyante-persish; tamäàsi-darkness; iva-like; dinodaye-at sunrise.

In the Padma Puräëa, in a conversation of Yamaräja and a brähmaëa, it is said:

"By chanting the holy name of unlimitedly powerful Lord Kåñëa, all sins perish, as darkness perishes at sunrise."

Text 330

nänyat paçyämi jantünäà vihäya kari-kértanamsarva-päpa-praçamanaà präyaçcittaà dvijottama

na-not; anyat-another; paçyämi-I see; jantünäm-of the living entities; vihäya-abandoning; kari-kértanam-teh glorification of Lord Kåñëa; sarva-all; päpa-sins; praçamanam-quelling; präyaçcittam-atonement; dvijottama-O best of brähmaëas.

"O best of brähmaëas, I do not any way for the living entities to atone for all their sins, any way other than chanting the holy names of Lord Kåñëa."

Text 331

ñañöha-skandhe ajämilopakhyäne

ayaà hi kåta-nirveço janma-koöy-aàhsäm apiyad vyajahära vivaço näma svasty-ayanaà hareù

ñañöha-skandhe-in the Sixth Canto; ajämilopakhyäne-in the story of Ajämila; ayam-this person (Ajämila); hi-indeed; kåta-nirveçaù-has undergone all kinds of atonement; janma-of births; koöi-of millions; aàhasäm-for the sinful activities; api-even; yat-because; vyajahära-he has chanted; vivaçaù-in ahelpless condition; näma-the holy name; svasty-ayanam-the means of liberation; hareù-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (6.2.7, 6.2.9-11, 6.2.14-15, and 6.2.18), in the story of Ajämila, it is said:

"Ajämila has already atoned for all his sinful actions. Indeed, he has atoned not only for the sins performed in one life but for those performed in millions of lives, for in a helpless condition he chanted the holy name of Näräyaëa. Even though he did not chant purely, he chanted without offense, and therefore he is now pure and eligible for liberation."*

Texts 332 and 333

stenaù suräpo mitra-dhrug brahma-hä guru-talpa-gaùstré-räja-pitå-go-hantä ye ca pätakino 'pare

sarveñäm apy aghavataà idam eva su-niskåtamnäma-vyäharaëaà viñëor yatas tad-viñayä matiù

stenaù-one who steals; suräpaù-a drunkard; mitra-dhrug-one who turns against a friend or relative; brahma-hä-one who kills a brähmaëa; guru-talpa-gaù-one who indulges in sex with the wife of his teacher or guru; stré-women; räja-king; pitå-father; gaù-cows; hantä-the killer; ye-those who; ca-also; pätakinaù-committed sinful actiivities; apare-many others; sarveñäm-of all of them; api-although; aghavatam-persons who have committed many sins; idam-this; eva-certainly; su-niskåtam-perfect atonement; näma-vyäharaëam-chanting of the holy name; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; yataù-because of which; tad-viñayä-on the person who chants the holy name; matiù-His attention.

"The chanting of the holy name of Lord Viñëu is the best process of atonement for a thief of gold or other valuables, for a drunkard, for one who betrays a friend or relative, or for one who indulges in sex with the wife of his guru or other superior. It is also the best method of atonement for one who murders women, the king, or his father, for one who slaughters cows, and for all other sinful men. Simply by chanting the holy name of Lord Viñëu, such sinful persons may attract the attention of the Supreme Lord, who therefore considers, `Because this man has chanted My holy name, My duty is to give him protection.'*

Text 334

na niñkåtair uditair brahma-vädibhis tathä viçuddhaty aghavän vratädibhiùyathä harer näma-padair udähåtais tad-uttamaçloka-guëopalambhakam

na-not; niñkåtaiù-by the process of atonement; uditaiù-prescribed; brahma-vädibhiù-by learned scholars such as Manu; tathä-to that extent; viçuddhati-becomes purified; aghavän-a sinful man; vratädibhiù-by observing vows and regulative principles; yathä-as; hareù-of Lord hari; näma-padaiù-by the syllables of ther holy name; udähåtaiù-chanted; tat-that;uttamaçloka-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; guëa-of the transcendental qualities; upalambhakam-reminding

one.

"By following the Vedic ritualistic ceremonies or undergoing atonement, sinful men do not become as purified as by chanting once the holy name of Lord Hari. Although ritualistic atonement may free one from sinful reactions, it does not awaken devotional service, unlike the chanting of the Lord's names, which reminds one of the Lord's fame, qualities, attributes, pastimes, and paraphernalia."*

Text 335

saìkeöyaà parihäsyaà vä stobhaà helanam eva vävaikuëöha-näma-grahaëaà açeñägha-haraà viduù

saìkeöyam-as an assignation; parihäsyam-jokingly; vä-or; stobham-as musical entertainment; helanam-neglectfully; eva-certainly; vä-or; vaikuëöha-of the Lord; näma-grahaëam-chanting the holy name; açeña-unlimited; agha-haram-neutralizing the effect of sinful life; viduù-advanced transcendentalists know.

"One who chants the holy name of the Lord is immediately freed form the reactions of unlimited sins, even if he chants indirectly (to indicate something else), jokingly, for musical entertainment, or even neglectfully. This is accepted by all the learned scholars of the scriptures.*

Text 336

patitaù skhalito bhagnaù sandañöas tapta ähataùharir ity avaçenäha pumän närhati yätanaù

patitaù-fallen down; skhalitaù-slipped; bhagnaù-having broken his bones; sandañöaù-bitten; tapta-severely attacked by fever or similar painful conditions; ähataù-injured; hariù-Lord Kåñëa; iti-thus; avaçena-accidentally; äha-chants; pumän-a person; na-not; arhati-deserves; yätanaù-hellish conditions.

"If one chants the holy name of Lord Hari and then dies because of an accidental misfortune, such as falling from the top of a house, slipping and suffering broken bones while traveling on the road, being bitten by a serpent, being afflicted with pain and high fever, or being injured by a weapon, one is immediately absolved from having to enter hellish life, even though he is sinful."*

Text 337

ajïänäd athavä jïanäd uttamaù-sloka-näma yatsaìkértitam aghaà puàso dahed edho yathänalaù

ajïänät-out of ignorance; athavä-or; jïanät-with knowledge; uttamaçloka-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; näma-the name; yat-that which; saìkértitam-chanted; agham-sin; puàsaù-of a person; dahet-burns to ashes; edhaù-grass; yathä-just as; analaù-fire.

"As a fire burns dry grass to ashes, so the holy name of the Lord, whether chanted knowingly or unknowingly, burns to ashes, without fail, all the reactions of one's sinful activities."*

Text 338

tatraiva åñéëäm uktau

brahmä-ha pitå-hä go-ghno mätå-häcärya-häghavänçvädaù pukkaçako väpi çudhyeran yasya kértanät

tatra-there; eva-indeed; åñéëäm-of the sages; uktau-in the words; brahmä-ha-a person who has killed a brähmaëa; pitå-hä-a person who has killed his father; go-ghnaù-a person who has killed a cow; mätå-hä-a person who has killed his mother; äcärya-hä-a person who has killed his spiritual master; aghavän-such a sinful person; çvädaù-a dog-eater; pukkaçakaù-a candala, one who is less than a sudra; vä-or; api-even; çudhyeran-may be purified; yasya-of whom (Lord Näräyaëa); kértanät-from chanting the holy name.

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (6.13.8) the sages explain:

"One who has killed a brähmaëa, one who has killed a cow, or one who has killed his father, mother, or spiritual master can be immediately freed from all sinful reactions simply by chanting the holy name of Lord Näräyaëa."*

Text 39

laghu-bhägavate

vartamänaà tu yat päpaà yad bhütaà yad bhaviñyatitat sarvaà nirdahaty äçu govinda-näma-kértanät

laghu-bhägavate-in the Laghu-bhägavat; vartamänam-present; tu-indeed; yat-what; päpam-sin; yat-what; bhütam-was; yat-what; bhaviñyati-will be; tat-that; sarvam-all; nirdahati-burns; äçu-at once; govinda-näma-kértanät-by chanting the holy name of Lord Govinda.

In the Laghu-Bhägavata it is said:

"Chanting the holy name of Lord Govinda at once burns to ashes all sins in the past, present, and future.

Text 340

sadä droha-paro yas tu saj-janänäà mahé-talejäyate pävano dhanyo harer nämänukértanät

sadä-always; droha-paraù-eager to do harm; yaù-who; tu-indeed; saj-janänäm-of the saintly devotees; mahé-tale-on the earth; jäyate-is born; pävanaù-purifying; dhanyaù-fortunate; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; näma-the name; anukértanät-by chanting.

"Even a person who attacks the saintly devotees in this world becomes purified by chanting the holy name of Lord Govinda."

Text 341

kaurme

vasanti yäni koöis tu pävanäni mahé-talena täni tat tuläà yänti kåñëa-nämänukértane

kaurme-in the Kürma Puräëa; vasanti-reside; yäni-which; koöiù-ten million; tu-indeed; pävanäni-purifying; mahé-tale-

on the earth; na-not; täni-them; tat-that; tuläm-equal; yänti-are; kåñëa-nämänukértane-in chanting the name of Lord Kåñëa.


"Many millions of other methods of purification in this world are not equal to the chanting of Lord Govinda's holy name."

Text 342

båhad-viñëu-puräëe

nämno 'sya yävaté çaktiù päpa-nirharaëe hareùtävat kartuà na çaknoti pätakaà pätaké janaù

båhad-viñëu-puräëe-in the Viñëu Puräëa; nämnaù-of the name; asya-of Him; yävaté-as much as; çaktiù-power; päpa-of sins; nirharaëe-in removing; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; tävat-to that extent; kartum-to do; na-not; çaknoti-is able; pätakam-sin; pätaké-a sinner; janaù-person.


"Simply by chanting the holy name of Hari, a sinful man can counteract the reactions of more sins than he is able to commit."*

Text 343

itihäsottame

çvädo 'pi na hi çaknoti kartuà päpäni yatnataùtävanti yävaté çaktir viñëor nämno 'çubha-kñaye

itihäsottame-in the Itihäsottama; çvädaù-a dogeater; api-even; na-not; hi-indeed; çaknoti-is able; kartum-to commit; päpäni-sins; yatnataù-with effort; tävanti-as many; yävaté-as many; çaktiù-power; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; nämnaù-of the name; açubha-of inauspiciousness; kñaye-in destruction.

In the Itihäsottama it is said:

"Even a dogeater who struggles to do it cannot commit so many sins that they cannot be purified by the holy name of Lord Viñëu."

Text 344

viçeñataù kalau skände

tan nästi karmajaà loke vägjaà mänasam eva vayan na kñapayate päpaà kalau govinda-kértanam

viçeñataù-specifically; kalau-in the Kali-yuga; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; tan-that; na-not; asti-is; karmajam-born from work; loke-in this world; väg-from words; jam-born; mänasam-the mind; eva-indeed; va-or; yan-what; na-not; kñapayate-destroys; päpam-sin; kalau-in Kali-yuga; govinda-kértanam-the chanting of Lord Govinda's holy name.

In the Skanda Puräëa the result of chanting the holy name in the Kali-yuga is described in these words:

"In the Kali-yuga there is no sin, either of action, words, or mind, that cannot be destroyed by chanting the holy name of Lord Govinda."

Text 345

viñëu-dharmottare

çamäyälaà jalaà vahnes tamaso bhäskarodayaùçäntyai kaler aghaughasya näma-saìkértanaà hareù

viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; çamäya-for extinguishing; alam-able; jalam-water; vahneù-of fire; tamasaù-of darkness; bhäskara-of the sun; udayaù-the rising; çäntyai-for quelling; kaleù-of Kali-yuga; agha-of sins; aughasya-of a flood; näma-saìkértanam-the chanting of the holy name; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa.

In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa , it is said:

"As water has the power to stop fire, and as the sunrise has the power to stop darkness, so the chanting of Lord Kåñëa's holy name has the power to stop a flood of sins.

Text 346

nämnäà hareù kértanataù prayäti saàsära-päraà duritaugha-muktaùnaraù sa satyaà kali-doña-janma päpaà nihäty äçu kim atra citram

nämnäm-of the names; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; kértanataù-from the chanting; prayäti-goes; saàsära-of birth and death; päram-to the farther shore; durita-of sins; augha-a flood; muktaù-liberated; naraù-a person; sa-he; satyam-in truth; kali-doña-janma-born from the faults of Kali-yuga; päpam-sin; nihäti-kills; äçu-at once; kim-what?; atra-here; citram-surprise.

"By chanting the holy name of Lord Kåñëa a person escapes a flood of sins and crosses the ocean of birth and death. Why should it surprise anyone that the holy name quickly destroys all the sins of the Kali-yuga?"

Text 347

brahmäëòa-puräëe

varäka-candräyana-tapta-kåcchrair na dehi-çuddhir bhavatéha tädåkkalau sakån mädhava-kértanena govinda-nämnä bhavatéha yädåk

brahmäëòa-puräëe-in the Brahmäëòa Puräëa; varäka-candräyana-tapta-kåcchraiù-by the difficult austerities of the unimportant candrayana vow; na-not; dehi-çuddhiù-purification of the soul; bhavati-is; iha-here; tädåk-like that; kalau-in Kali-yuga; sakån-once; mädhava-kértanena-by chanting Lord Kåñëa's holy name; govinda-nämnä-by the name of Lord Kåñëa; bhavati-is; iha-here; yädåk-as.

In the Brahmäëòa Puräëa it is said:

"In Kali-yuga, by chanting the names of Lord Kåñëa one is at once purified. One does not become so purified by following the painful austerities of the unimportant candräyana vow."

Text 348

kértana-kartå-kula-saìgy-ädi-pävanatvaà

tatraiva

mahä-pätaka-yukto 'pi kértayenn aniçaà harimçuddhäntaùkaraëo bhütvä jäyate paìkti-pävanaù

kértana-chanting; kartå-performers; kula-multitude; saìgi-associating; ädi-beginning with; pävanatvam-purification; tatra-there; eva-indeed; mahä-pätaka-yuktaù-a great sinner; api-even; kértayenn-glorifying; aniçam-day and night; harim-Lord Kåñëa; çuddhäntaùkaraëaù-pure at heart; bhütvä-becoming; jäyate-is born; paìkti-pävanaù-purifying a host sins.

Becoming Purified by Associating With They Who Chant the Lord's Holy Name


"By chanting Lord Kåñëa's holy name day and night, even a great sinner becomes pure at heart. He purifies everyone he meets."

Text 349

laghu-bhägavate

govindeti muòa yuktaù kértayed yas tv ananya-dhéùpävanena ca dhanyena teneyaà påthivé dhåtä

laghu-bhägavate-in the Laghu-Bhägavata; govinda-O Govinda; iti-thus; muòa-happily; yuktaù-engaged; kértayet-may chant; yaù-one who; tv-indeed; ananya-dhéù-thinking of nothing else; pävanena-with purity; ca-and; dhanyena-with good fortune; tena-by him; iyam-this; påthivé-earth; dhåtä-is maintained.


"A person who places his thoughts on Lord Govinda alone and happily chants, `O Govinda!' protects the earth with his purity and his good fortune."

Text 350


na caivam ekaà vaktäraà jihvä rakñati vaiñëavéäçrävya bhagavat-khyätià jagat kåtsnaà punäti hi

hari-bhakti-sudhodaye-in the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya; na-not; ca-and; evam-thus; ekam-one; vaktäram-speaker; jihvä-the tongue; rakñati-protects ; vaiñëavé-of a devotee of Lord Viñëu; äçrävya-hearing; bhagavat-khyätim-the glories of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; jagat-the universe; kåtsnam-entire; punäti-purifies; hi-indeed.


"A tongue busy in chanting the holy names of Lord Viñëu does not purify only the speaker. It purifies everyone who hears it."

Text 351

daçama-skandhe

yan-näma gåhëann akhilän çrotåëätmänam eva casadyaù punäti kià bhüyas tasya spåñöaù padä hi te

daçama-skandhe-in the Tenth Canto; yan-näma-whose name; gåhëann-chanting; akhilän-all; çrotåëätmänam-hearers; eva-indeed; ca-and; sadyaù-at once; punäti-purifies; kim-what?; bhüyaù-more; tasya-of that; spåñöaù-touched; padä-by the foor; hi-inded; te-of You.


"O Lord, a person who chants Your holy name purifies both himself and all who hear him. How much more purified, then, is a person touched by Your foot?"

Text 352

ata evoktaà prahlädena narasiàhe

te santaù sarva-bhütänäà nirupädhika-bändhavaùye nåsiàha bhavan-näma gäyanty uccair mudänvitäù

ata eva-therefore; uktam-said; prahlädena-by Prahläda; narasiàhe-in the Nåsiàha Puräëa; te-they; santaù-siants; sarva-bhütänäm-of all living entities; nirupädhika-bändhavaù-the unconditional freinds; ye-who; nåsiàha-O Lord Nåsiàha; bhavan-näma-Your holy name; gäyanti-chant; uccaiù-loudly; mudänvitäù-happy.

In the Nåsiàha Puräëa, Prahläda Mahäräja says:

"O Lord Nåsiàha, Your devotees are the unconditional friends of all living entities. That is why they happily and loudly chant Your holy names."

Text 353

sarva-vyädhi-näçitvaà

båhan-näradéye bhagavat-toña-prasaìge

acytutänanda-govinda- nämoccäraëa-bhéñitaùnaçyanti sakalä rogäù satyaà satyaà vadämy aham

sarva-vyädhi-näçitvam-destroying all diseases; båhan-näradéye-in the Närada Puräëa; bhagavat-toña-prasaìge-in the matter of pleasing the Supreme Personality of Godhead; acytuta-Acyuta; änanda-Ananda; govinda-Govinda; näma-names; uccäraëa-the loud chanting; bhéñitaù-afraid; naçyanti-perish; sakalä-all; rogäù-diseases; satyam-in truth; satyam-in truth; vadämi-speak; aham-I.

Chanting the Holy Name Cures All Diseases

In the Närada Puräëa, in the description of pleasing the Lord, it is said:

"When they hear the loud chanting of the holy names Acyuta, Ananada, and Govinda, all diseases at once die of fright. I speak to you the truth. It is true."

Text 354

paräçara-saàhitäyäà sämbaà prati vyäsoktau

na sämba vyädhijaà duùkhaà heyaà nänyauñadhair apihari-nämauñadhaà pétvä vyädhis tyäjyo na saàsayaù

paräçara-saàhitäyäm-In the Paräçara-saàhitä; sämbam-Samba; prati-to; vyäsoktau-in the words of Çré Vyäsa; na-not; sämba-O Sämba; vyädhijam-born of disease; duùkham-suffering; heyam-to be cast away; na-not; anya-by any other; auñadhaiù-medicines; api-even; hari-nämauñadham-the medicine of Lord Kåñëa's holy name; pétvä-drinking; vyädhiù-disease; tyäjyaù-to be abandoned; na-no; saàsayaù-doubt.

In the Paräçara-saàhitä, Vyäsa tells Sämba:

"By drinking the medicine of the holy name of Lord Kåñëa, one is cured of all disease. Of this there is no doubt. O Sämba, no other medicine is needed."

Text 355

skände

ädhayo vyädhayo yasya smaraëän näma-kértanättadaiva vilayaà yänti tam anantaà nämamy aham

skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; ädhayaù-anguishes; vyädhayaù-diseases; yasya-of whom; smaraëän-by remembering; näma-kértanät-by chanting the holy name; tadä-then; eva-indeed; vilayam-to destruction; yänti-go; tam-to Him; anantam-limitless; nämami-bow down; aham-I.


"A person who chants and remembers Lord Kåñëa's holy names becomes cured of all anxieties and all diseases. That is why I bow down before Lord Kåñëa, the limitless Supreme Personality of Godhead."

Text 356

vahni-puräëe

mahä-vyädhi-samäcchanno räja-vadhopäpéòitaùnäräyaëeti saìkértyä nirätaìko bhaven naraù

vahni-puräëe-in the Vahni Puräëa; mahä-vyädhi-samäcchannaù-aflicted with a terrible disease; räja-of a king; bädha-obstructions; upäpéòitaù-torubled; näräyaëa-Näräyaëa; iti-thus; saìkértyä-chanting; nirätaìkaù-free of trouble; bhaven-becomes; naraù-a person.


"A person afflicted with a terrible disease or harassed by a king becomes free of his troubles when he chants the holy name of Lord Näräyaëa."

Text 357

sarva-duùkhopaçamanatvaà

båhad-viñëu-puräëe

sarva-rogopaçamanaà sarvopadrava-näçanamçäntidaà sarväriñöänäà harer nämänukértanam

sarva-duùkhopaçamanatvam-the end of all sufferings; båhad-viñëu-puräëe-in the Viñëu Puräëa; sarva-all; roga-diseases; upaçamanam-curing; sarva-all; upadrava-harm; näçanam-destruction; çäntidam-bringing peace; sarväriñöänäm-of all calamities; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; nämänukértanam-chanting of the holy name.

Chanting the Holy Name Ends All Sufferings


"the chanting of Lord Kåñëa's holy name cures all diseases, ends all dangers, and stops all calamities."

Text 358

brahma-vaivarte

sarva-päpa-praçamanaà sarvopadrava-näçnamsarva-duùkha-kñaya-karaà hari-nämänukértanam

brahma-vaivarte-in the Brahma-vaivarta Puräëa; sarva-päpa-praçamanam-destroying all sins; sarvopadrava-näçnam-destroying all dangers; sarva-duùkha-kñaya-karam-destroying all sufferings; hari-nämänukértanam-the chanting of Lord Kåñëa's holy name.


"The chanting of Lord Kåñëa's holy name destroys all sins, ends all dangers, and removes all sufferings."

Text 359

dvädaça-skandhe

saìkértyamäno bhagavän anantaù çrutänubhävo vyasanaà hi puàsämpraviçya cittaà vidhunoty açeñaà yathä tamo 'rko 'bhram iväti-vätaù

dvädaça-skandhe-in the Twelfth Canto; saìkértyamänaù-being glorified; bhagavän-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; anantaù-limitless; çrutänubhävaù-hearing; vyasanam-troubles; hi-indeed; puàsäm-of the people; pravisya-enbtering; cittam-the heart; vidhunoti-shakes away; açeñam-all; yathä-as; tamaù-darkness; arkaù-the sun; abhram-a cloud; iva-like; ati-a great; vätaù-wind.

In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam (12.12.48) it is said:

"When the people chant and hear His glories, the limitless Supreme Personality of Godhead enters their hearts. As a rising sun chases away the darkness or a great wind chases away a host of clouds, He chases away all the people's sufferings."

Text 360

viñëu-dharmottare

artä viñaëëäù çithilaç ca bhétä ghoreñu ca vyädhiñu vartamänäùsaìkértya näräyaëa-çabdam ekaà vimukta-duùkhäù sukhino bhavanti

viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; artä-distressed; viñaëëäù-dejected; çithiläù-stunned; ca-and; bhétä-afraid; ghoreñu-in terruible; ca-AND; vyädhiñu-diseases; vartamänäù-being; saìkértya-chanting; näräyaëa-çabdam-the name Näräyaëa; ekam-one; vimukta-duùkhäù-free of sufferings; sukhinaù-happy; bhavanti-become.


"A person suffering great pain, dejected, stunned, afraid, or tormented by terrible diseases, who once says the name Näräyaëa loses his sufferings and becomes happy."

Texts 361 and 362

kértanäd deva-devasya viñëor amita-tejasaùyakña-räkñasa-vetäla- bhüta-pretä-vinäyakäù

òäkinyo vidravanti sma ye tathänye ca siàhakäùsarvänartha-haraà tasya näma-saìkértanaà småtam

kértanät-by chanting the glories; deva-devasya-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; viñëoù-Lord Viñëu; amita-tejasaù-whose power has no limit; yakña-räkñasa-vetäla-bhüta-pretä-vinäyakäù-the yakñas, räkñasas, vetälas, bhütas, pretäs, and vinäyakas; òäkinyaù-dakinis; vidravanti-fled; sma-indeed; ye-who; tathä-so; anye-others; ca-and; siàhakäù-lions; sarvänartha-haram-removing all that is not good; tasya-of him; näma-saìkértanam-chanting the holy name; småtam-remembered.

"When a person chants the holy names of Lord Viñëu, the all-powerful Supreme Personality of Godhead, he finds that the demon yakñas, räkñasas, vetälas, bhütas, pretäs, vinäyakas, and òäkinés, as well as the lions and other ferocious beasts, all flee from him. Chanting and remembering Lord Kåñëa's holy name drives away all that is not good."

Text 363

kià ca

näma-saìkértanaà kåtvä kñut-tåt-praskhalitädiñuviyogaà çéghram äpnoti sarvänarthair na saàsayaù

kià ca-furthermore; näma-saìkértanam-chanting the holy name; kåtvä-doing; kñut-tåt-praskhalitädiñu-beginning with hunger, thirst, and stumbling; viyogam-separation; çéghram-long; äpnoti-attains; sarvänarthaiù-with all that is not good; na-no; saàsayaù-doubt.

It is further said:

"A person who chants the holy names of the Lord is protected from hunger, thirst, stumbling, and all other troubles."

Text 364

pädme devahüti-stutau

mohänalollasaj-jväla- jvälal-lokeñu sarvadäyan-nämämbhodhara-cchäyäà praviñöo naiva dahyate

pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; devahüti-stutau-in the prayers of Devahüti; moha-of illusions; anala-by the flames; ullasat-rising; jväla-flames; jvälal-burning; lokeñu-in the worlds; sarvadä-always; yan-näma-of whose holy name; ambhodhara-of the cloud; cchäyäm-the shade; praviñöaù-entered; na-not; eva-indeed; dahyate-is burned.

In the Padma Puräëa, Devahüti prays:

"In this world always ablaze with flames of illusion, a person who stays under the cloud of the Supreme Lord's holy names is never burned."

Text 365

kali-bädhäpahäritvaà

skände

kali-käla-ku-sarpasya tékñna-daàstrasya mä bhayamgovinda-näma-dävena dagdho yäsyati bhasmatäm

kali-of kali-yuga; bädha-the obtsacles; apahäritvam-removing; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; kali-käla-ku-sarpasya-of the black poison snake of Kali-yuga; tékñna-daàstrasya-with sharp fangs; mä-don't; bhayam-fear; govinda-näma-dävena-with the forest fire of Lord Govinda's holy names; dagdhaù-burned; yäsyati-will go; bhasmatäm-to ashes.

Chanting the Holy Name Removes All the Obstacles Presented By the Kali-yuga


"Don't be afraid of the sharp-fanged, poisonous, black snake of Kali-yuga. The forest-fire of Lord Govinda's holy name will burn it to ashes."

Text 366

båhan-näradéye kali-dharma-prasaìge

hari-näma-parä ye ca ghore kali-yuge naräùta eva kåta-kåtyäç ca na kalir bädhate hi tän

båhan-näradéye-in the Narada Puräëa; kali-dharma-prasaìge-in the discussion of religion in the age of Kali; hari-näma-parä-devoted to the holy name of Lord Kåñëa; ye-who; ca-and; ghore-horrible; kali-yuge-in Kali-yuga; naräù-people; ta-they; eva-indeed; kåta-kåtyäù-successful; ca-and; na-not; kaliù-Kali; bädhate-stops; hi-indeed; tän-them.

In the Närada Puräëa, in the discussion of religion in the age of Kali, it is said:

"In the horrible Kali-yuga they who devotedly chant the Lord's holy names are all-successful and all-perfect. Kali

cannot thwart them.

Text 367

hare keçava govinda väsudeva jaganmayaitérayanti te nityaà na hi tän bädhate kaliù

hare-O Hari; keçava-O Keçava; govinda-O Govinda; väsudeva-O Väsudeva; jaganmaya-O Jaganmaya; iti-thus; érayanti-chant; te-they; nityam-always; na-not; hi-indeed; tän-them; bädhate-thwarts; kaliù-Kali.

"Kali cannot thwart they who always chant: O Hari! O Keçava! O Govinda! O Väsudeva! O Jaganmaya!"

Text 368

viñëu-dharmottare

ye 'har-niçaà jagad-dhätur väsudevasya kértanamkurvanti tän nara-vyäghra na kalir bädhate narän

viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; ye-who; ahar-niçam-day and night; jagad-dhätuù-of the creator of the univerases; väsudevasya-of Lord Väsudeva; kértanam-flories; kurvanti-do; tän-them; nara-vyäghra-O tiger of men; na-not; kaliù-Kali; bädhate-thwarts; narän-people.


"O tiger of men, Kali cannot thwart they who day and night chant the glories of Lord Väsudeva, the creator of the worlds."

Text 369

näraky-uddhärakatvaà

närasiàhe

yathä yathä harer näma kértayanti sma närakäùtathä tathä harau bhaktià udvahanto divaà yayuù

näraki-the residents of hell; uddhärakatvam-delivering; närasiàhe-in trhe Nåsiàha Puräëa; yathä yathä-as; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; näma-the name; kértayanti-chanted; sma-indeed; närakäù-the residnets of hell; tathä tathä-so; harau-for Lord Kåñëa; bhaktim-devotion; udvahantaù-bearing; divam-to heaven; yayuù-went.

Chanting the Holy Name Delivers the Residents of Hell


"When the residents of hell chanted the holy name of Lord Kåñëa, they attained love for Him. At once they left hell and went to the planets of the demigods."

Text 370

itihäsottame

narake pacyamänänäà naräëäà päpa-karmaëämmuktiù saïjäyate tasmän näma-saìkértanäd dhareù

itihäsottame-in the Itihäsottama; narake-in hell; pacyamänänäm-being cooked; naräëäm-of people; päpa-sinful; karmaëäm-of deeds; muktiù-liberation; saïjäyate-is born; tasmän-of that; näma-saìkértanät-by chanting the holy names; dhareù-of Lord Kåñëa.


"By chanting the holy names of Lord Kåñëa, the sinners suffering in hell became liberated."

Text 371

prärabdha-vinäçitvaà

ñañöha-skandhe nätaù paraà karma-nibandha-kåntanaà mumukñatäà tértha-padänukértanätna yat punaù karmasu sajjate mano rajas-tamobhyäà kalilaà tato 'nyathä

prärabdha-sins already performed; vinäçitvam-destroying; ñañöha-skandhe-in the Sixth Canto; na-not; ataù-therefore; param-better means; karma-nibandha-the obligation to suffer or undergo tribulations as a result of fruitive acrivites; kåntanam-that which can completely cut off; mumukñatäm-of persons desiring to get out of th clu5tches of material bondage; tértha-pada-about the Supreme Personality of Godhead, at whose feet all the holy places stand; anukértanät-than constantly chanting under the direction of the bona-fide spiritual master; na-not; yat-because; punaù-again; karmasu-in fruitive activities; sajjate-becomes attached; manaù-the mind; rajas-tamobhyäm-by the modes of passion and ignorance; kalilam-contaminated; tataù-thereafter; anyathä-by any other means.

Chanting the Holy Names Destroys the Results of Past Sins


"Therefore one who desires freedom from material bondage should adopt the process of chanting and glorifying the name, fame, form, and pastimes of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, at whose feet all the holy places stand. One cannot derive the proper benefit from other methods, such as pious atonement, speculative knowledge, and meditation in mystic yoga, because even after following such methods one takes to fruitive activities again, unable to control his mind, which is contaminated by the base qualities of nature, namely passion and ignorance."*

Text 372

dvädaçe ca

yan-nämadheyaà mriyamäna äturaù patan skhalan vä vivaço gåëan pumänvimukta-karmärgala uttamäà gatià präpnoti yakñyanti na taà kalau janäù

dvädaçe-in the Twelfth Canto; ca-and; yan-nämadheyam-whose holy name; mriyamäna-dying; äturaù-distressed; patan-falling; skhalan-stumbling; vä-or; vivaçaù-agitated; gåëan-chanting; pumän-a pwerson; vimukta-karmärgala-free from the chains of karma; uttamäm-supreme; gatim-destination; präpnoti-attains; yakñyanti-will worship; na-not; tam-Him; kalau-in Kali-yuga; janäù-the people.


"Terrified, about to die, a man collapses on his bed. Although his voice is faltering and he is hardly conscious of what

he is saying, if he utters the holy name of the Supreme Lord he can be freed from the reaction of his fruitive work and achieve the supreme destination. But still people in the age of Kali will not worship the Supreme Lord."***

Text 373

uktyä karma-nibandheti tathä karmärgaleti caavaçya-bhogyatäpatteù prärabdhe paryavasyati

uktyä-by the statement; karma-nibandha-karma-nibandha; iti-thus; tathä-so; karmärgala iti-karmärgala; ca-and; avaçya-bhogyatäpatteù-of the neccessity of experiencing past karma; prärabdhe-in what was performed; paryavasyati-is concluded.

The words "karma-nibandha" and "karmärgala" in these verses refer to the karmic reactions of past deeds.

Text 374

ata eva båhan-näradéye

govindeti japan jäntuù praty-ahaà niyatendriyaùsarva-päpa-vinirmuktaù suravad bhäsate naraù

ata eva-therefore; båhan-näradéye-in the Narada Puräëa; govinda-Govinda; iti-thus; japan-chanting; jäntuù-a person; praty-aham-every day; niyatendriyaù-controlling his senses; sarva-päpa-vinirmuktaù-free of all sins; suravat-like a sun; bhäsate-shines; naraù-a person.


"A person who controls his senses, stays free of sin, and every day chants `O Govinda!', shines like the sun."

Text 375

sarväparädha-bhaïjanatvaà

viñëu-yamale çré-bhagavad-uktau

mama nämäni loke 'smin çraddhayä yas tu kértayettasyäparädha-koöis tu kñamämy eva na saàsayaù

sarväparädha-bhaïjanatvam-breaking all offenses; viñëu-yamale-in the Viñëu-yamala; çré-bhagavad-uktau-in the statement of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; mama-of Me; nämäni-the names; loke-world; asmin-in this; çraddhayä-with faith; yaù-one who; tu-indeed; kértayet-chants; tasya-of him; aparädha-koöiù-ten million offenses; tu-indeed; kñamämi-I forgive; eva-indeed; na-no; saàsayaù-doubt.

Chanting the Holy Name Frees One of All Offenses

In the Viñëu-yamala, the Supreme Personality of Godhead declares:

"I forgive ten million offenses committed by one who with faith chants My holy names in this world."

Text 376

sarva-sampürti-käritvam

añöama-skandhe çré-bhagavantaà prati çré-çukroktau

mantratas tantrataç chidraà deça-kälärha-vastutaùsarvaà karoti niçchidraà anusaìkértanaà tava

sarva-sampürti-käritvam-making everythign perfect; añöama-skandhe-in the Eighth Canto; çré-bhagavantam-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; prati-to; çré-çukroktau-in the words of Çré Çukra; mantrataù-in pronouncing the Vedic mantras improperly; tantrataù-in insufficient knowledge for following regulative principles; chidram-discrepancy; deça-in the matter ofn country; käla-and time; arha-and recipient; vastutaù-and paraphernalia; sarvam-all these; karoti-makes; niçchidram-without discrepancy; anusaìkértanam-constanbtly chanting the holy name; tava-of Your Lordship.

Chanting the Holy Name Makes Everything Perfect

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (8.23.16) Çré Çukräcärya tells the Supreme Personality of Godhead:

"There may be discrepancies in pronouncing the mantras and observing the regulative principles, and, moreover, there may be discrepancies in regard to time, place, person, and paraphernalia. But when Your Lordship's holy name is chanted, everything becomes faultless."*

Text 377

skände ca

yasya småtyä ca nämoktyä tapo-yajïa-kriyädiñunyünaà sampürëatäm eti sadyo vande tam acyutam

skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; ca-and; yasya-of whom; småtyä-by rememberingf; ca-and; nämoktyä-by chanting the name; tapo-yajïa-kriyädiñu-in austerities, yajnas, pious deeds, and toher actions; nyünam-smallness; sampürëatäm-perfection; eti-attains; sadyaù-at once; vande-I bow; tam-to Him; acyutam-the infallible Lord.


"I bow down before the infallible Supreme Lord. By remembering Him and chanting His holy name even a slight endeavor in austerity, yajïa, and pious deeds, brings all perfection."

Text 378

sarva-vedädhikatvaà

viñëu-dharmottare çré-prahlädoktau

åg-vedo hi yajur-vedaù säma-vedo 'py atharvaëaùadhétas tena yenoktaà harir ity akñara-dvayam

sarva-vedädhikatvam-better than all the Vedas; viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; çré-prahlädoktau-in the words of Prahläda Mahäräja; åg-vedaù-the Åg Veda; hi-indeed; yajur-vedaù-the Yajur Veda; säma-vedaù-the Säma Veda; api-also; atharvaëaù-the Atharva Veda; adhétaù-studied; tena-by him; yena-by whom; uktam-spoken; hariù-Hari; iti-thus; akñara-dvayam-the two syllables.

Chanting the Holy Name Is More Important Than Studying All the Vedas

In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khëòa, Prahläda Mahäräja explains:

"A person who chants the two syllables Ha-ri has already studied the four Vedas: Säma, Åg, Yajur, and Atharva."*

Text 379

skände çré-pärvaty-uktau

mä åco mä yajus täta mä säma paöha kiïcanagovindeti harer näma geyaà gäyasva nityaçaù

skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; çré-pärvaty-uktau-in the statement of Goddess pärvaté; mä-dont; åcaù-the Åg Veda; mä-don't; yajuù-the Yajur Veda; täta-O father; mä-don't; säma-the Säma Veda; paöha-recite; kiïcana-something; govinda-Govinda; iti-thus; hareù-of Lord Hari; näma-the name; geyam-to be sung; gäyasva-sing; nityaçaù-always.

In the Skanda Puräëa, Goddess Pärvaté says:

"Don't sing the Åg Veda! O child, don't sing the Yajur Veda! Don't sing the Säma Veda! Sing Lord Hari's name Govinda again and again!"

Text 380

pädme ca çré-rämäñtottara-çata-näma-stotre

viñëor ekaika-nämäpi sarva-vedädhikaà matamtädåì-näma-sahasreëa räma-näma samaà småtam

pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; ca- çré-rämäñtottara-çata-näma-stotre-in the 108 names of Lord Räma; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; eka-one; eka-one; näma-name; api-even; sarva-vedädhikam-better than all the Vedas; matam-considered; tädåì-näma-sahasreëa-with a thousand names; räma-näma-the holy name of Lord Räma; samam-equal; småtam-considered.

In the Padma Puräëa, in the 108 names of Lord Räma, it is said:

"One name of Lord Viñëu is better than all the Vedas. One name of Lord Räma is equal to a thousand repetitions of the name Viñëu."

Text 381

sarva-térthädhikatvaà

skände

kurukñetreëa kià tasya kià kasya puñkareëa väjihvägre vasate yasya harir ity akñara-dvayam

sarva-térthädhikatvam-more than all holy places; skände-in thre Skanda Puräëa; kurukñetreëa-of Kurukñetra; kim-what is the need?; tasya-of that; kim-what is the need?; käçyä-of Varanasi; puñkareëa-of Puñkara; vä-or; jihvä-of the tongue; agre-on the tip; vasate-stays; yasya-of whom; hariù-Hari; iti-thus; akñara-dvayam-two syllables.

Chanting the Holy Name is More Important Than Visiting Holy Places


"Of what value is Kurukñetra? Of what value is Puñkara? Of what value is Väräëasé? What is their value when the syllables Hari reside on one's tongue?"

Text 382

vämane

tértha-koöi-sahasräëi tértha-koöi-çatäni catäni sarväëy aväpnoti viñëor nämänukértanät

vämane-in the Vämana Puräëa; tértha-koöi-sahasräëi-thousands of millions of holy places; tértha-koöi-çatäni-hundreds of millions of holy places; ca-and; täni-they; sarväëi-all; aväpnoti-attain; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; nämänukértanät-by chanting the holy names.


"Hundreds of thousands of millions of billions of holy places are visited when one chants the holy names of Lord Viñëu."

Text 383

viçvämitra-saàhitäyäà

viçrutäni bahüny eva térthäni bahudhäni cakoöy-aàsenäpi tulyäni näma-kértanato hareù

viçvämitra-saàhitäyäm-in the Viçvämitra-saàhitä; viçrutäni-famous; bahüni-many; eva-indeed; térthäni-holy places; bahudhäni-many; ca-and; koöi-a ten-millionth; aàsena-with a part; api-even; tulyäni-equal; näma-kértanataù-to chanting the holy names; hareù-of Lord Hari.

In the Viçvämitra-saàhitä it is said:

"Visiting many famous holy places is not equal to a ten-millionth part of chanting Lord Hari's holy name."

Text 384

laghu-bhägavate

kià täta vedägama-çästra-vistarais térthair anekair api kià prayojanamyady ätmano väïchasi mukti-käraëaà govinda govinda iti sphuöaà raöa

laghu-bhägavate-in the Laghu-Bhägavata; kim-what is the use?; täta-O dear one; vedägama-çästra-vistaraiù-of elaborately studying the Vedas, Agamas, and other scriptures; térthaiù-of pilgrimages; anekaiù-many; api-even; kim-what is the use?; prayojanam-the need; yadi-if; ätmanaù-of the self; väïchasi-you desire; mukti-käraëam-the cause of liberastion; govinda-Govinda; govinda-Govinda; iti-thus; sphuöam-manifested; raöa-chant.


"Child, why diligently study the Vedas, Agamas, and other scriptures? Why visit many holy places? If you desire liberation, you need only chant: Govinda! Govinda!"

Text 385

sarva-sat-karmädhikatvaà

go-koöi-dänaà grahaëe khagasya prayäga-gaìgodaka-kalpa-väsaùyajïäyutaà meru-suvarëa-dänaà govinda-kérter na samaà çatäàçaiù

sarva-sat-karmädhikatvam-better than all pious deeds; go-koöi-dänam-giving ten million cows; grahaëe-in acceptance; khagasyn thousand; meru-suvarëa-a heap of gold like Mount Meru; dänam-gift; govinda-kérteù-of the glories of Lord Govinda; na-not; samam-equal; çatäàçaiù-with a hundred part.

Chanting the Holy Name Is More Important Than Performing Pious Deeds

Giving ten-million cows in charity during a solar eclipse, staying for a kalpa in the Gaìgä's waters at Prayäga, performing ten-thousand yajïas, and giving in charity a Mount Meru of gold are not equal to a hundredth part of chanting Lord Govinda's holy names.

Text 386

baudhäyana-saàhitäyäm

iñöäpürtäni karmäëi su-bahüni kåtäny apibhava-hetüni täny eva harer näma tu muktidam

baudhayana-saàhitäyäm-in the Baudhäyana-saàhitä; iñöäpürtäni-iñöäpürta; karmäëi-deeds; su-bahüni-many; kåtäni-done; api-even; bhava-hetüni-the causes of repeated birth; täni-they; eva-indeed; hareù-of Lord Hari; näma-the name; tu-indeed; muktidam-the giver of liberation.

In the Baudhäyana-saàhitä it is said:

"Many pious deeds bring only repeated birth. Lord Hari's holy name brings liberation."

Text 387

gäruòe çré-çaunakämbaréña-samväde

väjapeya-sahasräëäà nityaà phalam abhépsasiprätar utthäya bhupäla kuru govinda-kértanam

gäruòe-in the Garuòa Puräëa; çré-çaunakämbaréña-samväde-in a conversation of Çré Çaunaka Muni and King Ambaréña; väjapeya-sahasräëäm-of a thousand vajapeya-yajnas; nityam-always; phalam-result; abhépsasi-you desire; prätaù-in the moring; utthäya-rising; bhupäla-O king; kuru-do; govinda-kértanam-the chanting of Lord Govinda's holy names.

In the Garuòa Puräëa, Çré Çaunaka Muni tells King Ambaréña:

"O king, if you wish to attain the benefit of performing a thousand väjapeya-yajïas, then rise early in the morning and chant Lord Govinda's holy names.

Text 388

kià kariñyati saìkhyena

kià yogair nara-näyakamuktim icchasi räjendra kuru govinda-kértanam

kim-what is the need?; kariñyati-will so; saìkhyena-of sankhya philosophy; kim-what is the need?; yogaiù-of yoga; nara-näyaka-O king; muktim-liberation; icchasi-you desire; räjendra-O great king; kuru-do; govinda-kértanam-the chanting of Lord Govinda's holy names.

"What is the use of studying the saìkhya philosophy? What is the use of practicing yoga? O king, if you desire liberation, please chant Lord Govinda's holy names."

Text 389

tåtéya-skandhe çré-kapiladevaà prati devahüty-uktau

aho bata çvapaco 'to garéyän yaj-jihvägre vartate näma tubhyamtepus tapas te juhuvur sasnur äryä brahmänücur näma gåhnanti ye te

tåtéya-skandhe-in the Third Canto; çré-kapiladevaà prati-to Lord kapiladeva; devahüty-uktau-in the words of Devahüti; aho bata-Oh, how glorious; çvapacaù-a dogeater; ataù-hence; garéyän-worshipable; yat-of whom; jihvägre-on the tip of the tongue; vartate-is; näma-the holy name; tubhyam-unto you; tepus tapaù-practiced austerities; te-they; juhuvuù-executed fire-sacrifices; sasnuù-took bath in the sacred rivers; aryä-Aryans; brahmänücuù-studied the Vedas; näma-the holy name; gåhnanti-accept; ye-they who; te-Your.

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (3.33.7), Devahüti tells Lord Kapiladeva:

"Oh, how glorious are they whose tongues are chanting Your holy name! Even if born in the families of dogeaters, such persons are worshipable. Persons who chant the holy name of Your Lordship must have executed all kinds of austerities and fire-sacrifices and achieved all the good manners of the Aryans. To be chanting the holy name of Your Lordship, they must have bathed at holy places of pilgrimage, studied the Vedas and fulfilled everything required."*

Text 390

sarva-tértha-pradatvaà

skände brahma-närada-samväde cäturmasya-mähätmye

etat ñaò-varga-haraëaà ripu-nigrahaëaà paramadhyätma-mülam etad dhi viñëor nämänukértanam

sarva-tértha-pradatvam-giving the result of all pilgrimages; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; brahma-närada-samväde-in a conversation of Narada and Brahma; cäturmasya-mähätmye-in the glories of Caturmasya; etat-this; ñaò-varga-haraëam-removing the six distresses; ripu-nigrahaëam-destriying enemies; param-supreme; adhyätma-mülam-the root of spiritual knowledge; etat-this; dhi-indeed; viñëoù-of Lord v; nämänukértanam-the chanting of the holy names.

Chanting the Holy Name Gives the Benefit of All Pilgrimages

In the Skanda Puräëa, Cäturmäsya-mähätmya, in a conversation of Brahmä and Närada, it is said:

"Chanting the holy names of Lord Viñëu removes the six distresses, thwarts enemies, and sows the seed of transcendental knowledge."

Text 391

viñëu-dharmottare

hådi kåtvä tathä kämaà abhiñöaà dvija-puìgaväùekaà näma japed yas tu çataà kämän aväpnuyät

viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; hådi-in the heart; kåtvä-doing; tathä-so; kämam-desire; abhiñöam-desired; dvija-puìgaväù-O best of brähmaëas; ekam-one; näma-name; japet-may chant; yaù-who; tu-indeed; çatam-a hundred; kämän-desires; aväpnuyät-attains.


"O best of brähmaëas, a person who once chants the Lord's holy name attains a hundred of the desires in his heart."

Text 392

tatraiva çré-kåñëämåta-stotre

sarva-maìgala-maìgalyam äyuñyaà vyädhi-näçanambhukti-mukti-pradaà divyaà väsudevasya kértanam

tatra-there; eva-indeed; çré-kåñëämåta-stotre-in the Çré Kåñëämåta-stotra; sarva-maìgala-maìgalya-the auspiciousness of allvyam-transcendental; väsudevasya-of Lord Väsudeva; kértanam-the glory.

In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, in the Çré Kåñëämåta-stotra, it is said:

"The chanting of Lord Kåñëa's holy name brings long life, the cure of disease, happiness, liberation, and the best of all auspiciousness."

Text 393

çré-näräyaëa-vyüha-stave

parihäsopähasädyair viñëor gåhëanti näma tekåtärthas te 'pi manujäs tebhyo 'péha namo namaù

çré-näräyaëa-vyüha-stave-in the Çré Näräyaëa-vyüha-stava; parihäsa-joking; upähasa-mocking; ädyaiù-beginning with; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; gåhëanti-chant; näma-the holy name; te-they; kåtärthaù-successful; te-they; api-also; manujäù-persons; tebhyaù-to them; api-laos; iha-here; namo namaù-obeisnaces.

In the Çré Näräyaëa-vyüha-stava it is said:

"They who, joking, mocking, or in any other way, chant the holy names of Lord Viñëu are all-successful and all-perfect in this world. I bow down to offer my respectful obeisances to them."

Text 394

värähe ca

te dhanyäs te kåtärthäç ca tair eva sukåtaà kåtamtair äptaà janmanaù präpyaà ye kale kértayanti mäm

värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; ca-and; te-they; dhanyäù-fortunate; te-they; kåtärthäù-successful; ca-and; taiù-by them;

eva-indeed; sukåtam-pious deeds; kåtam-done; taiù-by them; äptam-attained; janmanaù-of birth; präpyam-to be attained; ye-who; kale-in time; kértayanti-glorify; mäm-Me.

In the Varäha Puräëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead declares:

"they who chant My holy names are all-successful and all-perfect. They have performed all pious deeds. They have attained the goal of life."

Text 395

viçeñataù kalau

sakåd uccärayanty etad durlabhaà cäkåtätmanämkalau yuge harer näma te kåtärthä na saàçayaù

viçeñataù-specifically; kalau-inj the kali-yuga; sakåt-once; uccärayanti-chant; etat-thsi; durlabham-rare; ca-and; äkåtätmanäm-of they who have not performed pious deeds; kalau-in Kali; yuge-yuga; hareù-of Lord Hari; näma-the name; te-they; kåtärthä-successful; na-no; saàçayaù-doubt.

Chanting the Holy Name Is Especially Beneficial in the Kali-yuga

All-successful and all-perfect are they who in the Kali-yuga once chant the Lord's holy name, which cannot be chanted without having performed many pious deeds. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 396

ekädaça-skandhe ca

kalià sabhäjayanty aryä guëa-jïäù sära-bhäginaùyatra saìkértanenaiva sarvaù svärtho 'bhilabhyate

ekädaça-skandhe-in the Eleventh Canto; ca-and; kalim-the age of Kali; sabhäjayanti-thye praise; aryä-progressive souls; guëa-jïäù-who know the true value (of the age); sära-bhäginaù-who are able to pick out the essence; yatra-in which; saìkértanena-by the congregational chanting of the holy name of the Supreme Lord; eva-merely; sarvaù-all; svärthaù-desired goals; abhilabhyate-are attained.


"They who are advanced and highly qualified and are interested in the essence of life, know the good qualities of Kali-yuga. Such people worship the age of Kali because in this age, simply by chanting the Hare Kåñëa mahä-mantra, one can advance in spiritual knowledge and attain life's goal."*

Text 397

skände tatraiva

tathä caivottamaà loke tapaù çré-hari-kértanamkalau yuge viçeñena viñëu-prétyai samäcaret

skände-In the Skanda Puräëa; tatra-there; eva-indeed; tathä-so; ca-and; eva-indeed; uttamam-supreme; loke-in this world; tapaù-austerities; çré-hari-of Lord Kåñëa; kértanam-chanting thr holy names; kalau-in kali; yuge-yuga; viçeñena-specifically; viñëu-prétyai-to please Lord Viñëu; samäcaret-one should perform.


"In this world the supreme austerity is chanting the holy names of Lord Hari. Especially in kali-yuga, to please Lord Hari one should chant His holy names.

Texts 398 and 399

sarva-çaktimattvam

skände

däna-vrata-tapas-tértha- kñeträdénäà ca yaù sthitaùçaktayo deva-mahatäà sarva-päpa-haräù çubhäù

räjasüyäçvamedhänäà jïänasyädhyätma-vastunaùäkåñya hariëä sarväù sthäpitäù sveñu nämasu

sarva-çaktimattvam-having all powers; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; däna-charity; vrata-vows; tapaù-austerity; tértha-pilgrimage; kñetra-places; ädénäm-beginning wqith; ca-and; yaù-one who; sthitaù-situated; çaktayaù-powers; deva-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; mahatäm-of ther devotees; sarva-päpa-all sins; haraù-removing; çubhaù-auspicious; räjasüya-açvamedhänäm-of räjasüya and açvamedha-yajnas; jïänasya adhyätma-vastunaù-of transcendental knowledge; äkåñya-extracting; hariëä-by Lord Kåñëa; sarvaù-all; sthäpitaù-placed; sveñu-in His own; nämasu-names.

The Holy Name Is All-powerful


"Lord Kåñëa has extracted from charity, vows, austerities, pilgrimages, the worship of the Lord, the worship of His devotees, räjasüya-yajïas, açvamedha yajïas, and transcendental knowledge all their auspicious powers to remove sins, and placed those powers in His holy names.

Text 400

väto 'py ato harer nämnä ugräëäm api duùsahaùsarveñäà päpa-räçénäà yathaiva tamasäà raviù

vä-or; ataù-from that; api-also; ataù-from that; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; nämnä-by the name; ugräëäm-terrible; api-even; duùsahaù-unbearable; sarveñäm-of all; päpa-räçénäm-sins; yathä-as; eva-indeed; tamasäm-of darkness; raviù-the sun.

"As the sun destroys darkness, so Lord Kåñëa's holy name destroys a host of terrible sins."

Text 401

ata eva brahmäëde

sarvärtha-çakti-yuktasya deva-devasya cakriëaùyac cäbhirucitaà näma tat sarvärtheñu yojayet

ata eva-therefore; brahmäëde-in the Brahmanada Puräëa; sarvärtha-çakti-yuktasya-all-powerful; deva-devasya-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; cakriëaù-who holds the cakra; yat-what; ca-and; abhirucitam-desired; näma-name; tat-that; sarvärtheñu-in all desires; yojayet-may be employed.


"The Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is the master of the demigods, who hold the Sudarçana-cakra, and who has the power to fulfill all desires, has placed in His holy name the power to fulfill all desires."

Text 402

jagad-änandakatvaà

çré-bhagavad-gétäsu

sthäne håñékeça tava prakértya jagat prahrñyaty anuräjyate carakñäàsi bhitäni diço dravanti sarve nämasyanti ca siddha-saìghäù

jagad-änandakatvam-filling the world with bliss; çré-bhagavad-gétäsu-in Bhagavad-gétä; sthäne-rightly; håñékeça-O master of all senses; tava-Your; prakértya-glories; jagat-the entire world; prahrñyati-rejoicing; anuräjyate-becomes attached; ca-and; rakñäàsi-the demons; bhitäni-out of fear; diçaù-directions; dravanti-fleeing; sarve-all; nämasyanti-offering respect; ca-also; siddha-saìghäù-the perfect human beings.

The Holy Name Fills the World With Joy

In Bhagavad-gétä (11.36) it is said:

"O Håñékeça, the world becomes joyful upon hearing Your name, and thus everyone becomes attached to You. Although the perfected beings offer You their respectful homage, the demons are afraid, and they flee here and there. All this is rightly done."*

Text 403

jagad-vandyatä-pädakatvaà

båhan-näradéye

näräyaëa jagan-nätha väsudeva janärdanaitérayanti te nityaà te vai sarvatra vanditäù

jagad-vandyatä-pädakatvam-making one honored nin the world; båhan-näradéye-in the Närada Puräëa; näräyaëa-O Näräyaëa; jagan-nätha-O Jaganntha; väsudeva-O Väsudeva; janärdana-O Janradana; iti-thus; érayanti-say; te-they; nityam-always; te-they; vai-indeed; sarvatra-everywhere; vanditäù-honored.

Chanting the Holy Name Makes One Honored by the Whole World


"Honored everywhere are they who always chant, `Näräyaëa! Jagannätha, Väsudeva! Janärdana!' "

Text 404

çré-sütoktaà tatraiva yajïadhvajopakhyänänte

svapan bhaïjan vrajaàs tiñöhann

uttiñöhaàç ca vadaàs tathäye vadanti harer näma tebhyo nityaà namo namaù

çré-süta-by Çré Suta Gosvami; uktaàsaid; tatra-there; eva-indeed; yajïadhvaja-of Yajnadhvaja; upakhyäna-of the story; ante-at the end; svapan-sleeping; bhaïjan-eating; vrajaàù-walking; tiñöhann-standing; uttiñöhan-rising; ca-and; vadaàù-speaking; tathä-so; ye-they who; vadanti-speak; hareù-of Lord k; näma-the holy name; tebhyaù-to them; nityam-always; namaù-obeisances; namaù-obeisances.

In the Närada Puräëa, at the end of the story of Yajïdhvaja, Çré Süta Gosvämi explains:

"Again and I again I offer my respectful obeisances to they who while sleeping, eating, walking, sitting, standing, and speaking, chant the holy names of Lord Kåñëa."

Text 405

çré-näräyaëa-vyüha-stave

stré çüdraù pukkaço väpi ye cänye päpa-yoëayaùkértayanti harià bhaktyä tebhyo 'péha namo nämaù

çré-näräyaëa-vyüha-stave-in the Çré Näräyaëa-vyüha-stava; stré-woman; çüdraù-sudra; pukkaçaù-outcaste; vä-or; api-also; ye-who; ca-and; anye-others; päpa-yoëayaù-born from sinful wombs; kértayanti-glorify; harim-Lord Kåñëa; bhaktyä-with devotion; tebhyaù-to them; pi-also; iha-here; namo nämaù-obeisances.

In the Çré Näräyaëa-vyüha-stava it is said:

"Again and again I bow down and offer my respectful obeisances to the women, çüdras, barbarians, those born from sinful wombs, or anyone else who with devotion chants the holy names of Lord Kåñëa."

Texts 406 and 407

agaty-eka-gatitvaà

pädme båhat-sahasra-näma-kathanärambhe

ananya-gatayo martyä bhogino 'pi parantapaùjïäna-vairägya-rahitä brahmacaryädi-varjitäù

sarva-dharmojjhitä viñëor näma-mätraika-jalpakäùsukhena yäà gatià yänti na täà sarve 'pi dharmikäù

agati-of they who have no shelter; eka-the only; gatitvam-shelter; pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; båhat-sahasra-näma-of the Båhat-sahasra-näma; kathanärambhe-in the beginning; ananya-gatayaù-they who have no other shelter; martyä-human beings; bhoginaù-sense enjoyers; api-even; parantapäù-troublesome to others; jïäna-knowledge; vairägya-renunciation; rahitä-without; brahmacarya-celibacy; ädi-beginning with; varjitäù-without; sarva-dharmojjhitä-without any piety; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; näma-mätraika-jalpakäù-chanting thre holy name once; sukhena-easily; yäm-which; gatim-abode; yänti-enter; na-not; täm-that; sarve-all; api-even; dharmikäù-the pious.

The Holy Name Is the Shelter of They Who Have No Other Shelter

"They who are hedonists, troublesome to others, without knowledge, renunciation, celibacy, piety, or other virtues, but who, having no shelter, once chant the holy name of the Lord, can easily go to the supreme spiritual abode where the ordinary pious souls cannot enter."

Text 408

sadä sarvatra sevyatvaà

viñëu-dharme kñatrabandhüpakhyäne

na deça-niyamas tasmin na käla-niyamas tathänocchiñöädau niñedho 'sti çré-harer nämni lubdhaka

sadä-always; sarvatra-everywhere; sevyatvam-to be served; viñëu-dharme-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa; kñatrabandhüpakhyäne-in the story of Kñatrabandhu; na-not; deça-of place; niyamaù-restruction; tasmin-in this; na-not; käla-niyamaù-restrictiojn of time; tathä-so; na-not; ucchiñöa-barbarians; ädau-beinning with; niñedhaù-prohibition; asti-is; çré-hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; nämni-in the name; lubdhaka-O hunter.

The Holy Name Should Be Chanted Always and Everywhere

In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, in the story of Kñatrabandhu, it is said:

"O hunter, there is no time or place when one is forbidden to chant Lord Kåñëa's holy name, nor are barbarians or sinners forbidden to chant."

Text 409

skände pädme vaiçäkha-mähätmye viñëu-dharmottare ca

cakräyudhasya nämäni sadä sarvatra kértayetnäçaucaà kértane tasya sa pavitra-karo yataù

skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; pädme-the Padma Puräëa; vaiçäkha-mähätmye-the Vaisakha-mahatmya; viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khanda; ca-and; cakra-cakra; äyudhasya-which has the weapon; nämäni-the names; sadä-always; sarvatra-everywhere; kértayet-should chant; na-not; açaucam-impurity; kértane-in chanting; tasya-of him; sa-He; pavitra-karaù-making pure; yataù-because.

In the Skanda Puräëa, the Padma Puräëa Vaiçäkha-mähätmya, and the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa Uttara-khaëòa, it is said:

"Always and everywhere one should chant the holy names of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, whose weapon is the Sudarçana-cakra. No one is so impure that he cannot chant. The Supreme Personality of Godhead will purify anyone who chants."

Text 410

punaù skände

na deça-kälävasthäsu çuddhy-ädikam apkeñatekintu svatantram evaitan- näma kämita-kämadam

punaù-again; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; na-not; deça-of place; käla-time; avasthäsu-and situation; çuddhi-purity; ädikam-beginning with; apkeñate-waits; kintu-indeed; svatantram-independence; eva-indeed; etat-of Him; näma-the holy name; kämita-kämadam-fulfilling desires.

Again, in the Skanda Puräëa it is said:

"The holy name does not wait for any particular time, place, or situation. Nor does the holy name require that they who chant it be pure in heart. The holy name does as its wishes. The holy name fulfills all the desires of everyone."

Text 411

vaiçvänara-saàhitäyäà

na deça-käla-niyamo na çaucäçauca-nirëayaùparaà saìkértanäd eva räma rämeti mucyate

vaiçvänara-saàhitäyäm-i the Vaiçvänara-saàhitä; na-not; deça-käla-niyamaù-restriction of time and place; na-not; çaucäçauca-nirëayaù-consideratyion of pure or impure; param-great; saìkértanät-from chanting; eva-indeed; räma-Räma; räma-Räma; iti-this; mucyate-is freed.

In the Vaiçvänara-saàhitä it is said;

"There is no time or place when one is forbidden to chant the Lord's holy name, nor does it matter that the chanter is pure or impure. Anyone who chants: Räma! Räma! will become liberated."

Text 412

vaiñëava-cintämaëau çré-yudhiñöhiraà prati çré-närada-väkyaà

na deça-niyamo räjan na käla-niyamas tathävidyate nätra sandeho viñëor nämänukértane

vaiñëava-cintämaëau-in the Vaiñëava-cintämaëi; çré-yudhiñöhiraàto King Yudhisthira; prati-to; çré-närada-väkyam-the words of Närada Muni; na-not; deça-place; niyamaù-restriction; räjan-O king; na-not; käla-niyamaù-restriction of time; tathä-so; vidyate-is; na-not; atra-here; sandehaù-doubt; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; nämänukértane-in chanting the holy names.

In the Vaiñëava-cintämaëi, Närada Muni tells King Yudhiñöhira:

"O king, there is no time or place when one is forbidden to chant Lord Viñëu's holy name. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 413

kälo 'sti däne yajïe ca snäne kälo 'sti sajjapeviñëu-saìkértane kälo nästy atra påthivé-tale

kälaù-time; asti-is; däne-in giving charity; yajïe-in performing yajnas; ca-and; snäne-in bathing; kälaù-time; asti-is; sat-jape-in chanting mantras; viñëu-saìkértane-in chanting Lord Viñëu's holy names; kälaù-time; na-not; asti-is; atra-here; påthivé-tale-on the earth.

"There is an appropriate time to give charity and to perform yajïas. There is an appropriate time to bathe and to chant certain mantras. However, in this world there is no specific time when one should chant the holy names of Lord Viñëu. One may chant them at any time."

Text 414

dvitéya-skande

etan nirvidyamänänäà icchatäm akuto-bhayamyoginäà nåpa nirëétaà harer nämänukértanam

dvitéya-skande-in the Second Canto; etan-it is; nirvidyamänänäm-of those who are completely free from all material desires; icchatäm-of those who are deswireous of all sorts of material enjoyment; akuto-bhayam-free form all doubts and fear; yoginäm-of all who are self-satisfied; nåpa-O king; nirëétam-decided truth; hareù-of the Lord, Çré Kåñëa; näma-holy name; anu-after someone, always; kértanam-chanting.


"O king, constant chanting of the holy name of the Lord after the ways of the great authorities is the doubtless and fearless way of success for all, including those who are free from all material desires, those who are desirous of all material enjoyment, and those who are self-satisfied by dint of transcendental knowledge."*

Text 415

mukti-pradatvaà

värähe

näräyaëäcyutänanta väsudeveti yo naraùsatataà kértayed bhümi yänti mallayatäà sa hi

mukti-pradatvam-the giver of liberation; värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; näräyaëa-Näräyaëa; acyuta-Acyuta; ananta-Ananta; väsudeva-Väsudeva; iti-thus; yaù-one who; naraù-a person; satatam-always; kértayet-chants; bhümi-O earth; yänti-goes; mat-layatäm-liberation; sa-he; hi-indeed.

The Holy Name Grants Liberation


"O earth-goddess, anyone who always chants, `Näräyaëa! Acyuta! Ananta! Väsudeva!', attains liberation."

Text 416

gäruòe

kià kariñyati saìkhyena kià yogair nara-näyakamuktim icchasi räjendra kuru govinda-kértanam

gäruòe-in the Garuòa Puräëa; kim-what is the use?; kariñyati-will do; saìkhyena-with sankhya; kim-what is the use?; yogaiù-of yoga; nara-näyaka-O king; muktim-liberation; icchasi-you desire; räjendra-O king; kuru-do; govinda-kértanam-the chanting of Lord Kåñëa's names.


"What is the use of saìkhya! What is the use of yoga! O king, if you desire liberation, then please chant the holy names of Lord Govinda."

Text 417

skände

sakåd uccaritaà yena harir ity akñara-dvayambaddhaù parikaras tena mokñäya gamanaà prati

skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; sakåt-once; uccaritam-spoken; yena-by whom; hariù-Hari; iti-thus; akñara-dvayam-two syllables; baddhaù-bound; parikaraù-belt; tena-by him; mokñäya-for liberation; gamanam-going; prati-to.


"By once chanting the holy name of the Lord, which consist of the two syllables `Ha-ri', one guarantees his path to liberation."*

Text 418

brahma-puräëe

apy anya-citto 'çuddho vä yaù sadä kértayed dharimso 'pi doña-kñayän muktià labhec cedi-patir yathä

brahma-puräëe-in the Brahma Puräëa; api-also; anya-cittaù-with thoughts on something else; açuddhaù-impure; vä-or; yaù-one who; sadä-always; kértayet-chants; harim-Lord Hari; saù-he; api-even; doña-kñayän-from the disappearance of fualts; muktim-liberation; labhec-attains; cedi-patiù-Sisupala; yathä-as.

In the Brahmä Puräëa it is said:

"Even if impure at heart or rapt in material thoughts, a person who always chants the holy names of Lord Kåñëa will become free of all sins and attain liberation, as the demon Çiçupäla did."

Text 419


sakåd uccärayed yas tu näräyaëam atandritaùçuddhäntaùkaraëo bhütvä nirväëam adhigacchati

pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; devahüti-stutau-in the prayersv of Devahuti; sakåt-once; uccärayet-says; yaù-who; tu-indeed; näräyaëam-Näräyaëa; atandritaù-without fatiugue; çuddhäntaùkaraëaù-pure at heart; bhütvä-becoming; nirväëam-liberation; adhigacchati-attains.

In the Padma Puräëa, in the prayers of Devahüti, she says:

"A person who once says the word Näräyaëa become pure in heart and attains liberation."

Text 420

mätsye

para-dära-rato väpi paräpa-kåti-kärakaù

sa çuddho muktim äpnoti harer nämänukértanät

mätsye-in the Matsya Puräëa; para-dära-rataù-a adulterer; vä-or; api-even; paräpakåti-kärakaù-a murderer; sa-he; çuddhaù-pure; muktim-liberation; äpnoti-attains; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; nämänukértanät-by chanting the holy names.

In the Matsya Puräëa it is said:

"Even an adulterer or a murderer becomes pure-hearted and attains liberation by chanting Lord Kåñëa's holy names."

Text 421

vaiçampäyana-saàhitäyäà

sarva-dharma-bahir-bhütaù sarva-päpa-ratas tathämucyate nätra sandeho viñëor nämänukértanät

vaiçampäyana-saàhitäyäm-in the Vaiçampäyana-saàhitä; sarva-dharma-bahir-bhütaù-outside of all religion; sarva-all; päpa-sins; rataù-delighting in; tathä-so; mucyate-is liberated; na-not; atra-here; sandehaù-doubt; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; nämänukértanät-by chanting the holy names.

In the Vaiçampäyana-saàhitä it is said:

"Even a person who stays far from all pious deeds and delights in sins becomes liberated by chanting the holy names of Lord Viñëu."

Text 422

båhan-näradéye

yathä kathaïcid yan-nämni kértite vä çrute 'pi väpäpino 'pi viçuddhäù syuù çuddhä mokñam aväpnuyuù

båhan-näradéye-in the Närada Puräëa; yathä--as; kathaïcit-somehow; yan-nämni-when whose name; kértite-is chanted; vä-or; çrute-heard; api-and; vä-or; päpinaù-sinners; api-even; viçuddhäù-pure; syuù-become; çuddhä-pure; mokñam-liberation; aväpnuyuù-attain.


"Even sinners who somehow chant or hear Lord Viñëu's holy names become purified and attain liberation."

Text 423

bhärata-vibhäge

präëa-präyana-pätheyaà saàsära-vyädhi-bheñajamduùkha-soka-pariträëaà harir ity akñara-dvayam

bhärata-vibhäge-in the Bhärata-vibhäga; präëa-präyana-for death; pätheyam-the cure; saàsära-vyädhi-for the disease of repeated birth and death; bheñajam-the medicine; duùkha-soka-pariträëam-protecting from grief and suffering; hariù-Hari; iti-thus; akñara-dvayam-the two syllables.

In the Bhärata-vibhäga it is said:

"The two syllables Ha-ri are a medicine to cure birth, death, grief, and a host of sufferings."

Text 424

näradéye

navyaà navyaà nämadheyaà murärer yad yac caitad geya-péyüña-puñöamye gäyanti tyakta-lajjäù sa-harñaà jévan-muktäù saàçayo nästi tatra

näradéye-In the Närada Puräëa; navyam-newer; navyam-and newer; nämadheyam-the name; muräreù-of Lord Kåñëa; yat-what; yac-what; ca-and; etat-this; geya-to be sung; péyüña-nectar; puñöam-nourished; ye-who; gäyanti-sing; tyakta-lajjäù-free from embarrassment; sa-harñam-happily; jévan-while living; muktäù-liberated; saàçayaù-dount; na-not; asti-is; tatra-there.


"The nectar names of Lord Kåñëa are always new and fresh. Whoever chants them becomes free of the embarrassment of material

Text 425

prathamä-skandhe

äpannaà saàsritià ghoräà yan-näma vivaço gåëantataù sadyo vimucyeta yad bibheti svayaà bhayam

prathamä-skandhe-in the First Canto; äpannam-being entangles; saàsritim-in the hurdle of birth and death; ghoräm-too complicatd; yat-what; näma-the absolute name; vivaçaù-unconsciously; gåëan-chanting; tataù-from that; sadyaù-at once; vimucyeta-gets freedom; yat-that which; bibheti-fears; svayam-personally; bhayam-fear itself.


"Living beings who are entangled in the complicated meshes of birth and death can be freed immediately by even unconsciously chanting the holy name of Kåñëa, which is feared by fear personified."*

Text 426

tåtéye brahma-stutau

yasyävatära-guëa-karma-viòambanäni nämäni ye 'su-vigame vivaçä gåëantite 'neka-janma-çamalaà sahasaiva hitvä samyäty apävåtämåtaà tam ajaà präpadye

tåtéye-in the Third Cant; brahma-stutau-in the prayers of Brahmä; yasya-whose; avatära-incarnations; guëa-transcendental qualities; karma-activities; viòambanäni-all mysterious; nämäni-transcendental names; ye-those; asu-vigame-while quitting this life; vivaçä-automatically; gåëanti-invoke; te-they; aneka-many; janma-births; çamalam-accumulated sins; sahasä-immediately; eva-certainly; hitvä-giving up; samyäti-obtain; apävåta-open; amåtam-immortality; tam-Him; ajam-the unborn; präpadye-I take shelter.

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (3.9.15) it is said;

"Let me take shelter of the lotus feet of Him whose incarnations, qualities, and activities are mysterious imitations of

worldly affairs. One who invokes His transcendental names, even unconsciously, at the time he quits his life, is certainly washed immediately of the sins of many, many births and attains Him without fail."*

Text 427

ñañöhe

etävatälam agha-nirharaëäya puàsäà saìkértanaà bhagavato guëa-karma-nämnämvikrusya putram aghavän yad ajämilo 'pi näräyaëeti mriyamäëa ihäya muktim

ñañöhe-in the Sixth Canto; etävatä-with this much; alam-sufficient; agha-nirharaëäya-for taking away the reactions of sinful activities; puàsäm-of human beings; saìkértanam-the congregational chanting; bhagavataù-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; guëa-of the transcendental qualities; karma-nämnäm-and of His namess according to His activities and pastimes; vikrusya-crying to without offense; putram-His son; aghavän-the sinful; yat-since; ajämilo 'pi-even Ajamila; näräyaëa-the Lord's name Näräyaëa; iti-thus; mriyamäëa-dying; ihäya-achieved; muktim-liberation.


"Therefore it should be understood that one is easily relieved from all sinful reactions by chanting the holy name of the Lord and chanting of His qualities and activities. This is the only process recommended for relief from sinful reactions. Even if one chants the holy name of the Lord with improper pronunciation, he will achieve relief from material bondage if he chants without offenses. Ajämila, for example, was extremely sinful, but while dying he merely chanted the holy name, and although calling his son, he achieved complete liberation because he remembered the name of Näräyaëa."*

Text 428

çré-vaikuëöhaloka-präpakatvam

uktaà ca laiìge çré-näradaà prati çré-çivena

vrajaàs tiñöhan svapann açnan çvasan väkya-prapüraëenäma-saìkértanaà viñëor helayä kali-mardanam kåtvä svarüpatäà yäti bhakti-yuktaà paraà vrajet

çré-vaikuëöhaloka-präpakatvam-the attainment of Çré Vaikuëöhaloka; uktam-said; ca-and; laiìge-in the Linga Puräëa; çré-näradam-Çré Närada; prati-to; çré-çivena-by Lord Çiva; vrajan-walking; tiñöhan-sitting; svapann-sleeping; açnan-eating; çvasan-breating; väkya-of words; prapüraëe-in the abundance; näma-saìkértanam-chanting the holuy name; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; helayä-with contempt; kali-mardanam-the defeat of Kali-yuga; kåtvä-doing; svarüpatäm-his original spiritual form; yäti-attains; bhakti-yuktam-with devotion; param-to the supreme abode; vrajet-goes.

The Holy Name Takes One to Çré Vaikuëöhaloka

In the Liìga Puräëa, Lord Çiva tells Çré Närada Muni:

"A person who, while walking, sitting, sleeping, eating, and breathing, always chants, even casually or disrespectfully, the holy names of Lord Viñëu, defeats the age of Kali, regains his original spiritual form, becomes a great devotee, and goes to the spiritual world."

Texts 429 and 430

näradéye çré-brahmaëä

brähmaëaù çvapacéà bhuïjan

viçeñena rajasvalämaçnäti surayä pakvaà maraëe harim uccaran

abhakñyägamyayor jätaà vihayäghaugha-saïcayamprayäti viñëu-sälokyaà vimukto bhava-bandhanaiù

näradéye-in the Narada Puräëa; çré-brahmaëä-by Lord Brahmä; brähmaëaù-a brähmaëa; çvapacém-a deogeater woman; bhuïjan-enjoying; viçeñena-sepcifically; rajasvaläm-a woman in her menstrual period; açnäti-eats; surayä-with wine; pakvam-cooked; maraëe-in death; harim-Lord Hari; uccaran-calling out; abhakñya-what should not be eaten; agamyayoù-who should not be enjoyed; jätam-born; vihaya-abandoning; agha-of sins; augha-saïcayam-a flood; prayäti-attains; viñëu-sälokyam-residence on the same planet as Lord Viñëu; vimuktaù-liberated; bhava-bandhanaiù-from the bonds of repeated birth and death.

In the Närada Puräëa, Lord Brahmä explains:

"A brähmaëa who enjoys with a dogeater women, even during her period, and who drinks wine and eats what should not be eaten, but who at the moment of death calls out the holy name of Lord Hari, becomes free from the great flood his many sins. Free from the bonds of birth and death, he goes to the world of Lord Viñëu."

Text 431

båhan-näradéye çukraà prati çré-balinä

jihvägre vartate yasya harir ity akñara-dvayamviñëor lokam aväpnoti punar-ävåtti-durlabham

ue; vartate-is; yasya-of whom; hariù-Hari; iti-thus; akñara-dvayam-two syllable; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; lokam-to the world; aväpnoti-attains; punar-ävåtti-return; durlabham-rare.

In the Närada Puräëa, King Bali tells Çukräcärya:

"A person who keeps the two syllables Ha-ri on the tip of his tongue goes to the world of Lord Viñëu, from which almost no one ever returns."

Text 432

pädme

yatra tatra sthito väpi kåñëa kåñëeti kértayetsarva-päpa-viçuddhätmä sa gacchet paramäà gatim

pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; yatra-where; tatra-there; sthitaù-staying; vä-or; api-even; kåñëa-Kåñëa; kåñëa-Kåñëa; iti-thus; kértayet-chanting; sarva-all; päpa-sins; viçuddha-pure; ätmä-heart; sa-he; gacchet-goes; paramäm-tothe supreme; gatim-destination.


"A person who, wherever he goes, chants, `Kåñëa! Kåñëa!' becomes purified of all sins and goes to the supreme destination."

Text 433

tatraiva vaiçäkha-mähätmye ambaréñaà prati näradena

tad eva puëyaà paramaà pavitraà govinda-gehe gamanäya patramtad eva loke sukåtaika-satraà yad ucyate keçava-näma-mätram

tatra-there; eva-ineed; vaiçäkha-mähätmye-in the Vaiçäkha-mähätmya; ambaréñam-King Ambaréña; prati-to; näradena-by Närada Muni; tat-that; eva-indeed; puëyam-piety; paramam-supreme; pavitram-pure; govinda-gehe-in the house of Lord Govinda; gamanäya-to go; patram-vehicle; tat-that; eva-indeed; loke-in the world; sukåta-pious; eka-one; satram-gift; yat-what; ucyate-is said; keçava-näma-mätram-simply speaking the name Keçava.

In the Padma Puräëa, Vaiçäkha-mähätmya, Närada Muni tells King Ambaréña:

"A person who once speaks the name Keçava performs the most pious, pure, and saintly act, an act that will carry him to Lord Govinda's abode."

Text 434

brahma-vaivarte

evaà saìgrahaëé-puträ- bhidhäna-vyäjato harimsamuccäryänta-käle 'gäd dhäma tat paramaà hareù

brahma-vaivarte-in the Brahma-vaivarta Puräëa; evam-thus; saìgrahaëé-putra-of his son; äbhidhäna-vyäjataù-by calling the name; harim-Hari; samuccärya-calling; anta-käle-at the moment of death; agät-went; dhäma-to the abode; tat-that; paramam-supreme; hareù-of Lord Hari.


"A person who, even though intending only to call his son, at the time of death calls out the name of Lord Hari, goes to Lord Hari's transcendental abode.

Text 435

näräyaëam iti vyäjäd uccärya kaluñäçrayaùajämilo 'py agäd dhäma kim uta çraddhayä gåëan

näräyaëam-Näräyaëa; iti-thus; vyäjät-on the pretext; uccärya-calling; kaluñäçrayaù-the shelter of many sins; ajämilaù-Ajämila; api--even; agät-went; dhäma-to the abode; kim-what?; uta-indeed; çraddhayä-with faith; gåëan-chanting.

"In this way the sinner Ajämila called out the name of Lord Näräyaëa and went to the Lord's supreme abode. What, then, can be said of they who chant the Lord's names with faith?"

Text 436

ñañöha-skandhe

mriyamäëo harer näma gåëan putropacäritamajämilo 'py agäd dhäma kim uta çraddhayä gåëan

ñañöha-skandhe-in the Sixth Canto; mriyamäëaù-at the time of death; harer näma-the holy name of Hari; gåëan-chanting; putropacäritam-indicating his son; ajämilaù-Ajämila; api-even; agät-went; dhäma-to the spiritual world; kim uta-

what to speak of; çraddhayä-with faith and love; gåëan-chanting.


oward his son, he nevertheless returned home, back to Godhead. Therefore if one faithfully and inoffensively chants the holy name of the Lord, where is the doubt that he will return to Godhead?"*

Text 437

vämane

ye kértayanti varadaà vara-padmanäbhaà çaìkhäbja-cakra-çara-cäpa-gadäsi-hastampadmälayä-vadana-paìkaja-ñaöpadäkñaà nünaà prayänti sadanaà madhughätinas te

vämane-in the Vämana Puräëa; ye-who; kértayanti-chant; varadam-the giver of boons; vara-padmanäbham-whose navel is like a lotus; çaìkha-conch; abja-lotus; cakra-disc; çara-arrows; cäpa-bow; gada-club; asi-sword; hastam-in His hand; padmälayä-of Goddess lakñmé; vadana-face; paìkaja-lotus; ñaöpada-bees; akñam-eyes; nünam-indeed; prayänti-go; sadanam-to the abode; madhughätinaù-of the killer of the demon Madhu; te-they.


"They who chant the holy names of Lord Näräyaëa, who gives benedictions, whose navel is a lotus flower, who holds a conch, lotus, disc, bow, arrow, club, and sword in His hands, who is the killer of the Madhu demon, and whose eyes are bumblebees attracted to the lotus flower of Goddess Lakñmé's face, go to the Lord's spiritual abode."

Text 438

äìgirasa-puräëe

väsudeveti manuja uccärya bhava-bhétitaùtan-muktaù padam äpnoti viñëor eva na saàçayaù

äìgirasa-puräëe-in the Aìgirasa Puräëa; väsudeva-Väsudeva; iti-thus; manuja-a person; uccärya-calling out; bhava-bhétitaù-in fearv of birth and death; tan-muktaù-liberated from that world; padam-to the supreme abode; äpnoti-attains; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; eva-indeed; na-no; saàçayaù-doubt.

In the Aìgirasa Puräëa it is said:

"A person who, frightened at the prospect of taking birth again in this world, calls out, `Väsudeva!', becomes liberated at goes to the Lord's spiritual abode. Of this there is no doubt."

Text 439

nandé-puräëe

sarvadä sarva-käleñu ye 'pi kurvanti pätakamnäma-saìkértanaà kåtvä yänti viñëoù paraà padam

nandé-puräëe-in the Nandé Puräëa; sarvadä-in every way; sarva-käleñu-at all times; ye-who; api-indeed; kurvanti-do; pätakam-sin; näma-saìkértanam-chanting the holy names; kåtvä-doing; yänti-go; viñëoù-of Lord v; param-to the supreme; padam-abode.

In the Nandé Puräëa it is said:

"They who, although again and again committing every kind of sin, somehow chant the holy names of the Lord, will go to Lord Viñëu's spiritual abode."

Text 440

viçeñataù kalau

dvädaça-skandhe

kaler doña-nidhe räjann asti hy eko mahän guëaùkértanäd eva kåñëasya mukta-saìgo paraà vrajet

viçeñataù-specifically; kalau-in the age of Kali; dvädaça-skandhe-in the Twelfth Canto; kaleù-of the age of Kali; doña-nidhe-ijn the ocean of faults; räjann-O king; asti-there is; hi-certainly; ekaù-one; mahän-very great; guëaù-good quality; kértanät-by chanting; eva-certainly; kåñëasya-of the holy name of Kåñëa; mukta-saìgaù-liberated from material bondage; param-to the transcendental kingdom; vrajet-one can go.

This Is Especially So in the Kali-yuga


"My dear king, although Kali-yuga is full of faults, there is still one good quality about this age. It is that simply by chanting the Hare Kåñëa mahä-mantra, one can become free from material bondage and be promoted to the transcendental kingdom."*

Text 441

gäruòe ambaréñaà prati çré-çukena

yadécchasi paraà jïänaà jïänäd yat paramaà padamtad-ädareëa räjendra kuru govinda-kértanam

gäruòe-in the Garuòa Puräëa; ambaréñam-King Ambaréña; prati-to; çré-çukena-by Çré Çuka; yadi-if; a[98]cchasi-you desire; param-transcendental; jïänam-knowledge; jïänät-than knowledge; yat-what; paramam-supreme; padam-abode; tad-ädareëa-with respect; räjendra-O king; kuru-do; govinda-kértanam-the chanting of Lord Govinda's holy names.

In the Garuòa Puräëa, Çré Çukadeva Gosvämé tells King Ambaréña:

"O king, if you desire spiritual knowledge and the spiritual world, then you should respectfully chant Lord Govinda's holy names."

Text 442

çré-bhagavat-préëanatvaà

värähe

väsudevasya saìkértya suräpo vyädhito 'pi vämukto jayeta niyataà mahä-viñëuù prasédati

çré-bhagavat-préëanatvam-pleasing to the Supreme Personality of Godhead; värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; väsudevasya-of Lord Väsudeva; saìkértya-glorifying; suräpaù-a drunkard; vyädhitaù-diseased; api-and; vä-or; muktaù-liberated; jayeta-is

born; niyatam-always; mahä-viñëuù-Lord Viñëu; prasédati-is pleased.

Chanting the Holy name Pleases the Supreme Personality of Godhead


"A drunkard or a person tormented with disease who chants the holy names of the Lord becomes liberated. Lord Viñëu is pleased with with him."

Text 443

båhan-näradéye

näma-saìkértanaà viñëoù kñut-tåö-praskhalitädiñukaroti satataà vipras tasya préto hy adhokñajaù

åö-and thirst; praskhalita-stumbling; ädiñu-beginning with; karoti-does; satatam-always; vipraù-a brähmaëa; tasya-with him; prétaù-pleased; hi-indeed; adhokñajaù-the Supreme Personality of Godhead.


"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is pleased with a brähmaëa who, even though stumbling with hunger and thirst, again and again chants His holy names."

Text 444

viñëu-dharmottare

näma-saìkértanaà viñëoù kñut-tåö-praskhalitädiñuyaù karoti mahä-bhäga tasya tuñyati keçavaù

viñëu-dharmottare-In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; näma-saìkértanam-chanting the holy names; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; kñut-tåö-with hunger and thirst; praskhalitädiñu-in trembling; yaù-who; karoti-does; mahä-bhäga-O very fortunare one; tasya-with Him; tuñyati-pleased; keçavaù-is Lord Kåñëa.


"O fortunate one, Lord Kåñëa is pleased with a person who, even though stumbling with hunger and thirst, again and again chants His holy names."

Text 445

atha çré-bhagavad-vaçé-käritvaà

mahäbhärate çré-bhagavad-väkyam

åëam etat pravåddhaà me hådayän näpasarpatiyad govindeti cukroça kåñëä mäà düra-väsinaà

atha-now; çré-bhagavat-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; vaçé-käritvam-bringing under control; mahäbhärate-in trhe Mahäbhärata; çré-bhagavad-väkyam-the words of ther Supreme Personality of Godhead; åëam-debt; etat-this;

pravåddham-increased; me-of Me; hådayän-the heart; na-not; apasarpati-leaves; yat-what; govinda-Govinda!; itithus; cukroça-cries out; kåñëä-Draupadé; mäm-Me; düra-väsinam-far away.

By Chanting the Holy Names One Conquers the Supreme Personality of Godhead

In the Mahäbhärata, the Supreme Personality of Godhead explains:

"Even though I was far away, when Draupadé cried out, `O Govinda!' a great debt entered My heart and refused to leave."

Text 446

ädi-puräëe çré-kåñëärjuna-samväde

gatvä ca mama nämäni nartayen mama sannidhauidaà bravémi te satyaà kréto 'haà tena cärjuna

ädi-puräëe-in the Adi Puräëa; çré-kåñëärjuna-samväde-in a conversation of Lord Kåñëa and Arjuna; gatvä-going; ca-and; mama-My; nämäni-names; nartayet-cause to dance; mama-Me; sannidhau-near; idam-this; bravémi-I say; te-to you; satyam-the truth; krétaù-purchased; aham-I am; tena-by him; ca-and; arjuna-O Arjuna.

In the Adi Puräëa, Lord Kåñëa tells Arjuna:

"O Arjuna, I tell you the truth: He purchases Me who makes My name dance on his tongue.

Text 447

gatvä ca mama nämäni rudanti mama sannidhauteñäm ahaà parikréto nänya-kréto janärdanaù

gatvä-going; ca-and; mama-My; nämäni-names; rudanti-calls; mama-of Me; sannidhau-in the presence; teñäm-of them; aham-I; parikrétaù-purchased; na-and; anya-in another way; krétaù-purchased; janärdanaù-Lord Kåñëa.

"He purchases Me who calls out My name. There is no other price to purchase Me."

Text 448

evaà çrutvä ca mama nämäni. ity-ädi.

evam-thus; çrutvä-hearing; ca-and; mama-My; nämäni-names; ity-ädi-in the passage beginning with these words.

The Lord also says:

"He purchases me who hears My names."

Text 449

viñëu-dharme prahlädena

jitaà tena jitaà tena jitaà teneti niçcitamjihvägre vartate yasya harir ity akñara-dvayam

viñëu-dharme-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa; prahlädena-by Prahläda Mahäräja; jitam-conquered; tena-by him; jitam-conquered; tena-by him; jitam-conquered; tena-by him; iti-thus; niçcitam-indeed; jihvä-of the tongue; agre-on the tip; vartate-stays; yasya-of whom; hariù-ha-ri; iti-thus; akñara-dvayam-the two syllables.

In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Prahläda Mahäräja proclaims:

"He is conquered! He is conquered! He is conquered! Lord Kåñëa is conquered by one who keeps the two syllables Ha-ri on the tip of his tongue."

Text 450

svataù parama-puruñärthatvaà

skände käçé-khaëòe pädme ca vaékñakha-mähätmye

idam eva hi maìgalyaà etad eva dhanärjanamjévitasya phalaà caitad yad dämodara-kértanam

svataù-itself; parama-puruñärthatvam-the supreme goal of life; skände-in the Saknda Puräëa; käçé-khaëòe-in the Kasi-khanda; pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; ca-and; vaiçäkha-mähätmye-in the Vaiçäkha-mähätmya; idam-this; eva-indeed; hi-certainly; maìgalyam-auspiciousness; etat-this; eva-indeed; dhanärjanam-wealth; jévitasya-of life; phalam-the result; ca-and; etat-this; yat-what; dämodara-kértanam-chanting the holy names of Lord Kåñëa.

Chanting the Holy Name Is the Supreme Goal of Life

In the Skanda Puräëa Käçé-khaëòa, and in the Padma Puräëa Vaiçäkha-mähätmya it is said:

"Chanting Lord Dämodara's holy names is the supreme auspiciousness, the supreme wealth, the supreme goal of life."

Text 451

prabhäsa-khaëòe

madhura-madhuram etaà maìgalaà maìgalanaà sakala-nigama-vallé-sat-phalaà cit-svarüpamsakåd api parigétaà çraddhayä helayä vä bhågu-vara nara-mätraà tärayet kåñëa-näma

prabhäsa-khaëòe-in the Prabhäsa-khaëòa; madhura-madhuram-most sweet; etam-thus; maìgalam-auspicious; maìgalanam-of the auspicious; sakala-nigama-vallé-of the vine of all the Vedas; sat-phalam-the transcendental fruit; cit-svarüpam-spiritual; sakåt-once; api-even; parigétam-chanted; çraddhayä-with faith; helayä-with contempt; vä-or; bhågu-vara-O best of the Bhrgus; nara-mätram-a person; tärayet-delivers; kåñëa-näma-the name of Lord Kåñëa.

In the Prabhäsa-khaëòa it is said:

"Lord Kåñëa's name is the sweetest of sweet things, the most auspicious of auspicious things, the transcendental fruit of the vine of all Vedic literature. O best of the Bhågus, chanted even once, either with faith or contempt, it delivers the chanter."

Text 452

viñëu-rahasye viñëu-dharmottare ca

etad eva paraà jïänaà etad eva paraà tapaùetad eva paraà tattvaà väsudevasya kértanam

viñëu-rahasye-in the Viñëu-rahasya; viñëu-dharmottare-in ther Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khanda; ca-and; etat-this; eva-indeed; param-supreme; jïänam-knowledge; etat-this; eva-indeed; param-supreme; tapaù-austerity; etat-this; eva-indeed; param-supreme; tattvam-truth; väsudevasya-of Lord Väsudeva; kértanam-the chanting of the holy names.

In the Viñëu-rahasya and the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, it is said:

"Chanting Lord Väsudeva's holy names is the supreme knowledge, the supreme austerity, the supreme truth."

Text 453

bhakti-prakäreñu sraiñöhyaà

viñëu-cintämaëu çré-çivomä-samväde

aghacchit-smaraëaà viñëor bahv-äyäsena sädhyateauñöha-spandana-mätreëa kértanaà tu tato varam

; çré-çivomä-samväde-in a conversation of Lord Çiva and Goddess Umä; aghacchit-smaraëam-the remembering of Lord Kåñëa; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; bahv-äyäsena-with great endeavor; sädhyate-is attained; auñöha-spandana-mätreëa-simply by moving the lips; kértanam-chanting; tu-indeed; tataù-from that; varam-the best.

Of The Various Activities of Devotional Service, Chanting the Holy Name is the Best

In the Viñëu-cintämaëi, Lord Çiva tells Goddess Umä:

"With a great struggle it is possible to meditate on Lord Kåñëa. However, simply by moving the lips one can easily chant Lord Kåñëa's holy name. For this reason chanting the Lord's name is more effective than trying to meditate on Him."

Text 454

anyatra ca

yena janma-çataiù pürvaà väsudevaù samarcitaùtan-mukhe hari-nämäni sadä tiñöhanti bhärata

anyatra-in another place; ca-and; yena-by one whom; janma-çataiù-in a hundred births; pürvam-before; väsudevaù-Lord Väsudeva; samarcitaù-worshiped; tan-mukhe-in his mouth; hari-nämäni-the names of Lord Kåñëa; sadä-always; tiñöhanti-stay; bhärata-O descendent of Bharata.


"O descendent of Bharata, only in the mouth of one who in a hundred pervious births worshiped the Lord will the holy names of Lord Kåñëa always stay."

Text 455

viçeñataù kalau rahasye

yad abhyarcya harià bhaktyä kåte kratu-çatair apiphalaà präpnoty avikalaà kalau govinda-kértanät

viçeñataù-specifically; kalau-in the kali-yuga; rahasye-in trhe Viñëu-rahasya; yat-what; abhyarcya-worshiping; harim-Lord Kåñëa; bhaktyä-with devotion; kåte-in Satya-yuga; kratu-çataiù-with a hundred yajnas; api-even; phalam-the result; präpnoti-attains; avikalam-complete; kalau-in kali-yuga; govinda-kértanät-by chanting the holy names of Lord Govinda.

This is Especially True in the Kali-yuga


"the same result obtained in the Satya-yuga by worshiping the Lord with a hundred yajïas is obtained in the Kali-yuga simply by chanting Lord Govinda's holy names."

Text 456

viñëu-puräëe

dhyäyan kåte yajan yajïais tretäyäà dväpare 'rcayanyad äpnoti tad äpnoti kalau saìkértya keçavam

viñëu-puräëe-in the Viñëu Puräëa; dhyäyan-meditating; kåte-in the Satya-yuga; yajan-worshiping; yajïaiù-with the performance of great sacrifices; tretäyäm-in the Treta-yuga; dväpare-in the Dvapara-yuga; arcayan-worshiping the lotus feet; yat-whatever; äpnoti-is achieved; tat-that; äpnoti-is achieved; kalau-in the age of Kali; saìkértya-simply by chanting; keçavam-the pastimes and qualities of Lord Keçava.

In the Viñëu Puräëa (6.2.17) it is said:

"Whatever is achieved by meditation in Satya-yuga, by the performance of yajïa in Tretä-yuga, or by the worship of Kåñëa's lotus feet in Dväpara-yuga, is also obtained in the age of Kali simply by chanting and glorifying Lord Keçava."*

Text 457

dvädaça-skandhe

kåte yad dhyäyato viñëuà tretäyäà yajato makhaiùdväpare paricaryäyäà kalau tad dhari-kértanät

dvädaça-skandhe-in the Twelfth canto; kåte-in the Satya-yuga; yat-which; dhyäyataù-from meditation; viñëum-on Lord Viñëu; tretäyäm-in the Treta-yuga; yajataù-from worshiping; makhaiù-by performing sacrifices; dväpare-in trhe age of Dvapara; paricaryäyäm-by worshiping the lotus feet of Lord Kåñëa; kalau-in the age of Kali; tat-that same result (can be achieved); hari-kértanät-simply by chanting the Hare Kåñëa mahä-mantra.


"Whatever result was obtained in Satya-yuga by meditating on Viñëu, in Tretä-yuga by performing sacrifices, and in Dväpara-

Text 458

ekädaçe

kåñëa-varëaà tviñäkåñëaà saìgopäìgästra-pärñadamyajïaiù saìkértana-präyair yajanti hi su-medhasaù

ekädaçe-in the Eleventh Canto; kåñëa-varëam- repeating the syllables Kåñëa; tviñä-with a luster; akåñëam-not black

(golden); sa-aìga-with associates; upäìga-servitors; astra-weapons; pärñadam-confidential companions; yajïaiù-by sacrifice; saìkértana-präyaiù-consisting chiefly of congregational chanting; yajanti-they worship; hi-certainly; su-medhasaù-intelligent persons.


"In the age of Kali, intelligent persons perform congregational chanting to worship the incarnation of Godhead who constantly sings the name of Kåñëa. Although His complexion is not blackish, He is Kåñëa Himself. He is accompanied by His associates, servants, weapons, and confidential companions."*

Text 459

skände ca

mahä-bhagavatä nityaà kalau kurvanti kértanam

skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; ca-and; mahä-bhagavatä-great devotees; nityam-always; kalau-in kali-yuga; kurvanti-perform; kértanam-chanting.


"In the Kali-yuga, great devotees always chant the Lord's holy names."

Text 460

båhan-näradéye näradoktaà

harer nämaiva nämaiva nämaiva mama jévanamkalau nästy eva nästy eva nästy eva gatir anyathä

båhan-näradéye-in the Narada Puräëa; näradoktam-the words of Narada Muni; hareù-of Lord Hari; näma-the name; eva-certainly;; eva-certainly; na-not; asti-is; eva -certainly; na-not; asti-is; eva-certainly; gatiù-way; anyathä-another.

In the Närada Puräëa, Çré Närada Muni explains:

"In this age of quarrel and hypocrisy, the holy name of the Lord is my very life. In this age the only means of deliverance is the chanting of the holy names of the Lord. There is no other way. There is no other way. There is no other way."

Text 461

ata evoktaà

sakåd uccärayanty eva harer näma cid-ätmakamphalaà näsya kñamo vaktuà sahasra-vadano vidhiù

ata eva-therefore; uktam-said; sakåt-omce; uccärayanti-chants; eva-indeed; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; näma-the name; cid-ätmakam-spiritual; phalam-result; na-not; asya-of it; kñamaù-able; vaktum-to describe; sahasra-vadanaù-with a thousand mouths; vidhiù-Brahmä.

It is also said:

"Neither Brahmä nor Çeña are able to describe the great result earned by a person who once says the holy name of Lord Kåñëa."

Text 462

padmottara-khaëòe çré-rämäñöottara-çata-näma-stotre çré-çivena

rakärädéni nämäni çåëvato devi jäyateprétir me manaso nityaà räma-näma-viçaìkayä

padmottara-khaëòe-in the Padma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; çré-rämäñöottara-çata-näma-stotre-in the 108 names of Lord Räma; çré-çivena-by Lord Çiva; rakärädéni-beginning with the letter R; nämäni-names; çåëvataù-hearing; devi-O goddess; jäyate-is born; prétiù-love; me-of me; manasaù-of the heart; nityam-eternal; räma-näma-for the name of Lord Räma; viçaìkayä-with worry.

In the Padma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, in the one hundred and eight holy names of Lord Räma, Lord Çiva says:

"O goddess, when it hears the holy name of Lord Räma, which begins with the letter R, my heart becomes so overcome with bli

Text 463

vaiñëava-cintämaëau ca

éço 'haà sarva-jagatäà nämnäà viñëor hi jäpakaùsatyaà satyaà vadämy eña harer näma gatir nåëäm

vaiñëava-cintämaëau-in the Vaiñëava-cintämaëi; ca-and; éçaù-controller; aham-I; sarva-jagatäm-of all the universes; nämnäm-of the names; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; hi-and; jäpakaù-the chanter; satyam-truth; satyam-truth; vadämi-I speak; eña-the; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; näma-name; gatiù-the goal; nåëäm-of human beings.

In the Vaiñëava-cintämaëi it is said:

"Although I am the master of all the worlds, I still chant the holy names of Lord Viñëu. I tell you the truth, the absolute truth: The holy name of Lord Hari is the shelter of everyone."

Text 464

ädi-puräëe ca çré-kåñëärjuna-samväde

çraddhayä helayä näma raöanti mama jantavaùteñäà näma sadä pärtha vartate hådaye mama

ädi-puräëe-in the Adi Puräëa; ca-and; çré-kåñëärjuna-samväde-in a conbversation of Lord Kåñëa and Arjuna; çraddhayä-with faith; helayä-with contempt; näma-the holy name; raöanti-chant; mama-of Me; jantavaù-persons; teñäm-of them; näma-the name; sadä-always; pärtha-O Arjuna; vartate-is; hådaye-in the heart; mama-of Me.

In the Adi Puräëa, Lord Kåñëa tells Arjuna:

"In My heart always stay the names of they who, either with faith or with contempt, chant My name.

Text 465

na näma-sadåçaà jïänaà na näma-sadåçaà vrataà na näma-sadåçaà dhyänaà na näma-sadåçaà phalam

m-like the name; dhyänam-meditation; na-not; näma-sadåçam-like the name; phalam-result.

"No knowledge is like My holy name. No vow is like My holy name. No meditation is like My holy name. No result is like My holy name.

Text 466

na näma-sadåças tyägo na näma-sadåçaù çamaù na näma-sadåçaà puëyaà na näma-sadåçé gatiù

na-not; näma-sadåçaù-like the name; tyägaù-renunciation; na-not; näma-sadåçaù-like the name; çamaù-peace; na-not; näma-sadåçam-like the name; puëyam-piety; na-not; näma-sadåçé-like the name; gatiù-shelter.

"No renunciation is like My holy name. No peace is like My holy name. No piety is like My holy name. No shelter is like My holy name.

Text 467

nämaiva paramä muktir nämaiva paramä gatiùnämaiva paramä çäntir nämaiva paramä sthitù

nämaiva paramä muktir nämaiva paramä gatiù nämaiva paramä çäntir nämaiva paramä sthitù.

My holy name is the supreme liberation. My holy name is the supreme shelter. My holy name is the supreme peace. My holy name is the supreme abode.

Text 468

nämaiva paramä bhaktir nämaiva paramä matiùnämaiva paramä prétir nämaiva paramä småtiù

näma-name; eva-indeed; paramä-supreme; bhaktiù-devotion; näma-name; eva-indeed; paramä-supreme; matiù-philosophy; näma-name; eva-indeed; paramä-supreme; prétiù-happiness; näma-name; eva-indeed; paramä-supreme; småtiù-meditation.

"My holy name is the supreme devotion. My holy name is the supreme philosophy. My holy name is the supreme happiness. My holy name is the supreme meditation.

Text 469

nämaiva käraëaà jantor nämaiva prabhur eva canämaiva paramärädhyo nämaiva paramo guruù

näma-the name; eva-indeed; käraëam-the cause; jantor -of the living entity; näma-the name; eva-indeed; prabhuù-the master; eva-indeed; ca-and; näma-thr name; eva-indeed; parama-the supreme; ärädhyaù-object of worship; näma-the name; eva-indeed; paramaù-the supreme; guruù-spiritual master.

"My holy name is the father of all living entities. My holy name is the supreme master. My holy name is the supreme object of worship. My holy name is the supreme teacher."

Text 470

kià ca

näma-yuktän janän dåñöva snigdho bhavati yo naraùsa yäti paramaà sthänaà viñëunä saha modate

kià ca-furthermore; näma-yuktän-chanting the holy name; janän-people; dåñöva-seeing; snigdhaù-happy; bhavati-become; yaù-one who; naraù-a person; sa-he; yäti-goes; paramam-to the supreme; sthänam-abode; viñëunä-Lord Viñëu; saha-with; modate-enjoys.

Lord Kåñëa further explains:

"A person who feels happy when he sees others chant My holy name goes to the supreme abode and enjoys with Lord Viñëu.

Text 471

tasmän nämäni kaunteya bhajasva dåòha-mänasaùnäma-yuktaù priyo 'smäkaà näma-yukto bhavärjuna

tasmän-therefore; nämäni-the names; kaunteya-O Arjuna; bhajasva-worship; dåòha-mänasaù-with concentration; näma-yuktaù-chanting the name; priyaù-pleased; asmäkam-of them; näma-yuktaù-chanting the name; bhava-become; arjuna-O Arjuna.

"For these reasons, O Arjuna, you should worship My holy names. Chant My holy names and become friends with they who chant My names."

Text 472

atha çré-bhagavan-näma japasya smaraëasya caçravaëasyäpi mähätmyaà éñäd bhedäd vilikhyate

atha-now; çré-bhagavan-näma-the holy name of the Lord; japasya-of chanting; smaraëasya-of remembering; ca-and; çravaëasya-of hearing; api-also; mähätmyam-the glories; éñät-a little; bhedät-with divisions; vilikhyate-is written.

Now I will briefly write write about the glories of japa-chanting of the holy name and of hearing and remembering the holy name.

Text 473

viñëu-rahasye çré-bhagavad-uktau

satyaà bravémi manujäù svayam ürdhva-bahur yo mäà mukunda narasiàha janärdanetijévan japaty anu-dinaà maraëe åëéva päsäëa-käñöha-sadåçäya dadyämy abhéñöam

viñëu-rahasye-in the Viñëu-rahasya; çré-bhagavad-uktau-in the statement of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; satyam-the truth; bravémi-I say; manujäù-O people; svayam-personally; ürdhva-bahuù-with arms raised; yaù-one who; mäm-Me; mukunda-O Mukunda; narasiàha-O Nåsiàha; janärdana-O Janärdana; iti-thus; jévan-while living; japati-chants japa; anu-dinam-every day; maraëe-in death; åëé-a debtor; iva-like; päsäëa-a stone; käñöha-or wood; sadåçäya-like; dadyämi-I give; abhéñöam-the desire.

In the Viñëu-rahasya, the Supreme Personality of Godhead explains:

"O people, I raise My arms and speak to you the truth. To whoever every day, or at the time of death chants japa, calling to Me, `O Mukunda, O Narasiàha! O Janärdana!' I become a debtor. I fulfill his desires. I give him something that makes all material things seem like a cluster of pebbles or twigs."

Text 474

käçé-khaëòe agnibindu-stutau

näräyaëeti nara-kärëavatäraëeti dämodareti madhuheti catur-bhujetiviçvambhareti virajeti janärdaneti kvästéha janma japatäà kva kåtänta-bhétiù

käçé-khaëòe agnibindu-stutau-in the Käçé-khaëòa, Agnibindu prays: näräyaëa-O Näräyaëa; iti-thus narakärëavatäraëa-rescuing the living entities form the ocean of hellish life; iti-thus; dämodara-O Dämodara; iti-thus; madhuha-killer of Madhu; iti-thus; catur-bhuja-four-armed; iti-thus; viçvambhara-maintianer of the universes; iti-thus; vriraja-pure; iti-thus; kva-where?; asti-is

In the Käçé-khaëòa, Agnibindu prays:

"For one who on japa-beads chants, `Näräyaëa! Narakärëavatäraëa! Dämodara! Madhuha! Catur-bhuja! Viçvambhara! Viraja! Janärdana!' where is the fear of death? Where is the chance for another birth?"

Text 475

pädme vaiçäkha-mähätmye yama-brähmaëa-samväde

väsudeva-japäsaktän api päpa-kåto janännopasarpanti vai vighnä yama-dütäç ca däruëäù

pädme vaiçäkha-mähätmye-in the Padma Puräëa, Vaiçäkha-mähätmya; yama-brähmaëa-samväde-Yamaräja tells a brähmaëa; väsudeva-of Lord Kåñëa; japa-chanting japa; äsaktän-attached; api-also; päpa-kåtaù-sinner; janän-persons; na-not; upasarpanti-approach; vai-indeed; vighnä-obstacles; yama-dütäù-messengers of Yama; ca-and; däruëäù-fearsome.

In the Padma Puräëa, Vaiçäkha-mähätmya, Yamaräja tells a brähmaëa:

"Neither obstacles nor the messengers of Yamaräja will approach even sinners who are attached to chanting Lord Kåñëa's names on japa beads."

Text 476

båhad-vaiñëava-puräëe

kva näka-påñöha-gamanaà punar ävåtti-lakñaëam

kva japo väsudeveti mukti-béjam anuttamam

båhad-vaiñëava-puräëe-in the Viñëu Puräëa; kva-where?; näka-påñöha-gamanam-going to the sky; punaù-again; ävåtti-return; lakñaëam-nature; kva-where?; japaù-japa; väsudeveti-the names of Lord Kåñëa; mukti-béjam-the seed of libreation; anuttamam-peerless.


"What happens to a person who travels to Svargaloka? Eventually he must return to the earth. What happens to a person who on japa beads chants the holy names of Lord Kåñëa? He attains the peerless seed of liberation."

Text 477

çré-näma-smaraëa-mähätmyam

itihäsottame

sväpne 'pi näma-småtir ädi-puàsaù kñayaà karoty ahita-päpa-räçeùprayatnataù kià punar ädi-puàsaù prakértite nämni janärdanasya

çré-näma-smaraëa-mähätmyam-The Glory of Remembering the Holy Name; itihäsottame-in the Itihasottama; sväpne-in dream; api-even; näma-the name; småtiù-remembering; ädi-puàsaù-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; kñayam-destruction; karoti-does; ahita-päpa-räçeù-of a host of sins; prayatnataù-carefully; kim-what?; punaù-again; ädi-puàsaù-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; prakértite-glorified; nämni-in the name; janärdanasya-of Lord Kåñëa.

The Glory of Remembering the Holy Name


"A person who in a dream somehow remembers Lord Kåñëa's holy names destroys a multitude of sins. What, then, is the fate of one who carefully chants Lord Kåñëa's holy names?"

Text 478

laghu-bhägavate

te sabhägyä manuñyeñu kåtärthä nåpa niçcitamsmaranti ye smärayanti harer näma kalau yuge

laghu-bhägavate-in the Laghu-Bhägavata; te-they; sabhägyä-fortunate; manuñyeñu-people; kåtärthä-successful; nåpa-O king; niçcitam-indeed; smaranti-remember; ye-who; smärayanti-cause others to remember; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; näma-the name; kalau yuge-in Kali-yuga.


"O king, they who in Kali-yuga remember Lord Kåñëa's holy names or remind others of them are very fortunate. They have attained the goal of life."

Text 479


prayäëe cäprayäëe ca

yan-näma-smaraëän nåëämsadyo naçyati päpaugho namas tasmai cid-ätmane

pädme devahüti-stutau-in the Padma Puräëa, Devahüti prays:; prayäëe-in death; ca-and; aprayäëe-not in death; ca-and; yan-näma-whose name; smaraëät-by remembering; nåëäm-of the people; sadyaù-at once; naçyati-deastroys; päpaughaù-a flood of sins; namaù-obeisances; tasmai-to Him; cid-ätmane-the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

In the Padma Puräëa, Devahüti prays:

"I offer my respectful obeisances to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. They who at the time of death, or at any other time, remember His holy names destroy a great flood of sins."

Text 480

tatraivottara-khaëòe

man-näma-smaraëäd eva päpinam api satvarammuktir bhavati jantünäà brahmädénäà su-durlabham

tatra-there; eva-indeed; uttara-khaëòe-in the Uttara-khanda; man-näma-smaraëät-by remembering My holt names; eva-indeed; päpinam-sinner; api-even; satvaram-at once; muktiù-liberation; bhavati-is; jantünäm-of the people; brahmädénäm-beginning with Brahma; su-durlabham-rare.

In the Padma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead says:

"By remembering My holy name even sinners at once attain liberation, which Brahmä and the demigods find difficult to attain."

Text 481

brahma-vaivarte

yad-anudhyäna-dävagni- dagdha-karma-tåëaù pumänviçuddhaù paçyati vyaktaà avyaktam api keçavam

brahma-vaivarte-in the Brahma-vaivarta Puräëa; yad-anudhyäna-by meditation on whom; dävagni-by the forest fire; dagdha-burned; karma-of karma; tåëaù-grass; pumän-a person; viçuddhaù-pure; paçyati-sees; vyaktam-manifested; avyaktam-unmanifested; api-even; keçavam-Lord Kåñëa.


åñëa's names, a person sees Lord Kåñëa in manifested and unmanifested forms.

Text 482

tad asya näma jévasya patitasya bhavämbudhauhastävalamba-dänäya pravéëo näparo hareù

tat-that; asya-of Him; näma-the name; jévasya-of the living entity; patitasya-fallen; bhavämbudhau-in the ocean of birth and death; hastävalamba-dänäya-extending a hand; pravéëaù-expert; na-not; aparaù-other; hareù-htan Lord Kåñëa.

"Lord Kåñëa's holy name extends a hand to save the conditioned souls fallen in the ocean of birth and death. No one is

expert like the holy name.

Text 483

jäbäli-saàhitäyäà

harer näma paraà japyaà dhyeyaà geyaà nirantaramkértanéyaà ca bahudhä nirvåtir bahudhecchatä

jäbäli-saàhitäyäm-In the Jäbäli-saàhitä; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; näma-the name; param-supreme; japyam-to be chanted; dhyeyam-to be remembered; geyam-to be sung; nirantaram-always; kértanéyam-to be glorified; ca-and; bahudhä-in many ways; nirvåtiù-happiness; bahudhä-in many ways; icchatä-by one who desires.

In the Jäbäli-saàhitä it is said:

"A person who desires real happiness should again and again sing, remember, glorify, and chant on japa-beads the holy names of Lord Kåñëa."

Text 484

atha çré-bhagavan-näma-mähätmyaà

båhan-näradéye çré-näradoktau

yan-näma-çravaëenäpi mahä-pätakino 'pi yepävanatvaà prapadyante kathaà stoñyämi khinna-dhéù

atha-now; çré-bhagavan-näma-mähätmyam-the glory of the Lord's Holy Names; båhan-näradéye-in the Närada Puräëa; çré-näradoktau-in the words of Çré Närada; yan-näma-çravaëena-by hearing His names; api--also; mahä-pätakinaù-a great sinner; api-even; ye-

The Glory of the Lord's Holy Names

In the Närada Puräëa, Närada Muni explains:

"By hearing Lord Kåñëa's holy names even great sinners become purified. How can a fool like me properly glorify the Lord's holy names?"

Text 485

itihäsottame

çrutaà saìkértitaà väpi harer äçcarya-karmaëaùdahaty enäàsi sarväëi prasaìgät kim u bhaktitaù

itihäsottame-in the Itihäsottama; çrutam-heard; saìkértitam-glorified; vä-or; api-also; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; äçcarya-wonderful; karmaëaù-activities; dahati-burns; enäàsi-sins; sarväëi-all; prasaìgät-by contact; kim-what?; u-indeed; bhaktitaù-from devotion.


"Simply by accidentally touching the hearing and chanting of Lord Kåñëa's wonderful names and pastimes, all sins are

at once burned away. What, then, can be said of they who earnestly glorify the Lord with devotion?"

Text 486

ñañöha-skandhe citraketüktau

na hi bhagavann aghatitam idaà tvad-darçanän nåëäm akhilägha-kñayaùyan-näma-sakåc-chravaëät pukkaço 'pi pramucyate samçärät. iti.

ñañöha-skandhe-in the Sixth Canto; citraketüktau-in the statement of King Citraketu; na-not; hi-indeed; bhagavann-O my Lord; aghatitam-not occurred; idam-this; tvat-of You; darçanät-by seeing; nåëäm-of all human beings; akhila-all; agha-of sins; kñayaù-annihilation; yat-näma-whose name; sakåt-only once; çravaëät-by hearing; pukkaçaù-the lowest class, the candalas; api-also; pramucyate-is delivered samsarat-from the entaglement of material existence; iti-thus.

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (6.16.44) King Citraketu prays:

of seeing You personally, merely by hearing the holy name of Your Lordship only once, even cäëòälas, men of the lowest class, are freed from all material contamination. Under the circumstances, who will not be freed from material contamination simply by seeing You?"*

Text 487

çréman-nämnäà ca sarveñäà mähätmyeñu sameñv apikåñëasyaivävatäreñu viçeñaù ko 'pi kasyacit

çréman-nämnäm-of ther holy names; ca-and; sarveñäm-all; mähätmyeñu-in the glories; sameñv-equal; api-also; kåñëasya-of Lord Kåñëa; eva-indeed; avatäreñu-in the incarnations; viçeñaù-specifically; ko 'pi-something; kasyacit-of something.

All the names of the Supreme Personality of Godhead are equally glorious. However, the names of Lord Kåñëa are especially glorious.

Text 488

atha viçeñataù çré-kåñëävatära-mähätmyaà

brähmaëda-puräëe çré-kåñëäñöottara-çata-näma-mähätmye

sahasra-nämnäà puëyänäà trir ävåttya tu yat phalamekävåttya tu kåñëasya nämaikaà tat prayacchati

atha-now; viçeñataù-specifically; çré-kåñëävatära-mähätmyam-the glories of Lord Kåñëa; brähmaëda-puräëe-in the Brahmanada Puräëa; çré-kåñëäñöottara-çata-näma-mähätmye-in the glories of the 108 names of Lord Kåñëa; sahasra-nämnäm-of one thousand names; puëyänäm-holy; trir ävåttya-by thrice chanting; tu-but; yat-which; phalam-result; ekävåttya-by one repetition; tu-but; kåñëasya-of Lord Kåñëa; näma-holy name; ekam-only one; tat-that result; prayacchati-gives.

The Glories of Lord Kåñëa's Holy Nme

In the Brähmaëda Puräëa, in the description of the glories of Lord Kåñëa's one hundred and eight names, it is said:

"The pious results derived from chanting the thousand holy names of Viñëu three times can be attained by only one repetition of the holy name of Kåñëa.*

Text 489

idaà kiréöé saïjapya jayé päçupatästra-bhäkkåñëasya präëa-bhütaù san kåñëaà särathim äptavän

idam-this; kiréöé-Arjuna, who wears a crown; saïjapya-cahnting japa; jayé-victorious; päçupatästra-bhäk-obtaining the pasupata weapon; kåñëasya-of Lord Kåñëa; präëa-bhütaù-the life-friend; san-being; kåñëam-Lord Kåñëa; särathim-charioteer; äptavän-attained.

"By thus chanting the name of Lord Kåñëa, Arjuna obtained the päçupäta weapon, conquered his enemies, became Kåñëa's life-friend, and made Kåñëa his chariot driver.

Text 490

kim idaà bahunä çaàsan manuñänanda-nirbharaùbrahmänandam aväpyante kåñëa-säyujyam äpnuyät

kim-what?; idam-this; bahunä-more; çaàsan-saying; manuñänanda-nirbharaù-filled with bliss; brahmänandam-spiritual bliss; aväpyante-is attained; kåñëa-säyujyam-liberation as an associate of Lord Kåñëa; äpnuyät-is attained.

"What more can be said? By chanting Lord Kåñëa's holy name one become filled with bliss. One becomes a liberated associate of the Lord."

Text 491

värähe ca çré-mathurä-mähätmye

tatra guhyäni nämäni bhaviñyanti mama priyepuëyäni ca paviträëi saàsära-cchedanäni ca

värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; ca-and; çré-mathurä-mähätmye-in the glories of Mathurä; tatra-there; guhyäni-secret; nämäni-names; bhaviñyanti-will be; mama-of me; priye-O beloved; puëyäni-sacred; ca-and; paviträëi-pire; saàsära-cchedanäni-stopped the repetition of birth and death; ca-and.

In the Varäha Puräëa, in the passage describing the glories of Mathurä, it is said:

"O beloved, now I will tell you of Lord Kåñëa's confidential, sacred, and very pure names, which stop the repetition of birth and death."

Text 492

tatraiva viçeñataù çré-kåñëeti-näma-mähätmyaà

dvärakä-mähätmye prahläda-bali-samväde

atétäù puruñäù sapta bhaviñyäç ca caturdaçanaras tärayate sarvän kalau kåñëeti-kértanät

tatra-there; eva-indeed; viçeñataù-specifically; çré-kåñëeti-näma-mähätmyam-the glories of the Name Kåñëa; dvärakä-of Dvärakä; mähätmye-in the glories; prahläda-bali-samväde-in a conversation of Prahläda and Bali; atétäù-passed; puruñäù-

persons; sapta-seven; bhaviñyäù-will be; ca-and; caturdaça-fourteen; naraù-a person; tärayate-delivers; sarvän-all; kalau-in the age of Kali; kåñëa-Kåñëa; iti-thus; kértanät-by chanting.

The Glories of the Name Kåñëa

In the Dvärakä-mähätmya, in a conevrsation of Prahläda and Bali, it is said:

"In Kali-yuga a person who chants the holy name Kåñëa delivers seven generations of ancestors and fourteen generations of descendants.

Text 493

kåñëa-kåñëeti kåñëeti svapan jägrad vrajaàs tathäyo jalpati kalau nityaà kåñëa-rüpé bhaved dhi saù

kåñëa-kåñëeti kåñëeti-Kåñëa, Kåñëa, Kåñëa; svapan-sleeping; jägrat-waking; vrajaàù-walking; tathä-so; yaù-who; jalpati-chants; kalau-in kali0yuga; nityam-always; kåñëa-rüpé-a form like that of Lord Kåñëa's; bhavet-becomes; hi-indeed; saù-he.

"Sleeping, waking, walking, or in any situation, a person who in Kali-yuga always chants, `Kåñëa! Kåñëa! Kåñëa!' attains a spiritual form like Lord Kåñëa's."

Text 494

brahma-vaivarte

hanan brähmaëam atyantaà kämo vä suräà pibankåñëa-kåñëety aho-rätraà saìkértya çucitäm iyät

brahma-vaivarte-In the Brahma-vaivarta Puräëa; hanan-killing; brähmaëam-a brähmaëa; atyantam-greast; kämaù-voluntary; vä-or; suräm-liquor; piban-drinking; kåñëa-kåñëeti-Kåñëa! Kåñëa!; aho-rätram-day and night; saìkértya-chanting; çucitäm-purity; iyät-attains.


"Even a person who has murdered an exalted brähmaëa or voluntarily drunk liquor will become purified if day and night he chants: Kåñëa! Kåñëa! Kåñëa!"

Text 495

viñëu-dharme

kåñëeti maìgalaà näma yasya väci pravartatebhasmé-bhavanti räjendra mahä-pätaka-koöayaù

viñëu-dharme-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa; kåñëeti-Kåñëa; maìgalam-auspicious; näma-name; yasya-of whom; väci-in the voice; pravartate-is; bhasmé-bhavanti-becomes ashes; räjendra-O great king; mahä-pätaka-koöayaù-many millions of the most terruble sins.


"O great king, many millions of the most terrible sins become at once burned to ashes for a person on whose voice the auspicious word Kåñëa stays."

Text 496

narasiàhe çré-bhagavad-uktau

kåñëa-kåñëeti kåñëeti yo mäà smarati nityaçaùjalaà bhittvä yathä padmaà narakäd uddharämy aham

narasiàhe-in the Narasiàha Puräëa;; çré-bhagavad-uktau-in the words of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; kåñëa-kåñëeti-Kåñëa, Kåñëa; kåñëeti-Kåñëa; yaù-who; mäm-Me; smarati-remembers; nityaçaù-always; jalam-water; bhittvä-cutting; yathä-as; padmam-a lotus; narakät-from hell; uddharämi-I deliver; aham-I.

In the Nåsiàha Puräëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead declares:

"As a growing lotus flower breaks through the water, so I pull up from hell a person who, chanting, `Kåñëa! Kåñëa! Kåñëa!', always remembers Me."

Text 497

gäruòe pädme ca

saàsära-sarpa-sandañöaà nañöa-ceñöaika-bheñajamkåñëeti vaiñëavaà mantraà çrutvä mukto bhaven naraù

gäruòe-in the Garuòa Puräëa; pädme-ijn teh Padma Puräëa; ca-and; saàsära-sarpa-sandañöam-bitten by the snake of birth and death; nañöa-destroyed; ceñöa-actions; eka-one; bheñajam-cure; kåñëeti-Kåñëa; vaiñëavam-of Lord Viñëu; mantram-mantra; çrutvä-hearing; muktaù-liberated; bhavet-becomes; naraù-a person.

In both the Garuòa Puräëa and the Padma Puräëa it is said:

"For a person bitten by the snake of repeated birth and death, the word Kåñëa is the perfect medicine. When one hears the Kåñëa-mantra he becomes cured at once."

Text 498

prabhäsa-puräëe närada-kuçadhvaja-samväde çré-bhagavad-uktau

nämnäà mukhyataraà näma kåñëäkhyaà me parantapapräyaçcittam açeñänäà päpänäà mocakaà param

prabhäsa-puräëe närada-kuçadhvaja-samväde çré-bhagavad-uktau-in the Prabhäsa Puräëa, during a conversation between Närada and Kuçadhvaja, the Supreme Personality of Godhead explains; nämnäm-of names; mukhyataram-the most important; näma-name; kåñëäkhyam-the name Kåñëa; me-of Me; parantapa-O mighty one; präyaçcittam-atonement; açeñänäm-of all; päpänäm-sins; mocakam-deliverer; param-great.

In the Prabhäsa Puräëa, during a conversation between Närada and Kuçadhvaja, the Supreme Personality of Godhead explains:

"O powerful one, My most important name is Kåñëa. This name is the atonement for all sins and the the supreme granter of liberation."

Text 499

pädme

yatra yatra sthito väpi kåñëa-kåñëeti kértayetsarva-päpa-viçuddhätmä sa gacchet paramäà gatim

pädme-in thePadma Puräëa; yatra yatra-wherever; sthitaù-situated; vä-or; api-also; kåñëa-kåñëeti-Kåñëa! Kåñëa!; kértayet-chants; sarva-all; päpa-sins; viçuddha-pure; ätmä-at heart; sa-he; gacchet-attains; paramäm-supreme; gatim-destination.


"A person who everywhere chants, `Kåñëa! Kåñëa!' becomes pure at heart. He attains the supreme destination."

Text 500

viñëu-dharmottare çré-kåñëa-sahasra-näma-stotre

ballavé-känta kià tais tair upäyaiù kåñëa-näma tekintu jihvägraga

Fifteenth Vilasa

Text 246

atha bhädra-kåtyam

bhädre bhagavato janma- dine käryo mahotsavaùviçeñeëa mahä-püjäà vrata-pürëena vaiñëavaiù

atha-now; bhädra-kåtyam-the duties of Bhadra; bhädre-in Bhadra; bhagavataù-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; janma-of ther birth; dine-the day; käryaù-to be done; mahotsavaù-great festival; viçeñeëa-specifically; mahä-püjäm-great worship; vrata-pürëena-with a a vow fulfilled; vaiñëavaiù-by the Vaiñëavas.

Duties in the Month of Bhädra (August-September)

In the month of Bhädra the Vaiñëavas should celebrate a great festival on the birthday of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. They should perform great worship and fulfill a vow.

Text 247

atha janmäñöamé-vratam

sarvair avaçyaà kartavyaà janmäñöamé-vrataà naraiùnityatvät päpa-häritvät sarvärtha-präpanäd api

atha-now; janmäñöamé-vratam-the vow of Janmäñöamé; sarvaiù-by all; avaçyam-compulsory; kartavyam-to be done; janmäñöamé-vratam-the vow of Janmäñöamé; naraiù-by people; nityatvät-because of regularity; päpa-häritvät-because of removing sins; sarvärtha-all benefirs; präpanät-because of attainment; api-also.

The Vow of Janmäñöamé

The vow of Janmäñöamé is compulsory for everyone. This is because it is a regular observance, it removes sins, and it grants all benefits.

Text 248

atha çré-janmäñöamé-vratotpattiù

bhaviñyottare çré-yudhiñöhira uväca

janmäñöamé-vrataà brühi vistäreëa mamäcyutakasmin käle samutpannaà kià puëyaà ko vidhiù småtaù

atha-now; çré-janmäñöamé-vratotpattiù-the creation of the Janmäñöamé vow; bhaviñyottare-in the Bhavisya Purana, Uttara-khanda; çré-yudhiñöhira uväca-Çré Yudhiñöhira said; janmäñöamé-vratam-the vow of Janmäñöamé; brühi-please tell; vistäreëa-elaborately; mama-to me; acyuta-O infallible Lord; kasmin-at what; käle-time; samutpannam-manifested; kim-what; puëyam-piety; kaù-what; vidhiù-rules; småtaù-considered.

The Origin of Çré Janmäñöamé

In the Bhaviñya Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, Çré Yudhiñöhira says:

O infallible Lord, please describe to me the vow of Janmäñöamé in great detail. When did this vow begin? What piety does it grant? How is it performed?

Text 249

çré-kåñëa uväca

hate kaàsäsure duñöe mathuräyäà yudhiñöhiradevaké mäà pariñvajya kåtvotsaìge ruroda ha

çré-kåñëa uväca-Çré Kåñëa said; hate-killed ; kaàsäsure-the demon Kamsa; duñöe-wicked; mathuräyäm-in Mathura; yudhiñöhira-O Yudhiñöhira; devaké-Devaki; mäm-Me; pariñvajya-embracing; kåtvä-placing; utsaìge-on the lap; ruroda-wept; ha-indeed.

Çré Kåñëa said: O Yudhiñöhira, after I had killed the demon Kaàsa, Devaké embraced Me, placed Me on her lap, and wept.

Text 250

tatraiva raìga-väöe sä maïcärüòhä janotsavemalla-yuddhe purä våtte saàstutä kukurändhakaiù

tatra-there; eva-indeed; raìga-väte--in teh arena; sä-she; maïca-on the grandstand; ärüòhä-high; janotsave--in the

festival; malla-yuddhe-in the wrestling; purä-before; våtte-done; saàstutä-praised; kukurändhakaiù-by the Kukuras and Andhakas.

When the wrestling was over she stood up in the grandstand. The Kukuras and Andhakas praised her.

Text 251

svajanair bahubhiù snigdhais teñäà strébhiù samävåtävasudevo 'pi tatraiva vatsalyät praruroda me samägamya pariñvajya putra putrety uväca ha

svajanaiù-own people; bahubhiù-many; snigdhaiù-affectionate; teñäm-of them; strébhiù-by the women; samävåtä-surrounded; vasudevaù-Vasudeva; api-also; tatra-there; eva-indeed; vatsalyät-out of parental affection; praruroda-wept; me-Me; samägamya-approaching; pariñvajya-embracing; putra-son!; putra-son!; iti-thus; uväca-said; ha-indeed;.

Her affectionate kinsmen and their wives surrounded her. Vasudeva came, embraced me, said, "Son! Son!" and wept with a father's love.

Text 252

sa gadgada-svaro dino bäñpa-paryäkulekñaëaùbalabhädraà ca mäà caiva pariñvajyedam abravét

sa-he; gadgada-svaraù-his voice choked up; dinaù-poor; bäñpa-paryäkulekñaëaù-his eyes filled with tears; balabhädram-Balaräma; ca-and; mäm-Me; ca-and; eva-indeed; pariñvajya-embracing; idam-this; abravét-said.

His eyes filled with tears, he embraced Balaräma and Me. In a choked voice he said:

Text 253

adya me saphalaà janma jévitaà ca sujévitamyadu-bhäbhyäà sutäbhyäà me samudbhütaù samägamaù

adya-today; me-of me; saphalam-fruitful; janma-birth; jévitam-lived; ca-and; sujévitam-well lived; yadu-bhäbhyäm-the two lights of the Yadus; sutäbhyäm-with the sons; me-of me; samudbhütaù-born; samägamaù-met.

Today my birth has born fruit. Today my life is lived well. Now I have met my sons, the two glories of the Yadu dynasty.

Text 254

evaà harñeëa dam-patyor håñöaà sarvaà tadä nåpapraëipatya janäù sarve mäm ücus te praharñitäù

evam-thus; harñena-with joy; dam-patyoù-of the husband and wife; håñöam-happy; sarvam-all; tadä-then; nåpa-O king; praëipatya-bowing down; janäù-people; sarve-all; mäm-to Me; ücuù-said; te-they; praharñitäù-happy.

O king, seeing My parents' happiness, everyone else became happy. Bowing before Me, everyone spoke these words:

Text 255

adya praharño hy asmäkaà adya jäto janärdanaùadya malläìga-yuddhena duñöaù kaàso nipätitaù

adya-today; praharñaù-happiness; hi-indeed; asmäkam-of us; adya-today; jätaù-born; janärdanaù-Kåñëa; adya-today; malläìga-yuddhena-in the wrestling battle; duñöaù-wicked; kaàsaù-Kamsa; nipätitaù-fallen.

Today we are happy. Today Kåñëa is born. Today the demon Kaàsa has fallen in a wrestling match.

Text 256

evaà mahotsavaà dåñövä samäje madhusüdanaprasädaù kriyatäm asya lokasyänyo 'pi çéghrataù

evam-thus; mahotsavam-a great festival; dåñövä-seeing; samäje-in the assembly; madhusüdana-O Kåñëa; prasädaù-mercy; kriyatäm-should be done; asya-of him; lokasya-of the people; anyaù-another; api-also; çéghrataù-quickly.

O Lord Kåñëa, please glance at the people in this festival. Please give Your mercy to them and to others also.

Text 257

yasmin dine prasüyeta devaké tväà janärdanatad-dinaà dehi vaikuëöha kurmas te tatra cotsavamsamyag-bhakti-präpannänäà prasädaà kuru keçava

yasmin-in which; dine-day; prasüyeta-gave birth; devaké-Devcaké; tväm-to You; janärdana-O Kåñëa; tad-dinam-that day; dehi-please give; vaikuëöha-O Lord who destroys all sufferings; kurmaù-we will do; te-for You; tatra-there; ca-and; utsavam-a festival; samyag-bhakti-präpannänäm-of Your sincere devotees; prasädam-mercy; kuru-please do; keçava-O Kåñëa.

O Kåñëa, O Lord who removes all sufferings, please give to us the day when Devaké gave birth to You. We will celebrate a festival in Your honor. O Kåñëa, please be kind to Your sincere devotees.

Text 258

evam ukte janaughena vasudevo 'pi vismitaùvilokya balabhädraà taà samprahåñöa-tanüruhaù

evam-thus; ukte-spoken; janaughena-by the multitude of people; vasudevaù-Vasudeva; api-also; vismitaù-surprised; vilokya-seeing; balabhädram-Balaräma; tam-Him; samprahåñöa-tanüruhaù-the hairs of his body erect in ecstasy.

Filled with wonder to hear the people speak these words, and the hairs of his body now erect in ecstasy, Vasudeva glanced at Balaräma and said:

Text 259

evam astv iti lokänäà kathayasva yathä-tatham

evam-so; astv-be it; iti-thus; lokänäà -of the people; kathayasva-please tell; yathä-tatham-as it is.

It should be so. Please tell the people.

Text 260

tatas täta-samädeçän mayä janmäñöamé-vratammathuräyäà janaughaya pärtha samyak prakäçitam

tataù-then; täta-of father; samädeçät-because of the instruction; mayä-by Me; janmäñöamé-vratam-Janmäñöamé; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; janaughäya-to the people; pärtha-O son of Påthä; samyak-properly; prakäçitam-revealed.

O son of Påthä, then, on My father's order, I revealed the vow of Janmäñöamé to the people of Mathurä.

Text 261

pauräç ca taj-janma-dinaà varñe garbhäñöame gatepunar janmäñöaméà lokäù kurvantu brähmaëädayaù kñatriyä vaiçya-jätéyäù çüdrä ye 'nye 'pi dharmiëaù

pauräù-the people of the city; ca-and; taj-janma-dinam-on the borthday; varñe-in the year; garbhäñöame-the eighth; gate-had come; punaù-again; janmäñöamém-Janmäñöamé; lokäù-the people; kurvantu-should do; brähmaëädayaù-beginning with the brahmanas; kñatriyä-the ksatriyas; vaiçya-jätéyäù-the vaisyas; çüdrä-the sudras; ye-who; anye-others; api-also; dharmiëaù-pious.

The brähmaëas, kñatriyas, vaiçyas, çüdras, and all others who are pious, from the age of eight years and older, should observe this vow of Janmäñöamé.

Çréla Sanätana Gosvämé comments:

The same is true for observing ekädaçé. In the scriptures it is said:

añöa-varñädhiko bälaù

"Children eight years and older should also observe ekädaçé."

Text 262

siàha-räçi-gate sürye gagane jaladägame

mäsi bhädra-pade 'ñöamyäà kåñëa-pakñe 'rdha-rätrake

çaçäìke våña-räçi-sthe präjäpatyarkña-samyutevasudevena devakyäà ahaà jäto janaù svayam

siàha-räçi-gate-in Leo; sürye-when the sun; gagane-in the sky; jalada-of clouds; ägame-at the arrival; mäsi-in the month; bhädra-pade-of Bhadra; añöamyäm-on the añöamé; kåñëa-pakñe-on the dark fortnight; ardha-rätrake-in the middle of the night; çaçäìke-the moon; våña-räçi-sthe-in Taurus; präjäpatyarkña-samyute-with the star Rohiëé; vasudevena-by Vasudeva; devakyäm-in Devaké; aham-I; jätaù-born; janäù-O people; svayam-personally.

O people, during the monsoon season, on the añöamé of the dark fortnight (kåñëa-pakña) of the month of Bhädra, when the sun was in Leo and the moon and the star Rohiëé were both in Taurus, in the middle of the night I was born as the son of Vasudeva and Devaké.

Text 264

evam etat samäkhyätaà loke janmäñöamé-vratambhagavatyäç ca tatraiva kurudhvaà su-mahotsavaà mathuräyäà tataù paçcäl loke khyätià gamiñyati

evam-thus; etat-that; samäkhyätam-called; loke-in the world janmäñöamé-vratam-the vow of Janmäñöamé; bhagavatyäù-of the goddess; ca-also; tatra-there; eva-indeed; kurudhvam-should do; su-mahotsavam-a great festival; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; tataù-then; paçcät-after; loke-in the world; khyätim-fame; gamiñyati-will go.

This day will be known in this world as the vow of Janmäñöamé. On this day celebrate a great festival honoring both Me and the goddess. First this festival will be celebrated in Mathurä. Later it will become famous in the whole world.


The word "bhagavatyäù" (goddess) here refers to Devaké. It may also refer to Durgä.

Text 265

ity äkarëya yathäkhyätaà tathä lokair anuñöhitamçäntir astu sukhaà cästu lokäù santu nirämayäù. iti.

iti-thus; äkarëya-hearing; yathäkhyätam-as called; tathä-so; lokaiù-by the people; anuñöhitam-established; çäntiù-peace; astu-may be; sukham-happiness; ca-also; ästu-may be; lokäù-people; santu-may be; nirämayäù.-free of disease; iti.-thus.

Hearing of this festival, the people began to observe it. May there be peace amongst them. May they be happy. May they have good health.

Text 266

nityatvaà ca paraà tasya bhagavat-préëanän matamvidhi-väkya-viçeñäc ca- käraëe pratyaväyataù

nityatvam-regularity; ca-and; param-then; tasya-of that; bhagavat-préëanät-because of pleasing the Lord; matam-considered; vidhi-method; väkya-statement; viçeñät-specifically; ca-and; akäraëe-in non-performance; pratyaväyataù-because of obstacles.

This festival should be observed every year, for that is pleasing to the Lord. The scriptures also describe some offenses in its observance.

Text 267

atha çré-janmäñöamé-vrata-nityatvam

tatra çré-bhagavat-préëanaà vidhiç ca skände

prahlädädyaiç ca bhü-pälaiù kåtä janmäñöamé çubhäçraddhayä parayä viñëoù prétaye kåñëa-vallabhä

atha-now; çré-janmäñöamé-vrata-nityatvam.-the regular performance of this vow; tatra-there; çré-bhagavat-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; préëanam-pleasing; vidhiù-method; ca-and; skände-in the Skanda Purana; prahlädädyaiù-beginning with Prahlada; ca-and; bhü-pälaiù-by kings; kåtä-done; janmäñöamé-Janmäñöamé; çubhä-auspicious; çraddhayä-with faith; parayä-great; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; prétaye-for the pleasure; kåñëa-vallabhä-dear to Lord Kåñëa.

Çré Janmäñöamé Should Be Observed Every Year

The Observance of Çré Janmäñöamé Is Pleasing to the Supreme Personality of Godhead


Prahläda and other great kings very faithfully observe the auspicious vow of Janmäñöamé, which is dear to Lord Kåñëa. Their purpose is to please Lord Viñëu,

Text 268

kià ca

präjäpatyarkña-samyuktä çrävaëasyäsitäñöamévarñe varñe tu kartavyä tuñöy-arthaà cakra-päëinaù

kià ca-furthermore; präjäpatyarkña-samyuktä-with the star Rohini; çrävaëasya-of Sravana; asita-dark; añöamé-astami; varñe-in year; varñe-after year; tu-indeed; kartavyä-to be done; tuñöy-artham-for the pleasure; cakra-päëinaù-of Lord Kåñëa, who holds the cakra in His hand.

It is also said:

To please Lord Kåñëa, who holds a cakra in His hand, the añöamé of the dark fortnight in the month of Çrävaëa, when the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon, should be observed year after year.

Text 269

athäkaraëa-pratyaväye

prathamaà bhojane pratyaväyaù

çré-viñëu-rahasye brahma-närada-samväde

çüdrännena tu yat päpaà çava-hasta-stha-bhojanetat päpaà labhate pumbhir jayantyäà bhojane kåte

atha-now; akaraëa-pratyaväye-obstacles; prathamam-first; bhojane-in eating; pratyaväyaù-obstacles; çré-viñëu-rahasye-in Çré Viñëu-rahasya; brahma-närada-samväde-in a conversdation of Brahma and Narada; çüdra-of sudras; annena-by food; tu-but; yat-what; päpam-sin; çava-of a corpse; hasta-in the hand; stha-situated; bhojane-in food; tat-that; päpam-sin; labhyate-is attained; pumbhiù-by the people; jayantyäm-on Jayanti; bhojane-eating; kåte-done.

Offenses in This Vow

First, the Offense of Eating

In the Çré Viñëu-rahasya, Brahmä tells Närada:

By eating on Jayanté one commits a sin equal to the sin of eating a çüdra's food or eating the food in the hand of a corpse.

Text 270

gåhdhra-mäàsaà kharaà käkaà syenaà vä muni-sattamamäàsaà ca dvipadäà bhuktaà bhuktaà janmäñöamé-dine

gåhdhra-of a vulture; mäàsam-flesh; kharam-heron; käkam-crow; syenam-hawk; vä-or; muni-sattama-O best of sages; mäàsam-flesh; ca-and; dvipadäm-of two-legged creatures; bhuktam-eated; bhuktam-eaten; janmäñöamé-dine-on Janmäñöamé day.

A person who eats on Janmäñöamé day commits the sin of eating the flesh of a vulture, heron, crow, or hawk, or the flesh of a human being.

Text 271

janmäñöamé-dine präpte yena bhuktaà dvijottamatrailokya-sambhavaà päpaà bhuktam eva na saàçayaù

janmäñöamé-dine-on Janmäñöamé day; präpte-attained; yena-by whom; bhuktam-eaten; dvijottama-O best of brahmanas; trailokya-in the three worlds; sambhavam-born; päpam-sin; bhuktam-eaten; eva-indeed; na-not; saàçayaù-doubt.

O best of brähmaëas, one who eats on Janmäñöamé day commits all the sins in the three worlds. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 272

kià ca

jayanté-väsare präpte karoty udara-puräëampéòyate tila-mätraà tu yama-dütaiù kalevaram

is tortured; tila-mätram-only a sesamum seed; tu-indeed; yama-dütaiù-by the messengers of Yama; kalevaram-the body.

It is also said:

A person who fills his belly in the Jayanté day is tortured by the messengers of Yamaräja. They will not allow him to eat anything more than a single sesamum seed.

Text 273

yo bhuìkte yo vimüòhätmä jayanté-väsare nåpana tasya narakottäro dvädaçéà ca prakurvataù

yaù-who; bhuìkte-eats; yaù-who; vimüòhätmä-bewildered; jayanté-väsare-in Jayanti day; nåpa-O king; na-not; tasya-of him; naraka-from hell; uttäraù-deliverance; dvädaçém-dvadasi; ca-and; prakurvataù-doing.

O king, a fool who eats on the Jayanté day will not easily be delivered from hell, even if he observes the vow of dvädaçé.

Text 274

atétänägataà tena kulam ekottaraà çatampatitaà narake ghore bhuïjatä kåñëa-väsare

atéta-passed; anägatam-not yet arrived; tena-by him; kulam-family; eka-une; uttaram-more; çatam-hundred; patitam-fallen; narake-into hell; ghore-horrible; bhuïjatä-eating; kåñëa-väsare-on Lord Kåñëa's day.

A person who eats on Lord Kåñëa's holy day pushes into a horrible hell a hundred and one generations of his relatives past and yet to come.

Text 275

athopaväsa-pürvaka-püjä-viçeña-mahotsavädi-vrata-tyäga-pratyaväyaù

tatraiva

ye na kurvanti jänantaù kåñëa-janmäñöamé-vratamte bhavanti mahä-präjïa vyälä mahati känane

atha-now; upaväsa-fasting; pürvaka-first; püjä-worship; viçeña-specific; mahotsava-great festuval; ädi-beginning with; vrata-vow; tyäga-abandoning; pratyaväyaù-offense; tatra-there; eva-indeed; ye-who; na-not; kurvanti-do; jänantaù-knowing; kåñëa-janmäñöamé-vratam-the vow of Kåñëa Janmäñöamé; te-they; bhavanti-are; mahä-präjïa-O wise one; vyälä-beasts of prey; mahati-in the great; känane-jungle.

The Offense of Failing to Follow the Vow by Fasting, Worshiping, Observing a Great Festival, and Performing Other Duties

In the Çré Viñëu-rahasya it is said:

O wise sage, they who knowingly neglect the vow of Çré Kåñëa-janmäñöamé become ferocious beasts in the jungle.

Text 276

brahma-hatyä surä-pänaà go-vadhaù stré[98]-vadho 'pi väna loko muni-çärdüla jayanté-vimukhasya ca

brahma-hatyä-killing a brahmana; surä-pänam-drinking liquor; go-vadhaù-killing a cow; stré…-vadhaù-killing a woman; api-even; vä-or; na-not; lokaù-world; muni-çärdüla-O tiger of the sages; jayanté-vimukhasya-averse to Jayanté; ca-and.

O tiger of the sages, a person averse to observing the holy day of Jayanté will not find happiness in this life or the next. His sin is equal to that of killing a brähmaëa, a cow, or a woman, or drinking liquor.

Text 277

varñe varñe tu yä näré kåñëa-janmäñöamé-vratamna karoti mahä-präjïa vyälé bhavati känane

varñe varñe-year aftyer year; tu-indeed; yä-who; näré-woman; kåñëa-janmäñöamé-vratam-the vow of Kåñëa Janmäñöamé; na-not; karoti-does; mahä-präjïa-O wise onme; vyälé-a ferocious beast; bhavati-is; känane-in the jungle.

O wise sage, a woman who year after year declines to observe the vow of Çré Kåñëa-janmäñöamé becomes in her next birth a ferocious beast in the jungle.

Text 278

çrävaëe bahule pakñe kåñëa-janmäñöamé-vratamna karoti naro yas tu sa bhavet krüra-räkñasaù

çrävaëe-in Sravana; bahule-great; pakñe-side; kåñëa-janmäñöamé-vratam-the vow of Çré Kåñëa-Janmäñöamé; na-not; karoti-does; naraù-a man; yaù-who; tu-indeed; sa-he; bhavet-becomes; krüra-räkñasaù-a cruel raksasa.

A man who does not observe Çré Kåñëa-janmäñöamé in the bahula-pakña of the month of Çrävaëa becomes in his next life a cruel räkñasa.

Text 279

çrävaëe bahule pakñe na karoti yadäñöamémkrüräyudhaù krüra-mukhä hiàsanti yama-kiìkaräù

çrävaëe-in Sravana; bahule pakñe-in the bahula-paksa; na-not; karoti-does; yadä-when; añöamém-astami; krüräyudhaù-with cruel weapons; krüra-mukhäù-with cruel faces; hiàsanti-torture; yama-kiìkaräù-the servants of Yamaräja.

With cruel faces and cruel weapons the servants of Yamaräja torture whoever does not observe the añöamé day in the bahula-pakña of the month of Çrävaëa.

Text 280

na karoti yadä viñëor jayanté-sambhavaà vratamyamasya vaçam äpannaù sahate närakéà vyathäm

na-not; karoti-does; yadä-when; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; jayanté-sambhavam-the Jayanti day; vratam-vow; yamasya-of Yama; vaçam-the abode; äpannaù-attains; sahate-suffers; närakém-of hell; vyathäm-the torments.

Whoever does not observe the vow of Lord Viñëu's Jayanté day goes to Yama's world where he suffers the torments of hell.

Text 281

kià ca tatraiva

kåñëa-janmäñöaméà tyaktvä yo 'nya-vratam upäsatenäpnoti sukåtaà kiïcid dåñöaà çrutam athäpi vä

kià ca-furthermore; tatra-there; eva-indeed; kåñëa-janmäñöamém-Kåñëa-Janmäñöamé; tyaktvä-abandoning; yaù-who; anya-another; vratam-vow; upäsate-observes; na-not; äpnoti-attains; sukåtam-piety; kiïcit-something; dåñöam-seen; çrutam-heard; atha-then; api-even; vä-or.

In that scripture it is also said:

A person who neglects the vow of Çré Kåñëa-janmäñöamé and observes another vow instead does not attain any pious benefit seen or heard anywhere.

Text 282

kià ca

tuñöy-arthaà devaké-sünor jayanté-sambhavaà vratamkartavyaà vitta-çäöhyena bhaktyä bhakta-janair api akurvan yäti nirayaà yävad indraç caturdasa

kià ca-furthermore; tuñöy-artham-for satisfaction; devaké-sünoù-of the son of DEvaké; jayanté-sambhavam-in the day of Jayanté; vratam-the vow; kartavyam-to be done; vitta-çäöhyena-by cheating on wealth; bhaktyä-with devotion; bhakta-janaiù-by devotees; api-even; akurvan-not doing; yäti-goes; nirayam-to hell; yävat-as long as; indräù-Indras; caturdasa-fourteen.

It is also said:

One should observe the vow of Jayanté to please Lord Kåñëa, the son of Devaké. If one does not devotedly observe this vow with the devotees, or if one does not observe it in a way appropriate to his financial situation, he will go to hell for as long as the fourteen Indras rule in their posts.

Text 283

atha janmäñöamé-mähätmyam

bhaviñyottare çré-kåñëa-yudhiñöhira-samväde janmäñöamé-vrata-kathane

ekenaivopaväsena kåtena kuru-nandanasapta-janma-kåtät päpän mucyate nätra saàçayaù

atha-now; janmäñöamé-mähätmyam-the glories of Janmäñöamé; bhaviñyottare-in the Bhavisya Purana, Uttara-khanda; çré-kåñëa-yudhiñöhira-samväde-in a conversatuon of Çré Kåñëa and King Yudhisthira; janmäñöamé-vrata-kathane-in the description of the vow of Janmäñöamé; ekena-by one; eva-indeed; upaväsena-fasting; kåtena-done; kuru-nandana-O delioght of the Kurus; sapta-janma-kåtät-done in seven births; päpän-from the sins; mucyate-released; na-not; atra-here; saàçayaù-doubt.

The Glories of Janmäñöamé

In the Bhaviñya Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, Lord Kåñëa tells King Yudhiñöhira:

O delight of the Kurus, by once fasting during Janmäñöamé a person becomes free from the sins of seven births. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 284

putra-santänam ärogyaà saubhägyam atulaà labhetsatya-dharma-rato bhütvä måto vaikuëöham äpnuyät

putra-santänam-descendents; ärogyam-healthy; saubhägyam-fortune; atulam-peerless; labhet-attains; satya-dharma-rataù-devoted to religion and truth; bhütvä-becoming; måtaù-dead; vaikuëöham-Vaikuntha; äpnuyät-attains.

His descendants are righteous. He attains health and peerless good fortune. He becomes devoted to truth and religion, and when he dies he goes to Vaikuëöha.

Text 285

tatra nityaà vimänena varña-lakñaà yudhiñöhirabhogän nänä-vidhän bhuktvä puëya-çeñäd ihägataù

tatra-there; nityam-always; vimänena-by airplane; varña-lakñam-a hundred thousand years; yudhiñöhira-O Yudhisthira; bhogän-enjoyments; nänä-vidhän-many kinds; bhuktvä-enjoying; puëya-çeñät-with the remnants of his piety; iha-here; ägataùcome.

O Yudhiñöhira, that person travels on an airplane, sightseeing the universe and enjoying many pleasures. This he does for a hundred thousand years. Then, with what remains of his pious credits, he returns here, to this earth.

Texts 286 and 287

sarva-käma-samåddhe tu sarväsukha-vivarjitesarva-dharma-yute pärtha sarva-gokula-saìkule

tasmin räñöre prabhur bhuìkte dérghäyur manasepsitänbhogän ante ca paramaà padaà yäty apunar-bhavam

sarva-käma-samåddhe-filled with all desires; tu-indeed; sarväsukha-vivarjite-without any sufferings; sarva-dharma-all piety; yute-with; pärtha-O Partha; sarva-gokula-saìkule-filled with many cows; tasmin-in that; räñöre-kingdom; prabhuù-master; bhuìkte-enjoys; dérghäyuù-long life; manasä-by the mind; épsitän-desired; bhogän-enjoyment; ante-at the end; ca-and; paramam-the supreme; padam-abode; yäti-goes; apunar-bhavam-where there is no repeated birth.

Here on this earth He becomes the ruler of a great kingdom, a kingdom filled with all desirable things, all pious deeds, and many cows, and free of any sufferings. There he lives for a long time and enjoys whatever his heart desires. At the end he goes to the spiritual world, where there is no repetition of birth and death.

Text 288

tat-kule rüpa-vikhyätä jäyante hådayaìgamäù

tat-kule-in his family; rüpa-handsome; vikhyätä-famous; jäyante-born; hådayaìgamäù-dear to the heart.

His descendants are famous for their handsome forms. They are all saintly and pleasing to everyone's hearts.

Text 289

yasmin sadaiva deçe tu likhitaà väpi carcitammama janma-dinaà puëya- sarvälaìkära-çobhitaà püjyate päëòava-çreñöha janair utsava-samyutam

yasmin-in which; sadä-always; eva-indeed; deçe-country; tu-indeed; likhitam-written; vä-or; api-indeed; carcitam-anointed; mama-of Me; janma-dinam-the birthday; puëya-piety; sarva-all; alaìkära-ornaments; çobhitam-decorated; püjyate-worshiped; päëòava-çreñöha-O best of the Pandavas; janaiù-by people; utsava-samyutam-with a festival.

A country where the day of My birth is always shown in pictures and anointed with sandal paste becomes beautiful with all the ornaments of spiritual life. It becomes a great festival. It is worshiped by all.

Çréla Sanätana Gosvämé comments

If the word "likhitam" is interpreted to mean “written" and "carcitam" to mean "studied", then the first phrase of this verse may be interpreted to mean, "a country where the day of My birth is always written in many books and studied with care".

Text 290

para-cakra-bhayaà tatra na kadäcid bhavaty utaparjanyaù käma-varñé syäd étibhyo na bhayaà bhavet

para-cakra-bhayam-fear of others; tatra-there; na-not; kadäcit-ever; bhavati-is; uta-indeed; parjanyaù-rain; käma-as desired; varñé-raining; syät-is; étibhyaù-from plagues and calamities; na-not; bhayam-fear; bhavet-is.

In that country there is no fear of others and no fear of plagues or other calamities. There the rain falls as much as could be desired.


There are six kinds of calamities (éti): 1. excessive rain, 2. drought, 3. plague of locusts, 4. plague of rats, 5. plague of birds, and 6. invasion of foreign armies.

Text 291

gåhe vä püjyate yasmin devakyäç caritaà mamatatra sarva-samåddhiù syän nopasargädikaà bhayam

gåhe-in the home; vä-or; püjyate-is worshiped; yasmin-in which; devakyäù-of Devaké; caritam-pastimes; mama-of Me; tatra-there; sarva-samåddhiù-all opulences; syät-are; na-not; upasarga-with disease; ädikam-beginning; bhayam-fear.

All opulences come to a home where My pastimes with Devaké are worshiped. Fearful diseases and other calamities can never enter there.

Text 292

paçuto nakuläd vyälät päpa-rogäc ca pätakäträjataç caurato väpi na kadäcid bhayaà bhavet

paçutaù-from a bull; nakulät-from a mongoose; vyälät-from a snake or a tiger; päpa-rogät-from sinful diseases; ca-and; pätakät-from sins; räjataù-from a king; caurataù-from a thief; vä-or; api-also; na-not; kadäcit-ever; bhayam-fear; bhavet-is.

In that home there is no fear of bulls, a mongoose, snakes, tigers, sinful diseases, sins, thieves, or the king.

Text 293

kià ca

yasmin gåhe päëòu-putra likhyate devaké-vratamna tatra måta-niñkräntir na garbha-patanaà tathä

kià ca-furthermore; yasmin-in which; gåhe-home; päëòu-putra-O son of Päëòu; likhyate-is written; devaké-vratam-the vow of Devaké; na-not; tatra-there; måta-dead; niñkräntiù-birth; na-not; garbha-patanam-miscarriage; tathä-so.

The Lord also said:

O son of Päëòu, in a home where there is a book describing this vow of worshiping Devaké-devé, there will never be a miscarriage. Nor will any child be born dead.

Text 294

na ca vyädhi-bhayaà tatra bhaved iti mataà mamana vaidhavyaà na daurbhägyaà na dambhaù kalaho gåhe

na-nor; ca-and; vyädhi-bhayam-fear of disease; tatra-there; bhavet-is; iti-thus; matam-considered; mama-by Me; na-not; vaidhavyam-widowhood; na-not; daurbhägyam-misfortune; na-not; dambhaù-deception; kalahaù-quarrel; gåhe-in the home.

In that home there need be no fear of disease. That is My opinion. In that home no woman will become a widow. In that home there will be no misfortune, deception, or quarrel.

Text 295

samparkeëäpi yaù kuryät kaçcij janmäñöamé-vratamviñëulokam aväpnoti so 'pi pärtha na saàçayaù

samparkeëa-by contact; api-even; yaù-who; kuryät-does; kaçcit-someone; janmäñöamé-vratam-the Janmäñöamé vow; viñëulokam-Viñëukloka; aväpnoti-attains; so 'pi-that person; pärtha-O Partha; na-no; saàçayaù-doubt.

Even a person who accidentally observes the vow of Janmäñöamé will go to the spiritual world of Lord Viñëu. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 296

janmäñöamé jana-mano-nayanotsaväòhyä päpäpahä sapadi nandita-nanda-gopäyo devakéà sadayitäà yajatéha tasyäà puträn aväpya samupaiti padaà sa viñëoù

janmäñöamé-Janmäñöamé; jana-of the people; manaù-of the mind; nayana-of the eyes; utsava-festival; äòhyä-enriched; päpa-sins; apahä-removing; sapadi-at once; nandita-delighted; nanda-gopä-the gopa Nanda; yaù-who; devakém-Devaké; sadayitäm-with her dear husband; yajati-worships; iha-here; tasyäm-on this; puträn-good children; aväpya-attaining; samupaiti-attains; padam-the abode; sa-he; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu.

Janmäñöamé is a festival of happiness for the eyes and the heart. It delights Nanda Mahäräja. It removes all sins. A person who on Janmäñöamé worships Devaké and her husband Vasudeva attains many good children and at the end goes to the spiritual world of Lord Viñëu.

Text 297

viñëu-dharme

rohiëé ca yadä kåñëa- pakñe 'ñöamyäà dvijottamajayanté näma sä proktä sarva-päpa-harä tithiù

viñëu-dharme-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa; rohiëé-Rohiëé; ca-and; yadä-when; kåñëa-pakñe-in the kåñëa-pakña; añöamyäm-on thwe astami; dvijottama-O best of brahmanas; jayanté-Jayanté; näma-named; sä-that; proktä-called; sarva-päpa-harä-removing all sins; tithiù-the day.


O best of brähmaëas, when the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon on the añtamé of the dark fortnight, that day is called Jayanté, a day that removes all sins.

Text 298

yad bälye yac ca kaumäre yauvane vardhake 'pi yatsapta-janma-kåtaà päpaà sv-alpaà vä yadi vä bahu tat kñalayati govindaà tasyäm abhyarcya bhaktitaù

yat-what; bälye-in balya; yat-what; ca-also; kaumäre-in kaumara; yauvane-in yauvana; vardhake-in vardhaka; api-also; yat-what; sapta-janma-kåtam-done in seven births; päpam-sins; sv-alpam-slight; vä-even; yadi-if; vä-or; bahu-great; tat-that; kñalayati-washes away; govindam-Lord Kåñëa; tasyäm-onnthat day; abhyarcya-worshiping; bhaktitaù-with devotion.

A person who on that day worships Lord Govinda washes away his sins, either great or small, or performed in childhood, youth, or maturity, in seven births.

Text 299

homa-yajïädi-dänänäà phalaà ca çata-sammitamsampräpnoti na sandeho yac cänyan manasepsitam

tains; na-no; sandehaù-doubt; yat-what; ca-and; anyat-others; manasä-by the mind; épsitam-desired.

He attains the results of homas, yajïas, and charity multiplied a hundred times. He attains whatever his heart desires.

Text 300

upaväsaç ca tatrokto mahä-pätaka-näçanaù

upaväsaù-fasting; ca-and; tatrqa-there; uktaù-said; mahä-pätaka-näçanaù-destroying the greatest sins.

A person who fasts on that day becomes freed from the greatest sins.

Text 301

viñëu-rahasye

jayantyäm upaväsaà tu kåtvä yo 'rcayate harimtasya janma-çatodbhütaà päpaà naçyati sarvathä

viñëu-rahasye-in the Viñëu-rahasya; jayantyäm-on Jayanté; upaväsam-fasting; tu-indeed; kåtvä-doing; yaù-who; arcayate-worships; harim-Lord Hari; tasya-of him; janma-çatodbhütam-created in a hundred births; päpam-sin; naçyati-destroys; sarvathä-completely.


A person who on Jayanté fasts and worships Lord Hari completely destroys the sins of a hundred births.

Text 302

kaumäre yauvane bälye värdhakye yad upärjitamtat päpaà çamayet kåñëas

tithäv asyäà su-püjitaù

kaumäre-in kumara years; yauvane-in youth; bälye-in childhood; värdhakye-in maturity; yat-what; upärjitam-gained; tat-that; päpam-sin; çamayet-pacifies; kåñëaù-Lord Kåñëa; tithau-day; asyäm-on that; su-püjitaù-nicely worshiped.

Lord Kåñëa forgives the sins of a child, youth, or adult who carefully worships Him on this day.

Text 303

snänaà dänaà tathä homaù svadhyäyo 'tha japas tapaùsarvaà çata-guëaà proktaà jayantyäà yat kåtaà hareù

snänam-bathign; dänam-charity; tathä-so; homaù-homa; svadhyäyaù-Vedic study; atha-then; japaù-japa; tapaù-austerity; sarvam-all; çata-guëam-multiplied a hundred times; proktam-said; jayantyäm-on Jayanté; yat-what; kåtam-done; hareù-of Lord Hari.

When they are done to please Lord Hari, bathing, charity, homa, Vedic study, japa, and austerity are multiplied a hundred times when performed on Jayanté.

Text 304

dhana-dhänya-vahä puëyä sarva-päpa-harä çubhäsamupoñyä janair yatnäj jayanté kåñëa-bhakti-dä

dhana-wealth; dhänya-and grain; vahä-bringing; puëyä-piety; sarva-päpa-harä-removing all sins; çubhä-auspicious; samupoñyä-to be fasted; janaiù-by the people; yatnät-carefully; jayanté-Jayanté; kåñëa-bhakti-dä-bringing devotion to Lord Kåñëa.

Jayanté is sacred and auspicious. It brings wealth and grains. It brings devotion to Lord Kåñëa. On Jayanté the people should carefully observe a fast.

Text 305

brahma-puräëe pürva-khaëòe janmäñöamé-mähätmye çré-sütoktau

yä tu kåñëäñöamé näma viçrutä vaiñëavé tithiùtasyäù prabhävam äçritya pütäù sarve kalau janäù

brahma-puräëe-in the Brahma Purana; pürva-khaëòe-Purva-khanda; janmäñöamé-mähätmye-Janmäñöamé-mahatmya; çré-sütoktau-in the words of Çré Suta Gosvami; yä-which; tu-indeed; kåñëäñöamé-Kåñëa Janmäñöamé; näma-named; viçrutä-famous; vaiñëavé-Vaiñëava; tithiù-day; tasyäù-of that; prabhävam-power; äçritya-taking shelter; pütäù-purified; sarve-all; kalau-in kali-yuga; janäù-people.

In the Brahma Puräëa, Pürva-khaëòa, Janmäñöamé-mähätmya, Çréla Süta Gosvämé explains:

Kåñëa Janmäñöamé is a famous Vaiñëava holy day. They who in Kali-yuga take shelter of the glory of that day become purified of all sins.

Text 306

çrävaëe mäsi bahulä rohiëé-samyutäñöaméjayantéti samäkhyätä sarväghaugha-vinäçiné

çrävaëe-of Çrävaëa; mäsi-in the month; bahulä-great; rohiëé-samyutäñöamé-the astami with Rohini; jayanté-Jayanté; iti-thus; samäkhyätä-called; sarva-all; agha-of sins; augha-a flood; vinäçiné-destroying.

When the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon on the añöamé of the Çravaëa month, that day is called Jayanté. That day destroys a flood of sins.

Texts 307 and 308

tasyäà viñëu-tithau kecid dhanyäù kali-yuge janäùye 'bhyarcayanti deveçaà jägrataù samupoñitäù

na teñäà vidyate kväpi saàsära-bhayam ulbaëamyatra tiñöhanti te deçe kalis tatra na tiñöhati

tasyäm-on that; viñëu-tithau-day holy to Lord Viñëu; kecit-some; dhanyäù-fortunate; kali-yuge-in Kali-yuga; janäù-people; ye-who; abhyarcayanti-worship; deveçam-the master of the demigods; jägrataù-keeping a vigil; samupoñitäù-fasting; na-not; teñäm-of them; vidyate-is; kväpi-anywhere; saàsära-bhayam-fear of the material world; ulbaëam-great; yatra-where; tiñöhanti-stay; te-they; deçe-in the country; kaliù-Kali; tatra-there; na-not; tiñöhati-stays.

The fortunate persons who on that day sacred to Lord Viñëu fast, keep an all-night vigil, and worship Lord Hari, the master of the demigods, never fear having to take birth again in this world. Wherever they stay, Kali-yuga cannot enter.

Text 309

tatraiva çré-çuka-janamejaya-samväde

ya eña bhagavän viñëur devakyäà vasudevataùjätaù kaàsa-vadhärthaà hi tad-dinaà maìgaläyanam

tatra-there; eva-indeed; çré-çuka-janamejaya-samväde-in a conversation of Çré Sukadeva Gosvami and King Janamejaya; ya-who; eña-He; bhagavän-Lord; viñëuù-Viñëu; devakyäm-in Devaki; vasudevataù-from Vasudeva; jätaù-born; kaàsa-vadhärtham-to kill Kamsa; hi-indeed; tad-dinam-that day; maìgaläyanam-auspicious.

In that scripture Çréla Çukadeva Gosvämé tells King Janamejaya:

Then, in order to kill Kaàsa, Lord Viñëu took birth as the son of Vasudeva and Devaké. That day is the abode of auspiciousness.

Text 310

yä sä praty-abdam äyäti çrävaëe bahuläñöamésaìgatä rohiëyarkñena nåëäà mukti-phala-pradä

yä-which; sä-that; praty-abdam-every year; äyäti-comes; çrävaëe-in Sravana; bahuläñöamé-Bahuläñöamé; saìgatä-meeting; rohiëyarkñena-with the star Rohini; nåëäm-of people; mukti-phala-pradä-giving liberation.

When, as happens every year, there is a day when the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon during the month of Çrävaëa, that day is called Bahuläñöami. That day brings liberation to the people.

Text 311

yasyäà sanätanaù sakñät puräëaù puruñottamaùavatérëaù kñitau saiñä mukti-deti kim adbhutam

yasyäm-on which; sanätanaù-eternal; sakñät-directly; puräëaù-ancient; puruñottamaù-Supreme Personality of Godhead; avatérëaù-descended; kñitau-to the earth; sä eñä-that; mukti-dä-giving liberation; iti-thus; kim-what?; adbhutam-wonder.

On that day the eternal and primeval Supreme Personality of Godhead descended to the earth. Why should it be a source of wonder that this day brings liberation?

Text 312

tatraivägre vrata-vidhi-kathane

idam eva paraà çreya idam eva paraà tapaùidam eva paro dharmo yad-viñëu-vrata-dhäraëam

tatra-there; eva-indeed; agre-in the presence; vrata-vidhi-kathane-description of the vow; idam-this; eva-indeed; param-supreme; çreya-good; idam-this; eva-indeed; param-supreme; tapaù-austerity; idam-this; eva-indeed; paraù-supreme; dharmaù-religion; yad-viñëu-vrata-dhäraëam-following this vow for Lord Viñëu.

In that scripture this vow is described in these words:

Following this vow for Lord Viñëu is the greatest good, the greatest austerity, and the greatest religious duty.

Text 313


kåñëa-janmäñöamé loke prasiddhä päpa-näçinékratu-koöi-samä tv eñä térthayuta-çataiù samä

skände-in the Skanda Purana; brahma-närada-samväde-in a conversation of Brahma and Narada; kåñëa-janmäñöamé-Kåñëa Janmäñöamé; loke-in the world; prasiddhä-famous; päpa-näçiné-destroying sins; kratu-koöi-samä-equal to ten million yajnas; tv-indeed; eñä-this; térthayuta-çataiù-to many millions of pilgrimages; samä-equal.

In the Skanda Puräëa, Brahmä tell Närada:

Kåñëa Janmäñöamé is famous in this world. It destroys sins. It is equal to many millions of yajïas. It is equal to many millions of pilgrimages.

Text 314

kapilä-go-sahasraà tu yo dadäti dine dinetat-phalaà samaväpnoti jayantyäà samupoñaëe

kapilä-go-sahasram-a thousand cows; tu-indeed; yaù-who; dadäti-gives; dine-day; dine-after day; tat-phalam-that result; samaväpnoti-attains; jayantyäm-on Jayanti; samupoñaëe-in fasting.

By fasting on Jayanté one attains the same pious result attained by giving a thousand cows in charity day after day.

Text 315

hema-bhära-sahasraà tu kurukñetre prayacchatitat phalaà samaväpnoti jayantyäà samupoñaëe

hema-bhära-sahasram-a thousand bharas of gold; tu-indeed; kurukñetre-at Kuruksetra; prayacchati-gives; tat-that; phalam-result; samaväpnoti-attains; jayantyäm-on Jayanti; samupoñaëe-by fasting.

By fasting on Jayanté one attains the same pious result attained by giving a thousand bhäras of gold in charity at Kurukñetra.

Text 316

ratna-koöi-sahasräëi yo dadäti dvijottamatat-phalaà samaväpnoti jayantyäà samupoñaëe

ratna-koöi-sahasräëi-many billions opf jewels; yaù-who; dadäti-gives; dvijottama-O best of brahmanas; tat-that; phalam-result; samaväpnoti-attains; jayantyäm-on Jayanti; samupoñaëe-by fasting.

O best of brähmaëas, by fasting on Jayanté one attains the same pious result attained by giving many millions of jewels in charity.

Text 317

väpé-küpa-sahasräëi devatäyatanäni cakanyä-koöi-pradänena yat-phalaà kavibhiù småtammätä-pitror gurüëäà ca bhaktim udvahatäà phalam

väpé-küpa-sahasräëi-thousands of lakes and ponds; devatäyatanäni-temples; ca-and; kanyä-girls; koöi-millions; pradänena-by giving; yat-phalam-which result; kavibhiù-by philosophers; småtam-considered; mätä-pitroù-of father and mother; gurüëäm-of gurus; ca-and; bhaktim-devotion; udvahatäm-carring; phalam-the result.

By fasting on Jayanté one attains the same pious result attained by digging thousands of wells and ponds, building many temples, giving millions of daughters in charity to their prospective bridegrooms, and devotedly serving parents and gurus.

Text 318

gurv-arthe brähmaëärthe vä svämy-arthe vä tyajet tanumparopkära-yuktänäà tértha-seva-ratätmanämsatya-vratänäà yat puëyaà jayantyäà samupoñaëe

gurv-arthe-for the sake of the guru; brähmaëärthe-for the sake of the brahmanas; vä-or; svämy-arthe-fro the sake of the master; vä-or; tyajet-should abandon; tanum-body; paropkära-yuktänäm-of they who are engaged in helping others; tértha-seva-ratätmanäm-of they who devotedly go on pilgrimages; satya-vratänäm-of they who follow a vow of truthfulness; yat-what; puëyam-piety; jayantyäm-on Jayanté; samupoñaëe-fasting.

By fasting on Jayanté one attains the same pious result attained by one who gives up his body for the sake of his guru, or for the sake of the brähmaëas, or for the sake of his master, or the same pious result attained by they who have dedicated their lives to helping others, or by they who devotedly go on pilgrimages, or by they who follow a vow of truthfulness.

Text 319

niräçrayeñu vasatäà tapasänäà tu yat phalamräjasüya-sahasreñu çata-varñägnihotrataù ekenaivopaväsena jayantyäà tat phalaà småtam

niräçrayeñwithout a shelter; vasatäm-residing; tapasänäm-of austerities; tu-indeed; yat-what; phalam-result; räjasüya-of rajasuya-yajnas; sahasreñu-in thousands; çata-varña-a hundred years; agnihotrataù-from an agnihotra-yajna; ekena-by one; eva-indeed; upaväsena-fasting; jayantyäm-on Jayanti; tat-that; phalam-result; småtam-considered.

By once fasting on Jayanté one attains the result of performing austerities and remaining homeless, of performing a thousand räjasüya-yajïas, or of performing an agnihotra-yajïa of a hundred years.

Text 320

kåtvä räjyaà mahéà bhuktvä präpya kértià ca çäsvatémjayantyäà copaväsena viñëor bhümau layaà gataù

kåtvä-doing; räjyam-a kingdom; mahém-the earth; bhuktvä-enjoying; präpya-attaining; kértim-fame; ca-and; çäsvatém-eternal; jayantyäm-on jayanti; ca-and; upaväsena-by fasting; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; bhümau-in the realm; layam-liberation; gataù-attained.

By fasting on Jayanté one attains a great kingdom and eternal fame, enjoys the pleasures of the earth, and at the end enters the spiritual world of Lord Viñëu.

Text 321

dharmam arthaà ca kämaà ca muktià ca muni-puìgavadadäti väïchitän kämän çrävaëe mäsi cäñöamé

dharmam-piety; artham-wealth; ca-and; kämam-sense gratification; ca-and; muktim-liberation; ca-and; muni-puìgava-O best of sages; dadäti-gives; väïchitän-desires; kämän-pleasures; çrävaëe-in Sravana; mäsi-month; ca-and; añöamé-the añöamé.

O best of sages, the añöamé day of the month of Çrävaëa brings piety, wealth, sense gratification, and liberation. It fulfills all desires.

Text 322

janmäñöamé-vrataà ye vai prakurvanti narottamäùkärayanti ca viprendra lakñmés teñäà sadä sthirä

janmäñöamé-vratam-the vow of Janmäñöamé; ye-who; vai-indeed; prakurvanti-do; narottamäù-the best of people; kärayanti-cause to do; ca-and; viprendra-O king of brahmanas; lakñméù-the goddess of fortune; teñäm-of them; sadä-always; sthirä-steady.

O king of brähmaëas, Goddess Lakñmé always stays among those great souls who observe the vow of Janmäñöamé.

Text 323

na vedair na puräëaiç ca mayä dåñöaà mahä-muneyat-samaà cädhikaà väpi kåñëa-janmäñöamé-vratät

na-not; vedaiù-by the Vedas; na-not; puräëaiù-by the Puranas; ca-and; mayä-by me; dåñöam-seen; mahä-mune-O great sage; yat-samam-equal to that; ca-and; adhikam-better; vä-or; api-also; kåñëa-janmäñöamé-vratät-than the vow of Kåñëa-janmäñöamé.

O great sage, I have not seen anything in the Vedas or the Puräëas equal to or better than the vow of Çré Kåñëa-janmäñöamé.

Text 324

niyama-sthaà naraà dåñövä janmäñöamyäà dvijottamavivarëa-vadano bhütvä tal-lipià marjayed yamaù

niyama-stham-restraining the senses; naram-a person; dåñövä-seeing; janmäñöamyäm-on Janmäñöamé; dvijottama-O best of brahmanas; vivarëa-without color; vadanaù-face; bhütvä-becopming; tal-lipim-the writing of him; marjayet-wipes away; yamaù-Yamaräja.

O best of brähmaëas, when he sees a self-controlled person observing the vow of Janmäñöamé, Yamaräja, his face turned white, at once erases what is written of him.

Text 325

kià ca

vratenärädhya taà devaà devaké-sahitaà harimtyaktvä yama-pathaà ghoraà

yäti viñëoù paraà padam

kià ca-furthermore; vratena-with a vow; ärädhya-worshiping; tam-Him; devam-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; devaké-sahitam-with Devaké; harim-Lord Kåñëa; tyaktvä-leaving; yama-patham-the path to Yama; ghoram-horrible; yti-goes; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; param-to the supreme; padam-abode.

It is also said:

A person who with a vow worships Lord Kåñëa and Devaké leaves the horrible path to Yamaloka and goes to the supreme abode of Lord Viñëu.

Text 326

smaraëaà väsudevasya måtyu-käle bhaven munesidhyanti sarva-käryäëi kåte janmäñöamé-vrate mamäjïayä kurudhvaà taj-jayantéà muktaye tathä

smaraëam-remembering; väsudevasya-of Lord Kåñëa; måtyu-käle-at the moment of death; bhavet-does; mune-O sage; sidhyanti-becomes perfect; sarva-käryäëi-all duties; kåte-done; janmäñöamé-vrate-in the vow of Janmäñöamé; mama-of Me; äjïayä-by the order; kurudhvam-please do; taj-jayantém-Janmäñöamé; muktaye-for liberation; tathä-so.

O sage, a person who at the moment of his death remembers Lord Kåñëa, attains perfection. In the same way when a person follows the vow of Janmäñöamé, all he has done becomes perfect. Therefore, by my order, please observe the vow of Janmäñöamé and thus attain liberation from this world of birth and death.

Text 327

brahma-khaëòe çré-sütoktau ca tad-vrata-mahimänuvarëanänte

ity etat kathitam açeña-çästra-guhyaà çré-kåñëa-vrata-mahimänuvarëanaà yatçrutvaitat sakåd api pätakair vimukto dehänte vrajati naro muräri-lokam

brahma-khaëòe-in the Brahma-khaëòa; çré-süta-of Çré Suta; uktau-in the statement; ca-and; tad-vrata-mahimänuvarëanänte-after describing the glories of that vow; iti-thsu; etat-this; kathitam-said; açeña-çästra-guhyam-hidden in all the scriptures; çré-kåñëa-vrata-mahimänuvarëanam-the descriptionj of the glories of this vow to please Lord Kåñëa; yat-what; çrutvä-hearing; etat-this; sakåt-once; api-even; pätakaiù-by sins; vimuktaù-freed; dehänte-at the end of the body; vrajati-goes; naraù-a pwerson; muräri-lokam-to the world of Lord Kåñëa.

In the Brahma-khaëòa, after describing the glories of this vow, Çré Süta Gosvämé says:

Thus I have described the glories of the Çré Kåñëa-Janmäñöamé vow, which is very confidential and hidden in all the scriptures. By once hearing this description a person becomes free from all his sins. At the end of his body he goes to the world of Lord Kåñëa.

Text 328

atha çré-janmäñöamé-vrata-nirëayaù

kåñëopäsyäñöamé bhädre rohiëy-äòhyä mahä-phaläniçéthe 'träpi kià cendau jïe väpi navamé-yutä

atha-now; çré-janmäñöamé-vrata-nirëayaù-following the vow of Janmäñöamé; kåñëa-Lord Kåñëa; upäsyä-to be worshiped; añöamé-the astami; bhädre-in the month of Bhadra; rohiëy-äòhyä-opulent with the star Rophini; mahä-phalä-a great result; niçéthe-in the middle of the night; atra-here; api-also; kim-what?; ca-and; indau-in the moon; jïe-knowing; vä-or; api-also; navamé-yutä-with the navami.

The Method of Observing Janmäñöamé

When at midnight of Janmäñöamé in the month of Bhädra the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon, that Janmäñöamé brings a specially great result. Janmäñöamé also brings a great result when it falls on a Monday or a Wednesday, or when there is a navamé-yoga.

Text 329

atha rohiëé-yukta-janmäñöamé

viñëu-rahasye

präjäpatyarkña-samyuktä kåñëä nabhasi cäñöamémuhürtam api labhyeta saivopoñyä mahä-phalä

atha-now; rohiëé-yukta-janmäñöamé-Janmäñöamé with Rohini; viñëu-rahasye-in the Viñëu-rahasya; präjäpatyarkña-the star Rohini; samyuktä-with; kåñëä-dark; nabhasi-in the sky; ca-and; añöamé-astami; muhürtam-moment; api-even; labhyeta-is attained; sa-that; eva-indeed; upoñyä-to be fasted; mahä-phalä-a greta result.

Janmäñöamé When Rohiëé Is Conjoined With the Moon


When on the añöamé of the dark fortnight the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon for even a single muhürta, fasting on that añöamé day brings a great result.

Text 330

muhürtam apy aho-rätre yasmin yuktaà tu labhyateañöamyä rohiëé-åkñaà taà su-puëyam upävaset

muhürtam-a muhurta; api-even; aho-rätre-day and night; yasmin-in which; yuktam-joined; tu-indeed; labhyate-is obtained; añöamyä-of the astami; rohiëé-åkñam-the star Rohini; tam-that; su-puëyam-very sacred; upävaset-should fast.

When on the añöamé the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon for even a single muhürta of the day or night, that time is very sacred. On that day one should observe a fast.

Text 331

kià ca tatraiva

äñöamé kåñëa-pakñasya rohiëé-åkña-samyutäbhavet prauñöha-pade mäsi jayanté näma sä småtä

kià ca-furthermore; tatra-there; eva-inded; äñöamé-añöamé; kåñëa-pakñasya-of the krsna-paksa; rohiëé-åkña-samyutä-

with the star Rohiëé; bhavet-is; prauñöha-pade-Bhadra; mäsi-in the month; jayanté-Jayanté; näma-named; sä-that; småtä-considered.

In that scripture it is also said:

When the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon on the Kåñëa-pakña añöamé of the month of Bhädra, that day is called Jayanté.

Text 332

viñëu-dharmottare

rohiëy-åkñaà yadä kåñëa- pakñe 'ñöamyäà dvijottamajayanté näma sä proktä sarva-päpa-harä tithiù

viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; rohiëy-åkñam-with the star Rohiëé; yadä-when; kåñëa-pakñe-in the Kåñëa-paksa; añöamyäm-on the añöamé; dvijottama-O best of brahmanas; jayanté-Jayanté; näma-named; sä-that; proktä-said; sarva-päpa-harä-removing all sins; tithiù-say.

In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa it is said:

O best of brähmaëas, when the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon on the Kåñëa-pakña añöamé of the month of Bhädra, that day is called Jayanté. That day removes all sins.

Text 333

yad bälye yac ca kaumäre yauvane värdhake tathäbahu-janma-kåtaà päpaà hanti sopoñitä tithiù

yat-what; bälye-in childhoopd; yat-what; ca-and; kaumäre-in kumara; yauvane-in youth; värdhake-in maturity; tathä-so; bahu-many; janma-births; kåtam-done; päpam-sin; hanti-kills; sa-with; upoñitä-fasting; tithiù-day.

By fasting on that day one destroys many births' sins of childhood, youth, and maturity.

Text 334

skände

präjäpatyena samyuktä äñöamé tu yadä bhavetçrävaëe bahule pakñe sarva-päpa-praëäçiné

skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; präjäpatyena-the star Rohiëi; samyuktä-with; äñöamé-añöamé; tu-indeed; yadä-when; bhavet-is; çrävaëe-in the month of Sravana; bahule pakñe-in the Kåñëa-paksa; sarva-päpa-praëäçiné-destroying all sins.


When the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon on the kåñëa-pakña of the Çrävaëa month, that day destroys all sins.

Text 335

jayaà puëyaà ca kurute jayantéà tena taà viduù

jayam-victory; puëyam-piety; ca-and; kurute-does; jayantém-Jayanti; tena-by that; tam-that; viduù-they know.

Because it brings victory (jaya) and piety, the wise call that day "Jayanté".

Text 336

viñëu-puräëe

kåñëäñöamyäà bhaved yatra kalaikä rohiëé nåpajayanté näma sä jïeyä upoñyä sa prayatnataù

viñëu-puräëe-in the Viñëu Puräëa; kåñëäñöamyäm-on kåñëäñöami; bhavet-is; yatra-where; kalä-phase; ekä-one; rohiëé-Rohiëé; nåpa-O king; jayanté-Jayanté; näma-called; sä-that; jïeyä-to be known; upoñyä-to be fasted; sa-that; prayatnataù-carefully.


O king, when, on the añöamé of the kåñëa-pakña, the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon for even a single kalä, that day is called Jayanté. One should carefully fast on that day.

Text 337

sapta-janma-kåtaà päpaà räjan yat tri-vidhaà nåëämtat phälayati govindas titthau tasyäà tu bhävitaù

sapta-janma-kåtam-done in seven births; päpam-sin; räjan-O king; yat-what; tri-vidham-three kinds; nåëäm-of the people; tat-that; phälayati-gives result; govindaù-Lord Kåñëa; tithau-day; tasyäm-on that; tu-indeed; bhävitaù-meditated upon.

O king, Lord Govinda destroys seven births of the three kinds of sins for one who worships Him or meditates on Him during that day.

Text 338

upaväsaç ca tatrokto mahä-pätaka-näçanaùjayantyäà jagaté-päla vidhinätra na saàçayaù

upaväsaù-fasting; ca-and; tatra-there; uktaù-said; mahä-pätaka-näçanaù-destroying the greatest sins; jayantyäm-on Jayanté; jagaté-the world; päla-protector; vidhinä-by rules; atra-here; na-no; saàçayaù-doubt.

O king, proper fasting on Jayanté destroys the greatest sins. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 339

tretäyäà dväpare caiva

räjan kåta-yuge tathärohiëé-samyutä ceyaà vidvadbhiù samupoñitä

tretäyäm-in Treta-yuga; dväpare-in Dvapara-yuga; ca-and; eva-indeed; räjan-O king; kåta-yuge-in Satya-yuga; tathä-so; rohiëé-samyutä-with Rohiëé; ca-and; iyam-this; vidvadbhiù-by the wise; samupoñitä-to be fasted.

O king, wise persons in Satya, Tretä, and Dväpara yuga fast on that day, when Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon.

Text 340

agni-puräëe

ardha-räträd adhaç cordhvaà kalayä vä yadä bhavetjayanté näma sä proktä sarva-päpa-praëäçiné

agni-puräëe-in the Agni Puräëa; ardha-räträt-from half the night; adhaù-below; ca-and; urdhvam-above; kalayä-by a kala; vä-or; yadä-when; bhavet-is; jayanté-Jayanté; näma-named; sä-that; proktä-said; sarva-päpa-praëäçiné-destroying all sins.


When for one kalä before or after the middle of the night the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon, that day is called Jayanté, a day that destroys all sins.

Text 341

atha ardha-rätra-yutä janmäñöamé

bhaviñya-viñëudharmayoù

rohiëyäm ardha-rätre ca yadä kåñëäñöamé bhavettasyäm abhyarcanaà çaure hanti päpaà tri-janma-jam

atha-now; ardha-rätra-yutä-with the middle of the night; janmäñöamé-Janmäñöamé; bhaviñya-viñëudharmayoù-in the Bhavisya and Viñëu-dharma Puräëas; rohiëyäm-when Rohiëé; ardha-rätre-in the middle of the night; ca-and; yadä-when; kåñëäñöamé-Janmäñöamé; bhavet-is; tasyam-then; abhyarcanam-worship; çaure-O descendent of King Durasena; hanti-kills; päpam-sin; tri-janma-jam-created in three births.

Janmäñöamé When the Star Rohiëé Is Conjoined With the Moon in the Middle of the Night

In both the Bhaviñya and Viñëu-dharma Puräëas it is said:

O descendant of Çürasena, when one worships Lord Kåñëa on a Kåñëäñöamé day when the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon in the middle of the night, that worship destroys the sins of three births.

Text 342

präjäpatyarkña-samyuktä kåñëä nabhasi cäñöamésopaväso hareù püjäà tatra kåtvä na sédati ardha-rätre ca yoge 'yaà täräpaty-udaye sati

präjäpatyarkña-samyuktä-with the star Rohiëé; kåñëä-Kåñëa; nabhasi-in the sky; ca-and; añöamé-añöamé; sopaväsaù-with fasting; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; püjäm-worship; tatra-there; kåtvä-doing; na-not; sidati-stays; ardha-rätre-in the middle of the night; c

When the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon on the Kåñëa-pakña añöamé, one should fast and worship Lord Hari. This is so even if the rising moon is not conjoined with Rohiëé in the middle of the night.

Texts 343 and 344

kià ca

rohiëé-sahitä kåñëä mäsi bhädra-pade 'ñöaméardha-räträd adhaç cordhvaà kalayäpi yadä bhavet

tatra jäto jagan-näthaù kauñöubhé harir avyayaùtam evopavaset kälaà kuryät tatraiva jägaram

kià ca-furthermore; rohiëé-sahitä-with Rohiëé; kåñëä-Kåñëa; mäsi-in the month; bhädra-pade-of Bhadra; añöamé-ther añöamé; ardha-half; räträt-night; adhaù-below; ca-and; ürdhvam-above; kalayä-by a kala; api-also; yadä-when; bhavet-may be; tatra-there; jätaù-born; jagan-näthaù-the master ofn the universes; kauñöubhé-who wears a Kaustubha jewel; hariù-Lord Kåñëa; avyayaù-eternal and infallible; tam-that; eva-indeed; upavaset-should fast; kälam-time; kuryät-should do; tatra-there; eva-indeed; jägaram-vigil.

It is also said:

When for one kalä before or after the middle of the night the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon on the kåñëa-pakña añöamé of the month Bhädra, that is the moment of the birth of Lord Hari, the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is the master of the universes, and who is decorated with the Kaustubha jewel. On that day one should fast and keep an all-night vigil.

Text 345

jayanté näma sä rätris tatra jäto janärdanaùniyatätmä çuciù snätvä püjäà tatra pravartayet

jayanté-Jayanté; näma-named; sä-that; rätriù-night; tatra-there; jätaù-born; janärdanaù-Lord Kåñëa; niyatätmä-self-controlled; çuciù-pure; snätvä-bathing; püjäm-worship; tatra-then; pravartayet-should perform.

hould bathe himself and then worship Lord Kåñëa.

Text 346

vahni-puräëe

sama-yoge tu rohiëyä niçéthe räja-sattamasamajäyata govindo bäla-rüpé catur-bhujaù tasmät taà püjayet tatra

yathä-vittänusarataù

vahni-puräëe-in the Agni Puräëa; sama-yoge-conjoined; tu-indeed; rohiëyä-with Rohiëé; niçéthe-in the middle of the night; räja-sattama-O best of kings; samajäyata-was born; govindaù-Kåñëa; bäla-rüpé-in the form of a child; catur-bhujaù-with four arms; tasmät-then; tam-Him; püjayet-should worship; tatra-there; yathä-vittänusarataù-as one has the wealth.


O best of kings, in the middle of the night, at a time when the star Rohiëé was conjoined with the moon, Lord Govinda was born as a four-armed infant. At that time one should worship the Lord in a way appropriate to one's own wealth.

Text 347

bhaviñyottare

mäsi bhädra-pade 'ñöamyäà kåñëa-pakñe 'rdha-rätrakeçaçäìke våña-räçi-sthe präjäpatyarkña-samyute upoñito 'rcayet kåñëaà yaçodäà devakéà tathä

bhaviñyottare-in the Bhavisya Puräëa, Uttara-khanda; mäsi-in the month; bhädra-pade-of Bhadra; añöamyäm-on the añöamé; kåñëa-pakñe-on the Kåñëa-paksa; ardha-rätrake-in the middle of the night; çaçäìke-the moon; våña-räçi-sthe-in Taurus; präjäpatyarkña-samyute-withthe star Rohiëé; upoñitaù-fasting; arcayet-should worship; kåñëam-Lord Kåñëa; yaçodäm-Yaçodä; devakém-Devaké; tathä-so.


On the kåñëa-pakña añöamé of the month of Bhädra, in the middle of the night, when the moon is with the star Rohiëé in Taurus, one should fast and worship Lord Kåñëa along with Yaçodä and Devaké.

Text 348

kià ca

mäsi bhädra-pade 'ñöamyäà niçéthe kåñëa-pakñakeçaçäìke våña-räçi-sthe åkñe rohiëé-samjïake yoge 'smin vasudeväd dhi devé devam ajéjanat

kià ca-furthermore; mäsi-in the month; bhädra-pade-of Bhadra; añöamyäm-on the astmami; niçéthe-in the middle of the night; kåñëa-pakñake-in the Kåñëa-paksa; çaçäìke-the moon; våña-räçi-sthe-in taurus; åkñe-the star; rohiëé-samjïake-named Rohiëé; yoge-in conjunction; asmin-in this; vasudevät-from Vasudeva; hi-indeed; devé-Devaké; devam-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; ajéjanat-gave birth.

It is also said:

On the kåñëa-pakña añöamé of the month of Bhädra, in the middle of the night, when the moon was with the star Rohiëé in Taurus, Devaké gave birth to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who was begotten by Mahäräja Vasudeva.

Text 349

tasmät sampüjayed atra

çuciù samyag-upoñitaù

tasmät-therefore; sampüjayet-one should worship; atra-then; çuciù-pure; samyag-upoñitaù-properly fasting.

On that day a pure-hearted person should properly fast and worship Lord Kåñëa.

Text 350

pädme

preta-yonià gatänäà tu pretatvaà näçitaà naraiùyaiù kåtvä çrävaëe mäsi añöamé rohiëé-yutä

pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; preta-yonim-birth as a preta; gatänäm-attained; tu-indeed; pretatvam-status as a preta; näçitam-dcestroyed; naraiù-by people; yaiù-who; kåtvä-doing; çrävaëe-of Sravabna; mäsi-in the month; añöamé-the añöamé; rohiëé-yutä-with Rohiëé.


Ghosts who observe the añöamé when Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon in the month of Çravaëa become free from having to be

Text 351

kià punar budha-väreëa somenäpi viçeñataùkià punar navamé-yuktä kula-koöyas tu mukti-dä

kim-what?; punaù-more; budha-väreëa-by Wednesday; somena-by the moon; api-also; viçeñataù-especially; kim-what?; punaù-more; navamé-navami; yuktä-with; kula-koöyaù-ten million relatives; tu-indeed; mukti-dä-giving liberation.

How much more is this true when this day falls on a Wednesday or Monday? How much more is this true when this day is joined with the navamé? At that time this day brings liberation to ten million of one's kinsmen.

Text 352

skände

udaye cäñöamé kiïcin navamé sa-kalä yadibhavate budha-samyuktä präjäpatyarkña-samyutä api varña-çatenäpi labhyate vä na vä vibho

skände-Skanda; udaye-rising; ca-and; añöamé-añöamé; kiïcit-something; navamé-navami; sa-kalä-with the kala; yadi-if; bhavate-is; budha-samyuktä-with mercury; präjäpatyarkña-samyutä-with Rohiëé; api-also; varña-çatena-with a hundred years; api-also; labhyate-is attained; vä-or; na-not; vä-or; vibhaù-O almighty Lord.


If a kalä of the navamé is present in the añöamé, and if both Mercury and Rohiëé are conjoined with the moon, that is a very rare occurrence. Such a time may come after a hundred years, or then, O almighty Lord, it may not come, even after a hundred years.

Text 353

bhaviñye ca

navamyäà yoga-nidrayä janmäñöamyäà hares tataùnavamyä sahitopoñyä rohiëé-budha-samyutä. iti.

hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; tataù-then; navamyä-by the navami; sahitopoñyä-to be fasted; rohiëé-budha-samyutä-with Rohiëé and Mercury; iti-thus.


One should fast on Kåñëa-janmäñöamé when there is navamé and yoga-nidrä and when Rohiëé and Mercury are conjoined with the moon.

Text 354

induù pürve 'hani jïe vä pare ced rohiëé-yutäkevalä cäñöamé våddhä sopoñyä navamé-yutä

induù-the moon; pürve-on the previous; ahani-day; jïe-Mercury; vä-or; pare-on the nexct; cet-if; rohiëé-yutä-with Rohiëé; kevalä-alone; ca-and; äñöamé-añöamé; våddhä-increased; sopoñyä-increased; navamé-yutä-with the navamé.

One should fast on the añöamé when on the previous day the moon is conjoined with Mercury, or when on the following day the moon is conjoined with Rohiëé, or when the añöamé is joined with the navamé.

Text 355

tathä ca pädme

muhürtenäpi samyuktä sampürëä cäñöamé bhavetkià punar navamé-yuktä kula-koöyas tu mukti-dä

tathä-so; ca-and; pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; muhürtena-with a muhurta; api-even; samyuktä-conjpined; sampürëä-full; ca-and; añöamé-añöamé; bhavet-is; kim-what?; punaù-more; navamé-yuktä-with the navami; kula-koöyaù-ten million relatives; tu-indeed; mukti-dä-giving liberation.

How much more is this true when on the añöamé even for a muhüta the moon is conjoined with Rohiëé and this day is joined with the navamé? At that time this day brings liberation to ten million of one's kinsmen.

Text 356

sütoktau ca

mäsi bhädra-pade kåñëä añöamé navamé bhavetpüjyäñöamé tataù pumbhiù strébhiç cäpi viçeñataù

süta-of Süta Gosvami; uktau-in the statement; ca-and; mäsi-in the month; bhädra-pade-of Bhadra; kåñëä-Kåñëa; añöamé-añöamé; navamé-navami; bhavet-is; püjyä-to be worshiped; añöamé-añöamé; tataù-then; pumbhiù-by men; strébhiù-by women; ca-and; api-and; viçeñataù-especially.

Çré Süta Gosvämé explains:

When in the month of Bhädra the kåñëa-pakña añöamé is joined with the navamé, that añöamé should be worshiped by all men and women.

Text 357

rohiëy-äder viyuktäpi sopoñyä kevaläñöamétat-tad-yogas tu vaisiñöye vrata-lopo 'nyathä bhavet

rohiëy-ädeù-beginning with Rohiëé; viyuktä-separtaed; api-even; sopoñyä-tpo be fasted; kevalä-only; añöamé-añöamé; tat-tad-yogaù-conjoined to that; tu-but; vaisiñöye-specifically; vrata-of the vow; lopaù-omission; anyathä-otherwise; bhavet-should be.

Even if the auspicious conjunction of Rohiëé and other luminaries are not present, one should still fast on Janmäñöamé. However, in the absence of these especially auspicious situations it is possible not to observe the vow.

Text 358

itthaà çuddhaiva likhitä yogäd bahu-vidhäñöamétyäjyä viddhä ca saptamyä sä viddhaikädaçé yathä

ittham-thus; çuddhä-pure; eva-indeed; likhitä-written; yogät-from yoga; bahu-vidhä-many kinds; añöamé-añöamés; tyäjyä-to be abandoned; viddhä-wounded; ca-and; saptamyä-by the saptami; sä-and; viddha-wounded; ekädaçéelkadasi; yathä-as.

In this way the many different kinds of pure añöamés are described in the writing of the scriptures. However, when it is mixed with the saptamé, the añöamé should not be observed. This is like an ekädaçé that should not observed.

Text 359

atha saptamé-viddha-janmäñöamé-niñedhaù

brahma-vaivarte

varjanéyä prayatnena saptamé-sahitäñöamésa-rkñäpi na kartavyä saptamé-samyutäñöamé

atha-; saptamé-viddha-viddha by the saptami; janmäñöamé-Janmäñöamé; niñedhaù-forbidden; brahma-vaivarte-in Brahma-vaivarta Puräëa; varjanéyä-to be avoided; prayatnena-carefully; saptamé-sahitäñöamé-the saptami; sa-rkñä-with the star; api-even; na-not; kartavyä-to be done; saptamé-samyutä-with the saptami; añöamé-the añöamé.

When It Is Viddha by the Saptamé, Janmäñöamé Should Not Be Observed


One should carefully avoid the añöamé that is viddha by the saptamé. Even if Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon, one should not observe an añöamé that is viddha by the saptamé.

Text 360

pädme

païca-gavyaà yathä çuddhaà na grähyaà madya-samyutamravi-viddhä tathä tyäjyä rohiëé-sahitä yadi

pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; païca-gavyam-pancay-gavya; yathä-as; çuddham-pure; na-not; grähyam-to be ataken; madya-with wine; samyutam-mixed; ravi-viddhä-wounded by the saptami; tathä-so; tyäjyä-to be rejected; rohiëé-sahitä-with Rohiëé; yadi-if.


As one should not accept pure païca-gavya if it is mixed with wine, so one should not observe Janmäñöamé if it is viddha by the saptamé. This is so even if Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon.

Text 361

pürva-viddhä yathä nandä varjitä çrävaëänvitätathäñöaméà pürva-viddhäà sa-åkñaà ca vivarjayet

pürva-viddhä-prteviously wounded; yathä-as; nandä-ekadasi; varjitä-avoided; çrävaëänvitä-with Sravana; tathä-so; añöamém-añöamé; pürva-viddhäm-wounded by the previous; sa-åkñam-with the star; ca-and; vivarjayet-should avoid.

As ekädaçé should not observed when it is viddha by the previous day, so Janmäñöamé should not be observed when it is viddha by the previous day. This is so even when the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon.

Text 362

varjanéyä prayatnena saptamé-samyutäñöamévinä åkñena kartavyä navamé-samyutäñöamé

varjanéyä-to be avoided; prayatnena-carefully; saptamé-samyutäñöamé-Janmäñöamé viddha by the saptami; vinä-with; åkñena-the star; kartavyä-to be done; navamé-samyutäñöamé-Janmäñöamé viddha by the navamé.

One should take care not to observe Janmäñöamé when it is viddha by the saptamé. However one should observe Janmäñöamé when it is viddha by the navamé. This is true even if the star Rohiëé is not conjoined with the moon.

Text 363

aviddhäyäà sa-åkñäyäà jäto devaké-nandanaù

aviddhäyäm-not viddha; sa-åkñäyäm-with the star; jätaù-born; devaké-nandanaù-the son of Devaké.

Lord Kåñëa, the son of Devaké, was born when the añöamé was not viddha and when the star Rohiëé was conjoined

with the moon.

Text 364

väsare vä niçärdhe vä saptamyäà ca yadäñöamépürva-miçrä tadä tyäjyä präjäpatyarkña-samyutä

väsare-in the day; vä-or; niçärdhe-in the middle of the night; vä-or; saptamyäm-on the saptami; ca-and; yadä-when; añöamé-the añöamé; pürva-miçrä-mixed with the previous day; tadä-then; tyäjyä-to be rejected; präjäpatyarkña-samyutä-with the star Rohiëé.

If, during the day or in the middle of the night, the añtamé is mixed with the saptamé, that añöamé should not be observed, even if the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon.

Text 365

pädme

janmäñöaméà pürva-viddhäà sa-åkñäà sa-kaläm apivihäya navaméà çuddhäà upoñya vratam äcaret

pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; janmäñöamém-Janmäñöamé; pürva-viddhäm-viddha by the previous day; sa-åkñäm-with the star; sa-kaläm-with a kala; api-even; vihäya-rejecting; navamém-navami; çuddhäm-pure; upoñya-fasting; vratam-vow; äcaret-should observe.


If it is viddha by the previous day, Janmäñöamé should not be observed. This is true even if it is sa-kalä and even if the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon. In that situation one should fast and observe the vow on the pure navamé instead of on the añöamé.

Text 366

sa-kaläpi sa-åkñäpi navamé-samyutäpi cajanmäñöamé pürva-viddhä na kartavyä kadäcana

sa-kalä-with kala; api-even; sa-åkñä-with the star; api-even; navamé-samyutä-with the navami; api-even; ca-and; janmäñöamé-Janmäñöamé; pürva-by the previous day; viddhä-viddhq; na-not; kartavyä-to be done; kadäcana-ever.

Even if it is sa-kalä and even if the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon, Janmäñöamé should never be observed on an añtamé that is viddha by the previous day.

Text 367

palavedhe tu viprendra saptamyä cäñöaméà tyajetsurayä bindunä spåñöaà gaìgämbhaù-kalasaà yathä

palavedhe-for a moment; tu-but; viprendra-O king of brahmanas; saptamyä-with the saptami; ca-and; añöamém-añöamé;

tyajet-sghould abandon; surayä-with wine; bindunä-with adrop; spåñöam-touched; gaìgämbhaù-kalasam-a pot of Ganges water; yathä-as.

As one should reject a pitcher of Ganges water that has been touched by a single drop of liquor, so one should reject a Janmäñöamé touched for even a moment by the saptamé.

Text 368

vinä rkñeëa kartavyä navamé-samyutäñöamésa-åkñäpi na kartavyä saptamé-samyutäñöamé

vinä-without; rkñeëa-the star; kartavyä-to be done; navamé-samyutä-with the navami; añöamé-añöamé; sa-åkñä-with the star; api-even; na-not; kartavyä-to be done; saptamé-samyutä-with the saptami; añöamé-añöamé.

Even if the star Rohiëé is not conjoined with the moon, one should observe the Janmäñöamé that is touched by the navamé. But, even if the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon, one should not observe the Janmäñöamé that is touched by the saptamé.

Text 369

tasmät sarva-prayatnena tyäjyam eväçubhaà budhaiùvedhe puëya-kñayaà yäti tamaù süryodaye yathä

tasmät-there; sarva-prayatnena-with all care; tyäjyam-to be avoided; eva-in deed; açubham-inauspicious; budhaiù-by the wise; vedhe-a moment; puëya-of piety; kñayam-destruction; yäti-attains; tamaù-darkness; sürya-of the sun; udaye-in the rising; yathä-as.

Therefore the wise should carefully avoid celebrating Janmäñöamé at that inauspicious time. By celebrating at that time all one's piety is at once destroyed in the same way the darkness of night is destroyed when the sun rises.

Text 370

yäjïavalkya-småtau

sampürëä cärdha-rätre tu rohiëé yadi labhyatekartavyä sä prayatnena pürva-viddhäà vivarjayet. iti.

yäjïavalkya-småtau-in the Yajnavalkya-smrti; sampürëä-full; ca-and; ardha-rätre-in the middle of the night; tu-indeed; rohiëé-Rohiëé; yadi-if; labhyate-is attained; kartavyä-to be done; sa-that; prayatnena-with care; pürva-viddhäm-viddha by the previous day; vivarjayet-should avoid; iti-thus.

In the Yäjïavalkya-småti it is said:

Even if the star Rohiëé is perfectly conjoined with the moon in the middle of the night, an añöamé that is viddha by the previous day should not be celebrated.

Text 371

yac ca vahni-puraëädau

proktaà viddhäñöamé-vratamavaiñëava-paraà tac ca kåtaà tad deva-mäyayä

yat-what; ca-aznd; vahni-puraëädau-in the Agni Puräëa and other scriptures; proktam-said; viddhäñöamé-vratam-an añöamé that is viddha;; avaiñëava-param-not dear to the Vaiñëavas; tat-that; ca-and; kåtam-done; tat-that; deva-mäyayä-by the illusory potency of the Lord.

In the Agni Puräëa and other scriptures it is said that the añöamé that is viddha in this way is not dear to the Vaiñëavas. Such an añöamé is a creation of the Lord's illusory potency, mäyä.

Text 372

tathä ca skände

purä devair åñi-gaëaiù sva-pada-cyuti-çaìkayäsaptamé-vedha-jälena gopitaà hy añöamé-vratam

tathä-so; ca-and; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; purä-previously; devaiù-by the demigods; åñi-gaëaiù-by the sages; sva-pada-from the status; cyuti-falling; çaìkayä-by the fear; saptamé-of the spatami; vedha-of moments; jälena-by the network; gopitam-hidden; hi-indeed; añöamé-vratam-the vow odf the añöamé.


Fearing that they would fall from their exalted posts, in ancient times the demigods and sages carefully avoided observing this vow on an añöamé viddha by the saptamé.

Text 373

iyaà prämäëikaiù kåñëa- deväcäryädi-vaiñëavaiùvyavasthänyä ca nirëétä likhitäcärataù satäm

iyam-this; prämäëikaiù-by the evidence; kåñëa-deväcärya-Kåñëadevacarya; ädi-beginning with; vaiñëavaiù-by the Vaiñëavas; vyavasthä-situation; anyä-another; ca-and; nirëétä-concluded; likhitä-written; äcärataù-from the activities; satäm-of the saintly devotees.

In this way, following the evidence presented by Çré Kåñëadeväcärya and other saintly Vaiñëavas and also following the practical actions of the great devotees, the way of observing Janmäñöamé and other holy days is described in this book.

Text 374

çuddhä ca rohiëé-yuktä pürve 'hani paratra caañöamy upoñyä pürvaiva tithi-bhänte ca päraëam

çuddhä-pure; ca-and; rohiëé-yuktä-with Rohiëé; pürve-on the previous; ahani-day; paratra-on the next; ca-and; añöami-the añöamé; upoñyä-to be fasted; pürva-previous; eva-indeed; tithi-of the day; bhä-of the star; ante-after; ca-and; päraëam-breaking the fast.

On a pure añöamé, when the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon and when the previous and following days are also pure, one should fast. One should break the fast after both the tithi and conjunction of the star Rohiëé have ended.

Texts 375 and 376

kevala-kåñëopäsanä-çästre gautaméya-tantre tantra-dékñäm uddiçya yathoktam

atha bhädräsitäñöamyäà präduräsét svayaà hariùbrahmaëä prärthitaù pürvaà devakyäà kåpayä vibhuù

rohiëy-åkñe çubha-tithau daityänäà näça-hetavemahotsavaà prakurvéta yatnatas tad-dine çubhe

kevala-kåñëopäsanä-çästre-scripture describing pure devotional service to Lord Kåñëa; gautaméya-tantre-in the Gautamiya Tantra; tantra-Tantric; dékñäm-initiation; uddiçya-in relation to; yathä-as; uktam-said; atha-then; bhädra-of the month of Bhadra; asita-in the Kåñëa-paksa; añöamyäm-on the añöamé; präduräsét-appeared; svayam-personally; hariù-Lord Kåñëa; brahmaëä-by Brahmä; prärthitaù-requested; pürvam-previously; devakyäm-in Devaké; kåpayä-mercifully; vibhuù-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; rohiëy-åkñe-the star Rohiëé; çubha-tithau-on the auspicious day; daityänäm-of the demigopds; näça-hetave-for destructionm; mahotsavam-a great festival; prakurvéta-should do; yatnataù-carefully; tad-dine-on that day; çubhe-auspicious.

In the Gautaméya Tantra, which describes pure devotional service to Lord Kåñëa, in the course of describing Vaiñëava tantric initiation, it is said:

On the demigod Brahmä's request, Lord Kåñëa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, mercifully appeared in the womb of Devaké on the kåñëa-pakña añöamé of the month Bhädra, an auspicious day when the star Rohiëé was conjoined with the moon. The Lord's mission then was to kill the demons. One should carefully celebrate a great festival on that auspicious day.

Text 377

räjanyair brähmaëair vaiçyaiù çüdraiç caiva sva-çaktitaùupaväsaù prakartavyo na bhoktavyaà kadäcana

räjanyaiù-by ksatriyas; brähmaëaiù-by brahmanas; vaiçyaiù-by vaisyas; çüdraiù-by sudras; caiva-and; sva-çaktitaù-according to therir ability; upaväsaù-fasting; prakartavyaù-to be done; na-not; bhoktavyam-to beeaten; kadäcana-ever.

On that day brähmaëas, kñatriyas, vaiçyas, and çüdras should all observe a fast, each according to his own ability. At no time on that day should anything be eaten.

Text 378

kåñëa-janma-dine yas tu bhuìkte sa tu narädhamaùnivasen narake ghore yävad ähüta-samplavam

kåñëa-janma-dine-on the day of Lord Kåñëa's birth; yaù-who; tu-indeed; bhuìkte-eats; sa-he; tu-indeed; narädhamaù-the lowest of men; nivaset-will reside; narake-in hell; ghore-horrible; yävat-as long as; ähüta-samplavam-the time of cosmic devastation.

One who eats on the day of Lord Kåñëa's birth is the lowest of men. He will live in a horrible hell until the time when the material universe is destroyed.

Text 379

añöamé rohiëé-yuktä cärdha-rätraà yadä spåçetupoñya taà tithià vidvän koöi-yajïa-phalaà labhet

añöamé-the añöamé; rohiëé-yuktä-with Rohiëé; ca-and; ardha-half; rätram-the night; yadä-when; spåçet-touches; upoñya-fasting; tam-that; tithim-day; vidvän-the wise; koöi-yajïa-phalam-the result of ten million yajnas; labhet-attains.

A wise devotee who fasts on the añöamé when the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon at the middle of the night attains the result of performing ten million yajïas.

Text 380

somähni budha-väre vä cäñöamé rohiëé-yutäjayanté näma sä khyätä taà labhet puëya-saïcayaiù

somähni-Monday; budha-väre-on Wednesday; vä-or; ca-and; añöamé-the añöamé; rohiëé-yutä-with Rohiëé; jayanté-Jayanté; näma-named; sä-that; khyätä-called; tam-that; labhet-attains; puëya-saïcayaiù-with great piety.

When the añöamé falls on a Monday or Wednesday when the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon, that day is called Jayanté. That day brings great piety.

Text 381

tasyäm upoñya yat päpaà lokaù koöi-bhavodbhavamvimucya nivased vipra vaikuëöhe viraje pure

tasyäm-on that day; upoñya-fastring; yat-what; päpam-sin; lokaù-the people; koöi-bhavodbhavam-in ten million births; vimucya-becoming free; nivaset-resides; vipra-O brahmanas; vaikuëöhe-in the spiritual world; viraje-pure; pure-in the city.

One who fasts on that day becomes free from the sins of ten million births. He resides in the pure spiritual world.

Text 382

añöamé navamé-viddhä umä-maheçvaré-tithiùsaivopoñyä sadä puëya- kaìkñibhé rohiëéà vinä

añöamé-añöamé; navamé-viddhä-viddha by the navami; umä-maheçvaré-tithiù-the day of Goddess Umä; sa-that; eva-indeed; upoñyä-to be fasted; sadä-always; puëya-piety; kaìkñibhiù-by they who desire; rohiëém-Rohiëé; vinä-without.

The añtamé viddha by the navamé is also sacred to Goddess Umä. They who desire piety should fast on that day, even if the star Rohiëé is not conjoined with the moon.

Text 383

para-viddhä sadä käryä pürva-viddhäà tu varjayetañöamé saptamé-viddhä hanyät puëyaà purä-kåtam

para-viddhä-viddha by the following day; sadä-always; käryä-to be observed; pürva-viddhäm-viddha by the previous day; tu-but; varjayet-should avoid; añöamé-añöamé; saptamé-viddhä-viddha by the saptami; hanyät-destroys; puëyam-piety; purä-kåtam-previous acquired.

One should observe the Janmäñöamé that is viddha by the following day and one should not observe it when it is viddha by the previous day. When it is viddha by the previous day, the añöamé destroys one's previously acquired piety.

Text 384

brahma-hatyä-phalaà dadyäd dhari-vaimukhya-käraëätkevalas tv arkña-yogena upaväsa-sthitià vinä na yacchati çubhaà käryaà munibhiù parikértitam

brahma-hatyä-phalam-the result of killing a brahmana; dadyät-gives; hari-vaimukhya-käraëät-from being averse to Lord Kåñëa; kevalaù-only; tu-indeed; arkña-yogena-with the star; upaväsa-sthitim-fasting; vinä-without; na-not; yacchati-gives; çubham-auspoiciousness; käryam-to be done; munibhiù-by the sages; parikértitam-glorified.

One who, because he is averse to Lord Kåñëa, does not observe a fast on the Janmäñöamé when the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon attains the sinful reaction of murdering a brähmaëa. He does not attain the pious benefits described by the sages.

Text 385

pare 'hni päraëaà kuryät tithy-ante vätha åkñataù

pare-on the following; ahni-day; päraëam-breaking the fast; kuryät-should do; tithy-ante-at the end of the tithi; vä-or; atha-then; åkñataù-from the star.

On the following day one should break his fast. The fast should be broken either at the end of the tithi or at the end of the time when the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon.

Text 386

yad-åkñaà vä tithir väpi rätrià vyäpya vyavasthitädivase päraëaà kuryäd anyathä patanaà bhavet. iti

yad-åkñam-the star; vä-or; tithiù-the tithi; vä-or; api-also; rätrim-the night; vyäpya-extending; vyavasthitä-situated; divase-in the day; päraëam-breaking the fast; kuryät-should do; anyathä-otherwise; patanam-falling down; bhavet-may be; iti-thus.

following day. By failing to do this one falls down.

Text 387

umä-maheçvaré-tithiù. iti tat-samjïety arthaù.

umä-maheçvaré-tithiù-Umä-maheçvaré-tithih; iti-thus; tat-samjïä-named that; iti-thus; arthaù-the meaning.

This day is also called Umä-maheçvaré-tithi.

Text 388

atra käraëaà yathoktaà bhoja-räjéye

añöamyäà püjayec chambhuà navamyäà çaktir ijyatetayor yoge tu sampräpte dvayoù pujä mahä-phalä. iti.

atra-here; käraëam-the reason; yathä-as; uktam-said; bhoja-räjéye-in the Bhoja-rajiya; añöamyäm-on the añöamé; püjayet-should worship; çambhum-Çambhu; navamyäm-on the navami; çaktiù-Çakti; ijyate-is worshiped; tayoù-of them; yoge-in the meeting; tu-indeed; sampräpte-attained; dvayoù-of them both; pujä-worship; mahä-phalä-great result; iti-thus.

The reason this is so is given in the following words of the Bhoja-räjéya:

On the añöamé one should worship Lord Çiva, and on the navamé one should worship his potency. When these two holy days meet, the performance of worship brings a great result.

Text 389

atra kevalam ity ädäv umä-maheçvaré tithiùtithiù proktä saiva yasmäd upoñyatvena niçcitä

atra-here; kevalam-only; iti-thus; ädäu-beginning; umä-maheçvaré-Uma-maheçvaré; tithiù-day; tithiù-day; proktä-said; sa-that; eva-indeed; yasmät-from which; upoñyatvena-because of being suitable for fasting; niçcitä-is considered.

The passage beginning with the word "kevalam" declares that this day is also called Umä-maheçvaré-tithi. Therefore one should fast on this day (the añtamé that is viddha by the navamé).

Text 390

api-çabdas tu tatra syäd yad-uktaà rohiëéà vinätasmäd aträpi saptamyä viddhäñöamy eva varjitä

api-çabdaù-the word api; tu-indeed; tatra-there; syät-is; yad-uktam-said; rohiëém-Rohiëé; vinä-without; tasmät-therefore; atra-here; api-even; saptamyä-by the saptami; viddha-viddha; añöami-the añöamé; eva-indeed; varjitä-to be avoided.

The word "api" here means "even if the star Rohiëé is not conjoined with the moon." However, the añöamé should not be observed when it is viddha by the saptamé.

Text 391

yad-åkñaà ceti yad-väkyaà tat tu sämänya-tad-yutau

prasaìgäd uktam asmin hi viddhä tyaktaiva sägraham

yad-åkñam-the star; ca-and; iti-thus; yad-väkyam-which statement; tat-that; tu-indeed; sämänya-tad-yutau-with that; prasaìgät-from contact; uktam-said; asmin-in that; hi-indeed; viddhä-viddha; tyaktä-to be avoided; eva-indeed; sägraham-carefully.

Therefore, even if the star Rohiëé is conjoined with the moon, one should take care not to observe an añtamé that is viddha by the saptamé.

Text 392

çruti-liìgädika-nyäyäc chruter eva hi mukhyatätad evam añöamé-hänau vrata-lopaù prasajyate tan-nirastaà pürvam eva skända-väkyänusärataù

çruti-liìgädika-nyäyät-from the indications of Sruti-sastra; chruteù-from Sruti; eva-indeed; hi-indeed; mukhyatä-predominence; tat-that; evam-thus; añöamé-añöamé; hänau-destroying; vrata-lopaù-breaking the ow; prasajyate-is attached; tan-nirastam-leaving that; pürvam-before; eva-indeed; skända-väkyänusärataù-accroding to the words of Skanda Puräëa.

Both the Çruti-çästra and the Skanda Puräëa affirm that one should not observe the añöamé that is viddha by the saptamé.

Text 393

janmäñöaméà pürva-viddhäà ity ädyaà yad-udéritamnåsiàha-paricaryäyäà dåñöäntaç ca pradarçitaù

janmäñöamém-Janmäñöamé; pürva-viddhäm-viddha by the previous day; iti-thus; ädyam-beginning; yad-udéritam-said; nåsiàha-paricaryäyäm-in the Nåsiàha-paricaryä; dåñöäntaù-an example; ca-and; pradarçitaù-shown.

This is described in the passage beginning with the words "Janmäñöaméà pürva-viddhäm". The Nåsiàha-paricaryä also gives an example to show this.

Text 394

daçamé-vedha-yogena çuddhaà hi dvädaçé-vratamsaptamy-avedha-vedhokti- vyavasthä yä kåtä paraiù nirastä sä purä devair ity ädi vacaso balät

daçamé-vedha-yogena-with the touch of the dasami; çuddham-pure; hi-indeed; dvädaçé-vratam-dvadasi vow; saptamy-a-not; vedha-vedhokti-vyavasthä-with the saptami; yä-which; kåtä-done; paraiù-by thers; nirastä-rejected; sä-that; purä-in ancient times; devaiù-by the devas; iti-thus; ädi-beginning; vacasaù-of words; balät-by the power.

A dvädaçé that is viddha by the daçamé is still pure. However, an añtamé that is viddha by the saptamé is rejected. This is confirmed by the passage beginning with the words “nirastä sä purä devaiù".

Text 395

vaiñëavävaiñëava-dvaidhäd dvyasthaiva tad arhati

vaiñëava-of Vaiñëavas; avaiñëava-and non-Vaiñëavas; dvaidhät-because of the difference; dvyasthä-two positions; eva-indeed; tat-that; arhati-should be.

It is because the Vaiñëavas and non-Vaiñëavas are different that there are two opinions about this.

Text 396

yata uktam ägneya-viñëudharmayoù

dvau bhüta-sargau loke 'smin daivä äsura eva caviñëu-bhaktaù småto daiva äsuras tad-viparyayaù

yataù-because; uktam-said; ägneya-viñëudharmayoù-in the Agni Puräëa and Visnu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khanda; dvau-two; bhütad; viñëu-bhaktaù-a devotee of Lord Viñëu; småtaù-remembered; daiva-godly; äsuraù-demonic tad-viparyayaù-the oppoiste of that.

In both the Agni Puräëa and the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, it is said:

There are two classes of men in the created world. One consists of the demoniac and the other of the godly. The devotees of Viñëu are the godly, whereas those who are just the opposite are called demons.*

Text 397

atha janmäñöamé-päraëa-käla-nirëayaù

çuddhäyäù kevaläyäç ca- ñöamé-våddhau tu päraëamtithy-ante bhe 'dhike bhänte dvi-våddhau caika-bhedataù

atha-now; janmäñöamé-päraëa-käla-nirëayaù-the time of breaking the fast after Janmäñöamé; çuddhäyäù-pure; kevaläyäù-only; ca-and; añöamé-añöamé; våddhau-in maturity; tu-indeed; päraëam-breaking the fast; tithy-ante-at the end of the tithi; bhe-at the star; adhike-more; bhänte-at rthe star; dvi-two; våddhau-mature; ca-and; eka-one; bhedataù-because of the difference.

The Time of Breaking the Janmäñöamé Fast

When the pure añtamé comes to an end, one should break the fast. The fast may be broken at the end of the tithi or at the end of the Rohiëé-moon conjunction.

Text 398

tathä ca vahni-puräëe

bhänte kuryät tither väpi çastaà bhärata päraëam

tathä-so; ca-and; vahni-puräëe-in the Agni Puräëa; bhänte-the star; kuryät-should do; titheù-of the tithi; vä-or; api-also; çastam-renjoined; bhärata-O Bharata; päraëam-breaking the fast.


O descendant of Bharata, one may break the fast at the end of the tithi or at the end of the Rohiëé-moon conjunction.

Text 399

kià ca

rohiëé-samyutä ceyaà vidvadbhiù samupoñitäviyoge päraëaà kuryur munayo brahma-vädinaù

kià ca-furthermore; rohiëé-samyutä-with Rohiëé; ca-and; iyam-this; vidvadbhiù-bythe wise; samupoñitä-fasted; viyoge-in separation; päraëam-breaking the fast; kuryuù-should do; munayaù-the sages; brahma-vädinaù-who speak of Brahman.

It is also said:

The wise fast during the Rohiëé-moon conjunction. When the conjunction is over, the brahmavädé sages break their fast.

Text 400

samyaugike tu sampräpte yatra ko 'pi viyujyatetatraiva päraëaà kuryäd evaà veda-vido viduù

samyaugike-conjunction; tu-indeed; sampräpte-attained; yatra-where; ko 'pi-something; viyujyate-is separated; tatra-there; eva-indeed; päraëam-breaking the fast; kuryät-should do; evam-thus; veda-vidaù-the knowers of the Vedas; viduù-wise.

The wise fast during the Rohiëé-moon conjunction. When the conjunction is over, the knowers of the Vedas should break their fast.

Text 401

yad vä

tithy-åkñayor eva dvayor ante tu päraëamsamarthänäm açaktänäà dvayor eka-viyogataù

yat-what; vä-or; tithy-åkñayoù-of the tithi or the star; eva-indeed; dvayoù-both; ante-at the end; tu-indeed; päraëam-breaking the fast; samarthänäm-able; açaktänäm-unable; dvayoù-of both; eka-viyogataù-because of bthe absence of one.

It is also said:

They who are able should break their fast after both the tithi and the Rohiëé-moon conjunction have come to an end. They who are not able may break their fast after one of these comes to an end.

Text 402

ata evoktam yäjïavalkyena

yä kaçcit tithayaù proktäù puëya-nakñatra-samyutäùåkñänte päraëaà kuryäd vinä çravaëa-rohiëé

ata eva-therefore; uktam-said; yäjïavalkyena-by Yajnavalkya; yä-which; kaçcit-some; tithayaù-tithis; proktäù-said; puëya-nakñatra-samyutäù-wioth the star; åkñänte-at the end of the star; päraëam-fasting; kuryät-should do; vinä-without; çravaëa-rohiëé-the star Rohiëé.

Yäjïavalkya explains:

When auspicious tithis are connected to auspicious stars one should break his fast at the time when the star's conjunction with the moon ends. The star Rohiëé is an exception to this rule.

Text 403

ata eva brahma-vaivarte

añöamyäm atha rohiëyäà na kuryät päraëaà kvacithanyät purä-kåtaà karma upaväsärjitaà phalam

ata eva-therefore; brahma-vaivarte-in the Brahma-vaivarta Puräëa; añöamyäm-on the añöamé; atha-then; rohiëyäm-in Rohiëé; na-not; kuryät-should do; päraëam-breaking the fast; kvacit-sometime; hanyät-destroys; purä-kåtam-previously done; karma-pious deeds; upaväsa-by fasting; arjitam-earned; phalam-result.


One should break his fast after both the añöamé and the Rohiëé-moon conjunction come to an end. If he does not, he destroys the pious merit he earned by fasting.

Text 404

tithir añöa-guëaà hanti nakñatraà ca catur-guëamtasmät prayatnataù kuryät tithi-bhänte ca päraëam

tithiù-day; añöa-guëam-eight times; hanti-kills; nakñatram-star; ca-and; catur-guëam-four times; tasmät-therefore; prayatnataù-with care; kuryät-should do; tithi-bhänte-at the end of the tithi and the star; ca-and; päraëam-breaking the fast.

By breaking the fast before the tithi's end one destroys his piety eight times over. By breaking the fast before the Rohiëé

Text 405

kecic ca bhagavaj-janma- mahotsava-dine çubhebhaktyotsavänte kurvanti vaiñëavä vrata-päraëam

kecit-some; ca-and; bhagavaj-janma-of the birtth of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; mahotsava-dine-onm the day opf the festival; çubhe-auspicious; bhaktyä-with devotion; utsava-the festival; ante-at the end; kurvanti-do; vaiñëavä-

Vaiñëavas; vrata-päraëam-breaking the fast.

The Vaiñëavas observe a great festival on the birthday of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. At the festival's end, the devotees break their fast.

Text 406

tathä coktaà gäruòe

tithy-ante cotsavänte vä vraté kurvéta päraëam

tathä-so; ca-and; uktam-saisd; gäruòe-in the Garuòa Puräëa; tithy-ante-at the tithi's end; ca-and; utsavänte-at the festuival's end; vä-or; vraté-observing the vow; kurvéta-should do; päraëam-breaking the fast.


At the tithi's end or the festival's end, one should break his fast.

Text 407

väyu-puräëe ca

yadécchet sarva-päpäni hantuà niravaçeñataùutsavänte sadä vipra jagannäthännam äçayet. iti.

väyu-puräëe-in the Vayu Puräëa; ca-and; yadi-if; icchet-desires; sarva-päpäni-all sins; hantum-to destroy; niravaçeñataù-completely; utsavante-at the festival's end; sadä-always; vipra-O brahmana; jagannäthännam-the prasadam remnant's of Lord Jagannätha; äçayet-should eat; iti-thus.

In the Väyu Puräëa it is said:

fast by eating the prasäda remnants from Lord Jagannätha.

Text 408

atha janmäñöamé-vrata-vidhiù

vrata-sädharanatväc ca saptamy-ädi-dina-trayekartavyä niyamäù sarve daçamy-ädi-dineñv iva

atha -now;janmäñöamé-vrata-vidhiù vrata-sädharanatväc-the method to observe the vow of Janmäñöamé; ca-and; saptamy-ädi-beginning with the saptami; dina-days; traye-three; kartavyä-to be done; niyamäù-self control; sarve-all; daçamy-ädi-begionning with the dasami; dineñu-in days; iva-like.

The Method of Observing the Janmäñöamé Vow

As one should be austere and self-controlled during the three-day period of daçamé, ekädaçé, and dvädaçé, so one should also be austere and self-controlled during the three-day period of saptamé, Janmäñöamé, and navamé.

Text 409

atha vidhi-viçeñaù


tad vrataà kédåçaà deva lokai sarvair anuñöhitamjanmäñöamé-vrataà näma pavitraà puruñottama

atha-now; vidhi-viçeñaù-the sepcific method; bhaviñyottare-in the Bhavisya Puräëa, Uttara-khanda; çré-yudhiñöhira-Çré Yudhiñöhira; uväca-said; tat-that; vratam-vow; kédåçam-like what?; deva-O Lord; lokai-by the people; sarvaiù-all; anuñöhitam-established; janmäñöamé-vratam-Janmäñöamé vow; näma-named; pavitram-purifying; puruñottama-O Supreme Personality of Godhead.

The Method of Observing the Vow

In the Bhaviñya Puräëa, Uttara-khanda, Çré Yudhiñöhira said:

O Supreme Person, what is the nature of this vow named Janmäñöamé-vrata, which should be observed by all people?

Text 410

tena tvaà tuñöim äyäsi lokänäà prabhavävyayaetan me bhagavan brühi prasädän madhusüdana

tena-by this; tvam-You; tuñöim-happiness; äyäsi-attained; lokänäm-of the people; prabhavävyaya-O Lord whose power is limitless; etat-this; me-to me; bhagavan-O Lord; brühi-please tell; prasädät-mercifully; madhusüdana-O Kåñëa.

This vow pleases You. O all-powerful Lord Kåñëa, please kindly describe this vow to me.

Text 411


pärtha tad-divase präpte danta-dhävana-pürvakamupaväsasya niyamaà grhëéyäd yata-mänasaù

çré-kåñëa uväca-Çré Kåñëa; pärtha-O Partha; tad-divase-on the day; präpte-attaineed; danta-dhävana-pürvakam-first brushing the teeth; upaväsasya-of fasting; niyamam-rule; grhëéyät-should accept; yata-mänasaù-with a controlled mind.

Çré Kåñëa said: O Pärtha, on that day one should first brush one's teeth, and then, with a controlled mind, follow the rules of fasting.

Text 412

ekenaivopaväsena kåtena kuru-nandanasapta-janma-kåtän päpän mucyate nätra saàçayaù

ekena-once; eva-indeed; upväsena-by fasting; kåtena-done; kuru-nandana-O delight of the Kurus; sapta-janma-kåtän-done in seven births; päpät-from sins; mucyate-freed; na-not; atra-here; saàçayaù-doubt.

O delight of the Kurus, by once fasting on this day a person becomes freed from the sins of seven births. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 413

upavåttasya päpebhyo yas tu väso guëaiù sahaupaväsaù sa vijïeyo nopaväsas tu laìghanam

upavåttasya-freed; päpebhyaù-from sins; yaù-who; tu-indeed; väsaù-the home; guëaiù-virtues; saha-wiuth; upaväsaù-fasting; sa-he; vijïeyaù-known; na-not; upaväsaù-fasting; tu-but; laìghanam-rebellion.

One who fasts on this day becomes free from sin. He becomes the home of many virtues. One who does not fast jumps over the rules of religion.

Text 414

atha tatra mantraù

adya sthitva nirähäraù sarva-bhoga-vivarjitaùbhokñye 'haà puëòarékäkña çaraëam me bhaväcyuta

atha-now; tatra-there; mantrah-situated; adya-today; sthitva-standing; nirähäraù-fasting; sarva-bhoga-vivarjitaù-without eating any food; bhokñye-will eat; aham-I; puëòarékäkña-O lotus-eyed one; çaraëam-shelter; me-to me; bhava-please become; acyuta-O infallible.

The Mantra For That

Today I stand before You. I am fasting. I have not eaten anything. Only tomorrow will I eat. O infallible, lotus-eyed Lord, please become my shelter.

Text 415

tataù snätvä tu madhyähne nady-ädau vimale jaledevakyäù çobhanaà kuryät su-guptaà sütikä-gåham

tataù-then; snätvä-bathing; tu-indeed; madhyähne-at midday; nady-ädau-in a river or other like place; vimale-pure; jale-in water; devakyäù-of Devaké; çobhanam-decoration; kuryät-should do; su-guptam-hidden; sütikä-gåham-maternity-room.

Then, at midday, one should bathe in the pure water of a river or other appropriate place. Then one should decorate the prison maternity-room of Devaké.

Text 416

atha sütikä-gåha-nirmäëa-vidhiù

padmarägair paöair netrair maëòitaà carcitaà çubhaiùramyaà vandana-mäläbhé rakñä-maëi-vibhüñitam

atha-now; sütikä-gåha-nirmäëa-vidhiù-the method of constructing the maternity room; padmarägaiù-with rubies; paöaiù-with cloth; netraiù-fine silk; maëòitam-decorated; carcitam-anointed; çubhaiù-with auspicious ointments; ramyam-beautiful; vandana-mäläbhiù-with garlands strung across the entrances; rakñä-maëi-with jewel amulets; vibhüñitam-decorated.

The Method of Constructing the Maternity-room

The maternity-room should be decorated with rubies, fine silk, and jewel-amulets. Garlands should be strung across the entrances. The room should be anointed with auspicious ointments.

Text 417

sarvaà gokula-vat käryaà gopéjana-samäkulam

ghaëöä-mardula-saìgétaà mäìgalya-kalasänvitam

sarvam-all; gokula-vat-like Gokula; käryam-to be done; gopéjana-samäkulam-filled with gopés; ghaëöä-bells; mardula-sweet; saìgétam-singing and music; mäìgalya-kalasänvitam-with auspicious waterpots.

Everything should be like Gokula. There should be many gopés. There should be auspicious waterpots. There should be sweet singing and the sounds of bells.

Text 418

yavärdra-svastikäbjädyaiù çaìkha-väditra-saìkulambandhakaré-loha-khaògair dépa-chäga-samanvitam

yava-barelycorns; adra-moistened; svastika-svastikas; abja-lotus flowers; ädyaiù-beginning with; çaìkha-väditra-saìkulam-filled with the sounds of conchshells; bandhakaré-shackles; loha-iron; khaògaiù-with swords; dépa-lamps; chäga-a chaga; samanvitam-with.

There should be moistened barleycorns, svastikas, lotus flowers, and other like things. There should be the sounds of conchshells. There should be shackles, an iron sword, a lamp, and a chäga.

Text 419

manthäna-väri-yüpaiç ca bhüti-sarñapa-vahnibhiùdväri vinasta-muñalaà rakñitaà raksa-pälakaiù

manthäna-churnig rod; väri-water; yüpaiù-yupa; ca-and; bhüti-bhuti; sarñapa-sarsapa; vahnibhiù-with fire; dväri-at the door; vinasta-placed; muñalam-a club; rakñitam-guarded; raksa-pälakaiù-by guards.

There should be a churning rod, water, a yüpa, a bhüti, a sarñapa, and a fire. A club should be placed at the door. the room should be protected by guards.

Text 420

ñañöhyä devyäç ca tatraiva

vidhänaà vidhi-vat tathäevam-vidhaà yathä-çakti kartavyaà sütikä-gåham

ñañöhyä devyäù-of Goddess Ñañöhé; ca-and; tatra-there; eva-indeed; vidhänam-establihsment; vidhi-vat-properly; tathä-so; evam-vidham-in this way; yathä-çakti-as one is able; kartavyam-should be done; sütikä-gåham-the maternity room.

Goddess Ñañöhé should also be placed there. Thus, as far as one is able, one should construct the maternity-room.

Text 421

tan-madhye pratimä sthäpyä sä cäpy añöa-vidhä småtäkäïcané räjaté tämré paittalé månmayé tathä värkñé maëimayé caiva varëikä likhitäthavä

tan-madhye-in the midts of that; pratimä-a Deity; sthäpyä-should be placed; sä-that; ca-and; api-also; añöa-vidhä-eight kinds; småtä-considered; käïcané-golden; räjaté-silver; tämré-copper; paittalé-brass; månmayé-clay; tathä-so; värkñé-wood; maëimayé-jewel; ca-and; eva-indeed; varëikä likhitä-a picture; athavä-or.

In the midst of that room a Deity should be placed. The Deity may be made of one of these eight substances: 1. gold, 2. silver, 3. copper, 4. brass, 5. clay, 6. wood, or 7. jewels, or 8. the Deity may be a picture.

Text 422

sarva-lakñaëa-sampannä paryaìke cärdha-suptikäpratapta-käïcanäbhäsä kåtä sä tu tapasviné prasütä ca prasnütä ca tat-kñaëäc ca praharñitä

sarva-lakñaëa-sampannä-endowed with all virtues; paryaìke-on the bed; ca-also; ardha-suptikä-half asleep; pratapta-käïcanäbhäsä-splendid like molten gold; kåtä-done; sä-she; tu-indeed; tapasviné-austere; prasütä-mother; ca-and; prasnütä-affectionate; ca-and; tat-kñaëät-from that moment; ca-and; praharñitä-joyful.

Devaké should should be resting, half-asleep, on the bed. She should be splendid like molten gold, filled with all virtues, austere, filled with maternal love, and, at that moment, joyful.

Texts 423 and 424

mäà cäpi bälakaà suptaà paryaìke stana-päyinamçrévatsa-vakñasaà devaà nélotpala-dala-prabham

çankha-cakra-gadä-çärìga- vana-mälä-vibhüñitamcatur-bhujaà mahaù-pürëaà sthäpayet tatra bhaktitaù

mäm-Me; ca-and; api-also; bälakam-child; suptam-asleep; paryaìke-on the bed; stana-päyinam-drinking from the breast; çrévatsa-vakñasam-chest marked with Çrévatsa; devam-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; nélotpala-dala-prabham-splendid like a blue lotus petal çankha-cakra-gadä-çärìga-vana-mälä-vibhüñitam-decorated with conchshell,

cakra, club, Çärìga bow, and forest garland; catur-bhujam-with four arms; mahaù-pürëam-effulent; sthäpayet-should place; tatra-there; bhaktitaù-with devotion.

With devotion one should place Me there on the bed. I should be a sleeping infant splendid like a blue lotus petal, My chest marked with Çrévatsa, effulgent, decorated with a forest garland, and in My four hands a conchshell, cakra, club, and Çarìga bow.

Text 425

yaçodäà cäpi tatraiva prasüta-vara-kanyakäm

yaçodäm-Yasoda; ca-and; api-also; tatra-there; eva-indeed; prasüta-vara-kanyakäm-the recently born beautiful infant girl.

Yaçodä and her beautiful newborn daughter should also be there.

Text 426

tatra devä grahä nägä yakña-vidyädharoragäùpraëatäù puñpa-mäläbhir vyagra-hastäù suräsuräù saïcaranta iväkäçe prakärair muditoditaiù

tatra-there; devä-the demigods; grahä-the rulers of the planets; nägä-the divine serpents; yakña-vidyädharoragäù-the yaksas, vidyadharas, and uragas; praëatäù-bowing down; puñpa-mäläbhiù-with flower garlands; vyagra-hastäù-in their hands; suräsuräù-the demigods and demons; saïcarantaù-flying; iva-as if; äkäçe-in the sky; prakäraiù-in ways; muditoditaiù-filled with happiness.

The devas, rulers of the planets, nägas, yakñas, vidyädharas, uragas, suras, and asuras should be happily flying in the sky. They should be offering respectful obeisances and carrying presents of flower-garlands in their hands.

Text 427

vasudevo 'pi tatraiva khaòga-carma-dhara-sthitaù

vasudevaù-Vasudeva; api-also; tatra-there; eva-indeed; khaòga-sword; carma-and shielf; dhara-sthitaù-holding.

Vasudeva should be holding a sword and shield.

Text 428

kaçyapo vasudevo 'yam aditis cäpi devakéçeña-nägo halé cätra yasodäditir eva ca

kaçyapaù-Kaçyapa; vasudevaù-Vasudeva; ayam-he; aditiù-Aditi; ca-and; api-and; devaké-Devaké; çeña-nägaù-Çeña-näga; halé-Balaräma; ca-and; atra-here; yasodä-Yaçodä; aditiù-Aditi; eva-indeed; ca-also.

Vasudeva was Kaçyapa, Devaké was Aditi, Balaräma was Çeña-näga, and Yaçodä was also Aditi. They should all be there.

Text 429

nandaù prajäpatir dakño gargaç cäpi catur-mukhaùeño 'vatäro räjendra kaàso vai kalinemi-jaù

nandaù-Nanda; prajäpatiù-Prajapati; dakñaù-Dakña; gargaù-Garga; ca-and; api-also; catur-mukhaù-the demigod Brahmä; eñaù-he; avatäraù-incarnation; räjendra-O king of kings; kaàsaù-Kaàsa; vai-indeed; kalinemi-jaù-prteviously bron as Kalanemi.

there.

Text 430

tatra kaàsa-niyuktä ye dänavä vividhäyudhäùte ca prahärikäù sarve suptä nidra-vimohitäù ariñöo dhenukaù keçé dänaväù çastra-päëayaù

tatra-there; kaàsa-by Kamsa; niyuktä-employed; ye-which; dänavä-demons; vividhäyudhäù-with various weapons; te-they; ca-and; prahärikäù-guards; sarve-all; suptä-asleep; nidra-vimohitäù-bewildered by sleep; ariñöaù-Arista; dhenukaù-Dhenuka; keçé-Kesi; dänaväù-demons; çastra-päëayaù-with weapons in their hands.

There also should be demon-guards sent by Kaàsa. Holding various weapons in their hands, they should all be asleep. Their names are: Ariñöa, Dhenuka, and Keçé.

Text 431

nåtyanto 'psaraso håñöäù gandharvä géta-tatparäùlekhanéyäç ca tatraiva käliyo yamunä-jale nanda-gopaç ca gopäç ca yaçodä ca prasütikä

nåtyantaù-dancing; apsarasaù-apsaras; håñöäù-joyful; gandharvä-gandharvas; géta-tatparäù-singing; lekhanéyäù-to be drawn; ca-and; tatra-there; eva-indeed; käliyaù-Kaliya; yamunä-jale-in the Yamuna's waters; nanda-gopaù-the gopa Nanda; ca-and; gopäù-the gopas; ca-and; yaçodä-Yasoda; ca-and; prasütikä-who has recently given birth.

In this picture should also be drawn or painted happily dancing apsaräs, singing gandharvas, Käliya in the Yamunä's waters, Nanda-gopa, many other gopas, and Yaçodä soon after she gave birth.

Texts 432-434

tataù püjopakramaù

ramyäm evam-vidhäà kåtvä devakéà nava-sütikämtäà pärtha püjayed bhaktyä gandha-puñpäkñataiù phalaiù

kuñmaëòair närikelaiç ca kharjürair daòimé-phalaiùvéja-püraiù püga-phalair naraìgaiù panasais tathä

deça-kälodbhavair miñöaiù puñpaiç cäpi su-gandhibhiùdhyätvävatärän prag-uktän mantreëänena püjayet

tataù-then; püjä-of worship; upakramaù-beginning; ramyam-beautiful; evam-vidham-like this; kåtvä-doing; devakém-Devaké; nava-sütikäm-recently given birth; täm-her; pärtha-O son of Prtha; püjayet-should worship; bhaktyä-with devotion; gandha-puñpäkñataiù-with fragrances, flowers, and unbroken grains of rice; phalaiù-with fruits; kuñmaëòaiù-with kuñmaëòas; närikelaiù-coconuts; ca-and; kharjüraiù-kharjüras; daòimé-phalaiù-pomegranates; véjapüraiù-vijapuras; püga-phalaiù-betelnuts; naraìgaiù-oranges; panasaiù-panasas; tathä-so; deça-kälodbhavaiù-born in that place and time; miñöaiù-sweet; puñpaiù-with flowers; ca-and; api-also; su-gandhibhiù-very fragrant; dhyätvä-meditating; avatärän-on the incarnations; prag-uktän-previously described; mantreëa-mantra; anena-with this; püjayet-should worship.

The Worship Begins

Thus one should make a beautiful picture. Then one should devotedly worship Devaké, who has recently given birth to Lord Kåñëa. One should worship her with fragrances, flowers, fruits, unbroken grains, kuñmaëòas, coconuts, kharjüras, pomegranates, véjapüras, betelnuts, oranges, panasas, with sweet and delicious fruits in season, and with fragrant flowers. Then one should meditate on the previously described incarnations. Then one should worship Devaké with the following mantra.


The phrase "previously described incarnations" refers to Devaké's incarnation as Aditi, and the other like incarnations already described.

Text 435

atha püjä-mantraù

aditir deva-matä tvaà sarva-päpa-praëäçinéatas tväà püjayiñyämi bhaya-bhéto bhavasya ca

atha-now; püjä-mantraù-the mantra for worship; aditiù-Aditi; deva-matä-the mother of the demigods; tvam-you; sarva-päpa-all sins; praëäçiné-destroying; ataù-therefore; tväm-you; püjayiñyämi-I will worship; bhaya-bhétaù-afraid; bhavasya-of repeated birth and death; ca-and.

The Mantra For Worshiping Devaké

You are Aditi, the mother of the demigods. You destroy all sins. Therefore I, who am afraid of this world of birth and death, will now worship You.

Text 436

püjitäsi yadä devaiù prasannä tvaà varänanetathä me püjitä bhaktyä prasädaà kuru su-vrate

püjitä-worshiped; asi-you are; yadä-when; devaiù-by the demigods; prasannä-pleased; tvam-you; varänane-with the beautiful face; tathä-so; me-by me; püjitä-worshiped; bhaktyä-with devotion; prasädam-mercy; kuru-please do; su-vrate-O saintly one.

O girl with the beautiful face, You were pleased when the demigods worshiped you. Now I worship you with devotion. O saintly one, please be merciful to me.

Text 437

yathä putraà priyaà labdhvä praptä te nirvåtiù parätathä me nirvåtià devi sa-puträ tvaà dadasva me

yathä-as; putram-to a son; priyam-dear; labdhvä-attaining; praptä-attained; te-of you; nirvåtiù-happiness; parä-great; tathä-so; me-of me; nirvåtim-happiness; devi-O goddess; sa-puträ-with a son; tvam-you; dadasva-please give; me-to me.

You are very happy to have a dear son. O goddess, please give a like happiness to me.

Text 438

gäyadbhiù kinnarädyaiù satata-parivåtä veëu-véëädi-nädair bhåìgärädarça-kumbha-prakara-håta-karaiù kinnaraiù sevyamänäparyaìke tväståte yä muditatara-mukhé putriëé samyag aste sä devé deva-mätä jayati su-vadanä devaké känta-rupä

gäyadbhiù-singing; kinnarädyaiù-beginning with the kinnaras; satata-parivåtä-always surrounded; veëu-véëädi-beginning with flutes and vinas; nädaiù-with sounds; bhåìgära-golden pitchers; ädarça-mirrors; kumbha-waterpots; prakara-multitudes; håta-held; karaiù-in their hands; kinnaraiù-by kinnaras; sevyamänä-beings served; paryaìke-on the bed; tu-indeed; äståte-covered; yä-who; muditatara-mukhé-happy face; putriëé-with a son; samyag-properly; aste-stays; sä-she; devé-goddess; deva-mätä-the mother of the

All glories to beautiful, beautiful-faced Devaké, the mother of the demigods. The happy-faced mother of a newborn son, she rests on her great bed. She is served by many kinnaras and other demigods, who sing songs, play music on flutes, véëäs, and other instruments, and carry in their hands gifts of golden vases, waterpots, and glistening mirrors.

Text 439

pädäv abhyaïjayanté çrér devakyäç caraëäntikeniñannä paìkaje püjyä namo devyai çriye iti

pädau-feet; abhyaïjayanté-anointing; çréù-the goddess of fortune; devakyäù-of Devaké; caraëäntike-the feet; niñannä-resting; paìkaje-on a lotus flower; püjyä-to be worshiped; namaù-obeisances; devyai-to the goddess; çriye-Çré; iti-thus.

Goddess Lakñmé anoints Devaké's feet with sweet fragrances. Reciting the mantra "namo devyai çriye" (Obeisances to Goddess Lakñmé), one should also worship Goddess Lakñmé, who sits on a lotus flower.

Text 440

avatära-sahasraà vai kåtaà te madhusüdanana saìkhyam avataräëäà kaçcij jänäti vai bhuvi

avatära-of incarnations; sahasram-thousands; vai-indeed; kåtam-done; te-of You; madhusüdana-O Lord Kåñëa; na-not; saìkhyam-counting; avataräëäm-of incarnations; kaçcit-someone; jänäti-knows; vai-indeed; bhuvi-in this world.

O Lord Kåñëa, You descend to this world in the forms of many thousands of incarnations. No one can count all Your incarnations in this world.

Text 441

brahmä çivädayo väpi svarüpaà na vidus tavaatas tväà püjayämy adya mätur utsaìga-çäyinam

brahmä-Brahmä; çivädayaù-beginning withÇiva; vä-or; api-also; svarüpam-transcendental form; na-not; viduù-understand; tava-of You; ataù-then; tväm-You; püjayämi-I worship; adya-now; mätuù-of Your mother; utsaìga-çäyinam-sittting on the lap.

Brahmä, Çiva, and all the demigods cannot understand the truth of Your transcendental form. O Lord, I worship You as You sit on Your mother's lap.

Text 442

sva-nämabhiç caturthyaà taiù praëavädi-namo-'ntakaiùpüjayeyur dvijäù sarve stré-çüdrä mantra-varjitäù

sva-nämabhiù-with Your names; caturthyam-in the datuve case; taiù-by them; praëavädi-namo-'ntakaiù-with Oà in the beginning and namaù at the end; püjayeyuù-should worship; dvijäù-the devas; sarve-all; stré-çüdrä-women and sudras; mantra-varjitäù-without mantras.

All the brähmaëas, and even the women and çüdras, who are not eligible to chant Vedic mantras, worship You by chanting your names in the dative case, names preceded by oà and followed by namaù.

Çré Sanätana Gosvämé comments:

An example of this is the the mantra "oà väsudeväya namaù".

Text 443

vidhy-antaram apécchanti kecid atra dvijottamäùcandrodaye çaçäìkäya dadyäd arghyaà harià smaran

vidhi-rule; antaram-another; api-even; icchanti-desire; kecit-some; atra-here; dvijottamäù-the best fo brahmanas; candrodaye-at moonrise; çaçäìkäya-to the moon-god; dadyät-should offer; arghyam-arghya; harim-Lord Hari; smaran-remembering.

If some exalted brähmaëas desire to perform more rituals, they may offer arghya to the moon-god at moonrise. As they thus offer arghya, they should meditate on Lord Hari, . . .

Text 444

anaghaà vämanaà çaurià vaikuëöhaà puruñottamamaparäjitaà väsudevaà mädhavaà madhusüdanam

anagham-sinless; vämanam-Vämana; çaurim-who appeared in the sürya-vaàça; vaikuëöham-the master of Vaikuëöha; puruñottamam-the supreme person; aparäjitam-invincible; väsudevam-Väsudeva; mädhavam-Mädhava; madhusüdanam-the killer of the Madhu demon.

. . . who is sinless, Vämana, the descendant of the sun-god, the master of Vaikuëöha, the supreme person, invincible, the son of Vasudeva, the husband of the goddess of fortune, the killer of the Madhu demon, . . .

Text 445

varähaà puëòarékäkñaà nåsiàhaà dharaëé-dharamdämodaraà padmanäbhaà keçavaà garuòa-dhvajam

varäham-Lord Varäha; puëòarékäkñam-lotus-eyed; nåsiàham-Lord Nåsiàha; dharaëé-dharam-the maintainer of the earth; dämodaram-whose waist was tied with a rope; padmanäbham-lotus-navel; keçavam-the master of Brahmä and Çiva; garuòa-dhvajam-who carries the flag of Garuòa.

. . . Lord Varäha, lotus-eyed, Lord Nåsiàha, the maintainer of the earth, the Lord whose waist was tied with a rope, the Lord whose navel is a lotus flower, the master of Brahmä and Çiva, the Lord who carries the flag of Garuòa, . . .

Text 446

govindam acyutaà kåñëaà anantaà puruñottamamadhokñajaà jagad-béjaà sarga-sthity-anta-käraëam

govindam-the pleasure of the cows, land, and senses; acyutam-infallible; kåñëam-all-attractive; anantam-limitless; puruñottamam-the supreme person; adhokñajam-beyond the perception of material senses; jagad-béjam-the seed of the universes; sarga-sthity-anta-käraëam-the creator, maintainer, and destroyer.

. . . the pleasure of the cows, land, and senses, infallible, all-attractive, limitless, the supreme person, beyond the perception of material senses, the seed of the universes, the creator, maintainer, and destroyer, . . .

Text 447

anädi-nidhanaà viñëuà trilokeçaà trivikramamnäräyaëaà caturbähuà çaìkha-cakra-gadä-dharam

anädi-nidhanam-without beginning or end; viñëum-all-pervading; trilokeçam-the master of the three worlds; trivikramam-who took three steps; näräyaëam-the resting place of all living entities; caturbähum-four-armed; çaìkha-cakra-gadä-dharam-who holds a

. . . without beginning or end, all-pervading, the master of the three worlds, the Lord who took three steps, the resting place of all living entities, four-armed, the Lord who holds a conch, disc, and club, . . .

Text 448

pétämbara-dharaà nityaà vana-mälä-vibhüñitamçrévatsäìkaà jagat-setuà çré-patià çré-dharaà harim

pétämbara-dharam-who wears yellow garments; nityam-eternal; vana-mälä-vibhüñitam-decorated with a forest garland; çrévatsäìkam-marked with Çrévatsa; jagat-setum-the ruler of the universes; çré-patim-the husband of the goddess of fortune; çré-dharam-the maintainer of the goddess of fortune; harim-the Lord who removes all that is inauspicious.

. . . the Lord who wears yellow garments, who is eternal, decorated with a forest garland, marked with Çrévatsa, the ruler of the universes, the husband of the goddess of fortune, the maintainer of the goddess of fortune, the Lord who removes all that is inauspicious, . . .

Text 449

devaké-garbha-sambhütaà daitya-sainya-vinäçanamgåhäëärghyam idaà deva govindäya namo namaù

ity arghya-mantraù

devaké-garbha-sambhütam-born in the womb of Devaké; daitya-sainya-vinäçanam-destroying the armies of demons; gåhäëa-please accept; arghyam-arghya; idam-this; deva-O Lord; govindäya-to Lord Govinda; namaù-obeisances; namaù-obeisnaces; iti-thus; arghya-the arghya; mantraù-mantra.

. . . who was born from Devaké's womb, and who destroyed the demon armies. The arghya mantra is, "gåhäëärghyam idaà deva govindäya namo namaù" (O Lord, please accept this arghya. Obeisances, obeisances to Lord Govinda.).

Text 450

atha snäna-mantraù

yogeçvaräya yoga-sambhaväya yoga-pataye govindäya namo namaù

atha-now; snäna-mantraù-the bathing mantra; yogesvaräya-to the master of yoga; yoga-sambhaväya-to the father of yoga; yoga-

The bathing mantra is, "yogeçvaräya yoga-sambhaväya yoga-pataye govindäya namo namaù" (Obeisances, obeisances to Lord Govinda, who is the controller of yoga, the father of yoga, and the master of yoga).

Text 451

atha vastra-däna-mantraù

yajïesvaräya yajïa-sambhaväya yajïa-pataye govindäya namo namaù

atha-now; vastra-garments; däna-offering; mantraù-mantra; yajïesvaräya-to the controller of yajnas; yajna-sambhaväya-to the father of yajnas; yajna-pataye-to the mater of yajnas; govindäya-to Lord Govinda; namaù-obeisances; namaù-obeisances.

The mantra for offering garments is, "yajïesvaräya yajïa-sambhaväya yajïa-pataye govindäya namo namaù" (Obeisances, obeisances to Lord Govinda, who is the controller of yajïa, the father of yajïa, and the master of yajïa).

Text 452 atha dhüpa-däna-mantraù

viçveçvaräya viçva-sambhaväya viçva-pataye govindäya namo namaù.

atha-now; dhüpa-däna-mantraù-the mantra for offering incense; viçveçvaräya-to the controller of the universe; viçva-sambhaväya-the father of the universe; viçva-pataye-the master of the universe; govindäya-to Lord Govinda; namaù-obeisances; namaù-obeisances.

The mantra for offering incense is, "viçveçvaräya viçva-sambhaväya viçva-pataye govindäya namo namaù" (Obeisances, obeisances to Lord Govinda, who is the controller of the universes, the father of the universes, and the master of the universes.

Text 453

atha naivedyärpaëa-mantraù

dharmeçvaräya dharma-sambhaväya dharma-pataye govindäya namo namaù

atha-now; naivedyärpaëa-mantraù-the mantra for offering food; dharmeçvaräya-to the controller of religion; dharma-sambhaväya-the father of religion; dharma-pataye-the master of religion; govindäya-to Lord Govinda; namaù-obeisances; namaù-obeisances.

The mantra for offering food is, "dharmeçvaräya dharma-sambhaväya dharma-pataye govindäya namo namaù" (Obeisances, obeisances to Lord Govinda, who is the controller of religion, the father of religion, and the master of religion).

Text 454

atha candrärghya-däna-mantraù

kñérodärëava-sambhüta atri-netra-samudbhavagåhäëärghyaà çaçäìkemaà rohiné-sahito mama

atha-now; candra-to the moon-god; arghya-arghya; däna-offering; mantraù-mantra; kñérodärëava-sambhüta-born from the milk-ocean; atri-netra-samudbhava-born from Atri Muni's eye; gåhäëa-please accept; arghyam--arghya; çaçäìka-O moon-god; imaàthis; rohiné-Rohiëé; sahitaù-with; mama-of me.

The mantra for offering arghya to the moon-god:

O moon-god born from the milk-ocean and from Atri Muni's eye, O moon-god now associating with Rohiëé, please accept this arghya I offer to you.

Text 455

sthaëòile sthäpayed devaà çaçäìkaà rohiëéà tathädevakéà vasudevaà ca yaçodäà nandaà eva ca

sthaëòile-on the altar; sthäpayet-should place; devam-the Lord; çaçäìkam-the moon-god; rohiëém-Rohiëé; tathä-so; devakém-Devaké; vasudevam-Vasudeva; ca-and; yaçodäm-Yaçodä; nandam-Nanda; eva-indeed; ca-and.

Then one should place on the altar Lord Kåñëa, the moon-god, Rohiëé, Devaké, Vasudeva, Yaçodä, Nanda, . . .

Text 456

balabhadraà tathä gopän gopé-gokulam eva caevaà kåte na sandeho naraù päpät pramucyate

balabhadram-Balaräma; tathä-so; gopän-the gopas; gopé-gokulam-the cows and gopés; eva-indeed; ca-and; evam-thus; kåte-done; na-no; sandehaù-doubt; naraù-person; päpät-from sin; pramucyate-is freed.

. . . Balaräma, the gopas, the gopés, and the cows. One who does this becomes free from sins. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 457

ardha-rätre vasor dhäraà pätayed güòa-sarpiñätato vardhäpanaà çañöhé nämädi-karaëaà tataù

ardha-rätre-in the middle of the night; vasoù-of water; dhäräm-a stream; pätayet-on eshould cause to fall; güòa-with mollasses; sarpiñä-and ghee; tataù-then; vardhäpanam-the ceremony of cutting the umbilical cord; çañöhé-Goddess Ñañöhé; nämädi-karaëam-the name giving ceremony; tataù-then.

In the middle of the night one should bathe Lord Kåñëa with a stream of water and with molasses and ghee. Then one should observe the ceremony for cutting the umbilical cord. Then one should worship Goddess Ñañöhé. Then one should observe the name-giving ceremony.

Text 458

kartavyaà tat-kñanäd rätrau prabhäte navamé-dineyathä mama tathä käryo bhagavatyä mahotsavaù

kartavyam-to be done; tat-kñanät-from that moment; rätrau-in the night; prabhäte-at sunrise; navamé-dine-on the navami; yathä-as; mama-of me; tathä-so; käryaù-duty; bhagavatyä-of the goddess; mahotsavaù-a festival.

Then, at daybreak of the navamé, one should celebrate a great festival honoring Goddess Durgä.

Text 459

brähmaëän bhojayed bhaktyä tebhyo dadyäc ca dakñiëämhiraëyaà rajataà gävo väsäàsi vividhäni ca

brähmaëän-brahmanas; bhojayet-should feed; bhaktyä-with devotion; tebhyaù-to them; dadyät-should give; ca-and; dakñiëäm-daksina; hiraëyam-gold; rajatam-silver; gävaù-cows; väsäàsi-garmewnts; vividhäni-various; ca-and.

Then one should offer a great feast to the brähmaëas and also offer them dakñiëä of gold, silver, cows, and many kinds of exquisite garments.

Text 460

yad yad iñöatmaà tena kåñëo me priyatäm iti

yad yat-whatever; iñöatmam-desired; tena-by that; kåñëaù-Lord Kåñëa; me-with me; priyatäm-may be pleased; iti-thus.

One should give the brähmaëas whatever they desire. At this time one should pray, "May Lord Kåñëa be pleased with me".

Text 461

yaà devaà devaké devé vasudeväd ajéjanatbhaumasya brahmaëo guptyai tasmai brahmätmane namaù

yam-which; devam-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; devaké-Devaké; devé-goddess; vasudevät-from Vasudeva; ajéjanat-gave birth; bhaumasya-of the earth; brahmaëaù-of Brahma; guptyai-for protection; tasmai-to Him; brahmätmane-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; namaù-obeisances.

I offer my respectful obeisances to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who, in order to give protection to Brahmä and all other living entities in this world, was born as the son of Vasudeva and Devaké.

Text 462

su-janma-väsudeväya go-brähmaëa-hitäya caçäntir astu çivaà cästu ity uktvä taà visarjayet

su-good; janma-birth; väsudeväya-to the son of Vasudeva; go-brähmaëa-hitäya-who protects the welfare of the cows and brahmanas; ca-and; çäntiù-peace; astu-may be; çivam-auspiciousness; ca-and; astu-may be; iti-thus; uktvä-speaking; tam-Him; visarjayet-should allow to go.

Obeisances to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is the son of Vasudeva and the auspiciousness of the cows and brähmaëas. May there be peace. May there be auspiciousness.

After speaking these words, one should take one's leave of the Deity.

Text 463

evaà yaù kurute devyä devakyäù su-mahotsavamvarñe varñe tu mad-bhakto dharmärthé dharma-nandana naro vä yadi vä näré yathoktaà phalam äpnuyät

evam-thus; yaù-who; kurute-does; devyä-goddess; devakyäù-of Devaké; su-mahotsavam-great festival; varñe-year; varñe-after year; tu-indeed; mad-bhaktaù-My devotee; dharmärthé-desiring piety; dharma-nandana-O son of Dharma; naraù-a man; vä-or; yadi-if; vä-or; näré-a woman; yathä-as; uktam-said; phalam-result; äpnuyät-will obtain.

O son of Dharma, a man or a woman who is devoted to Me, desires piety, and in this way year after year celebrates a

great festival in honor of Goddess Devaké, will attain the pious results described here.

Text 464

bhaviñye

ghåëéyän niyamaà pürvaà danta-dhävana-pürvakamniyamät phalam äpnoti na çreyo niyamaà vinä

bhaviñye-in the Bhaviñya Puräëa; ghåëéyät-may accept; niyamam-the sankalpa mantra; pürvam-before; danta-dhävana-brushing the teeth; pürvakam-before; niyamät-from the sankalpa mantra; phalam-the result; äpnoti-attains; na-not; çreyaù-better; niyamam-the sankalpa mantra; vinä-without.


One should brush one's teeth and then recite the saìkalpa-mantra. It is the saìkalpa-mantra that brings results. Without first reciting the saìkalpa-mantra one does not obtain the most auspicious result.

Text 465

niyama-mantraù

adya sthitvä nirähäraù çvo-bhüte parameçvarabhokñyämi devaké-putra asmin janmäñöamé-vrate

niyama-mantraù-the saìkalpa-mantra; adya-now; sthitvä-standing; nirähäraù-without eating; çvo-bhüte-tomorrow; parameçvara-O Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhokñyämi-I will eat; devaké-putra-O son of Devaké; asmin-on this; janmäñöamé-vrate-the vow of Janmäñöamé.

The Saìkalpa-mantra

O Supreme Personality of Godhead, O son of Devaké, now I stand before You. Today I will not eat. Only tomorrow will I eat. Today I will observe the vow of Janmäñöamé.

Text 466

upoñitas tu madhyähne snätvä kåñëa-tilaiù çubhaiùdhätré-phalaà çiro dadyän mahä-puëya-vivåddhaye

upoñitaù-fasting; tu-indeed; madhyähne-at midday; snätvä-bathing; kåñëa-tilaiù-with Kåñëa oil; çubhaiù-auspicious; dhätré-phalaà-an amalaki fruit; çiraù-to the head; dadyän-should place; mahä-puëya-vivåddhaye-to increase piety.

One should thus fast. At midday one should bathe, using auspicious kåñëa-oil as soap. Then, to increase one's piety, one should place a dhätré (ämalaké) fruit to one's head.


Because the ämalaké fruit is very dear to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, placing it to one's head brings one the great piety of devotional service to the Lord.

Text 467

kåtvä madhyähnikaà karma sthäpayed avraëaà ghaöampaïca-ratna-samäyuktaà pavitrodaka-püritam

kåtvä-doing; madhyähnikam-midday; karma-duty; sthäpayet-should place; avraëam-unbroken; ghaöam-pot; païca-ratna-samäyuktam-with five jewels; pavitrodaka-püritam-filled with pure water.

After performing one's midday duties one should take an unbroken pot decorated with five jewels and filled with pure water.

Text 468

tasyopari nyaset patraà karpüräguru-väsitamsu-dhüpa-väsitaà çubhraà puñpa-mäläbhiçobhitaà sauvarëaà vittavän bhaktyä tad-abhäve 'tha vaiëavam

tasya-that; upari-above; nyaset-should place; patram-a leaf; karpüräguru-väsitam-scented with camphor and aguru; su-dhüpa-with fragrant incense; väsitam-scenbted; çubhram-beautiful; puñpa-mäläbhiçobhitam-decorated with flower garlands; sauvarëam-gold; vittavän-wealthy; bhaktyä-with devotion; tad-abhäve-in the absence of that; atha-then; vaiëavam-bamboo leaf.

Above the pot one should devotedly place a beautiful leaf scented with camphor, aguru, and incense and decorated with a flower-garland. If one is wealthy one may place there a leaf of gold. If that is not possible one may place a bamboo-leaf.

Text 469

tasyopari nyased devéà haiméà lakñaëa-samyuktämdadämänaà6 tu putrasya stanaà vai vismitänanäm

tasya-that; upari-over; nyaset-should place; devém-the goddess; haimém-golden; lakñaëa-samyuktäm-with the features; dadämänam-offering; tu-indeed; putrasya-of the son; stanam-the breast; vai-indeed; vismita-surprised; änanäm-face.

Over that one should place a golden Deity of Goddess Devaké. Her face should have an expression of wonder. She should be offering her breast to her infant son.

Text 470

péyamänaù stanaà so 'tha kucägre päëinä spåçanavalokamänaù premëä vai mukhaà mätur muhur muhuù

péyamänaù-drinking; stanam-the breast; saù-He; atha-then; kucägre-the nipple; päëinä-with a hand; spåçan-touching; avalokamänaù-looking; premëä-with love; vai-indeed; mukham-face; mätuù-of mother; muhuù-again; muhuù -and again.

Touching her nipple with one hand, the infant Kåñëa should be drinking from her breast. With great love He should again and again gaze at His mother's face.

Text 471

kåtvä caivaà tu vaikuëöhaà mäträ saha jagat-prabhumkñérädi-snapanaà kåtvä candanena vilepayet

kåtvä-doing; ca-and; evam-thus; tu-indeed; vaikuëöham-the master of the spiritual world; mäträ-His mother; saha-with; jagat-prabhum-the master of the universes; kñéra-milk; ädi-beginning with; snapanam-bathing; kåtvä-doing; candanena-with sandal paste; vilepayet-should anoint.

Then with milk and other substances one should bathe Lord Kåñëa and His mother, Lord Kåñëa who is the master of the spiritual and material worlds. Then one should anoint Them both with sandal paste.

Text 472

kuìkumena mahä-bhäga karpüräguru-carcitampadma-koçéra-gandhaiç ca måganäbhi-vimiçritam

kuìkumena-with kunkuma; mahä-bhäga-O very fortunate one; karpüräguru-carcitam-anointed with camphor and aguru; padma-koçéra-gandhaiù-with fragrance from the lotus whorl; ca-and; måganäbhi-vimiçritam-mixed with musk.

O fortunate one, one should then anoint Them with kuìkuma, camphor, aguru, musk and the fragrance of lotus-whorls.

Text 473

çveta-vastra-yuga-cchannaà puñpa-mälä-su-çobhitammälaté-mallikä-puñpais campakaiù ketaké-dalaiù

çveta-vastra-yuga-cchannam-with white garments; puñpa-mälä-su-çobhitam-decorated with flower garlands; mälaté-mallikä-puñpaiù-with malati and mallika flowers; campakaiù-with campaka flowers; ketaké-dalaiù-with ketaki petals.

Then one should dress Them in white garments and decorate them with flower garlands and with mälaté, mallikä, and campaka flowers and with ketaké petals.

Text 474

bilva-patrair akhaëòaiç ca tulasé-patra-komalaiùanyair nänä-vidhaiù puñpaiù karavéraiù sitäsitaiù

bilva-with bilva; patraiù-leaves; akhaëòaiù-unbroken; ca-and; tulasé-patra-komalaiù-with soft tulasé leaves; anyaiù-other; nänä-vidhaiù-various; puñpaiù-flowers; karavéraiù-karavira; sitäsitaiù-light and dark colored.

Then one should also decorate Them with unbroken bilva leaves, soft tulasé leaves, karavéra flowers, and various kinds of light-colored and dark-colored flowers.

Text 475

yüthikä-çatapatraiç ca tathänyaiù kala-sambhavaiùpüjanéyo mahä-bhäga mahä-bhaktyä janärdanaù

yüthikä-çatapatraiù-with yüthikä and çatapatra; ca-and; tathä-so; anyaiù-with others; kala-sambhavaiù-in season; püjanéyaù-to be worshiped; mahä-bhäga-O very fortunate one; mahä-bhaktyä-with great devotion; janärdanaù-Lord Kåñëa.

Then one should decorate Them with yüthikä and çatapatra flowers and with other flowers in season. O fortunate one, in this way one should worship Lord Kåñëa with great devotion.

Text 476

kuñmaëòair närikelaiç ca kharjürair daòimé-phalaiùcüta-vrkña-samudbhütaiù phalai rambha-samudbhavaiù

kuñmaëòaiù-with kuñmaëòa; närikelaiù-with coconut; ca-and; kharjüraiù-with kharjüra; daòimé-phalaiù-with pomegranates; cüta-vrkña-samudbhütaiù-born from the mango tree; phalaiù-with fruits; rambha-samudbhavaiù-with bananas.

Then one should offer Lord Kåñëa kuñàaëòas, coconuts, kharjüras, pomegranates, mangoes, and bananas.

Text 477

tat-käla-sambhavair divyaiù phalair nänä-vidhair munenaivedyair vividhaiù çubhrair ghåta-pakvair anekadhä

tat-käla-sambhavaiù-in season; divyaiù-with splendid; phalaiù-fruits; nänä-vidhaiù-many kinds; mune-O sage; naivedyaiù-with foods; vividhaiù-various; çubhraiù-beautiful; ghåta-pakvaiù-cooked in ghee; anekadhä-many kinds.

O sage, in this way one should offer Lord Kåñëa many kinds of splendid fruits that are in season. One should also offer Him many kinds of delicious foods cooked in ghee.

Text 478

dépän vai kärayec cägre tathä kusuma-maëòapamgétaà vädyaà tathä nåtyaà stotra-päöhaà ca kärayet bälasya caritaà viñëoù päöhanéyaà punaù punaù

dépän-lamps; vai-indeed; kärayet-should cause to be; ca-and; agre-in His presence; tathä-so; kusuma-maëòapam-a flower-pavilion; gétam-songs; vädyam-instrumental music; tathä-so; nåtyam-dancing; stotra-päöham-reciting prayers; ca-and; kärayet-should cause to be; bälasya-of the child; caritam-the pastimes; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; päöhanéyam-to be recited; punaù-again; punaù-and again.

One should light many lamps before the Lord, and one should also offer Him a flower-pavilion, singing, instrumental music, dancing, and recitation of prayers. Again and again one should recite Lord Viñëu's childhood pastimes.

Text 479

sva-guruà püjya çaktyä vai püjanéyas tathä hariùniçi püjä vidhätavyä devakyäù keçavasya ca mantreëänena viprendra puräëa-vihitena vai

sva-gurum-one's own spiritual master; püjya-worshiping; çaktyä-with ability; vai-indeed; püjanéyaù-to be worshiped; tathä-so; hariù-Lord k; niçi-at night; püjä-worship; vidhätavyä-to be offered; devakyäù-of Devaké; keçavasya-of Lord Kåñëa; ca-and; mantreëa-mantra; anena-with this; viprendra-O king of brahmanas; puräëa-vihitena-given in the Puräëas; vai-indeed.

Then, as far as one is able, one should worship one's spiritual master, and then one should worship Lord Kåñëa. O king of brähmaëas, in the middle of the night one should worship Lord Kåñëa and Devaké with the following mantra from the Puräëas.

Text 480

atha devaké-püjä-mantraù

adite deva-mätas tvaà sarva-päpa-praëäçinéatas tväà püjayiñyämi bhéto bhava-bhayasya ca

atha-now; devaké-püjä-mantraù-the mantras for worshiping Decvaki; adite-O Aditi; deva-mätaù-O mother of the demigods; tvam-You; sarva-päpa-praëäçiné-destroying all sins; ataù-therefore; tväm-You; püjayiñyämi-I will worship; bhétaù-frightened; bhava-bhayasya-of the fear of repeated birth and death; ca-and.

The Mantras For Worshiping Devaké

O Aditi, O mother of the demigods, You destroy all sins. That is why I, who am afraid of taking birth again in this world, will now worship You.

Text 481

püjitä tu yathä devaiù prasannä tvam varänanepüjitä tu mayä bhaktyä prasädaà kuru su-vrate

püjitä-worshiped; tu-indeed; yathä-as; devaiù-by the devas; prasannä-pleased; tvam-You; varänane-O beautiful-faced one; püjitä-worshiped; tu-indeed; mayä-by me; bhaktyä-with devotion; prasädam-mercy; kuru-please do; su-vrate-O saintly one.

O beautiful-faced one, you are pleased when the demigods worship you. O saintly one, as they worship you with devotion so will I. Please be merciful to me.

Text 482

yathä putraà harià labdhvä

präptä te niåvrtiù paränirvåtià devi täm eva sa-puträ tvam prayaccha me

yathä-as; putram-son; harim-Lord Hari; labdhvä-attained; präptä-attained; te-of you; niåvrtiù-happiness; parä-transcendental; nirvåtim-happiness; devi-O goddess; täm-that; eva-indeed; sa-puträ-with your son; tvam-you; prayaccha-please give; me-to me.

You became very happy to attain Lord Hari as your son. O goddess, please give that same kind of happiness to me.

Text 483

çré-kåñëa-püjä-mantraù

avatärän sahasräëi karoñi madhusüdanana te saìkhyävatäräëäà kaçcij jätäni vai bhuvi

çré-kåñëa-püjä-mantraù-the mantras for worshiping Lord Kåñëa; avatärän-incarnations; sahasräëi-thousands; karoñi-You do; madhusüdana-O k; na-not; te-of You; saìkhyä-number; avatäräëäm-of incarnations; kaçcij-something; jätäni-born; vai-indeed; bhuvi-on the earth.

The Mantras For Worshiping Lord Kåñëa

O Lord Kåñëa, You descend to this world in many thousands of incarnations. No one can count the number of Your incarnations in this world.

Text 484

devä brahmädayo väpi svarüpaà na vidus tavaatas tväà püjayiñyämi mätur utsaìga-saàsthitam

devä-the demigods; brahmädayaù-headed by Brahma; vä-or; api-even; svarüpam-the form; na-not; viduù-know; tava-of You; ataù-then; tväm-You; püjayiñyämi-I will worship; mätuù-of the mother; utsaìga-saàsthitam-on the lap.

Brahmä and the demigods do not understand the true nature of Your transcendental form. Now I will worship You as You sit on Your mother's lap.

Text 485

väïchitam kuru me deva duñkåtaà caiva näçayakuruñva me dayäà deva samsärärti-bhayäpaha

väïchitam-desire; kuru-do; me-of me; deva-O Lord; duñkåtam-sins; ca-and; eva-indeed; näçaya-destroy; kuruñva-please do; me-of me; dayäm-mercy; deva-O Lord; samsärärti-bhayäpaha-who removes the fearful sufferings of repeated birth and death.

O Lord please fulfill my desires and destroy my sins. O Lord who removes the fears and sufferings of this world of birth and death, please be merciful to me.

Text 486

evaà sampüjya govindaà pätre tilamaye sthitamtataç ca däpayed arghyam indor udayataù çuciù

evam-thus; sampüjya-worshiping; govindam-Lord Kåñëa; pätre-in a bowl; tilamaye-made with sesame seeds; sthitam-situated; tataù-then; ca-and; däpayet-should offer; arghyam-arghya; indoù-of the moon; udayataù-rising; çuciù-purity.

After worshiping Lord Govinda in this way, one should offer Him arghya splendid and pure like the rising moon, arghya in a bowl with sesame seeds.

Text 487

kåñëäya prathamaà dadyäd devaké-sahitäya vaiarghyam åñi-vara-çreñöha sarva-käma-phala-pradam

kåñëäya-to Lord Kåñëa; prathamam-first; dadyät-should offer; devaké-sahitäya-with Devaké; vai-indeed; arghyam-arghya; åñi-vara-çreñöha-O best of the sages; sarva-käma-phala-pradam-fulfilling all desires.

O best of sages, thus one should begin by offering arghya to Lord Kåñëa and Devaké, arghya that brings the fulfillment of all desires.

Text 488

atha arghya-däna-mantraù

jätaù kaàsa-vadhärthäya bhü-bhärottäraëäya cadevatänäà hitärthäya dharma-saàsthäpanäya cakauraväëäà vinäçäya daitanyänäà nidhanäya ca

atha-now; arghya-däna-mantraù-the mantras for offering arghya; jätaù-born; kaàsa-vadhärthäya-to kill Kamsa; bhü-bhärottäraëäya-to remove the birden opf the earth; ca-and; devatänäm-of the demigods; hitärthäya-to bring auspiciousness; dharma-saàsthäpanäya-to establish religion; ca-and; kauraväëäm-of the Kauravas; vinäçäya-for destruction; daitanyänäm-of the demons; nidhanäya-for destruction; ca-and.

The Mantras For Offering Arghya

O Lord Kåñëa, You took birth in this world to kill Kaàsa, remove the earth's burden, establish religion, and kill the demons and the Kauravas.

Text 489

gåhäëärghyaà mayä dattaà devaké-sahito mama

gåhäëa-please accept; arghyam-arghya; mayä-by me; dattam-offered; devaké-sahitaù-with Devaké; mama-of me.

O Lord who stays with Devaké, please accept this arghya I offer to You.

Text 490

çré-kåñëäya devaké-sahitäya sa-parivaräya lakñmé-sahitäya arghyaà namaù

çré-kåñëäya-to Çré Kåñëa; devaké-sahitäya-accompanied by DFevaki; sa-parivaräya-with Your associates; lakñmé-sahitäya-with Lakñài; arghyam-arghyam; namaù-obeisances.

I offer this arghya to Lord Kåñëa, who is accompanied by Devaké, by Goddess Lakñmé, and by His other associates. I offer my respectful obeisances to Him.

Text 491

atha candrärghya-mantraù

dadhi-puñpäkñatair miçraà tato 'rghyam çaçine mudäkñérodärëava-sambhüta atri-netra-samudbhava arghyam indo gåhäëa tvaà rohiëyä sahito mama

atha-now; candrärghya-mantraù-the mantras for offering arghya to the moon; dadhi-puñpäkñataiù-with yogurt, flowers, and unbroken grains; miçram-mixed; tataù-then; arghyam-arghya; çaçine-to the moon; mudä-happily; kñérodärëava-sambhüta-born from the ocean of milk; atri-netra-samudbhava-born from Atri's eye; arghyam-arghyam; indaù-O moon; gåhäëa-please accept; tvam-you; rohiëyä-Rohiëé; sahitaù-with; mama-of me.

Mantras For Offering Arghya to the Moon-god

O Moon-god born from the milk-ocean and from Atri's eye, O Moon-god now associating with Rohiëé, please accept this arghya mixed with yogurt, flowers, and unbroken rice.

Text 492

närikelena çubhreëa dadyäd arghyaà vicakñaëaùkåñëäya parayä bhaktyä çaìkhe kåtvä vidhänataù

närikelena-with a coconut; çubhreëa-splendid; dadyät-should give; arghyam-arghya; vicakñaëaù-wise; kåñëäya-to Lord Kåñëa; parayä-with great; bhaktyä-devotion; çaìkhe-in a conchshell; kåtvä-doing; vidhänataù-properly.

A wise devotee should first offer arghya in a coconut shell. Then, with great devotion, he should offer arghya in a conchshell to Lord Kåñëa.

Text 493

dadyäd bhü-maëòalaà kåtsnaà sa-sägara-nagänvitamarghya-dänena tat puëyaà labhate mänavo bhuvi

dadyät-should offer; bhü-maëòalam-the entire earth; kåtsnam-entire; sa-sägara-nagänvitam-with oceans and and mountaiuns; arghya-dänena-by offering arghya; tat-that; puëyam-piety; labhate-attains; mänavaù-a person; bhuvi-in this world.

By offering arghya in this way a person in this world attains the same piety he would attain by offering the entire

earth, with all its seas and mountains.

Text 494

géta-çästra-kathäläpaiù kuryäj jägaraëaà niçidhüpa-dépaà ca naivedyaà tämbülaà däpayed dhareù

géta-çästra-kathäläpaiù-with talk of Bhagavad-gita; kuryät-should do; jägaraëam-all night vigil; niçi-at night; dhüpa-incense; dépam-lamos; ca-and; naivedyam-food; tämbülam-betelnuts; däpayet-should offer; hareù-to Lord Kåñëa.

Spending the time with talks of the scripture Bhagavad-gétä, one should keep an all-night vigil. To Lord Kåñëa one should offer incense, lamps, food, and betelnuts.

Text 495

evaà janmäñöméà kåtvä kartavyaà nävaçiñyatesarvaà puëya-phalaà präpya ante yäti padaà hareù

evam-thus; janmäñömém-Janmäñöamé; kåtvä-doing; kartavyam-to bedone; na-not; avaçiñyate-remains; sarvam-all; puëya-phalam-results of piety; präpya-attaining; ante-atthe end; yäti-goes; padam-to the abode; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa.

When one observes Janmäñöamé in this way, nothing else remains that he need do. He has already attained all pious benefits. At the end of this lifetime he will go to the abode of Lord Kåñëa.

Text 496

brahma-puräëe ca

atha bhädra-pade mäsi kåñëäñömyäà kalau yugeañöoviàçatime jätaù kåñëo 'sau devaké-sutaù

brahma-puräëe-in the Brahma Purana; ca-and; atha-now; bhädra-pade-Bhadra; mäsi-in the month; kåñëäñömyäm-on Kåñëa-Janmäñöamé; kalau-in Kali; yuge-yuga; añöoviàçatime-28th; jätaù-born; kåñëaù-Lord Kåñëa; asau-He; devaké-sutaù-the son of Devaké.

In the Brahma Puräëa it is said:

In the twenty-eighth Kali-yuga, in the month of Bhädra, on the kåñëa-pakña añöamé, Lord Kåñëa was born as Devaké son.

Text 497

bhärävatäraëärthäya kñatriyäëäà kñayäya catasmät sa tatra sampüjyo yaçodä devaké tathä

bhära-the burden; avatäraëa-removing; arthäya-for the purpose; kñatriyäëäm-of the ksatriyas; kñayäya-for destruction; ca-and; tasmät-therefore; sa-He; tatra-there; sampüjyaù-to be worshiped; yaçodä-Yasoda; devaké-Devaki; tathä-so.

Lord Kåñëa come to this world to remove the earth's burden and kill a host of demonic kñatriyas. That is why Lord Kåñëa should be worshiped on this day. Devaké and Yaçodä should also be worshiped on this day.

Text 498

gandha-mälyais tathä yävair yava-godhüma-sambhavaiùsa-gorasair bhakyña-bhojyaiù phalaiç ca vividhair api rätrau prajägaraù käryo nåtya-géta-samäkulaù. iti.

gandha-with scents; mälyaiù-with garlands; tathä-so; yavaiù-with barley; yava-godhüma-sambhavaiù-made from wheat; sa-gorasaiù-with milk; bhakyña-bhojyaiù-with foods; phalaiù-with fruits; ca-and; vividhaiù-various; api-also; rätrau-at night; prajägaraù-awake; käryaù-to be done; nåtya-géta-samäkulaù-with singing and dancing; iti-thus.

One should keep an all-night vigil. One should glorify the Lord with singing and dancing. One should offer Lord Kåñëa fragrances, flower garlands, various kinds of fruits, and delicious foods made with wheat, barley, milk, and other substances.

Text 499

yo bhaviñyottarädy-ukto vidhis tad-anusärataùsarvaà janmäñömé-kåtyaà eki-kåtyätra likhyate

yaù-who; bhaviñyottarädy-uktaù-said in Bhavisya Purana, Uttara-khanda and other scriptures; vidhiù-rule; tad-anusärataù-by following that; sarvam-all; janmäñömé-kåtyam-duties of Janmäñöamé; eki-kåtya-becoming one; atra-here; likhyate-is written.

In this book are gathered in one place all the Janmäñöamé duties described in the Bhaviñya Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa and in other scriptures also.

Text 500

eka-bhaktänantaraà tu danta-dhävana-pürvakamsäptamyäm athaväñömyäà prätaù saìkalpaà äcaret

eka-bhaktänantaram-devotee; tu-indeed; danta-dhävana-pürvakam-previously brishing the teeth; säptamyäm-on the saptami; athavä-or; añömyäm-on the astami; prätaù-early in the morning; saìkalpam-sankalpa; äcaret-should do.

On the saptamé, or in the early morning of the añöamé, a devotee should brush his teeth and then recite the saìkalpa-mantra.

Text 501

atha tatra mantraù

adya sthitvä nirähäraù sarva-bhoga-vivarjitaùbhokñe 'haà puëòarikakña çaraëaà me bhaväcyuta

atha-then; tatra-there; mantraù-mantra; adya-now; sthitvä-standing; nirähäraù-without eating; sarva-bhoga-all eating; vivarjitaù-without; bhokñe-eat; aham-I; puëòarikakña-O lotus-eyed Lord; çaraëam-shelter; me-of me; bhava-please be; acyuta-O infallible Lord.

The Saìkalpa-mantra

Now I stand before You. Today I will not eat. I will not eat anything. Only tomorrow will I eat. O lotus-eyed one, O infallible Lord, please become my shelter.

Text 502

kurvéta prätar añömyäà snapanädi tilaiù prabhoùarpayec ca navaà sarvaà çiñöäcäränusärataù

kurvéta-should do; prätaù-in the early morning; añömyäm-on the astami; snapanädi-beginning with bathing; tilaiù-with oil; prabhoù-of the Lord; arpayet-should offer; ca-and; navam-new; sarvam-all; çiñöäcäränusärataù-by following the orders.

Early on the añöamé morning one should, using oil as soap, bathe the Deity of the Lord. Then one should obediently dress the Deity of the Lord in new garments.

Text 503

madhyähne ca çubhe térthe 'nyatra vä saj-jale vratémürdhni dhätré-phalaà dattvä snäyät kåñëa-tilaiù çubhaiù

madhyähne-in midday; ca-and; çubhe-auspicious; térthe-on a day; anyatra-another; vä-or; sat-jale-in pure water; vraté-following the vow; mürdhni-to the head; dhätré-phalam-amalaki fruit; dattvä-placing; snäyät-should bathe; kåñëa-tilaiù-with Kåñëa-oil; çubhaiù-auspicious.

A midday the person following this vow should touch an ämalaké fruit to his head and then, using kåñëa-oil as soap, bathe in a holy river or in the pure water of an ordinary place.

Text 504

atha madhyähnikaà nitya- kåtam anyat samäpya hisu-deçe racayed divyaà devakyäù sütikä-gåham

atha-then; madhyähnikam-midday; nitya-regular; kåtam-duties; anyat-other; samäpya-completing; hi-indeed; su-deçe-in a good place; racayet-should make; divyam-transcendental; devakyäù-of Devaké; sütikä-gåham-the delivery-room.

After completing his other midday duties, in an appropriate place this person should then construct the transcendental maternity-room of Devaké-devé.

Text 505

bhüñitaà maëibhir vastra- vitänais toraëair api

abaddhaiù phala-puñpaiç ca ghåta-pakvädibhis tathä

bhüñitam-dedcorated; maëibhiù-with jewels; vastra-cloth; vitänaiù-with curtains; toraëaiù-with arches; api-also; äbaddhaiù-tied; phala-puñpaiù-with fruits and flowers; ca-and; ghåta-pakvädibhiù-cooked in ghee; tathä-so.

He should then decorate the room with jewels, curtains, archways, flowers, and fruits, and he should place in it different foods cooked in ghee.

Text 506

yava-dürdhvämbujädy-äòhyaà vädya-gétädi-saìkulamdväre ca çåìkhalä-loha- khaòga-cchägädi-samyutam

yava-barley; dürdhva-durva grass; ambuja-lotus; ädi-beginning; ädyam-opulent; vädya-gétädi-saìkulam-with singing and music; dväre-at the door; ca-and; çåìkhalä-shackles; loha-iron; khaòga-sword; chäga-chaga; ädi-samyutam-beginning with.

In the room should be barley, dürva grass, lotus flowers, and other things. There should be singing and instrumental music. At the door should be placed shackles, an iron sword, a chäga, and other items.

Text 507

gokulaà vilikhet tatra gopa-gopéjanävåtamrakña-päläàç ca gehasya sarvato 'vasthitän likhet

gokulam-gokula; vilikhet-there; tatra-should draw; gopa-gopéjanävåtam-withgopas and gopé; rakña-päläàù-guards; ca-and; gehasya-of the house; sarvataù-everywhere; avasthitän-situated; likhet-should draw.

There he should draw a picture of Gokula filled with many gopas and gopés. He should also draw a picture of the prison with guard's everywhere.

Text 508

tan-madhye sarvatobhadra- maëòale sthäpayed ghaöampätraà tad-upari nyased dhaimaà vaiëavam eva vä

tan-madhye-in the middle of that; sarvatobhadra-maëòale-a sarvatobhadra design; sthäpayet-should place; ghaöam-a waterpot; pätram-leaf; tad-upari-above that; nyaset-should place; dhaimam-golden; vaiëavam-bamboo; eva-indeed; vä-or.

In the middle of that he should place a sarvatobhadra design, and there he should place a waterpot. Above the waterpot he should place a leaf of gold, or if not of gold then a bamboo leaf.

Text 509

devakéà sthäpayet tatra svarëenänyena vä kåtamsal-lakñaëaà su-paryaìke suptäà snuta-payodharäm

devakém-Devaki; sthäpayet-should place; tatra-there; svarëena-gold; anyena-with another; vä-or; kåtam-make; sat-lakñaëam-beautiful; su-paryaìke-on the beautiful bed; suptäm-asleep; snuta-payodharäm-milk flowing from her breasts.

There one should place a beautiful deity of Devaké, a deity made of gold, or of another material. Her breasts filled with milk, beautiful Devaké should be asleep on the beautiful bed.

Text 510

tathaiva bhagavantaà ca tad-utsaìge stanan-dhayamnija-lakñaëa-sampannaà sthäpayec chayitaà sukham

tathä-so; eva-indeed; bhagavantam-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; ca-also; tad-utsaìge-on her embrace; stanan-dhayam-an infant drinking milk; nija-lakñaëa-sampannam-with His own qualities; sthäpayet-should place; çayitam-sleeping; sukham-happily.

So also one should place a Deity of Lord Kåñëa. Lord Kåñëa should be an infant happily sleeping in his mother's embrace.

Text 511

tathä kvacit pradeçe ca çré-yaçodäà sa-kanyakämçré-nandaà rohiëéà rämaà gopän gopéç ca gä api

tathä-so; kvacit-somewhere; pradeçe-in the place; ca-and; çré-yaçodäm-Çré Yasoda; sa-kanyakäm-with her daughter; çré-nandam-Çré Nanda; rohiëém-Rohini; rämam-Balaräma; gopän-gopas; gopéù-gopés; ca-and; gä-cows; api-also.

There also one should place Çré Yaçoda, her daughter, Çré Nanda, Rohiëé, Balaräma, and the gopas and gopés.

Text 512

vasudevaà ca devakyäù samépe muditänanamkhaòga-päëià stuvantaà ca vismayotphulla-locanam

vasudevam-vasudeva; ca-and; devakyäù-Ddvaki; samépe-near; muditänanam-with a happy expression on his face; khaòga-päëim-a sword in his hand; stuvantam-offering prayers; ca-and; vismayotphulla-locanam-his eyes wide-open with wonder.

Near Devaké should be Vasudeva, his face filled with happiness. His eyes should be wide-open with wonder, he should be holding a sword in his hand, and he should be offering prayers.

Text 513

devän munéàç ca tatrordhve praëatän puñpa-varñiëaùgandharväpsarasädéàç ca géta-nåtyädi-tatparän

devän-demigods; munéàù-sages; ca-and; tatra-there; ürdhve-above; praëatän-bowing; puñpa-varñiëaù-showering

flowers; gandharväpsarasädéàù-gandharvas, apsaras, and others; ca-and; géta-nåtyädi-tatparän-singing and dancing.

In the sky should be demigods and sages. They should be bowing down and showering flowers. There should also be gandharvas, apsaräs and others enthusiastically singing and dancing.

Text 514

kaà6saà ca tat-parévärän gåhétästräàç ca nidrayämohitän sthäpayet kväpi kåñëäyäà käliyaà likhet

kaà6sam-Kamsa; ca-and; tat-parévärät-his associates; gåhéta-taken; asträàù-sword; ca-and; nidrayä-with sleep; mohitän-bewildered; sthäpayet-should place; kväpi-somewhere; kåñëäyäm-in the Yamunä; käliyam-Käliya; likhet-should draw.

One should also draw Kaàsa and his companions, sound asleep and their swords in their hands. One should also draw Käliya in the Yamunä.

Text 515

itthaà kåtvä yatha-çobhaà sva-çaktyä sütikä-gåhamtat-tan-mürtéç ca vinyasya prärabhetärcanaà niçi

ittham-thus; kåtvä-doing; yatha-çobham-beautiful; sva-çaktyä-as far as one is able; sütikä-gåham-the maternity-room; tat-tan-mürtéù-various deities; ca-and; vinyasya-placing; prärabheta-should begin; arcanam-the worship; niçi-at night.

Thus one should make the deities and the room as beautiful as one can. One should begin the worship at night.

Text 516

gandha-puñpäkñatädéni vasträlaìkäraëäni canaivedyäni viciträëi phaläni sthäpayet tathä

gandha-puñpäkñatädéni-beginning with scents, flowers, and unbroken grains; vasträlaìkäraëäni-graments and ornaments; ca-and; naivedyäni-food; viciträëi-variegated; phaläni-fruits; sthäpayet-should place; tathä-so.

There one should place fragrances, flowers, unbroken grains, garments, ornaments, and a great variety of fruits and foods.

Text 517

tataù çästrokta-mantreëa vidhinävähya devakémpratiñöhäpya ca tasyai präk puñpäïjalim arthärpayet

tataù-then; çästrokta-mantreëa-with mantras spoken in the scriptures; vidhinä-properly; ävähya-invoking the presence; devakém-Devaké; pratiñöhäpya-establishing; ca-and; tasyai-top her; präk-before; puñpa-of flowers aïjalim-a handful; artha-thne; arpayet-should offer.

Reciting mantras from the scriptures, one should then invite Devaké to appear in her deity-form. When the deity is thus installed, one should offer her a handful of flowers.

Text 518

atha devaké-dhyänaà

gäyadbhiù kinnarädyaiù satata-parivåtä veëu-véëädi-nädair bhåìgärädarça-kumbha-prakara-håta-karaiù kinnaraiù sevyamänäparyaìke tväståte yä muditatara-mukhé putriëé samyag aste sä devé deva-mätä jayati su-vadanä devaké känta-rüpä

atha-now; devaké-dhyänam-meditation on Devaké; gäyadbhiù-siìgiìg; kinnarädyaiù-beginniìg witù the kinnaras; satata-parivåtä-always surrounded; veëu-véëädi-beginniìg witù flutes and vinas; nädaiù-witù sounds; bhåìgära-golden pitchers; ädarça-mirrors; kumbha-waterpots; prakara-multitudes; håta-held; karaiù-in their hands; kinnaraiù-by kinnaras; sevyamänä-beiìgs served; paryaìke-on the bed; tu-indeed; äståte-covered; yä-who; muditatara-mukhé-happy face; putriëé-witù a son; samyag-properly; aste-stays; sä-she; devé-goddess; deva-mätä-the mother of the demigods; jayati-all glories; su-vadanä-beautiful face; devaké-Devaké; känta-beautiful; rüpä-form.

Meditation on Devaké

All glories to beautiful, beautiful-faced Devaké, the mother of the demigods. The happy-faced mother of a newborn son, she rests on her great bed. She is served by many kinnaras and other demigods, who sing songs, play music on flutes, véëäs, and other instruments, and carry in their hands gifts of golden vases, waterpots, and glistening mirrors.

Text 519

tathä çré-kåñëadevasya prägvad ävähanaà budhaùpratiñöhäà ca vidhäyäsmai dadyät puñpäïjalià tataù

tathä-so; çré-kåñëadevasya-of Lord Kåñëa; prägvat-as before; ävähanam-invocation; budhaù-wise; pratiñöhäm-establishment; ca-and; vidhäya-doing; asmai-to Him; dadyät-should gove; puñpäïjalim-a handful fo flowers; tataù-then.

As he did before with Devaké, the wise devotee should then invite Lord Kåñëa to appear in His Deity-form. When the Deity is thus installed, the devotee should offer Him a handful of flowers.

Text 520

candrodaye bahir gehät sammärjyäbjoparéndavenärikelädikaà çaìkhe kåtvä tenärghyam arpayet

candrodaye-in the moonrise; bahiù-outside; gehät-the hoouse; sammärjya-cleaning; abja-lotus; upari-above; indave-to the moon; närikelädikam-beginning with a coconut; çaìkhe-in a conchshell; kåtvä-doing; tena-by that; arghyam-arghya; arpayet-should offer.

When the moon rises, one should go outside the house, cleanse a place, put there a lotus flower, and there offer to the moon-god arghya in a conchshell and a coconut-shell.

Text 521

atha tatra mantraù

kñérodärëava-sambhüta atri-netra-samudbhavagåhaëärghyaà çaçäìkeça rohiëyä sahito mama

atha-now; tatra-there; mantraù-mantra; kñérodärëava-sambhüta-born from the milk-ocean; atri-netra-from Atri's eye;samudbhava-born; gåhaëa-please accept; arghyam-arghya; çaçäìkeça-O moon-god; rohiëyä-Rohiëiä; sahitaù-with; mama-of me.

The Mantra For That

O moon-god born from the milk-ocean and from Atri Muni's eye, O moon-god now associating with Rohiëé, please accept this arghya I offer to you.

Text 522

jyotsnä-pate namas tubhyaà namas te jyotiñäà patenamas te rohiëé-känta arghyaà me pratigåhyatäm

jyotsnä-pate-O master of moonlight; namaù-obeisances; tubhyam-to you; namaù-obeisances; te-to you; jyotiñäm-of moonlight; pate-O master; namaù-obeisances; te-to you; rohiëé-känta-O beloved of Rohini; arghyam-arghyam; me-from me; pratigåhyatäm-may be accepted.

O master of moonlight, obeisances to You! O master of moonlight, obeisances to You! O beloved of Rohiëé, obeisances to You! Please accept the arghya I offer to you.

Text 523

tato gåhäntar ägatya kåtvä jaya-jaya-dhvanimdhyätvä çré-bhagavaj-janma kåñëäyärghyaà nivedayet

tataù-then; gåhäntaù-within the house; ägatya-arriving; kåtvä-doing; jaya-jaya-dhvanim-sounds of jaya jaya; dhyätvä-meditating; çré-bhagavaj-janma-on the birth of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; kåñëäya-to Lord Kåñëa; arghyam-arghya; nivedayet-should offer.

Returning inside the house, one should say "Jaya! Jaya!", meditate on Lord Kåñëa's birth, and then offer arghya to Lord Kåñëa.

Text 524

atha tatra mantraù

jätaù kaàsa-vadhärthäya. ity ädi.

atha-here; tatra-there; mantraù-the mantra; jätaù-born; kaàsa-vadhärthäya-to kill Kaàsa; iti-thus; ädi-beginning.

The Mantra For that

The mantra for that is the mantra beginning with the words, "jätaù kaàsa-vadhärthäya".

Text 525 tataù kñérädinä çuddho- dakena tu yathä-vidhidevaké-sahitaà bhaktyä çré-kåñëaà snäpayet kåté

tataù-then; kñéra-with milk; ädinä-beginning; çuddha-pure; udakena-with water; tu-indeed; yathä-vidhi-as proper; devaké-Devaké; sahitam-with; bhaktyä-with devotion; çré-kåñëam-Lord Kåñëa; snäpayet-should bathe; kåté-devotee.

Then one should devotedly and properly bathe Lord Kåñëa and Devaké with pure water, milk, and other substances.

Text 526

atha tatra mantraù

yogeçvaräya yoga-sambhaväya yoga-pataye govindäya namo namaù

atha-now; tatra-there; mantraù-the mantra; yogeçvaräya-to the master of yoga; yoga-sambhaväya-to the father of yoga; yoga-pataye-to the master of yoga; govindäya-to Lord Govinda; namaù-obeisances; namaù-obeisances.

The mantra is, "yogeçvaräya yoga-sambhaväya yoga-pataye govindäya namo namaù" (Obeisances, obeisances to Lord Govinda, who is the controller of yoga, the father of yoga, and the master of yoga).

Text 527

kvacic ca

yogeçvaräya deväya devaké-nandanäya cayogodbhaväya nityäya govindäya namo namaù

kvacit-somewhere; ca-also; yogeçvaräya-to the master of yoga; deväya-to the Supreme Personality of Godhead; devaké-nandanäya-to the son of Devaké; ca-and; yogodbhaväya-to the father of yoga; nityäya-eternal; govindäya-to Lord Kåñëa; namaù-obeisnaces; namaù-obeisnaces.

The following mantra may also be used:

Obeisances, obeisances to Lord Govinda, the eternal Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of yoga, the father of yoga, the son of Devaké.

Text 528

adite deva-mätas tvaà ity ädi prärthya devakémgandhädény arpayet tasyai namo devyai çriye iti

adite deva-mätas tvam ity ädi prärthya-witrh the prayer beginning with the words "adite deva-mätas tvam; devakém-to Devaki; gandhädéni-beginning with scents; arpayet-shoulkd offer; tasyai-to her; namaù-obeisances; devyai-to the goddess; çriye-to the goddess; iti-thus.

Reciting the mantra beginning with the words "adite deva-mätas tvam", as well as the mantra "namo devyai çriye", one should offer fragrances and other gifts to Devaké.

Text 529

avatära-sahasräëéty- ädinäbhyarcya ca prabhumpädyädi vastra-bhüñädi dhüpa-dépädi cärpayet

avatära-sahasräni iti ädinä-with the mantra beginning with the words "avatära-sahasräni; abhyarcya-worshiping; ca-and; prabhum-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; pädyädi-beginning with padya; vastra-bhüñädi-beginning with garments and ornaments; dhüpa-dépädi-beginning with incense and lamps; ca-and; arpayet-should offer.

Reciting the mantra beginning with the words “avatära-sahasräëi", one should worship Lord Kåñëa. One should offer Him pädya (water for washing the feet), garments, ornaments, incense, lamps, and other gifts.

Text 530

atha tatra padyädi-dépänta-mantraù

oà yajïeçvaräya yajïa-sambhaväya yajïa-pataye govindäya namo namaù

atha-now; tatra-there; padyädi-dépänta-mantraù-the mantra for offering the gifts that begin with padya and conclude with lamps; om-Oà; yajïesvaräya-to the controller of yajnas; yajna-sambhaväya-to the father of yajnas; yajna-pataye-to the mater of yajnas; govindäya-to Lord Govinda; namaù-obeisances; namaù-obeisances.

The mantra for offering these gifts, which begin with pädya and conclude with lamps, is, "oà yajïesvaräya yajïa-sambhaväya yajïa-pataye govindäya namo namaù" (Oà. Obeisances, obeisances to Lord Govinda, who is the controller of yajïa, the father of yajïa, and the master of yajïa).

Text 531

atha naivedya-mantraù

oà viçveçvaräya viçva-sambhaväya viçva-pataye govindäya namo namaù

atha-now; naivedya-for offering food; mantraù-the mantra; om-Oà; viçveçvaräya-to the controller of the universe; viçva-sambhaväya-the father of the universe; viçva-pataye-the master of the universe; govindäya-to Lord Govinda; namaù-obeisances; namaù-obeisances.

The mantra for offering food is, "oà viçveçvaräya viçva-sambhaväya viçva-pataye govindäya namo namaù" (Oà. Obeisances, obeisances to Lord Govinda, who is the controller of the universes, the father of the universes, and the master of the universes.

Text 532

vasudevaà yaçodäà ca nandaà rämaà ca rohiëémanyäàç ca püjayet tat-tan- näma-mantrair yathä-vidhi

vasudevam-vasudeva; yaçodäm-Yasoda; ca-and; nandam-Nanda; rämam-Balaräma; ca-and; rohiëém-Rohini; anyäàù-others; ca-and; püjayet-should worship; tat-tan-various; näma-names; mantraiù-with mantra; yathä-vidhi-appropriately.

Then, reciting the proper mantras with the proper names, one should worship Vasudeva, Yaçodä, Nanda, Balaräma, Rohiëé, and others of the Lord's personal associates.

Text 533

pakvännäni viciträëi khädyäni vividhäni catat-käléna-phaläny atra tämbülaà ca samarpayet

pakva-cooked; annäni-food; viciträëi-many varieties; khädyäni-foods; vividhäni-various; ca-and; tat-käléna-in season; phaläni-fruits; atra-here; tämbülam-betelnuts; ca-and; samarpayet-should offer.

Then one should offer many varieties of cooked grains, many varieties of other delicious foods, and many varieties of fruits in season, and one should also offer betelnuts.

Text 534

atha tatra mantraù

dharmeçvaräya dharma-sambhaväya dharma-pataye govindäya namo namaù

atha-now; tatra-there; mantraù-the mantra; dharmeçvaräya-to the controller of religion; dharma-sambhaväya-the father of religion; dharma-pataye-the master of religion; govindäya-to Lord Govinda; namaù-obeisances; namaù-obeisances.

The mantra for that offering is, "dharmeçvaräya dharma-sambhaväya dharma-pataye govindäya namo namaù" (Obeisances, obeisances to Lord Govinda, who is the controller of religion, the father of religion, and the master of religion).

Text 535

niçéthe guòa-sarpibhyäà vasor dhäräà ca pätayet

niçéthe-in the middle of the night; guòa-sarpibhyäm-with molasses and ghee; vasoù-of water; dhäräm-a stream; ca-and; pätayet-should cause to fall.

Then, in the middle of the night, one should bathe the Lord with a stream of water and with molasses and ghee.

Text 536

atha kuryäd bhagavato jäta-karma-mahotsavamçré-näla-vardhanaà kuryät ñañöhé-niùsäraëaà tataù

atha-then; kuryät-should do; bhagavataù-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; jäta-karma-mahotsavam-the jata-karma ceremony; çré-näla-vardhanam-the ceremony of cutting the umbilical cord; kuryät-should do; ñañöhé-niùsäraëam-the worship of Goddess Ñañöhé; tataù-then.

Then one should perform the jäta-karma ceremony of the Lord, then the ceremony of cutting the umbilical cord, and then the worship of Goddess Ñañöhé.


The mantra for worshiping the goddess is, “ñañöhikäyai namaù".

Text 537

çré-näma-karaëa-tat-tal- lélänukaraëaà tathäathäcäryaà samabhyarcya kuryäj jägaraëaà mudä géta-nåtyädinä bälya- kréòä-çravaëa-pürvakam

çré-näma-karaëa-the name giving ceremony; tat-tat-various; léla-of pastimes; anukaraëam-imitation; tathä-so; atha-then; äcäryam-the spiritual master; samabhyarcya-worshiping; kuryät-should do; jägaraëam-vigil; mudä-happily; géta-nåtyädinä-beginning weith singing and dancing; bälya-childhood; kréòä-pastimes; çravaëa-hearing; pürvakam-first.

Then one should perform the name-giving ceremony, then perform dramas of various pastimes of the Lord, then worship the spiritual master, then hear narrations of Lord Kåñëa's childhood pastimes, and then keep an all-night vigil filled with happy singing, dancing, and other like activities.


The pastimes depicted in dramas should begin with the pastime of killing Pütanä and end with the pastime of killing Kaàsa.

Text 538


äjanmoparjitaà päpaà tat-kñaëäd eva léyaterätrau jägaraëe vipra dåñöe naçyati dehinäm

skände-in thre Skanda Purana; brahma-närada-samväde-in a conversation of Brahma and Narada; äjanma-from birth; uparjitam-accumulated; päpam-sins; tat-kñaëät-from that moment; eva-indeed; léyate-are destroyed; rätrau-at night; jägaraëe-in a vigil; vipra-O brahmana; dåñöe-seen; naçyati-perishes; dehinäm-of the conditioned souls.

In the Skanda Puräëa, Brahmä tells Närada:

O brähmaëa, when one observes such an all-night vigil, all his sins from the time of his birth are at once destroyed.

Text 539

prabhäte sati nirvartya nitya-karmäëi vaiñëavaùdevam abhyarcya samprärthya praëamya ca visarjayet

prabhäte-dawn; sati-being so; nirvartya-performing; nitya-karmäëi-regular duties; vaiñëavaù-a devotee; devam-the Lord; abhyarcya-worshiping; samprärthya-offering prayers; praëamya-bowing down; ca-and; visarjayet-should perform.

At dawn a Vaiñëava should then perform his regular duties, worship the Lord, offer prayers to the Lord, and offer obeisances to the Lord.


The regular duties here are those duties that begin with the early-morning bath.

Text 540

atha praëäma-mantraù yaà devam. ity-ädi-särdha-padyam

atha-now; praëäma-mantraù-the mantra for offering obneisances; yam devam ity-ädi-särdha-padyam-the one-and-a-half verses beginning with the words "yam devam"

The mantra for offering obeisances is the one-and-a-half-verses prayer beginning with the words "yaà devam".

Text 541

atha prärthanä-mantraù çäntir astu ity-ädi.

atha-now; prärthanä-mantraù-the mantra for offering prayers; çäntir astu ity-ädi-the verse beginning with the words "çäntir astu".

The mantra for offering prayers is the verse beginning with the words "çäntir astu".

Text 542

athäcäryäya tat sarvaà çré-mürty-ädi sa-dakñiëämpradäya viprän sambhojya vidadhyät päraëotsavam

atha-then; äcäryäya-to the spiritual master; tat-that; sarvam-evereything; çré-mürty-ädi-beginning with the Deity of the Lord; sa-dakñiëäm-with daksina; pradäya-offering; viprän-the brahmanas; sambhojya-feeding; vidadhyät-should do; päraëotsavam-breaking the fast.

Then one should give the Deities and all the paraphernalia employed in the festival, along with dakñiëä, to the spiritual master, then one should feed the brähmaëas, and then one should break the fast.

Text 543

atha pärçva-parivartanotsavaù

bhädrasya çuklaikädaçyäà säyanotsavavat prabhoùkaöi-dänotsavaà kuryäd vaiñëavaiù saha vaiñëavaù

atha-now; pärçva-parivartanotsavaù-the Pärçva-parivartana festival; bhädrasya-of Bhadra; çuklaikädaçyäm-of the sukla ekadasi; säyana-taking rest; utsava-the festuval; vat-like; prabhoù-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; kaöi-dänotsavam-festival of gift of a kati; kuryät-should do; vaiñëavaiù-Vaiñëavas; saha-with; vaiñëavaù-a Vaiñëava.

The Pärçva-parivartana Festival

On the çukla-ekädaçé of Bhädra a Vaiñëava, accompanied by other Vaiñëavas, should celebrate the Kaöidäna festival, which is like the Çayana festival.

Text 544

bhaviñyottare

präpte bhädra-pade mäsi ekädaçyäà site 'hanikaöi-dänaà bhaved viñëor mahä-pätaka-näçanam

bhaviñyottare-in the Bhavisya Purana, Uttara-khanda; präpte-attained; bhädra-pade-Bhadra; mäsi-month; ekädaçyäm-on ekadasi; site-sukla; ahani-on the day; kaöi-dänam-kari-dana; bhavet-should be; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; mahä-pätaka-näçanam-destroying great sins.

In the Bhaviñya Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, it is said: On the çukla-ekädaçé of the month of Bhädra, one should observe the kaöi-däna (turning over) festival of Lord Viñëu, a festival that destroys great sins.

Text 545

jaläçayäntikaà nétvä samyag abhyarcya prabhumkarëikä-parivåttià ca dakñiëäìge prakalpayet

jaläçayäntikam-resting on the water; nétvä-bringing; samyag-properly; abhyarcya-worshiping; prabhum-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; karëikä-of the hip; parivåttim-turning; ca-and; dakñiëäìge-on the right side; prakalpayet-should arrange.

One should approach the Supreme Lord as He naps on the ocean and one should arrange that the Lord turns over in His sleep and now rests on His right side.

Text 546

atha abhyarthana-mantraù

deva deva jagannätha yogi-gamya niraïjanakaöi-dänaà kuruñvädya mäsi bhädra-pade çubhe

atha-now; abhyarthana-mantraù-the mantra-prayer; deva-O Lord; deva-O Lord; jagannätha-O master of the universes; yogi-gamya-approached by the yogis; niraïjana-untouched by matter; kaöi-dänam-turning to the other side; kuruñva-please do; adya-now; mäsi-in the month; bhädra-pade-of Bhadra; çubhe-auspicious.

The Mantra-Prayer

O Lord, O Lord, O master of the universes, O Lord approached by the yogés, O Lord untouched by matter, now that it is the auspicious month of Bhädra, please turn over on Your other side.

Text 547

mahä-püjäà tataù kåtvä vaiñëavän paritoñya cadevaà sva-mandire nétvä yathä-pürvaà niveçayet

mahä-püjäm-great worship; tataù-then; kåtvä-doing; vaiñëavän-the Vaiñëavas; paritoñya-pleasing; ca-and; devam-the Lord; sva-mandire-in His temple; nétvä-taking; yathä-pürvam-as before; niveçayet-should be made to reside.

Then one should perform great worship, please the Vaiñëavas, and then return the Deity of the Lord to His place in the temple.

Text 548

atha çravaëa-dvädaçé-vrataà

bhädrasya çukla-dvädaçyäà yuktäyaà çravaëena hiupoñya saìgame snätvä devaà vämanam arcayet

atha-now; çravaëa-dvädaçé-vratam-the vow of çravaëa-dvädaçé; bhädrasya-of Bhadra; çukla-dvädaçyäm-on the çukla-dvädaçi; yuktäyam-engaged; çravaëena-with sravana; hi-indeed; upoñya-fasting; saìgame-in junction; snätvä-bathing; devam-Lord; vämanam-Vämana; arcayet-should worship.

The Vow of Çravaëa-dvädaçé When the star Çravaëä is conjoined with the moon on the çukla-dvädaçé of the month of Bhädra, one should fast, bathe, and worship Lord Vämana.

Text 549

atha tan-mähätmyaà

mäsi bhädra-pade çuklä dvädaçé çravaëänvitämahaté dvädaçé jïeyä upaväse mahä-phalä arcayitväcyutaà bhaktyä labhet puëyaà daçäbdikam

atha-now; tan-mähätmyam-the glory of that; mäsi-in the month; bhädra-pade-of Bhadra; çuklä-sukla; dvädaçé-Dvadasi; çravaëänvitä-with sravan; mahaté-great; dvädaçé-dvadasi; jïeyä-to be known; upaväse-in fasting; mahä-phalä-a great result; arcayitvä-worshiping; acyutam-the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhaktyä-with devotion; labhet-attains; puëyam-piety; daçäbdikam-of ten years.

The Glory of That

When the star Çravaëa is conjoined with the moon on the çukla-dvädaçé of the month of Bhädra, that day is known as a mahä-dvädaçé. By fasting and devotedly worshiping the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead on that day, one attains the result of having performed ten years of pious deeds.

Text 550

phalaà datta-hutänäà ca tasyäà lakña-guëaà bhavet

phalam-the result; datta-charity; hutänäm-of yajna; ca-and; tasyäm-then; lakña-guëam-a hundred thousand times; bhavet-becomes.

On that day the results of giving charity and performing yajïas are multiplied by a hundred thousand times.

Text 551

skaëde

mäsi bhädra-pade çuklä dvädaçé çravaëänvitämahaté dvädaçé jïeyä upaväse mahä-phalä

skaëde-in theb Skanda Purana; mäsi-in the month; bhädra-pade-of Bhadra; çuklä-sukla; dvädaçé-dvadasi; çravaëänvitä-with Sravana; mahaté-great; dvädaçé-dvadasi; jïeyä-known; upaväse-in fasting; mahä-phalä-a great result.


When the star Çravaëa is conjoined with the moon on the çukla-dvädaçé of the month of Bhädra, that day is known as mahä-dvädaçé (great dvädaçé). Fasting on that day brings a great result.

Text 552

saìgame saritaù puëye dvädaçéà tam upoñitaùäplaväd eva cäpnoti dvädaça-dvädaçé-phalam

saìgame-in meeting; saritaù-rivers; puëye-sacred; dvädaçém-dvadasi; tam-that; upoñitaù-fasting; äplavät-immersing; eva-indeed; ca-and; äpnoti-attains; dvädaça-of twelve; dvädaçé-dvadasis; phalam-the result.

A person who on this dvädaçé fasts and bathes in a sacred river attains the benefits of observing twelve dvädaçés.

Text 553

budha-çravaëa-samyuktä saiva ced dvädaçé bhavetatyanta-mahaté tasyäà dattaà bhavati cäkñayam

budha-with Mercury; çravaëa-and Sravana; samyuktä-endowed; sä-that; eva-ineed; cet-if; dvädaçé-dvadasi; bhavet-is; atyanta-very; mahaté-great; tasyäm-on that day; dattam-given; bhavati-is; ca-and; akñayam-eternal.

If on that day both Mercury and Çravaëa are conjoined with the moon, that day is known as atyanta-mahä-dvädaçé (very great dvädaçé). Whatever charity is given on that day becomes eternal and inexhaustible.

Text 554

arcayitväcyutaà bhaktyä labhet puëyaà daçäbdikamphalaà datta-hutänäà ca tasyäà lakña-guëaà bhavet

arcayitvä-worshiping; acyutam-the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhaktyä-with devotion; labhet-attains; puëyam-piety; daçäbdikam-of ten years; phalam-result; datta-hutänäm-of charities and yajnas; ca-and; tasyäm-on that day; lakña-guëam-a hundred thousand times; bhavet-becomes.

By worshiping the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead on that day one attains the results of ten years of pious deeds. On that day the results of charity and yajïas are multiplied a hundred thousand times.

Texts 555 and 556

brahma-vaivarte pitä-putra-samväde

mäsi bhädra-pade çukla- pakñe yadi harer dinebudha-çravaëa-samyogaù präpyate tatra püjitaù

prayacchati çubhän kämän vämano manasi sthitänvijayä nama sä proktä tithiù préti-karé hareù

brahma-vaivarte-in the Brahma-vaivarta Purana; pitä-putra-samväde-in the conversation of a father and son; mäsi-in the month; bhädrapade-of Bhadra; çukla-pakñe-on the çukla-pakña; yadi-if; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; dine-on the day; budha-çravaëa-samyogaù-the conjunction of Mercury and Sravana; präpyate-is attained; tatra-there; püjitaù-worshiped; prayacchati-gives; çubhän-auspicious; kämän-desires; vämanaù-Lord Vämana; manasi-in the heart; sthitän-residing; vijayä-Vijaya; näma-named; sä-that; proktä-called; tithiù-day; préti-karé-pleasing; hareù-to Lord Hari.

In the Brahma-vaivarta Puräëa a father tells his son:

If Mercury and Çravaëa are both conjoined with the moon on the çukla-ekädaçé of the month of Bhädra, that day is called vijayä ekädaçé. That day is very pleasing to Lord Hari. Lord Vämana fulfills the auspicious desires in the heart of one who worships Him on that day.

Text 557

saìgame sarva-térthänäà saìgamas tatra jäyateçuklä bhädra-pade svargaà kåñëä kaluña-saìkñayam

saìgame-in the meeting; sarva-térthänäm-of all holy places; saìgamaù-the meeting; tatra-there; jäyate-is born; çuklä-sukla; bhädra-pade-in Bhadra; svargam-Svargaloka; kåñëä-Kåñëa; kaluña-of sins; saìkñayam-destruction.

When Mercury and Çravaëa are both conjoined with the moon on the dvädaçé of the month of Bhädra, all holy places are present. When Mercury and Çravaëa are both conjoined with the moon on the çukla-dvädaçé of the month of Bhädra, they bring residence in Svargaloka, and when they are both conjoined with the moon on the kåñëa-dvädaçé of the month of Bhädra, they bring the destruction of sins.

Text 558

phälgune kurute mokñam api brahma-vadhän nåëämmahä-puëya-pradä hy eñä saìgame vijayä tithiù sarva-päpa-kñayo nünaà jäyate tad-upoñiëäm

phälgune-in Phalguna; kurute-doers; mokñam-liberation; api-also; brahma-vadhät-from murdering a brahmana; nåëäm-of the people; mahä-great; puëya-piety; pradä-giving; hi-indeed; eñä-this; saìgame-in the meeting; vijayä-vijaya; tithiù-day; sarva-päpa-kñayaù-destroying all sins; nünam-indeed; jäyate-is born; tad-upoñiëäm-of they who fast on that day.

When Çravaëa is conjoined with the moon on the çukla-dvädaçé of the month of Phälguna (February-March), that day is called vijayä dvädaçé. That day brings great piety. It purifies even the sin of murdering a brähmaëa. They who fast on

that day become free from all sins.

Text 559

kià ca

sarva-térthäni bhü-påñöhe saìgame yänti saìgamamvijayä-väsare sarve devänäà saìgamo bhuvi

kià ca-furthermore; sarva-térthäni-all holy places; bhü-påñöhe-on the earth; saìgame-in meeting; yänti-go; saìgamam-meeting; vijayä-väsare-on vijaya day; sarve-all; devänäm-of the demigods; saìgamaù-meeting; bhuvi-on the earth.

It is also said:

On vijayä dvädaçé all holy places and all demigods gather together on the earth.

Text 560

idaà sarva-puräëeñu rahasyaà parigéyatesaìgame vämanaà püjya preta-yonau na jäyate

idam-this; sarva-puräëeñu-in all Puranas; rahasyam-secret; parigéyate-is sung; saìgame-in meeting; vämanam-Lord Vämana; püjya-worshiping; preta-yonau-the womb of a preta; na-not; jäyate-is born.

This secret is told in all the Puräëas: Simply by worshiping Lord Vämana on this day one is protected from having take birth as a preta (ghost).

Text 561

viñëu-dharmottare çré-paraçuräma uväca

upaväsäsamarthänäà kià syäd ekam upoñitammahä-phalaà mahä-deva tan mamäcakñva suvrata

viñëu-dharmottare-in the Viñëu-dharma Purana, Uttara-khanda; çré-paraçuräma-Çré Paraçuräma; uväca-said; upaväsa-fasting; asamarthänäm-of they who are not able; kim-what?; syät-may be; ekam-one; upoñitam-fasted; mahä-phalam-great result; mahä-deva-O Çiva; tat-that; mama-to me; äcakñva-please tell; suvrata-O saintly one.

In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, Çré Paraçuräma says:

What is the result attained by persons generally unable to fast who once fast on this day? O saintly Çiva, please tell this to me.

Text 562

çré-çaìkara uväca

yä räma çravaëopetä dvädaçé mahaté tu sätasyäm upoñitaù snätaù

püjayitvä janärdanaà präpnoty ayatnäd dharma-jïa dvädaça-dvädaçé-phalam

çré-saìkara uväca-Lord Çiva said; yä-which; räma-O Räma; çravaëopetä--with Sravana; dvädaçé-dvadasi; mahaté-great; tu-indeed; sä-that; tasyäm-then; upoñitaù-fasting; snätaù-bathing; püjayitvä-worshiping; janärdanam-Lord Kåñëa; präpnoti-attains; ayatnät-easily; dharma-jïa-O knower of religion; dvädaça-dvädaçé-phalam-the result of twelve dvadasis.

O Paraçuräma wise in spiritual truth, a person who fasts, bathes himself, and then worships Lord Kåñëa on mahä-dvädaçé, when the star Çravaëa is conjoined with the moon, attains the results of observing twelve dvädaçés.

Text 563

kià ca

çravaëa-dvädaçé-yoge budha-väro bhaved yadiatyanta-mahaté räma dvädaçé sä prakértitä

kià ca-furthermore; çravaëa-dvädaçé-yoge-on Sravana-dvadasi; budha-väraù-Wednesday; bhavet-is; yadi-if; atyanta-mahaté-very great; räma-O Räma; dvädaçé-dvadasi; sä-that; prakértitä-called.

Lord Çiva also said:

O Paraçuräma, if Çravaëa-dvädaçé (when the star Çravaëa is conjoined with the moon) falls on a Wednesday, then it is said to be atyanta-mahaté (very great).

Text 564

snänaà japyaà tathä homo dänaà çräddhaà surärcanamsarvam akñayam äpnoti tasyäà bhågu-kulodvaha

snänam-bathing; japyam-japa; tathä-so; homaù-yajna; dänam-charity; çräddham-sraddha; surärcanam-worship of the demigods; sarvam-all; akñayam-imperishable; äpnoti-attains; tasyäm-then; bhågu-kulodvaha-O scion of the Bhågu dynasty.

O scion of the Bhågu dynasty, bathing, japa, yajïa, charity, çräddha, and demigod-worship all become limitless and imperishable when performed on that day.

Text 565

tasmin dine tathä snäto yo 'pi kvacana saìgamesa gaìga-snäna-jaà räma phalaà präpnoty asaàçayam

tasmin dine-on that day; tathä-so; snätaù-bathing; yo 'pi-someone; kvacana-somewhere; saìgame-in contact; sa-he; gaìga-snäna-jam-born from bathing in the Ganges; räma-O Räma; phalam-the result; präpnoti-attains; asaàçayam-without doubt.

O Paraçuräma, a person who on that day bathes in any place attains the result of bathing in the Ganges. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 566

çravaëe saìgamaù sarve paripuñöi-pradaù sadäviçeñäd dvädaçé-yukte budha-yukte viçeñataù

çravaëe-in Sravana; saìgamaù-contact; sarve-all; paripuñöi-pradaù-giving nourishment; sadä-always; viçeñät-specifically; dvädaçé-yukte-with dvadasi; budha-yukte-with Mercury; viçeñataù-specifically.

When it falls on a Wednesday, this dvädaçé it brings especially great piety.

Text 567


upaväsäsamarthänäà sadaiva puruñottamaekä yä dvädaçé puëyä taà vadasva mamänagha

bhaviñyottare çré-yudhiñöhira uväca-in the Bhaviñya Piräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, Çré Yudhiñöhira says; upaväsäsamarthänäm-of they who are not able to fast; sadä-always; eva-indeed; puruñottama-O supreme person; ekä-one; yä-which; dvädaçé-dvadasi; puëyä-piety; tam-that; vadasva-please tell; mama-to me; anagha-O sinless one.

In the Bhaviñya Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, Çré Yudhiñöhira says:

O sinless Supreme Person, please describe to me the piety attained by persons generally unable to fast who once fast on this day.

Text 568


mäsi bhädra-pade çuklä dvädaçé çravaëänvitäsarva-käma-pradä puëyä upaväse mahä-phalä

çré-kåñëa uväca-Çré Kåñëa said; mäsi-month; bhädra-pade-of Bhadra; çuklä-sukla; dvädaçé-dvadasi; çravaëänvitä-with Sravan; sarva-käma-pradä-bringing all desires; puëyä-sacred; upaväse-in fasting; mahä-phalä-great result.

Çré Kåñëa said:

When the star Çravaëa is conjoined with the moon during the çukla-dvädaçé of the month of Bhädra, that day is very sacred. That day fulfills all desires. Fasting on that day brings a great result.

Text 569

saìgame saritäà snatvä gaìgä-snänädi-jaà phalamsopaväsaù samäpnoti nätra karyä vicäraëä

saìgame-in the meeting; saritäm-of rivers; snatvä-bathing; gaìgä-snänädi-jam-created by bathing in the Ganges; phalam-result; sopaväsaù-fasting; samäpnoti-attains; na-not; atra-here; karyä-to be done; vicäraëä-doubt.

A person who on this day fasts and bathes in any river attains the result of bathing in the Ganges. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 570

kià ca

budha-çravaëa-samyuktä saiva ced dvädaçé bhavetatéva mahaté tasyäà sarvaà dattam ihäkñayam

kià ca-furthermore; budha-çravaëa-samyuktä-with Mercury and Sravana; sä-that; eva-indeed; cet-if; dvädaçé-dvadasi; bhavet-is; atéva-very; mahaté-great; tasyäm-then; sarvam-all; dattam-given; iha-here; akñayam-imperishable.

It is also said:

If on this dvädaçé Çravaëa and Mercury are both conjoined with the moon, that is a very great dvädaçé. Any charity given on that day becomes limitless and imperishable.

Texts 571 and 572

kià ca tatraiva vaëig-upäkhyäne

çravaëa-dvädaçé-yoge püjayitvä janärdanamdänaà ca dattvä viprebhyaù sopaväso jitendriyaù

mahä-nadé-saìgame ca snätvä diñöäntam ägataùaväpa paramaà sthänaà durlabhaà sarva-mänavaiù

kià ca-furthermore; tatra-there; eva-indeed; vaëig-upäkhyäne-in the story of a merchant; çravaëa-dvädaçé-yoge-on a dvadasi with Sravana; püjayitvä-worshiping; janärdanam-Lord Kåñëa; dänam-charity; ca-and; dattvä-giving; viprebhyaù-to brahmanas; sopaväsaù-with fasting jitendriyaù-controlling the senses; mahä-nadé-saìgame-in a great river; ca-and; snätvä-bathing; diñöäntam-death; ägataù-attaining; aväpa-attains; paramaà sthänam-the supreme abode; durlabham-rare; sarva-mänavaiù-for all human beings.

A person who on a çravaëa-dvädaçé fasts, controls his senses, bathes in a great river, gives charity to the brähmaëas, and worships Lord Kåñëa, attains, at the moment of death, a celestial world that is difficult for any human being to enter.

Text 573

yatra käma-phalä våkñä nadyaù päyasa-kardamäùçétalämala-pänéyäù puñkariëyo manoharäù

yatra-where; käma-phalä-with desire as fruit; våkñä-tree; nadyaù-rivers; päyasa-kardamäù-payasa as mud; çétala-cvool; amala-pure; pänéyäù-delicious water; puñkariëyaù-lakes filled with lotus flowers; manoharäù-beautiful.

In that world the trees fulfill all desires. There the beautiful lotus-filled lakes have cool, pure, delicious water. The mud

of those lakes is päyasa (condensed milk).

Text 574

taà desäm äsädya vaëiì mahätmä su-måñöa-jämbünada-bhüñitäìgaùkalpaà samagraà sura-sundarébhiù säkaà sa reme muditaù sadaiva

tam-that; desäm-country; äsädya-attaining; vaëik-merchant; mahätmä-great soul; su-måñöa-jämbünada-the best gold; bhüñita-decorated; aìgaù-limbs; kalpam-kalpa; samagram-complete; sura-sundarébhiù-with beautiful demigoddesses; säkam-with; sa-he; reme-enjoyed; muditaù-happy; sadä-always; eva-indeed.

The noble-hearted merchant attained that world. There he was decorated with ornaments of the finest gold. For an entire kalpa he enjoyed there with many beautiful demigoddesses.

Text 575

kià cänte

budha-çravaëa-samyukta- dvädaçyäà saìgamodakamdänaà bahv-odanaà çastaà upaväsaù paro vidhiù

kià ca-furthermore; ante-at the end; budha-çravaëa-samyukta-with Mercury and Sravana; dvädaçyäm-on the dvadasi; saìgamodakam-water; dänam-gift; bahv-odanam-much grain; çastam-ordered; upaväsaù-fasting; paraù-great; vidhiù-rule.

It is also said:

When on this dvädaçé both Çravaëa and Mercury are conjoined with the moon one is enjoined to fast and to give grains in abundant charity.

Text 576

sagareëa kukutsthena dhundhumäreëa gandhinäetaç cänyaiç ca rajendra kämadä dvädaçé kåtä

sagareëa-by Kign Sagara; kukutsthena-by Kakutstha; dhundhumäreëa-by Dundhumara; gandhinä-by Gandhi; etaù-these; ca-and; anyaiù-by others; ca-and; rajendra-O kign; kämadä-fulfilling desires; dvädaçé-dvadasi; kåtä-done.

O king of kings, Sagara, Kakutstha, Dundhumära, Gandhé, and many others attained their desires by observing this dvädaçé.

Text 577

yä dvädaçé budha-yutä çravaëena särdhaà syät sä jayeti kathitä munibhir nabhasyetam ädareëa samupoñya naro hi samyak präpnoti siddhim aëimädi-guëopapannaù. iti. i-thus; kathitä-called; munibhiù-by the sages; nabhasye-in the month of Bhadra; tam-that; ädareëa-respectfully; samupoñya-fasting; naraù-person; hi-indeed; samyak-properly; präpnoti-attains; siddhim aëimädi-guëopapannaù-the siddhis beginning with anima-siddhi; iti-thus.

In the month of Bhädra a dvädaçé when Çravaëa and Mercury are both conjoined with the moon is called Jaya by the sages. A person who respectfully fasts on that day attains aëimä-siddhi and the other mystic perfections.

Text 578

atha çravaëa-dvädaçé-vrata-nirëayaù

dvädaçy ekädaçé vä syäd upoñyä çravaëanvitäviñëu-çåìkhala-yogaç ca taà trayaà miçritaà yadi

atha-now; çravaëa-dvädaçé-vrata-nirëayaù-concluding the vow of sravana-dvadasi; dvädaçi-dvadasi; ekädaçé-ekadasi; vä-or; syät-is; upoñyä-to be fasted; çravaëanvitä-with sravana; viñëu-çåìkhala-yogaù-Viñëu-çåìkhala-yoga; ca-and; tam-that; trayam-three; misritam-mixed; yadi-if.

Conclusion of the Çravaëa-dvädaçé Vow

One should fast on either a dvädaçé or an ekädaçé when Çravaëa is conjoined with the moon. When in a single day all three of these conditions are present, that day is called Viñëu-çåìkhala-yoga.

Text 579

atha çravaëa-dvädaçy-upaväsaù çré-märkaëòeyaù

çravaëarkña-samäyuktä dvädaçé yadi labhyateupoñyä dvädaçé tatra trayodaçyäà tu päraëam

atha-now; çravaëa-dvädaçy-upaväsaù-fasting on çravaëa-dvädaçé; çré-märkaëòeyaù-Çré Märkaëòeya; çravaëarkña-samäyuktä-with the star Sravana; dvädaçé-dvadasi; yadi-if; labhyate-is attained; upoñyä-to be fasted; dvädaçé-dvadasi; tatra-there; trayodaçyäm-on trayodasi; tu-indeed; päraëam-breaking the fast.

Fasting on Çravaëa-dvädaçé

Çré Märkaëòeya explains:

açé.

Text 580

yamaç ca

yadä tu çukla-dvädaçyäà nakñatraà çravaëaà bhavettadäsau tu mahä-puëyä dvädaçé vijayä småtä

yamaù-Yamaraja; ca-and; yadä-when; tu-indeed; çukla-dvädaçyäm-on çukla-dvädaçé; nakñatram-star; çravaëam-Sravana; bhavet-attains; tadä-then; asau-that; tu-indeed; mahä-puëyä-very sacred; dvädaçé-dvadasi; vijayä-Vijaya; småtä-called.

Yamaräja also explains:

When the star Çravaëa is conjoined with the moon on a çukla-dvädaçé, that very sacred day is called Vijayä dvädaçé.

Text 581

tatra dänopaväsädyaà akñayaà parikértitamekädaçyä viçuddhatve dvädaçyäà tu pare 'hani çravaëe sati çaktasya vrata-yugmaà vidhéyate

tatra-there; dänopaväsädyam-beginnign with fasting and charity; akñayam-imperishable; parikértitam-said; ekädaçyä-of ekadasi; viçuddhatve-in purity; dvädaçyäm-on dvadasi; tu-indeed; pare-on the next; ahani-day; çravaëe-in Sravan; sati-being; çaktasya-able; vrata-yugmam-both vows; vidhéyate-is established.

In that situation fasting, giving charity, and other pious deeds become limitless and imperishable. If the ekädaçé is pure and the star Çravaëa is conjoined with the moon on the dvädaçé, one should, if one is able, follow the vow on both ekädaçé and dvädaçé.

Text 582

asamäpte vrate sarve naiva kuryäd vratäntaramity ädi vacanasyätra bädhakaà vaà na vidyate

asamäpte-not attained; vrate-vow; sarve-all; na-not; eva-indeed; kuryät-should do; vratäntaram-another vow; iti-thus; ädi-beginning; vacanasya-of the statement; atra-here; bädhakam-refutation; na-not; vidyate-is.

Text 583

tathä hi bhaviñyottare

ekädaçém upoñyaiva dvädaçéà samupoñyatena cätra vidhi-lopaù syäd ubhayor devatä hariù. iti.

tathä hi-furthermore; bhaviñyottare-in the Bhavisya Purana, Uttara-khanda; ekädaçém-ekadasi; upoñya-fasting; eva-indeed; dvädaçém-dvadasi; samupoñyate-fasting; na-not; ca-and; atra-here; vidhi-rules; lopaù-mission; syät-is; ubhayoù-of both; devatä-the Deity; hariù-Lord Kåñëa; iti-thus.


If in this situation one fasts on both the ekädaçé and the dvädaçé, he is not at fault, for both days have Lord Kåñëa as their Deity.

Text 584

açaktas tu vrata-dvandve bhuìkte vaikädaçé-dineupaväsaà budhaù kuryäc chravaëa-dvädaçé-dine

açaktaù-unable; tu-indeed; vrata-dvandve-both vows; bhuìkte-eats; vä-or; ekädaçé-dine-on ekadasi; upaväsam-fasting; budhaù-wise; kuryät-should do; çravaëa-dvädaçé-dine-on sravana-dvadasi day.

If unable to fast on both days, a wise person should eat on ekädaçé and fast on the çravaëa-dvädaçé day.

Text 585

tathä ca näradéye

upoñya dvädaçéà puëyaà viñëu-åkñena samyutamekädaçy-udbhavaà puëyaà naraù präpnoty asaàçayam

tathä-so; ca-and; näradéye-in the Narada Purana; upoñya-fasting; dvädaçém-dvadasi; puëyam-piety; viñëu-åkñena-without the star sacred to Lord Viñëu; samyutam-conjoined; ekädaçy-udbhavam-created on ekadasi; puëyam-piety; naraù-a person; präpnoti-attains; asaàçayam-without doubt.


By fasting on this dvädaçé when the star sacred to Lord Viñëu is conjoined with the moon, one attains the pious benefits attained by fasting on ekädaçé. Of this there is no doubt.

Texts 586 and 587

väjapeye yathä yajïe karma-héno 'pi dékñitaùsarvaà phalam aväpnoti asnäto 'py ahuto 'pi san

evam ekädaçéà tyaktvä dvädaçyäà samupoñaëätpürva-väsara-jaà puëyaà sarvaà präpnoty asaàçayam. iti.

väjapeye-vajapeya; yathä-as; yajïe-in a yajna; karma-hénaù-without karma; api-even; dékñitaù-initiated; sarvam-all; phalam-result; aväpnoti-attains; asnätaù-without bathing; api-even; ahutaù-without offering oblations; api-even; san-being so; evam-thus; ekädaçém-ekadasi; tyaktvä-rejecting; dvädaçyäm-on dvadasi; samupoñaëät-from fasting; pürva-väsara-jam-created on the previous day; puëyam-piety; sarvam-all; präpnoti-attains; asaàçayam-without doubt; iti-thus.

As a person initiated into the performance of a vajapeya-yajïa attains all the results of the yajïa even though he personally did not do any of the work of the yajïa, did not offer the oblations, and did not perform the ritual bath, so a person who neglects this specific ekädaçé and fasts instead on the dvädaçé attains all the pious benefits of fasting on ekädaçé. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 588

aty-alpo 'py anayor yogo bhavet tithi-bhayor yadiupädeyaù sa eva syäd ity atropavased budhaù

aty-alpaù-very slight; api-even anayoù-of both; yogaù-yoga; bhavet-is; tithi-bhayoù-of the tithi and the star; yadi-if; upädeyaù-to be accepted; sa-that; eva-ineed; syät-is; iti-thus; atra-here; upavaset-should fast; budhaù-wise.

Even if the junction of the tithi and star is very slight, a wise person will fast on that day.

Text 589

tathä ca çravaëa-dvädaçéà prakåtya tatraivoktaà

tithi-nakñatrayor yoge yogaç caiva narädhipadvi-kalo yadi labhyeta sa jïeyo hy añöa-yämikaù

tathä-so; ca-and; çravaëa-dvädaçém-çravaëa-dvädaçé; prakåtyä-by nature; tatra-there; eva-indeed; uktam-said; tithi-nakñatrayoù-of the tithi and the star; yoge-in the yoga; yogaù-the yoga; ca-and; eva-indeed; narädhipa-O king; dvi-kälaù-two parts; yadi-if; labhyeta-is attained; sa-that; jïeyaù-to be known; hi-indeed; añöa-yämikaù-asta-yamika.

In that scripture it is also said about çravaëa-dvädaçé:

O king, if the yoga of tithi and star occurs for two kaläs, that day is called Añöa-yämika.

Text 590

tathaiva mätsye

dvädaçé çravaëa-yuktä kåñönä puëyatamä tithiùna tu sä tena yuktä ca tävaty eva praçasyate

tathä-so; eva-indeed; mätsye-in the Matsya Purana; dvädaçé-dvadasi; çravaëa-yuktä-with Sravana; kåñönä-complete; puëyatamä-most sacred; tithiù-day; na-not; tu-but; sä-that; tena-with it; yuktä-engaged; ca-and; tävati-then; eva-indeed; praçasyate-is praised.


When Çravaëa is conjoined with the moon, this dvädaçé becomes a very sacred day. By that conjunction it becomes glorious.

Text 591

atha çravaëa-nakñatra-yuktaikädaçy-upaväsaù

näradiye

yadi na präpyate åkñaà dvädaçyäà vaiñëavaà kvacitekädaçé tadopoñyä päpa-ghné çravaëänvitä

atha-now; çravaëa-nakñatra-yukta-with the star Sravana; ekädaçi-on ekadasi; upaväsaù-fasting; näradiye-in thre Narada Purana; yadi-if; na-not; präpyate-is attained; åkñam-teh star; dvädaçyäm-on dvadasi; vaiñëavam-Vaiñëava; kvacit-somewhere; ekädaçé-ekadasi; tadä-then. upoñyä-top be fasted; päpa-ghné-destroying sins; çravaëänvitä-with Çravaëa.

Fasting on an Ekädaçé When the Star Çravaëa Is Conjoined with the Moon


If Çravaëa is not conjoined with the moon on the dvädaçé, but it is so on the ekädaçé, one should fast on the ekädaçé. That ekädaçé destroys sins.

Text 592

ubhayor devatä viñëuù puräëaù puruñottamaùvibhedo 'tra na kartavyo vibhedät patate naraù

ubhayoù-of both; devatä-the Deity; viñëuù-Lord Viñëu; puräëaù-ther ancinet; puruñottamaù-Supreme Personality of Godhead; vibhedaù-difference; atrahere; na-not; kartavyaù-to be done; vibhedät-from difference; patate-falls; naraù-a person.

Lord Viñëu, the ancient Supreme Personality of Godhead, is the presiding Deity of both these days. Therefore one should not make a distinction between them, saying one is better than the other. One who makes such a distinction falls down.

Text 593

ata eva bhaviñyottare

ekädaçé yadä ca syät çravaëena samanvitävijayä sä tithiù proktä bhaktänäà vijaya-pradä

ata eva-therefore; bhaviñyottare-in the Bhavisya Purana, Uttara-khanda; ekädaçé-ekadasi; yadä-when; ca-qnd; syät-is; çravaëena-with sravana; samanvitä-with; vijayä-vijaya; sä-that; tithiù-day; proktä-said; bhaktänäm-of the devotees; vijaya-pradä-giving victory.


When the star Çravaëa is conjoined with the moon on this ekädaçé, the day is called vijayä ekädaçé, for it brings victory (vijaya) to the devotees.

Text 594

viñëu-puräëe

yäù käçcit tithayaù proktäù puëyä nakñatra-yogataùtäsv eva tad-vrataà kuryäc chravaëa-dvädaçéà vinä. iti.

viñëu-puräëe-in the Viñëu Purana; yäù-who; käçcit-someone; tithayaù-days; proktäù-said; puëyä-sacred; nakñatra-yogataù-with the star; täsu-in therm; eva-indeed; tad-vratam-thqat vow; kuryät-should do; çravaëa-dvädaçém-çravaëa-dvädaçé; vinä-without; iti-thus.


Çravaëa-dvädaçé is not usually counted among the various holy days with auspicious stars. (That is because it is considered to be included in the previous ekädaçé).

Text 595

ekädaçy-upaväse ca dvädaçyäà kåñëam arcayet

prädurbhüte hi bhagavän dvädaçyäm eva vämanaù

ekädaçy-upaväse-fasting on ekadasi; ca-and; dvädaçyäm-on dvadasi; kåñëam-Lord Kåñëa; arcayet-should worship; prädurbhüte-born; hi-indeed; bhagavän-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; dvädaçyäm-on dvadasi; eva-indeed; vämanaù-Lord Vämana.

On that ekädaçé one should fast, and on the dvädaçé one should worship Lord Kåñëa. This is so because Lord Vämana appeared in this world on that dvädaçé.

Text 596

tathä ca matsya-puraëe

upoñyaikädaçéà tatra dvädaçyäà püjayed dharim. iti.

tathä-so; ca-and; matsya-puraëe-in the Matsya Purana; upoñya-fasting; ekädaçém-on ekadasi; tatra-there; dvädaçyäm-on dvadasi; püjayet-should worship; harim-Lord Kåñëa; iti-thus.


On that ekädaçé one should fast, and on the dvädaçé one should worship Lord Hari.

Text 597

ato yadi na labhyeta madhyähne dvädaçé tadädvädaçé-madhya evärcyo vämanas tarhi süribhiù. iti.

ataù-then; yadi-if; na-not; labhyeta-is attained; madhyähne-in midday; dvädaçé-dvadasi; tadä-then; dvädaçé-madhya-in the mi

If by midday dvädaçé is not attained, then the devotees should wait until the day when it is dvädaçé at midday. On that day they should worship Lord Vämana.

Text 598

atha çré-viñëu-çåìkhala-yogaù

mätsye

dvädaçé çravaëa-spåñöä spåçed ekädaçéà yadäsa eña vaiñëavo yogo viñëu-çåìkhala-samjïitaù

atha-now; çré-viñëu-çåìkhala-yugaù-Çré Viñëu-çåìkhala-yoga; mätsye-in the Matsya Purana; dvädaçé-çravaëa-spåñöä-touched by the dvadasi and by Sravana; spåçet-touches; ekädaçém-ekadasi; yadä-when; sa-that; eña-that; vaiñëavaù-a Vaiñëava; yogaù-yoga; viñëu-çåìkhala-Viñëu-çåìkhala; samjïitaù-called.

Çré Viñëu-çåìkhala-yoga


When a dvädaçé touched by Çravaëa touches this ekädaçé, that day is very sacred to Lord Viñëu. That day is called Çré Viñëu-çåìkhala-yoga.

Text 599

tasminn upoñya vidhi-van naraù saìkñéëa-kalmasaùpräpnotv anuttamäà siddhià punar-ävåtti-durlabhäm. iti.

tasmin-then; upoñya-fasting; vidhi-vat-properly; naraù-a person; saìkñéëa-kalmasaù-free of sin; präpnotu-attains; anuttamäm-peerless; siddhim-perfection; punar-ävåtti-durlabhäm-rare in the material world of repeated birth; iti-thus.

A person who fasts on that day becomes free from sin. He attains a perfection without peer, a perfection rare in this world of repeated births.

Text 600

ekädaçé-padenätra tad aho-rätra ucyateanyathä dvädaçé-sparças tasyäà nityaà na vidyate

ekädaçé-padena-by the word ekadasi; atra-here; tat-that; aho-rätra-day and night; ucyate-is said; anyathä-otherwise; dvädaçé-by dvadasi; sparçaù-touch; tasyäm-then; nityam-always; na-not; vidyate-is.

The word "ekädaçé" here refers to both the day and the night. Were this not so, the touch of the dvädaçé would almost never occur.

Text 601

tithi-nakñatrayor yoga ity ädyaà yat tu darçitamtenälpa-käla-samyoge 'py añöa-yämikateñyate

tithi-nakñatrayoù-of the tithi and the star; yoga-junction; iti-thus; ädyam-beginning; yat-what; tu-indeed; darçitam-revealed; tena-by that; alpa-slight; käla-time; samyoge-in contact; api-even; añöa-yämikatä-fro eight yamikas; iñyate-is.

In text 589 it is seen that even if the yoga of tithi and star is very brief, the day is still called Añöa-ämika.

Text 602

atraiva dvädaçé-madhye päraëaà çravaëe 'dhikevakñyamänaà ca ghaöate 'nyathä prägvad dvidhä vratam

atra-here; eva-indeed; dvädaçé-madhye-in the midst of the dvadasi; päraëam-breaking the fast; çravaëe-in Sravana; adhike-great; vakñyamänam-will be spoken; ca-and; ghaöate-is; anyathä-otherwise; prägvat-as before; dvidhä-in two ways; vratam-vow.

If Çravaëa is conjoined with the moon, it is best to break the fast on the dvädaçé. If Çravaëa is not conjoined with the moon, the vow may be observed in two ways, as has already been described. More will be said of this later.

Text 603

dvädaçé çravaëarkñaà cety asmin päöhe bhaved idamdvädaçé-çravaëa-spåñöety asmiàç ca spåñöatä khalu tat-tat-sähityam eväha pürvasmäd eva hetutaù

dvädaçé-dvadasi; çravaëa-Sravana; åkñam-the star; ca-and; iti-thus; asmin-in this; päöhe-reading; bhavet-is; idam-this; dvädaçé-dvadasi; çravaëa-by Srvana; spåñöä-touched; iti-thus; asmin-in this; ca-and; spåñöatä-touched; khalu-indeed; tat-tat-sähity

The first line of text 589 may also be read "dvädaçé çravaëarkñaà ca" (dvädaçé and the star Çravaëa). Thus the touc of dvädaçé and the star Çravaëa is described. This is for the same reason as given previously.

Text 604

atha tasmäd ayaà tu tatraiva viçeñaù dvitéya-viñëu-çåìkhala-yogaù

yathä viñëu-dharmottare

ekädaçé dvädaçé ca vaiñëavyam api tad bhavettad viñëu-çåìkhalaà näma viñëu-säyujya-kåd bhavet tasminn upoñanäd gacchec chvetadvépa-puraà dhruvam

atha-now; tasmät-from that; ayam-this; tu-indeed; tatra-there; eva-indeed; viçeñaù-specific; dvitéya-viñëu-çåìkhala-yogaù-Dvitéya Viñëu-çåìkhala-yoga; yathä-as; viñëu-dharmottare-in Çré Viñëu-dharma Purana, Uttara-khanda; ekädaçé-ekadasi; dvädaçé-dvadasi; ca-and; vaiñëavyam-the star Çravaëa; api-also; tat-that; bhavet-is; tat-that; viñëu-çåìkhalam-Çré Viñëu-çåìkhala; näma-named; viñëu-säyujya-kåt-the cause of liberation in Lord Viñëu; bhavet-is; tasmin-in that; upoñanät-form fasting; gacchet-may go; çvetadvipa-puram-to the realm of Çvetadvépa; dhruvam-eternal.

The Second Çré Viñëu-çåìkhala-yoga

In the Çré Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, it is said:

When ekädaçé, dvädaçé, and the star Çravaëa combine in a single day, that day is called Çré Viñëu-çåìkhala-yoga. That day brings Viñëu-säyujya liberation. By fasting on that day one goes to the eternal realm of Çvetadvépa.

Text 605

dvädaçyäm upaväso 'tra trayodaçyäà tu päraëamniñiddham api kartavyaà ity ajïä parameçvaré. iti.

dvädaçyäm-on the dvadasi; upaväsaù-fasting; atra-here; trayodaçyäm-on the trayodasi; tu-indeed; päraëam-breaking the fast; niñiddham-forbidden; api-also; kartavyam-to be done; iti-thus; ajïä-the order; parameçvaré-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; iti-thus.

reme Personality of Godhead.

Text 606

yogo 'yam anyo dvädaçyäù kñaya eveti lakñyatedvädaçyäm upaväsäc ca trayodaçyäà tu päraëät trayodaçyäà päraëaà hi çravaëe 'pi nisetsyate

yogaù-yoga; ayam-this; anyaù-another; dvädaçyäù-of dvadasi; kñaya-destruction; eva-indeed; iti-thus; lakñyate-is observed; dvädaçyäm-on dvadasi; upaväsät-from fasting; ca-and; trayodaçyäm-on trayodasi; tu-indeed; päraëät-from braking the fast; trayodaçyäm-on trayodasi; päraëam-breaking the fast; hi-indeed; çravaëe-in Sravana; api-also; nisetsyate-is forbidden.

To fast on the dvädaçé and break the fast on the trayodaçé breaks the special yoga of the dvädaçé in this situation. When the star Çravaëa is present on ekädaçé it is also forbidden to break the fast on the trayodaçé.

Text 607

ataù viñëu-çåìkhala eva viçeñäntaraà

dvädaçy ekädaçé saumyaù çravaëaà ca catuñöayamdeva-dundubhi-yogo 'yaà yajïäyuta-phala-pradaù. iti.

ataù-now; viñëu-çåìkhale-in Viñëu-çåìkhala; eva-indeed; viçeña-specific situation; antaram-another; dvädaçi-dvadasi; ekädaçé-ekadasi; saumyaù-Wednesday; çravaëam-sravana; ca-and; catuñöayam-fourth; deva-dundubhi-yogaù-deva-dundubhi-yoga; ayam-which; yajïa-of yajnas; ayuta-ten thousand; phala-results; pradaù-give; iti-thus.

A Different Kind of Situation in Çré Viñëu-çåìkhala-yoga

When dvädaçé, ekädaçé, Wednesday, and the star Çravaëa meet in a single day, that meeting is called deva-dundubhi-yoga. That day gives a pious result equal to ten thousand yajïas.

Text 608

päraëähe tu dvädaçyäù çravaëäyäç ca våddhitaùrätrau tu päraëäbhäväd yuktaà kartuà vrata-dvayam

päraëa-breaking the fast; ahe-in the day; tu-indeed; dvädaçyäù-of dvadasi; çravaëäyäù-of sravana; ca-and; våddhitaù-from thdo; vrata-dvayam-both vows.

One may break the fast on a dvädaçé with Çravaëa. One may not break the fast at night. One may observe the vow of fasting on both ekädaçé and dvädaçé.

Text 609

na cätra vidhi-lopaù syäd ubhayor devatä hariù

na-not; ca-and; atra-here; vidhi-of rules; lopaù-omission; syät-is; ubhayoù-of both; devatä-the Deity; hariù-Lord Kåñëa.

There is no fault in fasting on both days, for Lord Hari is the presiding Deity of both these days.

Text 610

dvädaçyäm upaväso 'tra trayodaçyäà tu päraëam

dvädaçyäm-on dvadasi; upaväsaù-fasting; atra-in this situation; trayodaçyäm-onm trayodasi; tu-indeed; päraëam-breaking the fast.

In this situation one may fast on dvädaçé and break the fast in trayodaçé.

Text 611

dina-dvaye 'pi çravaëä- bhäve tad-yoga-hänitaùekädaçyäm upoñyaiva dvädaçyäà vämanaà yajet

dina-dvaye-on both days; api-also; çravaëa-sravana; abhäve-in the absence; tad-yoga-hänitaù-because of destroying the yoga; ekädaçyäm-on ekadasi; upoñya-fasting; eva-indeed; dvädaçyäm-on dvadasi; vämanam-Lord Vämana; yajet-should worship.

If the star Çravaëa is not conjoined with the moon on either ekädaçé or dvädaçé, then there is no yoga. In that situation one should fast on ekädaçé and worship Lord Vämana on the dvädaçé.

Text 612

viñëu-çåìkhalake 'pi syäd våttir niçi paratra cetyad ädhikyaà tithi-bhayoù çaktaù kuryäd vrata-dvayam

viñëu-çåìkhalake-on Viñëu-çåìkhala; api-even; syät-may be; våttiù-action; niçi-at night; paratra-on the next; cet-if; yat-w

Even when there is a Çré Viñëu-çåìkhala-yuga and both the tithi and Çavaëa are present at night, then it is is best to fast, if one is able, on both days.

Text 613

päraëäya anaucityaà tävatyäà niçi ced bhavetaçaktas tüttaraà kuryäd yogasyaivasya gauravat

päraëäya-for breaking the fast; anaucityam-imporpriety; tävatyäm-then; niçi-at night; cet-if; bhavet-is; açaktaù-unable; tu-indeed; uttaram-better; kuryät-should do; yogasya-of the yoga; eva-indeed; asya-of this; gauravät-because of importance.

However, it is not proper to break the fast at night. If one is not able to fast on both days, in this situation one should fast on the dvädaçé, for then the yoga is more important.

Text 614

atha tatra päraëa-käla-nirëayaù

sa ca vrata-vikalpe dvitéye viñëu-çåìkhale ca spañöa eva. kevala-çravaëa-niñkarñe tu na tad-ädaraù. tithi-nakñatra-saàyoge ity ädi vakñyamänebhyaù.

atha-now; tatra-there; päraëa-käla-nirëayaù-the time of breaking the fast; sa-that; ca-and; vrata-vikalpe-in the decision to follow the vow; dvitéye-second; viñëu-çåìkhale-in the Viñëu-çåìkhala; ca-and; spañöa-clear; eva-indeed; kevala-çravaëa-niñkarñe-in the drawing our of Sravana; tu-indeed; na-not; tad-ädaraù-worship of that; tithi-nakñatra-yoge-in the yoga of tithi and star; iti-thus; ädi-beginning; vakñyamänebhyaù-which will be spoken.

The Time of Breaking the Fast

In the Second Çré Viñëu-çåìkhala this is clear. However, when the star Çravaëa is not conjoined with the moon this is not so. This will be discussed in the verse beginning with the words "tithi-nakñatra-samyoge".

Text 615

prathama-viñëu-çåìkhale päraëa-nirëayaù

anuvåttir dvayor eva päraëähe bhaved yaditaträdhikye tither våtte bhänte saty eva päraëam

prathama-viñëu-çåìkhale-First Viñëu-çåìkhala; päraëa-nirëayaù-time of breaking the fast; anuvåttiù-following; dvayoù-of both; eva-indeed; päraëähe-on the day of breaking the fast; bhavet-is; yadi-if; tatra-there; ädhikye-more; titheù-of the tithi; våtte-engaged; bhä-ante-in the end of the star; sati-is; eva-indeed; päraëam-breaking the fast.

The Time of Breaking the Fast After the First Viñëu-çåìkhala:

It is best to break the fast on the next day, after both the tithi and star-conjunction have ended.

Text 616

yad uktaà näradéye

tithi-nakñatrayor yoge upaväso bhaved yadäpäraëaà tu na kartavyaà yävan naikasya saìkñayaù. iti.

yat-what; uktam-said; näradéye-in the Narada Purana; tithi-nakñatrayoù-of the tithi and the star; yoge-in conjunction; upaväsaù-fasting; bhavet-is; yadä-when; päraëam-breaking the fast; tu-indeed; na-not; kartavyam-to be done; yävan-when; na-nor; ekasya-of one; saìkñayaù-the end; iti-thus.

This is described in the following words of the Närada Puräëa:

When the tithi and the star are both present, one should fast. One should not break the fast until at least one of these has ended.

Text 617

åkñasya sati cädhikye tithi-madhye tu päraëamdvädaçé-laìghane doço bahuço likhito yataù

åkñasya-of the star; sati-being so; ca-and; ädhikye-better; tithi-madhye-in the middle of the day; tu-indeed; päraëam-breaking the fast; dvädaçé-dvadasi; laìghane-jumping over; doçaù-fcault; bahuçaù-great; likhitaù-written; yataù-because.

If the star is still conjoined by the middle of the dvädaçé, one should break the fast then, for the scriptures affirm that it is a great fault not to break the fast on dvädaçé.

Text 618

tathä coktaà

tithi-nakñatra-samyoge upaväso yadä bhavettavad eva na bhoktavyaà yävan naikasya saìkñayaù

tathä-so; ca-and; uktam-said; tithi-nakñatra-samyoge-in the junction of tithi and star; upaväsaù-fasting; yadä-when; bhavet-is; tavat-then; eva-indeed; na-not; bhoktavyam-to be eaten; yävan-when; na-not; ekasya-of one; saìkñayaù-end.

It is said:

One should fast when the tithi and star are both present. One should not break his fast until at least one of the two has ended.

Text 619

viçeñena mahé-päla çravaëaà vardhate yaditithi-kñayena bhoktavyaà dvädaçéà naiva laìghayet. iti.

viçeñena-specifically; mahé-päla-O king; çravaëam-sravan; vardhate-increases; yadi-if; tithi-kñayena-by ending the tithi; bhoktavyam-to be eaten; dvädaçém-dvadasi; na-not; eva-indeed; laìghayet-should overllok; iti-thus.

O king, this is especially so when the star Çravaëa is prominent. One should fast when the tithi has ended. One should not ignore the presence of the dvädaçé.

Text 620

evaà dvayor niça-vyäptau cähni päraëam éritamna rätrau päraëaà kuryäd iti hy anyatra sammatam

evam-thus; dvayoù-of both; niça-vyäptau-exteningin the night; ca-and; ahni-in the day; päraëam-breaking the fast; éritam-said; na-not; rätrau-at night; päraëam-breaking the fast; kuryät-should do; iti-thus; hi-indeed; anyatra-in another place; sammatam-concluded.

When both are present at night, one should break the fast on the following day. One should not break the fast at night. That is also confirmed in other scriptures.

Text 621

yato räträv åkña-labdhäv api dvädaçy-atikramaùataù kåtaà paunar-uktyaà dvädaçéà naiva laìghayet

yataù-when; räträu-at night; åkña-labdhäu-attainment of the star; api-also; dvädaçy-atikramaù-beyond dvadasi; ataù-

then; kåtam-done; paunar-uktyam-again said; dvädaçém-dvadasi; na-not; eva-indeed; laìghayet-should jump over.

When the star is present the whole night and is still present during dvädaçé, one should not neglect the dvädaçé. On dvädaçé the fast should be broken. This is said again and again.

Text 622

eva-käreëa ca punas tad eva niradhäri yatdvädaçy-anädaro nätaù käryo bhasya tu sa småtaù

eva-käreëa-by the word eva; ca-and; punaù-again; tat-that; eva-indeed; niradhäri-accepts; yat-what; dvädaçy-anädaraù-disrespecting the dvadasi; na-not; ataù-then; käryaù-to be don; bhasya-of the star; tu-indeed; sa-that; småtaù-considered.

The word "eva" (indeed) in this verse emphasizes that one should not disrespect the dvädaçé, even if the star is still present.

Text 623

tathä ca skände

yäù käçcit tithayaù proktäù puëyä nakñatra-yogataùåkñänte päraëaà kuryäd vinä çravaëa-rohiëém. iti.

tathä-so; ca-and; skände-in the Skanda Purana; yaù-who; kaçcit-someone; tithayaù-days; proktaù-said; puëyä-holy; nakñatra-yogataù-with stars; åkñänte-at the end of the stars; päraëam-breaking the fast; kuryät-should do; vinä-without; çravaëa-rohiëém-Sravana and Rohini. iti..


When special star-moon conjunctions occur during holy days, one should break the fast after the stellar conjunction has ended. However, the stars Çravaëa and Rohiëi provide exceptions to this rule.

Text 624

yato rätri-gato dvädaçy- aàço nätra vicäryateato vardhata ity äha päraëäsamayätyayam

yataù-when; rätri-gataù-at night; dvädaçi-of dvadasi; aàçaù-a part; na-not; atra-here; vicäryate-is considered; ataù-then; vardhata-increases; iti-thus; äha-said; päraëa-of breaking the fast; asamayätyayam-past the time.

The time when not even a part of the dvädaçé is present at night is not considered here. That time is called "ato-vardhate". That is past the time for breaking the fast.

Text 625

trayodaçyäà päraëaà tu naitad viñayam iñyatetrayodaçyäm apéty etad anukter advidhä småtaù

trayodaçyäm-on trayodasi; päraëam-breaking the fast; tu-indeed; na-not; etat-this; viñayam-the range of perception; iñyate-is; trayodaçyäm-on trayodasi; api-also; iti-thus; etat-this; anukteù-not from the statement; advidhä-not two; småtaù-considered.

One should not break the fast on the trayodaçé. This is not confirmed by the words of scripture.

Text 626

praty utätra tu-çabdena tasyaikadhyaà pradarçitamparyavasyed ato yuktyä dvädaçé-kñaya eva tat

praty uta-however; atra-here; tu-çabdena-with the word tu; tasya-of that; ekadhyaà-one; pradarçitam-shown; paryavasyet-should conclude; ataù-then; yuktyä-properly; dvädaçé-kñaya-the edn of dvadasi; eva-indeed; tat-that.

Here the word "tu" (indeed) shows that one should properly observe the end of dvädaçé.

Text 627

tathäpi sandihänaç ced gåhëéyäc caraëämåtampäraëäyäù paraà samyak pürakaà tad bhaved yataù

tathäpi-still; sandihänaù-doubt; cet-if; gåhëéyät-should accept; caraëämåtam-the water that has washed the feet of the Deit

If there is doubt about whether the fast should be broken at that time, one may accept caraëämåta, the water that has washed the feet of the Deity.

Text 628

gautaméye tu sphuöam evoktaà

yad-åkñaà vä tithir väpi rätrià vyäpya vyavasthitädivase päraëaà kuryäd anyathä patanaà bhavet. iti.

gautaméye-in the Gautamiya Tantra; tu-indeed; tu-indeed; sphuöam-clear; eva-indeed; uktaàsaid; yad-åkñam-the star; vä-or; tithiù-the tithi; vä-or; api-also; rätrim-the night; vyäpya-extending; vyavasthitä-situated; divase-on the day; päraëam-breaking the fast; kuryät-should do; anyathä-otherwise; patanam-falling down; bhavet-may be; iti-thus.


When the star or tithi are present during the night, one should break the fast on the following day. Otherwise one will fall down.

Text 629

atha çré-vämana-vrata-vidhiù

natvä gurum anujïäpya

paçcän niyamam äcaretna hi sidhyed guror bhaktià niyamaà ca vinä phalam

atha-now; çré-vämana-vrata-vidhiù-the method of following the vow for Lord Vämana; natvä-bowing; gurum-to the spiritual master; anujïäpya-asking for permission; paçcät-then; niyamam-the rules; äcaret-should follow; na-not; hi-indeed; sidhyet-is perfect; guroù-to the spiritual master; bhaktim-devotion; niyamam-rules; ca-and; vinä-without; phalam-result.

The Method of Following the Vow To Please Lord Vämana

First one should bow down before one's spiritual master and ask permission to follow this vow. Without devotion to the spiritual master this vow will not bear its fruit.

Text 630

tatra niyama-mantraù

ekädaçyäà nirähäraù sthitvä caiväpare 'hanibhokñye çré-vämanänanta çaraëägata-vatsala

tatra-there; niyama-mantraù-the mantra of the vow; ekädaçyäm-on ekadasi; nirähäraù-without eating; sthitvä-staying; ca-and; eva-indeed; apare-on the next; ahani-day; bhokñye-I will eat; çré-vämana-O Vämana; ananta--O limitless one; çaraëägata-of the surrendered devotees; vatsala-affectionate.

The Mantra For This Vow

O limitless Lord Vämana, O Lord affectionate to the surrendered devotees, on this ekädaçé day I stand, fasting, before You. Today I will not eat. I will not eat until tomorrow.

Text 631

ekädaçyä rajanyäà vä dvädaçyäà cärcayet prabhum

ekädaçyäù-of ekadasi; rajanyäm-at night; vä-or; dvädaçyäm-on dvadasi; ca-and; arcayet-should worship; prabhum-the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Then, on the night of that ekädaçé, or on the following dvädaçé, one should worship the Supreme Lord.

Text 632

svarëa-rüpya-maye pätre tämra-vaàsa-maye 'pi väkuëòikäà sthäpayet pärçve chätrikä-pädukäs tathä çubhaà ca vaiëavéà yañöim akña-sütraà pavitrakam

svarëa-gold; rüpya-silver; maye-made of; pätre-in a dish; tämra-copper; vaàça-bamboo; maye-made of; api-and; vä-or; kuëòikäm-a pitcher; sthäpayet-should place; pärçve-on the side; chätrikä-parasol; pädukäù-sandals; tathä-so; çubham-auspicious; ca-and; vaiëavém-bamboo; yañöim-stick; akña-sütram-aksa beads; pavitrakam-sacred thread.

One should place the Deity of the Lord on a plate made of gold, silver, copper, or bamboo, and by His side one should place a kamaëòalu, parasol, sandals, bamboo staff, akña beads, and sacred-thread.

Text 633

puñpair gandhaiù phalair dhüpair vämanaà cärcayed dharimnänä-vidhaiç ca naivedyair bhakñya-bhojyair guòaudanaiù jägaraëaà niçi kurvéta géta-vädyädi-nartanaiù

puñpaiù-with flowers; gandhaiù-scents; phalaiù-fruits; dhüpaiù-incense; vämanam-Lord Vämana; ca-and; arcayet-should worship; harim-Lord Hari; nänä-vidhaiù-with various kinds; ca-and; naivedyaiù-of foods; bhakñya-bhojyaiù-delicious; guòa-odanaiù-with mollasses and rice; jägaraëam-vigil; niçi-at night; kurvéta-should do; géta-vädyädi-nartanaiù-with singing, music, and dancing.

Then one should worship Lord Vämana with offerings of flowers, scents, fruits, incense, rice, molasses, and various kinds of delicious foods. With singing, dancing, and instrumental music, one should keep an all-night vigil.

Text 634

evam ärädhya deveçaà prabhäte vimale satiädäv arghyaà pradätavyaà paçcäd devaà präpüjayet närikelena çubhreëa dadyäd arghyaà ca pürva-vat

evam-thus; ärädhya-worshiping; deveçam-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; prabhäte-at dawn; vimale-splenidd; sati-being; ädau-in the beginning; arghyam-arghya; pradätavyam-to be given; paçcät-then; devam-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; präpüjayet-should worship; närikelena-with a coconut; çubhreëa-splendid; dadyät-should give; arghyam-arghya; ca-nad; pürva-vat-as before.

After thus worshiping the Lord, at dawn one should offer arghya, worship the Lord again, and, as before, again offer the Lord arghya in a splendid coconut shell.

Text 635

atha arghya-däna-mantraù

vämanäya namas tubhyaà kränta-tribhuvanäya cagåhäëärghyaà mayä dattaà vämanäya namo 'stu te vämanäya arghyaà namaù

atha-now; arghya-däna-mantraù-the mantra for offering arghya; vämanäya-to Lord Vämana; namaù-obeisances; tubhyam-to You; kränta-with steps; tribhuvanäya-the three worlds; ca-and; gåhäëa-please accept; arghyam-arghya; mayä-by me; dattam-given; vämanäya-to Vämana; namaù-obeisances; astu-are; te-to You; vämanäya-to Lord Vämana; arghyam-arghyam; namaù-obeisances.


Obeisances to You, O Lord Vämana who stepped across the three worlds. Please accept this arghya I offer You. Obeisances to You, O Lord Vämana. This arghya is offered to Lord Vämana. Obeisances to Lord Vämana.

Texts 636 and 637

matsyaà kürmaà varähaà ca narasiàhaà ca vämanamrämaà rämaà ca kåñëaà ca kramäd dvau buddha-kalkinau

pädayor jänunor guhye näbhyäm urasi kakñayoùbhujayor mürdhni sarväìgeñv arcayed ayudhäni ca

matsyam-Matsya; kürmam-Kürma; varäham-Varäha; ca-and; narasiàham-Narasiàham; ca-and; vämanam-Vämana; rämam-Räma; rämam-Räma; ca-and; kåñëam-Kåñëa; ca-and; kramät-in sequence; dvau-both; buddha-kalkinau-Buddha and Kalké; pädayoù-at the feet; jänunoù-on the knees; guhye-in the loins; näbhyäm-on the navel; urasi-on the chest; kakñayoù-under the arms; bhujayoù-on the arms; mürdhni-on the head; sarväìgeñu-on all the limbs; arcayet-should worship; ayudhäni-the weapons; ca-also.

One should worship different forms of the Lord on the different limbs of Lord Vämana. At Lord Vämana's feet one should worship Lord Matsya. At His knees one should worship Lord Kürma, at His loins Lord Varäha, at His navel Lord Nåsiàha, on His chest Lord Vämana, under His arms Lord Paraçuräma, on both His arms Lord Rämacandra, on His head Lord Kåñëa, and on all His limbs Buddha and Kalki. Then one should also worship the weapons of the Lord.


The first mantra here is "oà matsyäya namaù pädayoù". The other mantras follow this prototype. The mantra for the weapons is "oà sarvebhya äyudhebhyo namaù".

Translator's note: The mantras then become: 1. oà matsyäya namaù pädayoù, 2. oà kürmäya namo jänunoù, 3. oà varähäya namo guhye, 4. oà narasiàhäya namo näbhyäm, 5. oà vämanäya nama urasi, 5. oà rämäya namaù kakñayoù, 6. oà rämäya namo bhujayoù, 7. oà kåñëäya namo mürdhni, 8. oà buddha-kalkibhyäà namaù sarväìgeñu, and 9. oà sarvebhya äyudhebhyo namaù.

Text 638

mahä-püjäntaù kåtvä go-mahéà käïcanädikamçaktyäcaryäya dätavyaà brähmaëebhyaç ca mantrataù

mahä-püjä-the the great worship; antaùend; kåtvä -doing; go-mahém-the cows and the earth; käïcanädikam-beginning with gold; çaktyä-with ability; äcaryäya-to the spiritual master; dätavyam-should be given; brähmaëebhyaù-to the brahmanas; ca-and; mantrataù-with the mantra.

When this great worship is concluded one should offer, with mantras and as far as one is able, cows, land, gold, and other gifts to his spiritual master and to the brähmaëas.

Text 639

brähmaëaç cäpi mantreëa pratigåhëäti mantra-vitdadäti mantrato hy eva dätä bhakti-samanvitaù

brähmaëaù-a brahmana; ca-and; api-also; mantreëa-with a mnantra; pratigåhëäti-accepts; mantra-vit-knowing mantras; dadäti-gives; mantrataù-by mantra; hi-indeed; eva-indeed; dätä-the giver; bhakti-samanvitaù-with devotion.

A brähmaëa learned in mantras should, recite mantras as he accepts the gifts. The person who gives should recite mantras as he devotedly gives the gifts.

Text 640

tatra däna-mantraù

vämano buddhi-do dätä dravya-stho vämanaù svayamvämanaç ca pratigrähé tena me vämane ratiù

tatra-there; däna-mantraù-the mantra for giving gifts; vämanaù-Lord Vämana; buddhi-daù-the giver of intelligence; dätä-the giver; dravya-sthaù-staying in the item; vämanaù-Lord Vämana; svayam-person ally; vämanaù-Lord Vämana; ca-and; pratigrähé-accepting; tena-by that; me-of me; vämane-for Lord Vämana; ratiù-devotional love.

The Mantra For Giving Gifts

Lord Vämana is the giver of intelligence. He is the real giver of the gift. Lord Vämana is Himself present in the gift. Lord Vämana is the final recipient of the gift. May giving this gift increase my love and devotion for Lord Vämana

Text 641

pratigraha-mantraù

vämanaù pratigåhëäti vämano 'pi dadäti cavämanas tarako dväbhyäà tenedaà vämane namaù

pratigraha-mantraù-the mantra for recieving gifts; vämanaù-Lord Vämana; pratigåhëäti-accepts; vämanaù-Lord Vämana; api-also; dadäti-gives; ca-and; vämanaù-Lord Vämana; tarakaù-the savior; dväbhyäm-both; tena-by this; idam-this; vämane-to Lord Vämana; namaù-obeisances.

The Mantra For Accepting Gifts

Lord Vämana is the final recipient of this gift. It is Lord Vämana who ultimately gave this gift. Lord Vämana is our deliverer. Obeisances to Lord Vämana.

Text 642

evaà kåtvä vidhänena bhojanaà påñad-äjyakampürvaà dadyäd brähmaëebhyaù paçcäd bhuïjéta bandhubhiù. iti.

evam-thus; kåtvä-doing; vidhänena-properly; bhojanam-food; påñad-äjyakam-with yogurt and ghee; pürvam-before; dadyät-should offer; brähmaëebhyaù-to the brahmanas; paçcät-after; bhuïjéta-should eat; bandhubhiù-with hsi friends and kinsmen; iti-thus.

Then one should offer a feast with ghee and yogurt to the brähmaëas. After that, one should eat with his friends and kinsmen.

Text 643

yad vämana-puräëe ca yad bhaviñyottare vratamvämanasyoditaà tasyä- nusäräl likhitaà tv idam

yat-what; vämana-puräëe-in the Vämana Purana; ca-and; yat-what; bhaviñyottare-in the Bhavisya POurana, Uttara-khanda; vratam-vow; vämanasya-of Lord Vämana; uditam-said; tasya-of that; anusärät-by following; likhitam-written; tu-indeed; idam-that.

These words have followed the description of the Vämana vow in the Vämana Puräëa and Bhaviñya Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa.

Texts 644 and 645

brahma-vaivarte

gåhétvä niyamaà prätar gatvä nadyoç ca saìgamesauvarëaà vämanaà kåtvä sauvarëa-mäñakeëa ca

yathä-çaktyätha vittasya kumbhopari jagat-patimsvarëa-pätre snäpayitvä mantrair etaiç ca püjayet

brahma-vaivarte-in the Brahma-vaivarta Purana; gåhétvä-taking; niyamam-the vow; prätaù-at dawn; gatvä-going; nadyoù-of a river; ca-and; saìgame-in the contact; sauvarëam-golden; vämanam-Vämana; kåtvä-doing; sauvarëa-mäñakeëa-with gold weighing a masa; ca-and; yathä-çaktyä-as able; atha-then; vittasya-of wealth; kumbha-a pot; upari-above; jagat-patim-the master of the universes; svarëa-pätre-in a golden bowl; snäpayitvä-bathing; mantraiù-with mantras; etaiù-these; ca-and; püjayet-should worship.


A person observing the vow should recite the saìkalpa-mantra, go to a river, fashion a Deity of Lord Vämana, a Deity made of one mäña of gold, or if not of gold, then of another substance according to one's possession of wealth, place the Deity in a golden basin, bathe Him, and worship Him with the following mantras.

Text 646

tatra vämana-püjä-mantraù

oà vämanäya namaù padau kaöià damodaräya caürü çré-pataye guhyaà kämadeväya püjayet

tatra-there; vämana-of Lord Vämana; püja-for worship; mantraù-mantra; om-Oà; vämanäya-to Lord Vämana; namaù-obeisances; padau-feet; kaöim-waist; damodaräya-to Lord Damodara; ca-and; ürü-thighs; çré-pataye-the husband of Goddess Lakñmé; guhyam-loins; kämadeväya-Kämadeva; püjayet-should worship.

The Mantras For Worshiping Lord Vämana

One should worship the feet of the Deity with the mantra, "Oà vämanäya namaù". One should worship the Lord's waist with the mantra, "Oà dämodaräya namaù". One should worship the Lord's thighs with the mantra, "Oà çré-pataye namaù". One should worship the Lord's loins with the mantra, "Oà kämadeväya namaù".

Text 647

püjayej jagatäà patyur udaraà viçva-dhäriëehådayaà yoga-näthäya kaëöhaà çré-pataye namaù

püjayet-should worship; jagatäm-of the universes; patyuù-iof the master; udaram-the belly; viçva-dhäriëe-the maintainer of the universes; hådayam-the heart; yoga-of yoga; näthäya-the master; kaëöham-the neck; çré-pataye-the husband of Goddess Lakñmé; namaù-obeisances.

One should worship the belly of the master of the universes with the mantra, "Oà viçva-dhäriëe namaù". One should worship His heart with the mantra, "Oà yoganäthäya namaù". One should worship His neck with the mantra "Oà çré-pataye namaù".

Text 648

mukhaà ca paìkajakñäya çiraù sarvätmane namaùitthaà sampüjya väsobhir äcchädya ca jagad-guruà dadyät su-çraddhayä cärghyaà närikelädibhiù phalaiù

mukham-face; ca-and; paìkajakñäya-lotus-eyed; çiraù-head; sarvätmane-the soul of all; namaù-obeisances; ittham-thus; sampüjya-worshiping; väsobhiù-with water; äcchädya-covering; ca-and; jagad-gurum-the master of the universes; dadyät-should give; su-çraddhayä-with great faith; ca-and; arghyam-arghya; närikelädibhiù-with cocnuts and others; phalaiù-with fruits.

One should worship His face with the mantra "Oà paìkajäkñäya namaù". One should worship His head with the mantra "Oà sarvätmane namaù". After thus worshiping the Lord, one should bathe Him with a stream of water. Then with great faith one should offer Him arghya along with coconuts and other fruits.

Text 649

tatra arghya-däna-mantraù

oà namo namas te govinda budha-çravaëa-samjïakaaghaugha-saìkñayaà kåtvä preta-mokña-prado bhava

tatra-there; arghya-däna-mantraù-the mantra for offering arghya; om-Oà; namaù-obeisnaces; namaù-obeisances; te-to You; govinda-O Govinda; budha-çravaëa-samjïaka-Budha-çravaëa-samjnaka; aghaugha-saìkñayam-destroying a flood of sins; kåtvä-doing; preta-preta; mokña-freedom; pradaù-doing; bhava-please become.


O Govinda, O Budha-çravaëa-samjïaka, obeisances to You! Please destroy the great flood of my sins. Please free me from having to take birth as a preta.

Text 650

chätropähana-go-dänaà dadyäd atra kamaëòalumviçeñena dvijägryäya

vämanaù priyatäm iti

chätra-parasol; upähana-sandals; gaù-cows; dänam-charity; dadyät-should give; atra-here; kamaëòalum-a kamandalu; viçeñena-esepcially; dvijägryäya-to the best of the brahmanas; vämanaù-May Lord Vämana; priyatäm-be pleased; iti-thus.

Then one should offer a parasol, sandals, cows, and a kamaëòalu to the best of brähmaëas. At that time one should recite the mantra, "vämanaù priyatäm" (May Lord Vämana be pleased with me).

Text 651

yathä-çaktyä ca dänäni dvijägryebhyaù pradäpayetkuryäj jägaraëaà rätrau géta-çästra-samanvitam

yathä-çaktyä-as able; ca-and; dänäni-charity; dvijägryebhyaù-to the best of brahmanas; pradäpayet-should give; kuryät-should do; jägaraëam-vigil; rätrau-at night; géta-çästra-samanvitam-with with singing a scripture-reading.

As far as one is able, one should give charity to exalted brähmaëas. One should keep an all-night vigil, a vigil filled with singing and scripture-reading.

Text 652

çraddhayä parayä yukto niçäm animiñekñaëaùprabhäte bhojayed viprän dvädaçyäà päraëaà tataù

çraddhayä-wuth faith; parayä-great; yuktaù-endowed; niçäm-at night; animiñekñaëaù-with unblinking eyes; prabhäte-at dawn; bhojayet-should feed; viprän-brahmanas; dvädaçyäm-on dvadasi; päraëam-breaking the fast; tataù-then.

With great faith one should keep his eyes open for the entire night. At dawn of the dvädaçé one should feed the brähmaëas. Then one should break the fast.

Text 653

kuryät svayaà çraddhayä tat sarvaà saphalatäà vrajet

kuryät-should do; svayam-personally; çraddhayä-with faith; tat-great; sarvam-all; saphalatäm-success; vrajet-attains.

One should do all this with great faith. In this way one will attain the result of this vow.

Text 654

tan-mähätmyaà

tatraiva

evaà kåte tu käleya vrate 'smin vijayä-dinena durlabhataraà kiïcd iha loke 'thavä pare

tan-mähätmyam-the glory of that; tatra-there; eva-indeed; evam-thus; kåte-done; tu-indeed; käleya-O Käleya; vrate-vow; asmin-in this; vijayä-dine-on the day of Vijayä; na-not; durlabhataram-very difficult; kiïct-something; iha-here;

loke-in thismworld; athavä-or; pare-in the next.

The Glory of This Vow

In the same scripture it is said:

O Käleya, for one who follows this vow on the holy Vijayä day, nothing is difficult to attain, either in this world or the next.

Text 655

phalam asya vratasyoktaà dattvä pitror narottamaùvaàçoddhära-karo muktià yäti paitryäd åëäd api

phalam-the result; asya-of this; vratasya-vow; uktam-said; dattvä-giving; pitroù-of parents; narottamaù-the best of persons; vaàça-of the family; uddhära-deliverance; karaù-doing; muktim-liberation; yäti-attains; paitryät-paternal; åëät-from the debt; api-even.

A noble-hearted person who offers the pious results of this vow to his parents, delivers his ancestors. He is free of any debts to his parents.

Text 656

na pävanataraà kiïcid ataù param ihocyatevijayä-vrata-tulyaà ca na paraà paripaöhyate

na-not; pävanataram-more purifying; kiïcit-something; ataù-than this; param-more; iha-here; ucyate-is said; vijayä-vrata-tulyam-equal to the vow of Vijayä; ca-and; na-not; param-more; paripaöhyate-is read.

Nothing is more purifying than this vow. The scriptures do not describe any vow equal to this vow of the holy Vijayä day.

Texts 657 and 658

bhaviñyottare ca

samäpte tu vrate tasmin yat puëyaà tan nibodha mecatur-yugäni räjendra sapta-saptati-saìkhyayä

präpya viñëu-puraà räjan kréòate kälam akñayamihägatya bhaved räjä pratipakña-bhayaìkaraù

bhaviñyottare-in the Bhavisya Purana, Uttara-khanda; ca-and; samäpte-attained; tu-indeed; vrate-vow; tasmin-in that; yat-what; puëyam-piety; tan-that; nibodha-please know; me-from me; catur-yugäni-four yugas; räjendra-O king of kings; sapta-saptati-saìkhyayä-with 77 times; präpya-attaining; viñëu-puram-the abode of Lord Viñëu; räjan-O king; kréòate-enjoys pastimes; kälam-time; akñayam-without end; iha-here; ägatya-returning; bhavet-is; räjä-a king; pratipakña-bhayaìkaraù-who fills his enemies with fear.


O king of kings, please hear from me the pious benefit earned by following this vow. By following this vow one stays in the abode of Lord Viñëu for seventy-seven catur-yugas. When he finally returns to this earth he becomes a great king who fills his enemies with fear.

Text 659

hasty-açva-ratha-yänänäà dätä bhoktä vimatsaraùrüpa-saubhägya-sampanno dérghäyur nirujo bhavet

hasti-elephants; açva-horses; ratha-chariots; yänänäm-vehicles; dätä-giving; bhoktä-enjoying; vimatsaraù-without envy; rüpa-beauty; saubhägya-and good fortune; sampannaù-endowed; dérghäyuù-long life; nirujaù-healthy; bhavet-is.

He will have the power to give many elephants, horses, and chariots in charity. He will enjoy many pleasures. He will be free from envy. He will be handsome, fortunate, and healthy. He will live a long life.

Text 660

putra-pautraiù parivåto jévec ca çaradäà çatam

putra-with children; pautraiù-and grandchildren; parivåtaù-surrounded; jévet-will live; ca-and; çaradäm-of autumns; çatam-a hundred.

Surrounded by his children and grandchildren, he will live for a hundred autumns.

Text 661

athäçvina-kåtyam

äçvinasya site pakñe daçamyäà vijayotsavaùkartavyo vaiñëavaiù särdhaà sarvatra vijayärthinä

atha-now; äçvina-of Asvina; kåtyam-duties; äçvinasya-of Asvina; site-sukla; pakñe-in the paksa; daçamyäm-on the dasami; vijaya-Vijaya; utsavaù-festival; kartavyaù-to be done; vaiñëavaiù-Vaiñëavas; särdham-with; sarvatra-always; vijayärthinä-desiring victory.

Duties of the Month of Açvina (September-October)

On the çukla-daçamé of the month of Açvina, Vaiñëavas desiring victory should always celebrate the festival of Vijaya.

Text 662

atha vijayotsava-vidhiù

ratham äropya deveçaà sarvälaìkära-çobhitamsäsitüëa-dhanur-bäëa- päëià naktaïcaräntakam

atha-now; vijayotsava-vidhiù-the method of observing the Vijaya festival; ratham-on a chariot; äropya-placing; deveçam-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; sarvälaìkära-çobhitam-decorated with all ornaments; säsitüëa-with a quiver; dhanuù-bow; bäëa-and arrows; päëim-in hand; naktaïcara-of demons; antakam-the slayer.

The Method of Observing the Vijaya Festival

One should decorate Lord Räma, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the slayer of the demons, with all ornaments, place a bow, arrows, and quiver in His hand, and then place Him on a chariot.

Text 663

sva-lélayä jagat trätuà ävirbhütaà raghüdvahamräjopacäraiù çré-rämaà çamé-våkña-talaà nayet

sva-lélayä-with His own pastimes; jagat-the world; trätum-to protect; ävirbhütam-manifested; raghüdvaham-the scion of the Raghu dynasty; räja-upacäraiù-with royal service; çré-rämam-Lord Räma; çamé-våkña-talam-to the Sami tree; nayet-should lead.

Then with royal pomp one should lead Lord Räma, who appeared in the Raghu dynasty and manifested His pastimes to protect the world, to a çamé tree.

Text 664

sétä-käntaà çamé-yuktaà bhaktänäm abhayaìkaramarcayitvä çamé-våkñaà arcayed vijayäptaye

sétä-of Sétä; käntam-the beloved; çamé-yuktam-with the sami tree; bhaktänäm-to the devotees; abhayaìkaram-giving fearlessness; arcayitvä-worshiping; çamé-våkñam-the sami tree; arcayet-should worship; vijayäptaye-to attain victory.

As He stands by the çamé tree, one should worship Lord Räma, the beloved of Sétä and the giver of fearlessness to the devotees. Then, in order to attain victory, one should also worship the çamé tree.

Text 665

atha tan-mantraù

çamé çamayate päpaà çamé lohita-kaëöhakädharitry-arjuna-bäëänäà rämasya priya-vädiné

atha-then; tan-mantraù-that mantra; çamé-sami; çamayate-may pacify; päpam-sins; çamé-sami; lohita-kaëöhakä-with red thorns; dharitri-the holder; arjuna-bäëänäm-of straight arrows; rämasya-of Räma; priya-vädiné-dear.

The Mantra For That

May the çamé tree, which has red thorns like a host of straight arrows, and which is dear to Lord Räma, purify me of my sins.

Text 666

kariñyamänä yä yäträ yäträ kälaà sukhaà mayätatra nirvighna-kätré tvaà bhava çré-räma-püjite

kariñyamänä-will be done; yä-who; yäträ-journey; yathä-as; kälam-time; sukham-happiness; mayä-by me; tatra-there; nirvighna-kätré-making free of obstacles; tvam-You; bhava-please become; çré-räma-püjite-worshiped by Çré Räma.

Please make the journey easy at the appropriate time. O tree worshiped by Lord Räma, please remove the obstacles in my path.

Text 667

gåhétvä säkñatämärdräà çamé-mula-gataà mådamgéta-väditra-nirghoñais tato devaà gåhe nayet

gåhétvä-taking; säkñatämärdräm-a clod of earth; çamé-mula-gatam-at the root of the sami tree; mådam-earth; géta-sinign; väditra-music; nirghoñaiù-with sounds; tataù-then; devam-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; gåhe-to the home; nayet-should lead.

Then, taking an unbroken clod of earth from the roots of the çamé tree, one should, with singing and instrumental music, bring the Deity of the Supreme Personality of Godhead back to His temple.

Text 668

kaiçcid åkñais tatra bhävyaà kaiçcid bhävyaà ca vänaraiùkaiçcid rakta-mukhair bhävyaà koçalendrasya tuñöaye

kaiçcit-by some; åkñaiù-stars; tatra-there; bhävyam-to be; kaiçcit-by some; bhävyam-to be; ca-and; vänaraiù-by monkeys; kaiçcit-by some; rakta-mukhaiù-red-faced; bhävyam-to be; koçalendrasya-of Lord Räma; tuñöaye-for the pleasure.

Then, in a drama, some may be bears, some may be monkeys, and some may be rakta-mukha monkeys for the pleasure of Lord Räma.

Text 669

nirjitä räkñasä daityä vairiëo jagaté-taleräma-räjyaà räma-räjyaà räma-räjyam iti dhruvam

nirjitäù-defeated; räkñasä-raksasas; daityä-and daityas; vairiëaù-enemies; jagaté-tale-in the world; räma-räjyam-the kingdom of Räma; räma-räjyam-the kingdom of Räma; räma-räjyam-the kingdom of Räma; iti-thus; dhruvam-certainly.

In that drama the demons and cannibals who opposed Räma are all defeated. Then one should call out: "Räma-räjya (the kingdom of Räma)! Räma-räjya! Räma-räjya!"

Text 670

änéya sthäpayed devaà

nija-siàhäsane sukhamtato néräjya deveçaà praëamed daëòavad bhuvi mahä-prasäda-vasträdi dhärayed vaiñëavaiù saha

änéya-taking; sthäpayet-should place; devam-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; nija-siàhäsane-on His throne; sukham-happily; tataù-then; néräjya-offering arati; deveçam-to the Supreme Personality of Godhead; praëamet-should bow down; daëòavat-like a stick; bhuvi-on the ground; mahä-prasäda-vasträdi-the remnants of graments and other things; dhärayet-should accept; vaiñëavaiù-Vaiñëavas; saha-with.

Then one should place the Deity of the Lord again comfortably on His throne. One should offer ärati to the Deity, and one should offer daëòavat obeisances, falling to the ground like a stick. Then, with the other Vaiñëavas, one should accept the remnants of garments and other things offered to the Lord.

Text 671

iti çré-viñëu-dharmoktä- nusäreëa vyalekhyayamvidhiù çré-räma-vijayot- savasyotsava-kåt satäm

iti-thus; çré-viñëu-dharma-in the Çré Viñëu-dharma Purana; ukta-statement; anusäreëa-acording to; vyalekhyayam-I have written; vidhiù-method; çré-räma-vijaya-utsavasya utsava-kåt-the festival to celebrate the vitory of Lord Räma; satäm-of the devotees.

Thus, following the description in the Çré Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, I have summarized the way to celebrate the festival of Lord Räma's victory.

Text 672

sétä dåñöeti hanumad- väkyaà çrutväkarot prabhuùvijayäà vänaraiù särdhaà väsare 'smin çamé-talät

sétä-Sétä; dåñöä-is seen; iti-thus; hanumat-of Hanumë; väkyam-the words; çrutvä-hearing; akarot-did; prabhuù-the Lord; vijayäm-victory; vänaraiù-monkeys; särdham-with; väsare-on the day; asmin-this; çamé-talät-from the base of a çamé tree.

On this day, at the base of a çamé tree, Lord Räma celebrated with His monkey allies the festival of His victory when He heard Hanumän say, "I see Sétä!".

Sixteenth Vilasa

Text 1

atha kärttika-kåtyaà

dämodaraà prapadye 'haà çré-rädhä-ramaëaà prabhumprabhäväd yasya tat-preñöhaù kärttikaù sevito bhavet

atha-now; kärttika-kåtyam-the duties of Kärttika; dämodaram-to Lord Kåñëa; prapadye-surrender; aham-I; çré-rädhä-of Çré Rädhä; ramaëam-the lover; prabhum-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; prabhavät-by the power; yasya-of whom; tat-preñöhaù-dear to Him; kärttikaù-Kärttika; sevitaù-served; bhavet-is.

Duties in the Month of Kärttika

I surrender to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who was tied about the waist with a rope, and who is the lover of Çré Rädhä. By His power one is able to serve His favored month: the month of Kärttika.

Text 2

bhäti kärttika-kåtyädi skända-pädmädiñu sphuöamtathäpy ekatra saìgåhya särato 'tra vilikhyate

bhäti-manifested; kärttika-kåtyädi-the duties of Kärttika; skända-pädmädiñu-in the Skanda, Padma, and other Puräëas; sphuöam-clearly; tathäpi-still; ekatra-in one place; saìgåhya-collecting; särataù-the essence; atra-here; vilikhyate-is written.

The duties of the month of Kärttika are clearly described in the Skanda Puräëa, Padma Puräëa, and other scriptures. The essence of what they say is collected here in one place.

Text 3

kärttike 'smin viçeñeëa nityaà kurvéta vaiñëavaùdämodarärcanaà prätaù- snäna-däna-vratädikam

kärttike-in Kärttika; asmin-in this; viçeñeëa-specifically; nityam-always; kurvéta-should do; vaiñëavaù-a devotee of Lord Viñëu; dämodara-of Lord Dämodara; arcanam-the worship; prätaù-in the morning; snäna-bathing; däna-gifts; vrata-vows; ädikam-beginning with.

Especially in the month of Kärttika a Vaiñëava should regularly bathe in the morning, worship Lord Dämodara, give charity, follow vows, and perform other spiritual activities.

Text 4

tathä dina-viçeñe yad bhagavat-püjanädikamkuryäd vidhi-viçeñeëa lekhyam agre vivicya tat

tathä-so; dina-viçeñe-on a specific day; yat-what; bhagavat-püjanädikam-beginning with worship of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; kuryät-should do; vidhi-viçeñeëa-with specific rules; lekhyam-will be written; agre-in the beginning; vivicya-considering; tat-thus.

Here I will write when the month of Kåñëa begins and how one should worship the Lord during this month.

Text 5

atha kärttika-vrata-nityatä


duñpräpyaà präpya mänuñyaà kärttikoktaà caren na hidharmaà dharma-bhåtaà çreñöha sa mätå-pitå-ghätakaù

atha-now; kärttika-vrata-nityatä-one should always follow the vow of worshiping the Lord in the month of Kärttika; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; brahma-närada-samväde-in a conversation of Brahmä and Närada; duñpräpyam-difficult to attain; präpya-attaining; mänuñyam-human birth; kärttika-of the month of Kärttika; uktam-said; caren-follows; na-not; hi-indeed; dharmam-religion; dharma-bhåtäm-of the followers of religion; çreñöha-the best; sa-he; mätå-pitå-ghätakaù-the killer of his father and mother.

One Should Always Follow the Vow of Kärttika-vrata


"O best of the followers of religion, a person who does not follow the vow of Kärttika-vrata is a sinner. He is like a person who murders his father and mother.

Text 6

avratena kñiped yas tu mäsaà dämodara-priyamtiryag-yoëim aväpnoti sarva-dharma-bahis-kåtaù

avratena-without following the vow; kñipet-spends; yaù-who; tu-indeed; mäsam-the month; dämodara-to Lord Dämodara; priyam-dear; tiryag-yoëim-birth as an animal; aväpnoti-attains; sarva-dharma-bahis-kåtaù-outside all religious principles.

"A person who does not follow the vow in this month that is dear to Lord Dämodara finds himself outside all religious principles. He takes birth in an animal's womb.

Text 7

sa brahma-hä sa go-ghnaç ca svarëa-steyé sadänåtina karoti muni-çreñöha yo naraù kärttike vratam

sa-he; brahma-hä-murderer of a brähmaëa; sa-he; go-ghnaù-killer of a cow; ca-and; svarëa-steyé-thief of gold; sadä-always; anåti-lying; na-not; karoti-does; muni-çreñöha-O best of sages; yaù-who; naraù-person; kärttike-in Kärttika; vratam-vow.

"O best of sages, a person who does not follow this vow in the month of Kärttika is a brähmaëa-killer, a cow-killer, a thief of gold, and a perpetual liar.

Text 8

vidhavä vä viçeñena vrataà yadi na kärttikekaroti muni-çärdüla narakaà yäti sa dhruvam

vidhavä-a widow; vä-or; viçeñena-specifically; vratam-vow; yadi-if; na-not; kärttike-in Kärttika; karoti-does; muni-çärdüla-O tiger of sages; narakam-to hell; yäti-goes; sa-she; dhruvam-indeed.

"O tiger of sages, a widow especially who does not follow the vow of Kärttika certainly goes to hell.

Text 9

vrataà tu kärttike mäse yadä na kurute gåhéiñöäpürtaà våthä tasya yävad ähüta-näraké

vratam-vow; tu-indeed; kärttike-in Kärttika; mäse-month; yadä-when; na-not; kurute-does; gåhé-a householder; iñöäpürtam-pious deeds; våthä-useless; tasya-of him; yävat-as; ähüta-screaming; näraké-a person in hell.

"If a householder does not follow the vow of Kärttika, his pious and charitable deeds do him no good. They become like the screams of a person in hell.

Text 10

sampräpte kärttike mäse dvijo vrata-paräì-mukhaùbhavanti vimukhäù sarve tasya deväù sa-vävaräù

sampräpte-attained; kärttike-Kärttika; mäse-month; dvijaù-a brähmaëa; vrata-paräì-mukhaù-averse to the vow; bhavanti-become; vimukhäù-averse; sarve-all; tasya-of him; deväù-the demigods; sa-väsaväù-with Indra's followers.

"if a brähmaëa spurns the Kärttika vow, then Indra and all the demigods spurn him.

Text 11

iñövä ca bahubhir yajïaiù kåtvä çräddha-satäni casvargaà näpnoti viprendra akåtvä kärttike vratam

iñövä-worshiping; ca-and; bahubhiù-with many; yajïaiù-yajnas; kåtvä-doing; çräddha-satäni-a hundred sraddhas; ca-and; svargam-Svarga; na-not; äpnoti-attains; viprendra-O king of the brähmaëas; akåtvä-not doing; kärttike-in Kärttika; vratam-the vow.

"O king of brähmaëas, a person who performs a hundred çräddhas and a host of yajïas, but does not follow the Kärttika vow, cannot enter Svargaloka.

Text 12

yatiç ca vidhavä caiva viçeñenä vanäçrämékärttikaà narakaà yänti akåtvä vaiñëavaà vratam

yatiù-sannyasi; ca-and; vidhavä-widow; ca-and; eva-indeed; viçeñenä-specifically; vanäçrämé-vanaprastha; kärttikam-Kärttika; narakam-to hell; yänti-go; akåtvä-not doing; vaiñëavam-of Lord Viñëu; vratam-the vow.

"Especially a sannyäsé, vänaprastha, or widow who do not follow the Vaiñëava Kärttika-vow go to hell.

Text 13

vedair adhétaiù kià tasya puräëa-paöhanaiç ca kimkåtaà yadi na viprendra kärttike vaiñëavaà vratam

vedaiù-Vedas; adhétaiù-studied; kim-what is the use?; tasya-of him; puräëa-paöhanaiù-studying the Puräëas; ca-and; kim-what?; kåtam-done; yadi-of; na-not; viprendra-O king of the brähmaëas; kärttike-Kärttika; vaiñëavam-Vaiñëava; vratam-vow.

"O king of brähmaëas, what good will study of the Vedas and Puräëas do for a person who does not follow the Vaiñëava Kärttika-vow?

Text 14

janma-prabhåti yat puëyaà vidhivat samupärjitambhasmé-bhavati tat sarvaà akåtvä kärttika-vratam

janma-prabhåti-beginning with birth; yat-what; puëyam-piety; vidhivat-properly; samupärjitam-earned; bhasmé-ashes; bhavati-becomes; tat-that; sarvam-all; akåtvä-not doing; kärttika-vratam-the Kärttika vow.

"A person who does not follow the Kärttika vow finds his life's pious deeds burned to ashes.

Text 15

yad dattaà ca paraà japtaà kåtaà ca su-mahat-tapaùsarvaà viphalatäm eti akåtvä kärttike vratam

yat-what; dattam-given; ca-and; param-more; japtam-chanted; kåtam-doen; ca-and; su-mahat-tapaù-great austerities; sarvam-all; viphalatäm-uselessness; eti-attain; akåtvä-not performing; kärttike-in Kärttika; vratam-the vow.

"A person who does not follow the Kärttika vow finds that all his charity, great austerities, and mantra-chanting is useless.

Text 16

sapta-janmärjitaà puëyaà våthä bhavati näradaakåtvä kärttike mäsi vaiñëavaà vratam uttamam

sapta-janmärjitam-earned in seven births; puëyam-piety; våthä-useless; bhavati-is; närada-O Narada; akåtvä-not doing; kärttike mäsi-in Kärttika month; vaiñëavam-Vaiñëava; vratam-vow; uttamam-transcendental.

"O Näarada, if one does not follow the Vaiñëava Kärttika-vow, seven births of his pious deeds become useless.

Text 17

päpa-bhütaç ca te jïeyä loke martyä mahä-munevaiñëaväkhyaà vrataà yais tu na kåtaà kärttike çubham

päpa-bhütaù-sinners; ca-and; te-they; jïeyä-known; loke-in the world; martyä-people; mahä-mune-O great sage; vaiñëaväkhyaà vratam-the Vaiñëava vow; yaiù-by whom; tu-indeed; na-not; kåtam-done; kärttike-in Kärttika; çubham-auspicious.

"O great sage, they who do not follow the auspicious Vaiñëava Kärttika-vow are known as sinners in this world."

Text 18

kià ca

akåtvä niyamaà viñëoù kärttikaà yaù kñipen naraùjanmärjitasya puëyasya phalaà näpnoti närada

kià ca-furthermore; akåtvä-not doing; niyamam-vow; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; kärttikam-Kärttika; yaù-one who; kñipen-spends; naraù-a person; janmärjitasya-earned in an entire lifetime; puëyasya-of piety; phalam-the result; na-not; äpnoti-obtains; närada-O Narada.

It is further said:

"O Närada, a person who does not follow the Vaiñëava Kärttika-vow loses the pious deeds of an entire life."

Text 19

kià ca

niyamena vinä caiva yo nayet kärttikaà munecäturmäsyaà tathä caiva brahma-hä sa kulädhamaù

kià ca-furthermore; niyamena-vow; vinä-without; ca-and; eva-indeed; yaù-who; nayet-leads; kärttikam-Kärttika; mune-O sage; cäturmäsyam-Caturmasya; tathä-so; ca-and; eva-indeed; brahma-hä-a brähmaëa-killer; sa-he; kulädhamaù-the lowest of his family.

It is also said:

"O sage, a person who does not follow the Kärttika and Cäturmäsya vows is sinful like a brähmaëa-killer. He is the most degraded person in his family.

Texts 20-22

kià ca

piëòä-dänaà pitåëäà ca pitå-pakñe na vai kåtamvrataà na kärttike mäsi çrävaëyäm åñi-tarpaëam

caitre nändolito viñëur mägha-snänaà na saj-jalena kåtämardaké puñye çrävaëe rauhiëäñöamé

saìgame na kåtä yena dvädaçé çravaëänvitäkutra yäsyanti te müòhä nähaà vedmi kali-priya

kià ca-furthermore; piëòä-dänam-offering pinda; pitåëäm-to the pitas; ca-and; pitå-pakñe-on pitr-paksa; na-not; vai-indeed; kåtam-done; vratam-vow; na-not; kärttike-in Kärttika; mäsi-month; çrävaëyäm-in the month of Sravana; åñi-tarpaëam-offering tarpaëa to the sages; caitre-in the month of Sravana; na-not; ändolitaù-moved on a swing; viñëuù-Lord Viñëu; magha-in the month of Magha; snänam-bath; na-not; saj-jale-in clear water; na-not; kåta-done; ämardaké-the ämardaké vow; puñye-in Puñya; çravaëe-in Çravaëa; rauhiëäñöamé-Rauhiëäñöamé; saìgame-in the meeting; na-not; kåtä-done; yena-by which; dvädaçé-dvädaçé; çravaëänvitä-with sravana; kutra-where?; yäsyanti-will go; te-they; müòhä-foolish; na-not; aham-I; vedmi-know; kali-priya-O Närada.

What is the fate of the fools who do not offer piëòä to the ancestors on pitå-pakña, who do not observe the vow of Kärttika, who do not offer tarpaëa to the sages in the month of Çrävaëa (July-August), who do not observe Lord Viñëu's swing-festival in the month of Caitra (March-April), who do not bathe in clear water in the month of Mägha (January-February), who do not follow the ämardaké vow during the time of the star Puñya, and who do not observe the Rohiëäñöämé day when in the month of Çrävaëa the star çravaëa is present on the dvädaçé day? O Närada, I do not know.

Text 23

pädme ca çré-närada-çaunakädi-muni-gaëa-samväde

mänuñaù karma-bhümau yaù kärttikaà nayate mudhäcintämaëià kare präpya kñipyate kardamämbuni

pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; ca-and; çré-närada-çaunakädi-muni-gaëa-samväde-in a conversation of Çré Narada anmd the sages headed by Çré Saunaka; mänuñaù-a human being; karma-of karma; bhümau-in the world; yaù-who; kärttikam-Kärttika; nayate-passes; mudhä-uselessly; cintämaëim-a ciontamani jewel; kare-in the hand; präpya-attaining; kñipyate-throws; kardamämbuni-in muddy water.

In the Padma Puräëa, in a conversation of Çré Närada and the sages headed by Çré Çaunaka it is said:

"A human being in this world of karma who does not follow the vow of Kärttika takes the cintämaëi jewel placed in his hand and throws it into muddy water.

Text 24

niyamena vinä vipräù kärttikaà yaù kñipen naraùkåñëaù paräì-mukhas tasya yasmäd ürjo 'sya vallabhaù

niyamena-vow; vinä-without; vipräù-O brähmaëas; kärttikam-Kärttika; yaù-who; kñipen-spends; naraù-a person; kåñëaù-Lord Kåñëa; paräì-mukhaù-averse; tasya-of him; yasmät-because; ürjaù-Kärttika; asya-to Him; vallabhaù-dear.

"O brähmaëas, the month of Kärttika is very dear to Lord Kåñëa. That is why Lord Kåñëa turns His face from anyone who does not follow the Kärttika vow.

Text 25

atha tatra viçeñena snäna-dänädi-tat-karma-nityatä

skände tatraiva

yair na dattaà hutaà japtaà

na snänaà na harer vratamna kåtaà kärttike putra dvijäs te vai narädhamäù

atha-now; tatra-there; viçeñena-specifically; snäna-bathing; däna-giving charity; ädi-beginning with; tat-karma-those activities; nityatä-should be done regularly; skände-in thekanda Puräëa; tatra-there; eva-indeed; yaiù-by whom; na-not; dattam-given; hutam-yajna; japtam-chanted japa; na-not; snänam-bathed; na-not; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; vratam-the vow; na-not; kåtam-done; kärttike-in Kärttika; putra-O son; dvijäù-brähmaëas; te-they; vai-indeed; narädhamäù-the lowest of men.

One Should Always Follow the Kärttika Bow by Bathing, Giving Charity, and Performing Other Pious Deeds


"O son, brähmaëas who in the month of Kärttika do not give charity, perform yajïas, chant japa, bathe, or follow the vow to please Lord Kåñëa are the lowest of men."

Text 26

kià ca

yair na dattaà hutaà japtaà kärttike na vrataà kåtamtenätmä härito nünaà na präptaà prärthitaà phalam

kià ca-furthermore; yaiù-by whom; na-not; dattam-given charity; hutam-offered yajnas; japtam-chanted japa; kärttike-in Kärttika; na-not; vratam-vow; kåtam-done; tena-by that; ätmä-slef; häritaù-robbed; nünam-indeed; na-not; präptam-attained; prärthitam-requested; phalam-result.

It is further said:

"They who in the month of Kärttika do not give charity, perform yajïas, chant japa, or follow vows are thieves who rob themselves of their own valuables. They do not attain what they wish."

Text 27

kià ca

sampräpte kärttike mäsi ye ratä na janärdaneteñäà sauri-pure väsaù pitåbhiù saha närada

kià ca-furthermore; sampräpte-attained; kärttike-Kärttika; mäsi-month; ye-who; ratä-engaged; na-not; janärdane-in Lord Kåñëa; teñäm-of them; sauri-pure-in the city of Yamaräja; väsaù-residence; pitåbhiù-ancestors; saha-with; närada-O Narada.

It is further said:

"O Närada, they who do not worship Lord Kåñëa during the month of Kärttika reside, along with their ancestors, in hell."

Text 28

kià ca

kärttike närcito yais tu bhakti-bhävena keçavaùnarakaà te gamiñyanti yamadütais tu yantritäù

kià ca-furthermore; kärttike-in Kärttika; na-not; ärcitaù-worshiped; yaiù-by whom; tu-indeed; bhakti-bhävena-with love and devotion; keçavaù-Lord Kåñëa; narakam-to hell; te-they; gamiñyanti-will go; yamadütaiù-by the Yamadütas; tu-indeed; yantritäù-chained.

It is further said:

"They who in the month of Kärttika do not worship Lord Kåñëa with love and devotion are chained and dragged to hell by the messengers of Yamaräja.

Text 29

janma-koöi-sahasrais tu mänuñyaà präpya durlabhamkärttike närcito viñëur häritaà tena janma vai

janma-koöi-sahasraiù-by thousands and millions of births; tu-indeed; mänuñyam-human; präpya-attaining; durlabham-rare; kärttike-in Kärttika; na-not; arcitaù-worshiped; viñëuù-Lord Viñëu; häritam-removed; tena-by him; janma-birth; vai-indeed.

"He loses the rare human life he attained after many thousands and millions of births who does not worship Lord Viñëu in the month of Kärttika.

Text 30

viñëoù püjä kathä viñëor vaiñëavänäà ca darçanamna bhavet kärttike yasya hanti puëyaà daçäbdikam

viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; püjä-worship; kathä-topics; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; vaiñëavänäm-of the Vaiñëavas; ca-qand; darçanam-sight; na-not; bhavet-is; kärttike-in Kärttika; yasya-of whom; hanti-kills; puëyam-piety; daça-ten; abdikam-years.

"A person who in the month of Kärttika does not worship Lord Viñëu, chant Lord Viñëu's glories, or associate with the Vaiñëavas, kills ten years of pious deeds."

Text 31

atha kärttika-mähätmyaà

kärttikasya tu mähätmyaà präk sämänyena likhyatetato viçeñatas tatra karma-deçädi-bhedataù

atha-now; kärttika-mähätmyam-the glories of Kärttika; kärttikasya-of Kärttika; tu-indeed; mähätmyam-the glory; präk-first; sämänyena-in a general way; likhyate-is written; tataù-then; viçeñataù-specifically; tatra-there; karma-deçädi-bhedataù-differences beginning with work and place.

The Glories of Kärttika

First I will write of the glories of Kärttika in a general way and then I will write of the different situations beginning with the differences of work and place.

Text 32

atha sämänya-kärttika-mähätmyaà

skände tatraiva

kärttikasya tu mäsasya koöy-aàçenäpi närhatisarva-tértheñu yat snänaà sarva-däneñu yat phalam

atha-now; sämänya-in a general way; kärttika-of Kärttika; mähätmyam-the glory; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; tatra-there; eva-indeed; kärttikasya-of Kärttika; tu-indeed; mäsasya-glory; koöy-aàçena-with a ten-millionth part; api-even; na-not; arhati-is worthy; sarva-in all; tértheñu-holy places; yat-what; snänam-bathing; sarva-däneñu-in all charities; yat-what; phalam-result.

A General Description of Kärttika's Glories


"The pious result obtained by bathing in all holy places and giving all charities is not equal to one ten-millionth part of the result obtained by following the vow of Kärttika.

Texts 33 and 34

ekataù sarva-térthäni sarve yajïäù sa-dakñiëäùekataù puñkare väsaù kurukñetre himäcale

meru-tulya-suvarëäni sarva-dänäni caikataùekataù kärttiko vatsa sarvadä keçava-priyaù

ekataù-as one; sarva-térthäni-all holy places; sarve-all; yajïäù-yajnas; sa-dakñiëäù-with daksina; ekataù-as one; puñkare-in Puñkara; väsaù-residence; kurukñetre-in Kurukñetra; himäcale-in the Himalayas; meru-tulya-suvarëäni-gold equal to Mount Meru; sarva-dänäni-all charity; ca-ad; ekataù-as one; ekataù-as one; kärttikaù-Kärttika; vatsa-child; sarvadä-in all ways; keçava-to Lord Kåñëa; priyaù-dear.

"All holy places, yajïas, dakñiëäs, residence in Puñkara, Kurukñetra, and the Himalayas, and all giving in charity a pile of gold like Mount Meru, reside in Kärttika, Lord Kåñëa's favorite month.

Text 35

yat kiïcit kriyate puëyaà viñëum uddiçya kärttiketad akñayaà bhavet sarvaà satyoktaà tava närada

yat-waht; kiïcit-something; kriyate-is done; puëyam-piety; viñëum-to Lord Viñëu; uddiçya-in relation to; kärttike-in Kärttika; tat-that; akñayam-eternal; bhavet-is; sarvam-all; satya-truth; uktam-said; tava-of you; närada-O Narada.

"The service one does to Lord Viñëu in the month of Kåñëa is all eternal. O Närada, I tell you the truth.

Text 36

kärttikaà khalu vai mäsaà sarva-mäseñu cottamampuëyänäà paramaà puëyaà pävanänäà ca pävanam

kärttikam-Kärttika; khalu-indeed; vai-indeed; mäsaà -month; sarva-mäseñu-in all months; ca-and; uttamam-the best; puëyänäm-of pious deeds; paramam-the best; puëyam-pious deed; pävanänäm-of purifiers; ca-and; pävanam-the purifier.

"Kärttika is the best of months, the most pious of pious deeds, the most purifying of all that purify."

Text 37

kià ca

yathä nadénäà viprendra çailänäà caiva näradaudadhénäà ca viprarñe kñayo naivopapadyate

kià ca-furthermore; yathä-as; nadénäm-of rivers; viprendra-O king of brähmaëas; çailänäm-of mountains; ca-and; eva-indeed; närada-O Narada; udadhénäm-of oceans; ca-and; viprarñe-O sage of brähmaëas; kñayaù-destruction; na-not; eva-indeed; upapadyate-is.

It is further said:

"O Närada, O king of brähmaëas, O great sage, rivers, mountains, and oceans will all be destroyed, but the month of Kärttika will never be destroyed.

Text 38

puëyaà kärttika-mäse tu yat kiïcit kriyate munena tasyästi kñayo brahman päpasyäpy evam eva ca

puëyam-piety; kärttika-mäse-in the month of Kärttika; tu-indeed; yat-what; kiïcit-something; kriyate-does; mune-O sage; na-not; tasya-of that; asti-is; kñayaù-destruction; brahman-O brähmaëa; päpasya-of sin; api-also; evam-thus; eva-indeed; ca-and.

"O sage, in the month of Kärttika neither pious deeds nor sins are ever destroyed."

Text 39

na kärttika-samo mäso na kåtena samaà yugamna veda-sädåçaà çästraà na térthaà gaìgayä samam

na-not; kärttika-samaù-equal to Kärttika; mäsaù-month; na-not; kåtena-Satya; samam-equal; yugam-yuga; na-not; veda-sädåçam-like the Vedas; çästram-scripture; na-not; tértham-holy place; gaìgayä-the Gaìgä; samam-like.

"No month is like Kärttika. No yuga is like Satya-yuga. No scripture is like the Vedas. No holy place is like the Gaìgä.

Text 40

kärttikaù pravaro mäso vaiñëavänäà priyaù sadäkärttikaà sakalaà yas tu bhaktyä seveta vaiñëavaù pitån uddharate sarvän naraka-sthän mahä-mune

kärttikaù-Kärttika; pravaraù-best; mäsaù-month; vaiñëavänäm-of ther Vaiñëavas; priyaù-dear; sadä-always; kärttikam-Kärttika; sakalam-all; yaù-who; tu-indeed; bhaktyä-with devotion; seveta-serve; vaiñëavaù-Vaiñëava; pitån-the pitas; uddharate-delivers; sarvän-all; naraka-sthän-staying in hell; mahä-mune-O great sage.

"Kärttika is the best of months. Kärttika is always dear to the Vaiñëavas. O great sage, a Vaiñëava who with devotion serves Kärttika delivers his ancestors from hell.

Text 41

pädme ca

tatraiva dvadaçeñv api mäseñu kärttikaù kåñëa-vallabhaùtasmin sampüjito viñëur alpakair apy upäyanaiù dadäti vaiñëavaà lokaà ity evaà niçcitaà mayä

pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; ca-and; tatra-there; eva-indeed; dvadaçeñv-in the twelve; api-even; mäseñu-months; kärttikaù-Kärttika; kåñëa-to Lord Kåñëa; vallabhaù-dear; tasmin-in that; sampüjitaù-worshiped; viñëuù-Lord Viñëu; alpakaiù-with slight; api-even; upäyanaiù-vow; dadäti-gives; vaiñëavam-of Lord Viñëu; lokam-the world; iti-thus; evam-thus; niçcitam-concluded; mayä-by me.


"Of the twelve months, Kärttika is the most dear to Lord Kåñëa. To anyone who even slightly worships Lord Viñëu during its time, the month of Kärttika gives residence in Lord Viñëu's transcendental abode.

Text 42

yathä dämodaro bhakta- vatsalo vidito janaiùtasyäyaà tädåço mäsaù sv-alpam apy uru-kärakaù

yathä-as; dämodaraù-Lord Dmodara; bhakta-the devotees; vatsalaù-loves; viditaù-known; janaiù-by the people; tasya-of Him; ayam-this; tädåçaù-like this; mäsaù-month; sv-alpam-very slight; api-even; uru-kärakaù-making big.

"As everyone knows, Lord Dämodara loves His devotees. Lord Dämodara's month, the month of Kärttika, also loves the devotees. The month of Kärttika thinks even the slightest devotional service is very big and important.

Text 43

durlabho mänuño deho

dehinäà kñaëa-bhaìguraùtaträpi durlabhaù kälaù kärttiko hari-vallabhaù

durlabhaù-rare; mänuñaù-human; dehaù-body; dehinäm-of they who possess bodies; kñaëa-bhaìguraù-breaking in a moment; taträpi-still; durlabhaù-rare; kälaù-time; kärttikaù-Kärttika; hari-vallabhaù-dear to Lord Kåñëa.

"Even though its lasts for only a brief moment, the human form of life is very rare and valuable. In the same way the brief month of Kärttika is also very rare and valuable.

Text 44

dépenäpi hi yaträsau préyate harir éçvaraùsu-gétaà ca dadäty eva para-dépa-prabodhanät

dépena-with a lamp; api-even; hi-indeed; yatra-where; asau-He; priyate-is pleased; hariù-Lord Hari; éçvaraù-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; su-gétam-glorified; ca-and; dadäti-gives; eva-indeed; para-dépa-prabodhanät-from liughting another's lamp.

"Lord Kåñëa is pleased by the offering of a single lamp during the month of Kärttika. Lord Kåñëa glorifies anyone who lights a lamp for someone else to offer."

Text 45

atha tatra vrata-mähätmyaà

skände tatraiva

vratänäm iha sarveñäà eka-janmänugaà phalamkärttike tu vratasyoktaà phalaà janma-çatänugam

atha-now; tatra-there; vrata-mähätmyam-glory of the vow; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; tatra-there; eva-indeed; vratänäm-of vows; iha-here; sarveñäm-all; eka-one; janma-birth; anugam-following; phalam-result; kärttike-in Kärttika; tu-indeed; vratasya-of the vow; uktam-spoken; phalam-result; janma-births; çata-a hundred; anugam-following.


"Other vows bring the results of a lifetime of pious deeds. The vow of Kärttika brings the result of a hundred lifetimes of pious deeds.

Text 46

akrüra-térthe viprendra kärttikyaà samupoñya casnätvä yat phalam äpnoti tac chrutvä vaiñëavaà vratam

akrüra-térthe-at Akrüra-tértha; viprendra-O king of brähmaëas; kärttikyam-in Kärttika; samupoñya-fasting; ca-and; snätvä-bathing; yat-what; phalam-result; äpnoti-attains; tat-that; çrutvä-hearing; vaiñëavam-Vaiñëava; vratam-vow.

"O king of brähmaëas, a person who simply hears the glories of the Kärttika vow attains the result of fasting and bathing at sacred Akrüra-tértha.

Text 47

väräëasyäà kurukñetre naimiñe puñkare 'rbudegatvä yat phalam äpnoti vrataà kåtvä tu kärttike

väräëasyäm-in Varanasi; kurukñetre-at Kuruksetra; naimiñe-in Naimisaranya; puñkare-in Puskara; arbude-in Arbuda-tirtha; gatvä-going; yat-what; phalam-result; äpnoti-attains; vratam-vow; kåtvä-doing; tu-indeed; kärttike-in Kärttika.

"By following the Kärttika vow one attains the result of going on pilgrimage to Väräëasé, Kurukñetra, Naimiñäraëya, Puñkara, and Arbuda-tértha.

Text 48

aniñövä ca sadä yajïair na kåtvä pitåbhiù svadhämvratena kärttike mäsi vaiñëavaà tu padaà vrajet

aniñövä-not worshiping; ca-and; sadä-always; yajïaiù-with yajnas; na-not; kåtvä-doing; pitåbhiù-with the pitas; svadhäm-sraddha; vratena-with a vow; kärttike-in Kärttika; mäsi-month; vaiñëavam-of Lord Viñëu; tu-indeed; padam-to the abode; vrajet-goes.

"A person who never performs yajïas or offers çräddha to the ancestors, but who does follow the vow of Kärttika, will go to the abode of Lord Viñëu.

Text 49

pravåttänäà ca bhakñyänäà kärttike niyame kåteavaçyaà kåñëa-rüpatvaà präpyate muktidaà çubham

pravåttänäm-done; ca-and; bhakñyänäm-of food; kärttike-in Kärttika; niyame-in restriction; kåte-done; avaçyam-inevitably; kåñëa-rüpatvam-a form, like that of Lord Kåñëa; präpyate-attains; muktidam-giving liberation; çubham-auspicious.

"One who sometimes fasts during Kärttika attains liberation. He attains a glorious spiritual form like Lord Kåñëa's.

Text 50

kià ca

brähmaëaù kñatriyo vaiçyaù çüdro vä muni-sattamaviyoëià na vrajaty eva vrataà kåtvä tu kärttike

kià ca-furthermore; brähmaëaù-a brähmaëa; kñatriyaù-a ksatriya; vaiçyaù-a vaisya; çüdraù-a sudra; vä-or; muni-sattama-O best of sages; viyoëim-a bad womb; na-not; vrajati-attains; eva-indeed; vratam-vow; kåtvä-doing; tu-indeed; kärttike-in Kärttika.

It is further said:

"O best of sages, a brähmaëa, kñatriya, vaiçya, or çüdra who follows the Kärttika vow will not take birth in a sinful family.

Text 51

kià ca

kärttike muni-çärdüla sva-saktyä vaiñëavaà vratamyaù karoti yathoktaà tu muktis tasya kare sthitä

kià ca-furthermore; kärttike-in Kärttika; muni-çärdüla-O tiger of sages; sva-saktyä-own power; vaiñëavam-of Lord Viñëu; vratam-the vow; yaù-one who; karoti-does; yathä-as; uktam-described; tu-indeed; muktiù-liberation; tasya-of him; kare-in the hand; sthitä-staying.

It is further said:

"O tiger of sages, liberation stands in the hand of anyone who follows the Kärttika vow as I have described it to you.

Text 52

su-puëye kärttike mäsi devarñi-pitå-sevitekriyamäëe vrate nånäà sv-alpe 'pi syän mahä-phalam

su-puëye-very sacred; kärttike-in Kärttika; mäsi-month; devarñi-pitå-sevite-served by the demigods, sages, and pitas; kriyamäëe-being done; vrate-in the vow; nånäm-of the people; sv-alpe-very slight; api-even; syän-is; mahä-phalam-great result.

"He attains a great result who even very slightly follows the very sacred Kärttika vow, which is served by the demigods, sages, and pitäs.

Text 53

atha tatra karma-viçeña-mähätmyaà

skände tatraiva

dänaà dattaà hutaà japtaà tapaç caiva tathä kåtamtad akñaya-phalaà proktaà kärttike ca dvijottama

atha-now; tatra-there; karma-viçeña-mähätmyam-the glory of specific activities; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; tatra-there; eva-indeed; dänam-charity; dattam-given; hutam-yajna; japtam-japa; tapaù-austerity; ca-and; eva-indeed; tathä-so; kåtam-done; tat-that; akñaya-phalam-eternal result; proktam-said; kärttike-in Kärttika; ca-and; dvijottama-O best of brähmaëas.

The Glories of Specific Pious Activities Performed During Kärttika


"Charity, yajïa, japa, and austerity performed in the month of Kärttika bring a result, O best of brähmaëas, that will never be destroyed."

Text 54

kià ca

yat kiïcit kärttike dattaà viñëum uddiçya mänavaiùtad akñayaà labhyate vai anna-dänaà viçeñataù

kià ca-furthermore; yat-what; kiïcit-something; kärttike-in Kärttika; dattam-given; viñëum-to Lord Viñëu; uddiçya-in relation to; mänavaiù-by human beings; tat-that; akñayam-imperishable; labhyate-is attained; vai-indeed; anna-dänam-gift of food; viçeñataù-specifically.

It is further said:

"One who during the month of Kärttika gives a small gift to Lord Viñëu attains a result that will never be destroyed. This is especially true when the gift is food.

Text 55

kià ca

yas tu samvatsaraà pürëaà agnihotram upäsatekärttike svastike kåtvä samam etan na saàçayaù

kià ca-furthermore; yaù-one who; tu-indeed; samvatsaram-for a year; pürëam-full; agnihotram-agnihotra-yajna; upäsate-worships; kärttike-in Kärttika; svastike-auspicious; kåtvä-doing; samam-equal; etan-this; na-no; saàçayaù-doubt.

"One who follows the auspicious Kärttika vow attains the result of an entire year of performing agnihotra-yajïas. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 56

kärttike yä karoty evaà keçavasyaiva maëòalamsvarga-sthä çobhate sä su kapoté pakñiëé yathä

kärttike-in Kärttika; yä-who; karoti-does; evam-thus; keçavasya-of Lord Kåñëa; eva-indeed; maëòalam-the circle; svarga-sthä-staying in Svargaloka; çobhate-is splendid; sä-she; su-indeed; kapoté-a dove; pakñiëé-bird; yathä-as.

"A woman who spends the month of Kärttika in the circle where Lord Keçava stays becomes splendid like a dove in Svargaloka.

Text 57

yaù karoti naro nityaà kärttike patra-bhojanamna sa durgatim äpnoti yävad indräç caturdaça

yaù-who; karoti-does; naraù-a person; nityam-always; kärttike-in Kärttika; patra-bhojanam-offering food; na-not; sa-he attains; durgatim-misfortune; äpnoti-attains; yävat-as; indraù-Indras; caturdaça-fourteen.

"One who regularly offers food to Lord Kåñëa during the month of Kärttika does not suffer troubles. For as long as the fourteen Indras rule, he is free of troubles.

Text 58

janma-prabhåti yat päpaà mänavaiç ca kåtaà bhavettat sarvaà näçam äpnoti brahma-patreñu bhojanät

janma-with birth; prabhåti-beginning; yat-what; päpam-sin; mänavaiù-by human beings; ca-and; kåtam-done; bhavet-may be; tat-indeed; sarvam-all; näçam-destruction; äpnoti-attains; brahma-of a paläça tree; patreñu-in the leaves; bhojanät-from eating.

"One who during the month of Kärttika eats prasädam from a paläça-leaf plate destroys all sins committed since the time of his birth.

Text 59

sarva-käma-phalaà tasya sarva-tértha-phalaà labhetna väpi narakaà paçyed brahma-patreñu bhojanät

sarva-all; käma-desires; phalam-result; tasya-of him; sarva-tértha-phalam-the result of all pilgrimages; labhet-attains; na-not; vä-or; api-even; narakam-hell; paçyet-sees; brahma-patreñu-in a palasa-leaf plate; bhojanät-from eating.

"One who during the month of Kärttika eats prasädam from a paläça-leaf plate attains all his desires. He attains the result of all pilgrimages. He never sees hell.

Text 60

brahma caiña småtiù sakñät paläçaù sarva-käma-daùmadhyamaà varjitaà patraà çüdrasya muni-sattama bhuïjan narakam äpnoti yävad indräç caturdaça

brahma-Brahma; ca-and; eña-this; småtiù-remembered; sakñät-directly; paläçaù-palasa; sarva-käma-daù-fulfilling all desires; madhyamam-middle; varjitam-without; patram-leaf; çüdrasya-of a sudra; muni-sattama-O best of sages; bhuïjan-eating; narakam-hell; äpnoti-attains; yävat-as; indräù-Indras; caturdaça-fourteen.

"The paläça tree, which is called by the name Brahma, fulfills all desires. O best of sages, a çüdra should avoid the middle leaf of the paläça tree. A çüdra who eats from such a middle-leaf plate goes to hell for as long as the fourteen Indras live.

Text 61

tila-dänaà nadé-snänaà sat-kathä sädhu-sevanambhojanaà brahma-patreñu kärttike mukti-däyakam

tila-of sesame; dänam-charity; nadé-in a river; snänam-bathing; sat-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; kathä-

topics; sädhu-sevanam-service to the devotees; bhojanam-eating; brahma-patreñu-from a paläça-leaf plate; kärttike-in Kärttika; mukti-däyakam-giving liberation.

"During the month of Kärttika giving sesame seeds in charity, bathing in a sacred river, talking about the Supreme Personality of Godhead, serving the devotees, and eating prasädam from a paläça-leaf plate, all grant liberation.

Text 62

jägaraà kärttike mäsi yaù karoty aruëodayedämodarägre viprendra go-sahasra-phalaà labhet

jägaram-staying awake; kärttike-in Kärttika; mäsi-month; yaù-who; karoti-does; aruëodaye-to sunrise; dämodarägre-before Lord Dämodara; viprendra-O king of brähmaëas; go-sahasra-phalam-the result of a thousand cows; labhet-attains.

"O king of brähmaëas, a person who during the month of Kärttika keeps an all-night vigil, in the presence of Lord Dämodara staying awake until sunrise, attains the pious result of giving a thousand cows in charity.

Text 63

jägaraà paçcime yäme yaù karoti mahä-munekärttike sannidhau viñëos tat-padaà kara-saàsthitam

jägaram-a vigil; paçcime-the last; yäme-yama; yaù-who; karoti-does; mahä-mune-O great sage; kärttike-in Kärttika; sannidhau-in the presence; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; tat-padam-His abode; kara-saàsthitam-staying in the hand.

"O king of brähmaëas, a person who during the month of Kärttika keeps an all-night vigil, in the presence of Lord Viñëu staying awake until the last portion of the night, finds Lord Viñëu's spiritual abode in the palm of his hand.

Text 64

sädhu-sevä gaväà gräsaù kathä viñëos tathärcanamjägare paçcime yäme durlabhaù kärttike kalau

sädhu-to the devotees; sevä-service; gaväm-of the cows; gräsaù-feeding; kathä-talking; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; tathä-so; arcanam-worship; jägare-vigil; paçcime-to the last; yäme-yama; durlabhaù-rare; kärttike-in Kärttika; kalau-in Kali-yuga.

"During the month of Kärttika serving the devotees, feeding the cows, talking about and worshiping Lord Viñëu, and keeping a vigil until the last part of the night bring, in the Kali-yuga, a very rare result."

Text 65

kià ca

jala-dhenu-sahasraà ca våña-saàsthe diväkaretoyaà dattvä yad äpnoti snänaà kåtvä tu kärttike

kià ca-furthermore; jala-dhenu-sahasram-a thousand jaladhenus; ca-and; våña-saàsthe-situated in Taurus; diväkare-in

the sun; toyam-water; dattvä-giving; yat-which; äpnoti-attains; snänam-bath; kåtvä-doing; tu-indeed; kärttike-in Kärttika.

It is further said:

"One who bathes during the month of Kärttika attains the pious result of giving water and a thousand jaladhenus in charity when the sun is in Taurus.

Text 66

sannihatyäà kurukñetre rähu-graste diväkaresürya-väreëa yat snänaà tad ekähena kärttike

sannihatyäm-Sannihatya; kurukñetre-at Kuruksetra; rähu-graste-swallowed by Rahu; diväkare-when the sun; sürya-väreëa-on sunday; yat-what; snänam-bath; tat-that; ekähena-by one day; kärttike-in Kärttika.

"By once bathing during the month of Kärttika one attains the pious result of bathing in Lake Sannihatyä at Kurukñetra during a solar eclipse on a Sunday.

Text 67

pitån uddiçya yad dattaà kärttike kåñëa-vallabheannodakaà muni-çreñöha akñayaà jäyate nåëäm

pitån uddiçya-to the pitas; yat-what; dattam-given; kärttike-in Kärttika; kåñëa-vallabhe-dear to Lord Viñëu; anna-food; udakam-water; muni-çreñöha-O best of sages; akñayam-immortal; jäyate-is born; nåëäm-of men.

"O best of sages, they become free from death who offer food and water to the pitäs during the month of Kärttika, which is dear to Lord Kåñëa."

Text 68

kià ca

géta-çästra-vinodena kärttikaà yo nayen naraùna tasya punar ävåttir mayä dåñöä kali-priya

kià ca-furthermore; géta-çästra-vinodena-by happily reading Bhagavad-gétä; kärttikam-in Kärttika; yaù-who; nayen-pass; naraù-a person; na-not; tasya-of him; punaù-again; ävåttiù-return; mayä-by me; dåñöä-seen; kali-priya-O Narada.

It is further said:

"O Närada, I have personally seen that a person who happily reads Bhagavad-gétä during the month of Kärttika does not return to the world of birth and death."

Text 69

kià ca

pradakñiëaà ca yaù kuryät

kärttike viñëu-sadmanipade pade 'çvamedhasya phala-bhägé bhaven naraù

kià ca-furthermore; pradakñiëam-circumambulation; ca-and; yaù-who; kuryät-does; kärttike-in Kärttika; viñëu-sadmani-in the abode of Lord Viñëu; pade pade-at every step; açvamedhasya-of an asvamedha-yajna; phala-bhägé-attaining the result; bhaven-is; naraù-a person.

It is further said:

"By circumambulating a temple of Lord Viñëu during the month of Kärttika one attains at every step the pious result of performing an açvamedha-yajïa.

Text 70

gétaà vädyaà ca nåtyaà ca kärttike purato hareùyaù karoti naro bhaktyä labhate cäkñayaà padam

gétam-singing; vädyam-playing musical instruments; ca-and; nåtyam-dancing; ca-and; kärttike-in Kärttika; purataù-before; hareù-Lord Hari; yaù-one who; karoti-does; naraù-a person; bhaktyä-with devotion; labhate-attains; ca-and; akñayam-imperishable; padam-result.

"During the month of Kärttika a person who with devotion sings, plays a musical instrument, and dances before the Deity of Lord Hari attains a pious result that will never be lost.

Text 71

harer näma-sahasräkhyaà gajendrasya ca mokñaëamkärttike paöhate yas tu punar janma na vindate

harer näma-sahasräkhyam-the thousand names of Lord Hari; gajendrasya-of Gajendra; ca-and; mokñaëam-liberation; kärttike-in Kärttika; paöhate-reads; yaù-one who; tu-indeed; punaù-again; janma-birth; na-not; vindate-is.

"A person who during the month of Kärttika reads the thousand holy names of Lord Hari and the story of Gajendra's liberation does not take birth again.

Text 72

kärttike paçcime yäme stavaà gänaà karoti yaùvasate çvetadvépe tu pitåbhiù saha närada

kärttike-in Kärttika; paçcime-in the last; yäme-period; stavam-prayers; gänam-songs; karoti-does; yaù-who; vasate-stays; çvetadvépe-in Çvetadvépa; tu-indeed; pitåbhiù-anscestors; saha-with; närada-O Narada.

"O Närada, a person who during the month of Kärttika at the end of the night recites prayers and sings songs glorifying Lord Hari lives in Çvetadvépa with all his ancestors.

Text 73

naivedya-dänena tu hareù kärttike yava-saìkhyayäyugäni vasate svarge tävanti muni-sattama

naivedya-food; dänena-by offering; tu-indeed; hareù-to Lord Hari; kärttike-in Kärttika; yava-of every tiny portion; saìkhyayä-with the measurement; yugäni-yugas; vasate-lives; svarge-in SDvarga; tävanti-that long; muni-sattama-O best of sages.

"O best of sages, one who offers food to Lord Hari during the month of Kärttika lives in Svargaloka for as many yugas as their were grains or crumbs in his offering.

Text 74

aguruà tu sa-karpüraà yo dahet keçavägrataùkärttike tu muni-çreñöha yugänte na punar bhavaù

agurum-aguru; tu-indeed; sa-karpüram-with camphor; yaù-who; dahet-burns; keçavägrataù-in the presence of Lord Kåñëa; kärttike-in Kärttika; tu-indeed; muni-çreñöha-O best of sages; yugänte-at the end of the yuga; na-not; punaù-again; bhavaù-birth.

"O best of sages, a person who burns incense of aguru and camphor before the Deity of Lord Keçava does not take birth again at the yuga's end.

Text 75

kià ca

niyamena kathäà viñëor ye çåëvanti ca bhävitäùçlokärdhaà çloka-pädaà vä kärttike go-çataà phalam

kià ca-furthermore; niyamena-with a vow; kathäm-talking; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; ye-who; çåëvanti-hear; ca-and; bhävitäù-with love; çlokärdham-half a verse; çloka-pädam-one fourth of a verse; vä-or; kärttike-in Kärttika; go-çatam-a hundred cows; phalam-result.

"During the month of Kåñëa, they who with love hear the topics of Lord Viñëu, even if they hear only half a verse or a fourth of a verse, attain the pious result of giving a hundred cows in charity.

Text 76

sarva-dharmän parityajya kärttike keçavägrataùçästrävataraëaà puëyaà çrotavyaà ca mahä-mune

sarva-dharmän-all other religious principles; parityajya-abandoning; kärttike-in Kärttika; keçavägrataù-in the presence of Lord Keçava; çästra-of the scriptures; avataraëam-descended; puëyam-sacred; çrotavyam-should be heard; ca-and; mahä-mune-O great sage.

"O great sage, please give up all other religious practice and simply hear the sacred scriptures in the presence of the Deity of Lord Keçava during the month of Kärttika.

Text 77

çreyasä lobha-buddhyä vä yaù karoti hareù kathämkärttike muni-çärdüla kulänäà tärayec chatam

çreyasä-by the best; lobha-eager; buddhyä-with intelligence; vä-or; yaù-who; karoti-does; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; kathäm-the topics; kärttike-in Kärttika; muni-çärdüla-O tiger of sages; kulänäm-of the family; tärayet-may deliver; çatam-a hundred.

"O tiger of sages, a person who during the month of Kärttika eagerly hears the topics of Lord Kåñëa delivers a hundred generations of his family.

Text 78

nityaà çästra-vinodena kärttikaà yaù kñipen naraùnirdahet sarva-päpäni yajïäyuta-phalaà labhet

nityam-always; çästra-vinodena-by pastimes of the scriptures; kärttikam-Kärttika; yaù-who; kñipen-spends; naraù-a person; nirdahet-burns; sarva-päpäni-all sins; yajïa-of yajnas; ayuta-ten thousand; phalam-the result; labhet-attains.

"A person who in the month of Kärttika passes the time in pastimes of studying the holy scriptures burns away all his sins and attains the pious result of performing ten thousand yajïas.

Text 79

na tathä tuñyate dänair na yajïair go-gajädikaiùyathä çästra-kathäläpaiù kärttike madhusüdanaù

na-not; tathä-so; tuñyate-is satisfied; dänaiù-with charities; na-not; yajïaiù-with yajnas; go-gajädikaiù-beginning with cows and elephants; yathä-as; çästra-kathäläpaiù-with discussing the scriptures; kärttike-in Kärttika; madhusüdanaù-Lord Kåñëa.

"Lord Kåñëa is not as pleased with many yajïas and with charities of many cows, elephants, or other expensive gifts, as He is with discussion of scripture during the month of Kärttika.

Text 80

kärttike muni-çärdüla yaù çåëoti hareù kathämsa nistarati durgäëi janma-koöi-çatäni ca

kärttike-in Kärttika; muni-çärdüla-O tiger of sages; yaù-one who; çåëoti-hears; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; kathäm-the topics; sa-he; nistarati-crosses; durgäëi-troubles; janma-births; koöi-çatäni-hundreds and millions; ca-and.

"O tiger of sages, a person who during the month of Kärttika hears the topics of Lord Hari becomes free from the sufferings of hundreds and millions of births.

Text 81

yaù paöhet präyato nityaà çlokaà bhägavataà muneañöädaça-puräëänäà kärttike phalam äpnuyät

yaù-who; paöhet-recites; präyataù-mostly; nityam-always; çlokam-verse; bhägavatam-of Çrémad-Bhägavatam; mune-O sage; añöädaça-puräëänäm-of the eighteen Puräëas; kärttike-in Kärttika; phalam-result; äpnuyät-attains.

"O sage, a person who in the month of Kärttika regularly recites the verses of Çrémad-Bhägavatam attains the pious result of reciting all eighteen Puräëas.

Text 82

kià ca

sarvän dharmän parityajya iñöäpürtädikän naraùkärttike parayä bhaktyä vaiñëavaiù sahä samvaset

kià ca-furthermore; sarvän-all; dharmän-religionj; parityajya-abandoning; iñöäpürtädikän-beginning with pious deeds; naraù-a person; kärttike-in Kärttika; parayä-with great; bhaktyä-devotion; vaiñëavaiù-the Vaiñëavas; sahä-with; samvaset-should reside.

"O great sage, please give up charities and all other pious deeds. Instead engage in devotional service during the month of Kärttika and stay in the company of the Vaiñëavas.

Texts 83 and 84

pädme ca tatraiva

kärttike bhümi-çäyé yo brahmacäré haviñya-bhukpaläça-patraà bhuïjäno dämodaram athärcayet

sa sarva-pätakaà hitvä vaikuëöhe hari-sannidhaumodate viñëu-sadåço bhajanänanda-nirvåtaù

pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; ca-nad; tatra-there; eva-indeed; kärttike-in Kärttika; bhümi-çäyé-resting on the ground; yaù-who; brahmacäré-celibate; haviñya-bhuk-eating haviñya; paläça-patram-from a palasa leaf; bhuïjänaù-eating; dämodaram-Lord Dämodara; atha-then; arcayet-should worship; sa-he; sarva-pätakam-all sins; hitvä-leaving; vaikuëöhe-in the spiritual world; hari-sannidhau-in the company of Lord Hari; modate-enjoys; viñëu-sadåçaù-like Lord Viñëu; bhajanänanda-nirvåtaù-enjoying the bliss of devotional service.


"During the month of Kärttika one should sleep on the floor, remain celibate, eat haviñya from a paläça-leaf plate, and worship Lord Dämodara. In this way one becomes free of all sins, goes to the spiritual world, attains a spiritual body like the Lord's, and enjoys the bliss of directly serving Lord Hari."

Text 85

kià ca

kärttikaà sakalaà mäsaà prätaù snäyé jitendriyaùjapan haviñya-bhug däntaù sarva-päpaiù pramucyate

kià ca-furthermore; kärttikam-Kärttika; sakalam-all; mäsam-month; prätaù-in the morning; snäyé-bathing; jitendriyaù-controlling the senses; japan-chanting japa; haviñya-bhug-eating haviñya; däntaù-peaceful; sarva-päpaiù-from all sins; pramucyate-is free.

It is further said:

"A person who, for the entire month of Kärttika rises early, bathes, controls his senses, remains peaceful, chants japa, and eats only haviñya, becomes free from all sins.

Text 86

kärttikaà tu naro mäsaà yaù kuryäd eka-bhojanamçüraç ca bahu-véryaç ca kértimäàç ca sa jäyate

kärttikam-Kärttika; tu-indeed; naraù-person; mäsam-month; yaù-who; kuryät-does; eka-bhojanam-eating once; çüraù-a hero; ca-and; bahu-véryaù-very powerful; ca-and; kértimän-glorious; ca-and; sa-he; jäyate-is born.

"A person who, for the entire month of Kärttika, eats only once a day becomes very famous, powerful, and heroic."

Text 87

kià ca

paläça-patra-bhojo ca kärttike puruño naraùniñpäpaù syät tu naivedyaà harer bhuktvä vimucyate madhya-stham aiçvaraà patraà varjayed brähmaëetaraù

kià ca-furthermore; paläça-patra-bhojaù-eating from a palasa-leaf plate; ca-and; kärttike-in Kärttika; puruñaù-person; naraù-human; niñpäpaù-sinless; syät-is; tu-indeed; naivedyam-offering of food; hareù-to Lord Hari; bhuktvä-eating; vimucyate-is liberated; madhya-stham-staying in the middle; aiçvaram-palasa; patram-leaf; varjayet-should reject; brähmaëetaraù-a person who is not a brähmaëa.

It is further said:

"A person who during the month of Kärttika eats from a paläça-leaf plate becomes free from all sins. A person who eats the remnants of food offered to Lord Hari attains liberation. A person who is not a qualified brähmaëa should not eat from the middle leaf of the paläça tree."

Text 88

kià ca

aparädha-sahasräëi pätakäni mahanty apikñamate 'sya harir devaù

püjite kärttike prabhuù

kià ca-furthermore; aparädha-sahasräëi-a thousand offenses; pätakäni-sins; mahanti-great; api-even; kñamate-forgives; asya-of him; hariù-Lord Hari; devaù-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; püjite-worshiped; kärttike-in Kärttika; prabhuù-all-powerful.

It is further said:

"Lord Hari, the all-powerful Supreme Personality of Godhead forgives thousands of offenses and a host of terrible sins committed by one who worships Him during the month of Kärttika.

Text 89

naivedyaà päyasaà viñëoù priyaà khaëòaà ghåtänvitamvibhajya tac ca bhuïjäno yajïa-sämyaà dine dine

naivedyam-offering of food; päyasam-payasa; viñëoù-to Lord Viñëu; priyam-dear; khaëòam-sugar; ghåtänvitam-with ghee; vibhajya-offering; tat-that; ca-and; bhuïjänaù-eating; yajïa-sämyam-equal to a yajna; dine-day; dine-after.

"A person who to Lord Viñëu offers delicious päyasa made with sugar and ghee, and then eats the remnants left by the Lord, attains the result of performing every day a great yajïa.

Text 90

tatraiva çré-kåñëa-satyä-samväde

snänaà jägaraëaà dépaà tulasé[98]-vana-pälanamkärttike ye prakurvanti te narä viñëu-mürtayaù

tatra-there; eva-indeed; çré-kåñëa-satyä-samväde-in a conversation of Lord Kåñëa and Satyabhämä; snänam-bathing; jägaraëam-vigil; dépam-lamp; tulasé…-vana-pälanam-protecting a tulasé forest; kärttike-in Kärttika; ye-who; prakurvanti-do; te-they; naräù-people; viñëu-of Lord Viñëu; mürtayaù-forms.

Lord Kåñëa explains to Satyabhämä:

"They who during the month of Kärttika bathe, keep an all-night vigil, offer lamps, and protect a tulasé forest, attain spiritual forms like Lord Viñëu's.

Text 91

itthaà dina-trayam api kärttike ye prakurvatedevänäm api te vandyäù kià yair äjanma tat kåtam

ittham-thus; dina-days; trayam-three; api-even; kärttike-in Kärttika; ye-who; prakurvate-do; devänäm-of the demigods; api-even; te-they; vandyäù-bowed down; kim-what?; yaiù-by whom; äjanma-from birth; tat-that; kåtam-done.

"They who for three days do these pious deeds are offered all respects by the demigods. What, then, can be said of they who have performed these pious deeds for their entire lives?

Text 92

tatraiva kärttika-vratäìgäni

hari-jägaraëaà prätaù snänaà tulasé-sevanamudyäpanaà dépa-dänaà vratäny etäni kärttike

tatra-there; eva-indeed; kärttika-Kärttika; vrata-of the vow; aìgäni-the parts; hari-jägaraëam-keeping an all-night vigil for the sake of Lord Hari; prätaù-in the morning; snänam-bathing; tulasé-tulasé; sevanam-serving; udyäpanam-conclusion; dépa-dänam-offering a lamp; vratäni-vows; etäni-these; kärttike-in Kärttika.

The Various Parts of the Kärttika Vow

The parts of the Kärttika vow are: 1. Keeping an all-night vigil for the sake of Lord Hari, 2. bathing early in the morning, 3. serving Tulasé, 4. properly concluding the vow, and 5. offering a lamp.

Text 93

païcabhir vratakair ebhiù sampürëaà kärttike vratéphalam äpnoti tat proktaà bhukti-mukti-phala-pradam

païcabhiù-with five; vratakaiù-vows; ebhiù-these; sampürëam-full; kärttike-in Kärttika; vraté-the person following the vow; phalam-result; äpnoti-attains; tat-that; proktam-said; bhukti-mukti-phala-pradam-giving the results of happiness and liberation.

A person who follows these five vows during the month of Kärttika attains the full result of happiness and liberation, which has already been described in this book.

Text 94

viñëoù çivasya vä kuryäd alaye hari-jägaramkuryäd açvattha-müle vä tulasénäà vaneñu ca

viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; çivasya-of Lord Çiva; vä-or; kuryät-should do; alaye-in the temple; hari-jägaram-vigil; kuryät-should do; açvattha-of a banyan tree; müle-at the root; vä-or; tulasénäm-of Tulasé; vaneñu-in forests; ca-and.

"In a Viñëu temple, a Çiva temple, at the root of a banyan tree, or in a Tulasé forest, one should keep an all-night vigil for Lord Hari's sake.

Text 95

äpad-gato yadäpy ambho na labhet savanäya saùvyädhito vä punaù kuryäd viñëor nämäpamärjanam

äpat-calamity; gataù-attained; yadä-when; api-even; ambhaù-water; na-not; labhet-attains; savanäya-for bathing; saù-he; vyädhitaù-diseased; vä-or; punaù-again; kuryät-should do; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; näma-with the names; apamärjanam-cleansing.

"If, because of disease or misfortune, one is not able to bathe with water, he should bathe by chanting the holy names of Lord Viñëu.

Text 96

udyäpanaà vidhià kartuà açakto vä vrate sthitaùbrähmaëän bhojayec chaktyä vrata-sampürëa-hetave

udyäpanam-conclusion; vidhim-rules; kartum-to do; açaktaù-unable; vä-or; vrate-in the vow; sthitaù-situated; brähmaëän-the brähmaëas; bhojayet-should feed; çaktyä-with potency; vrata-sampürëa-hetave-to make the vow complete.

"If one is not able to bring the vow to its conclusion with an elaborate ritual, he should conclude the vow by feeding the brähmaëas.

Text 97

açakto dépa-dänasya para-dépän prabodhayetteñäà vä rakñaëaà kuryäd vatädibhyaù prayatnataù

açaktaù-unable; dépa-dänasya-to offer a lamp; para-dépän-the lamps of others; prabodhayet-should light; teñäm-of them; vä-or; rakñaëam-protection; kuryät-should do; vata-winds; ädibhyaù-beginning; prayatnataù-carefully.

"If one is unable to offer a lamp, he should light the lamps that others offer, he should carefully protect others' lamps from winds or other disturbances.

Text 98

abhäve tulasénäà ca püjayed vaiñëavaà dvijamsarväbhäve vrate kuryäd brähmaëänäà gaväm api seväà vä bodhi-vaöayor vrata-sampürëa-hetave

abhäve-in the absence; tulasénäm-of Tulasé; ca-and; püjayet-should worship; vaiñëavam-Vaiñëava; dvijam-brähmaëa; sarväbhäve-if all are absent; vrate-in the vow; kuryät-should do; brähmaëänäm-of the brähmaëas; gaväm-of the cows; api-also; seväm-service; vä-or; bodhi-vaöayoù-of a bodhi of vaöa tree; vrata-sampürëa-hetave-to complete the vow.

"If there is no Tulasé plant, one should worship a brähmaëa-Vaiñëava. If no brähmaëa-Vaiñëava is present, one should serve the brähmaëas, cows, bodhi tree, and vaöa tree to conclude the vow.

Text 99

atha tatra dépa-däna-mähätmyaà

skände tatraiva

kalpa-koöi-sahasräëi pätakäni bahüny apinimeñärdhena dépasya vilayaà yänti kärttike

atha-now; tatra-there; dépa-däna-mähätmyam-the glories of offering a lamp; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; tatra-there; eva-certainly; kalpa-kalpas; koöi-ten million; sahasräëi-thousand; pätakäni-sins; bahüni-many; api-even; nimeñärdhena-in half an eyeblink; dépasya-of a lamp; vilayam-to destruction; yänti-go; kärttike-in Kärttika.

The Glories of Offering a Lamp During Kärttika


"When one offers a lamp during the month of Kärttika, his sins in many thousands and millions of births perish in half an eyeblink."

Text 100

kià ca

çåëu dépasya mähätmyaà kärttike keçava-priyamdépa-dänena viprendra na punar jäyate bhuvi

kià ca-furthermore; çåëu-please hear; dépasya-of a lamp; mähätmyam-the glory; kärttike-in Kärttika; keçava-priyam-dear to Lord Keçava; dépa-lamp; dänena-by offering; viprendra-O king of brähmaëas; na-not; punaù-again; jäyate-is born; bhuvi-on the earth.

It is further said:

"Please hear the glories of offering a lamp during the month of Kärttika, an offering that is very pleasing to Lord Keçava. O king of brähmaëas, a person who offers a lamp in this way will not take birth again in this world.

Text 101

ravi-grahe kurukñetre narmadäyäà çaçi-grahetat phalaà koöi-guëitaà dépa-dänena kärttike

ravi-grahe-during a solar eclipse; kurukñetre-in Kuruksetra; narmadäyäm-in the Nramada; çaçi-grahe-during a lunar eclipse; tat-that; phalam-result; koöi-guëitam-multiplied ten million times; dépa-dänena--by offering a lamp; kärttike-in Kärttika.

"By offering a lamp during the month of Kärttika one attains a pious result ten million times greater than the result obtained by bathing at Kurukñetra during a solar a eclipse or by bathing in the river Narmadä during a lunar eclipse.

Text 102

ghåtena dépako yasya tila-tailena vä punaùjvalate muni-çärdüla açvamedhena tasya kim

ghåtena-with ghee; dépakaù-a lamp; yasya-of whom; tila-tailena-with sesame oil; vä-or; punaù-again; jvalate-burns; muni-of sages; çärdüla-O tiger; açvamedhena-with an asvamedha-yajna; tasya-of him; kim-what is the need?

"O tiger of sages, for a person who thus offers a lamp burning with ghee or sesame oil, what is the use of performing an açvasmedha-yajïa?

Text 103

mantra-hénaà kriyä-hénaà çauca-hénaà janärdanesarvaà sampürëatäà yäti kärttike dépa-dänataù

mantra-mantras; hénam-without; kriyä-pious deeds; hénam-without; çauca-purity; hénam-without; janärdane-of Lord Kåñëa; sarvam-all; sampürëatäm-perfection; yäti-attains; kärttike-in Kärttika; dépa-dänataù-by offering a lamp.

"Even if there are no mantras, no pious deeds, and no purity, everything becomes perfect when a person offers a lamp during the month of Kärttika.

Text 104

teneñöaà kratubhiù sarvaiù kåtaà térthävagähanamdépa-dänaà kåtaà yena kärttike keçavägrataù

tena-by him; iñöam-worshiped; kratubhiù-with yajnas; sarvaiù-all; kåtam-done; térthävagähanam-bathing in holy places; dépa-lamp; dänam-offering; kåtam-done; yena-by whom; kärttike-in Kärttika; keçavägrataù-in the presence of Lord Kåñëa.

"A person who during the month of Kärttika offers a lamp to Lord Keçava has already performed all yajïas and bathing in all holy rivers.

Text 105

tävad garjanti puëyäni svarge martye rasätaleyävän na jvalate jyotiù kärttike keçavägrataù

tävat-then; garjanti-scream; puëyäni-pious deeds; svarge-in Svarga; martye-in martyaloka; rasätale-in Rasätalaloka; yävän-when; na-not; jvalate-burns; jyotiù-lamp; kärttike-in Kärttika; keçavägrataù-before Lord Kåñëa.

"When in the month of Kärttika there is no lamp burning before Lord Keçava, then the pious deeds in Svargaloka, Martyaloka, and Rasätalaloka scream with dissatisfaction.

Text 106

çrüyate cäpi pitåbhir gäthä gétä purä dvijabhaviñyati kule 'smäkaà pitå-bhaktaù suto bhuvi

çrüyate-is heard; ca-and; api-also; pitåbhiù-by the pitäs; gäthä-verses; gétä-songs; purä-before; dvija-O brähmaëa; bhaviñyati-will be; kule-in the family; asmäkam-of us; pitå-bhaktaù-devoted to his father; sutaù-a son; bhuvi-on the earth.

"O brähmaëa, when the pitäs hear devotional verses and songs in the month of Kärttika, in that family will be born a son devoted to his father.

Text 107

kärttike dépa-dänena yas toñayati keçavammuktià präpsyämahe nünaà prasädäc cakra-päëinaù

kärttike-in Kärttika; dépa-dänena-by offering a lamp; yaù-one who; toñayati-satisfies; keçavam-Lord Kåñëa; muktim-liberation; präpsyämahe-we will attain; nünam-indeed; prasädät-by the mercy; cakra-päëinaù-of Lord Viñëu, who holds the cakra in His hand.

"The ancestors say: When someone in our family pleases Lord Keçava by offering to Him a lamp during the month of Kärttika, then, by the mercy of the Lord who holds the Sudarçana-cakra in His hand, we will all attain liberation."

Text 108

kià ca

meru-mandara-mäträëi kåtvä päpäny açeñataùdahate nätra sandeho dépa-dänät tu kärttike

kià ca-furthermnore; meru-mandara-mäträëi-like Mount Meru or Mount Mandara; kåtvä-doing; päpäni-sinsd; açeñataù-completely; dahate-burns; na-not; atra-here; sandehaù-doubt; dépa-a lamp; dänät-by offering; tu-indeed; kärttike-in Kärttika.

It is further said:

"By offering a lamp during the month of Kärttika one burns away a collection of sins as big as Mount Meru or Mount Mandara. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 109

gåhe väyatane väpi dépän dadyäc ca kärttikepurato väsudevasya mahä-phala-vidhäyinaù

gåhe-at home; vä-or; äyatane-in a temple; vä-or; api-also; dépän-lamps; dadyät-should offer; ca-and; kärttike-in Kärttika; purataù-before; väsudevasya-Lord Väsudeva; mahä-phala-vidhäyinaù-who gives a great result.

"To one who either at home it in a temple offers Him a lamp during the month of Kärttika, Lord Väsudeva gives a great result.

Text 110

sa jäto mänuñe loke sa dhanyaù sa ca kértimänpradattaù kärttike mäsi dépo vai madhuhägrataù

sa-he; jätaù-born; mänuñe-human; loke-in the world; sa-he; dhanyaù-fortunate; sa-he; ca-and; kértimän-glorious; pradattaù-offered; kärttike mäsi-in the month of Kärttika; dépaù-a lamp; vai-indeed; madhuhägrataù-in the presence of Lord Kåñëa.

"A person who, after taking birth in the world of human beings, offers a lamp to Lord Kåñëa during the month of

Kärttika becomes very glorious and fortunate.

Text 111

nimiñärdhärdha-mätreëa dépa-dänena kärttikena tat kratu-çataiù präpyaà phalaà tértha-çatair api

nimiñärdhärdha-mätreëa-in half an eyeblink; dépa-dänena-the offering of a lamp; kärttike-in Kärttika; na-not; tat-that; kratu-çataiù-with a hundred yajnas; präpyam-to be attained; phalam-result; tértha-çataiù-with a hundred pilgrimages; api-even.

"A person who offers a lamp during the month of Kärttika attains a result that cannot be obtained with even a hundred yajïas or a hundred pilgrimages.

Text 112

sarvänuñöhäna-héno 'pi sarva-päpa-rato 'pi sanpüyate nätra sandeho dépaà dattvä tu kärttike

sarva-all; anuñöhäna-pious deeds; hénaù-without; api-even; sarva-päpa-rataù-addicted to all sins; api-even; san-being so; püyate-is pruified; na-not; atra-here; sandehaù-doubt; dépam-lamp; dattvä-offering; tu-indeed; kärttike-during Kärttika.

"Even a person addicted to all sins and averse to all pious deeds who somehow offers a lamp during Kärttika becomes purified. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 113

tan nästi pätakaà kiïcit triñu lokeñu näradayan na çodhayate dépaù kärttike keçavägrataù

tat-that; na-not; asti-is; pätakam-sin; kiïcit-anything; triñu-in the three; lokeñu-worlds; närada-O Narada; yan-what; na-not; çodhayate-purifies; dépaù-a lamp; kärttike-in Kärttika; keçavägrataù-before Lord Kåñëa.

"O Närada, no sin exists anywhere in the three worlds that will not be purified by offering a lamp to Lord Keçava during Kärttika.

Text 114

purato väsudevasya dépaà dattvä tu kärttikepräpnoti çäçvataà sthänaà sarva-bädhä-vivarjitam

purataù-in the presence; väsudevasya-of Lord Kåñëa; dépam-a lamp; dattvä-offering; tu-undeed; kärttike-in Kärttika; präpnoti-attains; çäçvatam-eternal; sthänam-abode; sarva-bädhä-vivarjitam-free of all troubles.

"A person who offers a lamp to Lord Kåñëa during Kärttika attains the eternal spiritual world where there is no suffering.

Text 115

yaù kuryät kärttike mäsi karpüreëa tu dépakamdvädaçyäà ca viçeñena tasya puëyaà vadämi te

yaù-one who; kuryät-does; kärttike-in Kärttika; mäsi-month; karpüreëa-with camphor; tu-indeed; dépakam-lamp; dvädaçyäm-on the dvadasi day; ca-and; viçeñena-specifically; tasya-of him; puëyam-piety; vadämi-I say; te-to you.

"Now I will describe to you the pious result attained by a person who offers a lamp during the dvädaçé day of Kärttika month.

Texts 116 and 117

kule tasya prasütä ye ye bhaviñyanti näradasamatétäç ca ye kecid yeñäà saìkhyä na vindate

kréòitvä su-ciraà kälaà devaloke yadåcchayäte sarve muktim äyänti prasädäc cakra-päëinaù

kule-in the family; tasya-of him; prasütä-born; ye-who; ye-whoever; bhaviñyanti-will be; närada-O Narada; samatétäù-passed; ca-and; ye-who; kecit-some; yeñäm-of whom; saìkhyä-measurment; na-not; vindate-is; kréòitvä-playing; su-ciram-for a long; kälam-time; devaloke-in the worlds of the demigods; yadåcchayä-spontaneously; te-they; sarve-all; muktim-liberation; äyänti-will attain; prasädät-by the mercy; cakra-päëinaù-of Lord Kåñëa.

"His ancestors and descendants, so many they cannot be counted, will enjoy for a long time in the worlds of the demigods, and then they will all easily attain liberation by the mercy of Lord Kåñëa, who holds the Sudarçana-cakra in His hand."

Text 118

kià ca

dyüta-vyäjena viprendra kärttike keçavälayamdyotayed yo mahä-bhäga punäty äsaptataà kulam

kià ca-furthermore; dyüta-of playing dice; vyäjena-on the pretext; viprendra-O king of brähmaëas; kärttike-in Kärttika; keçava-of Lord Keçava; alayam-the temple; dyotayet-illuminates; yaù-who; mahä-bhäga-O very fortunate one; punäti-purifies; äsaptataà kulam-seven generations of his family.

It is further said:

"O very fortunate one, a person who in order to play dice lights a lamp in Lord Keçava's temple purifies seven generations of his family.

Text 119

kärttike dépa-dänaà tu

kuryäd yo vaiñëavälayedhanaà putro yaçaù kértir bhavet tasya ca sarvadä

kärttike-in Kärttika; dépa-dänam-offering a lamp; tu-indeed; kuryät-may do; yaù-who; vaiñëavälaye-in a temple of Lord Viñëu; dhanam-wealth; putraù-children; yaçaù-fame; kértiù-glory; bhavet-is; tasya-of him; ca-and; sarvadä-always.

"A person who offers a lamp in a temple of Lord Viñëu during the month of Kärttika attains eternal wealth, good children, fame, and glory.

Text 120

yathä ca mathanäd vahniù sarva-käñöheñu dåçyatetathä ca dåçyate dharmo dépa-däne na saàçayaù

yathä-as; ca-and; mathanät-by friction; vahniù-fire; sarva-käñöheñu-in all wood; dåçyate-is seen; tathä-so; ca-and; dåçyate-is seen; dharmaù-piety; dépa-däne-in offring of a lamp; na-not; saàçayaù-doubt.

"As fire is present in all wood and may be extracted by friction, so piety is always present in the offering of a lamp during the month of Kärttika. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 121

kià ca

nirdhanenäpi viprendra kåtvä caivätma-vikrayamkartavyaà dépa-dänaà tu yävat kärttika-pürëimä

kià ca-furthermore; nirdhanena-penniless; api-even; viprendra-O king of brähmaëas; kåtvä-doing; ca-and; eva-indeed; ätma-Himself; vikrayam-selling; kartavyam-to be done; dépa-dänam-offering a lamp; tu-indeed; yävat-when; kärttika-pürëimä-on the full-moon of Kärttika.

It is further said:

"O king of brähmaëas, when someone offers Him a lamp on the full-moon day of the month of Kärttika, Lord Kåñëa, finding that He does not have sufficient money to repay that gift, gives Himself in exchange for that lamp.

Text 122

vaiñëavo na sa mantavyaù sampräpte kärttike muneyo na yacchati müòhätmä dépaà keçava-sadmani

vaiñëavaù-a devotee; na-not; sa-he; mantavyaù-is considered; sampräpte-attained; kärttike-when Kärttika; mune-O sage; yaù-who; na-not; yacchati-gives; müòhätmä-fool; dépam-a lamp; keçava-sadmani-in the temple of Lord Kåñëa.

"O sage, a fool who does not offer a lamp in Lord Keçava's temple during Kärttika is not considered a Vaiñëava."

Text 123

näradéye çré-rukmäìgada-mohiné-samväde

ekataù sarva-dänäni dépa-dänäni caikataùkärttike na samaà proktaà dépa-do hy adhikaù småtaù

näradéye çré-rukmäìgada-mohiné-samväde-in the Närada Puräëa, in a conversation of Çré Mohiné-devé and Çré Rukmäìgada; ekataù-by one; sarva-dänäni-all gifts; dépa-dänäni-the gift of a lamp; ca-and; ekataù-by one; kärttike-in Kärttika; na-not; samam-equal; proktam-said; dépa-daù-giving a lamp; hi-indeed; adhikaù-better; småtaù-is considered.

In the Närada Puräëa, in a conversation of Çré Mohiné-devé and Çré Rukmäìgada, it is said:

"Of all gifts the gift of a lamp during the month of Kärttika is the best. No gift is its equal."

Text 124

pädme ca tatraiva

kärttike 'khaëòa-dépaà yo dadäti hari-sannidhaudivya-känti-vimänägre ramate sa hareù pure

pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; ca-and; tatra-there; eva-indeed; kärttike-in Kärttika; akhaëòa-unbroken; dépam-lamp; yaù-who; dadäti-gives; hari-of Lord Kåñëa; sannidhau-in the presence; divya-känti-vimänägre-splendid; ramate-enjoys; sa-he; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; pure-in the world.


"One who offers a steady lamp to Lord Hari during the month of Kärttika enjoys pastimes in Lord Hari's splendid spiritual world.

Text 125

atha yatra pradépa-prabodhana-mähätmyaà

skände tatraiva

pitå-pakñe 'nna-dänena jyaiñöhäñädhe ca väriëäkärttike tat phalaà puàsäà para-dépa-prabodhanät

atha-now; yatra-where; pradépa-prabodhana-mähätmyam-the glories of lighting a lamp; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; tatra-there; eva-indeed; pitå-pakñe-on pitå-pakñe; anna-of food; dänena-by the gift; jyaiñöhäñädhe-on Jyaiñöha añädha; ca-and; väriëä-with water; kärttike-in Kärttika; tat-that; phalam-result; puàsäm-of the people; para-dépa-prabodhanät-by lighting another's lamp.

The Glories of Lighting Another's Lamp During the Month of Kärttika


"By lighting another's lamp during the month of Kärttika one attains the same result as if he had offered food on pitå-pakña or water on Jyaiñöha añädha.

Text 126

bodhanät para-dépasya vaiñëavänäà ca sevanätkärttike phalam äpnoti räjasüyäçvamedhayoù

bodhanät-by lighting; para-dépasya-another's lamp; vaiñëavänäm-of the Vaiñëavas; ca-and; sevanät-by serving; kärttike-in Kärttika; phalam-the result; äpnoti-attains; räjasüyäçvamedhayoù-of räjasüya and açvamedha yajnas.

"By serving the Vaiñëavas and lighting the lamps they offer during the month of Kärttika one attains the result of performing many räjasüya and açvamedha yajïas.

Text 127

dépamänaà tu ye dépaà bodhayanti harer gåhepareëa nåpa-çärdüla nistérëä yama-yätanä

dépamänam-glowing; tu-indeed; ye-which; dépam-lamp; bodhayanti-light; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; gåhe-in the house; pareëa-by another; nåpa-çärdüla-O tiger of kings; nistérëä-crossed; yama-yätanä-the torments of Yama.

"O tiger of kings, a person who in Lord Kåñëa's temple lights the lamps that others will offer during the month of Kärttika becomes free from the tortures of Yamaräja.

Text 128

na tad bhavati viprendra iñöair api mahä-makhaiùkärttike yat phalaà proktaà para-dépa-prabodhanät

na-not; tat-that; bhavati-is; viprendra-O king of brähmaëas; iñöaiù-worshiped; api-even; mahä-makhaiù-with great yajnas; kärttike-in Kärttika; yat-what; phalam-result; proktam-said; para-dépa-prabodhanät-by lighting the lamps of others.

"O king of brähmaëas, by lighting the lamps that others will offer during the month of Kärttika one attains the result of having performed many great yajïas.

Text 129

ekädaçyäà parair dattaà dépaà prajvalya müñikämänuñyaà durlabhaà präpya paräà gatim aväpa sä

ekädaçyäm-on ekädaçé; paraiù-by others; dattam-offered; dépam-lamp; prajvalya-lighting; müñikä-a mouse; mänuñyam-a human birth; durlabham-rare; präpya-attaining; paräm-the supreme; gatim-destination; aväpa-attained; sä-she.

"Somehow or other a mouse once lit a lamp that someone offered on ekädaçé during the month of Kärttika. That mouse attained a rare human birth and then went to the supreme spiritual world.

Text 130

atha çikhara-dépa-mähätmyaà

skände tatraiva

yadä yadä bhäsayate dépakaù kalasoparitadä tadä muni-çreñöha dravate päpa-saïcayaù

atha-then; çikhara-dépa-mähätmyam-the glory of lighting a lamp on a temple's roof; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; tatra-there; eva-indeed; yadä yadä-whenever; bhäsayate-shines; dépakaù-a lamp; kalasopari-on top of the dome; tadä tadä-then; muni-çreñöha-O best of sages; dravate-flee; päpa-saïcayaù-sins.

The Glories of Lighting a Lamp on a Temple' Roof


"O best of sages, when a lamp placed atop a temple's dome shines in all directions, then a great host of sins quickly flees to escape its light.

Text 131

yo dadäti dvijätibhyo mahém udadhi-mekhalämhareù çikhara-dépasya kaläà närhati ñoòaçém

yaù-who; dadäti-gives; dvijätibhyaù-to the brähmaëas; mahém-the earth; udadhi-mekhaläm-which wears the oceans like a belt; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; çikhara-on the roof; dépasya-a lamp; kaläm-part; na-not; arhati-is equal; ñoòaçém-to one sixteenth.

"A person who gives the entire earth, which wears the oceans like a belt, in charity to the brähmaëas does not earn even one sixteenth of the pious merit earned by one who places a lamp on the roof of Lord Kåñëa's temple.

Text 132

yo dadäti gaväà koöià sa-vatsaà kñéra-samyutamhareù çikhara-dépasya kaläà närhati ñoòaçéà

yaù-who; dadäti-gives; gaväm-of cows; koöim-ten million; sa-vatsam-with cal;ves; kñéra-samyutam-full of milk; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; çikhara-on the roof; dépasya-a lamp; kaläm-part; na-not; arhati-is equal; ñoòaçém-to one sixteenth.

"A person who gives ten million cows, all filled with milk and all the mothers of young calves, in charity to the brähmaëas does not earn even one sixteenth of the pious merit earned by one who places a lamp on the roof of Lord Kåñëa's temple.

Text 133

sarvasva-dänaà kurute vaiñëavänäà mahä-munekeçavopari dépasya kaläà närhati ñoòaçém

sarvasva-dänam-giving great treasure; kurute-does; vaiñëavänäm-of the Vaiñëavas; mahä-mune-O great sage; keçava-of Lord Kåñëa; upari-above; dépasya-a lamp; kaläm-part; na-not; arhati-is equal; ñoòaçém-to one sixteenth.

"O great sage, a person who gives great wealth in charity to the Vaiñëavas does not earn even one sixteenth of the

pious merit earned by one who places a lamp on the roof of Lord Kåñëa's temple.

Text 134

kià ca

yaù karoti paraà dépaà mülyenäpi mahä-muneçikharopari madhye ca kulänäà tärayec chatam

kià ca-furthermore; yaù-one who; karoti-does; param-a great; dépam-lamp; mülyena-with a price; api-even; mahä-mune-O great sage; çikharopari-on a temple's roof; madhye-ihn the middle; ca-and; kulänäm-of family; tärayet-delivers; çatam-a hundred.

"O great sage, a person who places a great and costly lamp on a temple roof delivers a hundred generations of his family.

Text 135

vimänaà jyotiñä déptaà ye nirékñyanti kärttikekeçavasya mahä-bhaktyä kule teñäà na näraké

vimänam-a palatial temple; jyotiñä-with a lamp; déptam-shining; ye-who; nirékñyanti-gaze; kärttike-in Kärttika; keçavasya-of Lord Keçava; mahä-with great; bhaktyä-devotion; kule-in the family; teñäm-of them; na-not; näraké-a resident of hell.

"They who with great devotion gaze at a palatial temple lit with a splendid lamp have not a single relative that lives in hell.

Text 136

divi devä nirékñyante viñëu-dépa-pradaà naramkadä bhaviñyaty asmäkaà saìgamaù puëya-karmaëä

divi-in the higher planets; devä-the demigods; nirékñyante-are seen; viñëu-dépa-pradam-offering lamps to Lord Viñëu; naram-a human; kadä-when?; bhaviñyati-will be; asmäkam-of all; saìgamaù-the company; puëya-karmaëä-by pious deeds.

"When they see a human being offering a lamp to Lord Viñëu, the demigods in Devaloka think: When, by performing that single pious deed, will this person join us here?

Text 137

kärttike kärttikéà yävat präsädopari dépakamyo dadäti muni-çreñöha tasyendratvaà na durlabham

kärttike-in Kärttika; kärttikém-in Kärttika; yävat-when; präsäda-a temple; upari-above; dépakam-a lamp; yaù-who; dadäti-places; muni-çreñöha-O best of sages; tasya-of him; indratvam-the post of Indra; na-not; durlabham-difficult to attain.

"O best of sages, a person who places a lamp on a temple roof during the month of Kärttika does not find it difficult to attain the post of Indra.

Text 138

atha tatra dépa-mälä-mähätmyaà

skände tatraiva

dépa-paìkteç ca racanäà sa-bähyäbhyantare hareùviñëor vimäne kurute sa naraù çaìkha-cakra-dhåk

atha-now; tatra-there; dépa-mälä-mähätmyam-the glory of a row of lamps; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; tatra-there; eva-indeed; dépa-paìkteù-of a row of lamps; ca-and; racanäm-creation; sa-bähya-outside; abhyantare-and inside; hareù-of Lord Hari; viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; vimäne-on a palatial temple; kurute-does; saù-He; naraù-a person; çaìkha-cakra-dhåk-holding a conch and cakra.

The Glories of Offering Many Lamps During the Month of Kärttika


"A person who lights many lamps inside and outside Lord Viñëu's temple becomes a liberated soul. Holding a disc and conch, he attains a spiritual form like Lord Viñëu's.

Text 139

dépa-paìkteç ca racanäà kurute keçavälayetasyänvaye prasütänäà lakñäëäà narakaà na hi

dépa-paìkteù-of many lamps; ca-and; racanäm-creation; kurute-does; keçavälaye-in Lord Kåñëa;'s temple; tasya-of him; anvaye-in the family; prasütänäm-born; lakñäëäm-of hundred thousand; narakam-hell; na-not; hi-indeed.

"When a person lights many lamps in Lord Keçava's temple, not a single of his hundred thousand closest relatives lives in hell.

Text 140

viñëor vimänaà dépäòhyaà sa-bähyäbhyantare munedépodyata-kare märge tena präptaà paraà padam

viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; vimänam-the temple; dépäòhyam-opulent with lamps; sa-bähyäbhyantare-within and without; mune-O sage; dépodyata-kare-with shining lamps; märge-on the path; tena-by him; präptam-attained; param-the supreme; padam-abode.

"O sage, a person who makes Lord Viñëu's temple splendid with many lights inside and outside, travels to the supreme abode on the path shining with light."

Texts 141 and 142

bhaviñye ca

yaù kuryät kärttike mäsi çobhanaà dépa-mälikämprabodhe caiva dvädaçyäà ekädaçyäà viçeñataù

süryäyuta-prakäças tu tejasä bhäsayan diçaùtejo-räçi-vimäna-stho jagad uddyotayaàs tviñä

bhaviñye-in the Bahviñya Puräëa; ca-and; yaù-who; kuryät-does; kärttike-in Kärttika; mäsi-month; çobhanam-beauty; dépa-mälikäm-a garland of lamps; prabodhe-lighting; ca-and; eva-indeed; dvädaçyäm-on dvadasi; ekädaçyäm-on ekädaçé; viçeñataù-specifically; sürya-suns; ayuta-tne thousand; prakäçaù-shining; tu-indeed; tejasä-with light; bhäsayan-illuminating; diçaù-the directions; tejo-räçi-vimäna-sthaù-on an airplane filled with light; jagat-the universe; uddyotayaàù-illuminates; tviñä-with light.


"A person who makes the Lord's temple splendid with many lamps during the month of Kärttika, and especially during the ekädaçé or the dvädaçé of that month, becomes glorious like ten thousand suns. Traveling in a splendid airplane that fills the universe with light, he leaves this world of birth and death.

Text 143

yävat pradépa-saìkhyä tu ghåtenäpürya bodhitätävad varña-sahasräëi viñëuloke mahéyate

yävat-as; pradépa-saìkhyä-with a number of lamps; tu-indeed; ghåtenäpürya-filled with ghee; bodhitä-lighted; tävat-so; varña-sahasräëi-for a thousand years; viñëuloke-in Viñëuloka; mahéyate-is glorified.

"For each lamp that he lit on the earth he is glorified on Viñëuloka for a thousand years.

Text 144

pädme tatraiva

uccaiù pradépam äkäçe yo dadyät kärttike naraùsarvaà kulaà samuddhåtya viñëulokam aväpnuyät

pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; tatra-there; eva-indeed; uccaiù-greatly; pradépam-lamp; äkäçe-in the sky; yaù-who; dadyät--places; kärttike-in Kärttika; naraù-a person; sarvam-all; kulam-family; samuddhåtya-delivering; viñëulokam-to Viñëuloka; aväpnuyät-attains.


"A person who places a great lamp high in the sky during the month of Kärttika takes all his relatives with him to Viñëuloka.

Text 145

viñëu-keçavam uddiçya dépaà dadyät tu kärttikeäkäça-sthaà jala-sthaà ca çåëutäsyäpi yat phalam

viñëu-keçavam-Lord Kåñëa; uddiçya-in relation to; dépam-lamp; dadyät-gives; tu-indeed; kärttike-in Kärttika; äkäça-stham-in the sky; jala-stham-in the water; ca-and; çåëuta-please hear; asya-of that; api-also; yat-what; phalam-result.

"Please hear the result obtained by a person who offers a lamp to Lord Kåñëa in the sky or over the water during the month of Kärttika.

Text 146

dhanaà dhanyaà samåddhiç ca putravän éçvaro gåhelocane ca çubhe tasya vidvän api ca jäyate

dhanam-wealth; dhanyam-good fortune; samåddhiù-prosperity; ca-and; putravän-good children; éçvaraù-controller; gåhe-in the home; locane-in the eye; ca-and; çubhe-beautiful; tasya-of him; vidvän-learned; api-also; ca-and; jäyate-is born.

"He becomes wealthy, fortunate, and prosperous. He becomes a controller of others. He has good children. Everything before his eyes and in his home is beautiful. He becomes wise and learned."

Text 147

kià ca

vipra-veçmani yo dadyät kärttike mäsi dépakamagniñöoma-phalaà tasya pravadanti manéñiëaù

kià ca-furthermore; vipra-veçmani-in a brähmaëa's home; yaù-who; dadyät-offers; kärttike-in Kärttika; mäsi-month; dépakam-lamp; agniñöoma-phalam-the result of an agniñöoma-yajna; tasya-of him; pravadanti-say; manéñiëaù-the wise.

It is further said:

"The wise say that a person who offers a lamp in a brähmaëa's home during the month of Kärttika attains the result of offering an agniñöoma-yajïa.

Text 148

catuñpaöheñu rathyäsu brähmaëävasatheñu cavåkña-müleñu goñöheñu käntare gahaneñu ca dépa-dänäd dhi sarvatra mahä-phalam aväpnuyät

catuñpaöheñu-at a crossway; rathyäsu-on royal roads; brähmaëävasatheñu-in brähmaëas' homes; ca-and; våkña-müleñu-at the roots of trees; goñöheñu-in cow barns; käntäre-in a great forest; gahaneñu-in hidden places; ca-and; dépa-dänät-by offering lamps; hi-indeed; sarvatra-everywhere; mahä-phalam-a greta result; aväpnuyät-attains.

"A person who places lamps on the royal roads, on crossroads, in brähmaëas' homes, at tree roots, in cow barns, in forests, in hidden places, and everywhere, attains a great result.

Text 149

äkäça-dépa-däna-mantraù

tatraiva

dämodaräya nabhasi tuläyäà lolayä sahapradépaà te prayacchämi namo 'nantäya vedhase. iti.

äkäça-in the sky; dépa-light; däna-placing; mantraù-mantra; tatra-there; eva-indeed; dämodaräya-to Lord Dämodara; nabhasi-in the sky; tuläyäm-during Kärttika; lolayä-the goddess of fortune; saha-with; pradépam-lamp; te-they; prayacchämi-offer; namaù-obeisances; anantäya-to the unlimited; vedhase-to the creator; iti-thus.

A Mantra For Offering a Lamp in the Sky

In the scriptures it is said:

"Reciting the mantra `namo 'nantäya vedhase' (Obeisances to the unlimited, to the Supreme Creator), the devotees offer a lamp to Lord Dämodara and the goddess of fortune in the sky.

Text 150

atha deça-viçeñe kärttika-mähätmya-viçeñah

pädme tatraiva

yatra kuträpi deçe yaù kärttika-snäna-dänataùagnihotra-sama-phalaù püjäyäà ca viçeñataù

atha-now; deça-places; viçeñe-in specific; kärttika-mähätmya-viçeñah-the glories of Kärttika; pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; tatra-there; eva-indeed; yatra kutra-wherever; api-even; deçe-in the country; yaù-one who; kärttika-in Kärttika; snäna-bathing; dänataù-and giving charity; agnihotra-sama-equal to an agnihotra-yajna; phalaù-the result; püjäyäm-in worship; ca-and; viçeñataù-specifically.

The Glories of Observing the Kärttika Vow in Certain Specific Places


"Wherever one may be, by bathing, giving charity, or especially by worshiping the Lord during the month of Kärttika one attains the result of performing an agnihotra-yajïa.

Text 151

kurukñetre koöi-guëo gaìgäyäà cäpi tat-samaùtato 'dhikaù puñkare syäd dvärakäyäà ca bhärgava kåñëa-sälokya-do mäsaù püjä-snänaiç ca kärttikaù

kurukñetre-in Kuruksetra; koöi-guëaù-tne million times; gaìgäyäm-by the gaìgä; ca-and; api-also; tat-samaù-equal to that; tataù-than that; adhikaù-more; puñkare-at Puskara; syät-is; dvärakäyäm-in Dvärakä; ca-and; bhärgava-O descendent of Bhågu; kåñëa-sälokya-daù-giving residence on Lord Kåñëa's planet; mäsaù-month; püjä-worship; snänaiù-bathing; ca-and; kärttikaù-in Kärttika.

"Observing the vow of Kärttika brings a result ten million times greater when performed at Kurukñetra or by the Gaìgä's shore. The result is even greater at Puñkara-tértha. Bathing and worship at Dvärakä during the month of Kärttika carries one to the abode of Lord Kåñëa.

Text 152

anyäù puryas tat-samänä munayo mathuräà vinädämodaratvaà hi hares tatraiväséd yataù kila

anyäù-other; puryaù-cities; tat-samänä-equal to them; munayaù-sages; mathuräm-Mathurä; vinä-except for; dämodaratvam-the nature of Dämodara; hi-indeed; hareù-of Lord Hari; tatra-there; eva-indeed; äsét-was; yataù-because; kila-indeed.

"O sages, other holy cities bring similar results. The district of Mathurä, however, is different, because Lord Kåñëa revealed His Dämodara pastimes in the district of Mathurä.

Text 153

mathuräyäà tataç corje vaikuëöha-préti-vardhanaùkärttike mathuräyäà vai paramävadhir iñyate

mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; tataù-therefore; ca-and; ürje-in Kärttika; vaikuëöha-préti-vardhanaù-increased love for Lord Kåñëa; kärttike-in Kärttika; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; vai-indeed; parama-greatly; avadhiù-the greatest; iñyate-is attained.

"Observing the vow of Kärttika in Mathurä brings love for Lord Kåñëa. In this way the best result is obtained in Mathurä.

Text 154

yathä mäghe prayägaù syäd vaiçäkhe jähnavé yathäkärttike mathurä sevyä tatotkarñaù paro na hi

yathä-as; mäghe-in the month of Magha; prayägaù-Prayaga; syät-is; vaiçäkhe-in Vaiskha; jähnavé-the Gaìgä; yathä-as; kärttike-in Kärttika; mathurä-Mathurä; sevyä-to be served; tatotkarñaù-superiority; paraù-great; na-not; hi-indeed.

"As Prayäga should be served in the month of Mägha (January-February), and as the Gaìgä should be served in the month of Vaiçäkha (April-May), so Mathurä should be served in the month of Kärttika. Nothing is better than service to Mathurä in Kärttika.

Text 155

mathuräyäà narair ürje snätvä dämodaro 'rcitaùkåñëa-rüpä hi te jïeyä

nätra käryä vicäraëä

mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; naraiù-by people; ürje-in Kärttika; snätvä-bathing; dämodaraù-Dämodara; arcitaù-worshiped; kåñëa-rüpä-the form of Lord Kåñëa; hi-indeed; te-they; jïeyä-should be known; na-not; atra-here; käryä-to be done; vicäraëä-doubt.

"They who bathe and then worship Lord Dämodara in Mathurä during the month of Kärttika attain spiritual forms like Lord Kåñëa's. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 156

durlabhaù kärttiko vipra mathuräyäà nåëäm ihayaträrcitaù svakaà rüpaà bhaktebhyaù samprayacchati

durlabhaù-rare; kärttikaù-Kärttika; vipra-O brähmaëa; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; nåëäm-of the people; iha-here; yatra-where; arcitaù-worshiped; svakam-own; rüpam-form; bhaktebhyaù-to the devotees; samprayacchati-gives.

"O brähmaëa, it is rare that one is allowed to spend the month of Kärttika in Mathurä. To they who worship Him in Mathurä during Kärttika, Lord Kåñëa reveals His own transcendental form.

Text 157

bhuktià muktià harir dadyäd arcito 'nyatra sevinämbhaktià ca na dadäty eña yato vaçya-karé hariù

bhuktim-happiness; muktim-;liberation; hariù-Lord Kåñëa; dadyät-gives; arcitaù-worshiped; anyatra-another place; sevinäm-of the servants; bhaktim-devotional service; ca-and; na-not; dadäti-gives; eña-He; yataù-because; vaçya-karé-brought under control; hariù-Lord Kåñëa.

"To the devotees who worship Him in other places, Lord Kåñëa gives happiness and liberation, but He does not give devotional service, for devotional service turns Him into His devotee's servant.

Text 158

sa tv aïjasä harer bhaktir labhyate kärttike naraiùmathuräyäà sakåd api çré-dämodara-püjanät

saù-He; tv-indeed; aïjasä-easily; hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; bhaktiù-dfevotional service; labhyate-is obtained; kärttike-in Kärttika; naraiù-by people; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; sakåt-once; api-even; çré-dämodara-püjanät-by worshiping Lord Dämodara.

"Still, one can very easily attain devotional service by once worshiping Lord Dämodara in Mathurä during Kärttika.

Text 159

mantra-dravya-vihénaà ca vidhi-hénaà ca püjanammanyate kärttike devo mathuräyäà yad-arcanam

mantra-matras; dravya-things; vihénam-without; ca-and; vidhi-hénam-without rules; ca-and; püjanam-worship; manyate-considers; kärttike-in Kärttika; devaù-the Lord; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; yad-arcanam-whose worship.

"Even if it is performed without the proper mantras and offerings and without following the rules and regulations, Lord Kåñëa considers worship of Him in Mathurä during Kärttika to be the most perfect kind of worship.

Text 160

yasya päpasya yujyeta maraëäntä viniñkåtiùtac-chuddhy-artham idaà proktaà präyaçcittaà su-niçcitam kärttike mathuräyäà vai çré-dämodara-püjanam

yasya-of which; päpasya-sin; yujyeta-engaged; maraëäntä-until death; viniñkåtiù-atoned; tac-chuddhy-artham-for purification; idam-this; proktam-said; präyaçcittam-atonement; su-niçcitam-concluded; kärttike-in Kärttika; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; vai-indeed; çré-dämodara-püjanam-worship of Lord Dämodara.

"Worship of Lord Dmodara in Mathurä during the month of Kärttika is the proper atonement for a lifetime of sins.

Text 161

kärttike mathuräyäà vai püjanäd darçanaà dhruvaùçéghraà sampräptavän bälo durlabhaà yoga-tat-paraiù

kärttike-in Kärttika; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; vai-indeed; püjanät-from thew worship; darçanam-seeing; dhruvaù-Dhruva; çéghram-quickly; sampräptavän-attained; bälaù-a child; durlabham-rare; yoga-tat-paraiù-by the great yogis.

"By worshiping the Lord in Mathurä during the month of Kärttika, the child Dhruva was quickly able to see Lord Kåñëa directly, an attainment rare even for the great yogés.

Text 162

sulabhä mathurä bhümau praty-abdaà kärttikas tathätathäpi saàsarantéha narä müòhä bhavämbudhau

sulabhä-easily attained; mathurä-Mathurä; bhümau-on the earth; praty-abdam-every year; kärttikaù-Kärttika; tathä-so; tathäpi-still; saàsaranti-take birth again andagain; iha-here; narä-the people; müòhä-bewildered; bhavämbudhau-in the ocean of birth and death.

"Even though every year there is a Kärttika, and even though it is easy to go to Mathurä, still the bewildered people, miss the opportunity placed before them. That is why they take birth again and again in the ocean of material life.

Text 163

kià yajïaiù kià tapobhiç ca térthair anyaiç ca sevitaiùkärttike mathuräyäà ced arcyate rädhikä-priyaù

kim-what is the use?; yajïaiù-of yajnas; kim-what is the use?; tapobhiù-of uasterities; ca-and; térthaiù-pilgrimages; anyaiù-other; ca-and; sevitaiù-served; kärttike-in Kärttika; mathuräyäm-in mathurä; cet-if; arcyate-worshiped; rädhikä-priyaù-the beloved of Rädhä.

"What is the use of yajïas, austerities, and pilgrimages to a person who has the opportunity to worship Lord Kåñëa, the beloved of Rädhä, in Mathurä during the month of Kärttika?

Text 164

yäni sarväëi térthäni nadä nadyaù saräàsi cakärttike nivasanty atra mäthure sarva-maëòale

yäni-which; sarväëi-all; térthäni-holy places; nadä-streams; nadyaù-rivers; saräàsi-lakes; ca-and; kärttike-in Kärttika; nivasanti-stay; atra-there; mäthure-in Mathurä; sarva-maëòale-in the circle.

"During the month of Kärttika all holy streams, rivers, and lakes reside in the circle of Mathurä.

Text 165

kärttike janma-sadane keçavasya ca ye naräùsakåt praviñöäù çré-kåñëaà te yänti param avyayam

kärttike-in Kärttika; janma-sadane-in the birthplace; keçavasya-of Lord Kåñëa; ca-and; ye-which; naräù-people; sakåt-once; praviñöäù-entered; çré-kåñëam-Çré Kåñëa; te-they; yänti-attain; param-supreme; avyayam-eternal.

"They who once enter Lord Kåñëa's birthplace in Mathurä will enter the spiritual world and meet Lord Kåñëa, the eternal Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Text 166

paropahäsam uddiçya kärttike hari-püjayämathuräyäà labhed bhaktyä kià punaù çraddhayä naraù. iti.

paropahäsam-joking; uddiçya-in relation to; kärttike-in Kärttika; hari-püjäyä-worship of Lord Kåñëa; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; labhet-attain; bhaktyä-with devotion; kim-what?; punaù-again; çraddhayä-with faith; naraù-a person; iti-thus.

"A person who as a joke worships Lord Kåñëa in Mathurä during Kärttika attains the Lord's supreme abode. What, then, can be said of they who worship the Lord with faith and devotion?"

Text 167

itthaà kärttika-kåtyäni vyaktäny eva svato 'bhavantatra kiïcid viçeñena tad-vidhir likhyate 'dhunä

ittham-thus; kärttika-kåtyäni-the duties of Kärttika; vyaktäni-manifested; eva-indeed; svataù-spontaneously; abhavan-became; tatra-there; kiïcit-something; viçeñena-specifically; tad-vidhiù-the way of that; likhyate-is written; adhunä-now.

Thus, in a general way I have written about the duties of Kärttika. Now I will write specifically how these duties should be performed.

Text 168

atha kärttika-kåtya-vidhiù

tatropakrama-kälaù

çré-kåñëa-satyä-samvädéya-kärttika-mähätmye

açvinasya tu mäsasya yä çuklaikädaçé bhavetkärttikasya vratänéha tasyäà kuryäd atandritaù

-time; çré-kåñëa-of Lord Kåñëa; satyä-and Satyabhämä; samvädéya-in a conversation; kärttika-mähätmye-in the glories of Kärttika; açvinasya-of asvina; tu-indeed; mäsasya-the month; yä-which; çuklaikädaçé-çukla-ekädaçé; bhavet-is; kärttikasya-of Kärttika; vratäni-vows; iha-here; tasyäm-in that; kuryät-should do; atandritaù-diligently.

How the Duties of Kärttika Should Be Performed

When Kärttika Begins

In the Kärttika-mähätmya, Lord Kåñëa tells Satyabhämä:

"One should diligently follow the vow of Kärttika, which begins on the çukla-ekädaçé of the month of Açvina.

Text 169

nityaà jägaraëäyäntye yäme rätreù samutthitaùçucir bhütvä prabodhyätha stotrair néräjayet prabhum

nityam-regularly; jägaraëäya-for waking; äntye-in the last; yäme-portion; rätreù-of the night; samutthitaù-risen; çuciù-pure; bhütvä-becoming; prabodhya-waking; atha-then; stotraiù-with prayers; néräjayet-should offer arati; prabhum-to the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

"In this vow one should rise at the end of night, waken the Deity with prayers, and then offer ärati.

Text 170

niçamya vaiñëavän dharmän vaiñëavaiù saha harñitaùkåtvä gétädikaà prätar devaà néräjayet prabhum

niçamya-hearing; vaiñëavän-of Lord Viñëu; dharmän-the religion; vaiñëavaiù-the Vaiñëavas; saha-with; harñitaù-happy; kåtvä-doing; gétädikam-beginning with songs; prätaù-early in the morning; devam-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; néräjayet-should offer arati; prabhum-to the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

"In the company of the Vaiñëavas in the morning one should happily hear about the religion of devotional service to Lord Viñëu, sing songs glorifying Lord Viñëu, and offer ärati to Lord Viñëu.

Text 171

nady-ädau ca tato gatvä- camya saìkalpam äcaretprabhuà prärthyätha tasmai ca dadyäd arghyaà yathä-vidhi

nady-ädau-beginning with rivers; ca-and; tataù-then; gatvä-going; äcamya-sipping; saìkalpam-desire; äcaret-should do; prabhum-to the Lord; prärthya-praying; atha-then; tasmai-to Him; ca-and; dadyät-should offer; arghyam-arghya; yathä-vidhi-according to the rules.

"Then one should go to a river or other source of water, perform äcamana, recite the saìkalpa mantra, recite the prärthanä mantra, and then properly offer arghya to the Lord.

Text 172

tatra saìkalpa-mantraù

kärttike 'haà kariñyämi prätaù snänaà janärdanapréty-arthaà tava deveça dämodara mayä saha

tatra-there; saìkalpa-mantraù-the saìkalpa-mantra; kärttike-in Kärttika; aham-I; kariñyämi-will do; prätaù-in the morning; snänam-bath; janärdana-O Lord Kåñëa; préty-artham-for the satisfaction; tava-of You; deveça-O master of the demigods; dämodara-O Dämodara; mayä-the goddess of fortune; saha-with.

The Saìkalpa mantra

"O Lord Dämodara, O Lord who rescues the devotees from sufferings, O master of the demigods, to please You and Goddess Rädhä, I shall bathe every morning during the month of Kärttika."

Text 173

atha prärthanä-mantraù

tava dhyänena deveça jale 'smin snätum udyataùtvat-prasädäc ce me päpaà dämodara vinaçyatu

atha-then; prärthanä-mantraù-the prarthana mantra; tava-of You; dhyänena-by meditation; deveça-O master of the demigods; jale-in water; asmin-in this; snätum-to bathe; udyataù-about; tvat-prasädät-by Your mercy; ca-and; me-of me; päpam-the sin; dämodara-O Lord Dämodara; vinaçyatu.-will be destroyed.

The Prärthanä mantra

"O master of the demigods, rapt in meditation on You, I am about to take my bath. O Lord Dämodara, by Your grace may all my sins be destroyed."

Text 174

atha arghya-mantraù

vratinaù kärttike mäsi

snätasya vidhivan mamadämodara gåhäëärghyaà danujendra-nisüdana

atha-now; arghya-mantraù-arghya mantra; vratinaù-following the vow; kärttike-in Kärttika; mäsi-month; snätasya-bathing; vidhivat-properly; mama-of me; dämodara-O Lord Dämodara; gåhäëa-please accept; ärghyam-arghya; danujendra-nisüdana-O killer of the great demons.

The Arghya mantra

"O Lord Dämodara, O killer of the kings of the demons, please accept this arghya that I, who have bathed and who follow this vow, properly offer to You.

Text 175

nitye naimittike kåtsne kärttike päpa-çoñaëegåhäëärghyaà mayä dattaà rädhayä sahito hare

nitye-regular; naimittike-occasional; kåtsne-all; kärttike-in Kärttika; päpa-çoñaëe-drying up sins; gåhäëa-please accept; arghyam-arghya; mayä-by me; dattam-offered; rädhayä-Rädhä; sahitaù-with; hare-O Kåñëa.

"O Lord Kåñëa accompanied by Goddess Rädhä, please accept this arghya I offer to You. May the regular and occasional duties I perform during this month of Kärttika dry up all my sins."

Text 176

tilair älipya dehaà svaà nämoccäraëa-pürvakamsnätvä sa-vidhinä sandhyäà upäsya gåham ävrajet

tilaiù-with oil; älipya-anointing; deham-body; svam-own; nämoccäraëa-pürvakam-calling out the holy name; snätvä-bathing; sa-vidhinä-properly; sandhyäm-gayatri; upäsya-worshiping; gåham-home; ävrajet-should go.

Then one should anoint his body with oil, chant the Lord's holy names, bathe, properly chant the gäyatré mantra, and then return home.

Text 177

upalipyätha devägre nirmäya svastikaà prabhumtulasé-mälaté-padmä- gastya-puñpädinärcayet

upalipya-anointing; atha-then; deva-of the Lord; agre-in the presence; nirmäya-doing; svastikam-svastika; prabhum-the Lord; tulasé-with Tulasé; mälaté-padmä-gastya-puñpädinä-with mälaté, lotus, agastya, and others; puñpa-flowers; ädinä-beginning; arcayet-should worship.

Then, after anointing and making a svastika, one should worship the Deity with Tulasé and with mälaté, lotus, agastya, and other flowers.

Text 178

nityaà vaiñëava-saìgatyä seveta bhagavat-kathämsarpiñähar-niçäà dépaà tila-tailena cärcayet

nityam-regularly; vaiñëava-saìgatyä-in the company of the Vaiñëavas; seveta-one should serve; bhagavat-kathäm-the message of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; sarpiñä-with ghee; ahar-niçäm-day and night; dépam-lamp; tila-tailena-with sesame oil; ca-and; arcayet-should worship.

In the company of the Vaiñëavas one should regularly serve the words glorifying the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Day and night a lamp of ghee or sesame oil should be used to worship the Lord.

Text 179

viçeñataç ca naivedyäny arpayed arcayet tathäpraëamaàç ca yathä-çaktyä eka-bhaktädika-vratam

viçeñataù-specifically; ca-and; naivedyäni-offerings of food; arpayet-should place; arcayet-should worship; tathä-then; praëaman-bowing down; ca-and; yathä-çaktyä-as far as one is able; eka-bhaktädika-vratam-with a vow of being devoted to the Supreme Personality of Godhead alone.

One should place offerings of food before the Lord, worship the Lord, and bow down before Him. In this way as far as one is able one should follow this vow of being devoted to the Lord alone.

Text 180

tathä ca pädme tatraiva

prätar utthäya çaucädi kåtvä gatvä jaläçayekåtvä ca vidhivat snänaà tato dämodarärcanam

tathä-so; ca-and; pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; tatra-there; eva-indeed; prätaù-in the m,orning; utthäya-rising; çauca-cleanliness; ädi-beginning with; kåtvä-doing; gatvä-going; jaläçaye-in a body of water; kåtvä-doing; ca-and; vidhivat-according to the rules; snänam-bath; tataù-then; dämodarärcanam-the worship of Lord Dämodara.


"Early in the morning one should rise, go to a body of water, properly bathe, and then worship Lord Dämodara.

Text 181

kià ca

maunena bhojanaà käryaà kärttike vrata-dhäriëäghåtena dépa-dänaà syät tila-tailena vä punaù

kià ca-furthermore; maunena-in silence; bhojanam-eating; käryam-should be done; kärttike-in Kärttika; vrata-dhäriëä-following the vow; ghåtena-with ghee; dépa-dänam-offering a lamp; syät-should be; tila-sesamum; tailena-with oil; vä-or; punaù-again.

It is further said:

"One who follows the Kärttika vow should take his meals in silence. He should offer a lamp of ghee or sesame oil.

Text 182

dinaà ca kåñëa-kathayä vaiñëavänäà ca saìgamaiùnéyatäà kärttike mäsi saìkalpa-vrata-pälanam

dinam-the day; ca-and; kåñëa-kathayä-with talks of Lord Kåñëa; vaiñëavänäm-of the Vaiñëavas; ca-and; saìgamaiù-with association; néyatäm-should be passed; kärttike mäsi-in Kärttika month; saìkalpa-vrata-pälanam-to keep the vow he made with the saìkalpa mantra.

"To keep the vow he made with the saìkalpa mantra he should pass his days talking of Lord Kåñëa in the company of the devotees.

Texts 183 and 184

äçvine çukla-pakñasya prärambhe hari-väsareathavä paurëamäsétaù saìkrantau vä tulägame

dépa-dänam akhaëòaà ca dadyäd vai viñëu-sannidhaudevälaye tulasyäà vä äkäçe vä tad uttamam

äçvine-of Asvina; çukla-pakñasya-on the bright fortnight; prärambhe-beginning; hari-väsare-on ekädaçé; athavä-or; paurëamäsétaù-from the full moon; saìkrantau-on sankranti; vä-or; tulägame-on Tulagama; dépa-lamp; dänam-offering; akhaëòam-unbroken; ca-and; dadyät-should offer; vai-indeed; viñëu-sannidhau-to Lord Viñëu; devälaye-in the temple; tulasyäm-to Tulasé; vä-or; äkäçe-to the sky; vä-or; tat-that; uttamam-then.

"Beginning in the month of Açvina, either on the çukla-ekädaçé, or on the full moon day, or on the tula-saìkranti day, he should offer a lamp to Lord Viñëu in the temple, or he should offer the lamp to Tulasé-devé, or to the sky."

Text 185

kià ca

rajataà kanakaà dépän mani-muktäphalädikamdämodarasya préty-arthaà pradadyät kärttike naraù

kià ca-furthermore; rajatam-silver; kanakam-gold; dépän-lamps; maëi-jewels; muktäphala-pearls; ädikam-beginning; dämodarasya-of Lord Dämodara; préty-artham-for the pleasure; pradadyät-should give; kärttike-in Kärttika; naraù-a person.

It is further said:

"During the month of Kärttika a person should offer silver, gold, lamps, jewels, pearls, and other valuables to please Lord Dämodara."

Text 186

skände ca çré-rukmäìgada-mohiné-samväde

na gåhe kärttike kuryäd viçeñena tu kärttikamtérthe tu kärttikéà kuryät sarva-yatnena bhävini. iti.

skände ca çré-rukmäìgada-mohiné-samväde-in the Skanda Puräëa, in a conversation of Çré Mohiné and Çré Rukmäìgada; na-not; gåhe-in the home; kärttike-during Kärttika; kuryät-should do; viçeñena-specifically; tu-indeed; kärttikam-Kärttika; térthe-in a holy place; tu-indeed; kärttikém-the vow of Kärttika; kuryät-should do; sarva-all; yatnena-with endeavor; bhävini-O goddess; iti-thus.

In the Skanda Puräëa, Çré Rukmäìgada tells Çré Mohiné: "O goddess, one should not follow the Kärttika vow at home. One should go to a holy place and follow it there very carefully."

Text 187

atha kärttike varjyäni

tatraiva brahma-närada-samväde

kärttike tu viçeñena räja-mäñäàç ca bhakñayanniñpävän muni-çärdüla yävad ähüta-näraké

atha-now; kärttike-in Kärttika; varjyäni-waht should be avoided; tatra-there; eva-indeed; brahma-närada-samväde-in a conversation of Brahmä and Närada; kärttike-in Kärttika; tu-indeed; viçeñena-specifically; räja-mäñän-rajamasa beans; ca-and; bhakñayan-should eat; niñpävän-kidney beans; muni-of sages; çärdüla-O tiger; yävat-as; ähüta-called; näraké-a resident of hell.

What Should Be Avoided During the Month of Kärttika


"O tiger of sages, a person who during the month of Kärttika eats räjamäña beans or kidney beans becomes a resident of hell.

Text 188

kaliìgäni paöoläni våntakaà sandhitäni cana tyajet kärttike mäsi yävad ähüta-näraké

kaliìgäni-kaliìga; paöoläni-paöola; våntakam-eggplant; sandhitäni-pickles; ca-and; na-not; tyajet-abandons; kärttike mäsi-in Kärttika month; yävat-as; ähüta-näraké-is called a resident of hell.

"A person who during the month of Kärttika does not avoid eating kaliìga, paöola, eggplant, and pickles becomes a resident of hell.

Text 189

kärttike mäsi dharmätmä

matsyaà mäàsaà na bhakñayettatraiva yatnatas tyäjyaà çäçakaà çaukaraà tathä

kärttike-in Kärttika; mäsi-month; dharmätmä-a religious person; matsyam-fish; mäàsam-meat; na-not; bhakñayet-eats; tatra-there; eva-indeed; yatnataù-carefully; tyäjyam-ot be avoided; çäçakam-rabbit; çaukaram-pork; tathä-so.

"During the month of Kärttika a religious person will carefully avoid eating fish, rabbit, pork, or any kind of flesh."

Text 190

kià ca

parännaà para-çayyäà ca para-däraà paräìganämsarvadä varjayet präjïo viçeñena tu kärttike

kià ca-furthermore; parännam-sumptuous food; para-çayyäm-comfortable bed; ca-and; para-däram-another's wife; paräìganäm-prostitute; sarvadä-always; varjayet-should avoid; präjïaù-intelligent; viçeñena-specifically; tu-indeed; kärttike-in Kärttika.

It is further said:

"During the month of Kärttika an intelligent person should stay away from sumptuous food, comfortable bed, prostitutes, and other's wives.

Text 191

tailäbhyaìgaà tathä çayyäà parännaà kaàsya-bhojanamkärttike varjayed yas tu paripürëa-vraté bhavet

taila-oil; abhyaìgam-anointing; tathä-so; çayyäm-bed; parännam-suptuous food; kaàsya-bhojanam-eating from a bell-metal plate; kärttike-in Kärttika; varjayet-should avoid; yaù-who; tu-indeed; paripürëa-vraté-completely following the vow; bhavet-should be.

"A person who properly follows the Kärttika vow should avoid being anointed with oil, eating sumptuous food, sleeping in a comfortable bed, and eating from a bell-metal plate.

Text 192

sampräpte kärttike dåñövä parännaà yas tu varjayetdine dine tu kåcchrasya phalaà präpnoti mänavaù

sampräpte-attained; kärttike-Kärttika; dåñövä-seeing; parännam-sumtuous food; yaù-who; tu-indeed; varjayet-avoids; dine-day; dine-after day; tu-indeed; kåcchrasya-of severe austerities; phalam-the result; präpnoti-attains; mänavaù-a person.

"A person who avoids sumptuous food during the month of Kärttika attains every day the benefit of having performed severe austerities."

Text 193

tatraiva çré-rukmäìgada-mohiné-samväde

kärttike varjayet tailaà kärttike varjayen madhu kärttike varjayet kaàsyaà kärttike çukla-sandhitaà

tatra-there; eva-indeed; çré-rukmäìgada-mohiné-samväde-in a conversation of Çré Rukmäìgada and Çré Mohiné; kärttike-in Kärttika; varjayet-should avoid; tailam-oil; kärttike-in Kärttika; varjayen-should avoid; madhu-wine; kärttike-in Kärttika; varjayet-should avoid; kaàsyam-bell-metal; kärttike-in Kärttika; çukla-sandhitam-stale and sour.

Çré Rukmäìgada tells Çré Mohiné:

"During Kärttika one should avoid oil. During Kärttika one should avoid wine. During Kärttika one should avoid bell-metal. During Kärttika one should avoid food that is not fresh.

Text 194

na matsyaà bhakñayen mäàsaà na kaurmaà nänyad eva hicäëòälaù sa bhavet su-bhru kärttike maàsa-bhakñaëät

na-not; matsyam-fish; bhakñayen-should eat; mäàsam-meat; na-not; kaurmam-turtle; na-not; anyat-another; eva-indeed; hi-indeed; cäëòälaù-an outcaste; sa-he; bhavet-becomes; su-bhru-O girl with the beautiful eyebrows; kärttike-in Kärttika; maàsa-bhakñaëät-by eating flesh.

"O girl with the beautiful eyebrows, one should not eat fish, turtle, or any other kind of flesh. By eating meat during the month of Kärttika one becomes an outcaste.

Text 195

atha çré-rädhä-dämodara-püjä-vidhiù

pädme tatraiva

tataù priyatamä viñëo rädhikä gopikäsu cakärttike püjanéyä ca çré-dämodara-sannidhau

atha-now; çré-rädhä-dämodara-püjä-vidhiù-the Way to Worship Çré Çré Rädhä-Dämodara; pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; tatra-there; eva-indeed; tataù-from that; priyatamä-most dear; viñëaù-of Lord Viñëu; rädhikä-Rädhä; gopikäsu-among the gopés; ca-and; kärttike-in Kärttika; püjanéyä-to be worshiped; ca-and; çré-dämodara-sannidhau-near Lord Dämodara.

The Way to Worship Çré Çré Rädhä-Dämodara


"Because She is the gopé most dear to Lord Viñëu, Çré Rädhä should be worshiped along with Lord Dämodara during the month of Kärttika.

Text 196

dvijaà dämodaraà kåtvä tat-patnéà rädhikäà tathäkärttike püjanéyau tau vaso-'laìkära-bhojanaiù

dvijam-a brähmaëa; dämodaram-Lord Dämodara; kåtvä-making; tat-patném-His wife; rädhikäm-Rädhä; tathä-so; kärttike-in Kärttika; püjanéyau-to be worshiped; tau-Them both; vasaù-with garments; alaìkära-ornaments; bhojanaiùand food.

"Dressing Lord Dämodara as a brähmaëa and Çré Rädhä as His wife, one should worship them with nice garments, ornaments, and foods during the month of Kärttika.

Text 197

rädhikä-pratimäà vipraù püjayet kärttike tu yaùtasya tuñyati tat-prétyai çrémän dämodaro hariù. iti.

rädhikä-of Çré Rädhä; pratimäm-the Deity; vipraù-a brähmaëa; püjayet-should worship; kärttike-in Kärttika; tu-indeed; yaù-who; tasya-of him; tuñyati-is pleased; tat-prétyai-for His satisfaction; çrémän-glorious; dämodaraù-Lord Dämodara; hariù.-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; iti-thus.

"O brähmaëas, during the month of Kärttika one should worship the Deity of Çré Rädhä. To please Çré Rädhä, Lord Dämodara, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, will be pleased with that worshiper."

Text 198

dämodaräñöakaà näma stotraà dämodarärcanamnityaà dämodaräkarñi paöhet satyavratoditam

dämodaräñöakam-Dämodaräñöaka; näma-named; stotram-prayer; dämodarärcanam-worship of Lord Dämodara; nityam-always; dämodaräkarñi-attarctive to Lord Dämodara; paöhet-should recite; satyavrata-by King Satyavrata; uditam-spoken.

One should regularly recite the prayer called Dämodaräñöaka, which was spoken by Satyavrata, which attracts Lord Dämodara, and which describes the worship of Lord Dämodara.

Text 199

atha çré-dämodaräñöakam

namäméçvaraà sac-cid-änanda-rüpaà lasat-kuëòalaà gokule bhräjamänamyaçodä-bhiyolükhaläd dhävamänaà parämåñöam atyantato drutya gopyä

atha-now; çré-dämodaräñöakam-çré-dämodaräñöaka; namämi-I offer my respectful obeisances; éçvaram-to the Supreme Personality of Godhead; sac-cid-änanda-rüpam-whose form is eternal and full of knowledge and bliss; lasat-kuëòalam-with glistening earrings; gokule-in Gokula; bhräjamänam-splendidly manifested; yaçodä-by Yaçodä; bhiyä-with fear; ulükhalät-from the wooden mortar; dhävamänam-fleeing; para-greatly; ämåñöam-caught; atyantataù-greatly; drutya-quickly; gopyä-by the gopé.

Çré Dämodaräñöaka

"I offer my humble obeisances to the Supreme Controller, who possesses an eternal form of blissful knowledge, whose

earrings glisten, who manifested Himself in Gokula, who ran from the wooden mortar in fear of Mother Yaçodä but was ultimately caught, . . .


Offering my respectful obeisances to Çré Çré Rädhä-Dämodara, I will now comment on the Dämodaräñöaka. In the beginning of this prayer the author offers his respectful obeisances as with devotion he describes the great treasure that is the form of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, which was manifested in Gokula, and which is glorious with the most excellent handsomeness, pastimes, virtues, and other qualities. What is the Supreme Personality of Godhead like? He is “éçvara", which means "all-powerful", "the master of the universes", or "my master". His form is eternal and full of knowledge and bliss. He is handsome and attractive. The gopés describe His handsomeness in these words (Çrémad-Bhägavatam 10.29.40):

trailokya-saubhagam idaà ca nirékñya rüpaà yad go-dvija-druma-mågäù pulakäny abibhran

"O Kåñëa, even the cows, birds, trees, and deer become stunned in ecstasy when they gaze at Your form, the most handsome in all the three worlds."

Çrémad-Bhägavatam (3.2.12) again explains:

vismäpanaà svasya ca saubhagarddheù paraà padaà bhüñaëa-bhüñänäìgam

"The Lord appeared in this mortal world by His internal potency, yogamäyä. He came in His eternal form, which is just suitable for His pastimes. These pastimes were wonderful for everyone, even for those proud of their own opulence, including the Lord Hismelf as the Lord of Vaikuëöha. Thus His (Çré Kåñëa's) transcendental body is the ornament of all ornaments."*

Lord Kåñëa's alkl-attractuve form was splendidly manifest in Gokyla, where many cows, gopas, and gopés lived. Çrémad-Bhägavatam (10.32.14) explains:

cakäsa gopé-pariñad-gato 'rcitas trailokya-lakñmy-eka-padaà vapur dadhat

"Worshiped by the gopés, Lord Kåñëa's transcendental form, the only home of all glory and handsomeness in the three worlds, was splendidly manifest."

The specific pastime described in this verse of Dämodaräñöaka, where Lord Kåñëa broke the yogurt pot and fled in fear of Mother Yaçodä, is described these words of Çrémad-Bhägavatam (10.9.8-9):

ulükhalaìghrer upari vyavasthitaà markäya kämaà dadataà çici sthitamhaiyaìgavaà caurya-viçaìkitekñaëaà nirékñya paçcät sutam ägamac chanaiù

"Kåñëa, at that time, was sitting on an upside-down wooden mortar for grinding spices and was distributing milk preparations, such as yogurt and butter, to the monkeys as he liked. Because of having stolen He was looking all around with great anxiety, suspecting that He might be chastised by His mother. Mother Yaçodä, upon seeing HIm, very cautiously approached Him from behind.*

täm ätta-yañöià prasamékñya sa-tvaras tato 'varuhyäpasära bhétavatgopy anvadhävan na yam äpa yoginäà

kñamaà praveñöuà tapaseritaà manaù

"When Lord Kåñëa saw His mother, stick in hand, He very quickly got down from the top of the mortar and began to flee as if very much afraid. Although yogés try to capture Him as Paramätmä by meditation, desiring to enter into the effulgence of the Lord with great austerities and penances, they fail to reach Him. But Mother Yaçodä, thinking that same Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa, to be her son, began following Kåñëa to catch Him."*

Then Mother Yaçodä chased Lord Kåñëa and caught Him from behind. Çrémad-Bhägavatam (10.9.10) explains:

avaïcamänä janané båhac-calac- chroëi-bharäkränta-gatiù su-madhyamäjavena visraàsita-keça-bandhana- cyuta-prasünänugatiù parämåçat

"While following Kåñëa, Mother Yaçodä, her thin waist overburdened by her heavy breasts, naturally had to reduce her speed. Because of following Kåñëa very swiftly, her hair became loose, and the flowers in her hair were falling after her. Yet she did not fail to capture her son Kåñëa."*

Text 200

rudantaà muhur netra-yugmaà måjantaà karämbhoja-yugmena sätäìka-netrammuhuù çväsa-kampa-trirekhäìka-kaëöha- sthita-graiva-dämodaraà bhakti-baddham

rudantaàcrying; muhuù-again and again; netra-yugmam-two eyes; måjantam-rubbing; karämbhoja-yugmena-with two lotus hands; sa-with; ätäìka-fear; netram-eyes; muhuù-again and again; çväsa-breathing; kampa-trembling; tri-three; rekhä-lines; aìka-marked; kaëöha-neck; sthita-situated; graiva-necklaces; dämodaram-Lord Kåñëa; bhakti-with devotion; baddham-bound.

. . . who cried and rubbed His frightened eyes again and again with His two lotus hands, whose necklace on His three-lined neck trembled as He breathed again and again, whose waist was surrounded by a rope, and who was finally bound by love.


This pastime is described in the following words (Çrémad-Bhägavatam (10.9.11):

kåtägasaà taà prarudantam akñiëé kañantam aïjan-mañini sva-päëinäudvékñamänaà bhaya-vihvalekñaëaà haste gåhétva bhiñayanty avägurat

"When caught by Mother Yaçodä, Kåñëa became more and more afraid and admitted to being an offender. As she looked upon Him, she saw that He was crying, His tears mixing with the black ointment around His eyes, and as He rubbed His eyes with His hands, He smeared the ointment all over His face. Mother Yaçodä, catching her beautiful son by the hand, mildly began to chastise Him."*

Mother Yaçodä then bound Him with a rope. Çrémad-Bhägavatam (10.9.14) explains:

gopikolülukhe dämnä babandha präkåtaà yathä

"Mother Yaçodä, considering Kåñëa her own ordinary child, bound Him to the wooden mortar with a rope."*

Çrémad-Bhägavatam (10.9.18-21) continues:

sva-mätuù svinna-gätåaya visrasta-kabara-srajaùdåñövä pariçramaà kåñëaù kåpayäsét sva-bandhane

"Because of Mother Yaçodä's hard labor, her whole body became covered with perspiration, and the flowers and comb were falling from her hair. When child Kåñëa saw His mother thus fatigued, He became merciful to her and agreed to be bound.*

evam sandarçitä hy aìga hariëä bhåtya-vaçyatäsva-vaçenäpi kåñëena yasyedaà seçvaraà vaçe

"O Mahäräja Parékñit, this entire universe, with its great exalted demigods like Lord Çiva, Lord Brahmä, and Lord Indra, is under the control of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Yet the Supreme Lord has one transcendental attribute: He comes under the control of His devotees. This was now exhibited by Kåñëa in this pastime.*

nemaà viriïco na bhavo na çrér apy aìga-saàçrayäprasädaà lebhire gopé yat tat präpa vimuktidät

"Neither Lord Brahmä, nor Lord Çiva, nor even the goddess of fortune, who is always the better half of the Supreme Lord, can obtain from the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the deliverer from this material world, such mercy as received by Mother Yaçodä.*

näyaà sukhäpo bhagavän dehinäà gopikä-sutaùjïäninäà cätma-bhütänäà yathä bhaktimatäm iha

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa, the son of Mother Yaçodä, is accessible to devotees engaged in spontaneous loving service, but He is not as easily accessible to mental speculators, to those striving for self-realization by severe austerities and penances, or to those who consider the body the same as the self."*

Text 201

itédåk-sva-léläbhir änanda-kuëòe sva-ghoñaà nimajjantam äkhyäpayantamtadéyeçita-jïeñu bhaktair jitatvaà punaù prematas taà çatävåtti vande

itédåk-like this; sva-own; léläbhiù-with pastimes; änanda-of bliss; kuëòe-in a lake; sva-own; ghoñam-cowherd village; nimajjantam-plunging; äkhyäpayantam-declaring; tadéya-own; éçita-supremacy; jïeñu-among they who know; bhaktaiù-by the devotees; jitatvam-the state of being defeated; punaù-again and again; premataù-out of love; tam-to Him; çata-a hundred; ävåtti-repetitions; vande-I offer my respectful obeisances.

"A hundred times I bow down before Lord Kåñëa, who with pastimes like these plunges His own cowherd village of Vraja in pools of ecstasy, and who declares to they who know Him only as the supreme master and controller: I am

conquered by My loving devotees.


That Lord Kåñëa is controlled by the love of His devotees is described in the following words of Çrémad-Bhägavatam (10.11.7-8):

gopébhiù stobhito 'nåtyad bhagavän bälavat kvacitudgäyati kvacin mugdhas tad-vaço däru-yantravat

"The gopés would say: `If You dance, my dear Kåñëa, then I shall give You half a sweetmeat.' By saying these words or by clapping their hands, all the gopés encouraged Kåñëa in different ways. At such times, although He was the supremely powerful Personality of Godhead, he would smile and dance according to their desire, as if He were a wooden doll in their hands. Sometimes he would sing very loudly, at their bidding. In this way Kåñëa came completely under the control of the gopés.*

bibharti kvacid ajïäptaù péöhakonmäna-pädukambahu-kñepaà ca kurute svänäà ca prétim ävahan

"Sometimes Mother Yaçodä and her gopé friends would tell Kåñëa, `Bring this article' or `Bring that article.' Sometimes they would order Him to bring a wooden plank, wooden shoes, or a wooden measuring pot, and Kåñëa, when thus ordered by the mothers, would try to bring them. Sometimes, however, as if unable to raise these things, He would touch them and stand there. Just to invite the pleasure of his relatives, He would strike His body with His arms to show that He had sufficient strength."*

Çrémad-Bhägavatam (10.11.9) again says:

darçayaàs tad-vidäà loka ätmano bhåtya-vaçyatäm

"To pure devotees throughout the world who could understand His activities, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa, exhibited how much He can be subdued by His devotees, His servants."*

Text 202

varaà deva mokñaà na mokñävadhià vä na cänyaà våëe 'haà vareçäd apéhaidaà te vapur nätha gopäla-bälaà sadä me manasy ävirästäà kim anyaiù

varam-benediction; deva-O Lord; mokñam-liberation; na-not; mokña-liberation; ävadhim-highest limit; vä-or; na-not; ca-and; anyam-another thing; våëe-choose; aham-I; vara-of benedictions; éçät-from the master; api-even; iha-here; idam-this; te-of You; vapuù-the form; nätha-O master; gopäla-bälam-a cowherd boy; sadä-always; me-of me; manasi-in the mind; ävirästäm-may be manifested; kim-what is the use?; anyaiù-of other things.

"O Lord, I do not ask for liberation, something better than liberation, or any other thing. O Lord, all I ask from You, the master of all blessings, is that Your form as a cowherd boy always be manifest in my heart. What need have I for any other blessing?


The thing better that liberation here is residence in Vaikuëöhaloka. Better than impersonal liberation is residence in Vaikuëöhaloka, and better than residence in Vaikuëöhaloka is pure devotional service, which begins with hearing the glories of Lord Kåñëa. That pure devotional service is better than residence in Vaikuëöhaloka is described in the following words (Çrémad-Bhägavatam 3.15.49):

"O Lord, we pray that You let us be born in any hellish condition of life, just as long as our hearts and minds are always engaged in the service of Your lotus feet, our words are made beautiful by speaking of Your activities just as tulasé leaves are beautified when offered unto Your lotus feet, and as long as our ears are always filled with the chanting of Your transcendental qualities."*

Text 203

idaà te mukhämbhojam atyanta-nélair våtaà kuntalaiù sìgdha-raktaiç ca gopyämuhuç cumbitaà bimba-raktädharaà me manasy ävirästäm alaà lakña-läbhaiù

idam-this; te-of You; mukha-face; ambhojam-lotus; atyanta-nélaiù-very dark; våtam-covered; kuntalaiù-with hairs; snigdha-glistening; raktaiù-red; ca-and; gopyä-by the gopé; muhuù-again and again; cumbitam-kissed; bimba-bimba fruit; rakta-red; adharam-lips; me-of me; manasi-in the heart; ävirästäm-may be manifested; alam-what is the need; lakña-of a hundred thousand; läbhaiù-attainments.

"May Your lotus face, decorated with glistening locks of hair and with bimba-fruit lips again and again kissed by the gopé Yaçodä, always be manifest in my heart. What need have I for a hundred thousand other blessings?


Lord Kåñëa's face is like a blossoming lotus flower. It is blissful and the sight of it removes all sufferings.

Text 204

namo deva dämodaränanta viñëo praséda prabho duùkha-jaläbdhi-magnamkåpä-dåñöi-våñöyäti-dénaà batänu- gåhäëeça mäm ajïam edhy akñi-dåçyaù

namaù-obeisances; deva-O Lord; dämodara-O Dämodara; ananta-unlimited; viñëaù-O Viñëu; praséda-please be merciful; prabhaù-O master; duùkha-of torments; jaläbdhi-in an ocean; magnam-drowning; kåpä-of mercy; dåñöi-glance; våñöyä-with a shower; ati-very; dénam-poor; bata-indeed; anugåhäëa-please be kind; éça-O Lord; mäm-to me; ajïam-foolish; edhi-please come; akñi-by the eyes; dåçyaù-visible.

"O unlimited, all-pervading Lord whose belly was bound by a rope, I bow down before You. O master, please be kind to me, who am now drowning in an ocean of sufferings. Please shower Your glance of mercy on me, who am very poor, wretched, and foolish. O master, please come before my eyes.


Here the author says that he is so distressed that he is on the verge of death. He is like a living corpse. He says: “Please be kind to me! Please rescue me! Please restore my life!" Here the word "prabho" (O master) means "O master of great, inconceivable, limitless, wonderful potencies!" This shows that the Lord's potencies cannot be understood by the material senses. The word "éça" (O master) means “O supremely independent one!" This shows that the Lord can do as He likes, and therefore He can bestow His mercy even

on a person who is not really worthy to receive it. The word “viñëo" means "O all-pervading one!" or it also means "O Lord who stays in Våndävana!"

Text 205

kuverätmajau baddha-mürtyaiva yadvat tvayä mocitau bhakti-bhäjau kåtau catathä prema-bhaktià svakäà me prayaccha na mokñe graho me 'sti dämodareha

kuverätmajau-the two sons of Kuvera; baddha-bound; mürtyä-by the form; eva-indeed; yadvat-as; tvayä-by You; mocitau-freed; bhakti-bhäjau-devotees; kåtau-made; ca-and; tathä-so; prema-bhaktim-love and devotion; svakäm-own; me-to me; prayaccha-please give; na-not; mokñe-in liberation; grahaù-acceptance; me-of me; asti-is; dämodara-O Lord Dämodara; iha-here.

"Even though You were tied up, You still freed Kuvera's two sons and made them devoted to You. Please give to me love and devotion as You gave it to them. O Lord Dämodara, I will not accept impersonal liberation.


Here, rejecting impersonal liberation, the author prays for pure devotional service. Even though, as part of His beautiful pastimes, the Lord Himself was tied up by the gopé Yaçodä, He was able to free the sons of Kuvera. Giving them the gift of pure devotional service, He said to them (Çrémad-Bhägavatam 10.10.42):

"O Nalaküvara and Maëigréva, now you may both return home. Since you desire to be always absorbed in My devotional service, your desire to develop love and affection for Me will be fulfilled, and now you will never fall from that platform."*

Text 206

namas te 'stu dhämne sphurad-dépti-dhämne tvadéyodaräyätha viçvasya dhämnenamo rädhikäyai tvadéya-priyäyai namo 'nanta-léläya deväya tubhyam

namaù-obeisances; te-of You; astu-may be; dhämne-to the rope; sphurad-dépti-dhämne-splendid; tvadéya-to You; udaräya-abdomen; atha-then; viçvasya-of the universe; dhämne-the resting place; namaù-obeisances; rädhikäyai-to Çré Rädhä; tvadéya-priyäyai-dear to You; namaù-obeisances; ananta-unlimited; léläya-whose pastimes; deväya-to the Lord; tubhyam-to You.

nces to Your beloved, Çré Rädhä! Obeisances to You, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, whose pastimes have no end!"


Here the word "dhämne" means "the great rope that was tied around Your belly". What was that rope like? It is described here as "the abode of splendor". That means the rope was spiritual in nature. Next the author says, "Obeisances to Your belly!" What is the Lord's belly like? It is the resting place of the universe, where the moving and unmoving beings live. This is so because from it sprouted the lotus flower that is the home of the fourteen worlds. By tying a rope around this belly, Mother Yaçodä showed that she had the entire universe under her control. Actually no one has the power to tie up the Lord in that way, but out of love for His mother, Lord Kåñëa allowed her to tie Him up. Çré Rädhä is the most important of all the gopés. She is most dear to Lord Kåñëa. Lord Kåñëa's transcendental pastimes with Çré Rädhä have no end. Therefore the Lord is described here as having pastimes that have no end.

Text 207

pädme tatraiva

govardhana-girau ramye rädhä-kuëòaà priyaà hareùkärttike bahuläñöamyäà tatra snätvä hareù priyaù naro bhakto bhaved vipräs tad dhi tasya pratoñaëam

pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; tatra-there; eva-indeed; govardhana-girau-on Govardhana Hill; ramye-beautiful; rädhä-kuëòam-Rädhä-kuëòa; priyam-dear; hareù-to Lord Kåñëa; kärttike-in Kärttika; bahuläñöamyäm-on Bahulastami; tatra-there; snätvä-bathing; hareù-to Lord Kåñëa; priyaù-dear; naraù-a person; bhaktaù-devotee; bhavet-may be; vipräù-O brähmaëas; tat-that; hi-indeed; tasya-of Him; pratoñaëam-pleasing.


"O brähmaëas, a person who during the month of Kärttika, on the Bahuläñöamé, day bathes in Rädhä-kuëòa, which is by beautiful Govardhana Hill and which is very dear to Lord Kåñëa, becomes a great devotee. He is very pleasing to Lord Kåñëa.

Text 208

yathä rädhä priyä viñëos tasyäù kuëòaà priyaà tathäsarva-gopéñu saivaikä viñëor atyanta-vallabhä

yathä-just as; rädhä-Çrématé Rädhäräëé; priyä-very dear; viñëoù-to Lord Kåñëa; tasyäù-Her; kuëòam-bathing place; priyam-very dear; tathä-so also; sarva-gopéñu-among all the gopés; sä-She; eva-certainly; ekä-alone; viñëoù-of Lord Kåñëa; atyanta-vallabhä-most dear.

"Just as Rädhä is dear to Lord Kåñëa, so Her bathing place, Rädhä-kuëòa, is dear to Him. She alone is His most beloved of all the gopés."*

Text 209

kià ca tatraiva çré-rädhikopäkhyänänte

våndävanädhipatyaà ca dattaà tasyäù pratuñyatäkåñëenänyatra devé tu rädhä våndävane vane

kià ca-furthermore; tatra-there; eva-indeed; çré-rädhikä-of Çré Rädhä; upäkhyäna-of the story; ante-at the end; våndävana-of V.rndävana; ädhipatyam-rule; ca-and; dattam-given; tasyäù-of Her; pratuñyatä-is pleased; kåñëena-by Lord Kåñëa; anyatra-in another place; devé-goddess; tu-indeed; rädhä-Rädhä; våndävane-in Våndävana; vane-forest.

In the Padma Puräëa, at the end of the story of Çré Rädhä, it is said:

"Pleased with Her, Lord Kåñëa made Rädhä the queen of Våndävana. In other places She is Goddess Lakñmé, but in Våndävana forest She is Çré Rädhä.

Text 210

tat-kuëòe kärttikäñöamyäà snätvä püjyo janärdanaù

subodhanyäà yathä prétis tathä prétis tato bhavet

tat-kuëòe-in her lake; kärttikäñöamyäm-on the Janmäñöamé day of Kärttika; snätvä-bathing; püjyaù-worshiped; janärdanaù-Lord Kåñëa; subodhanyäm-on Utthana ekädaçé; yathä-as; prétiù-p-leased; tathä-so; prétiù-pleased; tataù-then; bhavet-may be.

"When, on Janmäñöamé or Utthäna ekädaçé, a person bathes in Rädhä-kuëòa and then worships Lord Kåñëa, Lord Kåñëa becomes very pleased with him.

Text 211

atha kåñëa-trayodaçé-kåtyaà

pädme ca tatraiva

kärttike kåñëa-pakñe tu trayodaçyäà niçä-mukheyama-dépaà bahir dadyäd apamåtyur vinaçyati

atha-npw; kåñëa-trayodaçé-kåtyam-duties of Kåñëa-trayodaçé; pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; ca-and; tatra-there; eva-indeed; kärttike-in Kärttika; kåñëa-pakñe-on the dark fortnight; tu-indeed; trayodaçyäm-on trayopdasi; niçä-mukhe-in the beginning of the night; yama-dépam-a lamp for Yamaräja; bahiù-outside; dadyät-should place; apamåtyuù-untimely death; vinaçyati-is destroyed.

Duties of Kåñëa-trayodaçé


"When on the Kåñëa-trayodaçé of the month of Kärttika a person places a lamp for Yamaräja outside, then the danger of his untimely death is at once destroyed.

Text 212

atha tatra mantraù

måtyunä päça-daëòäbhyäà kälaù çyämalayä sahatrayodaçyäà dépa-dänät süryajaù priyatäm

atha-now; tatra-there; mantraù-mantra; måtyunä-by death; päça-daëòäbhyäm-with noose and rod; kälaù-time; syämalayäblack; saha-with; trayodaçyäm-on trayodasi; dépa-dänät-by offering a lamp; süryajaù-the son of the sun; priyatäm-is pleased.

The Mantra For That

"With this offering of a lamp on the Kåñëa-trayodaçé day, may Lord Yamaräja, who is the son of the sun-god, who is time personified, who is accompanied by Goddess Durgä, and who carries with him a noose, a rod, and death itself, be pleased with me.

Text 213

atha kåñëa-caturdaçé-kåtyaà

tatraiva

caturdaçyäà dharma-räja- püjä käryä prayatnataùsnänam avaçyakaà käryaà narair naraka-bhérubhiù

atha-now; kåñëa-caturdaçé-kåtyam-the Duties of Kåñëa-caturdaçé; tatra-there; eva-indeed; caturdaçyäm-on caturdasi; dharma-räja-Yamaräja; püjä-worship; käryä-should be done; prayatnataù-carefully; snänam-bath; avaçyakam-should be done; käryam-done; naraiù-by people; naraka-bhérubhiù-who fear hell.

The Duties of Kåñëa-caturdaçé

They are described in the following words:

"They who fear going to hell must bathe and then carefully worship Yamaräja on the Kåñëa-caturdaçé day.

Text 214

aruëodayato 'nyatra riktäyäà snäti yo naraùtasyäbdhika-bhavo dharmo naçyaty eva na saàçayaù

aruëodayataù-from sunrise; anyatra-in another place; riktäyäm-empty; snäti-bathes; yaù-who; naraù-aperson; tasya-of him; abdhika-a year; bhavaù-being; dharmaù-religion; naçyati-perishes; eva-indeed; na-no; saàçayaù-doubt.

"A person who on the caturthé, navamé and caturdaçé waits until after sunrise to bathe loses a year of pious deeds.

Text 215

skände ca tatraiva

kärttike kåñëa-pakñe tu caturdaçyäà vidhüdyateavaçyam eva kartavyaà snänaà naraka-bhérubhiù

skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; ca-and; tatra-there; eva-indeed; kärttike-in Kärttika; kåñëa-pakñe-on the dark fortnight; tu-indeed; caturdaçyäà-on caturdasi; vidhu-moon; udaye-in the rising; avaçyam-inevitably; eva-indeed; kartavyaà-should be done; snänaà-bathing; naraka-bhérubhiù-by they who fear hell.


"They who fear hell should bathe during the moonrise of the Kåñëa-caturdaçé in the month of Kärttika.

Text 216

kià ca pädme tatraiva

tataç ca tarpaëaà käryaà dharmaräjasya nämabhiùjévat-pitä tu kurvéta tarpaëaà yama-bhéñmayoù

kià ca-furthermore; pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; tatra-there; eva-indeed; tataç-from that; ca-and; tarpaëaà-tarpaëa; käryaà-should be done; dharmaräjasya-to Yamaräja; nämabhiù-with names; jévat-pitä-whose father is alive; tu-indeed; kurvéta-should do; tarpaëaà-tarpaëa; yama-bhéñmayoù-to Yama and Bhéñma.


"On the Kåñëa-caturdaçé one should offer tarpaëa and chant the names of Yamaräja. If one's father is stil living, one should offer tarpaëa to Yamaräja and Bhéñma.

Text 217

yajïopavétinä käryaà präcénävétinä tathädevatvaà ca pitåtvaà ca yamasyästi dvi-rüpatä

yajïopavétinä-with a sacred thread; käryaà-should be done; präcéna-avétinä-with the sacred thread worn over the right shoulder; tathä-so; devatvaà-the status of d demigod; ca-and; pitåtvaà-the status of a pitä; ca-and; yamasya-Yamaräja; asti-is; dvi-rüpatä-two forms.

"Wearing the sacred thread over the right shoulder, one should offer tarpaëa to Yamaräja, who has two forms: one as a demigod and the other as a pitä.

Text 218

naktaà yama-caturdaçyäà yaù kuryäc chiva-sannidhauna tat kratu-çatenäpi präpyate puëyam édåçam

naktaà-night; yama-caturdaçyäà-of Yama-caturdaçé; yaù-who; kuryät-should do; çiva-Çiva; sannidhau-in the presence; na-indeed; tat-that; kratu-çatena-with a hundred yajnas; api-also; präpyate-is attainmed; puëyam-piety; édåçam-like that.

"A person who spends the night of this Yama-caturdaçé near the Deity of Lord Çiva attains great piety. Even with a hundred yajïas one cannot attain piety like it.

Text 219

kumäré baöukän püjya tathä çaiva-tapo-dhanänräjasüya-phalaà tena präpyate nätra saàçayaù

kumäré-a young girl; baöukän-brähmaëa boys; püjya-worshiping; tathä-so; çaiva-tapo-dhanän-of austerities for Lord Çiva; räjasüya-phalaà-the result of a rajasuya-yajna; tena-by that; präpyate-is attained; na-not; atra-here; saàçayaù-doubt.

"A young girl who at that time worships brähmaëa boys who perform austerities to please Lord Çiva attains the result of performing a räjasüya-yajïa. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 220

kärttike bhauma-väreëa citrä kåñëä caturdaçétasyäà bhüteñäm abhyarcya gacchec chiva-puraà naraù

kärttike-during the month of Kärttika; bhauma-väreëa-on Tuesday; citrä-wonderful; kåñëa-Kåñëa; caturdaçé-caturdasé;;

tasyäà-on that; bhüteçam-Lord Çiva; abhyarcya-worshiping; gacchet-may go; çiva-puraà-to the abode of Lord Suva; naraù-a person.

"When it falls on a Tuesday the Kåñëa-ekädaçé of the month of Kärttika is especially wonderful. A person who worships Lord Çiva on that day goes to the abode of Lord Çiva.

Text 221

kià ca

amävasyä-caturdaçyoù pradoñe dépa-dänataùyama-märgändhakärebhyo mucyate kärttike naraù

kià ca-furthermore; amävasyä-caturdaçyoù-of amavasya and caturdasi; pradoñe-in the evening; dépa-dänataù-by offering a lamp; yama-märga-on the path of Yamaräja; andhakärebhyaù-from the blindness; mucyate-is liberated; kärttike-in Kärttika; naraù-a person.

It is further said:

"A person who offers a lamp on the evening of the amävasyä and the caturdaçé becomes free from the darkness of the path to Yamaräja."

sanatana goswami hari bhakti vilasa full

Documents